!"

"# $%&$'  ())*
+,*- .))






 
 
  

%&'('"%)&*+'
 
 
    




 
 
  
  

  
  
    
   
 
 
 
 !
     


"   



 



 
   
 

  #  




 
 
# 
 



$



 
 




 



  

Crane Serial Number
The crane serial number is on the Crane Rating Manual
in the lower right interior of the upper operator's cab.
The serial number and a Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) is also stamped on a plate on the front center of
the carrier cab dash. The crane serial number should
always be furnished when ordering parts for the crane,
or when corresponding with the Link‐Belt Distributor or
Factory regarding the crane. The serial number is the
BOOK1326 S2110216JRB Preface
Operator's Manual
only method the Link‐Belt Distributor or Factory has of
ensuring that the correct parts and/or information will
be furnished.
In the event the serial number cannot be found, a num­
ber is stamped on the outside of the right carrier frame
rail to the rear of the right front tires and on the right side
of the upper frame near the swing reduction unit. This
number can then be used to help to identify the crane.
Operator's Manual

WARNING
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT CAN BE DANGEROUS
IF IMPROPERLY OPERATED OR MAINTAINED. THIS
CRANE SHOULD BE OPERATED AND MAINTAINED
ONLY BY TRAINED AND EXPERIENCED PEOPLE WHO
HAVE READ, UNDERSTOOD, AND COMPLY WITH THIS
OPERATOR'S & MAINTENANCE MANUAL.

The productive life of construction equipment depends
largely on the care and consideration given to it. This
especially holds true for hydraulic cranes. This Opera­
tor's & Maintenance Manual was compiled to explain
the procedures and adjustments necessary for proper
operation of this crane.
A study of this Operator's Manual will acquaint the op­
erator and service personnel with the construction of
this crane. It will enable them to identify and remedy
most problems that may occur. Any questions pertain­
ing to the care and upkeep of this crane which are not
covered in this Operator's Manual should be directed
to your Link‐Belt Distributor.
An Operator's Manual is stored in the pocket on the
rear of the seat in both the carrier and upper operator's
cab. The Operator's Manuals should remain in the
cabs and accessible at all times. If either of the Oper­
ator's Manuals becomes lost, damaged, or unread­
able, it must be replaced before operating the
crane.
In addition to this Operator's & Maintenance Manual, a
Parts Manual, Crane Rating Manual, and Safety Manu­
al are supplied with the crane. Read and understand
all safety guidelines before operating the crane. Addi­
tional copies of all manuals are available through your
Link‐Belt Distributor.

CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other
reproductive harm.

Preface
 Operator's Manual
Throughout this Operator's Manual, reference is made to the left, right, front, and rear pertaining to direction and
locations. These reference directions are relative to the operator, sitting in the seat of the carrier or upper operator's
cab with the upper directly over the front of the carrier, unless otherwise stated.

Danger, warning, and caution captions as well as special notes are used throughout this Operator's Manual and on
the crane to emphasize important and critical instructions. Labels, decals, plates, etc. should be periodically in­
spected and cleaned as necessary to maintain good legibility for safe viewing. If any instruction, caution, warning,
or danger labels, decals, or plates become lost, damaged, or unreadable, they must be replaced. Information
contained on such labels, decals, and plates is important and failure to follow the information they contain could
result in an accident. Replacement labels, decals, and plates can be ordered through your Link‐Belt Distributor. For
the purpose of this Operator's Manual, and the labels which are placed on the crane, danger, warning, and caution
captions and notes are defined as follows:

DANGER
An operating procedure, practice, etc. which,
if not correctly followed, will result in serious
personal injury, dismemberment, or loss of
life.

WARNING
An operating procedure, practice, etc. which,
if not correctly followed, may result in per­
sonal injury.

CAUTION
An operating procedure, practice, etc. which,
if not correctly followed, may result in damage
to or destruction of equipment or property.

NOTE
Note: An operating procedure step, condition,
etc. which is essential in order for the process to
be completed properly.

This symbol may appear in this Operator's

Manual or on a label on the crane to alert
personnel that additional instructions are
included in this Operator's Manual.

Preface
Operator's Manual
General Index
A detailed Table Of Contents for each Section of this Operator's Manual is in­
cluded at the beginning of each Section. The following is a description of each
Section:

Section 1 - Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 1-1 Thru 1-324

Section 1 includes the necessary information for safe, productive crane operation. It includes the nomenclature and
operation of all control switches, levers, pedals, and instrumentation of the crane.

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 2-1 Thru 2-60

Section 2 includes the necessary information for proper lubrication and preventive maintenance for daily opera­
tions. It includes the check/change intervals and procedures for maximizing the service life of the crane under nor­
mal working conditions. It also includes lubrication types and specifications approved for use in the crane.

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 3-1 Thru 3-52

Section 3 includes the adjustments which must be made periodically to keep the crane in proper, safe working order.
It includes the procedures and necessary information for adjusting the brakes, mechanical linkages, and hydraulic
pressures on the crane.

Section 4 - Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  Pages 4-1 Thru 4-

Section 4 includes the use and operation of the crane attachments. It includes the necessary information for installa­
tion, erection, storage, and removal of the auxiliary lifting sheave and offset lattice fly.

Section 5 - General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 5-1 Thru 5-38

Section 5 includes general information on the Crane Rating Manual and serial number as well as wire rope specifica­
tions, inspection, replacement, connections, and reeving. General specifications for the crane are also included.

Section 6 - Fundamental Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 6-1 Thru 6-4

Section 6 includes a list of terms which are used to refer to crane functions, assembly, operation, and maintenance.
These terms are defined as to how they are used in this Operator's Manual.

Preface
 Operator's Manual
Table Of Contents
Crane Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

On Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Operating Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Carrier Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

Windshield Washer Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Carrier Cab Electrical Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Carrier Cab Fuse Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Carrier Diagnostic Connectors Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31

Carrier Engine Diagnostic Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31

Carrier Cab Dash Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32

Carrier Cab Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37

Carrier Control Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39

Carrier Control Display Diagnostic Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44

About Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45

Axle Differential Lock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46

To Engage The Differentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46

To Disengage The Differentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46

Carrier Suspension Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47

Travel Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47

Suspension Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48

Changing The Travel Mode Or Setting The Ride Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

Carrier Suspension System Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

Carrier Suspension Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

Carrier Suspension Diagnostic Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

Suspension/Outrigger Diagnostic Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50

Inclination Adjustment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51

Inclination Adjustment Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51

Selective Catalytic Reduction System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56

Section 1 - Operating Instructions i

Operator's Manual
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

DPF Regeneration Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

High Exhaust Temperature Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62

DPF Regeneration Inhibit Switch And Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62

DPF Manual (Parked) Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63

Steering Column And Wheel And Foot Operated Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64

Two Speed Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66

Main Transmission Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66

System Malfunction Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67

System Self‐Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68

System Air Pressure Is Low Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68

Clutch Overload Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68

Clutch Wear Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68

Automatic Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68

Manual Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69

Search Function Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69

Maneuver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70

Transmission Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70

Active Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70

Inactive Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70

Retrieving Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70

Fault Code Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71

Resistance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82

Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82

Transmission Intarder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83

Bremsomat Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83

To Set Bremsomat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84

To Cancel Bremsomat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84

To Change Bremsomat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84

Transmission Intarder Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84

Carrier Engine Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85

Carrier Engine Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85

ii Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
Carrier Engine Brake Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85

Descending A Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85

Slippery Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86

Cruise Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87

To Set The Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87

Resetting The Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87

Suspending And Resuming A Set Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87

Turning The Cruise Control Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87

Steering The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88

Steering Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88

On‐Highway (Primary) Steer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-90

Minimum Turning Circle (All‐Wheel) Steer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91

To Deactivate Minimum Turning Circle (All‐Wheel) Steer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91

Reduced Tailswing Steer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92

To Deactivate Reduced Tailswing Steer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92

Diagonal (Crab) Steer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92

To Deactivate Minimum Turning Circle (All‐Wheel) Steer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92

Manual Steer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93

To Deactivate Manual Steer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93

Steering System Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93

Emergency Rear Axle Wheel Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94

Carrier Battery Disconnect Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-97

Carrier Battery Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-99

ABS Electronic Control Unit (ECU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-99

Carrier Power Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-99

Rear Steer Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-99

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-99

Anti‐lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-100

ABS Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101

ECU Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101

Active Diagnostic Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101

Anti‐lock Brake System (ABS) Diagnostic Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101

Section 1 - Operating Instructions iii

Operator's Manual
Automatic Traction Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101

ATC Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102

ATC Off­Road ABS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102

Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-103

Bass, Treble, Balance, And Fader Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106

Initial Volume Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106

Radio Frequency Area Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106

Beep ON, Beep 2ND Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106

Setting An Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107

Weather Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107

Public Address (PA) Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107

Carrier Cab Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108

Carrier Right Side, Rear, and Trailer Rear View (If Equipped) Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-110

Function Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112

Video Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113

RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115

Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115

Split Screen Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117

NORMAL/MIRROR Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120

UP/DOWN Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121

SCAN Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122

RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-123

Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-123

Upper Operator's Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-124

Upper Diagnostic Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125

Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125

Upper Windshield Washer Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125

RCL Overhead Light Bar (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125

Top Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125

Top Hatch Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125

Top Hatch Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125

Top Hatch Sunscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125

iv Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
Right Side Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-126

Upper Operator's Cab Seat Console Control Switches And Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-128

Upper Crane Control Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-130

Upper Control Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133

Upper Engine Data And Exhaust System Cleaning Control Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134

O/R (Outrigger) Level Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-136

Controller Diagnostic Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-137

Service Info Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-138

Service Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139

More Info - Hydraulic Oil Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-140

Hour Meter Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141

Adjusting Engine Oil, Hydraulic Oil, Service Intervals And Disabling/Enabling Change Reminders . . 1-142

Carrier Engine Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-144

Upper Crane Control Display Brightness Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-146

Upper Engine Exhaust System Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-147

Exhaust System Cleaning Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-147

High Exhaust System Temperature Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-148

Exhaust System Cleaning Inhibit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-148

To Turn The Exhaust System Cleaning Inhibit Switch ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-148

To Turn The Exhaust System Cleaning Inhibit Switch OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-149

Stationary Exhaust System Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-150

Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-152

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-152

Upper Operator's Cab Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-153

Upper Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-153

Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-154

System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-157

Battery Alarm Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-157

Auxiliary Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-157

Preset Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-158

Weather Band Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-158

MP3/WMA Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159

Section 1 - Operating Instructions v

Operator's Manual
Media Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159

ID3 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159

Installing a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159

MP3/WMA Directory Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159

iPod Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160

Accessing iPod Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160

Turning The iPod ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160

iPod Search Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160

Bluetooth® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161

Bluetooth Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161

Pairing A Bluetooth Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161

Answering A Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161

BT Audio (A2DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-162

Care And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-162

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-162

Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-162

Radio Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-163

Winch And Right Swing View Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164

Camera Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-165

Split Screen Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-167

NORMAL/MIRROR Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-170

UP/DOWN Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171

SCAN Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-172

RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-173

Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-173

Main Outrigger Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-174

Outrigger Controls In Upper Operator's Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-174

Carrier Engine Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-174

Axle Lift System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-174

Outrigger Working Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-174

To Extend Outrigger Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-177

To Extend Outrigger Jacks - Raise The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-178

vi Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
All Main Jacks Extend Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-180

Outrigger Auto Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-180

To Retract Outrigger Jacks - Lower The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-181

All Main Jacks Retract Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-181

To Retract Outrigger Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-182

Bumper Outrigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-182

After Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-182

Bumper Outrigger Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-182

Bumper Outrigger Overload Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-182

To Extend Bumper Outrigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-183

To Retract Bumper Outrigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-183

Upper Battery Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-184

Battery Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-184

Manual Controllers Storage Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-184

Power Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-184

Upper Battery Disconnect Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185

Main Upper Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185

Upper Engine Hour Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185

RCL Bypass Keyswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185

Upper Electrical Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-186

Crane Control Module 1 Bypass Keyswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-186

Fuel Heater Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-186

Fuse Blocks, Resistors, And Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-186

Upper Electronic Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-188

Upper Engine Air Intake Heater Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-188

Section 1 - Operating Instructions vii

Operator's Manual
Upper Crane System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189

Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189

Horn Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189

Upper Engine Throttle Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189

Upper Throttle Lock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189

Swing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191

Swing Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191

Swing Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191

Travel Swing Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191

Swing Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-192

360° Swing Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-192

Wire Rope Winch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-193

Warm‐Up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-193

Front Winch Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-193

Rear Winch Control Lever (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-194

Winch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-194

Winch Control Switch(es) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-194

High Speed Hoist Or Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-194

Winch Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-194

Drum Rotation Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-195

First Layer/Third Wrap Indicator (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-195

Boom Hoist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-196

Boom Telescope System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-197

Boom Telescope Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-197

Boom Extend Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-198

Boom Telescope Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-199

Boom Operating And Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-200

Emergency Telescope Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-201

To Manually Retract A Boom Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-202

To Manually Extend A Boom Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-203

Cab Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-205

Fine Metering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-206

viii Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
Emergency Crane Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-207

Operator's Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-210

Crane Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-211

Wind Speed Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-211

Operating In Wind Or Lightning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-212

Boom Angle Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-213

Anti‐Two Block Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-213

Lockout Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-214

Rated Capacity Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-216

System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-216

Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-217

RCL System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-219

RCL System Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-219

System Inoperative Or Malfunctioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-219

System Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-220

Configuration Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-221

To Select Rigging And Travel Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-231

Cancel Audible Alarm And Reset Function Limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-232

Operator Settable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-233

Setting Angle, Length, Height, Radius, And Swing Operator Settable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-235

Operator Defined Area Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-243

Outrigger Position Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-245

Boom Telescope Animation Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-247

Boom Operating Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-249

Normal Operation Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-249

Active System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-251

Active System Faults Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-252

Boom Telescope Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-255

Boom Telescope Diagnostics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-256

Sensor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-258

Function Time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-259

Section 1 - Operating Instructions ix

Operator's Manual
Telematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-259

Transmitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-260

Computer Return And Stored Data Disclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-260

Highlight Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-262

About Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-263

Entering And Exiting The Upper Operator's Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-265

Function Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-266

Movable Left Side Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-266

Before Starting Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-267

Boom Distortion Due To Thermal Effects Of The Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-267

Break‐In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-268

Engine(s) Starting And Shutdown Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-268

To Start The Carrier Engine From The Carrier Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-268

Carrier Engine Shutdown Procedure From The Carrier Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-269

To Start The Upper Engine From The Upper Operator's Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-269

Upper Engine Shutdown Procedure From The Upper Operator's Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-269

To Start The Carrier Engine From The Upper Operator's Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-270

Carrier Engine Shutdown Procedure From The Upper Operator's Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-270

Cold Weather Starting Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-271

Carrier Engine Block Preheater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-271

Carrier Engine Ether Start System (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-272

Changing The Ether Fuel Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-272

Upper Engine Block Preheater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-273

Upper Engine Air Intake Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-274

Jump Starting The Engine(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-275

Hand Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-277

Crane Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-278

During Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-279

Pick And Carry Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-279

Traveling The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-280

Highway Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-280

Job Site Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-281

x Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
Boom Dolly/Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-283

Boom Dolly/Trailer Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-284

Boom Dolly/Trailer Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-288

Boom Dolly/Trailer Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-288

Counterweight Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-289

Allowable Counterweight Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-289

To Remove The Counterweights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-291

To Install The Counterweights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-294

Counterweight Tray Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-297

Boom Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-298

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-298

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-306

Transporting The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-313

Outrigger Removal System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-316

Outrigger Removal & Installation Using The Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-316

Outrigger Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-316

Outrigger Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-317

Outrigger Sensor Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-318

Upper Guard Rails And Walkways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-319

Towing The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-321

Lifting The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-323

Crane Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-324

Short Term Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-324

Long Term Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-324

Section 1 - Operating Instructions xi

Operator's Manual

xii Section 1 - Operating Instructions


1 2
12 11 10 9 8
1. Seven Section Boom 4. Rear Winch
2. Upper Operator's Cab 5. Counterweight
3. Front Winch 6. Rear Outrigger
Figure 1-1
Crane Nomenclature
On Delivery
When a new crane is delivered, follow the instructions
outlined in the latest version of Technical Bulletin Gen­
eral Series #213A. A copy of this Technical Bulletin can
be obtained from a Link‐Belt Distributor.
Operating Safety
Remember SAFETY every day. Someone's LIFE may
depend on it, MAYBE YOUR OWN.
Safe operations of a hydraulic crane requires a well
trained, qualified operator. Crane operation is more in­
volved than it may appear, and operation by a careless
or unqualified person can result in a serious accident.
When a hydraulic crane is maintained and used prop­
erly it can be a safe, highly productive piece of equip­
ment, but if not used properly, it can be dangerous.
Think Safety - You, the operator, are in charge of an
important piece of equipment. It is very important that
you know what it can do. It is also important that you
know what it should not do. No set of instructions can
anticipate all of the situations you may encounter. The
rules given here cover the general usage, and some of
the more common specific cases. If conditions arise
not covered by these rules, contact a Link‐Belt Distrib­
utor. A phone call could save someone's life.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
3 4
7 6 5
7. Turntable Bearing 10. Carrier Cab
8. Front Outrigger 11. Hook Block
9. Counterweight Storage 12. Hook Ball
WARNING
Do not lift, suspend, swing or lower
loads or attachments over anyone.
Do not allow anyone to ride on any
part of load or attachment.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Construction equipment can be dangerous if
improperly operated or maintained. This
crane should be operated and maintained
only by trained and experienced people
who have read, understood, and complied
with the Operator's Manual.
Before leaving operator's position, lower
load to the ground.
Do not use swing brake for swing lock.
When facing over rear some functions
will be reversed relative to operator.
Raise the crane on outriggers, or block the
wheels before working on the crane. Replace
all guards or panels before operating the crane.
With the boom removed from upper, do not
swing over side on tires or on retracted
outriggers.
Do not deface or remove this label from the crane.
Figure 1-2
Read and understand all points covered in this
Operator's Manual before operating the crane.
1-1
Operator's Manual
Diesel exhaust fumes can be
harmful. Start and operate
engine in a well ventilated area.
If it is necessary to operate in an
enclosed area, vent the exhaust
to the outside. Properly
maintain the exhaust system to
its original design.
Figure 1-3
Diesel exhaust fumes can be harmful.
Wrong
Figure 1-4
Do not smoke when fueling, or fuel up near an
open flame.
General Safety Rules
The following is a list of safety rules which should be fol­
lowed during all crane operations.
Operator Awareness
1. Read and understand this Operator's Manual, all
Safety Manuals, and the Crane Rating Manual
and heed them. These manuals contain impor­
tant information.
2. A driver/operator must not eat, read, or otherwise
divert his attention while operating a crane. Re­
member-operating is a full‐time job.
3. Start and operate the engine(s) in a well ventilated
area. Diesel exhaust fumes can be harmful. If it is
necessary to operate an engine in an enclosed
area, vent the exhaust to the outside. Properly
maintain the exhaust system to its original design.
4. Don't smoke when fueling, or fuel up near an open
flame. Keep the nozzle in contact with the filler
neck to prevent static electric sparks. Shutdown
the engine(s) when fueling.
1-2 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Keep clear of
moving parts to
prevent serious
bodily injury.
Figure 1-5
Keep hands and tools clear of moving parts.
5. Use care during all access/egress to/from the crane.
Use the hand rails, hand grips, steps ladders, guard
rails, etc. to prevent slips and falls. Remain in three
point contact (two hands and one foot or two feet
and one hand) with the crane at all times.
6. Keep your shoes clean. Before entering the upper
operator's or lower carrier cab, clean any mud,
gravel, snow, ice, moisture, and grease from your
shoes. Slippery shoes could cause momentary
loss of control of crucial foot operated controls.
7. Keep all walking surfaces (steps, ladders, platforms,
etc.) and non‐skid materials on the crane clean. Non‐
skid materials are placed on the crane to assist opera­
tors and service personnel with safe access/egress to/
from the crane and to/from adjustment and inspection
areas. Do not allow non‐skid materials to become con­
taminated with mud, snow, ice, oil, paint, wax, etc. Any
contamination can cause the non‐skid materials to be­
come slick, reducing their effectiveness for safety while
walking on the crane. If any non‐skid materials be­
come ineffective due to wear, age, or destroyed in any
way, they must be replaced.
8. Keep fingers, feet, and clothing away from
sheaves, drums, and wire rope(s) unless the crane
is shutdown and everyone knows what you are do­
ing. Do not place a hand on wire rope(s) when
climbing on the crane. A sudden movement could
pull them into the drums or sheaves.
9. To prevent movement of the individual boom sec­
tions, shutdown the engine(s) and ensure that the
operator has vacated the upper operator's cab be­
fore putting your hands or tools inside the boom.
Unexpected movement of the boom section could
sever fingers, hands, arms, etc.
10. Operate the crane from the operator's seat only.
Operating the crane from any other position, such as
reaching in a window, constitutes a safety hazard.
11. Watch the load or a signal person at all times. A sus­
pended load must have your undivided attention.

Wrong
A 3 Degree Side Tilt Can Re­
duce Capacities By Over 50%.
Figure 1-6
Level the crane.
12. The operator, supervisor, or person in charge of the
load must observe the following rules:
a. Loads must be well secured before lifting.
Ensure that the rigging can't slip off or pull
away from the load, or get out of position on
the load. Use a three‐point sling if necessary
to keep the load from rolling or turning over.
b. Chains and slings must be of adequate size, in
good condition, and not twisted around each
other.
c. The load must not catch on an obstruction
when lifting or swinging. Ensure the load,
winch wire ropes, or any other parts of the
crane do not snag or strike any obstruction.
d. Do not allow the load to rotate out of control.
Personal injury to ground personnel, load
damage, crane damage, or damage to anti‐
two block system may occur.
e. When hoisting with a single part of line, especial­
ly in long fall applications, the design of wire rope
and hook ball is crucial to minimize the potential
for uncontrolled wire rope and/or load rotation.
Rotation resistant wire rope is recommended for
single part of line applications. See Wire Rope
Capacity Chart in the Crane Rating Manual for
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
Right
Grade Ground Level Or Block
Under Crane. The Load Should
Hang Parallel With The Boom.
the specific types of rotation resistant wire rope
recommended for the crane.
f. Avoid sudden starts and stops. Lift carefully,
swing gently, brake smoothly, lower and set
loads carefully. Jerking the load, swinging and
engaging swing brake roughly, and lowering
the load rapidly and slamming on brakes, will
put shock loadings and possible side loadings
on the boom. Unnecessary abuse labels the
operator as a beginner. Be a professional.
g. Do not wrap the winch wire rope around the
load. Do not use discarded, worn, or dam­
aged wire ropes for slings. They may break
and drop the load.
h. The crane must be level before making a lift.
Use the bubble level, to help determine when
the crane is level. Check its accuracy fre­
quently with a carpenter's level. Remember, a
three degree side tilt can reduce capacities by
50% or more.
i. If working at night, ensure adequate lighting is
provided so the operator and all other workers
can see all movements of the crane, attach­
ment, and load.
1-3
Operator's Manual
Just A Little Bump
Like This………
Wrong
Figure 1-7
Do not let the load hit the boom or fly.
Wrong
Figure 1-8
Do not use the boom to pull sideways.
13. Don't let the load hit the boom or fly. Don't let the
boom or attachment rest on, or hit, a building or
any other object. A dent or other damage could re­
sult, which will weaken the boom or attachment. If
the damage is major, the attachment could col­
lapse. If a lattice or diagonal bracing member on
the fly is broken, cracked, or bent, contact a
Link‐Belt Distributor for repair procedures. If the
boom or fly is struck, or damaged by anything,
1-4 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Can Cause This!
STOP. The loading on a boom or attachment in­
creases as they are lowered, therefore their sus­
pension systems could collapse during lowering.
Use another crane to lower a damaged boom or at­
tachment.
14. Don't pull sideways on the boom or fly, not even a lit­
tle. Lift straight up on every load. Moving trucks, rail
cars, barges, or anything else pulling sideways on
the winch wire rope(s) could buckle the boom or fly.
It could also damage the swing mechanism. Pulling
sideways on a boom or fly can overturn the crane.
15. Do not “two block” (pulling the hook block, hook
ball, or load into the head machinery) as this can
cause winch wire rope and sheave breakage re­
sulting in an accident.
16. After slack winch wire rope operation, ensure the
winch wire rope is properly seated in sheaves and
on drums before continuing to operate. Use a stick
or mallet to set the winch wire rope, not your
hands.
17. Do not lower the load beyond the point where less
than three full wraps of winch wire rope are left on
the drum. This condition could occur when lower­
ing a load beyond ground level. If all the winch wire
rope runs off the drum, the load will jerk which
could break the winch wire rope.
18. Confirm that there is a safety latch on the hook, and
that it works properly. Without a latch, it is possible
for slings or chains to come off the hook, allowing
the load to fall.

Right
Figure 1-9
Crane level, all beams extended equally (all
fully extended, all intermediately extended, or
fully retracted), and tires clear of the ground.
19. Don't alter any part of the crane. Additions to, or
changes in, any part of the equipment can create
loadings for which the crane was not designed.
Such changes may have a major affect on the us­
able capacities and make the entire Crane Rating
Manual invalid. Such changes can cause a major
overload or weaken critical parts and may cause
disastrous failure.
20. Do not exceed the rated capacities of the crane un­
der any circumstances. While a crane may have
more stability when lifting over a corner (as com­
pared to straight over the side), the crane capacity
is not increased. Anytime the load exceeds the
rated capacities listed in the Crane Rating Manual,
the crane is overloaded. Overloads can damage
the crane and such damage could cause failure
and accidents.
21. When operating on outriggers, all beams must be
extended equally; all fully extended, all intermedi­
ately extended, or all fully retracted. All jacks must
be extended so all tires are clear of the ground, and
the crane must be level. Ensure that blocking or
pontoons are set on a firm surface, adequate to
support the blocking, pontoon, crane, and load
without settling, slipping, or collapsing. Blocking
or matting under pontoons must form a smooth,
level surface under the entire pontoon. Do not
block under outrigger beams inside the pontoons
as this reduces stability. Blocking must be under
pontoons only. Remember-there are tremendous
loadings on pontoons and blocking - the weight of
the entire crane plus any load.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
Wrong
Figure 1-10
Watch that carrier cab!
When blocking or matting under pontoons, ensure
that each pontoon is supported fully - no unsup­
ported pontoon area is permissible. Ensure pon­
toons are on a smooth surface. Rough surface,
rocks, etc., under pontoons will cause unequal
loadings, and can puncture them, causing them to
collapse.
Capacities are based on outriggers equally ex­
tended; all fully extended, all intermediately ex­
tended, or all fully retracted. Working on outriggers
that are not equally extended may cause major re­
ductions in capacities and crane stability and
could cause an accident. Do not make any lifts
while on outriggers without the outrigger beams
equally extended.
22. Before attempting to move the carrier, confirm
there is enough air pressure to operate the brakes.
Always check the brake operation before traveling
the crane.
23. Brake firmly in one application. Avoid fanning the
brakes. This could exhaust air pressure so fast that
the compressor may not supply enough air.
24. Do not coast downhill with the transmission in neu­
tral. It makes control of the crane more difficult and
dangerous.
25. Shift the transmission to neutral before operating
the crane. Crane operation can cause movement
which can damage the transmission or drive line.
When parking, shift to neutral and engage the park
brake. Block the wheels if not on a level surface.
26. When operating over the front, use care not to hit
the carrier cab or front of the crane with the load or
boom.
1-5
Operator's Manual

Right

1. Use The Lifting Lugs As Lifting Points.

2. Use The Connecting Lugs As Lifting Points.
3. Use The Main Chords As Lifting Points With Nylon Straps.

Figure 1-11
Handling The Fly Section(s).

1-6 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Wrong

1. Do Not Attach Slings To Lattices, They Will Bend.

Figure 1-12
Handling The Fly Section(s).

4 2
5

4
1

1. Head Sheave 4. Connecting Lugs

2. Main Chord 5. Lifting Lugs
3. Lattices
Figure 1-13
Fly Section Nomenclature

27. Use care handling the fly section(s) when loading,
transporting, and unloading. Damage that occurs
during these operations can go undetected and
could result in failure of the attachment, once sub­
jected to loading. Do not attach slings to the lat­
tices, when lifting the fly section(s), as they will
bend. It is recommended that the lifting lugs or
connecting lugs and/or head machinery cross
shaft be used as the lifting points. However, it is
permissible to attach nylon straps around all four
main chords.
28. Block under and between the fly section(s) when load­
ing them on a transport vehicle. When securing the fly
section(s) to a transport vehicle, it is best to use syn­
thetic webs or slings. If using wire rope slings, pad the
fly section(s) to protect them from damage. Do not
overtighten the tie downs or the fly section(s) may be
damaged. Do not use chain ties downs, as they may
dent and damage the fly section(s).

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-7

Operator's Manual
29. Thoroughly inspect all the elements of each fly sec­
tion before installing it on the crane. Check each
main chord, picture frame, diagonal, lattice, con­
necting lug and lifting lug for bends, dents, and
cracked or corroded welds. Picture frames must
be square. Do not use any fly section that is even
slightly damaged. Contact a Link‐Belt Distributor
for the proper repair procedures.
30. Cold weather operation requires some special at­
tention by the operator to allow for changes in eve­
ryday routines:
a. Clean the crane, especially the boom, of accu­
mulated amounts of ice or snow. Operating
the crane with an ice covered boom is danger­
ous. The added weight of the ice or snow can
drastically reduce the capacity of the crane.
Also, falling ice may pose danger for ground
personel.
b. Clean all snow and ice from steps, ladders,
platforms, etc. to eliminate slippery walking
surfaces.
c. If cold weather starting aids are provided on
the crane, use them. The use of aerosol start­
ing sprays can be dangerous if the manufac­
turer's directions are not closely followed.
d. Pay close attention to the gauges in the opera­
tor's cab when starting the engine. Normal
“warm up” times will be longer. Ensure pres­
sures and temperatures are within normal
ranges before beginning operations.
e. Always handle flammable materials according
to the manufacturer's instructions. Propane,
diesel, or other fuel for auxiliary heaters can be
dangerous if not properly handled. Do not
store such fuels on the crane.
f. Use caution when lifting any load during freez­
ing weather, as it may be frozen to the ground
or the supporting surface. The added tension,
to break the load free, could cause an unex­
pected overload situation. Also, when the load
does finally break loose it could create an er­
ratic motion causing damage or injury.
g. In freezing weather, more frequent checks for
water in the air tanks are recommended.
1-8 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
h. At the end of the work shift, park the crane where
it will not freeze to the ground. Major damage to
the drive mechanism could occur while trying to
free the crane from a frozen surface.
Thermal Effects on Hydraulic Cylinders
Hydraulic oil expands and contracts when heated or cooled.
This is a natural occurrence that effects all liquids. The coeffi­
cient of expansion for API Group 1 hydraulic oil is approxim­
ately 0.00043 cubic inches per cubic inch of volume for 1F
of temperature change. Thermal contraction will allow a cyl­
inder to retract as the trapped hydraulic fluid in the cylinder
cools. The change in length of a cylinder is proportional to
the extended length of the cylinder and to the change in tem­
perature of the oil in the cylinder. For example, a cylinder ex­
tended 20 feet and the oil cools down 40F would retract the
cylinder approximately 4 inches (refer to Cylinder Drift Chart.
A cylinder extended 5 feet and the oil cools down 40F
would only retract the cylinder approximately 1 inch. The rate
at which the oil cools depends on many factors and will be
more noticeable with a larger difference in oil temperature
verses the ambient temperature.
Thermal contraction combined with improper lubrication or
improper boom wear pad adjustments may cause a
“stick‐slip” condition in the boom. This condition could res­
ult in the load not moving smoothly. Proper boom lubrica­
tion and wear pad adjustment is important to permit the
boom section to slide freely. Slow movement of the boom
may be undetected by the operator unless a load is sus­
pended for a long period of time.
This situation can also occur in reverse. If the crane is
setup on a cold morning and as the daytime ambient
temperature heats the oil, the cylinders will extend in
similar proportions.
The Cylinder Drift chart can assist in determining the ap­
proximate amount of retraction/extension that may be ex­
pected from a hydraulic cylinder as a result of a change in
temperature of the hydraulic oil inside the cylinder. That
chart is for dry rod cylinders. If the cylinder rod is filled with
hydraulic oil, the contraction rate is somewhat greater.
Note: Operators and service personnel must be
aware that load movement as a result of thermal ex­
pansion/contraction of hydraulic oil within cylin­
ders can be mistaken as leaking cylinder seals or
faulty holding valves.
 Operator's Manual
CYLINDER DRIFT (Cylinder Length Change in Inches)
Stroke Temperature Change (_F)
(Ft.) 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
5 0.26 0.52 0.77 1.03 1.29 1.55 1.81 2.06 2.32 2.58
10 0.52 1.03 1.55 2.06 2.58 3.10 3.61 4.13 4.64 5.16
15 0.77 1.55 2.32 3.10 3.87 4.64 5.42 6.19 6.97 7.74
20 1.03 2.06 3.10 4.13 5.16 6.19 7.22 8.26 9.29 10.32
25 1.29 2.58 3.87 5.16 6.45 7.74 9.03 10.32 11.61 12.90
30 1.55 3.10 4.64 6.19 7.74 9.29 10.84 12.38 13.93 15.48
35 1.81 3.61 5.42 7.22 9.03 10.84 12.64 14.45 16.25 18.06
40 2.06 4.13 6.19 8.26 10.32 12.38 14.45 16.51 18.58 20.64
Length change in inches = Stroke (ft.) X Temperature Change (F) X Coefficient (in3/in3/F) X 12 in/ft.
Coefficient = 0.00043 (in3/in3/F)

CYLINDER DRIFT (Cylinder Length Change in Millimeters)

Stroke Temperature Change (_C)
(M.) 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
1 4 8 12 15 19 23 27 31 35 39
2 8 15 23 31 39 46 54 62 70 77
3 12 23 35 46 58 70 81 93 104 116
4 15 31 46 62 77 93 108 124 139 155
5 19 39 58 77 97 116 135 155 174 194
6 23 46 70 93 116 139 163 186 209 232
7 27 54 81 108 135 163 190 217 244 271
8 31 62 93 124 155 186 217 248 279 310
9 35 70 104 139 174 209 244 279 313 348
10 39 77 116 155 194 232 271 310 348 387
11 43 85 128 170 213 255 298 341 383 426
12 46 93 139 186 232 279 325 372 418 464
13 50 101 151 201 252 302 352 402 453 503
Length change in millimeters = Stroke (m) X Temperature Change (C) X Coefficient (mm3/mm3/C) X 1000 mm/m
Coefficient = 0.000774 (mm3/mm3/C)

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-9

Operator's Manual

Stay away from crane if

close to power lines. Crane,
load, and ground can
become electrified and
deadly. Refer to Operator's Wrong
Manual for minimum
required clearances.

ELECTROCUTION HAZARD.
Keep all parts of crane and
load away from electrical
lines. Refer to Operator's
Manual or local code for
minimum required
clearances.

Figure 1-14
Stay away from power lines.

Electrical Dangers Minimum Clearance When Operating Near High

1. All Electrical Power Lines Are Dangerous. Contact Voltage Power Lines Or During Crane
with them, whether insulated or not, can cause Assembly/Disassembly.
death or injury. When operating near power lines, Normal Voltage, kV Minimum Required Clearance, ft (m)
the best rule is to have the power company turn off (Phase to Phase) See Note 1
the power and ground the lines. However, in some To 200 15 (4.57)
cases, the operator may be unable to have the Over 200 To 350 20 (6.10)
power turned off. Follow all requirements per Over 350 To 500 25 (7.62)
OSHA regulations 1926.1407 through 1926.1411 Over 500 To 750 35 (10.67)
as applicable while assembling, disassembling,
Over 750 To 1000 45 (13.72)
operating, or traveling the crane in the vicinity of
As established by the power line
any power lines.
owner/operator or registered profes­
a. Be alert. You are working around conditions Over 1000 sional engineer who is a qualified per­
which can cause death. son with respect to electrical power
b. Keep all parts of the crane - wire rope(s), hook transmission and distribution.
block, hook ball, and load - at least the dis­
tance from the power line as specified in the Minimum Clearance When Traveling With No Load
“High Voltage Power Line Clearance Chart”, or
To 345 15 (4.57)
such distance as required by any other state or
local requirements. Over 345 To 750 16 (4.87)
c. Assume that every line is “Hot”. Over 750 To 1000 20 (6.10)
d. Appoint a reliable person equipped with a loud As established by the power line
signal (whistle or horn) to warn the operator owner/operator or registered profes­
when any part of the crane is working around Over 1000 sional engineer who is a qualified per­
son with respect to electrical power
the power line. This person should have no transmission and distribution.
other duties while the crane is working around
the power line.
Note 1: Maintain 50 ft (15.2m) minimum clearance from power
e. Do not perform any crane assembly/disas­ lines if voltage is unknown. If unknown but yet known to be less
sembly under any energized power line. than 350 kV, maintain 20 ft (6.1m) minimum clearance.
f. Overhead lines can move when the wind blows Note 2: Environmental conditions such as wind, fog, smoke, or
precipitation may require increased clearances.
against them. Allow for this when determining
safe operating distances. High Voltage Power Line Clearance Chart

1-10 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


Wrong
Shaded area shows “sensitivity zone” with full boom length
sensor used. Contact can be made outside this zone by the wire
rope(s), cab, etc. In such cases the warning will not sound until
contact is made, and the crane is electrified and deadly.
Figure 1-15
Crane Equipped With Proximity Warning
Device On The Entire Boom
g. Warn all personnel of the potential danger. Do
not allow unnecessary persons in the area.
Don't allow anyone to lean against or touch the
crane. Don't allow workers or load handlers to
hold load, load lines, or rigging gear unless ab­
solutely necessary. In these cases, use dry
hemp or plastic ropes as tether lines. Make
certain everyone stays at least the distance
away from the load as specified in the “High
Voltage Power Line Clearance Chart”, or such
distance as required by any other state or local
requirements.
h. The use of boom point guards, proximity de­
vices, insulated hooks, or swing limit stops do
not assure safety. Even if codes or regulations
require the use of such devices, you must fol­
low rules listed here. If you do not follow them,
the result could be serious injury or death.
i. Grounding the crane can increase the danger.
Poor grounding such as a pipe driven into the
ground, will give little or no protection. In addi­
tion, a grounded crane may strike an arc so
heavy that a live line may be burned down.
This could cause the crane and the area
around it to be electrified.
j. When operating near radio or T.V. transmitting
stations, high voltage can be induced in metal
parts of the crane, or in the load. This can oc­
cur even if the crane is some distance from the
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
Wrong
Shaded area shows “sensitivity zone” with the probe near the
boom peak. Contact can be made outside this zone by the wire
rope(s), cab, etc. In such cases the warning will not sound until
contact is made, and the crane is electrified and deadly.
Figure 1-16
Crane Equipped With Proximity Warning
Device On The Boom Tip
transmitter or antenna. Painful, dangerous
shocks could occur. Contact trained elec­
tronic personnel before operating the crane to
determine how to avoid electrical hazards.
2. What do you do if a power line is touched by a
crane or load?
a. Remain calm - think - a mistake can kill
someone.
b. Warn all personnel to keep clear.
c. If crane will still operate, try to move it away
from contact. You, the operator are reasonably
safe in the cab unless the crane is on fire or an
arc is cutting through the cab.
d. Move away from contact in the reverse direc­
tion to that which caused the contact. Exam­
ple: If you swing left to the wire, swing to the
right to break contact. Remember - once an
arc has been struck, it will stretch out much far­
ther than you think before it breaks. Keep mov­
ing until the arc has been broken.
e. When the arc breaks, continue moving until
you are at least the distance away as specified
in the “High Voltage Power Line Clearance
Chart”, or such distance as required by any
other state or local requirements. Stop the
crane. Thoroughly inspect the crane for dam­
age. Repair any damage before further use.
1-11
Operator's Manual

Wrong

This Man Is Not protected.

1. Insulated Link
Figure 1-19
Figure 1-17 If you must leave the crane, do not step off.
Crane Equipped With Insulated Link Leap as far as you can with feet together and
hop or shuffle away from the crane.

f.If you cannot disengage from the electrical line

Wrong
and the crane is not on fire or no arc is cutting
through the cab, stay in your seat until the
power line can be turned off.
g. If you must leave the crane, don't step off.
Leap from the crane as far as you can, landing
with feet together, then hop away from the
crane with feet together, or shuffle feet to keep
them close together until you are a safe dis­
tance away. This could help prevent personal
injury.
3. When using a magnet:
1
a. Lifting magnet generators produce voltage in
excess of 200 volts and present an electrical
shock hazard. Only trained personnel should
work on the magnet, controller, or wiring.
Don't open the controller door with the genera­
1. Insulated link if wet or contaminated will not provide protection.
tor running.
Figure 1-18 b. Do not let workers touch magnet or load.
Crane Equipped With Insulated Link And c. Do not let workers get between magnet and a
Boom Point Guard metal object.
d. If necessary to position a load, use a dry,
wooden stick.
e. Open magnet disconnect switch at magnet
control panel before connecting or discon­
necting leads.

1-12 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


Wrong
Figure 1-20
No hook riders!
Radio Frequency Or Electro Magnetic
Interference (RFI Or EMI)
Certain areas may contain high Radio Frequency Or
Electro Magnetic Interference (RFI or EMI). In these
areas the boom can act like an antenna and produce
an electrical current that may cause electrical shocks
and/or the crane to malfunction. If operating in an area
where these conditions may exist, test the crane or
have the area tested for the magnitude of this interfer­
ence before operating the crane. Operation may not
be possible or boom length may be limited. Comply
with all local, state, and federal laws when operating in
high RFI/EMI areas.
Protective Equipment
1. Always replace protective guards and panels be­
fore operating the crane.
2. Always wear hard hats, safety glasses, steel toe
shoes, hearing protection, and any other safety
equipment required by local job conditions,
OSHA, or regulations.
3. Always wear safety glasses when drilling, grinding,
or hammering. Flying chips could injure the eyes.
4. Always wear a mask to prevent breathing any dust,
smoke, fumes, etc. while cleaning, drilling, weld­
ing, grinding, sanding, etc. on any part of the
crane. Breathing dust, smoke, fumes, etc. can be
very hazardous.
5. Keep a dry chemical or carbon dioxide fire extin­
guisher of 10BD rating or larger in the upper oper­
ator's and lower carrier cab or in the immediate
area of the crane at all times. Instruct all operating
and maintenance personnel in proper use of the
extinguisher. Check periodically to ensure it is fully
charged and in working order.
6. Do not tamper with safety devices. Keep them in
good repair and properly adjusted. They were put
on the crane for your protection.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
Wrong
Figure 1-21
Use a signal person, back safely.
7. When operating a crane equipped with any form of
load indicating mechanism, overload warning sys­
tem, or any automatic safety device, remember
that such devices cannot replace the skill and judg­
ment of a good operator. For instance, such de­
vices cannot tell when a crane is on a supporting
surface that will give away, that too few parts of line
are being used to lift a load, cannot correct for the
effects of wind, warn that the device may be im­
properly adjusted, correct for side pulls on the
boom, or for many conditions which could occur
and create hazards. It requires all the skill, experi­
ence, judgment, and safety consciousness that a
good operator can develop to attain safe opera­
tion. Many safety devices can assist the operator
in performing his duties, but he should not rely on
them to keep him out of trouble.
Signal Persons And Bystanders
1. Don't allow crane boom or loads to pass over peo­
ple, or endanger their safety. Remove all loose ob­
jects from load. All unnecessary personnel should
leave the immediate area when crane is operating.
2. Do not allow anyone to ride on the hook ball, hook
block, or any part of the load or attachment for
construction work or recreational activities. (This
applies to recreational activities such as “bungee
jumping” or “bungee cord jumping”.) Cranes are
intended to lift objects, not people. They are not
elevators.
3. Do not carry passengers! There is only one seat in
each cab and it is for the driver/operator. A fall from
the crane can cause death or serious injury.
4. Always look before you back up, or better yet, post
a signal person to guide you. If crane is equipped
with a back up alarm, ensure it is working properly.
Use the horn as a signal. Use a code such as one
beep - stop, two beeps - forward, and three
beeps - backward. Confirm that everyone on the
job site knows the code.
5. Do not make a lift which is not in plain view of the
operator without a signal person. This can lead to
an accident or crane damage.
1-13
Operator's Manual
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
DANGER
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
CRANE OUT OF SERVICE
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Do not operate the crane or start the
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
engine without first notifying this
mechanic. Personnel within the
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
crane could be hurt or killed. Crane
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
damage may also result from
premature operation of systems
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
which are still under repair.
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Signed:
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Figure 1-22
Remove the keys from the ignition and post a
sign to make others aware of repair activity.
Crane Inspections And Adjustments
1. Inspect the crane daily. Do not operate a damaged
or poorly maintained crane. Pay particular atten­
tion to the clutches, brakes, attachments, and wire
ropes. If a component is worn or damaged, repair
or replace it before operating.
2. Labels, decals, plates, etc. should be periodically
inspected and cleaned as necessary to maintain
good legibility for safe viewing. If any instruction,
caution, warning, or danger labels, decals, or
plates become lost, damaged, or unreadable, they
must be replaced.
3. When performing repetitive lift applications, espe­
cially at or near maximum strength limited capaci­
ties, an inspection of the major structural areas of
the crane, for cracks or other damage, should be
conducted on a regular basis. (A non‐destructive
test such as magnetic particle or dye penetrant
may even be considered.) Along with inspection
for cracks and damage, frequently check the criti­
cally loaded fasteners, such as the turntable bear­
ing mounting capscrews, to ensure they have not
been stretched. Not only does frequent inspection
promote safety, but it is also much easier and less
expensive to perform a repair when a crack is
small, before it has a chance to traverse through a
structural member. Any sign of cracks or damage
must be repaired before continuing operations.
Contact a Link‐Belt Distributor for repairs.
4. When performing maintenance on the crane, do
the following:
a. Fully retract the boom. Lower the boom to the
limit of the boom hoist cylinder or in the boom
rest.
b. Shutdown engine(s) and work all control levers
back and forth to relieve pressure and relax the
attachment.
1-14 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
c. If above instructions cannot be followed, block se­
curely under the attachment so it cannot move.
d. Bleed any precharge off the hydraulic reservoir(s)
before opening them or disconnecting a line.
e. Hydraulic oil becomes hot during operation. In
some cases it becomes hot enough to cause
severe burns. Be careful not to let hydraulic oil
come in contact with the skin.
f. Post warning signs in cab(s) so no one will try
to start the engine(s). Do not adjust, maintain,
or repair a crane while it is in operation without
visual and/or verbal contact to ensure the
safety of service personnel.
5. Always reduce pressure in hydraulic and air sys­
tems to zero before working on any part of the sys­
tem. Pin sized and smaller streams of hydraulic oil
or air under pressure can penetrate the skin and re­
sult in serious infection. Do not use your hand to
check for leaks. If hydraulic oi or air does penetrate
the skin, seek medical treatment immediately.
6. Use extreme care when working with circuits with
accumulators. Check that hydraulic pressure is re­
lieved before opening the circuit for repairs.
7. When setting pressures, never exceed the manufac­
turer's ratings. Always follow instructions exactly.
Over pressurization can cause hydraulic component
damage or failure of mechanical parts on the crane.
Either of the above can lead to an accident.
8. When making repairs which require welding, use
proper welding procedures. Make note of the fol­
lowing:
a. All paint and acoustical material in the area
should be removed to prevent burning
them. The smoke and fumes from the burn­
ing paint and/or acoustical material can be
very hazardous.
b. Turn the battery disconnect switches to the
“OFF” position to protect any electronic equip­
ment on the crane which may be effected by
electric arc welding. Contact a Link‐Belt Dis­
tributor for proper procedures.
c. The welding ground cable should be attached
to the portion of the crane being welded. If
welding on the upper, ground on the upper. If
welding on the carrier ground on the carrier.
Failure to take this precaution may result in
electrical arcs in the turntable bearing.
d. The welding ground cable should always be
connected as close as possible to the area be­
ing welded. This minimizes the distance that
electricity must travel.
e. Disconnect computers and other electronic equip­
ment (such as Rated Capacity Limiters and engine
computers) to prevent damage. Contact a
Link‐Belt Distributor for proper procedures.
f. Remove all flammables from the proximity of
the welding area.
 Operator's Manual
Right

Figure 1-23 Figure 1-24

Use a guard when inflating tires. Allow engine(s) to cool before removing the
radiator/surge tank cap.
9. Use care during all access/egress to/from the crane.
Use the hand rails, hand grips, steps, ladders, guard
rails, etc. to prevent slips and falls. Remain in three
point contact (two hands and one foot or two feet Wrong
and one hand) with the crane at all times.
10. Use proper fall protection such as a fall arrest sys­
tem as required by any applicable codes when
working at elevated heights. Falls can lead to
severe personal injuries and/or death.
11. Keep the crane clean, in good repair, and in proper
adjustment. Oil, grease, or tools left on the decks
may cause falls. Improper adjustments can lead to
crane damage, load dropping, or other malfunc­
tions. After working on the crane, remove all oil,
grease, and tools before resuming operation. Figure 1-25
12. Keep all walking surfaces (steps, ladders, plat­ Do not use an open flame near the battery.
forms, etc.) and non‐skid materials on the crane
clean. Non‐skid materials are placed on the crane
to assist operators and service personnel with safe
access/egress to/from the crane and to/from ad­
justment and inspection areas. Do not allow non‐
WARNING
skid materials to become contaminated with mud, Battery posts, terminals, and related
snow, ice, oil, paint, wax, etc. Any contamination accessories contain lead and lead
can cause the non‐skid materials to become slick, compounds. Wash hands after handling.
reducing their effectiveness for safety while walk­
ing on the crane. If any non‐skid materials become 15. When checking battery fluid level, use a flashlight,
ineffective due to wear, age, or destroyed in any not an open flame. If the battery explodes, you can
way, they must be replaced. get acid in your eyes, which could cause blind­
13. Use extreme caution when removing radiator/ ness. Don't check battery charge by shorting
surge tank caps, hydraulic pressure caps, etc. across posts. The resulting spark could cause the
They can fly off and hit you, or you could be burned battery to explode. Check with a tester or hy­
by hot oil, water, or steam. drometer. Don't smoke near batteries.
14. Check tires daily for correct pressure. Do not stand
in front of a tire when inflating it. The lock ring can
fly off and injure you. Use a clip‐on inflator, and
stand aside. Use a guard in front of the tire.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-15

Operator's Manual
Thursday……
“I thought I could save
money by running this
wire rope until Friday.”
Wrong
Figure 1-26
Do not operate the crane with worn or
damaged wire rope.
16. When using jumper cables to start an engine, al­
ways connect negative post to negative post, and
positive post to positive post. Always connect the
two positive posts first. Any spark could cause the
battery to explode. Refer to “Jump Starting The
Crane” in this Section of this Operator's Manual for
the proper procedure.
17. Test the automatic winch brake by raising the load a
few inches (cm) and holding. It should hold without
slipping. It takes more braking power to hold a load
in the air when the drum is full of wire rope than when
it is a few inches (cs) above the ground with only a
few wraps of wire rope on the drum.
Wire Rope
1. Inspect all wire rope thoroughly. OSHA (Occupa­
tional Safety And Health Act) regulations state “a
thorough inspection of all wire ropes shall be made
once a month and a full written, dated, and signed
report of the wire rope condition be kept on file
where readily available.” Replace any worn or
damaged wire rope. Pay particular attention to
winch wire ropes. Check end connections (pins,
sockets, wedges, etc.) for wear or damage.
2. Use at least the number or parts of wire rope specified
on the Wire Rope Capacity Chart in the Crane Rating
Manual to handle the load. Local codes may require
more parts of wire rope than is shown. Check code
requirements and use them where applicable.
1-16 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
3. Non‐rotating, rotation resistant, or spin resistant
wire ropes are recommended for single part of line
applications. This is of utmost importance for long
fall hoist line applications. Only if certain criteria are
met may a swivel hook ball be used with rotation
resistant wire rope. Refer to “Single Part Line Hoist­
ing' and “Hook Ball Usage With Rotation Resistant
Wire Rope” in Section 5 of this Operator's Manual.
4. Do not handle wire rope with bare hands. Always
use gloves to prevent possible injury from frayed or
damaged spots in the wire rope.
5. Inspect head machinery and hook block often as
damaged or deteriorating sheaves can cause un­
necessary wear on the wire rope.
6. When reeving wire rope on the crane, do not stand,
walk, or climb on the boom or attachment. Use a
ladder or similar device to reach necessary areas.
7. Use caution when disconnecting the dead end of
wire ropes. Reeved wire rope can become twisted
on the sheaves. When the dead end pin or socket
is removed the wire rope may spin.
Crane And Area Clearance
1. Know your job site conditions. Familiarize yourself
with work site obstructions and other potential haz­
ards in the area which might lead to mishaps.
Make any necessary arrangements to eliminate
any potential hazards, if possible.
2. Erect barricades around the immediate work area
to prevent unauthorized personnel from wander­
ing onto the job site.
3. Ensure the work area is clear. Ensure proper
clearance for the crane, boom, and load. Don't
swing, travel, lift, or lower loads, or raise or lower
jacks, without first making sure no one is in the
way. If your vision is obscured, locate a signal
person so you can see him, and he can see all ar­
eas you can't. Follow his signals. Confirm that
you and the signal person understand each oth­
er's signals. Refer to the Hand Signals Chart in
this Section of this Operator's Manual or the Hand
Signal Label on the crane. Use the horn to signal
or warn. Confirm that everyone on the job site un­
derstands signals before starting operations.
4. When working inside a building, check overhead
clearance to avoid a collision. Check load limits on
floors or ramps so as not to crash through.
5. Don't operate close to an overhang or deep ditch.
Avoid falling rocks, slides, etc. Don't park crane
where a bank can fall on it, or it can fall in an exca­
vation. Don't park where rain can wash out footing.
6. Watch the tailswing of the upper revolving frame
and counterweight. Even though the original set‐
up may have been clear, situations change.

Operation under conditions which
exceed listed capacities may result in
overturning.
Swinging, extending, or lowering
boom to radii where no capacities are
listed may result in overturning even
without a load.
Figure 1-27
Safety Instruction Label
7. Do not store material under or near electrical
power sources. Make material handlers aware of
the dangers involved with storing material under
power lines or in the vicinity of any other hazards.
Weights, Lengths, And Radii
1. Know your load. Don't try to guess or estimate the
load. Use a scale or a load indicating system to de­
termine exact weight. Remember the weight you
are lifting includes the weight of any lifting slings or
gear, the hook block and/or hook ball and any
other weight on the hook. If lifting off the boom with
the fly installed, the weight of the fly and rigging
must also be considered as part of the load. The
total load weight must never exceed the rated ca­
pacity of the crane, as listed in the Crane Rating
Manual, for the position, boom length, load radius,
and condition of operation being used. Remember
- capacity chart ratings in the Crane Rating Manu­
al are based on ideal conditions:
a. Standing on firm, level surface
b. Calm wind
c. No side loads or out swing of load
d. Good visibility
e. Crane in top condition and equipped as when
leaving the factory
When such conditions cannot be attained, loads
being handled must be reduced to compensate.
The amount loads are reduced depends upon how
good or how poor, the actual operating conditions
are. It is a matter of judgment and experience.
Some factors which may require reduction of ca­
pacities are:
a. Soft or unpredictable supporting surfaces
b. Wind
c. Hazardous surroundings
d. Inexperienced personnel
e. Poor visibility
f. Fragile loads
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
“It looked like
about 5 tons.”
Wrong
Figure 1-28
Know your load.
g. Crane in poor condition
h. Condition and inflation of tires
When in doubt, do not take a chance. Reduce rat­
ings more than you think you need. Avoid working
a crane in high winds. If you must work in a wind,
reduce capacities to those listed in “Wind Speed
Restrictions” in the Crane Rating Manual. Wind
blowing against the load and the boom produces a
side load on the boom and reduces its capacity.
When lifting loads in a wind which have large sur­
face areas, such as building panels, the movement
of the load may pose a danger to workers or build­
ing structures. Out swing of a load will increase the
load radius, and may overload the crane. This
could lead to boom failure or the crane tipping.
2. When operating off the main boom with the fly
erected, deductions must be made for its weight.
The weight of the fly, pendants, etc., must be sub­
tracted to obtain a “NET” capacity. Failure to do so
could result in an overload condition and cause
boom failure. Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
amounts to be deducted.
3. When operating off the main boom with the auxil­
iary lifting sheave installed, the weight of the auxil­
iary lifting sheave must be deducted. Refer to the
Crane Rating Manual for amount to be deducted.
4. Do not lift two loads at the same time, even if the
total load weight is within crane capacity. Loads on
the boom and fly at the same time, stress the boom
and drastically reduce its ability to handle loads.
Your full attention cannot be given to both loads,
creating a dangerous situation.
1-17
Operator's Manual
Wrong
Figure 1-29
Do not lift two loads at the same time.
5. Lifts where two or more cranes work together can
be hazardous and should be avoided. Such lifts
should be made only under the direction of a quali­
fied engineer. If a multiple crane lift is unavoidable,
observe the following rules:
a. The cranes must be level and located on firm
surfaces.
b. The cranes should be the same size and ca­
pacity, use the same boom length and be
reeved similarly.
c. Cranes must be positioned so that each boom
point is directly over its load attaching point.
The winch lines must be vertical during all
phases of the lift.
d. The rigging must be placed so each crane lifts
a share of the load well within the crane's ca­
pacity.
e. Ensure that during handling more load is not
transferred to any crane than it can handle.
f. Don't attempt to travel when making multiple
crane lifts.
g. Coordinate plans with the other operator be­
fore beginning to lift.
h. Use only one signal person.
i. Use of an operable load and angle indicating
system is desirable.
1-18 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
6. Some capacities are based on limitations other
than stability. In these cases, overloads may cause
something on the crane to break, before it will tip.
Do not use signs of tipping as a warning of over­
load.
7. Don't tie a crane down. Tying a crane down en­
courages overloading. Crane damage or injury
could result.
8. Do not shock load and/or overload the crane at
anytime. Shock loading or overloading the crane
will reduce the fatigue life of crane components
and could result in component failure.
9. When performing repetitive lift applications, espe­
cially at or near maximum strength limited capaci­
ties, be aware that these applications may reduce
component life. These applications include re­
peated lifting (or lifting and swinging) of near 100%
strength limited capacities and repeated lifting
maximum moment loads. These applications may
fatigue the major structural portions of the crane.
Although the crane may not break during these ap­
plications, they can reduce the fatigue life and
shorten the service life of the crane. To improve the
service life, while performing repetitive lift applica­
tions, consider reducing the capacities to 70% of
maximum strength limited capacities to reduce fa­
tigue cracking. Frequently perform a thorough in­
spection of all the structural areas of the crane.
Any sign of cracks or damage must be repaired be­
fore continuing operations. Contact a Link‐Belt
Distributor for repairs.
10. Always refer to the Crane Rating Manual after
changing the arrangement of the attachments for
the correct lifting capacities.
11. The boom must be extended in the correct manner
before making a lift. The capacities listed in the
Crane Rating Manual for this crane are based on
the boom sections being extended in accordance
with the boom modes as selected through the RCL
System.
12. Do not use the boom to push or pull. It is not de­
signed for this purpose. Such action can damage
the boom and lead to an accident.
13. Know the load radius. Don't guess at it. Determine
the load radius by using the boom angle indicator,
the boom length indicator, and the Crane Rating
Manual, or measure it with a steel tape. Remember
- Radius is the horizontal distance from the center­
line of rotation of the upper to the center of gravity
of the load, when the load is hanging free.
 Operator's Manual

Wrong

Figure 1-30
Do not push with the boom.

14. Do not operate a hydraulic crane at radii or boom

lengths where the Crane Rating Manual shows no
capacity. Do not use a fly not designed for this
crane. Either of the above can tip the crane over or
cause attachment failure. In some cases, the
crane can tip over with no load on the hook, for­ Figure 1-31
ward or backward! Also, if the boom is fully ex­ Pinch Point Label
tended at a low angle, the crane may tip until the
boom touches the ground. In any of these cases, 19. The winch wire rope must be vertical when starting
injury or crane damage could result. to lift. If not, the load will swing in, out, or sideways
15. When lifting a load with any crane, the load may when lifted from the ground. The crane will lean to­
swing out or swing sideways. The load radius will ward the load when lifting heavy loads. This is
increase. Due to the design of hydraulic crane caused by elasticity of the crane and the boom.
booms, (cantilever boom, supported by cylinders This lean will increase operating radius so the load
and overlapping sections) this increase is much will swing outward when it clears the ground. This
more pronounced. The increase or out swing of out swing is dangerous to anything in the path of
the load can overload the boom, and lead to boom the load, and because of the increase in load ra­
failure or tipping. Also, movement of the load can dius may overload the crane. To overcome this out
cause it to hit something. Confirm that the load be­ swing, boom up as the load is lifted so winch wire
ing lifted will remain within capacity as it is lifted and ropes remain vertical. When setting the load on the
the boom deflects. ground, lower boom after the load touches down to
16. When extending or lowering a boom with a load, avoid hook block and/or hook ball swing when it is
the load radius increases. As the load radius in­ unhooked from the load.
creases, capacity decreases. If capacity is ex­ 20. Pinch points, which result from relative motion be­
ceeded, the boom may bend, or the crane may tip tween mechanical parts, can cause injury. Keep
over. Sometimes at low angles, a hydraulic crane clear of the rotating upper or moving parts.
boom can be extended with a load, but cannot be
retracted. This is because more power is available
in the boom telescope cylinders to extend than to
retract. If an operator extends the boom under
load, he may not be able to retract the boom and
may get into a dangerous situation.
17. Know the boom length. Don't guess. Use of an in­
correct boom length can cause an accident.
18. When lowering or retracting the boom, the load will
lower. To compensate for this, the operator must
hoist up on the winch wire rope. Otherwise, move­
ment of the load may cause an accident. When ex­
tending the boom, the load will raise. The operator
must hoist down the winch wire rope to keep the
load in place. Extending the boom without winch­
ing down, can lead to “two blocking”. This is when
the hook block, hook ball, or load contacts the
head machinery. Two blocking can lead to sheave
or wire rope damage.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-19

Operator's Manual

A little side tilt while

working over the end...... Wrong Wrong

.....Increases load radius

when swung over the side!

1
2

1. Load Radius At Rest

2. Load Radius Increases Due To Centrifugal Force

Figure 1-32 Figure 1-33

Watch that side tilt! Watch that centrifugal force!

25. Don't increase the maximum allowable counter­

21. Lifting heavy loads can cause the crane to tilt or
weight. Don't add anything to the crane that will
lean toward the load. When swinging a load from
act as additional counterweight. Remember that
over the end to over the side, the tilt of the crane will
anything which has weight, if carried behind the
increase. Since tilt acts to increase load radius, it
crane's center of gravity, acts as counterweight.
must be compensated for when swinging the load.
Adding counterweight affects backward stability of
Swing slowly. Change boom angle (raise or lower
the crane, particularly when working over the side.
boom) while swinging, to maintain a constant ra­
It also encourages overloading of the crane.
dius, and prevent in swing or out swing of load. If
26. Working areas for cranes are defined per the
not, a dangerous condition could result.
Working Areas Chart in the Crane Rating Manual.
22. Watch out for centrifugal force when swinging a
Permissible loads, per the Crane Rating Manual,
load. Swing gently. Centrifugal force tends to in­
will vary from lifting quadrant to lifting quadrant.
crease load radius. This increase in radius could
The operator must ensure capacity ratings are not
overload the crane and cause crane damage or tip­
exceeded regardless of which quadrant he is
ping. When stopping the swing, over swing of the
operating in, or when swinging from one quadrant
load can side load the boom.
to another.
23. Keep the winch wire ropes as short as possible to
27. When making lifts on tires, the tires must be inflated
prevent excessive swinging. Always use the short­
to pressures shown on the Tire Inflation label on
est boom length which will do the job. Remember
the carrier or in the Crane Rating Manual.
- the shorter the boom, the better the capacity.
28. Prior to lifting any loads, inspect the boom or boom
24. Do not move a crane away from the load while han­
dling near capacity loads. Due to load inertia and fly combination to ensure they are straight. The
(weight) the load will tend to stay in position when heat from the sun may distort the boom due to tem­
the crane starts to move, and then will swing in to­ perature differential on the sides of the boom. Re­
wards the crane. The inertia effect will tend to in­ position the boom to allow the thermal effects from
crease load radius and decrease stability. This the sun to equalize the temperatures of the side walls
could lead to boom failure or crane tipping. of the boom to eliminate the distortion before lifting a
load. Refer to “Boom Distortion Due To Thermal Ef­
fects Of The Sun“ in this Section of this Operator's
Manual for additional information.

1-20 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


Traveling
1. Traveling with a suspended load should be
avoided if possible. It is especially hazardous
when terrain is rough or irregular, on a side slope,
or in a hilly area. When traveling with a load, ob­
serve the following rules:
a. Use a hand line to control the load and reduce
load swing.
b. Travel by the smoothest, most level route. If a
smooth, level route is not available, don't travel
with a suspended load. Grade the route to pro­
vide a smooth, level path. If it is not possible to
grade the route, move the load by stepping.
Level the crane on outriggers, lift the load and
set it down ahead of the crane. Travel the un­
loaded crane beyond the load, level the crane
on outriggers, lift the load, swing and set it
down farther along the route. Continue this
procedure until the load is at its destination.
c. Carry loads as close to the ground as possible.
d. Do not allow side swing of the load.
e. Don't attempt to carry loads which exceed the
crane's rating. Refer to On Tires and Pick And
Carry capacities in the Crane Rating Manual.
f. Don't travel with a load on soft ground. If the
crane sinks into the ground, stability can be af­
fected to the point of tipping the crane.
g. Keep all personnel clear of crane and load. Be
prepared to set load down quickly at anytime.
h. Fully extend outrigger beams. Extend or re­
tract jacks until pontoons just clear the ground.
i. Check clearance for the extra width of the
crane with the outriggers extended. Outrigger
beams or pontoons must not hang on any ob­
struction.
j. Inflate tires as shown on the Tire Inflation label
on the carrier or in the Crane Rating Manual
when making lifts on tires.
k. See “Pick And Carry Operation” in this Section
of this Operator's Manual for more details.
2. Do not exceed the maximum axle load ratings as
listed on the Gross Axle Weight Rating plate.
3. Road the crane safely. Watch for narrow bridges
and low clearances. Check load limits, heights,
width, and length restrictions in the area you are
traveling. Ensure the crane complies with all regu­
lations.
4. Do not allow anyone to ride in the upper operator's
cab during any highway travel. Highway travel is
considered to be any travel of the crane over 5.0
mph (8.0km/h). Refer to “Highway Travel” in this
Section of this Operator's Manual for more details.
5. When roading the crane, note the following:
a. Operate with lights on. Use proper warning
signs, flags, and other devices. Use an escort
service if required.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
Wrong
Figure 1-34
Do not leave the crane with a load suspended.
b. Engage travel swing lock. Release the 360°
swing lock.
c. Tie down or otherwise restrain the hook block
and/or hook ball to prevent them from
swinging.
d. Check for maximum allowable travel speed,
and any other travel limitations. Don't exceed
these maximums. Crane damage or an acci­
dent could result.
e. When traveling, outriggers must be fully re­
tracted.
f. Remove all pontoons from the outrigger jacks
and store them properly.
g. See “Traveling The Crane” in this Section of
this Operator's Manual for more details.
6. If the crane must be towed, shift the transmission
to neutral and move slowly. Slowly take up slack in
the rope or chain. Don't jerk, the chain or rope may
break. Keep the chain or rope tight while towing.
See “Towing The Crane” in this Section of this Op­
erator's Manual for more details.
Leaving The Station
1. Do not get on or off a crane in motion. Use the grab
handles and ladders when climbing on or off the
crane. Remain in three point contact with the crane
at all times (two hands and one foot or two feet and
one hand).
2. Whenever an operator leaves the control station for
any reason, the following must be done:
a. Lower the load to the ground.
b. Tie down the hook block and/or hook ball. Do
not leave them where the wind could swing
them to cause damage to the attachment and/
or nearby objects.
c. Engage the travel swing lock. Engage the park
brake. Shutdown engine(s) and remove keys.
1-21
Operator's Manual
d. Do not depend on a brake to suspend a load
unless the operator is at the controls, alert and
ready to handle the load. Brake slippage, van­
dalism, or mechanical malfunctions could
cause the load to drop.
3. Do not leave crane unattended with the engine(s)
running.
4. When changing work shifts, notify the next opera­
tor of any changes or problems with the crane.
5. Hydraulic cylinders, left extended under load, of­
tentimes have a tendency to drift in (retract) due to
internal fluid passage in the cylinders and/or con­
trol valves. Do not shutdown the crane and leave it
unattended for extended periods of time, i.e.
overnight, with the boom positioned over anything
or the crane itself that the boom could damage if it
should lower.
Personnel Handling Guidelines
Introduction
The following information is intended to provide Link‐
Belt's recommended minimum requirements that must
be followed when handling personnel with a personnel
basket or work platform (hereafter referred to as a work
platform) suspended by wire rope from the boom of Link‐
Belt cranes. These requirements are based upon several
sources and are put forth in recognition of current in­
dustry practices. However, safety, when handling per­
sonnel, remains the full responsibility of job site manage­
ment and is dependent upon the responsible action of
every person on the job involved in the related work.
This information is intended to supplement and not to su­
persede or replace any more restrictive federal, state, or
local regulations, safety codes, or insurance require­
ments. It is intended to serve users of personnel work
platforms in achieving the following objectives.
1. Reduce risk of personal injuries to users and the
public.
2. Inform users of their respective responsibilities.
3. Provide standards of equipment requirements.
4. Provide standards for tests and inspections.
5. Provide standards of operation to promote safety.
1-22 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Link‐Belt cranes are designed and intended for hand­
ling material. They are not normally equipped with sec­
ondary systems or other devices required by person­
nel lift or elevator standards and are not intended for
handling personnel for construction or amusement
purposes. Use of cranes for these purposes is hazard­
ous and is not recommended by Link‐Belt. However,
Link‐Belt understands that circumstances may occur
(in construction work) when lifting or lowering person­
nel on a materials handling crane load line is the only or
the least hazardous method available to position per­
sonnel. In fact, Occupational Safety and Health Admin­
istration (OSHA) Part 29, CFR 1926.1431 states “The
use of equipment to hoist employees is prohibited ex­
cept where the employer demonstrates that the erec­
tion, use, and dismantling of conventional means of
reaching the work area, such as personnel hoist, lad­
der, stairway, aerial lift, elevating work platform, or scaf­
fold, would be more hazardous, or is not possible be­
cause of the project's structural design or worksite
conditions.”
Much corollary and supplementary information is con­
tained within the following resource documents per­
taining to both cranes and personnel work platforms.
Job site management must ensure all requirements lis­
ted in these resource documents are followed for all
personnel handling operations.
 American National Standards Institute Reference -
ANSI Standards A10.28, A92.2, A92.3, B30.5, and
B30.23.
 Power Crane and Shovel Association (PCSA) Bureau
of the Association of Equipment Manufacturers
(AEM) Reference - PCSA Standard No. 4.
 American Petroleum Institute (A.P.I.) Specification 2C.
 OSHA Part 29, CFR 1926.1431 Cranes and Derricks.
Authorization
Authorized use of a work platform may be permitted
only after the following on‐site procedures have been
performed:
1. A competent person on the job site (job site man­
ager) specifically responsible for the overall work
function to be performed has determined that
there is no practical alternative means to perform
the needed work and has authorized a personnel
lifting operation.

2. For each instance of such lifting, a competent person
responsible for the task has attested to the need for
the operation by issuing a written statement describ­
ing the operation and its time frame and itemizing
that each of the on‐site authorization requirements
has been met. The written statement, after being ap­
proved by a qualified person, shall be retained at the
job site. (Refer to Personnel Handling Pre‐Lift Check
List For Link‐Belt Cranes in this Section of this Oper­
ator's Manual for a sample check list.)
3. Review of crane inspection records has been con­
ducted to ensure the crane being used meets ap­
plicable provisions in ANSI B30.5 and B30.23.
4. Review of the work platform inspection records and
specifications has been conducted to ensure it meets
applicable design standards (refer to ANSI A10-28).
5. Review of the personnel lifting operation practices
specified in these instructions have been conduc­
ted with job site managers and crane operator(s),
foreman, designated signal person, personnel to
be lifted, safety supervisor, and any other per­
son(s) who has jurisdiction over the operation to
ensure that they are aware of the hazards of the op­
eration and they are aware of provisions of these
instructions that must be adhered to before and
during the personnel lifting operation.
Equipment
1. The crane system shall be equipped with the fol­
lowing:
a. A fully functional working operational aid such
as a Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL) System - A
system consisting of devices that sense crane
loading, boom length (extendable booms
only), boom angle, and also automatically
provide an audible/visual signal when the
loading conditions approach, reach, and/or
exceed the rated capacity values. When the
Actual Load exceeds the Rated Capacity, the
system supplies a signal to a function cutout
system. The operational aid shall be equipped
with these additional devices:
1. Anti‐two block device to prevent damage
to the hoist wire rope, other crane com­
ponents, or attachments, and subsequent
endangerment of personnel.
 It is required that the anti‐two block
device warn both audibly and visually as
well as have the capability to cutout the
controls/functions that may cause a two
block condition.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
2. Boom angle indicator.
 Cranes with extendable booms must
utilize a boom angle indicator having
“high and low” set points and audible/
visual alarm(s) capable of activating
function cutouts.
b. Boom hoist and load line shall have power
lowering and raising and shall have an auto­
matic brake which is applied when the applic­
able control is in neutral, or when the anti‐two
block device is actuated.
c. If the crane is equipped with a “free‐fall” hoist,
steps shall be taken to ensure its use is not
possible during the use of the work platform.
(Note: A.P.I. applications do not permit the
crane to be equipped with free‐fall.)
d. Each crane shall have a mechanical swing
park brake or swing lock capable of being set
at any swing position, and shall have a variable
swing brake or swing controls capable of stop­
ping the upper swing motion smoothly. The
swing brake must be properly maintained at all
times to ensure its holding capability.
Note: All operational aids and equipment
must be maintained in operable condition.
Alternative measures are not permitted.
2. The work platform shall be designed by a qualified
engineer competent in structural design. Its main­
tenance, and its attachment to the crane load line,
is the responsibility of the job site management.
Their arrangement shall comply with the following
as a minimum:
a. The work platform harness must be of suffi­
cient length to prevent any portion of the work
platform or the harness from coming in contact
with the boom at any working boom angle.
b. Audible and visual alert systems shall be provided
to the personnel in the work platform to signal for
assistance in the event of an emergency.
c. Hooks on hook block assemblies, hook ball
assemblies, or other assemblies, shall be of a
type that can be closed and locked, (with a
working safety latch) eliminating the hook
throat opening, and shall be full load‐bearing,
and contain a manual trigger release.
3. No unauthorized alterations or modifications are
allowed to be made to the basic crane.
1-23
Operator's Manual
Maintenance, Lubrication, And Adjustments
1. The crane operator must have a complete under­
standing of the crane's maintenance, lubrication,
and adjustment instructions as outlined in this
Operator's Manual.
2. The crane shall be maintained, lubricated, and ad­
justed, by a designated person, as specified in this
Operator's Manual.
3. The crane and work platform decals must be un­
derstood and maintained.
4. All decal precautions and instructions shall be
strictly observed.
Inspection And Rigging
1. The lift crane and work platform shall be inspected
immediately prior to commencement of operation.
(Refer to this Crane Operator's Manual and ANSI
B30.5, Section 5, Section 5-2.1.2 and 5.2.4, and
ANSI B30.23 for the required inspection procedures
for the crane. Refer to ANSI A10-28 for inspection
procedures required for the work platform.)
2. The inspection shall be performed once daily when
the crane is being used in work platform service or
each time the crane is converted from material lift­
ing to personnel handling operation. In the event
the operator is replaced, a new inspection is re­
quired. Written documentation of all inspections
must be kept on the job site during personnel
handling operations.
3. Inspect the crane and work platform for any loose,
damaged, or missing components.
4. Any structural or functional defect which adversely
affects the safe operation of the lift crane shall be
corrected before any operation utilizing a work
platform begins or continues.
5. The hoist drum shall have at least three full wraps of
wire rope remaining on the drum at all times when
using a work platform.
6. Minimum load hoist and boom hoist wire rope
design factors for the combined weight of the lift at­
tachments, work platform personnel, and tools shall
be 10:1 for “Non‐Rotating” and “Rotation Resistant”
wire ropes. All other wire rope types require a 7:1
design factor. (Note: A.P.I. applications require 10:1
design factor for all wire rope construction.)
7. The work platform shall be suspended from a wire
rope that is reeved from an allowed lifting sheave.
Refer to “Lifting Sheaves For Personnel Handling
With Suspended Work Platforms” chart to determ­
ine the allowed sheave(s).
8. Inspect the wire ropes, sheaves, hoist drum
brakes, and other mechanical and rigging equip­
ment vital to the safe operation of the crane.
1-24 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
9. Ensure that all wire rope sockets and dead end
lugs are properly installed and are in good working
condition.
10. Ensure that all wire rope guards are in good working
order and that they are properly installed and adjus­
ted to prevent wire rope from jumping off sheaves.
11. Inspect all structural members of all boom sec­
tions, fly sections, luffing jib sections, and live
mast, as equipped.
12. In addition to other regular inspections, visual inspec­
tion of the crane and work platform shall be conducted
immediately after testing and prior to lifting personnel.
The following inspections shall be conducted on ex­
tendable booms prior to lifting personnel:
a. Full power style booms:
1. Inspection of all extension wire ropes at
the access points in the boom where the
end connections are visible. Refer to this
Operator's Manual for inspection and ad­
justment procedures.
b. Pinning and latching style booms:
1. Inspection of the latching mechanism,
sensors, and hydraulic/electrical circuit at
the access points.
2. Inspection of all pins and pinning locations
in the individual boom sections and at the
fully retracted position.
3. Verification of the accuracy of the boom
length indicator. Refer to this Operator's
Manual for the procedures.
13. The following inspections shall be conducted on
fixed length style booms prior to lifting personnel:
a. Inspection of all pendants, pendant links,
pendant spreader bars, links, etc.
b. Inspection of all mechanical linkages, shafts,
drums, etc.
14. A written record of all the above inspections must
be maintained on the job site.
Crane Test Procedures
The test procedures listed below shall be conducted at
the following intervals:
 Daily,
 At each job site before hoisting employees,
 After any repairs or modifications to the equipment,
 When an operator is replaced, and
 When, in the judgement of responsible job site man­
agement, or controlling entity, there has been a signi­
ficant change in the conditions of the personnel lifting
operation.
Note: No personnel are allowed to ride the work
platform during any of the tests recommended in
this Section.
 Operator's Manual
Lifting Sheaves For Personnel Handling With Suspended Work Platforms
Main Boom Head
Auxiliary Head Sheaves Fixed Fly Sheave
Sheaves
Allowed Allowed Allowed
Telescopic Booms
Offset Fly With
Offset Fly Sheave A‐Frame Jib Sheave
Extension(s) Sheave
Allowed Allowed Not Recommended
Main Boom Head
Conventional Lattice Tip Extension Sheaves Jib Head Sheave
Sheaves
Tubular or Angle Booms
Allowed Allowed Allowed
Luffing Boom
Luffing Luffing Jib Head Fixed Jib Head
Auxiliary Head Midfall Sheaves
Attachments Sheaves Sheave
Sheaves
Luffing
Not Recommended Allowed Allowed Not Recommended
Attachments

1. The work platform and rigging shall be proof tested
to 125 percent of the work platform's rated capa­
city. (The proof test may be done concurrently with
the trial lift by completing the following test proced­
ures.) Do not exceed the rated lifting capacity of
the applicable lift crane as listed on the crane capa­
city charts. (Refer to ANSI A10.28 for suspended
work platform testing and inspection.)
a. This test load shall be tested for stability.
 The operator and signal person shall con­
duct this test.
 This test shall include movement of the work
platform through its entire intended range of
motion, simulating the specific operation to
be undertaken.
 A successful stability test must not produce
instability of the crane or cause permanent
deformation of any component.
b. This test load shall be raised and lowered at
maximum power controlled line speed (NOT
FREE‐FALL). The acceleration must be
smooth and the deceleration capability of the
control/braking system shall be confirmed by
bringing the work platform to a smooth stop.
The work platform shall be held in a suspen­
ded position for a minimum of five minutes with
the test load evenly distributed on the work
platform. (This experience is intended to
sharpen the skill of the operator in handling the
work platform and to give the operator an op­
portunity to evaluate the crane's perform­
ance.) The work platform shall then be inspec­
ted for any evident sign of damage or defect.
2. All limiting and warning devices shall be tested by
activation of each appropriate control function.
3. With pinning and latching style extendable booms,
a visual inspection shall be conducted to verify that
the boom extend pins are properly set in the exten­
ded boom sections.
4. At the beginning of each lift, the work platform must
be hoisted a few inches (cm) with the personnel
and materials/tools on board and inspected by a
competent person to ensure;
 The work platform is secure and properly bal­
anced,
 All wire ropes are free of deficiencies such as
kinking, crushing, corrosion, etc.,
 Any multiple part lines are not twisted,
 The primary attachment is centered over the
work platform, and
 If any load wire rope is slack, it must be inspected
to ensure that all wire ropes are properly seated
on the drum and in the sheaves.
5. Any condition found during any of these tests/in­
spections that fails to meet requirements or may
create a safety hazard, must be corrected before
hoisting personnel.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-25

Operator's Manual
Operation And Safety
1. This Operator's Manual for the crane shall be read
and fully understood by operating personnel. This
Crane Operator's Manual shall be available to
them at all times.
2. Safety when handling personnel remains the full
responsibility of job site management and is de­
pendent upon the responsible action of every per­
son on the job involved in the related work.
3. Mobile lift cranes shall be erected to obtain maxim­
um crane stability. The crane must be level and on
firm ground. It is recommended that the outriggers
be fully extended and the tires must be clear of the
ground before beginning any operation.
4. The operator shall not leave the operator's station
when the work platform is occupied. The operator
shall remain alert in a position of readiness at the
work station with the engine running and the mas­
ter clutch engaged, if crane is so equipped.
5. Unauthorized personnel shall not be in the upper
operator's cab on the lift crane, or near the lift crane
while a work platform is suspended from the load
line.
6. Any operation in which a work platform is to be sus­
pended from the load line shall be carefully
planned by the operator, supervisory personnel,
designated signal person, and personnel to be lif­
ted prior to commencement of such operation.
They are to be advised:
a. That the crane does not have safety devices
normally used on personnel handling equip­
ment.
b. That the safety of the operation depends on
the skill and judgment of the crane operator
and others present.
c. Of procedures to enter and leave the work plat­
form and other safety procedures.
7. After positioning of the work platform:
a. All brakes and locks on the lift crane shall be
set before personnel perform any work.
b. With pinning and latching style extendable
booms, a visual inspection shall be conducted
to verify that the boom extend pins are properly
set in the extended boom sections.
8. Telescope operation is not recommended with any
extendable boom with personnel in a suspended
work platform.
1-26 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
9. A work platform attached to load line of lift cranes
shall not be used for working on any energized elec­
tric power line, or any energized device or facility
used for electric power generation or transmission.
Minimum working clearance shall be at least twice
that recommended for material handling operations
in ANSI B30.5b Section 503.4.5 and ANSI B30.23.
10. The combined weight of the work platform, any at­
tachment device, personnel, tools, and other
equipment shall not exceed 50% of the lifting capa­
city of the applicable lift crane as listed on the crane
capacity chart. (Note: A.P.I. applications require
25% of lifting capacity as the limit.)
11. Use caution when utilizing pendant supported lat­
tice jibs on tubular or angle booms as the jib can
drift backwards into the jib backstops under cer­
tain conditions. This is most likely with short jib
lengths with minimum jib offset and maximum
boom angle. Pay special attention to detect the
possibility of jib drift during the work platform test
lift. An additional test lift is recommended with an
empty work platform when operation at or near
these conditions.
12. The following actions and operations are strictly
prohibited when working with personnel suspen­
ded in a work platform:
a. Cranes shall not travel while personnel are in
the work platform.
b. No lifts shall be made on another of the crane's
load lines with personnel suspended in a work
platform.
c. No external load is allowed to be lifted by at­
taching it to the work platform.
d. Work platform lifts shall be a single crane oper­
ation. A work platform shall not be lifted using
two cranes.
e. Hoisting of personnel shall be discontinued
upon indication of any dangerous weather
conditions, wind, or other impending danger.
f. The emergency manual mode operation of
pinning and latching style extendable booms
shall not be utilized.
g. Free‐fall (if equipped) shall not be used.
13. Movement of the work platform with personnel shall
be done in a slow, controlled, cautious manner with
no sudden movements of the crane or work platform.
Do not use high speed functions, if equipped.
14. Do not use multi‐function crane operation. If load
hoist, boom hoist, and swing functions must be
used to position the work platform, perform each
function individually.
 Operator's Manual
15. Clear, unobstructed visibility between personnel Additional Requirements For Offshore Cranes
on the work platform and the crane operator shall 1. Link‐Belt offshore cranes are designed to handle
be maintained at all times except where a desig­ materials. However, due to the special conditions
nated signal person has been assigned and posi­ commonly existing offshore, the use of cranes to
tioned such that he is visible to both. Such desig­ transfer personnel between vessels or from a ves­
nated signal person shall have no other duties to sel to a work platform is an established practice.
perform when personnel are in the work platform. The safety of the personnel, if a materials handling
16. Voice communication between work platform per­ crane is used in transferring personnel, depends
sonnel, the crane operator, and designated signal upon the skill and judgment of the crane operator
person, if assigned, shall be maintained. and alertness of the personnel being transferred.
17. If other cranes or equipment may interfere with the Sea and weather conditions may create additional
lifting of personnel, signals or other means of com­ hazards beyond the skill of persons involved.
munication between all crane or equipment oper­
This operation is approved by the American Petro­
ators shall be maintained to avoid interference with
leum Institute (A.P.I.). By adopting procedures for
individual operations.
this operation, the institute has determined that the
18. If the work platform is not landed, it shall be tied to a
transfer of personnel may be performed safely un­
structure before personnel mount or dismount the
der certain offshore conditions. Therefore,
work platform.
whenever an offshore crane is used to transfer per­
19. Personnel in the work platform shall wear personal
sonnel, all persons involved in the operation must
fall arrest systems. Anchors used for attachment of
know and implement the A.P.I. procedures and
personal fall arrest equipment shall be independ­
verify that sea and weather conditions are within
ent of any anchors being used to support or sus­
safe limits for the transfer.
pend work platforms. Personnel shall keep all
parts of body, tools, and equipment inside work In addition to all previous requirements in these In­
platform during raising, lowering, and positioning structions, A.P.I. 2C requires the following:
of the platform.  Boom and load hoists used shall be approved by
20. Personnel shall always stand firmly on the floor of the hoist manufacturer for personnel handling
the work platform and shall not sit or climb on the and shall be so indicated on their name plate.
edge of the work platform or use planks, ladders,  Refer to A.P.I. 2C Section 6 for further details and
or other devices for attaining a work position. (This procedures.
does not apply to offshore personnel transfer bas­
kets. Personnel must ride on the exterior of this
type of personnel handling device to assure great­
er safety of the operation.)
21. When welding is done by personnel in the work
platform, the electrode holders shall be protected
from contact with metal components of the work
platform. If electrically connected electrode hold­
ers contact work platform, work platform could be
dropped due to burning/melting of wire ropes sus­
pending the work platform.
22. A pre‐lift meeting must be conducted with the
crane operator, signal person, employee(s) to be
hoisted, person responsible for the task to be per­
formed, and anyone else that is directly involved
with the lift (as applicable) to review all the require­
ments and procedures that must be followed to
complete the lift.
23. Follow all procedures for determining the rated ca­
pacity and perform all testing as outlined in this Op­
erator's Manual, the Crane Rating Manual, and the
Safety Manuals.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-27

Operator's Manual

Personnel Handling
Pre‐Lift Check List for Link‐Belt Cranes

I am the designated person responsible for verifying that all safety requirements are met for this
personnel handling operation;
1
Name: Title:

Signature: Date: / / Initials

2 I have verified that there are no conventional means to handle personnel for this operation.
I have a written statement authorizing personnel handling from a competent person on the job
3
who accepts full responsibility, or I accept full responsibility for the operation.
The Crane Operator acknowledges that he has read and fully understands the Crane
4 Operator's Manual and Crane Rating Manual. All personnel involved have been informed and
understand the tasks required to complete the personnel lifting operation.
The crane has been maintained, lubricated, and adjusted by a designated person, as
5
specified in the Crane Operator's Manual.
6 The lift crane is equipped, and all devices operate properly as follows:
 Anti‐two block device with hydraulic cutouts
 Power load raising and lowering with automatic brakes and function cutouts - Free‐Fall (if
equipped) shall not be used
 Boom angle indicator with high and low set points and function cutouts
 Boom length indicator (telescopic booms only) and function cutouts
 Load Indicating System or Rated Capacity Limiter System
 A variable swing brake or swing controls capable of stopping upper swing motion smoothly
 A mechanical swing park brake or swing lock to hold the upper in position while personnel
are working from the work platform
 Hook block or hook ball being used can be closed and locked with a safety latch
7 A working audible and visual alert system is provided to the personnel in the work platform.
8 A mechanical and structural crane inspection has been completed by a designated person.
9 The wire rope used to lift the work platform is reeved from an allowed lifting sheave
10 Crane travel is not allowed with personnel in the work platform.
11 Telescoping the boom is not recommended with personnel in the work platform.
When handling personnel with pinning and latching style booms, it is recommended boom be
12
kept in a pinned position. Inspections must be made to ensure boom extend pins are set.
13 All wire rope sockets and dead end lugs are properly installed and are in good working condi­
tion. All wire rope guards are properly installed and adjusted to hold all wire ropes on the ap­
propriate sheaves.
Voice communications between the Crane Operator and the personnel in the work platform
14
are present and operational.
15 Fall arrest systems are present and in use by personnel in the work platform.
16 Weather and wind conditions are acceptable to safely perform the lift.
17 A Proof‐Test/Trial Lift was completed with 125% of the work platform's rated capacity.
18 The total load being lifted will not exceed 50% of the standard lift crane capacity charts.
19 Cranes with outriggers have them equally extended with tires clear of the ground.
20 A Pre‐Lift meeting was held with all appropriate personnel to review all aspects of the lift.

Note: This checklist is to be used as a supplement to (not a substitute for) the information and procedures
supplied for personnel handling operations.

1-28 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
3 4 5
6
2
7
8

10

14

13
12 11
1. Defroster Vents 6. Main Transmission Shifter 11. Carrier Cab Seat
2. Carrier Cab Dash 7. Carrier Cab Control Console 12. Carrier Throttle Pedal
3. Carrier Camera Display 8. Diagnostic Connectors Box 13. Carrier Service Brake Pedal
4. Carrier Control Display 9. Fire Extinguisher 14. Windshield Washer Reservoir
5. Steering Wheel 10. Carrier Cab Electrical Center

Figure 1-35
Carrier Cab Layout

Carrier Cab Fire Extinguisher

The carrier cab contains various controls needed to
drive the crane. Figure 1-35 illustrates the general
location of the these controls.
WARNING
This Operator's Manual must be thoroughly
read and understood by the driver/operator
before driving the crane. Major crane damage
or serious personal injury could result from
improper operating procedures.
A fire extinguisher is mounted behind the driver/operat­
or's seat in the carrier cab. Refer Figure 1-35. It is an
A B C type fire extinguisher, meaning it is capable of ex­
tinguishing most types of fires. The driver/operator
should be familiar with its location, the clamp mechan­
ism used to secure it in place, and foremost the opera­
tion of the device. Specific instructions, regarding op­
eration, are given on the label attached on the fire extin­
guisher. A charge indicator on the fire extinguisher
monitors the pressure within the tank. Check the indic­
ator daily to ensure the fire extinguisher is adequately
charged and ready for use.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-29

Operator's Manual
2
3
1
4

5
3

7
8

1. Carrier Diagnostic Connectors Box 6. Relay Module

2. Carrier Cab Fuse Box 7. Transmission E‐Module
3. Access Panels 8. Carrier Control Input Module
4. Suspension Valve Control Module 9. Intarder Control Module
5. Suspension Control Module

Figure 1-36
Carrier Cab Electrical Center

Windshield Washer Reservoir Carrier Cab Electrical Center

The windshield washer reservoir for washer fluid is at­
tached to the carrier cab floor in the lower left front of
the carrier cab. Refer to Figure 1-35. Check the wind­
shield washer reservoir daily. Visual inspection can de­
termine if the washer fluid is adequate. Do not operate
the washer when the reservoir is empty. Use specially
formulated windshield washer fluid rather than water
because specialty washer fluids contain additives that
dissolve road grime and prevents freezing.
The carrier cab electrical center is mounted behind the
carrier cab seat. Refer to Figure 1-35. It contains the
fuse box, the carrier diagnostic connectors, and other
various electrical components for the crane. Refer to
Figure 1-36. Remove the access panels to access the
electrical center components.
Carrier Cab Fuse Box
The carrier cab fuse box is mounted in the electrical cen­
ter behind the carrier cab seat. Refer to Figure 1-36.
Remove the access panel to gain access to the fuse box
components. A label which designates the carrier elec­
trical circuit protected by each fuse is on the back of the
access panel.

1-30 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4

5 6 7
1. Rear Steer #1 Diagnostic Connector 5. Rear Steer #2 Diagnostic Connector
2. Intarder Diagnostic Connector 6. Transmission Diagnostic Connector
3. Suspension And Outrigger Diagnostic Connector 7. Carrier Control Display Diagnostic Connector
4. ABS Diagnostic Connector

Figure 1-37
Carrier Diagnostic Connectors Box

Carrier Diagnostic Connectors Box

The Carrier Diagnostic Connectors Box is mounted in
the electrical center behind the carrier cab seat. Refer
to Figure 1-36 and Figure 1-37. The central location
allows easy access for technicians to retrieve fault
codes and conduct systematic troubleshooting of vari­
ous carrier control systems. Remove the cover to gain
access to the diagnostic connectors. A label which
identifies each connector is on the back of the cover.

Carrier Engine Diagnostic Connector

The Carrier Engine Diagnostic Connector is located in­
side the carrier cab below the dash. Refer to
Figure 1-38. Remove the cap to gain access to the
diagnostic connector.

1
1. Carrier Engine Diagnostic Connector

Figure 1-38
Carrier Engine Diagnostic Connector

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-31

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

15 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

1. Air System Pressure Gauges 10. Carrier Ignition Switch

2. Tachometer 11. Climate Control Switch
3. High Beam Indicator Light 12. Air Flow Selection Switch
4. Turn Signal Indicator Lights 13. Defroster Fan Switch
5. Speedometer/Odometer Message Center 14. Heater/AC Selector Switch
6. Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level Gauge 15. Mirror Adjustment Controls
7. Boom Dolly/Trailer Air Control Valve (If Equipped) 16. Heated Mirror Switch
8. Park Brake Control Knob 17. Dash Lights Dimmer Switch
9. Carrier Control Display 18. Headlight Switch

Figure 1-39
Carrier Cab Dash Panel

Carrier Cab Dash Panel
The carrier cab dash panel is directly in front of the
driver/operator. It contains the following controls and is
shown in Figure 1-39.
Note: When the carrier ignition switch is turned on,
the gauges will go through an initialization se­
quence to allow the driver/operator to verify correct
operation of the gauges and indicator lights. The
gauge needle will move counter‐clockwise to just
below minimum scale for a 1/2 second, then clock­
wise to maximum scale and the indicator light within
each gauge will flash. When initialization sequence
is complete, all indicator lights will extinguish,
gauge needles will indicate actual readings, and the
odometer will display in the speedometer gauge.
If a gauge is not monitoring its respective function:
(1) the indicator light will flash slowly and the gauge
needle will stay at minimum scale. This indicates
the gauge is not receiving data from the data bus.
(2) the indicator light will flash rapidly and the
gauge needle will go to full or minimum scale. This
indicates the gauge has received invalid or out‐of‐
range data. (3) the indicator light will flash slowly
and the gauge needle will go to full or minimum
scale. This indicates the gauge is not receiving any
data from the system control unit (SCU). Repair the
problem before driving the crane.

1-32 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


1. Air System Pressure Gauges
These gauges register the air pressure in
the front and rear air systems. The front
gauge registers the pressure of the front
brake system. The rear gauge registers the pres­
sure of the rear brake system. Normal operating
range on both systems is 110-130 psi
(758-896kPa). If they do not register within this
range, correct the problem before operating the
carrier. When the air pressure is not within the nor­
mal operating range, an indicator light within the
gauge will illuminate, an alarm buzzer will sound,
and the message “LO AIR1” (Front) or “LO AIR2”
(Rear) will appear in the LCD area of the speedo­
meter/odometer message center.
2. Tachometer
The tachometer registers carrier engine
speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Re­
fer to the carrier engine manufacturer's
manual for suggested operating speeds.
3. High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
when the headlights are on high beam.
4. Turn Signal Indicator Lights
These lights will blink to indicate that a turn
signal is on or the hazard lights are flashing.
5. Speedometer/Odometer Message Center
The speedometer registers crane travel
speed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers
per hour (km/h) The Message Center por­
tion of the gauge is used most often to display the
odometer. The Message Center display disap­
pears when the carrier ignition switch is turned off.
To view the display when the carrier ignition switch
is off, press either the Mode or Set button in the bot­
tom portion of the gauge. It remains activated for
ten seconds after the button is last pushed.
To view a different function, press and release the
Mode button until one of the following functions ap­
pear:
 Odometer - reads in miles and tenths (for ex­
ample, 123456.7). The odometer is not resettable.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
 Trip 1 Odometer - reads in miles and tenths,
preceded by a 1 (for example, 1 123456.7 ).
TRIP MI
 Trip 2 Odometer - reads in miles and tenths,
preceded by a 2 (for example, 2 123456.7 ).
TRIP MI
 Hour meter - reads in hours, followed by the let­
ters HR (for example, 123456HR).
If a warning alarm is triggered, a warning message will
override all other Message Center displays until the
alarm condition is corrected. The warning message
may be temporarily overridden for twenty seconds as
described in “Warning Alarms” in this Section of this
Operator's Manual.
Setting and Resetting Functions in the Message
Center
Trip Odometers
To Display The Trip 1 Or Trip 2 Odometer
Press and release the Mode button until the de­
sired trip odometer is displayed.
To Reset A Trip Odometer To Zero
1. Display odometer to be reset (Trip 1 or Trip 2).
2. Press and hold the Set button until the mileage
is reset to zero (about three seconds).
Warning Alarms
If a condition that requires attention develops dur­
ing operation, a warning will be displayed in one of
three ways:
 A warning message can appear in the Speedo­
meter Message Center display.
 The red warning light in the associated gauge
will illuminate.
 An audible warning tone will sound (for select
functions only).
Once a warning alarm is triggered, it will continue
until the condition that caused it is corrected. At
that time, the visual and audible alarms will stop
and the Speedometer Message Center will display
a Reset message for twenty seconds. Pressing the
Set button clears the Reset message sooner.
Temporarily Overriding a Warning Message
1. Press the Set button.
2. Press the Mode button to display another func­
tion. After twenty seconds, the warning mes­
sage will reappear.
The red warning light in the gauge and the warning
tone cannot be overridden and will continue until
the condition is corrected.
1-33
Operator's Manual
The following identifies the possible warning mes­ Manual Test Function
sages and the function that causes them. Pressing the Mode button while “AUTO” is dis­
played activates the Manual Test function and
Function Message Alarm causes “MANUAL” to be displayed. The Manual
Low Fuel Warning LO FUEL No Test is the same as the Auto Test except that the
Engine Oil Press Warning OILPSI Yes user can select which modules to test.
Coolant Temp Alarm H2OTEMP Yes a. Use the Set button while MANUAL is displayed
Hydraulic Oil Temp Alarm HYDTEMP Yes to select the module to be tested. The mod­
ule's name will appear in the display, starting
Front Air Pressure Alarm LO AIR1 Yes
with SCU.
Rear Air Pressure Alarm LO AIR2 Yes b. Press the Set button to start the test, or press
Battery Voltage Warning VOLTS No the Mode button to select a different module.
c. To end the test and display the module name,
System Diagnostic Test Mode press the Mode button at any time during the
To access the System Diagnostic Test mode, turn sequence. The Manual Test sequence is
the carrier ignition switch on and press the Mode identical to the Auto Test sequence except that
button until “DIAGTST” appears in the display. the user must press the Set button to move
Then press the Set button to enter the System Dia­ from one phase to the next.
gnostics Test mode. “AUTO” will be displayed.
Fault Codes
Note: The System Diagnostics Test mode is
When a device [or electronic control unit (ECU)] at­
only enabled when the park brake and carrier
tached to the crane data bus detects a fault, it can
ignition switch are on.
place an active fault code on the data bus. The act­
ive fault code describes a specific type of failure
The System Diagnostic Test has three functions
available: (for example, low oil pressure). Each fault code in­
cludes a device fault code that identifies the device
 Auto - A fully automatic test of all modules, dis­ which detected the fault. Pressing the Set button
plays, and indicators. when “FAULTS” is displayed tells the SCU to send
 Manual - Manual selection of individual mod­ a request over the crane data bus for all devices to
ules and indicators to test. send their active fault codes. During this time the
 Fault Display - Recalls up to 128 device fault SCU displays “POLLING”. After all the active fault
codes. codes have been received, the SCU displays the
device fault codes one‐at‐a‐time in 3‐second inter­
Auto Test Sequence vals. Up to 128 device fault codes can be dis­
Pressing the Set button while “AUTO” is displayed played. Pressing the Mode or Set button during
starts the Auto Test sequence. During the Auto this time exits the Fault mode.
Test, the system control unit (SCU) generates its
own gauge needle positioning data, warning LED Note: A device fault code does not contain actu­
data, and indicator control data. The sequence be­ al failure data, only the identification of the
gins with all gauge needles at zero scale and a device that detected the fault.
blank Message Center Display. The SCU moves
the gauge needles in unison to mid‐scale, full Note: The fault codes can be viewed through
scale, back to mid‐scale, back to zero, and then the carrier control display.
exits to the Normal Operation mode.
6. Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level Gauge
Pressing the Mode or Set button during the se­
This gauge registers the level of fluid in the diesel
quence halts the sequence and returns the display
exhaust fluid tank. The diesel exhaust fluid tank ca­
to “AUTO”.
pacity is 10 gal (37.8L). Refer to the carrier engine
If the instrumentation passes the Auto Test, it is a manufacturer's manual for the correct grade of
good indication that the entire instrumentation sys­ diesel exhaust fluid. An indicator light within the
tem is functioning properly. gauge will illuminate to alert the driver/operator
when the fluid level is low. Refer to “Selective Cata­
lytic Reduction System” in this Section of this Oper­
ator's Manual for additional information.

1-34 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


7. Boom Dolly/Trailer Air Control Valve
This valve is used on cranes which are
equipped with a boom dolly/trailer, to pres­
surize the system which supplies air to the
dolly/trailer brake circuit. See the operating in­
structions for “Boom Dolly/Trailer” in this Section of
this Operator's Manual for operating procedures.
8. Park Brake Control Knob
This knob controls engaging and releasing
the park brake.
WARNING
Avoid using the park brake to stop the crane in
motion (as a service brake) except in cases of
extreme emergency. Brake wear will not be
distributed evenly and application cannot be
controlled.
To Engage Park Brake
a. Bring the crane to a full stop.
b. Shift the transmission to neutral.
c. Pull the park brake control knob out.
To Release Park Brake
a. Apply the service brakes.
b. Push the park brake control knob in.
Note: If the park brake control knob will not stay
in the released position, check the air system
pressure. It must be at least 60 psi (414kPa) be­
fore the brake will release. The emergency park
brake will also begin to apply if pressure de­
creased below 60 psi (414kPa), and will fully en­
gage if pressure decreases below 40 psi
(276kPa).
9. Carrier Control Display
The Carrier Control Display will display various car­
rier engine data such as rpm's, coolant temperat­
ure, oil pressure, etc. Refer to “Carrier Control Dis­
play” in this Section of this Operator's Manual for
operating instructions.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
10. Carrier Ignition Switch
The carrier ignition switch is the key operated, con­
ventional, automotive type. It controls carrier en­
gine off/run/start and energizes the instrument
panel gauges in the carrier cab.
11. Climate Control Switch
This switch controls the temperature of the
carrier cab heater. Rotate the switch to­
ward the position to increase the temper­
ature; to the position decrease the tem­
perature.
12. Air Flow Selection Switch
This switch selects the air flow to carrier
cab. Select to recirculate cab air or
to allow fresh air from outside cab.
Note: The cab will heat faster and stay warmer
with recirculated air selected.
13. Defroster Fan Switch
This switch controls the 3 speed defroster
fans. To defrost the windows, press this
switch to operate the defroster fans, turn
heater/AC selector switch to A/C position, and turn
the climate control switch to the full HOT position. If
the heater/AC selector switch is in the center posi­
tion the fan control switch will not operate.
Note: For windshield defogging, select air con­
ditioning and adjust the climate control switch
as necessary.
1-35
Operator's Manual
14. Heater/AC Selector Switch
This control is used to operate the carrier
cab heater and air conditioner/defrost.
Press the top of the switch to operate the
heater fan. The center switch position will turn off
the fan. Press the bottom of the switch to operate
the air conditioner. Once the desired system is se­
lected, use the climate control switch to regulate
the temperature inside the carrier cab.
15. Mirror Adjustment Controls
Use these controls to adjust the carrier cab
mirrors.
1-36 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
16. Heated Mirror Switch
This switch is used to heat the side mirrors
if they are covered with snow or ice. Do not
remove snow or ice with a scraper as it
may damage them.
17. Dash Lights Dimmer Switch
This switch is used to dim the dash lights. Rotate
the switch down to dim the lights or rotate it up to
brighten dash lights.
18. Headlight Switch
Press the bottom half of this switch to turn
headlights, park lights, and instrument
panel lights on. Press the top half of this
switch to turn them off.
 Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

12

1. Dimmer Adjustment 5. Transfer Case Range Selector Switch 9. DPF Manual Regeneration Switch
2. Fan Control Override Switch 6. Cross Axle Differential Lock Switch 10. Ride Height Switches
3. Off‐Road Traction Control Switch 7. Inter Axle Differential Lock Switch 11. Travel Mode Switch
4. Transmission Intarder Activation Switch 8. DPF Regeneration Inhibit Switch 12. 12V DC Accessory Outlets

Figure 1-40
Carrier Cab Control Console

Carrier Cab Control Console 3. Off‐Road Traction Control Switch

The carrier cab control console is to the right of the
driver/operator. It contains the following controls and is
shown in Figure 1-40.
1. Dimmer Switch
This switch is used to adjust the brightness
of the instrument lights.
2. Fan Control Override Switch
The fan control override switch is used to
help control carrier engine temperature. With
the switch in the off position (top part of
switch), the fan will automatically come on when the
temperature reaches 195° F (90° C) and will shut off
at 178° F (81° C). With the switch in the “On” position
(bottom part of switch), the fan will run continuously.
Normally the switch should remain in the “Off” posi­
tion except for example when climbing a long grade.
Before climbing a long grade, turn the switch to the
“On” position to prevent an unexpected power re­
duction of the carrier engine if the fan comes on.
This switch is used to activate the ATC
off‐road ABS mode. Press and release this
momentary switch to activate the off‐road
ABS mode. An indicator light on the carrier control
display will flash when off‐road ABS is on. To exit
the off­road ABS mode, press and release the
off­road ABS switch again. Do not use the ATC
off‐road ABS on normal, paved road surfaces. Use
this mode only for job site traveling on soft sur­
faces. Refer to “Anti‐lock Brake System (ABS)” in
this Section of this Operator's Manual for additional
information.
4. Transmission Intarder Activation Switch
This switch is used to activate the Intarder
system in the transmission. Refer to
“Transmission Intarder” in this Section of
this Operator's Manual for additional information.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-37

Operator's Manual
5. Transfer Case Range Selector Switch
This switch is used to select the transfer
case gear. For normal use, the switch
should be in the position. For job site
use, the switch must be in the position. Refer
to “Two Speed Transfer Case” in this Section of this
Operator's Manual for additional information.
6. Cross Axle Differential Lock Switch
This momentary switch is used to engage
the differential lock between the right and left
wheels on rear axles 1, 4, and 5. When the
cross axle differential lock is engaged, an indicator
light on the carrier control display will illuminate. Re­
fer to “Axle Differential Lock System” in this Section of
this Operator's Manual.
7. Inter Axle Differential Lock Switch
This switch is used to engage the differential
lock of the transfer case between axles 1, 4,
and 5. When the inter axle differential lock is
engaged, an indicator light on the carrier control dis­
play will illuminate. Refer to “Axle Differential Lock
System” in this Section of this Operator's Manual
for additional information.
8. Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration Inhibit
Switch
This switch is used to prevent the regenera­
tion of the DPF system. Refer to “DPF Manu­
al Regeneration” in this Section of this Oper­
ator's Manual.
9. Diesel Particulate Filter Manual Regeneration
Switch
This switch is used to start a manual regener­
ation to purge the accumulated soot from the
diesel particulate filter (DPF). During normal
highway travel, the accumulated soot in the DPF will
be purged by the automatic regeneration cycle. Use
this switch only when the DPF Regeneration Indicat­
or Light illuminates or flashes. Refer to “DPF Manual
Regeneration” in this Section of this Operator's
Manual
1-38 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
10. Ride Height Switches
The crane is equipped with Hydro‐gas suspension
system which utilizes cylinders to absorb shock.
These controls are used to adjust the crane's sus­
pension for outrigger setup and return the suspen­
sion to proper ride height before traveling the crane.
This switch is used to adjust the front axle
suspension.
This switch is used to adjust the front and
rear axle suspension.
This switch is used to adjust the rear axle
suspension.
Refer to “Carrier Suspension Controls” in this Section
of this Operator's Manual.
11. Travel Mode Switch
Use the travel mode switch to select
between highway travel and job site travel.
Refer to “Carrier Suspension Controls” in this
Section of this Operator's Manual.
12. 12V DC Accessory Outlets
Use these outlets for 12V electrical accessories.
This outlet provides constant power as it is
connected directly to the battery.
This outlet provides power only when the
key is in the On position.
CAUTION
Do not connect an accessory to any part of the
crane other than the accessory outlets or
cigarette lighter. Damage to the crane's
electrical system may result. If it is necessary
to do so, contact your Link‐Belt Distributor.
 Operator's Manual

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

20

8
7 21
6 22
23
5
24
4
25

26
3

30 29 28 27
1. Message Area Display 10. Stop Engine Indicator Light 17. Air Filter Restriction Light 24. Two Speed Transfer Case
2. Inclination Adjustment 11. Malfunction Indicator Light 18. Swing Park Brake Indicator Indicator Light
3. Carrier Fuel Gauge 12. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Light 25. Carrier Hydraulic Oil Level
4. Carrier Engine Oil Pressure Low Level Indicator Light 19. Anti‐lock Brake System Indicator Light
Gauge 13. High Exhaust Temperature (ABS) Warning Light 26. Steering Indicator Light
5. Cruise Enabled Indicator Indicator Light 20. Boom Dolly/Trailer Anti‐lock 27. Steering Malfunction Indic­
Light 14. Diesel Particulate Filter Re­ Brake System (ABS) Warn­ ator Light
6. Cross Axle Differential Lock generation Indicator Light ing Light (If Equipped) 28. Seat Belt Indicator Light
Indicator Light 15. Carrier Park Brake Indicator 21. Travel Mode Indicator Light 29. Inter Axle Differential Lock
7. Carrier Engine Coolant Tem­ Light 22. Carrier Suspension Indicat­ Indicator Light
perature Gauge 16. Diesel Particulate Filter Re­ or Light 30. Transmission Intarder Indic­
8. Carrier Battery Gauge generation Inhibit Indicator 23. Automatic Traction Control ator Light
9. Check Engine Indicator Light Light (ATC) Indicator Light

Figure 1-41
Carrier Control Display Working Screen

Carrier Control Display 2. Inclination Adjustment

The Carrier Control Display is mounted to the right of The inclination adjustment feature is avail­
the carrier cab dash. It contains the following controls, able to assist in outrigger setup on inclined
gauges, and indicators. Refer to Figure 1-41. surfaces. Refer to the “Inclination Adjust­
ment Feature” later in this section of the Op­
1. Message Area Display
erator's Manual.
Various messages will be displayed here during
operation of the crane.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-39

Operator's Manual
3. Carrier Fuel Gauge
This gauge registers the level of diesel fuel
in the carrier fuel tank. The fuel tank capac­
ity is 95 gallons (360L). An alarm buzzer will
sound and the indicator within the gauge will illu­
minate when the fuel level is less than 15% of capa­
city. Refer to the carrier engine manufacturer's
manual for the correct grade of diesel fuel for the
carrier engine.
4. Carrier Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
This gauge registers the carrier engine oil
pressure. For proper oil pressure operating
range, refer to the carrier engine manufac­
turer's manual. If there is no engine oil pressure af­
ter 10-15 seconds of running time, shutdown the
carrier engine immediately and repair the problem
to avoid carrier engine damage. When the oil pres­
sure is not within normal operating range, an indi­
cator light will illuminate, an alarm buzzer will
sound, and the stop engine light will illuminate.
5. Cruise Enabled Indicator Light
This green indicator light will illuminate to
alert the driver/operator that the cruise con­
trol system is enabled.
6. Cross Axle Differential Lock Indicator Light
This yellow indicator light will illuminate to
alert the driver/operator that the cross axle
differential lock is engaged.
1-40 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
7. Carrier Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
This gauge registers carrier engine cooling
system temperature. For proper cooling
system operating temperature range, refer
to the carrier engine manufacturer's manual. If
cooling system overheats, reduce carrier engine
speed or shift to a lower gear, or both, until the tem­
perature returns to normal operating range. If car­
rier engine temperature does not return to normal
temperature, refer to carrier engine manufacturer's
manual. When coolant temperature exceeds nor­
mal operating range an indicator light will illumi­
nate, an alarm buzzer will sound, and the stop en­
gine light will illuminate.
8. Carrier Battery Gauge
This gauge registers the charge in the carrier
batteries and the output of the alternator
through the regulator. It should read 12 volts
with the carrier ignition switch on, and 12.5 to 14 volts
with the carrier engine running. When the charge or
the voltage in the batteries is not within normal oper­
ating range, an indicator light will illuminate.
9. Check Engine Indicator Light
This yellow indicator light will illuminate to
make the driver/operator aware of minor
carrier engine problems. When this light il­
luminates carrier engine operation may continue.
However, refer to the carrier engine manufacturer's
manual and correct the problem as soon as possi­
ble to avoid prolonged operation of the malfunc­
tioning carrier engine which could develop into a
major problem.
Note: The check engine light will illuminate mo­
mentarily when the carrier ignition switch is
turned on as a means of testing the indicator
light. The light should go out after a short peri­
od of time.

10. Stop Engine Indicator Light
This red indicator light will illuminate and an
alarm buzzer will sound to make the driver/
operator aware of major carrier engine
problems. When this light illuminates, stop opera­
tions immediately and shutdown the carrier en­
gine. Refer to the carrier engine manufacturer's
manual and correct the problem before any further
operation of the carrier engine.
Note: The stop engine light will illuminate mo­
mentarily when the carrier ignition switch is
turned on as a means of testing the indicator
light. The light should go out after a short peri­
od of time.
11. Malfunction Indicator Light
This amber indicator light will illuminate to
alert the drive/operator to messages which
require prompt attention and diagnostic
messages.
12. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Low Level
Indicator Light
This yellow indicator light will illuminate to
alert the operator that the diesel exhaust
fluid level is low. When this light illuminates,
stop the crane as soon as safely possible and fill
the DEF tank. Refer to the carrier engine manufac­
turer's manual for the correct grade of diesel ex­
haust fluid. Refer to “Selective Catalytic Reduction
System” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
13. High Exhaust Temperature Indicator Light
This yellow indicator light will illuminate to
alert the driver/operator that the outlet tem­
perature in the diesel particulate filter is
above 842° F (450° C) and the crane is traveling less
than 5 mph (8km/h). Refer to Diesel Particulate Fil­
ter (DPF) in this Section of this Operator's Manual
and the carrier engine manufacturer's manual for
the proper filter regeneration procedures.
DANGER
The temperature of the exhaust gas and the
exhaust system components can reach up to
1200°F (650°C) during regeneration. An
unexpected failure of the carrier engine or
regeneration system may increase exhaust
gas temperature at the particulate exhaust
filter to as high as 1650°F (900°C). This may
result in fire, burn, or explosion hazards,
which may result in personal injury or death.
Do not expose flammable material or
explosive atmospheres to exhaust gas or to
exhaust system components during
regeneration.
14. Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration
Indicator Light
This yellow indicator light will illuminate
along with a message in the message area
to alert the driver/operator that an active re­
generation of the carrier diesel particulate filter is
required but cannot occur. When this light illumi­
nates, use the DPF manual regeneration switch to
initiate a manual regeneration cycle as soon as
safely possible. Refer to Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF) in this Section of this Operator's Manual and
the carrier engine manufacturer's manual for the
proper filter regeneration procedures.
1-41
Operator's Manual
15. Carrier Park Brake Indicator Light
This red indicator light will illuminate any­
time the carrier park brake is engaged and
the carrier ignition switch is on.
Note: When the carrier park brake control is re­
leased, the carrier park brake remains engaged
until the indicator light goes off.
16. Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration
Inhibit Indicator Light
This yellow indicator light will illuminate to
alert the operator that the DPF switch is on
and an automatic or manual regeneration
cycle will not occur. Refer to DPF Regeneration In­
hibit Switch in this Section of this Operator's Manu­
al and the carrier engine manufacturer's manual
for the proper filter regeneration procedures.
17. Air Filter Restriction Indicator Light
This yellow indicator light will illuminate to
alert the driver/operator that air flow to the en­
gine is restricted.
18. Swing Park Brake Indicator Light
This red indicator light will illuminate when
the boom is in the boom rest and the upper
key switch is in the off position. When trav­
eling the crane with the boom on a boom trailer/
dolly, this light will illuminate to alert the operator
that the swing park brake is applied due to loss of
hydraulic pressure. Refer to “Boom Dolly/Trailer”
in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
19. Anti‐lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
This yellow indicator light will illuminate to
alert the driver/operator that a malfunction
in the ABS has occurred and the system is
disabled. Normal braking should not be affected,
however, the ABS should be serviced immediately.
Refer to “Anti‐lock Brake System (ABS)” in this Sec­
tion of this Operator's Manual.
1-42 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
20. Boom Dolly/Trailer Anti‐lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light (If Equipped)
If the crane is equipped with boom dolly/
trailer and anti‐lock brakes, this yellow in­
dicator light will illuminate to alert the driver/
operator that a malfunction in the dolly/trailer ABS
has occurred and the system is disabled. Normal
braking should not be affected, however, the ABS
should be serviced immediately. Refer to “Anti‐lock
Brake System (ABS)” in this Section of this Opera­
tor's Manual.
21. Travel Mode Indicator Light
The highway travel mode indicator light
will illuminate when highway travel mode
has been selected. The jobsite travel mode
indicator light will illuminate when job­
site mode has been selected. Refer to
“Carrier Suspension Controls” in this Section of
this Operator's Manual.
22. Carrier Suspension Indicator Light
This yellow indicator light will illuminate
along with an audible alarm during carrier
ride height adjustment procedure. Refer to
“Carrier Suspension Controls” in this Section of
this Operator's Manual.
23. Automatic Traction Control (ATC)
Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate for various
ATC reasons. Refer to “Automatic Traction
Control (ATC)” in this Section of this Opera­
tor's Manual.
24. Two Speed Transfer Case Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
transfer case is engaged. Refer to “Carrier
Suspension Controls“ in this Section of this
Operator's Manual.

25. Carrier Hydraulic Oil Level Indicator Light
This red indicator light will illuminate to alert
the operator the steering hydraulic oil is
low.
26. Steering Indicator Light
This red indicator light will illuminate when
the crane is not moving or is on outriggers
to indicate the steer system sensors are
functioning normally. This light will also illuminate
when the crane is moving and a front and rear
steering pump failure occurs.
This red indicator light will illuminate when
the crane is moving and a front steering
pump failure occurs.
This red indicator light will illuminate when
the crane is moving and a rear steering
pump failure occurs.
This red indicator light will illuminate when
the crane is moving and a front and ground
steering pump failure occurs.
This red indicator light will illuminate when
the crane is moving and a rear and ground
steering pump failure occurs.
This red indicator light will illuminate when
the crane is moving and a front, rear and
ground steering pump failure occurs.
This yellow indicator light will illuminate
when the crane is not moving (engine run­
ning) to alert the operator that the emer­
gency ground steering pump is not flowing (this is
not a failure). If the indicator light illuminates during
operation an emergency ground steering pump
flow failure has occurred.
27. Steering Malfunction Indicator Light
If the crane is moving, this yellow indicator
light will illuminate to alert the driver/operator
that the rear steering system has been
switched to the backup steer system due to a mal­
function in the primary steer system.
This red indicator light illuminates to alert the operat­
or that the rear steer wheels are not centered.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
When this light begins to flash red and the rear
wheels are centered, indicates a computer/sensor
fault has been detected.
If this light illuminates while the crane is moving,
maneuver the crane to a safe location and determine
and repair the malfunction. Test all steering functions
before placing the crane back into service.
28. Seat Belt Indicator Light
This red indicator light will illuminate to re­
mind the driver/operator to fasten the seat
belt.
29. Inter Axle Differential Lock Indicator Light
This yellow indicator light will illuminate to
alert the driver/operator that the inter axle dif­
ferential lock is engaged.
30. Transmission Intarder Indicator Light
This yellow indicator light will flash to alert
the operator that an error has occurred
within the transmission intarder.
This green indicator light will illuminate to alert the
operator that the the bremsomat feature has been
activated. The numeral within the green light indic­
ates the intarder brake level as follows:
20% Brake Level
40% Brake Level
60% Brake Level
80% Brake Level
100% Brake Level
Refer to “Transmission Intarder” in this Section of
this Operator's Manual.
1-43
Operator's Manual

Figure 1-42
Carrier Control Display Diagnostic Screen

Carrier Control Display Diagnostic Screen
Access the Carrier Control Display Diagnostic Screen
by pressing the button from the main working
screen. Scroll to the desired system diagnostic and
press the button.
All active fault codes will be displayed. Press the back
button to return to the diagnostic screen or press
the button to return to the main working screen.

1-44 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Figure 1-43
About Screen

About Menu Scroll to About and press the button. Press the
back button to return to the diagnostic screen or
The About menu displays which version of the Display press the button to return to the main working
and Controller software are currently installed. Refer to screen.
Figure 1-43. Access the About Screen by pressing
the button from the main working screen.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-45

Operator's Manual
Axle Differential Lock System
The axle differential lock system is used to increase
wheel traction on slippery roads or soft ground. Under
normal driving conditions the differential lock switches
(Inter Axle and Cross Axle) should remain in the
“UNLOCK” position. This will provide differential action
between axles 4, and 5 (Inter Axle) and the right and left
wheels of axles 1, 4, and 5 (Cross Axle). To provide maxi­
mum pulling power when wheels are likely to slip, press
one or both switches to the “LOCK” position to limit slip­
ping. The inter axle differential switch will lock transfer
case inter axle differential and axles 4, and 5 and the
cross axle differential switch will lock the right and left
wheels of rear axles 1, 4, and 5.
CAUTION
Do not use the differential lock(s) on hard, dry,
non‐slip surfaces or in normal driving
conditions. Operation on these surfaces may
damage driveline components. The
differential lock(s) is/are designed to be used
only on slippery surfaces where the crane
cannot move due to one tire spinning.
1-46 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
To Engage The Differentials
CAUTION
Do not actuate the differential lock(s) when the
wheels are slipping or spinning without traction.
Do not allow wheels to spin with differential
lock(s) in the “UNLOCKED” position. Either
situation can damage the differential gears.
Engage axle locks only with crane at a complete
stop and brakes are applied.
1. Bring the crane to a complete stop.
2. With the brakes applied, move differential lock
switch(es) to the “Lock” position.
Note: The cross axle lock switch is momentary
and must be held to activate.
3. Slowly, proceed with caution. Steering the crane
with the differential lock(s) engaged is not recom­
mended, however if required, do so very carefully.
Note: An indicator light will illuminate and a
buzzer will sound continuously while the differ­
entials are locked as a reminder to unlock them
as soon as slippery surface conditions have
ceased.
4. When driving conditions have returned to normal,
immediately bring the crane to a complete stop
and disengage the differentials.
To Disengage The Differentials
1. Bring the crane to a complete stop.
2. With the brakes applied, move differential lock
switch(es) to the “Unlock” position.
3. Slowly, proceed with caution.

1 2 3
4
CARRIER CAB CONTROL CONSOLE
1. Front Suspension Ride Height Switch
2. Ride Height Switch
Figure 1-44
Carrier Suspension Controls
Carrier Suspension Controls
The crane is equipped with a Hydro‐gas carrier suspen­
sion system. The suspension can be adjusted for specif­
ic crane functions. The following is a description of the
switches and controls used for adjusting the suspension.
Travel Mode Switch
The system has a Travel Mode switch on the carrier cab
console that blocks and unblocks the suspension cyl­
inder groups. Press the top part of the Travel Mode
switch to activate Highway Travel Mode . Releas­
ing the lock and pressing the bottom of the switch will
activate the Job Site Travel Mode . Refer to
Figure 1-44.
Highway Travel Mode (Unblocked)
The Highway Travel Mode unblocks the Hy­
dro­gas suspension hydraulic circuit and allows
oscillation between the right and left side axle
groups of the front and rear suspension. This mode al­
lows independent oscillation of the axle groups. The
Highway Travel mode provides a smoother ride and
more roll stability than the Job Site Travel Mode. When
in the Highway Travel mode there is no indicator light
illumination on the switch or on the display.
Job Site Travel Mode (Blocked)
The Job Site Travel Mode blocks the Hydro­gas
suspension hydraulic circuit and does not allow
side to side oscillation between the right and left
side axle groups of the front and rear suspension. This
mode only allows independent oscillation of the left front,
right front, right rear, and left rear axle groups. This mode
provides for maximum crane load and stability during
pick and carry and job site travel. The travel mode indic­
ator lights in the carrier cab display and on the Job Site
mode switch will illuminate when the Job Site switch is in
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
Highway
Travel Mode
Job Site
Travel Mode
CARRIER CONTROL DISPLAY
3. Rear Suspension Ride Height Switch
4. Travel Mode Switch
the Job Site Travel Mode position. See Job Site Travel
load and speed chart for allowed operating conditions
while in the Job Site Travel mode. This mode should be
limited to 5 MPH (8.0km/h) maximum travel speed to pre­
vent axle overloading.
If the crane is raised onto outriggers while in Highway
Travel mode , the travel mode condition will auto­
matically change to Job Site Travel mode and the
audio alarm and indicator message on the display will
flash. The message and audio alarm will continue to
flash until the travel mode switch is moved to the Job
Site Travel mode or the suspension is fully retrac­
ted while on tires. The mode change will lock the sus­
pension when the crane is raised onto outriggers.
CAUTION
Do not travel the crane above or below ride
height at speeds greater than 1 mph. Do not
travel the crane with the suspension cylinder
fully extended or retracted. Traveling the crane
with the suspension fully retracted or extended
may cause major damage to the carrier frame,
suspension cylinders, and axles due to limited
suspension cylinder travel. Always set the
suspension to ride height before traveling the
crane.
1-47
Operator's Manual
Suspension Control Switches
1 This switch is used to adjust the front axle sus­
pension and is active only in jobsite mode.
Pressing the top part of the switch will raise the
front suspension. Pressing the bottom of the switch will
lower the suspension.
This switch is used to adjust the front and rear
axle suspension simultaneously. Pressing the
top of the switch will raise the suspension to
travel height. While the suspension cylinders are ex­
tending the indicator light and audio alarm will pulse to
indicate the suspension is moving. When travel height
is achieved the light and audio alarm will stop pulsing.
Pressing the bottom part of the switch will lower the
suspension. Lowering the suspension prior to raising
the crane on outriggers will provide improved ground
clearance. When on outriggers this switch only allows
axle retract, therefore it is not possible to lower the
axles while the crane is on outriggers.
1. Suspension Diagnostic Connector This switch is used to adjust the rear axle sus­
pension and is active only in jobsite mode.
Figure 1-45 Pressing the top part of the switch will raise the
Carrier Diagnostic Connectors Box rear suspension. Pressing the bottom of the switch will
lower the suspension.

Note: The crane can travel with the travel mode

switch in either position without restrictions if the
crane is at ride height and there is no counterweight
on the upper frame or the carrier deck. The counter­
weight tray can be on the carrier deck. If traveling
the crane with counterweight or other equipment in
place, refer to Job Site Travel procedures in this
Operator’s Manual.

1-48 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
Changing The Travel Mode Or Setting The Note: The Suspension Control Module in the carrier
Ride Height cab electrical center behind the carrier cab
1. Move the Travel Mode switch on the carrier cab con­ (Figure 1-36) will flash red and yellow if the pres­
trol console to the Highway travel mode position. sure transducer is lost.
2. Press and hold the bottom portion of the Ride Height
switch on the carrier shift console (or the axle lift M=Message
Alarm Condition Audio Alarm
switch at the ground controlled outrigger station) un­ I=Indicator
til the suspension is fully lowered.
Highway/Jobsite Mismatch
3. Press and hold the top portion of the Ride Height (In highway mode with un­ M Intermittent
switch on the shift control console until the crossed suspension
suspension reaches the proper height (ride
Outrigger Sensor Error
height). The Ride Height indicator light will illumin­ (1-3 Sensors are inactive M Continuous
ate and an alarm will sound until the proper ride while on outriggers)
height is reached. Once at the proper ride height is Ride Height (1-4 sensors
reached, the light will go out and the alarm will I (Yellow) Continuous
are below ride height
stop.
Interaxle Locked I (Yellow) Continuous
4. Travel the crane to the desired location.
Cross Axle Locked I (Yellow) Continuous

CAUTION Carrier Suspension Diagnostics

Do not travel the crane with the suspension
fully retracted. Traveling the crane with the
suspension fully retracted may cause major
damage to the carrier frame and axles.
Carrier suspension diagnostics can be carried out us­
ing the diagnostic connector or accessing the carrier/
outrigger diagnostic screen in the carrier control dis­
play.

Carrier Suspension System Alarms Carrier Suspension Diagnostic Connector

The suspension diagnostic connector enables techni­
The Hydro‐gas carrier suspension system is equipped
cians to access data from the suspension control sys­
with several audio and visual alarms to alert the driver/
tem and conduct systematic troubleshooting of sus­
operator if there is a problem in the system. Refer to the
pension problems. The diagnostic connector is in the
following for alarm conditions.
electrical center behind the carrier cab seat. Refer to
Figure 1-36 and Figure 1-45.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-49

Operator's Manual

Figure 1-46
Suspension/Outrigger Diagnostic Screen

Suspension/Outrigger Diagnostic Screen pressing the button from the main working
screen. Scroll to Suspension/Outrigger and press the
The Suspension/Outrigger Diagnostic Screen displays button. Press the back button to return to the
the status of the suspension/outrigger components. diagnostic screen or press the button to return to
Refer to Figure 1-46. Access the diagnostic screen by the main working screen.

1-50 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

8 8

7
6

8 8

1 2 3 4 5

1. Left Side Raise Button 6. Side To Side Tilt Angle Numerical Display
2. Left Side Lower Button 7. Front To Rear Tilt Angle Numerical Display
3. Right Side Raise Button 8. Pressure Transducer Status
4. Right Side Lower Button Green = Normal, Yellow = High, Red Flashing = Cutout
5. Return To Main Screen Button

Figure 1-47
Inclination Adjustment Screen

Inclination Adjustment Feature

The inclination adjustment feature is available to assist
in outrigger setup on inclined surfaces. It is only to be
used in extreme situations when outrigger beams can­
not be properly extended due to inclined surface inter­
ference. The inclination adjustment controls are only
active when the crane is stationary, transmission in
neutral, and with the engine running.
DANGER
Do not travel the crane until the suspension is
returned to a highway or job site travel state.
Loss of stability can occur causing the crane
to roll over.

DANGER DANGER
Do not perform the inclination adjustment with
Do not perform the inclination adjustment with
the crane on an unstable surface and/or when
the upper in motion. Loss of stability can occur
all tires are not parallel to the centerline of the
causing the crane to roll over. Crane upper
carrier. Loss of stability can occur causing the
must be stationary with carrier on a firm surface
crane to roll over. Crane must be on a firm
before performing inclination adjustment
surface and all tires parallel to centerline of
operations.
carrier before performing inclination
adjustment operations.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-51

Operator's Manual

Figure 1-48
Inclination Adjustment Screen

1. Configure the crane per the appropriate job site 3. Travel the crane to the lift location. The location
travel chart. Refer to Job Site Travel in this Section must be a firm surface.
of this Operator's Manual. 4. Access the Inclination Adjustment screen by
2. Ensure the travel swing lock is engaged. pressing the button. Refer to Figure 1-48.

1-52 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

1 2

CARRIER CAB CONTROL CONSOLE

1. Front Suspension Ride Height Switch

2. Rear Suspension Ride Height Switch

Figure 1-49
Carrier Suspension Controls

5. For smoothest operation, simultaneously press

and hold the top part the front and rear suspension
ride height switches (items 1 and 2) to fully raise the
crane. Refer to Figure 1-49.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-53

Operator's Manual

1 2 3

1° Side to Side Tilt

2° Side to Side Tilt

3° Side to Side Tilt

4° Side to Side Tilt

Flashing = Cutout 6 5 4

Green = Normal

Yellow = High

1. Left Front Pressure Transducer 4. Right Rear Pressure Transducer

Status
2. Level Indicators - Front To Rear
3. Right Front Pressure Transducer
Status
Status
5. Level Indicators - Side To Side
6. Left Rear Pressure Transducer
Red Flashing = Cutout
Status

Figure 1-50
Inclination Adjustment Screen

6. Press one side retract button to lower
the crane to the desired inclination. Refer to
Figure 1-50.
Note: Only one button will operate at a time.
Note: The inclination adjustment feature allows
up to 4±0.2 degrees of inclination from hori­
zontal before the function will cutout. If function
has cutout, the only buttons that will eliminate
the cutout situation are active. Inactive buttons
will reactivate when inclination is within -3 to 3
degrees. When using the extend buttons, the
function may cutout due to high cylinder pres­
sure.
7. If needed, press the opposite side inclination ad­
justment button or press the front or rear carrier
suspension switches to lower the crane.
8. Properly level the crane on outriggers. Refer to
Main Outrigger Operation in this Section of this Op­
erator's Manual.
9. Once the crane is leveled on outriggers, use the
axle retract switch at the ground controlled outrig­
ger station, the inclination adjustment switches, or
the front or rear carrier suspension switches to
raise the tires to increase ground clearance.

1-54 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

2
1

1. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) 3. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)Tank 4. Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Supply Module 5. Diesel Engine
2. Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
Chamber

Figure 1-51
Carrier Engine Exhaust System

Selective Catalytic Reduction
System
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) is an emis­
sion­control technology that helps diesel engines meet
regulations on nitrogen oxide (NOx) emissions. In a
SCR system, a liquid reducing agent known as Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is combined with engine exhaust
in the presence of a catalyst to convert NOx into nitro­
gen (N2) and water vapor.
The process starts with ultra­low sulfur diesel fuel com­
busted in the carrier engine. Hot exhaust from the car­
rier engine flows through a diesel particulate filter
(DPF), which removes particulate matter from the ex­
haust prior to entering the SCR chamber. DEF is injec­
ted into the exhaust stream, and the exhaust and finely
atomized DEF enters the SCR catalyst chamber to­
gether. In the presence of the SCR catalyst, the ex­
haust and DEF react to convert NOx into N2 and water
vapor. One important requirement of the SCR system
is to ensure the DEF tank remains filled. Monitor the
DEF level gauge in the carrier cab to ensure an ad­
equate supply of fluid is available to the SCR System.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-55

Operator's Manual
1 2
Carrier Cab Control Console
1. Diesel Particulate Filter Manual Regeneration Switch
2. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Low Level Indicator Light
3. High Exhaust Temperature Indicator Light
4. Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration Indicator Light
5. Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration Inhibit Indicator Light
Figure 1-52
SCR And DPF Controls And Indicators
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) level must be maintained in
the tank for the SCR system to control nitrogen oxide
emissions. The crane has a DEF gauge incorporated
into the carrier cab dash panel allowing constant mon­
itoring of the DEF level in the tank. Additionally, the
crane has a DEF indicator light in the Carrier Control
Display ensuring the operator has ample notices to re­
plenish the DEF.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Indicators
The diesel exhaust fluid indicator will illumin­
ate to alert the operator that the diesel ex­
haust fluid level is low. This can be corrected
by filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank. It is re­
commended that the tank be filled completely in order
to correct any fault conditions.
The diesel exhaust fluid indicator will flash to
alert the operator that the diesel exhaust flu­
id level is critically low. This can be correc­
ted by filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank. It
is recommended that the tank be filled completely in or­
der to correct any fault conditions.
1-56 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
3 4 5
Carrier Control Display
The diesel exhaust fluid indicator will flash
combined with an illuminated check engine
light to alert the operator that the diesel ex­
haust fluid has fallen below the initial derate
level. Engine power will be limited automat­
ically. This can be corrected by filling the
diesel exhaust fluid tank. It is recommended
that the tank be filled completely in order to
correct any fault conditions.
The diesel exhaust fluid indicator will flash
combined with an illuminated check engine
and stop engine light if the engine has been
shutdown or has idled for an extended peri­
od of time after the diesel exhaust fluid tank
has been emptied. Engine power will con­
tinue to be limited automatically and crane
speed will be limited to 5 mph. This can be
corrected by filling the diesel exhaust fluid
tank to at least 10 percent volume of the
tank. However, it is recommended that the
tank be filled completely in order to correct any fault
conditions.
 Operator's Manual
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
The diesel particulate filter (DPF) is designed to remove
diesel particulate matter or soot from the exhaust gas of
the diesel engine. The filter must be periodically regener­
ated to remove the soot from the filter. During normal
highway travel, the accumulated soot in the DPF will be
purged by an automatic regeneration cycle. In some
cases an automatic regeneration may not occur and the
regeneration cycle must be initiated manually. Refer to
“DPF Manual (Parked) Regeneration” in this Section of
this Operator's Manual and the carrier engine manufac­
turer's manual for additional information on the regenera­
tion process and procedures.

DPF Regeneration Indicators

a. Scroll to AFTERTREATMENT, and press the
OK/Enter button . The menu will change
and display the AFTERTREATMENT WARN­
INGS screen.

1. This indicator light will illuminate to alert the driver/op­

erator that an active regeneration of the diesel partic­
ulate filter is required. When this light illuminates, en­
sure the regeneration inhibit switch is off (regenera­
tion inhibit indicator light is off) increase carrier en­ b. On the AFTERTREATMENT WARNINGS
gine speed to allow the carrier engine to run until re­ screen, press the OK/Enter button to dis­
generation is complete or use the DPF regeneration play a detailed warning description and re­
switch to initiate a manual parked regeneration cycle commended action.
as soon as safely possible. Press the Main Menu
button to access the aftertreatment diagnost­
ic menu for additional information.

c. Press the help button to display the steps

necessary to perform a parked regeneration.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-57

Operator's Manual

d. Press the return button to return to the a. Scroll to AFTERTREATMENT, and press the
main working screen OK/Enter button . The menu will change
and display the AFTERTREATMENT WARN­
INGS screen.

2. The DPF regeneration light begins to flash alerting

the driver/operator that the soot loading in the DPF
has reached a level where a regeneration, either
automatic or manual must be performed as soon
as safely possible. Press the Main Menu button
to access the aftertreatment diagnostic menu
for additional information.
b. On the AFTERTREATMENT WARNINGS
screen, press the OK/Enter button to dis­
play a detailed warning description and re­
commended action.

c. Press the help button to display the steps

necessary to perform a parked regeneration.

1-58 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

d. Press the return button to return to the a. Scroll to AFTERTREATMENT, and press the
main working screen OK/Enter button . The menu will change
and display the AFTERTREATMENT WARN­
INGS screen.

3. The check engine light will illuminate in conjunc­

tion with a flashing DPF regeneration light. This
condition alerts the driver/operator that the soot b. On the AFTERTREATMENT WARNINGS
loading in the DPF has reached a level where a re­ screen, press the OK/Enter button to dis­
generation, either automatic or manual must be play a detailed warning description and re­
performed as soon as safely possible. Press the commended action.
Main Menu button to access the aftertreat­
ment diagnostic menu for additional information.

c. Press the help button to display the steps

necessary to perform a parked regeneration.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-59

Operator's Manual

d. Press the return button to return to the g. On the ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS screen, press
main working screen the OK/Enter button to display a detailed
fault description and recommended action.

e. Press the Main Menu button to access

the diagnostic menu.

f. Scroll to ENGINE, and press the OK/Enter but­

ton . The menu will change and display the
ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS screen.

1-60 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

b. On the AFTERTREATMENT WARNINGS

4. The DPF regeneration light will go out and the stop screen, press the OK/Enter button to dis­
engine light will illuminate. This condition alerts the play a detailed warning description and re­
driver/operator that the soot loading in the DPF has commended action.
reached a critical level and the carrier engine must
be shutdown. If the carrier engine is not shutdown
the aftertreatment protection system (APS) may
initiate a carrier engine protection shutdown (EPS)
sequence. This protects the carrier engine and af­
tertreatment system from damage. The stop en­
gine light will flash for 30 seconds prior to carrier
engine shutdown. Press the Main Menu button
to access the aftertreatment diagnostic menu
for additional information.

c. Press the back button to go back to the dia­

gnostic screen. Scroll to ENGINE, and press
the OK/Enter button . The menu will display
the ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS screen.

a. Scroll to AFTERTREATMENT, and press the

OK/Enter button . The menu will change
and display the AFTERTREATMENT WARN­
INGS screen.

d. On the ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS screen, press

the OK/Enter button to display a detailed
fault description and recommended action.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-61

Operator's Manual

High Exhaust Temperature Indicator Light DPF Regeneration Inhibit Switch And Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to alert the driver/operat­ The DPF regeneration inhibit switch disables any auto­
or that the outlet temperature in the exhaust system is matic or manual regeneration of the carrier engine
above normal if the crane is traveling less than 5 mph diesel particulate filter. Refer to Figure 1-52 for inhibit
(8km/h). This condition can occur under normal opera­ switch location. It may be used to prevent any regener­
tion or during an automatic or manual regeneration cycle. ation when the crane is operating in a hazardous envir­
No action is required. When this lamp illuminates, ensure onment and there is a concern about high temperat­
the exhaust pipe outlet is not directed at any surface or ures from the DPF system. An indicator light will illu­
material that can melt, burn, or explode. minate to alert the operator that the DPF system is in­
hibited. Unnecessary or excessive use of this switch
will result in a loss of fuel economy or an increased
DANGER need for parked regeneration.
The temperature of the exhaust gas and the
exhaust system components can reach up to
1500°F (816°C) during regeneration. An
unexpected failure of the carrier engine or
regeneration system may increase exhaust
gas temperature at the particulate exhaust
filter to as high as 1650°F (900°C). This may
result in fire, burn, or explosion hazards,
which may result in personal injury or death.
Do not expose flammable material or
explosive atmospheres to exhaust gas or to
exhaust system components during
regeneration.

1-62 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


DPF Manual (Parked) Regeneration
The DPF manual regeneration switch is used to start a
manual regeneration only when when the DPF regenera­
tion light is illuminated or flashes. Refer to the carrier en­
gine manufacturer's manual for additional information on
the regeneration process and procedures.
Note: The crane must remain stationary for approx­
imately 45 minutes to complete a manual regenera­
tion.
1. Park the crane in a safe location, shift the transmis­
sion to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Set up a safe exhaust area. Confirm that nothing is
on or near the exhaust system surfaces.
3. Ensure that the DPF regeneration inhibit switch is
off. DPF regeneration inhibit Indicator light will be
off.
4. Ensure Transmission PTO indicator light is off.
5. Press and hold the DPF regeneration switch for at
least two seconds and release to initiate a manual
regeneration cycle.
Note: Do not press the throttle or carrier service
brake pedal during a manual regeneration
cycle. Pressing these pedals will deactivate the
regeneration cycle and the carrier engine will
return to idle. The manual regeneration cycle
must be restarted.
6. Carrier engine must be at minimum operating tem­
perature of 140°F (60°C).
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
7. Monitor the area surrounding the crane during re­
generation. If any unsafe condition occurs. Shut­
down the engine immediately. The regeneration
cycle can be stopped by pressing the throttle or
brake pedal.
The carrier engine control module (ECM) will perform a
system check for approximately 30 seconds before
starting the manual regeneration cycle; also, the carrier
engine speed will increase to 1,000-1,400 rpm and
there maybe a noticeable sound of the turbocharger.
When the cycle begins, the DPF Regeneration Indicat­
or Light goes out. When regeneration is complete, the
carrier engine will return to idle and the exhaust tem­
perature indicator light goes out.. However, exhaust
gas and exhaust surface temperatures will remain elev­
ated for 3 to 5 minutes.
DANGER
The temperature of the exhaust gas and the
exhaust system components can reach up to
1,500° F (816° C) during regeneration. An
unexpected failure of the carrier engine or
regeneration system may increase exhaust gas
temperature at the particulate exhaust filter to
as high as 1,650° F (900° C). This may result in
fire, burn, or explosion hazards, which may
result in personal injury or death. Do not
expose flammable material or explosive
atmospheres to exhaust gas or to exhaust
system components during regeneration.
1-63
Operator's Manual

1
8

2
6

3
4

1. Horn 4. Carrier Service Brake Pedal 7. Turn Signal Lever

2. Transmission Intarder Control Lever 5. Tilt/Telescope Lever 8. Steering Wheel
3. Carrier Throttle Pedal 6. Hazard Flasher Switch

Figure 1-53
Steering Column And Wheel

Steering Column And Wheel And 2. Transmission Intarder Control Lever

Foot Operated Controls
The steering column and wheel are the conventional
automotive type equipped with a tilt/telescope func­
tion. The following is a description of the switches and
controls on the steering column and the foot operated
3. Carrier Throttle Pedal
controls, along with an explanation of their function
and/or operation. Refer to Figure 1-53.
1. Horn
The button in the center of the steering wheel activ­
ates the horn. Press the button to sound the horn.
Always sound the horn before starting the engine.
This lever controls the transmission intarder sys­
tem. Push or pull the lever to the desired intarder
braking level.
Carrier engine speed is controlled by the carrier
throttle pedal. Press down on the carrier throttle
pedal to increase carrier engine speed. Release
the carrier throttle pedal to decrease carrier engine
speed.

1-64 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


4. Carrier Service Brake Pedal
The carrier air brakes are controlled by the carrier
service brake pedal. Press the pedal down to ap­
ply the brakes. Release the pedal to release the
brakes.
Air Brake Operation
The distance the carrier service brake pedal is
moved regulates the amount of air delivered to the
brake chamber, which determines the braking
force.
The smoothest stop results when the brake applic­
ation is as hard at first as crane speed and road
conditions will permit. Then gradually release the
pedal as crane speed decreases. As the crane
stop is completed, the brake application should
only be enough to hold the crane stationary. A
rough stop will occur if the application is light at first
and increased as crane speed decreases.
Do not fan the carrier service brake pedal. This
wastes compressed air and increases stopping
distance. Depress the pedal fully only in cases of
emergency as this makes control of the crane diffi­
cult.
If the air system pressure decreases below the nor­
mal operating range of 110-130 psi
(758-896kPa), stop the crane and repair the prob­
lem. As the air system pressure decreases below
60 psi (414kPa), the park brake will automatically
begin to apply and will fully engage if pressure
drops below 40 psi (276kPa).
Operator's Manual
6. Hazard Flasher Switch
This switch controls the hazard warning flashers.
Press the switch to turn the flashers on. Press the
switch again to turn the flashers off.
7. Turn Signal Lever
The turn signal lever controls the following functions:
a. Turn Signals: Push the lever down for left turn
signal, push the lever up for right turn signal.
b. Headlight Beam Control: Pull the lever toward
the steering wheel to change to high beam
headlights. Pull the lever toward the steering
wheel again to return to low beam headlights.
c. Windshield Wiper: Rotate the turn signal lever
counterclockwise to activate the windshield
wiper. Rotate the lever counterclockwise to the
first through fifth detent for intermittent wiper
and to the sixth detent for low speed wiper, and
to the seventh detent for high speed wiper.
Rotate the lever fully clockwise to turn wiper off.
d. Windshield Washer: Push in on the end of the
turn signal lever to spray washer fluid onto the
windshield.
8. Steering Wheel
Turn the steering wheel clockwise for right turns
and counterclockwise for left turns.

5. Tilt/Telescope Lever
This lever controls the tilt (angle) and telescope
function of the steering wheel. To change steering
wheel tilt and/or telescope:
a. Bring the crane to a complete stop.
b. Engage the park brake and shift the transmis­
sion to neutral.
c. To change the steering wheel angle, pull the
tilt/telescope control lever toward the steering
wheel and hold. Position the steering wheel at
the desired angle and release the lever.
d. To change the steering column length, push
the tilt/telescope control lever away from the
steering wheel and hold. Position the steering
column at the desired length and release the
lever.
e. Check all steering wheel functions before con­
tinuing operations.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-65

Operator's Manual
1 4

1. Transmission Display
2. Transmission Joystick
3. Transmission Gear Selector
4. Transfer Case Range Selector Switch

Figure 1-54
Main & Two Speed Transfer Case Controls

Main Transmission Controls

CAUTION
This crane is equipped with a two speed
transfer case. Come to complete stop before
shifting the transfer case. Do not attempt to
shift the transfer case while traveling the
crane. Transfer case damage may occur.
Two Speed Transfer Case
A two speed transfer case is used in the carrier to
provide a low gear ratio for slow, careful movement
around the job site, and a high ratio for normal use. The
low ratio is not for extra tractive effort or for heavy pulls.
For normal use, the transfer case selector switch
should be in the position. Refer to Figure 1-54.
For job site use, the switch must be in the posi­
tion. The transfer case is also equipped with an inter
axle differential lock. Shifting the transfer case must be
done with the crane at a complete stop.
The main transmission controls are on the shift console to
the right of the driver/operator. Refer to Figure 1-54. It
controls all functions of the fully‐automated manual
transmission. The transmission contains 12 forward
speeds and 2 reverse speeds. The transmission can be
selected to operate in automatic or manual mode. See
“Traveling The Crane” in this Section of this Operator's
Manual for necessary preparations before traveling the
crane.
CAUTION
This crane is equipped with a fully‐automated
manual transmission. In other words, it has all
the components of a typical manual
transmission (including a clutch, but no clutch
pedal) but the transmission computer
controls clutch actuation and can control gear
shifting. Do not attempt to operate this
transmission any different than a typical
manual transmission. Clutch damage may
occur.

1-66 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
1. Transmission Display 2. Transmission Joystick
The transmission display illuminates to provide the The transmission joystick has multiple functions. It
following operating information: can be used to select the desired mode of opera­
System and shift status. tion (automatic or manual). While in manual mode,
Visual and audio alerts if a system malfunction has it is used to upshift and downshift the transmission
occurred. and activate search function mode. Tap the joy­
stick one time, up or down ( ), to shift by one
Display Status gear. Tap the joystick two times, up or down ( ),
to perform a two gear shift.
CH System is performing self‐check
Manual/Automatic Mode Toggle
N Transmission is in Neutral
S - Search Function Mode
12 Automatic mode (12th gear)
Cumulative Upshift (by 2 gears)
12 Manual mode (12th gear)
Upshift
RL Reverse low is engaged
RH Reverse high is engaged Downshift (by 2 gears)
System Warning
Cumulative Downshift
AL System air pressure is low
FP Remove foot from pedal 3. Transmission Gear Selector
CL Clutch overload occurred Use the switch to select the gear:
CW Clutch wear indicator (replace clutch) D-Drive (Forward) DM-Drive (Forward) Maneuver
The display line between the main N-Neutral,
transmission control unit (TCU) and the R-Reverse RM-Reverse Maneuver
EE
transmission electronic controller (TEC)
is faulty. System Malfunction Warning
System Malfunction If a system malfunction occurs, the transmission dis­
play will alert the driver/operator that the shift controls
System Error. Travel can continue with
restrictions. are not operable. The instrument panel display illumin­
ates “SM” for system malfunction. The shift module
System Error. Stop! emits a single beep.
If a system malfunction occurs, apply the brakes to
53 Error Code. Example Error Code:53 slow the crane. Move the crane to a safe location. Stop
Error Code. Example Error Code:153 the crane and apply the parking brake. Contact your
Link‐Belt Distributor for assistance.
53 Four bars displayed in addition to the
figure shown indicates error no. + 100.
Error Code. Example Error Code:227 WARNING
Four bars and two arrows displayed in If a system malfunction occurs, the
27
addition to the figure shown indicates transmission display Illuminates “SM” for
error no. + 200. system malfunction, and the shift module emits
a single beep. When this warning occurs, it may
-- NO DATA (the SAE J1587 info is absent.
not be possible to shift the transmission. Do not
SM System Malfunction - Emits a single beep. continue to operate the crane. Serious
Figure 1-55 personal injury and major damage to
Transmission Display components can result. Move the crane to a
safe location and contact your Link‐Belt
Distributor for assistance.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-67

Operator's Manual
System Self‐Check
“CH” will appear on the transmission display while the WARNING
transmission control unit (TCU) performs a system self‐
Operating the crane for extended periods of
check. Refer to Figure 1-55. A self‐check is per­
time with “CL” displayed in the transmission
formed when the carrier ignition switch is turned ON.
display can damage the clutch and reduce its
Typically, the self‐check continues until the carrier en­
service life.
gine is started, but can last longer if the TCU is being
powered‐up for the first time.

Note: If the system self‐check continues for an ex­ Clutch Wear Warning
cessive amount of time after the carrier engine is “CW” will display on the transmission display if the TCU
started, contact your Link‐Belt Distributor for as­ determines that the clutch is worn beyond safe opera­
sistance. tion. Replace the clutch. Do not drive the crane with an
excessively worn clutch.
System Air Pressure Is Low Warning
“AL” will appear on the transmission display if the TCU
determines that system air pressure is low. Refer to
WARNING
Do not drive the crane if “CW” displays in the
Figure 1-55. Shift into neutral and idle the carrier en­
transmission display indicating the clutch is
gine to allow air pressure to build up. Do not drive the
worn beyond safe operation. Serious
crane with “AL” on the display. Do not turn the carrier
personal injury and major damage to
ignition switch OFF with “AL” on the display. The carrier
components can result. Replace the clutch.
engine may shutdown in gear and not start until air
pressure is built up again.
Automatic Mode Operation
CAUTION 1. Properly start the carrier engine. Allow system
pressures to reach normal operating range.
Do not operate the crane with “AL” displayed in 2. Apply and hold the carrier service brake pedal.
the transmission display. Serious personal
3. Check that the transmission is in automatic mode.
injury and major damage to components can
If required, move the transmission selector to Neut­
result. Allow system air pressure to reach
ral, tap the transmission joystick to the left posi­
normal operating range before continuing
tion to select automatic mode.
operations.
Note: Automatic mode is the default starting
mode.
Clutch Overload Warning
4. Move the transmission gear selector to the desired
“CL” will appear on the transmission display if the TCU
gear (“D”, “DM” or “R”, “RM”).
determines that the clutch is operating at a higher tem­
5. Release the carrier park brake.
perature than is desirable. Refer to Figure 1-55. This
will occur if operating conditions require the clutch to
slip excessively. Shift into Neutral and idle the carrier
engine to allow the clutch to cool. Limit the amount of
time to a minimum that the crane is operated with this
warning displayed. Drive the crane in the lowest gear
possible when doing slow speed maneuvering to min­
imize the amount of clutch slippage required. Manipu­
late the foot throttle position to achieve slow travel
speed by using low carrier engine RPM rather than slip­
ping the clutch.

1-68 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


WARNING
This crane is equipped with a fully‐automated
manual transmission. The crane can roll
backward when stopped on a hill or grade, or
when the crane is starting from a stop on a hill
or grade. Coordinate the use of the carrier
service brake and carrier throttle pedal as
required to control movement of the crane.
Serious personal injury and major damage to
components can result.
6. Remove foot from the carrier service brake pedal
and depress the carrier throttle pedal. The trans­
mission should automatically shift gears as re­
quired.
WARNING
Do not let the crane coast in neutral. Loss of
control and major transmission damage
could occur. Do not allow the crane to roll
backwards when the transmission is in a
forward gear or forward when it is in a reverse
gear. If this is allowed, the transmission
controls will repeatedly engage and
disengage the clutch slightly to warn the
driver/operator that this is happening.
7. Tap the transmission joystick to the left position
to return to manual mode if desired.
Manual Mode Operation
1. Properly start the carrier engine. Allow system
pressures to reach normal operating range.
2. Apply and hold the carrier service brake pedal.
3. Release the carrier park brake.
4. With the transmission selector in Neutral, tap the
transmission joystick to the left position to se­
lect manual mode.
5. Move the transmission gear selector to the desired
gear (“D”, “DM” or “R”, “RM”).
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
WARNING
This crane is equipped with a fully‐automated
manual transmission. The crane can roll
backward when stopped on a hill or grade, or
when the crane is starting from a stop on a hill
or grade. Coordinate the use of the carrier
service brake and carrier throttle pedal as
required to control movement of the crane.
Serious personal injury and major damage to
components can result.
6. Remove foot from the carrier service brake pedal
and depress the carrier throttle pedal. Move the
transmission joystick forward to upshift through
the gears as required. Move the transmission joy­
stick backward to downshift.
WARNING
Do not let the crane coast in neutral. Loss of
control and major transmission damage
could occur. Do not allow the crane to roll
backwards when the transmission is in a
forward gear or forward when it is in a reverse
gear. If this is allowed, the transmission
controls will repeatedly engage and
disengage the clutch slightly to warn the
driver/operator that this is happening.
7. Tap the transmission joystick to the left position
to return to automatic mode if desired.
Search Function Mode
The transmission is equipped with a “search function”
mode. Select this mode by tapping the transmission
joystick to the right position while operating in
manual mode.
If search function mode is selected with the carrier en­
gine brake not activated and in a lower gear, the trans­
mission will upshift to an ECO gear decreasing carrier
engine speed. This is done automatically to increase
fuel efficiency.
If the search function is selected with the carrier engine
brake activated, the transmission down shifts to a
POWER gear increasing carrier engine speed. This is
done automatically to improve carrier engine braking.
1-69
Operator's Manual
Maneuver Mode
The transmission is equipped with a maneuver mode
system that allows more precise control of travel
speed. The system is activated by moving the trans­
mission gear selector on the shift console to DM-Drive
(Forward) Maneuver or RM-Reverse Maneuver.
When driving in first gear in forward (DM) or reverse (RM),
maneuver mode occurs between 1 and 70% of full
throttle position. In this mode, the carrier throttle pedal
position controls the amount of torque transmitted to the
clutch. The transmission adjusts the carrier engine
speed to the level necessary for the maneuvering opera­
tion. The clutch does not transmit the entire output pro­
duced by the carrier engine, but only as much as neces­
sary to overcome resistance to crane travel. This allows
slow, precise maneuvering forward or backward using
the carrier throttle pedal.
CAUTION
Clutch may become hot during maneuvering
operations. Observe all precautions as stated
in “Clutch Overload Warning” in this Section
of this Operator's Manual.
Transmission Diagnostics
The transmission control unit (TCU) uses a series of al­
pha‐numeric characters that enable the technician to
identify, locate, and repair malfunctions that have oc­
curred in the system. These characters are called fault
codes and are listed in the transmission display. The
TCU stores these fault codes into memory until the mal­
function is repaired and cleared. After retrieving a fault
code and identifying the fault, use a volt‐ohm meter
(VOM) to test the area where the fault code indicates
that the malfunction has occurred. Contact your
Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission spe­
cialist to repair the fault. Use the instructions and
charts on the following pages to identify the fault and
the appropriate action to repair the malfunction.
1-70 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Active Fault Codes
An active fault is a malfunction that currently exists in
the transmission or system components. The TCU de­
tects the malfunction during operation and stores it into
memory as an active fault.
Note: All active fault codes will steadily display for
approximately 1‐1/2 seconds each. Ignore fault
codes that flash. When the TCU has listed all active
fault codes, the list will repeat.
Inactive Fault Codes
An inactive fault results when a system malfunction (an
active fault) was repaired but not cleared from TCU
memory. The fault exists in TCU memory as inactive
until it is cleared.
Note: All inactive fault codes will steadily display
for approximately 1‐1/2 seconds each. Ignore fault
codes that flash. When the TCU has listed all inact­
ive fault codes, the list will repeat.
Retrieving Fault Codes
1. Park the crane and apply the carrier park brake.
Turn the carrier engine OFF, but leave the carrier ig­
nition switch ON. Prepare to record the fault codes
before beginning to retrieve them from the trans­
mission display.
2. To retrieve active fault codes, push the transmis­
sion joystick forward. The TCU will begin to list the
active fault codes on the transmission display.
Note: The error codes can be two or three di­
gits. If there is a series of bars on the left of the
display then add 100 to the code. If there is a
series of bars and two arrows on the left of the
display then add 200 to the code. For example,
if a 53 shows on the display without the bars on
the left, then the code is a 53. If a 53 shows with
the bars, then the code is 153. If a 53 shows with
the bars and arrows, then the code is 253. Refer
to Figure 1-55.
3. To retrieve inactive fault codes, move the transmis­
sion joystick forward and press the carrier service
brake pedal at the same time. The TCU will begin
to list the inactive fault codes on the transmission
display.
4. Record the fault codes.
5. When finished retrieving fault codes, turn the carri­
er ignition switch OFF.
 Operator's Manual

Fault Code Identification

Display
Fault Fault Description Repair Instructions
Code
Short circuit to ground at the output stage to the
2 splitter direct solenoid (Y2)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to ground at the output stage to the

3 splitter indirect solenoid (Y3)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to ground at the output stage to the

4 rail select #1 solenoid (Y4)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to ground at the output stage to the

5 rail select #2 solenoid (Y5)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to ground at the output stage to the

6 gear engage #1 solenoid (Y6)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to ground at the output stage to the

7 gear engage #2 solenoid (Y7)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to ground at the output stage to the

8 low range solenoid (Y8)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to ground at the output stage to the

9 high range solenoid (Y9)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to ground at the output stage to the

10 main solenoid (Y10)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to ground at the output stage to the

11 warning buzzer (E‐Module)
Short circuit to ground at the output stage to the
12 reverse light relay (E‐Module)
Short circuit to ground at the output stage to
13 PTO1
Short circuit to ground at the output stage to the
17 inertia brake solenoid (Y1)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Remove the transmission wiring harness and check for continuity

(0.0 to 0.5 ohms) from pin 9 of the main TCU connector and pin E
Short circuit to ground at the output stage to of the clutch actuator connector. Check for shorts to the other cir­
18 small disengagement clutch valve (Y17) cuits. If an issue is found with the wiring harness, repair or replace
it as required. If not, repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly
as required.
Remove the transmission wiring harness and check for continuity
(0.0 to 0.5 ohms) from pin 7 of the main TCU connector and pin A
Short circuit to ground at the output stage to of the clutch actuator connector. Check for shorts to the other cir­
19 small engagement clutch valve (Y15) cuits. If an issue is found with the wiring harness, repair or replace
it as required. If not, repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly
as required.
Remove the transmission wiring harness and check for continuity
(0.0 to 0.5 ohms) from pin 12 of the main TCU connector and pin D
Short circuit to ground at the output stage to large of the clutch actuator connector. Check for shorts to the other cir­
20 disengagement clutch valve (Y16) cuits. If an issue is found with the wiring harness, repair or replace
it as required. If not, repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly
as required.
Remove the transmission wiring harness and check for continuity
(0.0 to 0.5 ohms) from pin 8 of the main TCU connector and pin B
Short circuit to ground at the output stage to large of the clutch actuator connector. Check for shorts to the other cir­
21 engagement clutch valve (Y14) cuits. If an issue is found with the wiring harness, repair or replace
it as required. If not, repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly
as required.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-71

Operator's Manual

Fault Code Identification

Display
Fault Fault Description Repair Instructions
Code
Remove and troubleshoot the transmission wiring harness. Pin 11
of the TCU connector, pin 10 of the voltage doubler, pin 1 of the lower
Short circuit to ground at the output ADVP (wake-
output shaft speed sensor (sensor #1), and pin A2 of the E‐Module
up control signal for E‐Module, voltage supply to
22 display, warning buzzer, warning light, and output
should all have continuity (resistance of 0.0 to 0.5 ohms) and not be
shorted to ground. If a short is found, repair or replace the wiring
speed sensor #1)
harness as required. If not, repair or replace the lower speed sensor
(sensor #1) as required.
Troubleshoot the transmission wiring harness. Pin 9 of the TCU con­
nector and pin F2 of the E‐Module should all have continuity (resist­
Short circuit to ground at output SD to display
25 NOTE: The display will flash “EE”
ance of 0.0 to 0.5 ohms) and not be shorted to any other circuit. If
a short or open circuit is found, repair or replace the wiring harness
as required. If not repair or replace the E‐Module as required.
The main TCU has not received expected com­
Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
26 munications from the carrier engine (CAN carrier
the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
engine configuration timeout)
The main TCU has not received expected com­
munications from the carrier engine [error on car­ Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
27 rier engine configuration message (carrier en­ the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
gine configuration)]
CAN: Signal error percentage driveline retarder
28 torque
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

29 Error on “Engine coolant load increase” signal Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
30 CAN: Signal error driveline retarder configuration Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
The main TCU has not received expected com­
munications from the carrier engine (error on ac­ Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
31 tual carrier engine retarder-percent torque mes­ the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
sage ERC1_ER)
The main TCU has not received expected com­
munications from the carrier engine [error on car­ Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
32 rier engine retarder configuration message (car­ the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
rier engine retarder configuration)]
The main TCU has not received expected com­
Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
33 munications from the carrier engine (CAN carrier
the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
engine retarder configuration timeout)
Open circuit at the output stage to the splitter dir­
34 ect solenoid (Y2)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Open circuit at the output stage to the splitter in­

35 direct solenoid (Y3)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Open circuit at the output stage to the rail select

36 #1 solenoid (Y4)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Open circuit at the output stage to the rail select

37 #2 solenoid (Y5)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Open circuit at the output stage to the gear en­

38 gage #1 solenoid (Y6)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Open circuit at the output stage to the gear en­

39 gage #2 solenoid (Y7)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Open circuit at the output stage to the low range

40 solenoid (Y8)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Open circuit at the output stage to the high range

41 solenoid (Y9)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Open circuit at the output stage to the main

42 solenoid (Y10)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

1-72 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Fault Code Identification

Display
Fault Fault Description Repair Instructions
Code
Interruption at output to warning buzzer
43 (E‐module)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Interruption at output stage to reverse light relay

44 (E‐module)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

45 Open circuit at the output stage to PTO 1 Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
Open circuit at the output stage to the inertia
49 brake solenoid (Y1)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Remove the transmission wiring harness and check for continuity

(0.0 to 0.5 ohms) from pin 9 of the main TCU connector and pin E
Open circuit at output stage to small disengage­ of the clutch actuator connector and check for shorts to the other cir­
50 ment clutch valve (Y17) cuits. If an issue is found with the wiring harness, repair or replace
it as required. If not, repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly
as required.
Remove the transmission wiring harness and check for continuity
(0.0 to 0.5 ohms) from pin 7 of the main TCU connector and pin A
Open circuit at output stage to small engage­ of the clutch actuator connector and check for shorts to the other cir­
51 ment clutch valve (Y15) cuits. If an issue is found with the wiring harness, repair or replace
it as required. If not, repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly
as required.
Remove the transmission wiring harness and check for continuity
(0.0 to 0.5 ohms) from pin 12 of the main TCU connector and pin D
Open circuit at output stage to small disengage­ of the clutch actuator connector and check for shorts to the other cir­
52 ment clutch valve (Y16) cuits. If an issue is found with the wiring harness, repair or replace
it as required. If not, repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly
as required.
Remove the transmission wiring harness and check for continuity
(0.0 to 0.5 ohms) from pin 8 of the main TCU connector and pin B
Open circuit at output stage to small engage­ of the clutch actuator connector and check for shorts to the other cir­
53 ment clutch valve (Y14) cuits. If an issue is found with the wiring harness, repair or replace
it as required. If not, repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly
as required.
Remove and troubleshoot the transmission wiring harness. Pin 11
of the TCU connector, pin 10 of the voltage doubler, pin 1 of the lower
Open circuit at the output ADVP (wake-up con­
output shaft speed sensor (sensor #2), and pin A2 of the E‐Module
trol signal for E‐Module, voltage supply to dis­
54 play, warning light, warning buzzer, and output
should all have continuity (resistance of 0.0 to 0.5 ohms). If an open
circuit is found, repair or replace the wiring harness as required. If
speed sensor #2)
not, repair or replace the lower speed sensor (sensor #2) as re­
quired.
Acknowledge fault of PTO 1 NOTE: The PTO is Check the wiring harness for short and open circuits. Verify that the
59 active but the TCU hasn't requested it. PTO pressure switch is operating correctly.
PTO 1 disengagement fault NOTE: The TCU has Check the wiring harness for short and open circuits. Verify that the
61 requested that the PTO turn OFF and it has not. PTO pressure switch is operating correctly.
PTO 1 engagement fault NOTE: The TCU has re­ Check the wiring harness for short and open circuits. Verify that the
63 quested that the PTO turn ON and it has not. PTO pressure switch is operating correctly.
Transmission actuator: Excessive temperature
65 transmission oil
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to positive at the output stage to the

66 splitter direct solenoid (Y2)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to positive at the output stage to the

67 splitter indirect solenoid (Y3)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to positive at the output stage to the

68 rail select #1 solenoid (Y4)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-73

Operator's Manual

Fault Code Identification

Display
Fault Fault Description Repair Instructions
Code
Short circuit to positive at the output stage to the
69 rail select #2 solenoid (Y5)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to positive at the output stage to the

70 gear engage #1 solenoid (Y6)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to positive at the output stage to the

71 gear engage #2 solenoid (Y7)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to positive at the output stage to the

72 low range solenoid (Y8)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to positive at the output stage to the

73 high range solenoid (Y9)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to positive at the output stage to the

74 main solenoid (Y10)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to positive at output stage to warning

75 buzzer (E‐Module)
Short circuit to positive at output stage to reverse
76 light relay (E‐Module)
77 Short circuit to positive of the PTO 1 Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
Short circuit to positive at the output stage to the
81 inertia brake solenoid (Y1)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Remove the transmission wiring harness and check for continuity

(0.0 to 0.5 ohms) from pin 9 of the main TCU connector and pin E
Short circuit to positive at output stage to small of the clutch actuator connector and check for shorts to the other cir­
82 disengagement clutch valve (Y17) cuits. If an issue is found with the wiring harness, repair or replace
it as required. If not, repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly
as required.
Remove the transmission wiring harness and check for continuity
(0.0 to 0.5 ohms) from pin 7 of the main TCU connector and pin A
Short circuit to positive at output stage to small of the clutch actuator connector and check for shorts to the other cir­
83 engagement clutch valve (Y15) cuits. If an issue is found with the wiring harness, repair or replace
it as required. If not, repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly
as required.
Remove the transmission wiring harness and check for continuity
(0.0 to 0.5 ohms) from pin 12 of the main TCU connector and pin D
Short circuit to positive at output stage to large of the clutch actuator connector and check for shorts to the other cir­
84 disengagement clutch valve (Y16) cuits. If an issue is found with the wiring harness, repair or replace
it as required. If not, repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly
as required.
Remove the transmission wiring harness and check for continuity
(0.0 to 0.5 ohms) from pin 8 of the main TCU connector and pin B
Short circuit to positive at output stage to large of the clutch actuator connector and check for shorts to the other cir­
85 engagement clutch valve (Y14) cuits. If an issue is found with the wiring harness, repair or replace
it as required. If not, repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly
as required.
Remove and troubleshoot the crane wiring harness. Pin 11 of the
TCU connector, pin 10 of the voltage doubler, pin 1 of the lower out­
Short circuit to positive of the output ADVP (wake-
put shaft speed sensor (sensor #1), and pin A2 of the E‐Module
up control signal for E‐Module, voltage supply to
86 display, warning light, warning buzzer, and out­
should all have continuity (resistance of 0.0 to 0.5 ohms) and not be
shorted to positive. If a short is found, repair or replace the wiring
put speed sensor #2)
harness as required. If not, repair or replace the lower speed sensor
(sensor #1) as required.

1-74 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Fault Code Identification

Display
Fault Fault Description Repair Instructions
Code
Troubleshoot the transmission wiring harness. Pin 9 of the TCU con­
nector and pin F2 of the E‐Module should all have continuity (resist­
Short circuit to positive at output SD to display
89 NOTE: The display will flash “EE”
ance of 0.0 to 0.5 ohms) and not be shorted to any other circuit. If
a short or open circuit is found, repair or replace the wiring harness
as required. If not, repair or replace the E‐Module as required.
Communication error between TCU 1 and TCU
90 2: ECU failure
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

The main TCU has not received communication

Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
91 from the carrier engine. Timeout error: CAN
the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
EBC1
Check that the ABS controller is SAE J1939 ready (not SAE J1922).
The main TCU has not received communication
92 from the ABS. ABS active message error: EBC1
Check that the ABS is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 back­
bone.
The main TCU has not received communication Check that the ABS controller is SAE J1939 ready (not SAE J1922).
93 from the ABS. ASR carrier engine control active Check that the ABS is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 back­
message error: EBC1 bone.
The main TCU has not received communication Check that the ABS controller is SAE J1939 ready (not SAE J1922).
94 from the ABS. ASR brake control active mes­ Check that the ABS is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 back­
sage error: EBC1 bone.
The main TCU has not received communication
Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
95 from the carrier engine. Cruise control active
the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
message error: CCVS
The main TCU has not received communication
Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
96 from the carrier engine. Cruise control set speed
the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
message error: CCVS
The main TCU has not received communication
Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
97 from the carrier engine. Carrier engine speed
the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
message error: EEC1
98 Input shaft speed sensor fault Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
Output shaft speed sensor #1 (the upper one). Remove and troubleshoot the transmission wiring harness. Pin 11
NOTE: Output shaft speed sensor #1 plugs into of the TCU connector and pin 4 of the upper output shaft speed
the transmission wiring harness on the left side of sensor (sensor #1) should have continuity (resistance of 0.0 to 0.5
99 the transmission. Automated shifting is restric­ ohms) and not be shorted to any other circuit. If a short or open cir­
ted but manual shifting of all gears is still pos­ cuit is found, repair or replace the wiring harness as required. If not,
sible. repair or replace the upper speed sensor as required.
Remove and troubleshoot the Link‐Belt wiring harness. Pin 7 of the
Error on output speed sensor #2 (the lower one).
TCU connector and pin 4 of the lower output shaft speed sensor
NOTE: Output shaft speed sensor #2 plugs into
(sensor #2) should all have continuity (resistance of 0.0 to 0.5 ohms)
100 the Link‐Belt wiring harness on the right side of
and not be shorted to any other circuit. If a short or open circuit is
the transmission. No functional restrictions as
found, repair or replace the wiring harness as required. If not, repair
long as speed sensor #1 signal is still available.
or replace the lower speed sensor as required.
101 Error on both output speed signals Refer to each of the output shaft speed sensor repair instructions.
Plausibility error between transmission input
Check the main TCU for programming errors. Check the transmis­
speed and output speed NOTE: The actual
sion wiring harness for short circuits or open circuits. If circuits oper­
102 speeds registered by the input shaft and output
ate correctly, repair or replace both output shaft speed sensors as
shaft speed sensors do not match the expected
required.
ratios.
The main TCU has not received communication
Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
103 from the carrier engine. Wheel‐based crane
the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
speed message error: CCVS

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-75

Operator's Manual

Fault Code Identification

Display
Fault Fault Description Repair Instructions
Code
Check that the batteries are supplying 12 VDC to the transmission
by measuring the voltage across pins G and E and across pins B
and D of the LBCE wiring harness that connects to the transmission
wiring harness. Verify that the voltage doubler is supplying 24 VDC
104 High voltage (electrical system voltage too high)
to the transmission by unplugging the main TCU and measuring the
voltage across pins 4 and 16 and across pins 5 and 17. Repair or
replace the voltage doubler as required if battery‐supplied power is
acceptable and the voltage doubler power is unacceptable.
Check that the batteries are supplying 12 VDC to the transmission
by measuring the voltage across pins G and E and across pins B
and D of the LBCE wiring harness that connects to the transmission
wiring harness. Verify that the voltage doubler is supplying 24 VDC
105 Low voltage (electrical system voltage too low)
to the transmission by unplugging the main TCU and measuring the
voltage across pins 4 and 16 and across pins 5 and 17. Repair or
replace the voltage doubler as required if battery‐supplied power is
acceptable and the voltage doubler power is unacceptable.
With the transmission wiring harness still connected to the main
TCU, check the voltage across pins 15 and 20 of the clutch actuator
assembly connector (specification is 4.75 to 5.25 VDC). If the
Clutch actuator position sensor voltage supply voltage is within the specified range, repair or replace the clutch ac­
107 out of valid range tuator assembly as required. If not, remove the transmission wiring
harness from the transmission. Check for shorts. If the wiring har­
ness has a short circuit, repair or replace it as required. If not, contact
Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
Check for continuity (0.0 to 0.5 ohms) between pins 1 and 8 of the
shift lever and pin G3 of the E‐Module. Check for continuity between
pin 3 of the shift lever and ground. Check for continuity between pin
108 Shift lever error 7 of the shift lever and pin F1 of the E‐Module. Check for continuity
between pin 9 of the shift lever and pin E3 of the E‐Module. If these
resistances are correct, repair or replace the shift lever assembly as
required.
109 Error in selector lever in upper operator's cab
Unplug the E‐Module only. Check for 58.0 to 62.0 ohms resistance
across pins D1 and D2. Unplug the transmission wiring harness.
Check for continuity (0.0 to 0.5 ohms) between pin 3 of the main
TCU connector, pin D1 of the E‐Module connector, and pin A of the
CAN terminator. Check for continuity between pin 6 of the main
TCU, pin D2 of the E‐Module connector, and pin B of the CAN ter­
minator. If any of these tests indicate issues with the wiring harness,
repair or replace the wiring harness as required. If not, check for
110 ZF CAN timeout
continuity (0.0 to 0.5 ohms) between pins 1 and 8 of the shift lever
and pin G3 of the E‐Module. Check for continuity between pin 3 of
the shift lever and ground. Check for continuity between pin 7 of the
shift lever and pin F1 of the E‐Module. Check for continuity between
pin 9 of the shift lever and pin E3 of the E‐Module. If these resist­
ances are correct, repair or replace the shift lever assembly as re­
quired. If not, contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmis­
sion specialist.
CAN: Message timeout driveline retarder config­
113 uration
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Clutch engage unintentionally at standstill, gear

114 engaged.
Error in clutch self‐adjustment process NOTE: Check the air supply for a pinched line. Check the clutch for failure
117 The clutch is unable to cycle. to stroke. Check the release fork for failure to stroke.

1-76 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Fault Code Identification

Display
Fault Fault Description Repair Instructions
Code
Check the system air pressure for 120 psi. Check the clutch
118 Clutch does not disengage actuator, release fork, push rod, and clutch assembly for damage.
Repair or replace as required.
Check the system air pressure for 120 psi. Check the clutch actuat­
Clutch does not engage/does not transmit carrier
119 engine torque or slipping closed clutch
or, release fork, push rod, and clutch assembly for damage. Repair
or replace as required.
Mechanical failure of small clutch disengage­
120 ment solenoid
Repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly as required.

Mechanical failure of large clutch disengage­

121 ment solenoid
Repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly as required.

Mechanical failure of small clutch engagement

122 solenoid
Repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly as required.

Mechanical failure of large clutch engagement

123 solenoid
Repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly as required.

Verify that the release bearing is correctly engaged to the clutch. If

it is, remove the transmission wiring harness. Check for continuity
(0.0 to 0.5 ohms) from pin 15 of the main TCU connector and the pin
124 Error on clutch actuator position sensor signal I of the clutch actuator connector. Check for shorts to the other cir­
cuits. If an issue is found with the wiring harness, repair or replace
it as required. If not, repair or replace the clutch actuator assembly
as required.
125 Pressure reduction valve fault Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
126 Pressure sensor signal fault Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
127 TCU temperature sensor signal fault Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
128 Oil temperature sensor fault Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
Short circuit to positive of the gear engage posi­
129 tion sensor signal
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to ground of the gear engage posi­

130 tion sensor signal
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Open circuit of the gear engage position sensor

131 signal
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Self adjustment error of gear engage position

Check the air supply for 120 psi. If the air supply is correct, repair
132 sensor NOTE: The gear engage position sensor
or replace the TCU as required.
is unable to cycle.
Short circuit to positive of the rail select position
133 sensor
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Short circuit to ground of the rail select position

134 sensor
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

135 Open circuit of the rail select position sensor Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
136 Gate select sensor self‐adjustment error Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
No range change group sensor signal (short cir­
137 cuit to positive)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

No range change group sensor signal (short cir­

138 cuit to ground)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

No range change group sensor signal (open cir­

139 cuit)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

140 Self‐adjustment fault of range position sensor Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
Short circuit to positive of the splitter position
141 sensor signal
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-77

Operator's Manual

Fault Code Identification

Display
Fault Fault Description Repair Instructions
Code
Short circuit to ground of the splitter position
142 sensor signal
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

143 Open circuit of the splitter position sensor signal Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
Splitter position sensor self‐adjustment fault
Verify that the air supply is 120 psi. If the air supply is correct, repair
144 NOTE: The gear engage position sensor is un­
or replace the TCU as required.
able to cycle.
Test drive the crane to verify that the transmission does not range
145 Range shift disengagement error shift correctly. Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmis­
sion specialist.
Test drive the crane to verify that the transmission does not range
shift correctly. If it does not, repair or replace the transmission as re­
146 Range shift changeover error quired. If the transmission performs a range shift correctly, but the
TCU registers a fault: Disregard the fault and clear it from TCU
memory.
Test drive the crane to verify that the transmission does not range
147 Range shift engagement error shift correctly. Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmis­
sion specialist.
Test drive the crane to verify that the transmission does not shift cor­
Splitter selection fault; splitter cylinder does not
148 disengage
rectly. Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission spe­
cialist.
Test drive the crane to verify that the transmission does not shift cor­
Splitter selection fault during the splitter selection
149 procedure
rectly. Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission spe­
cialist.
Test drive the crane to verify that the transmission does not shift cor­
Splitter selection fault; splitter cylinder does not
150 engage
rectly. Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission spe­
cialist.
Test drive the crane to verify that the transmission does not shift cor­
151 Rail select cylinder does not disengage rectly. Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission spe­
cialist.
Test drive the crane to verify that the transmission does not shift cor­
Rail selection fault during the rail selection pro­
152 cedure
rectly. Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission spe­
cialist.
Test drive the crane to verify that the transmission does not shift cor­
Rail selection fault; rail select cylinder does not
153 engage
rectly. Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission spe­
cialist.
Test drive the crane to verify that the transmission does not shift cor­
154 Main transmission gear does not disengage rectly. Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission spe­
cialist.
Test drive the crane to verify that the transmission does not shift cor­
155 Main transmission gear does not engage rectly. Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission spe­
cialist.
156 Wrong gear shifting Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
157 Selector sensor signal leaves engaged position
Test drive the crane to verify that the transmission shifts to Neutral
Gear engage position sensor signal leaves en­
158 gaged position during driving
without request. Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a trans­
mission specialist.
Test drive the crane to verify that the transmission shifts to Neutral
Range position sensor signal leaves engaged
159 position during driving
without request. Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a trans­
mission specialist.

1-78 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Fault Code Identification

Display
Fault Fault Description Repair Instructions
Code
Test drive the crane to verify that the transmission shifts to Neutral
Splitter position sensor signal leaves engaged without request. If so, repair or replace the transmission as required.
160 position during driving If the fault occurs without the transmission shifting into Neutral, repair
or replace the TCU as required.
Carrier engine does not react to torque interven­ Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
163 tion the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
The main TCU has not received communication
Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
164 from the carrier engine. Error on driver's demand
the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
carrier engine percent torque message: EEC1
The main TCU has not received communication
Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
165 from the carrier engine. Error on accelerator ped­
the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
al position message: EEC2
Permanent idle signal NOTE: The idle switch is
built into the accelerator pedal and is wired into
the carrier engine controller, not the transmission
controller or main TCU. The TCU receives the
166 status of the idle switch over the SAE J1939 bus. Check the idle switch and the status of the pedal.
The transmission is receiving contradictory mes­
sages indicating that the idle switch is open (car­
rier engine is idling) and the accelerator pedal is
pressed (carrier engine is not idling).
The main TCU has not received expected com­
Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
167 munications from the carrier engine (error on
the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
percent load at current speed message EEC2)
No idle signal or error on idle validation switch
signal (EEC2) NOTE: The idle switch is built into
the accelerator pedal and is wired into the carrier
engine controller, not the transmission controller,
or main TCU. The main TCU receives the status
168 of the idle switch over the SAE J1939 bus. The
Check the idle switch and the status of the pedal.
transmission is receiving contradictory mes­
sages indicating that the idle switch is closed
(carrier engine is not idling) and the accelerator
pedal is not pressed (carrier engine is idling).
169 Cut‐off relay in ECU does not switch off Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
Check that the batteries are supplying 12 VDC to the transmission
by measuring the voltage across pins G and E and across pins B
and D of the OEM‐supplied wiring harness that connects to the
transmission wiring harness.
Verify that the voltage doubler is supplying 24 VDC to the transmis­
No voltage supply at pin 30 or cut‐off relay in ECU
170 does not switch on
sion by unplugging the main TCU and measuring the voltage across
pins 4 and 16 and across pins 5 and 17.
Repair or replace the voltage doubler as required if the supplied
power is acceptable and the voltage doubler‐supplied power is un­
acceptable. If all power circuits operate correctly, contact Link‐Belt
Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
The main TCU has not received communication
Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
171 from the carrier engine. Error on actual carrier en­
the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
gine percent torque message: EEC1
172 Error on “Retarder lever position” Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
The main TCU has not received communication
Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
173 from the carrier engine. Error on brake switch
the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
message: CCVS

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-79

Operator's Manual

Fault Code Identification

Display
Fault Fault Description Repair Instructions
Code
CAN: Signal error Accelerator Pedal Kickdown
174 Switch
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

Remove and troubleshoot the transmission wiring harness. Pin 11

of the TCU connector, pin 10 of the voltage doubler, pin 1 of the lower
output shaft speed sensor (sensor #1), and pin A2 of the E‐Module
175 Error on “Ignition lock” signal (terminal 15) should all have continuity (resistance of 0.0 to 0.5 ohms) and not be
shorted to any other circuit. If a short or open circuit is found, repair
or replace the wiring harness as required. If not, repair or replace as
required the lower speed sensor (sensor #1).
The main TCU has not received communication
Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
177 from the carrier engine. Error: system CAN bus
the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
off
CAN error warning. The main TCU has identified
Verify that the backbone is correctly terminated with no short circuits
178 CAN error frames not serious enough to cause a
or open circuits.
bus off situation
CAN queue overrun. The SAE J1939 bus is not
Verify that the backbone is correctly terminated with no short circuits
functioning correctly
or open circuits.
NOTE: The backbone of the SAE J1939 bus is
179 terminated at each end with a 120 ohm resistor.
NOTE: The resistance across pins C and D of the 9 pin diagnostic
connector will be about 60 ohms if both terminating resistors are in
Each component communicating over the bus
place (120 ohms if only one is installed).
must connect into the backbone.
The main TCU has not received communication Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
180 from the carrier engine (CAN EEC1 timeout) the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
The main TCU has not received communication Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
181 from the carrier engine (CAN EEC2 timeout) the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
The main TCU has not received communication Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
182 from the carrier engine (CAN CCVS timeout) the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
The main TCU has not received communication Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
183 from the carrier engine (CAN ERC1_ER timeout) the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
CAN message: Timeout “ERC1_DR” (driveline
184 retarder) (Electronic Retarder Controller 1)
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

188 ECU fault - wrong interrupt Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
189 ECU fault - stack watch Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
EOL EEPROM parameter out of valid
190 range
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

191 EOL EEPROM parameter checksum error Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
Check for obstructions within the transmission cooler, cooler lines,
193 ECU temperature too high and by‐pass valve. Check the oil level (both low and high oil levels
may lead to overheating).
Check that the SAE J1939 is activated within the ECM. Check that
194 Both sources for front axle speed not available
the ECM is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 backbone.
196 CAN “Vehicle distance” timeout Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
The main TCU has not received communication Check that the ABS controller is SAE J1939 ready (not SAE J1922).
197 from the ABS. Error on front axle speed mes­ Check that the ABS is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 back­
sage: WSI bone.
The main TCU has not received communication Check that the ABS controller is SAE J1939 ready (not SAE J1922).
198 from the ABS. Error on relative wheel speeds Check that the ABS is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 back­
message: WSI bone.
Check that the ABS controller is SAE J1939 ready (not SAE J1922).
The main TCU has not received communication
199 from the ABS (CAN WSI timeout)
Check that the ABS is correctly connected into the SAE J1939 back­
bone.

1-80 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Fault Code Identification

Display
Fault Fault Description Repair Instructions
Code
Plausibility failure activation of carrier/upper op­
228 erator's cab
Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.

250 Internal shifter error detected Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
251 Internal error in the e‐module detected Contact Link‐Belt Distributor and request a transmission specialist.
Remove and troubleshoot the transmission wiring harness. Pin 2 of
the TCU connector and pin F3 of the E‐Module (sensor #2) should
Not sup­
Error on ISO 14230 communications line have continuity (resistance of 0.0 to 0.5 ohms) and not be shorted
ported to any other circuit. If a short or open circuit is found, repair or replace
the wiring harness as required. If not, replace the E‐Module.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-81

Operator's Manual
Connector Pin Assignments

1 2
3 5
2
6 4 9
7 8
10 12 14 4 3 1 4
11 13
15 16 17
1 3 2
18 19 20

Main TCU Output Shaft Speed

Connector Sensor Connector
(Both Harnesses) (Both Harnesses) Neutral Switch Connector

C
C
12 11 10 9 8 7

A B A B

1 2 3 4 5 6

SAE J1939 Private CAN

Voltage Doubler Connector Connector Connector

Pin 1 (+) 1 10
6
6 3 Pin 2 K 2 11
7
Pin 3 (-) 3 12
5 2 8
Pin 4 L
4 13
4 1 Pin 5 Pog 9
5 14
Pin 6

Transmission Diagnostic Connector E‐Module Shift Lever

Resistance Specifications
Resistance (Measured
Component Across Pins 1 and 2)
Neutral Switch Not in
In Neutral Neutral
0.0-0.5 ohms open circuit Transmission Display

Figure 1-56
Connector Pin Assignments

1-82 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Carrier Control Display

0
B
Carrier Cab Control Console
1
2 3

3
4
5
Max
0 = OFF
B = Bremsomat
1-5 = Intarder Brake Level
1. Intarder Control Switch
2. Intarder Indicator Light
3. Intarder Control Lever Carrier Steering Column

Figure 1-57
Transmission Intarder Controls

Transmission Intarder Bremsomat Mode

The crane is equipped with a transmission intarder.
The intarder is an additional brake integrated with the
transmission and functions hydro‐dynamically. When
used properly, the intarder assists in crane decelera­
tion which also reduces service brake wear. Use the
intarder control switch and the intarder control lever to
activate and to turn the intarder on or off. Refer to
Figure 1-57. The intarder has a Bremsomat mode
and five intarder braking levels.
The “Bremsomat” mode can be used to help keep the
crane speed constant when driving on downhill
grades. The necessary braking torque is automatically
adjusted to help maintain the set speed through the
transmission electronics. If the Bremsomat’s braking
effort is no longer sufficient to keep the speed constant
on a downhill grade, use the carrier service brake to
prevent over‐speeding the carrier engine and to keep
the crane at a safe speed.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-83

Operator's Manual
To Set Bremsomat
1. Move the intarder control switch to the ON position.
2. Adjust crane speed to the safest control speed to
descend the grade.
3. Move the intarder control lever to the “B” Bremso­
mat position.
4. Remove your foot from the accelerator. The crane
should maintain the set speed.
CAUTION
With the intarder activated, do not descend a
grade with the transmission in neutral
(coasting) and ensure that the carrier engine
speed does not decrease below 1,600 rpm.
Carrier engine may overheat. If necessary,
downshift by one gear to increase the carrier
engine speed
Note: When setting the Bremsomat and cruise con­
trol systems at the same time, ensure that the speed
set for cruise control is lower than the Bremsomat
set speed. If this is not done, the systems will work
against each another.
Note: Pressing the accelerator pedal will deactiv­
ate the Bremsomat set speed allowing the crane
speed to increase. Taking your foot off the acceler­
ator pedal re‐activates the Bremsomat allowing the
crane to return to the set speed.
To Cancel Bremsomat
1. Move the intarder control lever to the “0” (OFF) or a
braking position “1” through “5”.
To Change Bremsomat
1. Change the road speed by depressing the acceler­
ator or carrier service brake pedal. The new road
speed is automatically saved.
1-84 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Transmission Intarder Operation
Once the transmission intarder control switch is moved
to the “ON” position, operation is controlled by the in­
tarder control lever. The intarder indicator light will
illuminate on the display for approximately 3 seconds
when the switch is turned on as a means of testing the
light. If the intarder indicator light begins to flash yel­
low, an error has been detected within the system.
Refer to Error Codes on the intarder diagnostic screen
of the carrier control display. Also refer to the crane's
Shop Manual for a complete error code listing and
troubleshooting guidelines. The intarder indicator light
will illuminate continuously when the intarder control
lever is moved from the “0” (OFF) position to Bremso­
mat “B”. Numbers 1 through 5 within the indicator light
indicate the active braking position. Progressing
through each braking position increases braking level
as follows:
20% Brake Level
40% Brake Level
60% Brake Level
80% Brake Level
100% Brake Level
For smooth operation and minimal heat generation,
start with intarder control lever in the lowest position
and slowly move the intarder control lever towards the
maximum position as increased deceleration is re­
quired. If the required brake power is higher than the
intarder’s maximum braking power, use the service
brake to prevent over‐speeding the carrier engine and
to keep the crane at a safe speed.
To deactivate the intarder, slowly move the intarder
control lever to the “0” OFF position (intarder indicator
light goes out). Move the intarder control switch to
the OFF position.
 Operator's Manual
Carrier Engine Brake
The carrier engine brake is a device which uses the car­
rier engine to aid in slowing down and controlling the
carrier speed. When activated, the carrier engine
brake alters the operation of the carrier engine's ex­
haust valves so the carrier engine works as a power‐ab­
sorbing air compressor. This provides a retarding ac­
tion to the wheels.

WARNING
The carrier engine brake is a crane slowing
device. It is not a substitute for the service
braking system. The carrier's service brakes
must be used to bring the crane to a complete
stop.
4

Carrier Engine Brake Controls 3 2 1

The carrier engine brake “retard” level switch is on the
transmission shift console. Refer to Figure 1-58. The
switch has three retarding levels to regulate the
amount of braking force made available: 1 (Low), 2
(Med), and 3 (High).
Carrier Engine Brake Operation
Once the carrier engine brake switch is moved to the
“ON” position, operation of the carrier engine brake is
fully automatic. Since the carrier engine brake de­
pends on the free flow of carrier engine oil for opera­
tion, allow the carrier engine to warm up before turning
the carrier engine brake on. The carrier engine brake
can be left on whenever driving, providing the weather
and road conditions are favorable.
To activate the carrier engine brake, simply remove
your foot from the carrier throttle pedal. Note that the
carrier engine brake remains activated even after the
carrier service brake pedal has been depressed, giving
the combined power of both the carrier engine and ser­
vice brakes. The carrier engine brake alone will slow
the carrier. However, it is essential that the service
brakes be used to bring the carrier to a complete stop.
To deactivate the carrier engine brake, reapply the car­
rier throttle pedal or move the carrier engine brake
switch to the “OFF” position. Always ensure the carrier
engine brake switch is turned off before the carrier en­
gine is shutdown.
1. Cruise ON/OFF Switch 3. Carrier Engine Brake
2. Cruise SET/RESUME “Retard” Level Switch
Switch 4. Carrier Engine Brake ON/
OFF Switch
Figure 1-58
Transmission Shift Console
Descending A Grade
An explanation of “control speed” is helpful in under­
standing how to use the carrier engine brake while des­
cending a grade. Control speed is the constant speed at
which the forces pushing the carrier forward on a grade
are equal to the forces holding it back, without using the
service brakes. For example, it may be safe to descend a
grade at 10 mph (16km/h), without a carrier engine
brake. With the carrier engine brake, it might be safe to
descend that same grade at 25 mph (40km/h), and still
remain under control.
Under some circumstances, descending a grade at a
faster rate than the control speed may be desired. This
can be done by selecting a higher gear, or the “1” posi­
tion on the carrier engine brake switch. However, it
may require applying the service brakes intermittently
to prevent over‐speeding the carrier engine and to
keep the crane at a safe speed.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-85

Operator's Manual
WARNING
Frequent use of the carrier service brakes,
while descending a grade, will cause them to
heat up and reduce their stopping ability. The
result can be dangerous “brake fade”. Use
carrier engine brake, transmission intarder,
and carrier service brakes as required to
control crane speed.
Since the carrier engine brake is most effective at rated
carrier engine speeds, gear selection is very important.
Maximum retarding power is obtained by using the
lowest possible gear without exceeding the recom­
mended carrier engine speed. Refer to the carrier en­
gine manufacturer's manual for rated carrier engine
speeds.
There are other circumstances when descending a
grade at a rate slower than the control speed may be
desired. This is done by selecting a lower gear, one
that will not over‐speed the carrier engine. Apply the
carrier service brakes to obtain the desired lower
speed.
As a general rule for maintaining control speed, estim­
ate the gear used to climb the grade. Usually this is the
same gear that can be used for a controlled descent
with a carrier engine brake.
It's always a good idea to determine if the carrier engine
brake is operational before beginning a long steep des­
cent. This can be done by briefly lifting your foot off the
throttle. You should feel the carrier engine brake going
into action.
1-86 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Slippery Pavement
If the carrier engine brake operation is unfamiliar, it is
recommended that it not be used on slick roads until
you gain some experience with it on dry pavement.
Since the operation of any vehicle under slippery con­
ditions is unpredictable, keep necessary braking dis­
tance when testing service brakes or carrier engine
brake.
When driving on wet or icy pavement, start with the car­
rier engine brake switch in the “OFF” position and use
the same gear you would normally use under these
conditions.
Before activating the carrier engine brake, confirm that
the crane is maintaining traction and stability using the
natural retarding of the carrier engine alone.
If the crane is maintaining traction, activate the carrier
engine brake by moving the switch to the “1” position.
If the drive wheels begin to lock or there is a “fishtail”
motion, immediately turn off the carrier engine brake
switch. Don't turn the carrier engine brake on until road
conditions improve.
If there was no tendency for the drive wheels to lose
traction and greater slowing power is desired, move
the control switch to the “2” position. If the drive wheels
tend to lock, immediately switch the carrier engine
brake switch into the number “1” position. Do not at­
tempt to use the “2” or “3” position until road conditions
improve.
In changing weather conditions, check the proper pos­
itioning of the control switch often. Remember: do not
skip a step when operating the carrier engine brake
switch. Always go from the “1” position, then to the “2”
position, and then to the “3” position.

Cruise Controls
The crane is equipped with cruise control that allows
the crane to maintain a constant speed at or above 30
mph (48km/h). The controls are on the transmission
shift console. Refer to Figure 1-58.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control in heavy traffic or
on roads that are winding, slippery, or
unpaved.
To Set The Cruise Control
1. Press and release the cruise “On” switch.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed above 30 mph
(48km/h) using the accelerator pedal.
3. Press and release the cruise “Set” switch. This will
set the speed. Holding the cruise “Set” switch will
allow the crane speed to decrease. Release of the
switch sets cruise to the lower speed.
4. Remove your foot from the accelerator. The crane
should maintain the set speed.
Note: Pressing the accelerator pedal will allow
the crane speed to increase. Taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal allows the crane to re­
turn to the set speed.
Resetting The Cruise Control
To reset the cruise control to a lower speed, do any of
the following:
 Press and hold the cruise “Set” switch. Let the crane
slow down to the desired speed and release the
cruise “Set” switch. The speed is now set at the lower
speed.
 “Tap down” - this allows the current speed to de­
crease in increments of 1 mph (1.6km/h) by a moment­
ary tap of the cruise “Set” switch. Multiple taps of the
cruise “Set” switch will decrease the speed 1 mph
(1.6km/h) for each tap.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
To reset the cruise control to a higher speed, do any of
the following:
 Accelerate to the desired speed, then press and re­
lease the cruise “Set” switch.
 Press and hold the “Res” (cruise resume) switch, al­
low the crane to accelerate, and then release the
switch.
 “Tap up” - this allows the current speed to increase
in increments of 1 mph (1.6km/h) by a momentary
tap of the “Res” switch. Multiple taps of the “Res”
switch will increase the speed 1 mph (1.6km/h) for
each tap.
Suspending And Resuming A Set Speed
To suspend the cruise control, do any of the following:
 Depress the carrier service brake pedal. The cruise
controls are suspended, but can be reset by press­
ing the cruise “Set” switch or return to the previous
set speed with the cruise “Res” switch.
 The carrier engine speed drops below the set point
(1,000 rpm) or the crane speed drops below the
mph set point (30 mph [48km/h]). The cruise con­
trols are suspended, but can be reset by pressing
the cruise “Set” switch or return to the previous set
speed with the “Res” switch.
Turning The Cruise Control Off
To deactivate cruise controls, do any of the following:
 Press the cruise “Off” switch. All cruise control
switches are off. To resume cruise control, press the
cruise “On” switch and reset the speed control by
pressing the cruise “Set” switch.
 The cruise control switches are also turned off each
time the carrier engine ignition switch is turned off.
WARNING
Always wear the seat belt while driving the
crane. The seat belt must be snug and low
across the hips.
1-87
Operator's Manual
1

2 9

3 8

4 7

5 6

1. Rear Steering Display 6. Diagonal Steering (Crab) Select Switch

2. Left Manual Steering Switch 7. Reduced Tailswing Select Switch
3. Steering Selection Switch 8. Menu Switch
4. Minimum Turning Circle (All Wheel) Select Switch 9. Right Manual Steering Switch
5. Manual Steering Mode Switch

Figure 1-59
Rear Steering Control Panel

Steering The Crane Steering Controls

The crane can be steered in one ON‐ROAD mode and
four OFF‐ROAD modes. The ON‐ROAD mode is used
anytime extended or high speed travel is required es­
pecially on a paved roadway. The OFF‐ROAD mode is
used in order to provide maximum maneuverability on
the job site at low speeds. Use the following along with
Figure 1-59 and Figure 1-60 to steer the crane as re­
quired.
WARNING
Do not use any OFF‐ROAD steering mode for
extended or high speed travel as steering
behavior may be unfamiliar and a loss of
crane control could occur.
1. Rear Steering Display
The rear steering display will display error codes
and other information regarding rear steering op­
erations and maintenance.
2. Left Manual Steering Switch
This switch is used to manually turn the rear
wheels to the left. The indicator light above
the switch will illuminate to alert the driver/
operator that left manual steering is activated. An
indicator bar will appear in the rear steering display
and will move to the left relative to turning of the left
wheels. The steering position of the left rear
wheels can be observed in the rear view mirrors.
When in maintenance mode, this switch is used as
the “-” (minus) switch to scroll backward. This
switch is active only when steering selection switch
is in the OFF‐ROAD position.

1-88 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


3. Steering Selection Switch
This switch is used to select the desired
steering mode. Press the switch in the
ON‐ROAD position for conventional steer­
ing anytime extended or high speed travel is re­
quired especially on a paved roadway. High speed
travel is any traveling above 15 mph (24km/h).
Press the switch to the OFF ROAD position to acti­
vate the rear steer functions for maneuvering the
crane around the job site. When in maintenance
mode, this switch is used as the “ESC” or escape
key to back out of a particular function or return to
the previous menu.
4. Minimum Turning Circle (All Wheel)
Select Switch
This switch is used to select minimum turn­
ing circle steering mode. The indicator light
above the switch will illuminate to alert the
driver/operator that minimum turning circle steer­
ing mode is activated. This switch is active only
when steering selection switch is in the OFF‐ROAD
position. When in maintenance mode, this switch
is used as the number one (1) key.
5. Manual Steering Mode Switch
This switch is used to select manual steer­
ing mode. Press this switch to activate,
then use the left/right manual steering
switches for steering the rear axles. When in main­
tenance mode, this switch is used as the number
two (2) key. This switch is active only when steer­
ing selection switch is in the OFF‐ROAD position.
6. Diagonal Steering (Crab) Select Switch
This switch is used to select diagonal (crab)
steering mode. The indicator light above
the switch will illuminate to alert the driver/
operator that diagonal steering mode is activated.
An indicator bar will appear in the rear steering dis­
play and will move to the left or right relative to turn­
ing of the wheels. This switch is active only when
steering selection switch is in the OFF‐ROAD posi­
tion. When in maintenance mode, this switch is
used as the number three (3) key.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
7. Reduced Tailswing Select Switch
This switch is for moving away form a barri­
er without the tailswing associated with
conventional steering mode. This switch is
active only when steering selection switch is in the
OFF‐ROAD position. When in maintenance mode,
this switch is used as the number four (4) key.
8. Menu Switch
This switch is used to display the rear steer­
ing error codes. Press and release to dis­
play error codes in the rear steering display.
Press and hold the switch for approximately twenty
seconds for maintenance and service options
such as alignment, to view operating data, and in­
put/outputs. When in maintenance mode, this
switch is used as the enter “↵” or select key.
9. Right Manual Steering Switch
This switch is used to manually turn the rear
wheels to the right. The indicator light
above the switch will illuminate to alert the
driver/operator that right manual steering is acti­
vated. A indicator bar will appear in the rear steer­
ing display and will move to the right relative to
turning of the right wheels. The steering position of
the right rear wheels can be observed in the rear
view mirrors. When in maintenance mode, this
switch is used as the “+” (plus) switch to scroll for­
ward. This switch is active only when steering
selection switch is in the OFF‐ROAD position.
1-89
Operator's Manual
ON‐HIGHWAY (PRIMARY)

Front Front Front

Conventional Conventional Conventional

(v18.6 mph [30kph]) (18.6-31 mph [30-50kph]) (u31 mph [50kph])

Figure 1-60
On Highway Steering Mode

On‐Highway (Primary) Steer Mode This mode is the default at ignition start‐up or is selec­
ted by pressing the switch to the ON‐ROAD position if
The On‐Highway (Primary) steer mode is similar to that in OFF ROAD mode. Use this steer mode for all ex­
of an automobile. However the rear wheels will auto­ tended or high speed travel.
matically steer on combination with the front wheel
based on crane travel speed. The front wheels are con­
trolled by the steering wheel (turn clockwise for right
turn or counterclockwise for left turn). All the rear
wheels remain in the straight ahead, locked position at
speeds greater than 31 mph (50km/h). At speeds less
than 18.6 mph (30km/h), all the rear wheels will turn
within seven degrees simultaneously with the front
wheels to aid in slow speed maneuvers. At speeds
between 18.6 mph (30km/h) and 31 mph (50km/h),
only the rear wheels on axle five will turn within seven
degrees simultaneously with the front wheels.

1-90 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


OFF‐ROAD
Front Front
Minimum Turning
Circle (All Wheel) Reduced Tailswing
Figure 1-61
Off‐Road Steering Modes
Minimum Turning Circle (All‐Wheel) Steer
Mode
WARNING
Do not use Minimum Turning Circle
(All‐Wheel) steer mode for extended or high
speed travel as steering behavior may be
unfamiliar and a loss of crane control could
occur.
Do not travel with the upper facing over the
side. The crane may tip over causing serious
personal injury and/or major crane damage.
This steer mode allows the rear wheels to automatically
be steered together with the front wheels when turning
the steering wheel. The front wheels turn in one direc­
tion and the rear wheels turn in the opposite direction.
This results in a greatly reduced turning radius that al­
lows extra maneuverability in certain job site condi­
tions. Use this steer mode for job site travel only; not for
extended or highway travel. Use the following for all‐
wheel steering.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
Front Front
Diagonal (Crab) Manual
1. Bring the crane to a complete stop.
2. Press the Steering Selection Switch to the
OFF‐ROAD position to activate the rear steer
functions.
3. Press the Minimum Turning Circle (All Wheel) Se­
lect Switch.
4. Travel the crane slowly and cautiously.
To Deactivate Minimum Turning Circle (All‐Wheel)
Steer Mode
1. Bring the crane to a complete stop.
2. Press the Steering Selection Switch to the
ON‐ROAD position.
3. Turn the steering wheel to position the rear wheels
straight ahead; the rear wheels should center and
lock.
4. The indicator light above the Minimum Turning
Circle (All Wheel) switch should go out. If indicator
light does not go out, repeat deactivation proce­
dure.
1-91
Operator's Manual
Reduced Tailswing Steer Mode
WARNING
Do not use Reduced Tailswing steer mode for
extended or high speed travel as steering
behavior may be unfamiliar and a loss of
crane control could occur.
Do not travel with the upper facing over the
side. The crane may tip over causing serious
personal injury and/or major crane damage.
This steer mode allows steering the front and rear
wheels simultaneously in the same direction which
moves the crane in the diagonal path of travel. This
gives the driver/operator another method of maneuver­
ing the crane where job site conditions require it such
as moving away from a barrier. Use this steer mode for
job site travel only; not for extended or highway travel.
Use the following for diagonal (crab) steering.
1. Bring the crane to a complete stop.
2. Press the Steering Selection Switch to the
OFF‐ROAD position to activate the rear steer
functions.
3. Press the Reduced Tailswing Select switch. Turn
the steering wheel slowly until the indicator light
above the switch flashes.
4. Travel the crane slowly and cautiously.
To Deactivate Reduced Tailswing Steer Mode
1. Bring the crane to a complete stop.
2. Press the Steering Selection Switch to the
ON‐ROAD position.
3. Turn the steering wheel to position the rear wheels
straight ahead; the rear wheels should center and
lock.
4. The indicator light above the Reduced Tailswing
Select switch should go out. If indicator light does
not go out, repeat deactivation procedure.
1-92 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Diagonal (Crab) Steer Mode
WARNING
Do not use Diagonal (Crab) Steer Mode steer
mode for extended or high speed travel as
steering behavior may be unfamiliar and a
loss of crane control could occur.
Do not travel with the upper facing over the
side. The crane may tip over causing serious
personal injury and/or major crane damage.
This steer mode allows steering the front and rear
wheels simultaneously in the same direction which
moves the crane in the diagonal path of travel. This
gives the operator another method of maneuvering the
crane where job site conditions require it. Use this
steer mode for job site travel only; not for extended or
highway travel.
1. Bring the crane to a complete stop.
2. Press the Steering Selection Switch to the
OFF‐ROAD position to activate the rear steer
functions.
3. Press the Diagonal (Crab) Select Switch.
4. Travel the crane slowly and cautiously.
To Deactivate Minimum Turning Circle (All‐Wheel)
Steer Mode
1. Bring the crane to a complete stop.
2. Press the Steering Selection Switch to the
ON‐ROAD position.
3. Turn the steering wheel to position the rear wheels
straight ahead; the rear wheels should center and
lock.
4. The indicator light above the Diagonal (Crab)
switch should go out. If indicator light does not go
out, repeat deactivation procedure.
 Operator's Manual
Manual Steer Mode Steering System Error Codes
If a steering warning light illuminates and an audible
alarm sounds, there is a fault in the steering electron­
WARNING ics. Properly park the crane and shutdown the carrier
Do not use Manual steer mode for extended or engine. Restart the carrier engine. If the fault is not
high speed travel as steering behavior may be cleared, press and release the Menu Switch on the rear
unfamiliar and a loss of crane control could steering control panel. Refer to Figure 1-59. The
occur. steering error code will appear in the display area of the
rear steering control panel. The first error code(s) is for
Do not travel with the upper facing over the
the third (front‐rear) axle. If more than one error code
side. The crane may tip over causing serious
exists for the third axle, they will appear successively.
personal injury and/or major crane damage.
To read the error code(s) for the fourth (center‐rear)
axle, press and release the Menu Switch again. Press
This steer mode allows the rear wheels to be indepen­ the Menu Switch again to read the error code(s) for the
dently steered from the front wheels by manually push­ fifth (rear‐rear) axle. Refer to the crane's Shop Manual
ing the steering switches. The front wheels are for error code listing and troubleshooting.
steered by the steering wheel and the rear wheels are
steered by the control switches. This results in multiple
turning conditions for extra maneuverability in certain
job site conditions. Use this steer mode for job site
travel only; not for extended or highway travel. Use the
following for manual steering.
1. Bring the crane to a complete stop and align the
front wheels in the straight‐ahead position.
2. Press the Steering Selection Switch to the
OFF‐ROAD position to activate the rear steer
functions.
3. Press the Manual Steering Mode switch.
4. Press the Left or Right Manual Steering Switch to
turn the rear wheel in the desired direction. The in­
dicator light above the switch should illuminate.
5. Travel the crane slowly and cautiously.

To Deactivate Manual Steer Mode

1. Bring the crane to a complete stop.
2. Press the Steering Selection Switch to the
ON‐ROAD position.
3. Turn the steering wheel to position the rear wheels
straight ahead; the rear wheels should center and
lock.
4. The indicator lights above the left and right Manual
Steering switch should go out. If indicator light
does not go out, repeat deactivation procedure.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-93

Operator's Manual
2 1
1. Retaining Knob
2. Solenoid Valve
Figure 1-62
Check Valve
Emergency Rear Axle Wheel
Alignment
This procedure covers emergency rear wheel align­
ment which may be required to return rear steered
axles to the locked center position In the event of a rear
steering malfunction.
DANGER
Emergency rear axle wheel alignment must
never be used for normal crane operation.
Driving the crane is possible with front axle
steering with limitations as turning radius is
increased. Rear steering malfunction must be
repaired before placing the crane back into
service.
DANGER
Use extreme caution when operating the steer­
ing with someone under the carrier. The hy­
draulic force behind the steering components is
capable of seriously injuring anyone caught in
the steering linkage or trapped behind a tire.
Post a signalman to watch carefully to ensure
the safety of the person under the carrier.
1. Lower, detach, and secure load, as required.
2. Fully retract and position the boom, as required.
3. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
1-94 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
A A
1
1
2
2
B B
3
Front
3
4
1. Tire 3. Carrier Frame
2. Scribed Lines 4. Tie Rod
Figure 1-63
Rear Wheel Alignment
4. Raise the crane on outriggers to get the tires off the
ground. Release the park brake.
Refer to Figure 1-63.
5. Scribe a line on the approximate center of each tire
by bringing a pointed, stationary object into con­
tact with the tread while rotating the wheel. The line
must begin and end at the same point on the tread.
Refer to Figure 1-62 and Figure 1-203.
6. Locate rear steering hydraulic check valve block
and proportional valve associated with the non-
centered rear axle.
7. Label for assembly purposes and disconnect the
electrical connections to the solenoids.
8. Remove all blue solenoid retaining knobs, o­rings
and solenoids from check valve block.
9. Re­install blue knobs back onto the check valve to
engage the manual plunger of each valve.
CAUTION
Do not lose o-rings associated with the
solenoids and the retaining knobs.
10. Apply park brake and retract outriggers to allow
the entire weight of the crane to rest on the tires.
Refer to Figure 1-63.
11. Measure the distances at point “A” and point “B” on
the left and right side tire. The distance at “A”
should be 0-0.2 in (0-5mm) greater than at “B”
for left and right tires.
Note: For the center position, the difference
between dimension “A” and “B” should be equal
left to right.
 Operator's Manual

1 3
5 6

2 4

Axle 3 And 4 Axle 5

1. Axle 4 Steer Left 3. Axle 4 Steer Right 5. Axle 5 Steer Left

2. Axle 3 Steer Left 4. Axle 3 Steer Right 6. Axle 5 Steer Right

Figure 1-64
Proportional Valves

Refer to Figure 1-62 and Figure 1-203.

CAUTION
Do not manually engage the the proportional
valve with sharp edged or pointed objects.
Damage to the valve can occur resulting in
valve failure. Always use a blunt object to
manually engage the proportional valves.
Refer to Figure 1-64.
12. If adjustment is required, push the rear steering
proportional valve for corresponding axle and
wheel to center the tires.
13. Remove blue solenoid retaining knobs from check
valve block and re­install solenoids, o­rings and
retaining knobs back onto check valve assembly.
14. Repeat Steps 5­12 for the other two axles if
required.
15. Travel crane forward at least 50 ft (15m) and repeat
Steps 11-15 on each axle to check the
adjustments. The difference between dimensions
“A” and “B” must be equal on all the rear axles.
16. If the distance at “A” is not 0-0.2 in (0-5mm)
greater than at “B”, mechanical adjustments may
be required to obtain the proper alignment. Refer
to Rear Axle Wheel Alignment in the crane's Shop
Manual.
17. Once the wheels are centered, tie back the loose
wires to the solenoids and make the necessary
repairs to the steering system.
18. Once repairs have been made, make the electrical
connections to the solenoid as labeled during re­
moval.
19. Test all steering functions before placing the crane
in service.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-95

Operator's Manual

Front
8

1 7

Bottom View
1. Axles 3 & 4 Proportional Valve 4. Axle 5 (Rear‐Rear Axle) 7. Axle 3 (Front‐Rear)
2. Axles 4 Check Valve Block 5. Axle 5 Proportional Valve 8. Axles 3 Check Valve Block
3. Axles 5 Check Valve Block 6. Axle 4 (Center‐Rear Axle)

Figure 1-65
Rear Steering Valve Locations

1-96 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

1. Power Panel
2. Battery Disconnect Switches
3. Battery Box

Figure 1-66
Carrier Electrical Component Locations

Carrier Battery Disconnect

Switches
The carrier battery disconnect switches are behind the
carrier cab and battery box in the left fender. Refer to
Figure 1-66 and Figure 1-67. Move the disconnect
switches to the “Off” position any time welding is being
done on the crane to protect the cranes electronic com­
ponents from damage due to an electric arc type weld­
er.

Note: If the batteries are disconnected, the start‐up

time for on‐board computer systems will be longer
than normal.

CAUTION Figure 1-67

Major damage may occur to the electronic
equipment from welding on the crane prior to
turning disconnect switches to the “OFF”
position.
The carrier ignition switch should be shut off
at least 70 seconds prior to turning
disconnect switches to the “OFF” position.
Carrier Battery Disconnect Switches
1. Shutdown the carrier engine and wait at least 70
seconds.
2. Turn positive disconnect to the OFF position.
3. Turn negative disconnect to the OFF position.
4. Return disconnects to the ON position in reverse order.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-97

Operator's Manual
1 2 3

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

15

21 16

20
17

19 18

1. Steer Computer 2 11. Intarder Voltage Doubler 18. 50 Amp Resettable Circuit Breaker
2. Suspension Controller #2 12. Steer Computer 1 Power Relay (Fuel Heater)
3. Steer Computer 1 13. Steer Computer 2 Power Relay 19. 40 Amp Circuit Breaker
4. Run Relay 1 14. Diode Pack 2 (Suspension)
5. Run Relay 2 15. Batteries 20. 105 Amp Resettable Circuit Breaker
6. Fuel Heater Relay 16. 40 Amp Resettable Circuit Breaker (Run Relay 1/Carrier Fuses :L-T &
7. ABS Electronic Control Unit (ECU) (Headlights) W-FF)
8. Steer Assist Valve Relay 17. 30 Amp Resettable Circuit Breaker 21. 105 Amp Resettable Circuit Breaker
9. Diode Pack 1 (Engine ECM) (Run Relay 2/Carrier Fuses B-K &
10. ZF Transmission Voltage Doubler GG-PP)

Figure 1-68
Carrier Battery Box And Power Panel

1-98 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


Carrier Battery Box
The battery box is in the hood behind the exhaust and
carrier cab. Refer to Figure 1-66. The battery box
houses three 12 volt heavy duty maintenance free bat­
teries and several other carrier electrical components.
Refer to Figure 1-68. Inspect the batteries, battery
cables, and connections every 50 hours of operation.
Check that the battery connections are secure and cor­
rosion free. If corrosion exists, remove the battery
cables from the terminals and clean them with a wire
brush. Install the cables and apply a small amount of
grease to each terminal to prevent corrosion.
WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
ABS Electronic Control Unit (ECU)
The ABS electronic control unit is in the carrier battery
box. Refer to Anti‐lock Brake System (ABS) in this Sec­
tion of this Operator's Manual for additional informa­
tion. The ABS electronic control unit controls and mon­
itors the ABS system and communicates with other
systems on the crane. The ABS electronic control unit
also contains self‐testing diagnostic circuitry that con­
tinuously checks for the normal operation of internal
components and circuitry, as well as external ABS
components and wiring.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
Carrier Power Panel
The carrier power panel is above the battery box in the
left front fender just behind the carrier cab. Refer to
Figure 1-66 and Figure 1-68. Circuit breakers that
protect the carrier electrical system are in the carrier
power panel. Also, a label which designates the carrier
electrical circuit protected by each breaker is on the
carrier power panel. If an electrical malfunction occurs
within these circuits, reset and/or check these break­
ers as required.
Rear Steer Controllers
The rear steer controllers monitor the rear steering
functions. They contain an interface that can be used
during rear steer calibration procedures. Use the
menu button on the rear steering control panel in the
carrier cab to access maintenance and service menus.
After these menus are accessed, the interface on the
controllers can be used to perform the calibration pro­
cedures. Steering controllers should be calibrated by a
qualified technician. Contact your Link‐Belt Distributor
for assistance when servicing the steering system.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Dosing Control
Module
The diesel exhaust fluid dosing control module is in the
power panel above the battery box in the left front fend­
er just behind the carrier cab. Refer to Figure 1-66
and Figure 1-68. The dosing control module commu­
nicates with the carrier engine control module to calcu­
late and control the amount of diesel exhaust fluid
sprayed into the exhaust stream during an exhaust gas
treatment cycle.
1-99
Operator's Manual

Carrier Control Display

Carrier Cab Dash Panel

5 6

Carrier Cab Electrical Center Carrier Cab Control Console

1. ABS Controller 4. ATC Indicator Light
2. ABS Warning Light 5. Anti‐lock Brake System (ABS) Diagnostic Connector
3. Dolly/Trailer ABS Warning Light (If Equipped) 6. Off‐Road Traction Control Switch

Figure 1-69
ABS Components

The system operates with a computer that optimizes

Anti‐lock Brake System (ABS)
This crane is equipped with an anti‐lock brake system.
This system helps the driver/operator maintain control
by preventing the wheels from locking up during hard
braking.
crane control during braking on varying tire and road
conditions by modulating the brake pressure at each
wheel. During an anti‐lock stop, the modulating pres­
sure will not allow the wheels to lock up. This is an in­
dication that the ABS is working correctly.

1-100 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


CAUTION
The ABS may not assist the crane in stopping
quickly on wet or icy surfaces. Heavy braking
combined with poor road conditions could
cause loss of steering control.
ABS Controller
When a system malfunction has occurred, a warning
light on the Carrier Control Display in the carrier cab will
illuminate. Refer to Figure 1-69. When this light illu­
minates, a malfunction has been detected with the
ABS system. Depending on which component has
malfunctioned, the ABS may be fully or partially dis­
abled. When the ABS warning light illuminates, the
ABS system should be serviced as soon as possible.
ECU Diagnostics
The controller contains self‐testing diagnostic circuitry
that continuously checks for normal operation of in­
ternal components and circuitry, as well as external
ABS components and wiring.
Active Diagnostic Error Codes
When an error is detected in the system, the ABS con­
troller:
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
1. Illuminates the appropriate indicator light(s) and dis­
engages part or all of the ABS and Automatic Trac­
tion Control (ATC) functions.
2. Places the appropriate error code information in
the ECU memory.
3. Communicates the appropriate error code informa­
tion over the serial communications diagnostic link
as required. Diagnostic tools can be attached to the
diagnostic connector to read error codes. Refer to “
Anti‐lock Brake System (ABS) Diagnostic Connect­
or” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
Anti‐lock Brake System (ABS) Diagnostic
Connector
The ABS diagnostic connector enables technicians to
access data from the ABS control system with
hand‐held or PC‐based tools and conduct systematic
troubleshooting of ABS problems. The diagnostic con­
nector is in the electrical center behind the carrier cab
seat. Refer to Figure 1-37.
Automatic Traction Control (ATC)
The ATC feature integrated into the ABS system im­
proves control and traction during acceleration. The ABS
controller detects drive wheel slip and adjusts carrier en­
gine speed and braking to help reestablish wheel trac­
tion. In normal on highway driving, ATC is always active.
1-101
Operator's Manual
ATC Indicator Light
An ATC indicator light is included within the Carrier
Control Display. Refer to Figure 1-69. The ATC light
Illuminates:
1. During power up (e.g. when the carrier engine is
started) and turns off after the self test is com­
pleted, providing no diagnostic error codes are
present.
2. When ATC is disabled for any reason.
3. During an ATC event (the light will flash rapidly).
When ATC is no longer active, the ATC indicator
light turns off.
4. When the ECU is placed in the ATC off­road mode
(the light will flash at a rate of once every 2.5
seconds). This alerts the driver/operator that the
ATC off­road ABS mode is active.
1-102 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
ATC Off­Road ABS Mode
On some road conditions, particularly when the driving
surface is soft, the stopping distance with conventional
ABS may be longer than without ABS. This can occur
when a locked wheel on soft ground or loose gravel
pushes up the road surface in front of the tire, changing
the rolling friction value. Although stopping distance
with a locked wheel (in the absence of ABS) may be
shorter than corresponding stopping distance with
conventional ABS control, ability to steer and stability
would be reduced. The crane's ABS system is
equipped with a switch that initiates a modified ABS
control mode (known as “Off‐Road ABS") that more ef­
fectively accommodates these soft road conditions to
shorten stopping distance while maintaining ability to
steer and control the crane.
The driver/operator can activate the ATC off­road ABS
function with the Off‐Road Traction Control Switch on
the carrier cab control console. Press and release this
momentary switch to activate off‐road ABS mode. The
ATC Indicator light will flash at a rate of once every 2.5
seconds to confirm that the off‐road ABS function is ac­
tivated. To exit the off­road ABS mode, press and re­
lease the off­road ABS switch again. A new carrier igni­
tion switch cycle will also cause the ECU to deactivate
the off‐road ABS mode.
WARNING
Do not use the ATC off‐road ABS on normal,
paved road surfaces. Crane steering and
stability may be adversely affected.
 Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4 5

6
14

13

12

11 10 9 8 7
1. Power Button 6. Auto Tuning Buttons 11. WB/ALM (Weather Band/Alarm) Button
2. VOL/SEL (Volume/Select) Knob 7. APS (Auto Preset System) Button 12. Aux (Auxiliary Input 1) Jack
3. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) 8. SCN (Scan) Button 13. Mute Button
4. Manual Tune/Band/Loudness Button 9. Preset (1 to 6) Buttons 14. Mode Button
5. AUX2 Button 10. T/F (Time/Frequency) Button

Figure 1-70
Radio

Radio Operation 2. VOL/SEL (Volume/Select) Knob

The crane may be equipped with an AM/FM/Stereo ra­ The volume/select knob is used to select and con­
dio. It has an electronic station search, a memory func­ trol all functions related to the volume and sound
tion which can store favorite stations in memory, and an quality of the unit. Momentarily pressing this knob
auto preset store system that automatically selects and scrolls through the following functions appearing
memorizes stations. The radio is equipped with a Aux­ in the LCD in the order shown below:
iliary Input Audio jack on the front panel that allows the
user to listen to external sources such as Mp3 players.
Two four‐pin connectors on the rear panel accept mi­
crophone inputs for public address (PA) type capabilit­ Once you've selected the function you wish to
ies. change, you have 5 seconds to adjust the settings
before it automatically switches back to the volume
1. Power Button control (default).
Press the power button to turn the unit on; press it
again to turn the unit off. 3. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
The LCD shows the radio reception information
Note: Whenever the unit is powered on for the
such as the FM, AM, Stereo, Ch No., Reception fre­
first time, it will default to Radio mode (tuner
quency, Volume, Bass, Treble settings, etc.
mode). After initial power, it will memorize all
settings from previous mode. When ignition is
turned off while radio is operating normally, the
unit will automatically power on when ignition is
turned on again and will have memorized all set­
tings from previous mode.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-103

Operator's Manual
4. Manual Tune/Band/Loudness Button
MANUAL TUNING: To manually select a desired
frequency,turn button left or right to select the de­
sired station.
LOUDNESS: The loudness button is used to em­
phasize the bass and treble at low volume. To ac­
tivate, press and hold the BUTTON for 2 seconds.
To cancel loudness press the button again.
RADIO BAND: During radio operation, momentar­
ily pressing this button scrolls through the follow­
ing bands, appearing in the LCD, in the order
shown below:
5. AUX2 Button
When there is a Auxiliary Audio device plugged into
the connector on the rear of the unit, simply press
AUX2 button to enter into AUX2 mode.
6. Auto Tuning Buttons
To automatically select a radio station,press SEEK
UP button or TRACK DOWN button. The radio will
seek the next acceptable signal strength station
and then stop and remain at that frequency.
7. APS (Auto Preset System) Button
Pressing this button momentarily scans the sta­
tions preset 1-5 of the current radio BAND. Scan­
ning will stop at each preset station for approxim­
ately 5 seconds before continuing to the next pre­
set station, until all 5 presets have been scanned.
Press and hold this button for more than 2 seconds
and it will automatically preset 5 stations into
memory (presets 1 to 5) in order of strongest signal
strength.
8. SCN (Scan) Button
Press the Scan button to start scanning the avail­
able frequencies. Scanning will pause at each
available frequency for approximately 5 seconds
and then continue scanning. Press the Scan but­
ton to stop scanning at the current broadcast.
1-104 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
9. Preset (1 to 5) Buttons
The preset buttons are used to store favorite radio
stations into memory. 15 FM stations and 10 AM sta­
tions can be stored in memory (each button can
store 6 stations). Tune the radio to a desired station
then press and hold one of the preset buttons for 2
seconds. The desired station will now be stored in
memory. Once you have completed storing desired
radio stations, simply press each preset button mo­
mentarily to check if the correct stations have been
memorized. To select a station which is stored in
memory, momentarily press any one of the preset
buttons 1 to 5. The station stored in the preset button
will automatically be selected. The LCD will show the
preset number and frequency.
10. T/F (Time/Frequency) Button
In any mode, the time display is the default indica­
tion on the LCD. When T/F button is pressed while
time is displayed, the current frequency will appear
for approximately 6 seconds and then revert to
time indication.
Setting or Changing the time
Press and hold the T/F button until hour digit be­
gins to flash. Rotate volume control knob clock­
wise to increase hours, rotate volume control knob
counterclockwise to decrease the hours. Press
and hold T/F button again until minute digit begins
to flash. Rotate volume control knob clockwise to
increase the minutes, rotate volume control knob
counterclockwise to decrease the minutes. Once
time (Hour or Minute) has been adjusted, wait 5
seconds until time stops flashing, time is now set.
11. WB/ALM (Weather Band/Alarm) Button
Press and hold this button for 2 seconds to change
into Alarm mode. Refer to “Setting An Alarm” in this
Section of this Operator's Manual. Momentarily
press the button to change to weather band, then
press the preset buttons 1-5 to listen to WB preset
stations . Refer to “Weather Band” in this Section of
this Operator's Manual.
 Operator's Manual
12. Aux (Auxiliary Input 1) Jack 13. Mute Button
Activate the auxiliary input jack by pressing the Press this button to mute audio output. Press
Mode button until AUX In appears on the LCD. Us­ again to enable audio output.
ing an Auxiliary Device with the Auxiliary Input Jack
a. Obtain an audio cable with 1/8 (3.5mm) male 14. Mode Button
plug at each end. Press this button to toggle between radio mode
b. First connect the cable to the radio's auxiliary and auxiliary mode.
input jack, then connect the other end to an ex­
ternal audio device.
c. Press the MODE button until AUX In is dis­
played on the LCD.

Note: Before selecting AUX In mode, verify that

the cable is connected to both audio device and
the radio. Since audio devices vary in output
volume levels, it is recommended that the auxili­
ary audio device not be set at max output
volume. Very high output levels from audio
devices may cause audio distortion to the out­
put of the radio.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-105

Operator's Manual
Bass, Treble, Balance, And Fader Adjustment
These adjustments are controlled by pressing the
Volume/Select knob.
Note: If no adjustments have been made within 5
seconds, it will automatically switch back to the
Volume Control Mode.
VOLUME DSP BASS TREBLE
Sound control
Turn to select sound style
Flat, Classic,Pop,Rock, Off
Bass control
Turn left to decrease the bass.
Turn right to increase the bass.
Treble control
Turn left to decrease the treble.
Turn right to increase the treble.
Balance control
Turn left to decrease the right speaker volume.
Turn right to decrease the left speaker volume.
Fader control
Turn left to decrease the front speaker volume.
Turn right to decrease the rear speaker volume.
Radio Frequency Area Selection
Different radio frequencies are used between countries.
The frequency is set at the factory. In the event the fre­
quencies are not set, use the following procedure.
1. Push and hold the volume/select knob for approx­
imately two seconds.
2. Press MODE button repeatedly (3 times), until LCD
shows AREA.
BALANCE FADER 3. Turn volume/select knob until the desired area ap­
pears in the LCD (USA or EUROPE).
4. Press BAND button longer than 2 seconds, then re­
lease.
Beep ON, Beep 2ND Feature
BEEP ON: Every time you press a button, you will hear
a beep sound.
BEEP 2ND: You will only hear beep sound if the button
is held down for more than 2 seconds.
To change this feature, simply hold the Volume/Select
knob down until BEEP ON or BEEP 2ND appears on
the LCD. Within 5 seconds, turn the Volume/Select
knob left or right to change the setting. Now wait 5
seconds for the unit to exit this mode.

Initial Volume Adjustment

Press and hold the Volume/Select knob until BEEP ON
or BEEP 2ND appears on the LCD, release and press
the Volume/Select knob again and I-VOL 30 will ap­
pear on the LCD. Now using the Volume/Select knob,
adjust the Initial Volume to the desired setting. Once
completed, wait 5 seconds for the unit to exit this mode.

Note: If the volume level is lower than the initial

volume setting when audio unit is turned off, once
the audio unit is switched back on again, the audio
unit will remember the lower level and resume
volume at that level.

1-106 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


Setting An Alarm
When the radio is off and the ignition switch is on, the
alarm feature of the radio can be programmed as follows:
1. Press and hold the ALM button for about 2-3
seconds, ALARM ON or OFF appears on the LCD.
2. If the alarm is off, rotate the Volume/Select knob
clockwise to turn on the alarm (ALARM ON).
3. Momentarily press the ALM button again; the
hours digit flashes; rotate the Volume/Select knob
to set the hours forward (clockwise) or backward
(counterclockwise).
4. Momentarily press the ALM button again, the
minutes digit flashes, rotate the Volume/Select
knob to set the minutes forward (clockwise) or
backward (counterclockwise) as desired.
5. Press the ALM button again, and ALM SET will ap­
pear on the LCD.
Weather Band
This audio unit provides access to the weather band for
information purposes. When the WB button is
pressed, “ WB” appears on display and automatically
searches and locks in the strongest signal station.
When the WB button is pressed again, radio operation
returns to the previous play mode.
The default mode of the WB function is seek tuning. In
this mode, tuning the encoder volume button, the unit
will search weather band for next strongest signal sta­
tion.
Turn the TUNE button right or left to set the WB function
to manual tuning.
All WB stations can be accessed by momentarily
pressing one of preset buttons.
In WB mode, MODE button has no function until you
exit from WB mode.
Note: In WB Mode, when the unit is in Auto tuning,
the manual tuning has no effect.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
Public Address (PA) Feature
The radio is equipped with two four‐pin connectors on
the rear panel that accept microphone inputs for public
address (PA) type capabilities.
Microphone One (MIC 1)
When the microphone pres‐to‐talk switch is activated on
microphone one (MIC 1), the current program audio out­
put is interrupted, MIC 1 appears on the LCD and the mi­
crophone voice input can be heard through the speak­
ers. When the microphone switch is released, the previ­
ous program audio output is restored and MIC 1 disap­
pears from the LCD. Output level heard through the
speakers is controlled with MIC 1 volume control.
Note: MIC 1 input uses CSS/CRC-103 series
Microphone Two (MIC 2)
When the microphone pres‐to‐talk switch is activated on
microphone two (MIC 2), the current program audio out­
put is interrupted, MIC 2 appears on the LCD and the mi­
crophone voice input can be heard through the speak­
ers. When the microphone switch is released, the previ­
ous program audio output is restored and MIC 2 disap­
pears from LCD. Output level heard through the speakers
is controlled with the Radio volume control.
Note: MIC 2 input uses CSS/CRC-105 series and
gooseneck type microphones.
MIC 2 volume levels will be memorized by the unit from
previous set level during normal operation and when
radio is turned off.
1-107
Operator's Manual
Carrier Cab Seat
The driver/operator's seat in the carrier cab is fully ad­
justable for driver/operator comfort. For average con­
ditions, the seat cushion surface should be level while
the driver/operator is seated. The seat should ride
freely up and down, without bottoming out, while trav­
eling the crane.
Seat back angle and the forward and backward posi­
tion of the seat should be adjusted to provide driver/op­
erator comfort. The seat is adjusted by manual con­
trols. Refer to Figure 1-71.
Note: For optimum comfort and proper seat adjust­
ment, the driver/operator should “sit back in the
seat” and sit erect while making any adjustment.
WARNING
Do not make seat adjustments while crane is
in motion. Properly park crane before making
seat adjustments.
1-108 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
1. Air Control Valve
The air control valve is used to adjust the cushion
angle and weight resistance for maximum driver/
operator comfort. Increase the cushion angle and
weight resistance for a heavier driver/operator or
bumpy road conditions; decrease for lighter driver/
operator or smooth road conditions. Push the
valve in to increase the resistance; pull out to de­
crease the resistance.
2. Height Adjustment Latch
To Raise The Seat:
a. Pull out on the air control valve to exhaust all
the air.
b. While holding the height adjustment latch in
the released position, push the air control
valve in to raise the seat to the desired height.
c. Once the desired height is reached, release the
air control valve and the height adjustment latch.
d. Adjust the air pressure as needed using the air
control valve to obtain the desired ride.
To Lower The Seat:
a. Firmly pull up on the height adjustment latch
while pulling out on the air control valve, ex­
hausting air until the latch releases.
b. Once the desired height is reached, release the
air control valve and the height adjustment latch.
c. Adjust the air pressure as needed using the air
control valve to obtain the desired ride.
 Operator's Manual
3. Seat Release Lever
To move the seat forward or backward, pull the
seat release lever outward and hold. Position the
seat as desired and release the lever to lock the
seat in place.
4
4. Operator's Manual Holder
An Operator's Manual is stored in the pocket on the
rear of the carrier cab seat. An Operator's Manual
should remain in the carrier cab and accessible at 5
all times. If an Operator's Manual is not in the carri­
er cab, order a replacement from your Link‐Belt
Distributor. 6
5. Seat Back Adjustment Knob 1
To recline the seat back, turn the seat back adjust­ 2
ment knob clockwise. To bring the seat back for­
3
ward, turn the knob counterclockwise.
1. Air Control Valve 4. Operator's Manual Holder
6. Seat Belt 2. Height Adjustment Latch 5. Seat Back Adjustment Knob
3. Seat Release Lever 6. Seat Belt
A seat belt is provided for driver/operator safety
while driving the crane. The seat belt must be used Figure 1-71
at all times while driving the crane. Carrier Cab Seat

WARNING
Always wear the seat belt while driving the
crane. The seat belt must be snug and low
across the hips.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-109

Operator's Manual

1. Video Monitor (Style 1 & Style 2)

2. Right Side View Camera
3
3. Rear View Camera

Figure 1-72
Carrier Camera Location

Carrier Right Side, Rear, WARNING

and Trailer Rear View (If
Equipped) Cameras
The carrier may be equipped with three cameras. One
camera gives the operator a view of the area at the rear
of the crane. Another camera gives a view of the area to
the right side of the crane. The other camera (not
shown) gives a view of the area at the rear of the boom
trailer, if equipped.
During initial crane start up and inspection each day, veri­
fy the proper operation of the camera. If the camera is
found to be damaged or missing, order replacement
parts as required to repair or replace the damaged or
missing component. Continue operation with caution as
you should normally do with all crane operations.
Cameras are being supplied as an Operator’s
aid. They do not relieve the Operator of any
responsibilities during crane operation. Always
look directly in the direction of crane travel. Do
not rely solely on the camera to determine if an
obstruction is present.
When the transmission is shifted into reverse, the monitor
will automatically display the rear view camera. When the
right side turn signal is turned on the monitor will auto­
matically display the right side view camera.

1-110 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


1 2
1. Power Button 4. AV/Down Button
2. Menu Button 5. Left Arrow Button
3. Camera Select/Up Button
Figure 1-73
Right Side & Rear View Cameras Monitor (Style 1)
A video monitor in the Carrier Cab is supplied to help
the Operator see areas that can be obstructed from
their view. This monitor can distract the Operator from
their normal duties if not used properly. Use these
monitors as an Operator’s aid and not as the sole meth­
od of seeing where the crane is going. Primary atten­
tion is to be on where the crane is going or the lifted
load, not the monitor.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
3 4 5 6 7
6. Right Arrow Button
7. CDS Sensor
Cameras do not eliminate the requirement for a signal per­
son during crane travel. Do not attempt to move the crane
without a signal person. A trained signal person working in
conjunction with a trained crane operator is required to
move the crane.
WARNING
Do not rely solely on the cameras and
monitors.
•The field of vision of the camera may be
limited.
•Just because the monitor looks clear does not
mean that an obstruction does not exist.
•Images in the monitor may be farther than
they appear.
•Images in the monitor may be distorted.
•Weather conditions (ice, snow, rain, etc) may
distort or block the camera lens and inhibit
visibility.
•Do not operate the crane using the camera’s
alone.
•Always look before moving the crane.
•Always employ a signal person to move the
crane.
1-111
Operator's Manual
Function Menu
The Function Menu allows the Operator to change the
functions of the AUTO SCAN, AUTO POWER, and DIM­
MER. The AUTO SCAN function allows the monitor to
automatically scan through the different camera views
when the crane is initially powered ON. Refer to
Figure 1-74. To turn ON the AUTO SCAN function:

Figure 1-74
Function Menu

1. Power Button
Press the Power Button to turn the monitor ON.
Press the Power Button to turn the monitor OFF.

2. Menu Button 1. Press the Menu Button to enter MENU MODE.

Press the Menu Button to enter into MENU MODE.
While in MENU MODE, press the Menu Button to
scroll through the various menu screens and to exit
out of menu mode.

3. Camera Select/Up Button

Press the Camera Select/Up Button to scroll
through the monitor displays one by one. Press
the Camera Select/Up Button while in MENU
MODE to scroll UP.

4. AV/Down Button
Press the AV/Down Button to enter into video
mode, if applicable. Press the AV/Down Button
while in MENU MODE to scroll DOWN.

5. Left Arrow Button

The left arrow button turns the volume down and
changes functions within the MENUS. 2. Continue to press the Menu Button until the FUNC­
TION menu is displayed.
6. Right Arrow Button
The right arrow button turns the volume up and
changes functions within the MENUS.

7. CDS Sensor
The CDS Sensor has an auto dimming feature
making the monitor available for night viewing.

1-112 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

3. If necessary, press the Camera Select/Up or AV/ Figure 1-75

Down Button to scroll to the AUTO SCAN function. Video Menu

Video Menu
The Video Menu allows the Operator to mirror the mon­
itor image vertically. Refer to Figure 1-75. To change
the monitor image from NORMAL to MIRROR:

4. Press the Right Arrow or Left Arrow Button to turn

the AUTO SCAN function ON.
5. Press the Menu Button to scroll to a different menu
or to exit MENU MODE.

1. Press the Menu Button to enter MENU MODE.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-113

Operator's Manual

2. Continue to press the Menu Button until the VIDEO 4. Press the Right Arrow or Left Arrow Button to mirror
menu is displayed. the monitor image.
5. Press the Menu Button to scroll to a different menu
or to exit MENU MODE.

3. If necessary, press the Camera Select/Up or AV/

Down Button to scroll to the specific camera to mir­
ror.

1-114 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

PREFERRED SETTINGS
PICTURE MODE
CONTRAST 25 CAM1 ON
BRIGHTNESS 25 CAM2 ON
COLOR 25 CAM3 OFF
TINT 25 VIDEO OFF

FUNCTION
AUTO SCAN OFF REAR SCALE
AUTOPOWER OFF CROSS OFF
DIMMER 1 CROSS ADJ >
RESET > TRIGGER DSP ON
TYPE STOP LINE
VIDEO ADJUST >
CAM1 NO/MIR
CAM2 NO/MIR
CAM3 NO/MIR
VIDEO NO/MIR
ALL NO/MIR

Figure 1-76
Monitor (Style 1) Preferred Settings

RESET Care and Maintenance

Note: Resetting the monitor will reset it to the monit­ If crane has been parked in direct sunlight, allow time
or factory settings. The monitor will then need to be for the monitor to cool down.
set to the Link‐Belt preferred settings. Refer to Clean the monitor with a slightly damp cloth. Use a
Figure 1-76. mild household detergent. Do not use strong solvents
such as thinner or benzine as they can damage the fin­
To reset the monitor settings: ish of the monitor.
1. Press the Menu Button to enter MENU MODE. Contact your Link‐Belt Distributor for the proper repair
2. Continue to press the Menu Button until the FUNC­ procedures.
TION menu is displayed.
3. If necessary, press the Camera Select/Up or AV/
Down Button to scroll to the RESET function.
4. Press the Right Arrow or Left Arrow Button to reset
the monitor.
5. The monitor will power off during reset.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-115

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1. Power/Menu Button 4. Camera Select/Up Button 7. Volume Up/Navigate Right

2. QUAD(PIP) Select Button 5. AV/Zoom/Down Button 8. CDS Sensor
3. Auto Scan/Locking Button 6. Volume Down/Navigate Left 9. Speaker

Figure 1-77
Right Side, Rear, & Trailer Rear View Cameras Monitor (Style 2)

1. Power/Menu Button 3. Auto Scan/Locking Button

Power
Press the top left corner of the Power/Menu Button
to turn the monitor ON.
Press and hold the top left corner of the Power/
Menu Button to turn the monitor OFF.
Menu (While Monitor Is Powered ON)
Press the bottom right corner of the Power/Menu
Button to enter MENU MODE.
Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button or Camera Se­
lect/Up Button to scroll through the MENUS.
2. QUAD(PIP) Select Button
The QUAD(PIP) Select Button allows the Operator
to change the monitor to a split screen display.
Refer to “Split Screen Displays” in this section of
the Operator's Manual for additional information.
4. Camera Select/Up Button
Auto Scan
Press the Auto Scan/Locking button one time to ini­
tiate auto scan mode. Auto scan mode will scroll
through the camera views for a set period of time
as follows: CA1->CA2->CA3->CA4. After the
last camera (CA4) is shown in scan mode the
screen will automatically go back to the first cam­
era (CA1). Refer to “SCAN Function” in this section
of the Operator's Manual for additional informa­
tion.
Button Lock
Hold the Auto Scan/Locking Button for 3 seconds
to lock all of the buttons. At this time all functions of
the buttons are disabled. While the buttons are
locked, press and hold the Auto Scan/Locking But­
ton for 3 more seconds to unlock the buttons.
Press the Camera Select/Up Button to scroll
through the camera views one by one and to get
out of a split screen view. Press the Camera Select/
Up Button while in MENU MODE to scroll UP.

5. AV/Zoom/Down Button
Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button to zoom in on a
specific camera view. Press the AV/Zoom/Down
Button while in MENU MODE to scroll DOWN.

1-116 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

CA3 CA4 CA2 CA3 CA2

CA4 CA1

CA1 CA1
CA3 CA2

QUAD View 3PIP View 2PIP View

CA1
CA3 CA2 CA4 CA1
CA3 CA2

3SPLIT View 2SPLIT View (CA3/CA2) 2SPLIT View (CA4/CA1)

Figure 1-78
Split Screen Function

6. Left Arrow Button

The left arrow button turns the volume down and
changes functions within the MENUS.

7. Right Arrow Button

The right arrow button turns the volume up and
changes functions within the MENUS.

8. CDS Sensor
The CDS Sensor has an auto dimming feature
making the monitor available for night viewing.

9. Speaker
The speakers allows the Operator to hear sounds
within the camera view.

Split Screen Function

The upper camera has split screen capabilities allow­ 2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until CAM
ing the Operator to view up to four cameras on one MODES is displayed on the screen.
screen. Refer to Figure 1-78. Depending upon which
split screen views are turned on, press the QUAD(PIP)
Select Button to scroll through the different split screen
views. To turn ON/OFF a split screen view:
Refer to Figure 1-77.
1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU
MODE.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-117

Operator's Manual

3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into CAM 5. When the proper split screen mode is selected
MODES. press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to turn it
ON or OFF.

4. Press the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down

Button to scroll UP and DOWN within CAM 6. To turn ON or OFF another split screen mode press
MODES. the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down Button
to scroll UP and DOWN.

1-118 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
7. Then press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to
turn it ON or OFF.
8. To go back to MENU MODE press the Power/Menu
Button.

Note: If the crane is equipped with two cameras,

only CAM4/1SPLIT MODE needs to be on.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-119

Operator's Manual
NORMAL/MIRROR Function
The upper monitor has a NORMAL/MIRROR Function
that allows the Operator to mirror the monitor image
vertically. Refer to Figure 1-79. To change the monitor
image from NORMAL to MIRROR:
Refer to Figure 1-77.
1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU
MODE.
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until NORMAL/
MIRROR is displayed on the screen.
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into NOR­
MAL/MIRROR.
4. Press the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down
Button to scroll UP and DOWN.
5. Press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to
change the camera view from NORMAL to MIR­
ROR.
6. To go back to MENU MODE press the Power/Menu
Button.

Figure 1-79
Normal/Mirror Function

1-120 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
UP/DOWN Function
The upper monitor has a UP/DOWN Function that al­
lows the Operator to mirror the image horizontally.
Refer to Figure 1-80. To change the monitor image
from UP to DOWN:
Refer to Figure 1-77.
1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU
MODE.
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until UP/DOWN
is displayed on the screen.
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into UP/
DOWN.
4. Press the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down
Button to scroll UP and DOWN.
5. Press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to
change the camera view from UP to DOWN.
6. To go back to MENU MODE press the Power/Menu
Button.

Figure 1-80
UP/DOWN Function

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-121

Operator's Manual

AUTO SCAN SCAN KEY Cycle Time

Figure 1-81
SCAN Function

SCAN Function 1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU

MODE.
The upper camera has a SCAN Function that allows the
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until SCAN is dis­
monitor to automatically scan through the different
played on the screen.
camera views at the press of a button. The SCAN KEY
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into SCAN.
function can be set to cycle through the camera views
4. Press the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down
only one time or continuously scroll through the cam­
Button to scroll UP and DOWN to SCAN KEY.
era views. Refer to Figure 1-81. To start an AUTO
Scan: 5. Press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to
change SCAN KEY from ONE to FULL.
Refer to Figure 1-77. 6. To go back to MENU MODE press the Power/Menu
1. Press the Auto Scan/Locking Button.
Button.
To turn AUTO SCAN OFF:
To change the SCAN cycle time:
1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU
1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU
MODE.
MODE.
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until SCAN is dis­
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until SCAN is dis­
played on the screen.
played on the screen.
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into SCAN.
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into SCAN.
4. Press the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down
4. Press the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down
Button to scroll UP and DOWN to AUTO SCAN.
Button to scroll UP and DOWN to specific camera.
5. Press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to
5. Press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to
change AUTO SCAN from ON to OFF..
change the time interval (1-9 seconds).
6. To go back to MENU MODE press the Power/Menu
6. To go back to MENU MODE press the Power/Menu
Button.
Button.
To change the SCAN KEY cycle from ONE to FULL :

1-122 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

PREFERRED SETTINGS
FUNCTION TRIGGER
LANGUAGE ENGLISH REAR SCALE OFF
SYSTEM NTSC/PAL BLINK MARK OFF
DIRECTION 0° TRIG 1 CAM1
DIMMER 1 TRIG 2 CAM2
AUTO POWER ON TRIG 3 OFF
LOGO SET > TRIG 4 OFF
AV OUTPUT LIVE HAZARD OFF
SHUTTER ON
RESET > CAMERA NAME
CAM1 REAR
PICTURE CAM2 RIGHT
CONTRAST 15 CAM3 TRAILER
BRIGHTNESS 15 CAM4 NO CAMERA
COLOR 15
TINT 15 CAM MODES
QUAD OFF
NOR/MIR 3PIP OFF
CAM1 MIRROR 2PIP ON
CAM2 MIRROR 3SPLIT ON
CAM3 MIRROR CAM3/2 SPLIT ON
CAM4 NORMAL CAM4/1 SPLIT OFF
ALL NORMAL
SCAN
AUTO SCAN OFF
UP/DOWN SCAN KEY ONE
CAM1 UP CAM1 3
CAM2 UP CAM2 3
CAM3 DOWN CAM3 3
CAM4 UP CAM4 3
ALL UP

Figure 1-82
Monitor (Style 2) Preferred Settings

RESET Care and Maintenance

Note: Resetting the monitor will reset it to the monit­ If crane has been parked in direct sunlight, allow time
or factory settings. The monitor will then need to be for the monitor to cool down.
set to the Link‐Belt preferred settings. Refer to Clean the monitor with a slightly damp cloth. Use a
Figure 1-82. mild household detergent. Do not use strong solvents
such as thinner or benzine as they can damage the fin­
To reset the monitor settings: ish of the monitor.
1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU Contact your Link‐Belt Distributor for the proper repair
MODE. procedures.
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until FUNCTION
is displayed on the screen.
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into FUNC­
TION.
4. Press the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down
Button to scroll UP and DOWN to RESET.
5. Press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to reset
the monitor.
6. The monitor will power off during reset.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-123

Operator's Manual

7 6
8
9
5 10

11

19
18

17 12
10
16
15
14
13
1. Upper Engine Throttle Pedal 8. Bubble Level 14. Air Conditioning Filter
2. Crane Rating Manual Holder 9. 360° Swing Lock (If Equipped) 15. Seat And Console Assembly
3. Upper Crane Control Display 10. Seat Console Control Switches 16. Fire Extinguisher
4. Winch & Swing Camera Display 11. Travel Swing Lock 17. Swing Brake Pedal
5. RCL Overhead Light Bar (If Equipped) 12. Operator's Manual Holder 18. Boom Telescope Pedal
6. Rated Capacity Limiter Display 13. Upper Windshield Washer Reservoir 19. Upper Diagnostic Panel
7. Outrigger Control Panel

Figure 1-83
Upper Operator's Cab

The following is a description of each control, switch, or

Upper Operator's Cab gauge in each panel, along with an explanation of their
Several panels which contain the controls, switches, function and/or operation.
and gauges to operate and monitor crane operations
are mounted throughout the upper operator's cab. Re­
fer to Figure 1-83.

1-124 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
1

1 2 3

2
4 5 6

1. Boom CAN 2
2. RCL CAN 1 5. RCL Controller USB
3. Upper Engine 6. Manual Boom/Crane Con­
4. Boom/Crane USB nector
Figure 1-84
Upper Diagnostic Panel
Upper Diagnostic Panel
The Upper Diagnostic Panel is in the lower left front of
the upper operator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-83 and
Figure 1-84. The central location allows easy access
for technicians to retrieve fault codes and conduct sys­
tematic troubleshooting of various upper control sys­
tems. Remove the cover to gain access to the dia­
gnostic connectors. A label which identifies each con­
nector is on the back of the cover.
Fire Extinguisher
A fire extinguisher is mounted in the upper operator's
cab below the left console. Refer to Figure 1-83.
Raise the left console to gain access to the fire extin­
guisher. It is an A B C type fire extinguisher, meaning it
is capable of extinguishing most types of fires. The op­
erator should be familiar with its location, the clamp
mechanism used to secure it in place, and foremost the
operation of the device. Specific instructions, regard­
ing operation, are given on the label attached on the
fire extinguisher. A charge indicator on the fire extin­
guisher monitors the pressure within the tank. Check
the indicator daily to ensure the fire extinguisher is ade­
quately charged and ready for use.
3
4
5 6 5
1. Sunscreen 4. Wiper Motor
2. Washer Switch 5. Latches
3. Control Switch 6. Catch Release
Figure 1-85
Top Hatch
RCL Overhead Light Bar (If Equipped)
The upper operator's cab may be equipped with an over­
head light bar which gives a visual indication of how
much of the crane's capacity is being used and the rate
at which an overload is being approached. This light bar
operates similar to the bar‐graph on the RCL Display. Re­
fer to “Rated Capacity Limiter” in this Section of this Oper­
ator's Manual for additional information.
Top Hatch
Top Hatch Wiper And Washer
The top hatch wiper is mounted in the top right corner
of the upper operator's cab roof. Refer to Figure 1-85.
The switch for the top hatch wiper is on the wiper motor.
Move the switch to the “ON” or “OFF” position as de­
sired. To wash the window, push the washer switch to
spray washer fluid on the top hatch window.

Upper Windshield Washer Reservoir Top Hatch Window

The reservoir for windshield washer fluid is mounted on
the lower left rear of the upper operator's cab. Refer to
Figure 1-83. Check the windshield washer reservoir
daily. Visual inspection can determine if the washer
fluid is adequate. Do not operate the washer when the
reservoir is empty. Use specially formulated wind­
shield washer fluid rather than water because specialty
washer fluids contain additives that prevent freezing
and dissolve road grime.
The top hatch window can be opened to improve up­
per operator's cab ventilation. To open the top hatch
window, rotate the latches, press the catch release,
and push up on the hatch window.
Top Hatch Sunscreen
The top hatch is equipped with a roller type sunscreen
to reduce glare and heat from the sun shining through
the top hatch.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-125

Operator's Manual

15
14

13 2

12

11

10 4
9

8
5
6
7

1. Upper Crane Control Display
2. Outrigger System Controls
3. Rated Capacity Limiter Display
4. Upper Engine Emergency Shutdown
Button
5. Carrier Engine Ignition Switch
6. Upper Engine Ignition Switch 11. Gauge Lights Dimmer Switch
7. Horn Button 12. Rotating Beacon or Strobe Light
8. 12V DC Accessory Outlets Switch (If Equipped)
9. Function Lockout Switch 13. Boom Floodlight Switch (If Equipped)
10. Hydraulic Fly Offset Activation Switch 14. Upper Light Switch
(If Equipped) 15. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

Figure 1-86
Right Side Control Console

Right Side Control Console 2. Outrigger System Controls

A control panel is in the right front corner of the upper
operator's cab that contains the following controls,
gauges, and indicators. Refer to Figure 1-86.
1. Upper Crane Control Display
The Upper Crane Control Display will display vari­
ous carrier engine data such as rpm's, coolant
temperature, fuel level, etc. Refer to “Upper Crane
Control Display” in this Section of this Operator's
Manual for operating instructions.
These controls are used to operate the outrigger
system. Refer to “Main Outrigger Operation” in this
Section of this Operator's Manual for complete op­
erating instructions.
3. Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL) Display
This displays the boom length, boom angle, load
weight, etc. See “Crane Monitoring System” in this
Section of this Operator's Manual for complete op­
erating instructions.

1-126 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


4. Upper Engine Emergency Shutdown Button
The upper engine emergency shutdown
button is used to shutdown the upper en­
gine in emergency situations. Press the
button to shutdown the upper engine. Reset the
button by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Carrier Engine Ignition Switch
The carrier engine ignition switch is the
conventional, key operated, automotive
type. It controls carrier engine off/on/start
from the upper operator' cab. Use this carrier en­
gine ignition switch to start the carrier engine from
the upper operator's cab in order to set the outrig­
gers from the upper operator's cab.
6. Upper Engine Ignition Switch
The upper engine ignition switch is the con­
ventional, key operated, automotive type.
It controls upper engine off/on/start, acces­
sories, and energizes the instrument panel in the
upper operator's cab.
7. Horn Button
Press this button to sound the horn. Before
starting the upper engine, it is recom­
mended to sound the horn twice in succes­
sion and wait 10-15 seconds while making a visu­
al check to verify that there are no persons under or
in close proximity to the crane. There also is a horn
button on the right control lever.
8. 12V DC Accessory Outlet
Use these outlets for electrical accessories. The
outlet to the rear is is always hot as it is connected
to the battery. The outlet to the front is only hot
when the key is on.
9. Function Lockout Switch
This switch is used to disable hydraulic
functions which are operated by the control
levers and boom telescope foot pedal.
Press the top part of the switch to disable hydraulic
functions and to prevent inadvertent operation of
these controls. To allow normal operation of the
control levers and boom telescope foot pedal,
press the bottom part of the switch. The bottom
part of the switch will illuminate to indicate the
switch is in the ON position.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
CAUTION
Do not connect an accessory to any part of the
crane other than the accessory outlets or
cigarette lighter. Major damage to the crane's
electrical system may result. If it is necessary
to do so, contact your Link‐Belt Distributor.
10. Hydraulic Fly Offset Activation Switch
(If Equipped)
Pressing this switch changes the function of
the right joystick (or single axis controller, if
equipped) from operating the boom hoist
functions to operating the hydraulic fly raise and
lower functions. Press this switch and move the con­
trol lever left to raise the hydraulic fly (decrease the
fly offset angle) or move the control lever right to
lower the hydraulic fly (increase the offset angle).
Refer to “12 Ft, 40-67 Ft Hydraulic Offset Fly” in Sec­
tion 4 of this Operator's Manual for complete operat­
ing procedures.
11. Gauge Lights Dimmer Switch
This switch is used to control the dash lights. Ro­
tate the switch left to dim the dash lights or rotate
right to brighten dash lights.
12. Rotating Beacon or Strobe Light Switch
(If Equipped)
This switch controls the upper operator's
cab rotating beacon or strobe light. Push
the left side of the switch to turn it on, right
side to turn it off.
13. Boom Floodlight Switch (If Equipped)
This switch operates the boom floodlight.
Push the right side of the switch to turn
floodlight on, left side to turn it off.
14. Upper Lights Switch
This switch operates upper floodlights.
Push the left side of the switch to turn flood­
lights on, right side to turn them off.
15. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Rotate the wiper/washer knob clockwise to
activate the windshield wiper. Rotate the
knob to the first detent for low speed wiper
or to the second detent for high speed wiper.
Rotate the knob counterclockwise to turn the wiper
off. Pushing the knob sprays washer fluid on the
windshield to clean the window.
1-127
Operator's Manual

3
6

11
1 4 7

2
8

5
9
10

1. Counterweight Removal Activation 5. Remote Boom Floodlight Controls 8. Heater Or Fan Speed Switch
Switch (If Equipped) 9. Heater/Air Conditioner Selector Switch
2. Upper Operator's Cab Tilt Switch 6. Horn Button* 10. Climate Control Knob
3. Swing Park Brake Switch* 7. Drum Rotation Indicator Switch 11. Winch Control Switches
4. Upper Engine Throttle Lock Switches

Figure 1-87
Upper Operator's Cab Seat Console Control Switches And Levers

Upper Operator's Cab Seat Console
Control Switches And Levers
Control switches and levers are mounted on the left
and right consoles of the upper operator's cab operat­
or's seat. Refer to Figure 1-83 and Figure 1-87.
1. Counterweight Removal Activation Switch
Pressing this switch changes the function of
the left joystick (or single axis controller, if
equipped) from operating the rear winch
functions to operating the counterweight raise and
lower functions. Press the switch and pull the control
lever back, toward the operator to raise the counter­
weight or push the control lever forward, away from
the operator to lower the counterweight. The right
joystick (or single axis controller, if equipped)
changes from boom hoist to counterweight lock and
unlock. Press the switch and move the right control
lever to the left to unlock the counterweight or to the
right to lock the counterweight.
[If equipped with single axis controls, pull the right
(boom hoist) control lever back to unlock the coun­
terweight or push it forward to lock the counter­
weight.]
Also the RCL Display changes screens to display
the location of the counterweight lift cylinder rods
to alert the operator of counterweight status. An
alarm on the RCL Display Screen will be displayed
if the counterweights are not fully raised (retracted)
against the upper. If no counterweights are
installed, the alarm will sound if the counterweight
cylinders are not fully retracted. Refer to “Counter­
weight Removal” in this Section of this Operator's
Manual.

1-128 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


2. Upper Operator's Cab Tilt Switch
This switch is used to tilt the upper operat­
or's cab from 0 to 20 degrees above hori­
zontal. Use this switch to improve vertical
visibility and help to reduce operator fatigue due to
neck strain when the load is high overhead.
3. Swing Park Brake Switch
This switch is used to operate the swing
park brake to hold the upper in any posi­
tion over the carrier. An indicator light on
the upper crane control display will illuminate to in­
dicate the switch is in the ON position. Refer to
“Swing System” in this Section of this Operator's
Manual for complete operating procedures.
4. Upper Engine Throttle Lock Switches
These switches are used to hold the upper
engine at a constant speed. This provides
the operator with more flexibility for certain
job requirements. Refer to “Throttle Lock
System” in this Section of this Operator's
Manual for operating procedures.
5. Remote Boom Floodlight Controls
(If Equipped)
Use the rocker switch to operate the boom
floodlight. Push the top part of the switch to
turn floodlight on, bottom part to turn it off.
Use the directional control to move the floodlight
up, down, left, or right.
6. Horn Button
Press this button to sound the horn. Before
starting the upper engine, it is recom­
mended to sound the horn twice in succes­
sion and wait 10-15 seconds while making a visu­
al check to verify that there are no persons under or
in close proximity to the crane. There also is a horn
button on the right side control console.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
7. Drum Rotation Indicator Switch
This switch is used to activate the drum ro­
tation indicator system. To activate the
system, press the bottom part of the
switch. Press the top part of the switch to deacti­
vate the system. The bottom part of the switch will
illuminate to indicate switch is in the ON position.
Refer to “Drum Rotation Indicators” in this Section
of this Operator's Manual for complete operating
procedures.
8. Heater Or Fan Speed Switch
This switch controls the upper operator's
cab heater if upper operator's cab is not
equipped with air conditioning. Press the
top part of the switch to turn the unit on, bottom
part to turn it off. If upper operator's cab is
equipped with air conditioning, this switch controls
the fan speed.
9. Heater/Air Conditioner Selector Switch
If upper operator's cab is equipped with air
conditioning, this switch selects which sys­
tem to operate. Press the top part of the
switch to turn the heater on, bottom part to turn the
air conditioning on. For windshield defogging, se­
lect air conditioning and adjust as necessary.
10. Climate Control Knob
Turn the climate control knob to adjust the temper­
ature in the upper operator's cab.
11. Winch Control Switches
These switches are used to control engag­
ing/disengaging the high speed hoist and
disabling the front and/or rear winch. Re­
fer to “Wire Rope Winch System” in this Section of
this Operator's Manual for complete operating pro­
cedures.
1-129
Operator's Manual
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

15
4
16
3 17

2
18

1
17

19

25 24 23 22 21 20
1. Upper Fuel Level Gauge 8. Upper Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light 17. Up And Down Arrow Buttons
2. Upper Engine Tachometer 9. Upper Coolant Temperature Indicator Light 18. OK Button
3. Upper Coolant Temperature Gauge 10. Hydraulic Charge Filter Indicator Light 19. Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level Gauge
4. Exhaust System Cleaning 11. Upper Engine Stop Engine Indicator Light 20. Menu Button
Indicator Lights 12. Upper Engine Check Engine Indicator Light 21. Back Button
5. Swing Park Brake Indicator Light 13. Upper Engine Wait To Start Indicator Light 22. Function Key F4
6. Upper Hydraulic Oil Temperature Indicator 14. Fine Metering Indicator Light 23. Function Key F3
Light 15. Air Filter Light 24. Function Key F2
7. Upper Battery Indicator Light 16. Hydraulic Oil Temperature Gauge 25. Function Key F1

Figure 1-88
Upper Crane Control Display (Main Working Screen Shown)

Upper Crane Control Display 3. Upper Coolant Temperature Gauge

The Upper Crane Control Display on the right side con­
trol console contains the following controls, gauges,
and indicators. Refer to Figure 1-86 and
Figure 1-88.
1. Upper Fuel Level Gauge
This gauge registers the level of fuel in the up­
per fuel tank. The upper fuel tank capacity is
58 gal (220L). Refer to the upper engine
manufacturer's manual for the correct grade of diesel
fuel. When the fuel level reaches an eighth of a tank,
the indicator light within the gauge will change from
white to yellow.
2. Upper Engine Tachometer
The tachometer registers upper engine
speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Re­
fer to the upper engine manufacturer's
manual for suggested operating speeds.
This gauge registers the upper engine cool­
ing system temperature. For proper cooling
system operating temperature range, refer
to the upper engine manufacturer's manual. If the
cooling system overheats, reduce upper engine
speed until the temperature returns to normal oper­
ating range. If upper engine temperature does not
return to normal temperature, refer to upper engine
manufacturer's manual. When the coolant tempera­
ture exceeds normal operating range an indicator
light will illuminate, an alarm buzzer will sound, and
the upper engine stop engine indicator light will illu­
minate. Also the indicator light within the gauge will
change from white to red.

1-130 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


4. Exhaust System Cleaning Indicator
Lights
These indicator lights will illuminate during
various Exhaust System Cleaning opera­
tions. Refer to “Exhaust System Cleaning”
in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
5. Swing Park Brake Indicator Light
This light will illuminate anytime the swing
park brake is applied and the upper igni­
tion switch is on.
6. Upper Hydraulic Oil Temperature Indicator
Light
This red indicator light will illuminate along with
an alarm buzzer to alert the operator that the
hydraulic oil exceeds the maximum operating
temperature. If the system overheats, shutdown the
crane immediately and correct the problem.
7. Upper Battery Indicator Light
This red indicator light will illuminate along
with an alarm buzzer to alert the operator
that the battery voltage is not within normal
operating range.
8. Upper Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light
This red indicator light will illuminate along
with an alarm buzzer to alert the operator that
the upper engine oil pressure is not within
normal operating range. For proper oil pressure op­
erating range, refer to the upper engine manufactur­
er's manual. If there is no upper engine oil pressure
after 10-15 seconds of running time, shutdown the
upper engine immediately and repair the problem to
avoid major upper engine damage.
9. Upper Coolant Temperature Indicator Light
This red indicator light will illuminate along
with an alarm buzzer to alert the operator
that the upper engine cooling system tem­
perature exceeds the maximum operating temper­
ature. For proper cooling system operating tem­
perature range, refer to the upper engine manufac­
turer's manual. If the cooling system overheats, re­
duce upper engine speed until the temperature re­
turns to normal operating range. If upper engine
temperature does not return to normal tempera­
ture, refer to upper engine manufacturer's manual.
When the coolant temperature exceeds normal op­
erating range, the upper engine stop engine indic­
ator light will also illuminate.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
10. Hydraulic Charge Filter Indicator Light
This red indicator light will illuminate indic­
ating that the charge filter must be
changed. Refer to Section 2 of this Operat­
or's Manual.
11. Upper Engine Stop Engine Indicator Light
This red indicator light will illuminate along
with an alarm buzzer and an error message
Pop‐Up Screen to alert the operator of major
upper engine problems. When this light illuminates
stop operations immediately and shutdown the up­
per engine. Refer to the upper engine manufactur­
er's manual and determine the problem before any
further operation of the upper engine.
12. Upper Engine Check Engine Indicator Light
This yellow indicator light will illuminate
along with an error message Pop‐Up
Screen to make the operator aware of
minor upper engine problems. When this light
illuminates upper engine operation may continue.
However, refer to the upper engine manufacturer's
manual and determine the problem as soon as
possible to avoid prolonged operation of the
malfunctioning upper engine which could develop
into a major problem.
13. Upper Engine Wait To Start Indicator Light
This green indicator light will illuminate in
cold weather when the upper engine ignition
switch is in the “ON” position to alert the op­
erator not to crank the upper engine. During cold
weather conditions the light illuminates activating an
upper engine air intake heater that will heat the air
before entering the upper engine air intake. When
the heater is warm enough the indicator light will go
out and then the upper engine can be started. This
aids in upper engine start‐up in cold weather condi­
tions and reduces white smoke after starting. For ad­
ditional information refer to “Upper Engine Air Intake
Heater” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
14. Fine Metering Indicator Light
This indicator light alerts the operator that
the fine metering system has been en­
abled. Refer to “Fine Metering Control” in
this Section of this Operator's Manual.
15. Air Filter Light
This indicator light alerts the operator that
the engine air filter is dirty and needs to be
replaced.
1-131
Operator's Manual
16. Upper Hydraulic Oil Temperature Gauge 21. Back Button
This gauge registers the hydraulic oil tem­ Push the button to return to the previous
perature in the main return line. Normal op­ display page.
erating ranges vary with the oils used in dif­
ferent climates. Refer to Section 2 of this Opera­
tor's Manual for proper oil viscosities and operat­ 22. Function Key F4
ing temperature ranges. If the hydraulic oil ex­
This function key will bring up the First Lay­
ceeds the maximum operating temperature, the
hydraulic oil temperature indicator light will illumi­
F4 er/Third Wrap Calibration Screen (if
equipped). Refer to Section 3 of this Oper­
nate and an alarm buzzer will sound. Also the in­
ator's Manual.
dicator light within the gauge will change from
white to red. If the system overheats, shutdown the 23. Function Key F3
crane immediately and correct the problem.
This function key will bring up the Fine
17. Up And Down Arrow Buttons F3 Metering Screen. Refer to “Fine Metering
Control” in this Section of this Operator's
These are navigation buttons that are used
Manual.
to scroll through selections on a menu
page.
24. Function Key F2
This function key will bring up the Carrier
F2 Engine Data Screen. Refer to “Carrier En­
gine Data Screen” in this Section of this
18. OK Button Operator's Manual.
Pushing this button equals “enter”. Saves 25. Function Key F1
the value or confirms the selection.
This function key will bring up the Upper
F1 Control Screen. Refer to “Upper Control
19. Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level Gauge Screen” in this Section of this Operator's
Manual.
This gauge registers the diesel exhaust flu­
id level in the upper engine.

20. Menu Button

Push this button to bring up a menu page.

1-132 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 3
1. Function Key F1 - Upper Engine Data And Exhaust System Cleaning Control
2. Function Key F2 - O/R (Outrigger) Level
3. Function Key F3 - Upper Controller Diagnostics
4. Function Key F4 - Upper Service info

Figure 1-89
Upper Control Screen

Upper Control Screen 3. Function Key F3 - Upper Controller

The Upper Control Screen can be displayed by press­ Diagnostics
ing the function key F1 ( ) from the Main Working This function key will bring up the Upper
Screen. Press the back button to return to Main F3 Controller Diagnostic Screen. Refer to
Working Screen. The following describes the function “Upper Controller Diagnostic Screen” in
keys on the Upper Control Screen. this Section of this Operator's Manual.

1. Function Key F1- Upper Engine Data 4. Function Key F4 - Upper Service Info
And Exhaust System Cleaning Control This function key will bring up Upper Ser­
Screen F4 vice Info.
This function key will bring up the Upper - Engine Oil Life
F1 Engine Data And Exhaust System Clean­ - Hydraulic Oil Life
ing Control Screen. Refer to “Upper En­ - “General” Service Information
gine Data And Exhaust System Cleaning Control
Screen” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.

2. Function Key F2 - O/R (Outrigger) Level

This function key will bring up the O/R (Out­
F2 rigger) Level Screen. Refer to “Crane Level
Screen” in this Section of this Operator's
Manual.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-133

Operator's Manual

5
4
6
3

2 7
1

9 8
1. Engine Running Hours 5. Upper Engine Coolant Temperature 8. Function Key F2 - Exhaust System
2. Upper Engine Fuel Consumption 6. Upper Battery Voltage Output Cleaning Inhibit Switch
3. Upper Engine RPM 7. Upper Engine Load 9. Function Key F1 - Exhaust System
4. Upper Hydraulic Oil Temperature Cleaning Initiate Switch

Figure 1-90
Upper Engine Data And Exhaust System Cleaning Control Screen

Upper Engine Data And Exhaust System Cleaning
Control Screen
The Upper Engine Data And Exhaust System Cleaning
Control Screen can be displayed by pressing the func­
tion key F1 ( ) from the Main Working Screen. The
display will show the Upper Control Screen. From the
Upper Control Screen, press the function key F1 ( ).
Press the back button to return to the previous
screen. The following describes the data displayed on
the Upper Engine Data And Exhaust System Cleaning
Control Screen.
1. Engine Running Hours
This displays the total amount of hours the
engine has been in operation
2. Upper Engine Fuel Consumption
This displays the actual fuel consumption
of the upper engine in gallons per hour
(gal/hr).
3. Upper Engine RPM
This displays the actual upper engine
speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Re­
fer to the upper engine manufacturer's
manual for suggested operating speeds.
4. Upper Hydraulic Oil Temperature
This displays the actual upper hydraulic oil
temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
Refer to Section 2 of this Operator's Manual
for proper oil viscosities and operating tempera­
ture ranges.
5. Upper Engine Coolant Temperature
This displays the actual upper engine
cooling system temperature in degrees
Fahrenheit (°F). For proper cooling sys­
tem operating temperature range, refer to the up­
per engine manufacturer's manual.
6. Upper Battery Voltage Output
This displays the actual voltage output from
the battery in volts (V).

1-134 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


7. Upper Engine Load
This displays the actual upper engine load
as a percentage (%).
8. Function Key F2 - Exhaust System
Cleaning Inhibit Switch
The Exhaust System Cleaning Inhibit
switch declines an Active and a Stationary
Exhaust System Cleaning until turned off.
Refer to this Section of this Operator's Manual.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
9. Function Key F1 - Exhaust System
Cleaning Initiate Switch
This switch initiates a forced Exhaust Sys­
tem Cleaning. This switch will be active
only when the Exhaust System Cleaning
Indicator Light illuminates. Refer to this Section of
this Operator's Manual.
1-135
Operator's Manual
1 2

This screen shows if carrier

ignition key is “OFF”.
5 4 3

1. Front to Rear Tilt Angle Numerical Display

2. Side to Side Tilt Angle Numerical Display
3. Level Indicators - Side to Side
4. Level Indicators - Front to Rear
5. Function Key F1 - Outrigger Level Sensor Calibration Switch

Figure 1-91
Crane Level Screen

O/R (Outrigger) Level Screen
The O/R (Outrigger) Level Screen can be displayed by
pressing the Function Key F1 ( ) from the Main
Working Screen. The display will show the Upper Con­
trol Screen. From the Upper Control Screen, press the
Function Key F2 (O/R LEVEL). Press the back button
to return to the previous screen.
When the center indicator light is illuminated green, the
crane is level. The first indicator light from the center
will illuminate red when crane tilt angle is approximately
0.5 degree. The second indicator light will illuminate
red when crane tilt angle is approximately 0.75 degrees
and the third light will illuminate red when crane tilt
angle is approximately 1.0 degrees. The tilt angle nu­
merical display will show the tilt angle in degrees in
both directions.

1-136 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Figure 1-92
Controller Diagnostic Screen

Controller Diagnostic Screen From the Upper Control Screen, press the Function
The Controller Diagnostic Screen can be displayed by Key F3 (CONTROLLER DIAG). Press the back button
to return to the previous screen.
pressing the Function Key F1 ( ) from the Main
Working Screen. The display will show the Upper Con­
trol Screen.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-137

Operator's Manual

100% to 30% - Green

30% to 10% - Yellow

10% to 0% - Red
Figure 1-93
Service Info Screen
Service Info Screen The Service Info Screen displays information through
The Service Info Screen can be displayed by pressing bar graphs. The bar graphs are for the hydraulic oil life,
the function key F1 ( ) from the main working engine oil life, and next service. The hydraulic oil life
screen. The Display will now show the upper control and engine oil life bars are measured in a percentage of
screen. From the upper control screen, press the func­ oil life remaining before the next servicing. The next
tion key F4 (SERVICE INFO). Press the back button service bar is the total amount of hours remaining be­
to return to the previous screen. fore the next servicing. Each hour meter must be reset
after service is completed.

1-138 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


Service Indicators
1. When the oil life reaches 10% an alert will pop‐up to
inform the Operator the oil life has reached 10%.
This alert will only be shown once per reset. If addi­
tional information is required, press the Function
Key F4 Help to access a help pop‐up menu. Press
Function Key F2 OK to return to previous screen.
2. If help pop‐up menu was accessed, press Func­
tion Key F2 OK to exit help pop‐up and return to
previous screen.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
3. When the oil life reaches 0% an alert will pop‐up to
inform the Operator the oil life has reached 0% and
a oil change/service is due. This pop‐up will show
at every crane start up to remind the Operator to
service the crane, unless it is disabled. If disabled,
the message will only be shown once. Each hour
meter can be disabled individually. To disable a re­
minder see “Adjusting Engine Oil, Hydraulic Oil,
Service Intervals And Disabling/Enabling Change
Reminders” in this section of the Operator's Manu­
al. If additional information is required, press the
Function Key F4 Help to access a help pop‐up
menu. Press Function Key F2 OK to return to previ­
ous screen.
4. If help pop‐up menu was accessed, press Func­
tion Key F2 OK to exit help pop‐up and return to
previous screen.
1-139
Operator's Manual

2
2

3
4

5
1. Bar Graph 3. Oil Life Hours 5. Function Key F1 - Reset Button
2. Oil Usage Hours 4. Date Serviced

Figure 1-94
More Info - Hydraulic Oil Life

More Info - Hydraulic Oil Life This screen displays the same bar graph that is on the
The More Info - Hydraulic Oil Life Screen can be dis­ service info screen along with oil usage hours, oil life
hours, and date serviced. From here the operator can
played by pressing the function key F1 ( ) from the
reset the hour meter. Refer to “Hour Meter Reset” in
main working screen. The Display will now show the
this section of Operator's Manual. Other oil life info
upper control screen. From the upper control screen,
screens work in the same manner.
press the function key F4 (SERVICE INFO). From the
service info screen, press the function key F1 (MORE
INFO) from the service info screen.

1-140 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
Hour Meter Reset
The hour meters must be reset after service is com­
pleted to assist that the next scheduled service interval
is met.

7. From the service info screen, press the function

key (F1, F2, or F3) for the desired hour meter to re­
set. The Display will now show the specific hour
meter screen selected.

5. Press the function key F1 ( ) from the main

working screen. The Display will now show the up­
per control screen.

8. Press the function key F1 (Reset) to reset the hour

meter.

6. From the upper control screen, press the function

key F4 (SERVICE INFO). The Display will now
show the service info screen.

9. Press the function key F2 (Yes) to confirm or F3

(No) to cancel.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-141

Operator's Manual
Adjusting Engine Oil, Hydraulic Oil, Service Intervals And Disabling/Enabling Change
Reminders

1. Click menu button. 4. Enter PIN, press OK to enter. Contact your

Link‐Belt Distributor for PIN information.

2. Click F1 to enter “Adjust” screen

5. Change interval/Service Interval items allow ser­
vice personnel to adjust how many hours of run­
ning an hour meter gets.

3. Navigate to “Service Hour Meter Options”

6. Navigate to choice of Enable/Disable and select

OK.

1-142 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

7. Use the arrows to adjust the interval to the desired
value and select OK.
8. To reset interval to default select F2. Select OK to
confirm choice. Repeat process as necessary to
adjust reminders and intervals for Service and En­
gine Oil (See step 5 and navigate as necessary to
make adjustments).

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-143

Operator's Manual
2 5
10 9 8 7 6
1. Carrier Engine Tachometer
2. Carrier Engine Fuel Level Gauge
3. Carrier Coolant Temperature Gauge
4. Carrier Battery Voltage Output
5. Carrier Engine Oil Pressure
Figure 1-95
Carrier Engine Data Screen
Carrier Engine Data Screen
The Carrier Engine Data Screen can be displayed by
pressing the Function Key F2 ( ) from the Main Work­
ing Screen. Press the back button to return to Main
Working Screen. The following describes the data dis­
played on the Carrier Engine Data Screen.
1. Carrier Engine Tachometer
The carrier engine tachometer registers
carrier engine speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm). Refer to the carrier engine
manufacturer's manual for suggested operating
speeds.
2. Carrier Engine Fuel Level Gauge
This gauge registers the level of fuel in the
carrier engine fuel tank. The carrier engine
fuel tank capacity is 95 gal (360L). Refer to
the carrier engine manufacturer's manual for the
correct grade of diesel fuel. When the fuel level
reaches an eighth of a tank, the indicator light
within the gauge will change from white to yellow.
1-144 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
6. Carrier Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Low Level Indicator Light
7. Carrier Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration Indicator Light
8. Carrier High Exhaust System Temperature Indicator Light
9. Carrier Engine Check Engine Indicator Light
10. Carrier Engine Stop Engine Indicator Light
3. Carrier Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
This gauge registers the carrier engine cool­
ing system temperature. For proper cooling
system operating temperature range, refer to
the carrier engine manufacturer's manual. If the carrier
engine cooling system overheats, reduce carrier en­
gine speed until the temperature returns to normal op­
erating range. If carrier engine temperature does not
return to normal temperature, refer to the carrier engine
manufacturer's manual. When the carrier engine
coolant temperature exceeds normal operating range
an indicator light will illuminate, an alarm buzzer will
sound, and the carrier engine stop engine indicator
light will illuminate. Also the indicator light within the
gauge will change from white to red.
4. Carrier Battery Voltage Output
This displays the actual voltage output from
the carrier batteries in volts (V).

5. Carrier Engine Oil Pressure
This displays the actual carrier engine oil
pressure in pounds per square inch (psi).
For proper carrier engine oil pressure oper­
ating range, refer to the carrier engine manufac­
turer's manual.
6. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Low Level
Indicator Light
This yellow indicator light will illuminate to
alert the driver/operator that the diesel ex­
haust fluid level is low. When this light illu­
minates, stop the crane as soon as safely possible
and fill the DEF tank. Refer to the carrier engine
manufacturer's manual for the correct grade of
diesel exhaust fluid. Refer to “Selective Catalytic
Reduction System” in this Section of this Operat­
or's Manual for additional information.
7. Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration
Indicator Light
This yellow indicator light will illuminate to
alert the driver/operator that an active re­
generation of the diesel particulate filter is
required but cannot occur. Refer to “Diesel Particu­
late Filter” in this Section of this Operator's Manual
and the carrier engine manufacturer's manual for
additional information on the regeneration process
and procedures.
8. Carrier High Exhaust System
Temperature Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to alert the
operator that the outlet temperature in the
upper engine exhaust system is above nor­
mal. This condition can occur under normal opera­
tion or during an automatic or manual regeneration
cycle. No action is required.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
DANGER
The temperature of the exhaust gas and the
exhaust system components can reach up to
1500°F (816°C) during regeneration. An
unexpected failure of the carrier engine or
regeneration system may increase exhaust
gas temperature at the particulate exhaust
filter to as high as 1650°F (900°C). This may
result in fire, burn, or explosion hazards,
which may result in personal injury or death.
Do not expose flammable material or
explosive atmospheres to exhaust gas or to
exhaust system components during
regeneration.
9. Carrier Engine Check Engine Indicator
Light
This yellow indicator light will illuminate
along with an error message Pop‐Up
Screen to make the operator aware of
minor carrier engine problems. When this light
illuminates carrier engine operation may continue.
However, refer to the carrier engine manufacturer's
manual and determine the problem as soon as
possible to avoid prolonged operation of the
malfunctioning carrier engine which could develop
into a major problem.
10. Carrier Engine Stop Engine Indicator Light
This red indicator light will illuminate along
with an alarm buzzer and an error message
Pop‐Up Screen to alert the operator of major
carrier engine problems. When this light illuminates
stop operations immediately and shutdown the carri­
er engine. Refer to the carrier engine manufacturer's
manual and determine the problem before any fur­
ther operation of the carrier engine.
1-145
Operator's Manual
Upper Crane Control Display Brightness Adjustment

1. From the Main Working Screen, press the menu 4. Press the Function Key F2 to select Backlight.
button.

2. Press the Function Key F3 to bring up the Prefer­ 5. Press the Up/Down Arrow buttons to adjust the dis­
ences Screen. play brightness.
6. Press the Menu button to return to the Main
Working Screen.

3. Press the Function Key F1 to bring up the Display

Screen.

1-146 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
Upper Engine Exhaust System Cleaning
The Exhaust System Cleaning is designed to remove
DEF deposits and condition the exhaust system. The
exhaust system cleaning must be periodically done to
remove the DEF deposits from the system. During nor­
mal operation, the accumulated deposits in the system
will be purged by an automatic cleaning cycle. In some
cases an automatic cleaning may not occur and the
cleaning cycle must be initiated manually.
Refer to engine manufacturer's manual for additional in­
formation on the exhaust system cleaning process and
procedures.

Exhaust System Cleaning Indicators

2. Press the Function Key F2 OK button to return to
previous screen.

1. The exhaust system cleaning indicator light will illu­

minate to alert the operator that an active cleaning
of the exhaust system is required but cannot occur.
When this light illuminates, ensure the exhaust sys­
tem cleaning inhibit switch is off (exhaust system
cleaning inhibit indicator light is off), increase up­
per engine load/speed to allow the engine to run
until exhaust system cleaning is complete, or use
the exhaust system initiate switch to initiate a sta­
tionary exhaust system cleaning as soon as safely
possible. If additional information is required,
press the Function Key F4 Help to access a help
pop‐up menu or press Function Key F2 OK button
to acknowledge return to previous screen.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-147

Operator's Manual
1

1. Press the Function Key F1 from the Main Working

Screen.

1. High Exhaust System Temperature Indicator Light

Figure 1-96
High Exhaust System Temperature Indicator
Light

High Exhaust System Temperature

Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to alert the operator that
the outlet temperature in the engine exhaust system is
above normal. This condition can occur under normal
operation or during an automatic or stationary exhaust
system cleaning. No action is required. 2. To access the Exhaust System Cleaning Inhibit
Switch, press the Function Key F1 ( ).

DANGER To Turn The Exhaust System Cleaning Inhibit

Switch ON
The exhaust gas temperature can reach
1500°F (800°C) and the exhaust system
surface temperature can exceed 1300°F
(700°C) during a cleaning. This may result in
fire, burn, or explosion hazards, which may
result in serious personal injury or death. Do
not expose flammable material or explosive
atmospheres to exhaust gas or to exhaust
system components during cleaning.

Exhaust System Cleaning Inhibit Switch

The exhaust system cleaning inhibit switch disables
any automatic or manual cleaning of the exhaust sys­
tem. It may be used to prevent any cleaning when the
3. The screen will change to the Upper Engine Data
crane is operating in a hazardous environment and
there is a concern about high temperatures from the And Exhaust System Cleaning Control Screen.
exhaust system. From this screen, press the Function Key F2 Ex­
haust System Cleaning Inhibit Switch ( ).

1-148 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

4. Press the Function Key F2 Yes to turn the Exhaust 7. If help pop‐up menu was accessed, press Func­
System Cleaning Inhibit Switch ON. tion Key F2 OK to exit help pop‐up and return to
previous screen.

To Turn The Exhaust System Cleaning Inhibit

Switch OFF

5. An indicator light will illuminate to alert the operator

that the system is inhibited.

8. To turn off the Exhaust System Cleaning Inhibit

Switch, from the Upper Engine Data And Exhaust
System Cleaning Control Screen, press the Func­
tion Key F2 Exhaust System Cleaning Inhibit
Switch ( ).

6. If additional information is required, press the

Function Key F4 Help to access a help pop‐up
menu.

9. Press the Function Key F2 Yes to turn the Exhaust

System Cleaning Inhibit Switch OFF.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-149

Operator's Manual
Stationary Exhaust System Cleaning
The exhaust system initiate switch is used to start a sta­
tionary exhaust system cleaning only when the exhaust
system cleaning light is illuminated.
Note: The crane must remain stationary for approx­
imately 45 minutes to complete a stationary exhaust
system cleaning.
1. Park the crane in a safe location, shift transmission
to neutral, apply the swing park brake and travel
park brake.

Note: A stationary exhaust system cleaning will

not occur if the travel park brake is not applied.

2. Ensure that the Exhaust System Cleaning Inhibit
indicator light is off.
3. Engine must be at minimum operating temperat­
ure of 140°F (60°C ).
6. The screen will change to the Upper Engine Data
And Exhaust System Cleaning Control Screen.
From the this screen, press the Function Key F1 Ex­
haust System Initiate Switch to access the Stationary
Exhaust System Cleaning Confirmation pop‐up
menu.
Note: Do not press the engine throttle pedal
during a stationary exhaust system cleaning.
Pressing the engine throttle pedal will deactiv­
ate the stationary exhaust system cleaning and
the engine will return to idle. The stationary ex­
haust system cleaning must be restarted.

4. Press the Function Key F1 from the Main Working

Screen to enter the Upper Control Screen.

7. If additional information is required, press the

Function Key F4 Help to access a help pop‐up
menu.

5. To access the Exhaust System Initiate Switch, press

the Function Key F1 to enter the Upper Engine Data
And Exhaust System Cleaning Control Screen.

1-150 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


8. If help pop‐up menu was accessed, press Func­
tion Key F2 OK to exit help pop‐up and return to
previous screen.
9. If a stationary exhaust system cleaning is not de­
sired at this time, press Function Key F3 No to exit
the Stationary Exhaust System Cleaning Confirma­
tion pop‐up menu and return to previous screen.
10. Press the Function Key F2 Yes to confirm and initi­
ate a stationary exhaust system cleaning.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
Flashing
The engine ECM will perform a system check for ap­
proximately 30 seconds before starting the stationary
exhaust system cleaning; also, the engine speed will
increase to 1,000-1,400 rpm. When the cleaning be­
gins, the exhaust system cleaning indicator flashes
and the high exhaust temperature indicator light illu­
minates.
When stationary exhaust system cleaning is complete,
the upper engine will return to idle and the high exhaust
temperature indicator and exhaust system cleaning in­
dicator lights go out.
DANGER
The exhaust gas temperature can reach
1500°F (800°C) and the exhaust system
surface temperature can exceed 1300°F
(700°C) during a cleaning. This may result in
fire, burn, or explosion hazards, which may
result in serious personal injury or death. Do
not expose flammable material or explosive
atmospheres to exhaust gas or to exhaust
system components during cleaning.
1-151
Operator's Manual
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Flashing
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) level must be maintained in
the tank for the SCR system to control nitrogen oxide
emissions. The gauge registers the level of DEF in the
DEF tank. The DEF tank is located behind the left side pan­
el. The DEF tank capacity is 10 gal (37.9L). Additionally,
the crane has a DEF low level indicator light on the
Crane Control Display ensuring the operator has
ample notices to replenish the DEF.
Refer to engine manufacturer's manual for additional in­
formation on the DEF process and procedures.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Indicators

The diesel exhaust fluid indicator will flash combined

with an illuminated check engine light to alert the oper­
ator that the diesel exhaust fluid has fallen below the ini­
tial derate level. Engine power will be limited automat­
ically. This can be corrected by filling the diesel ex­
haust fluid tank. Press Function Key F2 OK to acknow­
ledge pop‐up and return to previous screen.

Flashing

The diesel exhaust fluid indicator will illuminate to alert

the operator that the diesel exhaust fluid level is low.
This can be corrected by filling the diesel exhaust fluid
tank. It is recommended that the tank be filled com­
pletely in order to correct any fault conditions. Press
Function Key F2 OK to acknowledge pop‐up and return
to previous screen.
Flashing

The diesel exhaust fluid indicator will flash combined

with an illuminated check engine and stop engine light
if the engine has been shutdown or has idled for an ex­
tended period of time after the diesel exhaust fluid tank
has been emptied. Engine power will continue to be
limited automatically and crane speed will be limited to
5 mph. This can be corrected by filling the diesel ex­
haust fluid tank to at least 10 percent volume of the
tank. However, it is recommended that the tank be
filled completely in order to correct any fault conditions.
Press Function Key F2 OK to acknowledge pop‐up and
return to previous screen.

The diesel exhaust fluid indicator will flash to alert the

operator that the diesel exhaust fluid level is critically
low. This can be corrected by filling the diesel exhaust
fluid tank. Press Function Key F2 OK to acknowledge
pop‐up and return to previous screen.

1-152 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


Upper Operator's Cab Heater
A cab heater is used to heat the upper operator's cab.
The upper operator's cab heater uses upper engine
coolant circulating through the unit to provide heat.
The upper engine coolant circulates through the heater
in the upper operator's cab when the heater switch is
turned on. Refer to Figure 1-87 for heater controls.
To Start The Upper Operator's Cab Heater
1. With the upper engine running, press the heater/
fan speed switch or if crane is equipped with air
conditioning, press the top part of the heater/air
conditioner selector switch to turn the heater on.
2. Turn the climate control knob to the desired set­
ting.
3. If upper operator's cab is equipped with air condi­
tioning, use the fan speed switch to control the air
in the upper operator's cab. If upper operator's
cab is not equipped with air conditioning, use the
heater/fan speed switch to control the air in the up­
per operator's cab.
To Stop The Upper Operator's Cab Heater
1. Press the heater/fan speed switch to the off posi­
tion.
2. During warm weather conditions or if the heater is
not going to be used for an extended period of
time, rotate the temperature control knob to the
coolest setting.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
Upper Air Conditioning
The upper operator's cab may be equipped with an air
conditioning unit. Use the following instructions to op­
erate the unit. Refer to Figure 1-87 for air conditioning
controls.
Note: Using the air conditioner will help dehumidify
the upper operator's cab and assist in defogging
the windshield.
1. Start the upper engine and allow all operating tem­
peratures and pressures to reach their normal
range.
2. Press the bottom part of the heater/air conditioner
selector switch to activate the air conditioning unit.
3. Press the fan speed switch to control the amount of
air blown into the upper operator's cab.
4. Turn the climate control knob to the desired set­
ting.
5. To turn the unit off, press the heater/air conditioner
selector switch to the off position.
1-153
Operator's Manual

21 1
2
20
3
19 4
18 5
17 6

16 7

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
1. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) 8. Reset Button 15. 2/RPT
2. 4/RDM Button 9. 6/Next Folder Button 16. Band/Search Button
3. 5/Previous Folder Button 10. Seek/Tune/Track Forward Button 17. Audio/Menu Button
4. DISP/SCROLL Button 11. Info/Enter Button 18. Mute Button
5. EQ/Loud Button 12. Volume Down Button 19. Power Button
6. Automatically Store/Preset Scan/Quick 13. Seek/Tune/ Track Back Button 20. 1/>II Button
Exit Hot Key Button 14. 3/INT Button 21. Volume Up Button
7. Mode Button

Figure 1-97
Radio

Radio Operation
Note: Keep the volume level low enough to be
aware of your surroundings while operating the
crane.
The crane may be equipped with an AM/FM radio/au­
dio system. It includes the following features: an AM/
FM/EURO tuner with 30 Presets (12 AM and 18 FM),
Weather Band with Weather Alert, Bluetooth (Supports
A2DP and AVRCP), USB playback of MP3/WMA files,
iPod/iPhone USB input, Mute, Preset Equalizer (User,
Flat, Pop, Classical, Rock), Electronic Bass, Treble,
Balance, and Fade Controls, Output Power (40W x 4),
Wired Remote Control Ready, 2 Channel Pre‐amp Line
Level Outputs, and a Auxiliary Audio Input.
This radio generates, uses, and can radiate radio fre­
quency energy and, if not installed and used in accord­
ance with the instructions, may cause harmful interfer­
ence to radio communications.
If this radio does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turn­
ing the radio OFF and ON, the Operator is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
 Relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the distance between the radio and receiv­
er.
 Connect the radio into an outlet on a different circuit
that to which the receiver is connected.
 Contact your Link‐Belt Distributor for the service.

1-154 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


1. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
The LCD shows the reception frequency and activ­
ated functions of the system.
Note: LCD panels may take longer to respond
when subjected to cold temperatures for an ex­
tended period of time. In addition, the visibility
of the numbers on the LCD may decrease
slightly. The LCD display will return to normal
when the temperature increases to a normal
range.
2. 4/RDM Button
Press the 4/RDM Button to go to preset 4. During
playback mode, press the 4/RDM Button to play all
songs in the current category in random order.
Random order will occur once the current song has
finished playing. “Random On” will appear on the
LCD. Press the 4/RDM Button again to stop ran­
dom playback.
3. 5/Previous Folder Button
Press the 5/Previous Folder Button to go to preset
5. When navigating folders, press the 5/Previous
Folder Button to go to the previous folder and be­
gin playback of the first song in that folder.
4. DISP/SCROLL Button
Press the DISP/SCROLL Button to change the dis­
play information from single line default display to
Artist/Song Title double line display mode.
5. EQ/Loud Button
Press the EQ/Loud Button to turn on the equaliza­
tion function and select between five pre‐defined
bass and treble curves: User, Flat, Pop, Classical,
Rock. Press and hold the EQ/Loud Button to
toggle true loudness ON/OFF. When listening to
music at low volumes, this feature will boost the
bass ranges to compensate for the characteristics
of human hearing.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
6. Automatically Store/Preset Scan/Quick
Exit Hot Key Button
Automatically Store
Select an AM or FM band. Press and hold the Auto­
matically Store/Preset Scan/Quick Exit Hot Key
Button for more than 2 seconds to automatically
select strong stations and store them in all bands.
The new stations replace any previous stored sta­
tions within the band.
Preset Scan
Select a band if needed. Press the Automatically
Store/Preset Scan/Quick Exit Hot Key Button to
scan all stations stored in all bands. The system
will pause for 10 seconds at each preset station.
Press the Automatically Store/Preset Scan/Quick
Exit Hot Key Button to stop scanning when the de­
sired station is reached.
Quick Exit Hot Key
While in system menu operation, searching mode,
or audio menu operation press and hold the Auto­
matically Store/Preset Scan/Quick Exit Hot Key
Button for 3 seconds to quickly exit the operation
without waiting for the system default time out.
7. Mode Button
Press this button to toggle between modes.
Modes include AM/FM Tuner, Weather Band, iPod,
USB, AUX In (optional Auxiliary Input), and
Bluetooth Audio.
8. Reset Button
Press the reset button:
 After initial installation of the radio; after all wir­
ing is complete.
 If function buttons do not operate.
 If an error pops up on the display.
Use a ball point pen or similar sized object to press
the reset button.
1-155
Operator's Manual
9. 6/Next Folder Button
Press the 6/Next Folder Button to go to preset 6.
When navigating folders, press the 6/Next Folder
Button to go to the next folder and begin playback
of the first song in that folder.
10. Seek/Tune/Track Forward Button
Press the Seek/Tune/Track Forward Button to ad­
just menu items, seek stations (press to manually
seek or press and hold to automatically seek sta­
tions in radio mode), and to go to next track in Play­
back Mode (press and hold to fast forward).
11. Info/Enter Button
Press the Info/Enter Button to select or enter a
function and to get information.
12. Volume Down Button
Press the Volume Down Button to turn the volume
down and to navigate down.
13. Seek/Tune/Track Back Button
Press the Seek/Tune/Track Back Button to adjust
menu items, seek stations (press to manually seek
or press and hold to automatically seek stations in
radio mode), and to go to previous track in Play­
back Mode (press and hold to fast reverse).
14. 3/INT Button
Press the 3/INT Button to go to preset 3. When in
playback mode, press the 3/INT Button to play the
first ten seconds of each file on the current device.
When the desired file is reached, press the 3/INT
Button to end the scan and play the selected file.
15. 2/RPT Button
Press the 2/RPT Button to go to preset 2. When in
playback mode, press the 2/RPT Button to re­
peatedly play the current file. Press the 2/RPT But­
ton again to repeat all songs in the current folder.
Press the 2/RPT Button once more to resume nor­
mal playback.
1-156 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
16. Band/Search Button
Press the Band/Search Button to navigate
between the three FM bands and the two AM (MV)
bands. In playback mode, press the Band/Search
Button to enter search mode.
17. Audio/Menu Button
Press the audio menu button to access the system
menu. Continue to press the system menu button
to navigate through the system menu. When the
proper menu is displayed, press the volume but­
tons within 5 seconds to adjust that option.
Bass
Adjusts from “-6” to “+6”.
Treble
Adjusts from “-6” to “+6”.
Balance
Adjusts from “L12” (Full Left) to “R12” (Full Right).
Fade
Adjusts from “R12” (Full Rear) to “F12” (Full Front).
18. Mute Button
Press this button to mute audio output. Press
again to enable audio output.
19. Power Button
Press the power button to turn the system ON;
press it again to turn the system OFF.
20. 1/>II Button
Press the 1/>II Button to go to preset 1. When in
playback mode, press the 1/>II Button to pause
playback. Press the 1/>II Button once more to re­
sume playback.
21. Volume Up Button
Press the Volume Up Button to turn the volume up
and to navigate up.

System Menu
1. Press and hold the Audio/Menu Button for more
than 2 seconds to enter the system menu.
2. Press the Volume Up Button repeatedly to navigate
the system menu and select the desired item.
3. Press the Info/Enter Button or Seek/Tune/Track
Forward Button to adjust the selected menu item.
4. Press the Automatically Store/Preset Scan/Quick
Exit Hot Key Button to go back to the previous op­
eration.
The following items can be adjusted within the System
Menu:
 Key Beep (ON/OFF): Turn the audible beep ON/OFF
(heard when functions/buttons are selected).
Note: Beep tone OFF will not affect Battery Alarm
audible tone.
 LCD Backlight (1/10-10/10): Adjust LCD bright­
ness.
 LCD Contrast (1/10-10/10): Set LCD contrast.
 Tuning Region (USA/Europe): Set frequency spa­
cing for various regions.
 Weather Alert Configure: Press the Info/Enter Button
to see weather alert options:
 Weather Alert (ON/OFF): Determines if the weath­
er band alert feature is activated.
 Alert Volume (1/40-40/40): Set default volume for
weather alert broadcasts.
 Battery Alarm (ON/OFF): Monitor voltage on ACC
line and send alert when voltage is low.
 Battery Auto-OFF (ON/OFF): Automatically turn
OFF power to system when battery voltage is low.
Note: Bluetooth Device and Bluetooth Pair menu
options are only available while the Bluetooth fea­
ture is ON and the system is in Bluetooth Audio
mode.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
Note: A locked Bluetooth device will be overwrit­
ten from the list.
 Bluetooth Device (Lock/Unlock, Disconnect/Con­
nect, Delete): View, lock, and delete from a list of pre­
viously paired mobile phone device models.
 Bluetooth Pair <ENTER>: Press Info/Enter Button
to automatically pair a device.
 Bluetooth (ON/OFF): Choose “Bluetooth ON" or
“Bluetooth OFF".
 Volume Preset (1/40-40/40): Select an automatic
turn‐ON volume.
 Reset to Defaults <ENTER>: Return the EEPROM
to factory default set up values. Press the Info/Enter
Button to select.
Battery Alarm Operation
If Battery Alarm is set to “ON", an alarm will sound (8
beeps every 30 sec) when the voltage drops to 10.5V
(+/- 0.3V). The LCD will display the “low battery" and
the current mode alternatively.
Note: “OFF" is the default setting for Battery Alarm.
If the audio is muted or the volume is set to 0, the
audible beep will not be heard.
Auxiliary Input
To access an auxiliary device:
1. Connect the portable audio player to the AUX IN
cables routed from the rear of the system.
2. Press the Mode Button to select Aux In mode.
3. Press the Mode Button again to cancel Aux In
mode and switch to the next mode.
1-157
Operator's Manual
Preset Stations
Six numbered preset buttons store and recall stations
for each band.
To store a station:
Select a band (if needed), then select a station. Press
and hold a preset button for two seconds. The preset
number will appear in the display.
To recall a station:
Select a band (if needed). Press a preset button to se­
lect the corresponding stored station.
Weather Band Operation
Note: If the system is programmed for European
operation, the Weather Band function will be dis­
abled.
Press the Mode Button to access weather band mode.
What is the NOAA Weather Radio?
NOAA is a nationwide system that broadcasts local
weather emergency information 24 hours a day. The
U.S. network has more than 530 stations covering the
50 states, as well as the adjacent coastal waters, Pu­
erto Rico, the U.S. Virgin Islands and the U.S. Pacific
Territories. Each local area has its own transmitting sta­
tion and there are a total of seven broadcasting fre­
quencies used: 162.400MHz (CH2), 162.425MHz
(CH4), 162.450MHz (CH5), 162.475Mhz (CH3),
162.500MHz (CH6), 162.525MHz (CH7) and
162.550MHz (CH1).
How many stations can I expect to receive?
Since the broadcasts pertain to local weather and in­
formation, the transmission power is usually very low
(much less than AM or FM stations) which means you
will usually receive only one station unless you are on
the edge of two or more broadcast signals. The most
you will receive is two or three.
1-158 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Is it possible I won't receive any stations?
Depending on location, it's possible to receive a very
weak signal or none at all. Also, similar to AM and FM
signals, weather band signals are subject to surround­
ing conditions, weather, obstructions of the signal by
hills or mountains, etc. If no NOAA signals are found/
received, the tuner will scan all seven NOAA frequen­
cies every 30 seconds.
How will I know I am tuned to the weather band?
When you select the weather band, the “WB" icon will
appear on the LCD, along with the current channel in­
dication. Press the Seek/Tune/Track Forward or Back
Buttons to tune to each of the seven channels until you
find the weather band station broadcasting in your
area.
NOAA Weather Alert
The Weather Alert function adds an additional level of
user safety by automatically switching from the current
function mode to weather band mode for a minimum of
120 seconds if a NOAA warning tone (1050 Hz) is re­
ceived/detected. If no additional warning tone is re­
ceived for 60 seconds, the system will switch back to
the last known function mode.
The Weather Alert function can be turned ON or OFF by
the Audio/Menu Button. When ON, the weather tuner
remains active, even when the system is turned OFF
(as long as the power is still applied to the system). If a
weather alert is issued, the system will turn ON and
play the announcement for 60 seconds, then turn back
OFF and revert to weather alert monitor mode.
The system will not respond to any weather alerts when
it is OFF and will not automatically switch to the weather
band if an alert is issued.

MP3/WMA Operation
MP3/WMA File Requirements:
This system can play MP3 (MPEG1, 2, 2.5 Audio Layer
2/3) and WMA (version 7/8/9).
Media Requirements
The following formats are available for the media used
in this system. The maximum number of characters
used for file name, including the delimiter (“.") and
three‐character extension, are indicated in paren­
theses:
 ISO 9660 Level 1 (11 characters)
 ISO 9660 Level 2 (31 characters)
 Joliet (31 characters)
 Romeo (31 characters)
The media reproducible on this system has the follow­
ing limitations:
 Maximum number of nested folders: 8
 Maximum number of files per device: 999
 Maximum number of folders per device: 99
Use the following settings when compressing audio
data in MP3 data with the MP3 encoder:
 Transfer bit rate: 32 - 320 kbps
 Sampling frequency
 MPEG1: 32/44.1/48 KHz
 MPEG2:16/22.05/24 KHz
 MPEG2.5: 8/11.025/12KHz
 WMA: 22/32/44/48KHz
 Maximum file/directory name: 64 bytes
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
ID3 Support
This system supports ID3 tag versions 1.0, 1.1, 2.0,
and 2.3 (Max 32 bytes).
Installing a USB Device
Insert your USB thumb drive into the USB connector
routed from the rear of the radio. The system will auto­
matically search for MP3 and WMA files on the device
and begin playback. You can access USB mode from
any other mode by pressing the Mode Button.
Note: Do not remove the device when USB PLAY
mode is active. Press the Mode Button to change to
another mode before removing the device.
MP3/WMA Directory Search
1. Press the Band/Search Button to enter directory
search mode.
2. The LCD will display the folder list for the current
directory. Press the Band/Search Button to view
the folder directory list.
3. Navigate the folder list by pressing the Volume Up
and Down Buttons.
4. Press the Info/Enter Button to select a folder. The
LCD will display the list of files within that folder.
5. Navigate the file list by pressing the Volume Up and
Down Buttons.
6. Press the Info/Enter Button to select a file.
7. Use the Automatically Store/Preset Scan/Quick
Exit Hot Key Button to reverse navigate the list.
1-159
Operator's Manual
iPod Operation
This system is equipped with an iPod ready function
that will allow the Operator to control their iPod (if com­
patible) using the control panel buttons. The following
iPod versions are supported:
 iPod Nano 5G, iPod Nano 6G
 iPod 5G
 iPod Classic
 iPhone 4, iPhone 4S
 iPod Touch 3G, iPod Touch 4G
Note: Earlier model iPods may not be suppor­
ted because they do not implement the USB
control protocol. Also, the iPod Shuffle is not
supported because it does not utilize the 30‐pin
Apple iPod Connector. These unsupported
iPod models may be connected to the radio us­
ing one of the Auxiliary Inputs.
Accessing iPod Mode
Connect a supported iPod or iPhone to the USB con­
nector. The iPod icon illuminates in the bottom left
corner of the LCD whenever an iPod or iPhone is at­
tached to the USB connector. Music playback begins
automatically.
To enter iPod mode from any other source, press the
Mode Button until “LOADING" appears on the display.
If the user connects an iPod containing no songs, the
radio will display a message stating “Device No File"
when it enters iPod mode.
1-160 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Turning The iPod ON/OFF
The iPod power turns on automatically when an iPod is
connected to the USB connector, as long as the crane
ignition is turned ON. You can turn the iPod OFF by dis­
connecting it or by turning the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is turned OFF, the iPod will pause and then
enter sleep mode after 2 minutes. While the iPod is
connected, the power cannot be turned ON or OFF
from the iPod itself.
Note: The iPod will continuously recharge while in
iPod playback mode.
iPod Search Mode
1. Press the Band/Search Button to enter iPod search
mode and choose from the following search criter­
ia: Playlist, Artist, Album, Song, Genre, Composer,
Audiobooks, and Podcasts (consecutively).
2. When search mode is selected, press the Info/
Enter Button to confirm selection.
3. Use the Volume Up and Down Buttons to navigate
through various list selections.
4. Press Info/Enter Button to make your final selec­
tion.
5. Use the Automatically Store/Preset Scan/Quick
Exit Hot Key Button to reverse navigate the list.

Bluetooth® Operation
This system includes built‐in Bluetooth technology that
allows you to connect this system to Bluetooth devices
for streaming audio playback.
Bluetooth is a short‐range wireless radio connectivity
technology developed as a cable replacement for vari­
ous electronic devices. Bluetooth operates in 2.4 GHz
frequency range and transmits voice and data at
speeds up to 1 megabit per second. Bluetooth was
launched by a special interest group (SIG) comprised
of Ericsson Inc., Intel Corp., Nokia Corp., Toshiba and
IBM in 1998, and it is currently developed by nearly
2,000 companies worldwide. The Bluetooth word
mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of their respect­
ive owners.
Note: Some Bluetooth menu options are only avail­
able while the system is in Bluetooth Audio mode.
Bluetooth Menu Options
Press and hold the Audio/Menu Button to enter menu
adjustment mode. Repeatedly press the Volume Up
and Down Buttons to access the “Bluetooth ON/OFF"
menu function. Press the Info/Enter Button to turn the
Bluetooth function ON or OFF. The following menu op­
tions are available when the system is in Bluetooth
mode:
 Bluetooth Pair <ENTER>: Press the Info/Enter But­
ton to begin pairing with a Bluetooth enabled device
in pairing mode.
 Bluetooth Device: Press the Info/Enter Button to view
a list of previously paired mobile phone device mod­
els. Press the Seek/Tune/Track Forward and Press
the Seek/Tune/Track Back Buttons to view devices
from the list. A device that is actively connected can­
not be deleted. Press the Info/Enter Button to select
the device. Press the Seek/Tune/Track Forward and
Press the Seek/Tune/Track Back Buttons to choose
Lock/Unlock, Disconnect, or Delete for this device.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
 Lock/Unlock: The system can store up to 5
devices for Bluetooth connection. The devices are
stored in FIFO (First In First Out) order. To prevent a
device from being bumped from the list when more
than 5 devices are used, the device must be
locked. To Lock/Unlock a device, press the Info/
Enter Button to display/change the Locked or Un­
locked icon.
 Disconnect: To disconnect a paired device, press
the Info/Enter Button to temporarily remove the
Bluetooth link. The link can be re‐established
through the phone menu by selecting the system
for connection.
 Delete: To delete a device from the list, press the
Info/Enter Button.
Pairing A Bluetooth Device
Before you begin, consult the owner's manual for the
Bluetooth device you want to pair with this system.
1. Ensure the device is on and ready to receive a sig­
nal from the system. With the system in Bluetooth
Audio mode, choose BT PAIR from the system
menu and press the Info/Enter Button to select ON.
The system is waiting to connect to a mobile phone
device. With the Bluetooth function of the mobile
phone device turned ON, search for a Bluetooth
device.
2. When the Bluetooth device has completed it's
search, the mobile phone will display the Bluetooth
device name (JHD40BT).
3. Select JHD40BT. The Bluetooth Audio icon ( )
will now be displayed on the LCD.
4. Enter the pairing password (0000), if requested.
After connecting successfully, the Operator can listen
to music stored on their Bluetooth enabled device
through the system.
Answering A Call
When answering a call using the connected phone,
Bluetooth Audio will pause. After hanging up from the
call, Bluetooth Audio will continue on some phones. It
may be necessary to press the play button to resume
Bluetooth Audio.
1-161
Operator's Manual
BT Audio (A2DP)
The A2DP music is available for Bluetooth enabled
phones when the phone is connected. To access
Bluetooth mode and play songs stored on your phone.
1. Press the Mode Button.
2. While in Bluetooth mode, the Bluetooth Audio icon
( ) illuminates on the it LCD.
3. If the system is changed to another mode, the mo­
bile phone audio will pause. Press the Mode But­
ton to return to Bluetooth mode and resume mobile
phone audio playback.
Note: If a Bluetooth device is disconnected due to
the power being turned OFF or if the device is dis­
connected inadvertently, the system will automatic­
ally search for the matching Bluetooth mobile
phone when the power is restored.
Care And Maintenance
 Keep the system dry. If it does get wet, wipe it dry im­
mediately. Liquids might contain minerals that can
corrode the electronic circuits.
 Keep the product away from dust and dirt, which can
cause premature wear of parts.
 Handle the system gently and carefully. Dropping it
can damage circuit boards and cases, and can
cause the system to work improperly.
 Wipe the system with a dampened cloth occasionally
to keep it looking new. Do not use harsh chemicals,
cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the
system.
 Use and store the system only in normal temperature
environments. High temperature can shorten the life
of electronic devices, damage batteries, and distort
or melt plastic parts.
1-162 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Ignition
 The most common source of noise in reception is the
ignition system. This is a result of the radio being
placed close to the ignition system (engine). This
type of noise can be easily detected because it will
vary in intensity of pitch with the speed of the engine.
 Usually, the ignition noise can be suppressed con­
siderably by using a radio suppression type high
voltage ignition wire and suppressor resistor in the
ignition system. Another method of suppression is
the use of additional noise suppressors.
Interference
 Radio reception in a moving environment is very dif­
ferent from reception in a stationary environment
(home). It is very important to understand the differ­
ence.
 AM reception will deteriorate when passing under a
bridge or when passing under high voltage lines. Al­
though AM is subject to environmental noise, it has
the ability to be received at great distance. This is be­
cause broadcasting signals follow the curvature of
the earth and are reflected back by the upper atmo­
sphere.
 Operator's Manual
Radio Troubleshooting
Symptom Cause
No power The accessory switch is not ON
Fuse is blown
No sound Volume is too low
Wiring is not properly connected
The operation keys do not work Built‐in microcomputer is not oper­
ating properly due to noise
Cannot tune to radio station, Antenna cable is not connected
auto‐seek does not work
Signals are too weak
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Solution
If the power supply is properly con­
nected to the cranes accessory ter­
minal, switch the ignition key to
“ACC".
Replace the fuse.
Adjust volume to audible level.
Check wiring connections.
Press the Reset Button.
Insert the antenna cable firmly.
Select a station manually.
1-163
Operator's Manual

1. Right Swing Camera

2. Front Winch Camera
3. Rear Winch Camera

Figure 1-98
Upper Camera Locations

Winch And Right Swing View

Cameras WARNING
Cameras are being supplied as an operator’s
The upper is equipped with two (or three, if rear winch aid. They do not relieve the crane operator of
is installed) cameras. One camera gives the operator a any responsibilities during crane operation.
view of the front winch to monitor wire rope spooling on Always look directly in the direction of crane
the front winch drum. If equipped, a second camera
travel or at the load during crane lifting
gives the operator a view of the rear winch to monitor
operations. Do not rely solely on the camera to
wire rope spooling on the rear winch drum The other
determine if an obstruction is present.
camera gives a view of the area to the right side the
crane to be used before swinging the upper to the right.
When the swing brake is released the monitor will auto­
During initial crane start up and inspection each day, veri­ matically display the right swing view.
fy the proper operation of all cameras. If the cameras are
found to be damaged or missing, order replacement
parts as required to repair or replace the damaged or
missing component. Continue operation with caution as
you should normally do with all crane operations.

1-164 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1. Power/Menu Button 4. Camera Select/Up Button 7. Volume Up/Navigate Right

2. QUAD(PIP) Select Button 5. AV/Zoom/Down Button 8. CDS Sensor
3. Auto Scan/Locking Button 6. Volume Down/Navigate Left 9. Speaker

Figure 1-99
Winch & Swing Right View Cameras Monitor

Camera Monitor
A video monitor in the Operator’s Cab is supplied to
help the Operator see areas that can be obstructed
from their view. This monitor can distract the Operator
from their normal duties if not used properly. Use these
monitors as an Operator’s aid and not as the sole meth­
od of seeing where the crane is going. Primary atten­
tion is to be on where the crane is going or the lifted
load, not the monitor.
Cameras do not eliminate the requirement for a signal per­
son during crane travel. Do not attempt to move the crane
without a signal person. A trained signal person working in
conjunction with a trained Operator is required to move the
crane.
WARNING
Do not rely solely on the cameras and
monitors.
•The field of vision of the camera may be
limited.
•Just because the monitor looks clear does not
mean that an obstruction does not exist.
•Images in the monitor may be farther than
they appear.
•Images in the monitor may be distorted.
•Weather conditions (ice, snow, rain, etc) may
distort or block the camera lens and inhibit
visibility.
•Do not operate the crane using the camera’s
alone.
•Always look before moving the crane.
•Always employ a signal person to move the
crane.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-165

Operator's Manual
1. Power/Menu Button 4. Camera Select/Up Button
Power Press the Camera Select/Up Button to scroll
Press the top left corner of the Power/Menu Button through the camera views one by one and to get
to turn the monitor ON. out of a split screen view. Press the Camera Select/
Up Button while in MENU MODE to scroll UP.
Press and hold the top left corner of the Power/
Menu Button to turn the monitor OFF. 5. AV/Zoom/Down Button
Menu (While Monitor Is Powered ON) Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button to zoom in on a
specific camera view. Press the AV/Zoom/Down
Press the bottom right corner of the Power/Menu
Button while in MENU MODE to scroll DOWN.
Button to enter MENU MODE.
Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button or Camera Se­ 6. Left Arrow Button
lect/Up Button to scroll through the MENUS. The left arrow button turns the volume down and
changes functions within the MENUS.
2. QUAD(PIP) Select Button
The QUAD(PIP) Select Button allows the Operator 7. Right Arrow Button
to change the monitor to a split screen display. The right arrow button turns the volume up and
Refer to “Split Screen Displays” in this section of changes functions within the MENUS.
the Operator's Manual for additional information.
8. CDS Sensor
3. Auto Scan/Locking Button The CDS Sensor has an auto dimming feature
Auto Scan making the monitor available for night viewing.
Press the Auto Scan/Locking button one time to ini­
tiate auto scan mode. Auto scan mode will scroll
9. Speaker
through the camera views for a set period of time The speakers allows the Operator to hear sounds
as follows: CA1->CA2->CA3->CA4. After the within the camera view.
last camera (CA4) is shown in scan mode the
screen will automatically go back to the first cam­
era (CA1). Refer to “SCAN Function” in this section
of the Operator's Manual for additional informa­
tion.
Button Lock
Hold the Auto Scan/Locking Button for 3 seconds
to lock all of the buttons. At this time all functions of
the buttons are disabled. While the buttons are
locked, press and hold the Auto Scan/Locking But­
ton for 3 more seconds to unlock the buttons.

1-166 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

CA3 CA4 CA2 CA3 CA2

CA4 CA1

CA1 CA1
CA3 CA2

QUAD View 3PIP View 2PIP View

CA1
CA3 CA2 CA4 CA1
CA3 CA2

3SPLIT View 2SPLIT View (CA3/CA2) 2SPLIT View (CA4/CA1)

Figure 1-100
Split Screen Function

Split Screen Function

The upper camera has split screen capabilities allow­
ing the Operator to view up to four cameras on one
screen. Refer to Figure 1-100. Depending upon
which split screen views are turned on, press the
QUAD(PIP) Select Button to scroll through the different
split screen views. To turn ON/OFF a split screen view:
Refer to Figure 1-99.
1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU
MODE.

2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until CAM

MODES is displayed on the screen.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-167

Operator's Manual

3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into CAM 5. When the proper split screen mode is selected
MODES. press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to turn it
ON or OFF.

4. Press the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down

Button to scroll UP and DOWN within CAM 6. To turn ON or OFF another split screen mode press
MODES. the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down Button
to scroll UP and DOWN.

1-168 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
7. Then press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to
turn it ON or OFF.
8. To go back to MENU MODE press the Power/Menu
Button.

Note: If the crane is equipped with two cameras,

only CAM4/1SPLIT MODE needs to be on.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-169

Operator's Manual
NORMAL/MIRROR Function
The upper monitor has a NORMAL/MIRROR Function
that allows the Operator to mirror the monitor image
vertically. Refer to Figure 1-101. To change the monit­
or image from NORMAL to MIRROR:
Refer to Figure 1-99.
1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU
MODE.
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until NORMAL/
MIRROR is displayed on the screen.
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into NOR­
MAL/MIRROR.
4. Press the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down
Button to scroll UP and DOWN.
5. Press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to
change the camera view from NORMAL to MIR­
ROR.
6. To go back to MENU MODE press the Power/Menu
Button.

Figure 1-101
Normal/Mirror Function

1-170 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
UP/DOWN Function
The upper monitor has a UP/DOWN Function that al­
lows the Operator to mirror the image horizontally.
Refer to Figure 1-102. To change the monitor image
from UP to DOWN:
Refer to Figure 1-99.
1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU
MODE.
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until UP/DOWN
is displayed on the screen.
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into UP/
DOWN.
4. Press the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down
Button to scroll UP and DOWN.
5. Press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to
change the camera view from UP to DOWN.
6. To go back to MENU MODE press the Power/Menu
Button.

Figure 1-102
UP/DOWN Function

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-171

Operator's Manual

AUTO SCAN SCAN KEY Cycle Time

Figure 1-103
SCAN Function

SCAN Function 1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU

MODE.
The upper camera has a SCAN Function that allows the
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until SCAN is dis­
monitor to automatically scan through the different
played on the screen.
camera views at the press of a button. The SCAN KEY
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into SCAN.
function can be set to cycle through the camera views
4. Press the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down
only one time or continuously scroll through the cam­
Button to scroll UP and DOWN to SCAN KEY.
era views. Refer to Figure 1-103. To start an AUTO
Scan: 5. Press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to
change SCAN KEY from ONE to FULL.
Refer to Figure 1-99. 6. To go back to MENU MODE press the Power/Menu
1. Press the Auto Scan/Locking Button.
Button.
To turn AUTO SCAN OFF:
To change the SCAN cycle time:
1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU
1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU
MODE.
MODE.
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until SCAN is dis­
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until SCAN is dis­
played on the screen.
played on the screen.
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into SCAN.
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into SCAN.
4. Press the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down
4. Press the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down
Button to scroll UP and DOWN to AUTO SCAN.
Button to scroll UP and DOWN to specific camera.
5. Press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to
5. Press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to
change AUTO SCAN from ON to OFF..
change the time interval (1-9 seconds).
6. To go back to MENU MODE press the Power/Menu
6. To go back to MENU MODE press the Power/Menu
Button.
Button.
To change the SCAN KEY cycle from ONE to FULL :

1-172 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

PREFERRED SETTINGS
FUNCTION TRIGGER
LANGUAGE ENGLISH REAR SCALE OFF
SYSTEM NTSC/PAL BLINK MARK OFF
DIRECTION 0° TRIG 1 CAM1
DIMMER 1 TRIG 2 CAM2
AUTO POWER ON TRIG 3 CAM3
LOGO SET > TRIG 4 CAM4
AV OUTPUT LIVE HAZARD QUAD
SHUTTER ON
RESET > CAMERA NAME
CAM1 RIGHT
PICTURE CAM2* NO CAMERA
CONTRAST 15 CAM3* NO CAMERA
BRIGHTNESS 15 CAM4* WINCH
COLOR 15
TINT 15 CAM MODES
QUAD* OFF
NOR/MIR 3PIP* OFF
CAM1 NORMAL 2PIP* OFF
CAM2 NORMAL 3SPLIT* OFF
CAM3 NORMAL CAM3/2 SPLIT* OFF
CAM4 NORMAL CAM4/1 SPLIT ON
ALL NORMAL
SCAN
AUTO SCAN OFF
UP/DOWN SCAN KEY ONE
CAM1 UP CAM1 3
CAM2 UP CAM2 3
CAM3 UP CAM3 3
CAM4 UP CAM4 3
ALL UP

*Setting may be different if equipped with a third camera.

Figure 1-104
Monitor Preferred Settings

RESET Care and Maintenance

Note: Resetting the monitor will reset it to the monit­ If crane has been parked in direct sunlight, allow time
or factory settings. The monitor will then need to be for the monitor to cool down.
set to the Link‐Belt preferred settings. Refer to Clean the monitor with a slightly damp cloth. Use a
Figure 1-104. mild household detergent. Do not use strong solvents
such as thinner or benzine as they can damage the fin­
To reset the monitor settings: ish of the monitor.
1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU Contact your Link‐Belt Distributor for the proper repair
MODE. procedures.
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until FUNCTION
is displayed on the screen.
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into FUNC­
TION.
4. Press the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down
Button to scroll UP and DOWN to RESET.
5. Press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to reset
the monitor.
6. The monitor will power off during reset.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-173

Operator's Manual
Main Outrigger Operation
The outriggers can be used in any one of three
positions; fully retracted, intermediate extended, or
fully extended. The extend and retract functions of the
outriggers can be controlled from the right side control
console in the upper operator's cab (Figure 1-86), or
one of two ground control stations near the side access
ladders (Figure 1-105 or Figure 1-106). The extend
position of each beam is controlled by the placement of
the outrigger position pin on each outrigger beam
(Figure 1-108).
All of the outrigger pontoons must set on a smooth,
solid surface flush with the ground or mats with no hills
or valleys under them or they may be damaged or de­
stroyed. If there is any doubt as to the ground condi­
tions, use mats under the pontoons. Check pontoons
before and during operations. If they are allowed to
settle, they may lose their effectiveness, and make con­
tinued operations unsafe.
A bubble level is provided on the right side wall of the
upper operator's cab (Figure 1-83) and at each
ground control station to assist in determining when
the crane is level. All bubble levels must be checked
weekly with an accurate level placed on the turntable
bearing. Check that the bubble levels are accurate
side to side and front to back. Refer to “Bubble Level
Adjustment” in Section 3 of this Operator's Manual.
Included in the ground control outrigger stations is a
carrier engine throttle switch which can be used to in­
crease the carrier engine speed during outrigger op­
eration and an axle retract switch that can be used to
raise the axles while the crane is on outriggers.
Outrigger Controls In Upper
Operator's Cab
The carrier engine must be running for the outrigger
controls in the upper operator's cab to be used for out­
rigger operation. If required the carrier engine can be
started from the upper cab using the carrier engine ig­
nition switch. Refer to “To Start The Carrier Engine
From The Upper Operator's Cab” in this Section of this
Operator's Manual.
Carrier Engine Controls
Carrier engine controls are in the outrigger controls in
the upper operator's cab and at each ground con­
trolled outrigger station and are defined as follows:
Upper Operator's Cab Station
Carrier Engine Ignition Switch (with carrier en­
gine ignition switch ON in the carrier cab)
Carrier Engine Stop
Carrier Engine Throttle (High Idle)
Ground Control Station
Carrier Engine Throttle (High Idle)
Carrier Engine Stop
Carrier Engine Start
Axle Lift System
The crane is equipped with a hydro‐gas suspension
which utilizes cylinders to allow the axles to be raised
and lowered as well as to absorb shock. The ground
control outrigger stations are equipped with an axle re­
tract switch that can be used to raise all axles while the
crane is on outriggers. Refer to Figure 1-106. This
switch is used to adjust the crane's suspension de­
pending on operating conditions. Press and hold this
switch to raise the axles to obtain additional ground
clearance for the tires when the crane is on outriggers.
Outrigger Working Lights
Outrigger working lights are mounted at the end of
each outrigger box and near the bumper outrigger at
the front of the crane. Operate the lights by pushing the
outrigger working lights switch at any outrigger
control station. Refer to Figure 1-105 and
Figure 1-106.

1-174 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

7 8 9 10 11 12

5
13

4 14

2
15
1

16

1. Carrier Engine Throttle (High Idle) 7. Beam - Left Front 12.Jack - Right Front
2. Beam - Left Rear 8. Auto Level 13.Carrier Engine Stop
3. Jack - Left Rear 9. Bumper Jack Extend/Retract 14.Jack - Right Rear
4. Outrigger Lights 10.Beam - Right Front 15.Beam - Right Rear
5. Extend Mode - Beam/Jack 11.Retract Mode - Beam/Jack 16.Carrier Engine Ignition Switch
6. Jack - Left Front

Figure 1-105
Outrigger Controls In Upper Operator's Cab

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-175

Operator's Manual

Front of Crane

6
4

7
3
8
2
9

1
10

11

16 15 14 13 12

1. Extend Mode - Beam/Jack 7. Outrigger Lights 12. Carrier Engine Throttle (High Idle)
2. Auto Level 8. Carrier Engine Start 13. Beam - This Side Front
3. Jack - Opposite Side Rear 9. Bumper Jack Extend/Retract 14. Jack - This Side Front
4. Axle Retract Switch 10. Carrier Engine Stop 15. Beam - This Side Rear
5. Bubble Level 11. Retract Mode - Beam/Jack 16. Jack - This Side Rear
6. Jack - Opposite Side Front

Figure 1-106
Ground Controlled Outrigger Station (Right Side Shown)

1-176 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


2
1
Working Position
1. Hitch Pins With Keeper Pin
2. Storage Plate
Figure 1-107
Pontoon Storage
To Extend Outrigger Beams
1. Park the crane in the desired location. Engage the
park brake and shift the transmission to neutral.
2. Move the Travel Mode Switch in the carrier cab to
the “Job Site” position.
Note: If the crane is raised on outriggers and
the travel mode switch is left in the “Highway”
position, a message will appear on the carri­
er control display and an audible alarm will
sound to alert the operator that the travel mode
switch is in the incorrect position.
3. Move all pontoons to the working position and in­
stall all hitch pins in their proper position. Refer to
Figure 1-107.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
2
1
Self Stored Position
WARNING
Pontoons must be properly attached to
outrigger jacks before crane is set on
outriggers. If the pontoons should settle, the
jacks could disengage from the pontoons,
causing a loss of stability.
4. Determine the outrigger position desired. Install
the extend position pins, as required. Refer to
Figure 1-108.
WARNING
When making lifts on outriggers, all outrigger
beams must be equally extended; all fully
retracted, all intermediate extended, or all
fully extended. Failure to do so may cause a
loss of stability and possible serious personal
injury and/or major crane damage.
1-177
Operator's Manual
5. Start the carrier engine.
WARNING
Do not extend or retract an outrigger beam or
jack unless it is in full view of the operator or a
signal person. Ensure all personnel and
obstructions are clear from the path of the
machinery. Unexpected movement may
occur which could cause serious personal
injury or major equipment damage.
6. Press an individual outrigger beam switch and
hold. Press the extend mode switch and hold.
The indicator lights above the extend mode switch
will illuminate and the indicator lights above the
beam switch will illuminate sequentially from left to
right as the beam is extending.
Note: The outrigger beams should not be exten­
ded or retracted with its corresponding jack ex­
tended. Jacks must be completely retracted be­
fore any beam operation.
7. When the beam reaches the selected position, re­
lease both switches.
8. Repeat Steps 6-7, for each outrigger beam, until
all the beams are in the selected position.
Note: As conditions warrant, a proficient crane
operator may operate both beams on one side
at the same time.
9. If the intermediate beam position is to be used,
visually check that all beams are properly posi­
tioned in the intermediate position by observing
the decals on the side of the beams and the extend
position pins are in the correct position. Refer to
Figure 1-108. All beams must be extended until
the hydraulic system goes over relief.
10. Set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the proper setting
to match the position of the outrigger beams.
1-178 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
WARNING
When making lifts on outriggers, all outrigger
beams must be equally extended; all fully
retracted, all intermediate extended, or all
fully extended. Failure to do so may cause a
loss of stability and possible serious personal
injury and/or major crane damage.
When making lifts with the outrigger beams in
the intermediate position, the extend position
pins must be installed in the beams. Visually
check that all beams are properly positioned
in the intermediate position by observing the
decals on the side of the beams. All beams
must be extended until the hydraulic system
goes over relief before beginning operations.
Check that the Rated Capacity Limiter is set to
the correct outrigger position before
beginning operation.
Failure to perform any of the above may cause
serious personal injury and/or major crane
damage.
To Extend Outrigger Jacks - Raise
The Crane
CAUTION
When the hoist wire rope(s) is/are tied off to
the crane or any solid object, the winch
system can be overloaded causing major
winch, wire rope, and/or crane damage. Do
not extend the boom, raise or lower the boom,
or raise the crane on outriggers unless wire
rope is spooled off the drum(s) to prevent
tension on the wire rope(s).
 Operator's Manual

! WARNING
RETRACTED/ Keep clear of ALL
TRAVEL outrigger beams and
jacks when any of the
five outriggers are
INSERT BOTH PINS being operated.

D6P0098

INNER INSERT PIN BEFORE

INTERMEDIATE EXTENDED EXTENDING BEAMS

INSERT PIN AFTER

EXTENDING BEAMS

FULLY INNER OUTER

EXTENDED EXTENDED EXTENDED

INSERT PINS AFTER

EXTENDING BEAMS

Figure 1-108
Outrigger Extend Positions

1. Press an individual jack switch and hold.
Press the extend mode switch and hold. The
indicator lights above the extend mode switch will
illuminate and the indicator lights above the jack
switch will illuminate sequentially from left to right
as the jack is extending.
WARNING
Do not extend or retract an outrigger beam or
jack unless it is in full view of the operator or a
signal person. Ensure all personnel and
obstructions are clear from the path of the
machinery. Unexpected movement may occur
which could cause serious personal injury or
major equipment damage.
4. Extend the jack cylinders until all tires are clear of
the ground.
Note: A bubble level is provided on the right
side wall in the upper operator's cab, and at
each ground control station to assist in deter­
mining when the crane is level.
5. The crane is equipped with an axle retract system
that can be used to gain additional ground clear­
ance for the tires when the crane is on outriggers.
Push the axle retract switch and hold until the
axles are fully retracted.
6. Raise or lower jacks as required to level the crane.
7. Check that all tires are clear of the ground and pon­
toons are not settling.

2. Extend jack until the pontoon just contacts the

ground and release both switches.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each outrigger jack.
Note: As conditions warrant, a proficient crane
operator may operate both jacks on one side at
the same time.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-179

Operator's Manual
WARNING
All capacities listed in the Crane Rating
Manual, when on outriggers, are based on all
the tires being clear of the ground, all
outrigger beams equally extended (fully
retracted, intermediate extended, or fully
extended), using the proper chart for the
outrigger beam position, and the crane setting
on all pontoons on a firm, level, solid surface,
and the front bumper outrigger properly
extended. Major reductions in the crane lifting
capacity and unsafe operating conditions can
result if these conditions are not met.
8. Properly extend the front bumper outrigger. Refer
to “Bumper Outrigger” in this Section of this Opera­
tor's Manual for instructions.
9. Ensure that the Rated Capacity Limiter is set to the
proper setting to match the position of the outrig­
ger beams.
All Main Jacks Extend Feature
All 4 main jacks can be extended simultaneously by
double clicking the extend mode switch and hold­
ing the switch until all jacks are extended. The indicat­
or lights above the extend mode switches will illuminate
and the indicator lights above the jack switch will illu­
minate sequentially from left to right as the jacks are ex­
tending. Release the switch after jacks have reached
the desired position.
Note: The all jacks extend feature works best if the
crane is parked on a firm level surface to within 1.0
degree. If this is not possible, use the axle inclina­
tion system to level the carrier deck within 1.0 de­
gree before setting up cribbing and activating the
all jacks extend feature. Once the all jacks extend
function is complete, use the axle lift system to gain
the necessary ground clearance.
Note: If during the all jacks extend function one or a
pair of jacks are extending slower than the others,
the operator can can continue to press the extend
key while also pressing a single or pair of jacks key
(this overrides the all jacks extend function) to force
the slower jack to catch up. Once those keys are re­
leased, the all jacks extend function will continue.
1-180 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Outrigger Auto Level
The outrigger system is equipped with an automatic
leveling feature “Auto Level”. After all the outrigger
beams are properly extended and all main pontoons
are set on a smooth, solid surface flush with the ground
or mats with no hills or valleys under them and all tires
clear of the ground, the auto level can be used to level
the crane. Press and hold the Auto Level switch
(Figure 1-105 or Figure 1-106) until the crane is
leveled (indicator lights above switch will go off as
crane is leveled), release switch when lights above the
Auto Level, Extend Mode, and Retract Mode switches
flash in sequence. Observe the following during Auto
Level operation:
Note: High engine idle will disengage during auto
level routine.
 The indicator lights above the extending jack switch
will illuminate sequentially from left to right.
 The indicator lights above the extend mode switch
will illuminate.
 All three indicator lights above the AUTO LEVEL
switch illuminate when the crane is more than 1 de­
grees out of level either front to back, side to side, or
both.
 Left and Center indicator lights above the AUTO
LEVEL switch illuminates when the crane is 0.5 – 1
degrees out of level either front to back, side to side,
or both.
 Only the Left indicator light above the AUTO LEVEL
switch illuminates when the crane is within 0.5 de­
gree out of level either front to back, side to side, or
both.
 The indicator lights above the AUTO LEVEL switch
goes OFF when the crane is level (within 0.25 de­
grees) both front to back and side to side.
 Extend the bumper outrigger after the crane is
leveled on the 4 main outriggers.
Note: If Auto Leveling operation has timed out, the
indicator lights above the jacks will be flashing in­
dicating that all the jacks are extended to the max­
imum and no more auto leveling can be done.

To Retract Outrigger Jacks - Lower
The Crane
It is recommended that lowering the crane be done
from the ground control stations.
1. Fully retract the boom, swing the upper over the
front of the carrier, and engage the travel swing
lock.
2. Boom down and set boom on boom rest.
3. Engage the park brake. Ensure the Travel Mode
Switch in the carrier cab is in the “Job Site” ( )
position.
WARNING
Do not retract or extend an outrigger beam or
jack unless it is in full view of the operator or a
signal person. Ensure all personnel and
obstructions are clear from the path of the
machinery. Unexpected movement may
occur which could cause serious personal
injury or major equipment damage.
4. Properly retract the front bumper outrigger. Refer
to “Bumper Outrigger” in this Section of this Opera­
tor's Manual.
Note: If any Front Jack Retract operation is initi­
ated with the bumper outrigger extended, the
bumper outrigger will retract with the front out­
rigger jacks.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
5. Press an individual jack switch and hold.
Press the retract mode switch and hold. The
indicator lights above the retract mode switch will
illuminate and the indicator lights above the jack
switch will illuminate sequentially from right to left
as the jack is retracting.
6. Carefully retract jack until the pontoon just clears
the ground.
7. Release both switches.
8. Repeat Steps 5-7 for each outrigger jack.
Note: As conditions warrant, a proficient crane
operator may operate both jacks on one side at
the same time.
9. Fully retract all jacks.
All Main Jacks Retract Feature
All 4 main jacks can be retracted simultaneously by
double clicking the retract switch and holding the
switch until all jacks are retracted. The indicator lights
above the retract mode switch will illuminate and the in­
dicator lights above the jack switches will illuminate se­
quentially from right to left as the jacks are retracting. Re­
lease the switch after all 4 main jacks are fully retracted.
Note: If All Main Jacks Retract operation is initiated
with the bumper outrigger extended, the bumper
outrigger will retract with the main outrigger jacks.
1-181
Operator's Manual
To Retract Outrigger Beams
WARNING
Do not retract or extend an outrigger beam or
jack unless it is in full view of the operator or a
signal person. Ensure all personnel and
obstructions are clear from the path of the
machinery. Unexpected movement may
occur which could cause serious personal
injury or major equipment damage.
Note: The outrigger beams should not be retrac­
ted or extended with its corresponding jack ex­
tended. Jacks must be completely retracted be­
fore any beam operation.
1. Press an individual outrigger beam switch and
hold. Press the retract mode switch and hold.
The indicator lights above the extend mode switch
will illuminate and the indicator lights above the
beam switch will illuminate sequentially from right
to left as the beam is retracting.
2. Release both switches.
3. Repeat Steps 1-2 for each beam.
Note: As conditions warrant, a proficient crane
operator may operate both beams on one side
at the same time.
4. Store all pontoons in the self stored position. Refer
to Figure 1-107. Properly install all hitch pins in
their proper locations with the pontoons in the self
stored position.
5. Store all the extend position pins in the fully retrac­
ted position.
1-182 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Bumper Outrigger
The bumper outrigger is provided to permit the same
lifting capacities over the front as over the side when it
is used with the main outriggers. Refer to the Crane
Rating Manual for specific capacities.
After Leveling
After leveling, a Bumper Outrigger Extend Reminder
will be flashed using the the Extend and Bumper Out­
rigger keys of the outrigger controls. The Bumper Out­
rigger Extend Reminder is cleared by extending the
bumper outrigger, but will be reactivated by leveling of
the crane again and during any carrier engine start
while on jacks.
Bumper Outrigger Control Switch
The bumper outrigger can be controlled from the
bumper outrigger control switch (toggle type) in the
front bumper, just above the left headlight. Refer to
Figure 1-109. It can also be controlled with the bump­
er jack extend/retract switch on the right side control
console in the upper operator's cab or one of two
ground control outrigger stations at the side access
ladders.
Bumper Outrigger Overload
Warning System
The bumper outrigger has a warning system to prevent
excessive load on the carrier frame. If the bumper out­
rigger is overloaded for any reason, a pressure sensi­
tive switch in the hydraulic circuit will sound the carrier
horn. Under normal circumstances, the carrier horn
will not sound during operation within the capacities
listed in the Crane Rating Manual. If the horn sounds,
immediately lower the load to the ground and reset all
the outriggers before continuing operation.

INFORMATION
Front Bumper Jack Control
Front bumper jack must be last jack extended
and first jack retracted. Crane must be
leveled with other four jacks before front jack
is extended.
1. Bumper Outrigger Control Switch
Figure 1-109
Bumper Outrigger Switch
To Extend Bumper Outrigger
1. Level the crane on the main outriggers.
CAUTION
Always level the crane on the main outriggers
before extending the bumper outrigger.
Failure to do so could result in structural
damage to the crane as the bumper outrigger
alone will not properly support the weight of
the crane.
2. The bumper outrigger pontoon must set on a
smooth, solid surface flush with the ground or mats
with no hills or valleys under it or it may be dam­
aged or destroyed. If there is any doubt as to the
ground conditions, use mats under the pontoon.
Check pontoon before and during operations. If it
is allowed to settle, it may lose its effectiveness and
make continued operations unsafe.
3. If using the bumper outrigger control switch at the front
bumper, push the bumper outrigger control switch to
extend the cylinder. Hold the switch until the pontoon
rests firmly on a solid surface and the hydraulic system
goes over relief. Release the switch.
WARNING
Do not extend or retract an outrigger jack
unless it is in full view of the operator or a
signal person. Ensure all personnel and
obstructions are clear from the path of the
machinery. Unexpected movement may
occur which could cause serious personal
injury or major equipment damage.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
1
Left Headlight
4. If using the bumper jack extend/retract switch on
the right side control console in the upper opera­
tor's cab or one of two ground control stations at
the side access ladders, push the bumper jack ex­
tend/retract switch and hold. Push the extend
mode switch and hold until the pontoon rests
firmly on a solid surface and the hydraulic system
goes over relief. (The indicator lights above the ex­
tend mode switch will illuminate and the indicator
lights above the bumper jack switch will illuminate
sequentially from left to right as the jack is extend­
ing.) Release both switches.
To Retract Bumper Outrigger
CAUTION
The bumper outrigger should be retracted
before the main outriggers. If All Main or any
Front Jack Retract operation is initiated with
the bumper outrigger extended, the bumper
outrigger will retract with these outrigger
jacks.
1. If using the bumper outrigger control switch at the
front bumper, pull the bumper outrigger control
switch and hold until the cylinder is fully retracted.
Release the switch.
2. If using the bumper jack extend/retract switch on
the right side control console in the upper opera­
tor's cab or one of two ground control stations at
the side access ladders, push the bumper jack ex­
tend/retract switch and hold. Push the retract
mode switch and hold until the cylinder is fully
retracted. (The indicator lights above the retract
mode switch will illuminate and the indicator lights
above the bumper jack switch will illuminate se­
quentially from right to left as the jack is retracting.)
Release both switches.
1-183
Operator's Manual
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Figure 1-110
Upper Battery Box And Power Panel
Upper Battery Box
The upper battery box is behind the ladder on the left
side of the upper behind the upper operator's cab. Re­
fer to Figure 1-110. Raise the ladder to access the bat­
tery box. The battery box houses two 12 volt heavy duty
maintenance free batteries. Inspect the batteries, bat­
tery cables, and connections every 50 hours of opera­
tion. Check that the battery connections are secure and
corrosion free. If corrosion exists, remove the battery
cables from the terminals and clean them with a wire
brush. Install the cables and apply a small amount of
grease to each terminal to prevent corrosion.
WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Battery Fuse
There is a 175 Amp fuse in the upper battery box. Refer
to Figure 1-110. This fuse protects the alternator elec­
1-184 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Manual Controllers Storage Box
Battery Fuse
Power Panel
Upper Electrical Center And Upper Electronic Control Box
Battery Box
trical circuit. If this system is not functioning, check and
replace this fuse as required.
Manual Controllers Storage
Box
The manual controllers storage box is behind the lad­
der on the left side of the upper behind the upper oper­
ator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-110. Raise the ladder to
access the storage box. Store the manual crane con­
troller and the manual boom telescope controller in the
box to ensure they are not damaged when not in use.
Power Panel
The power panel is behind the ladder on the left side of
the upper behind the upper operator's cab. Refer to
Figure 1-110. Raise the ladder to access the power
panel. The power panel contains the main circuit
breakers, RCL Bypass Keyswitch, battery disconnect
switches, and hour meter.

1
1. Main Upper Circuit Breakers 3. Upper Engine Hour Meter
2. Battery Disconnect Switches 4. RCL Bypass Keyswitch
Figure 1-111
Power Panel
Upper Battery Disconnect Switches
The upper battery disconnect switches are on the power
panel behind the ladder on the left side of the upper be­
hind the upper operator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-110 and
Figure 1-111. Move the disconnect switches to the “Off”
position any time welding is being done on the crane to
protect the crane's electronic components from damage
due to an electric arc type welder.
CAUTION
Major damage may occur to the electronic
equipment from welding on the crane prior to
turning disconnect switches to the “OFF”
position.
Ignition switch(es) should be shut off at least
70 seconds prior to turning disconnect
switches to the “OFF” position.
1. Shutdown the upper engine and wait at least 70
seconds.
2. Turn positive disconnect to the OFF position.
3. Turn negative disconnect to the OFF position.
4. Return disconnects to the ON position in reverse
order.
Note: If the batteries are disconnected, the start‐up
time for on‐board computer systems will be longer
than normal when reconnected.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
3
4
Main Upper Circuit Breakers
The main upper circuit breakers are on the power panel
behind the ladder on the left side of the upper behind the
upper operator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-110 and
Figure 1-111. There are two main 105 amp resettable
circuit breakers that protect the upper electrical system.
If an electrical malfunction occurs and the breaker has
been tripped, push and release the breaker to reset.
Upper Engine Hour Meter
The upper engine hour meter is on the power panel be­
hind the ladder on the left side of the upper behind the
upper operator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-110 and
Figure 1-111. The upper engine hour meter registers
upper engine operating hours. It is useful in determin­
ing lubrication and maintenance schedules.
RCL Bypass Keyswitch
The RCL Bypass Keyswitch is on the power panel be­
hind the ladder on the left side of the upper behind the
upper operator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-110 and
Figure 1-111. The RCL bypass keyswitch is used to
bypass the Rated Capacity Limiter computer in emer­
gency situations. Refer to “Crane Monitoring System”
in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
1-185
Operator's Manual

4
2

1. Fuse Blocks, Resistors, And Relays 3. Crane Control Module 1 Bypass Keyswitch
2. Diode Packs 4. Fuel Heater Circuit Breaker - 50 Amp

Figure 1-112
Upper Fuse Panel

Upper Electrical Center Fuel Heater Circuit Breaker

The upper electrical center is behind the ladder on the
left side of the upper behind the upper operator's cab.
Raise the left side ladder and open the right access
door to gain access to the electrical center. Refer to
Figure 1-110 and Figure 1-112.
Crane Control Module 1 Bypass
Keyswitch
The Crane Control Module 1 Bypass Keyswitch is used
to bypass the joystick controllers when using the
manual control box to operate crane functions.
A 50 amp fuel heater circuit breaker is in the upper elec­
trical center . Refer to Figure 1-110 and Figure 1-112.
If the fuel heater is not working and the breaker has been
tripped, push and release the breaker to reset.
Fuse Blocks, Resistors, And Relays
Fuse blocks, resistors, and relays are mounted in the up­
per electrical center. Refer to Figure 1-110 and
Figure 1-112. Refer to Figure 1-113 for identification of
these components.

1-186 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

FUSE IDENTIFICATION

A - HORN
HOR , DOME LIGHT
B - LIGHTS
C - STROBE LIGHT (OPT), BOOM LIGHT (OPT)
D - 12 VOLT ACC OUTLET (BATTERY), ENG DIAG
E - LOWER & UPPER IGNITION SWITCH
F - RCL DISPLAY, SWING PARK BRAKE LIGHT, MD3 DISPLAY
G - UPPER IGN RELAY
H - ENGINE ECM (BAT PWR)
J - HEATER FAN
K - DEF LINE HEATERS
L - RCL KICK-OUT RELAY
M - DEF SUPPLY MODULE
N - RCL ECM POWER
P - SCR SENSORS
R - HEATER RELAY, HEAT CNTRL VALVE, A/C CLUTCH
S - WINCH CONTROL
T - WIPER, SWITCH LIGHTS
U - HOUR METER
V - SWING BRAKE VALVE INDICATOR
W - CRANE CONTROL MODULE 1
X - CRANE CONTROL MODULE 2, CYWY RMVL, FRT & RR WINCH CNTRL
Y - DRI & 3RD WRAP
Z - CHARGE FILTER INDICATOR
AA - AIR FILTER
AB - WINCH SENSORS
AC - 12 VOLT ACC OUTLET (SWITCHED)
AD - REMOTE CAMERAS
AE - RCL ALARM
AF - ENGINE DISPLAY (SWITCHED PWR)
AG - OUTRIGGER CAN POWER
AH - RCL ECU, BOOM CAN, O/R LENGTH CAN, BOOM ECU
AJ - BOOM TELE PEDAL
AK - BOOM TELE SENSORS
AL - RCL BY‐PASS
AM - TOP HATCH WIPER
AN - SWING ALARM
AP - CAB FAN
AR - CTWT REMOVAL, OFFSET FLY
AS - GREASER
AT - TELE MANUAL CTRL & EXTEND K/O RELAYS
AU - O/R LIGHTS
AV - FUEL COOLER
AW - BOOM MANUAL CONTROL
AX - BOOM I/O MODULE
AY - FUNCTION LOCK OUT, CAB TILT & ALARM
AZ - ENGINE ECU
BA - BOOM ECU
BB - BOOM ECU RELAY
CJ - TELEMATICS
CK - SPARE
CL - SPARE
CM - SPARE
CN - SPARE
CP - SPARE

RESISTOR IDENTIFICATION

BD - ENGINE DISPLAY
BE - TELE PEDAL
BF - REAR 3RD WRAP
BG - REAR WRAP
BH - FRONT WRAP
BJ - FRONT 3RD WRAP

Figure 1-113
Fuse Blocks, Resistors, And Relays Identification

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-187

Operator's Manual
7 8 9

5 10

3
11
2

14 13 12
1. Start Relay 7. RCL Display Input/Output Module - 11. CCM 2 - Counterweight Removal
2. Upper Engine Air Intake Heater Relay Manual Boom Telescope 12. Drum Rotation Indicator (DRI) Module
3. CCM 1 - Joystick Controllers 8. RCL Controller 13. Telematics Relays
4. Run Relay 9. Boom Controller 14. 250 Amp Fuse - Upper Engine Air
5. Accessory Relay 10. Fuel Heater Relay Intake Heater
6. Flasher

Figure 1-114
Upper Electronic Control Box

Upper Electronic Control Box Upper Engine Air Intake Heater

The upper electronic control box is behind the ladder
Fuse
on the left side of the upper behind the upper operat­ A 250 Amp fuse is in the electronic control box. Refer to
or's cab. Raise the left side ladder and open the right Figure 1-114. This fuse protects the upper engine air
and left access doors to access the electronic control intake heater.
box. Release the latches on the left side of the fuse
panel and open the panel to access the control box.
Refer to Figure 1-110 and Figure 1-114.

1-188 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
Upper Crane System Controls
The following pages, along with Figure 1-116, give
detailed instructions of individual controls related to
ACCEL
crane operation. It is essential that the operator knows
the function of each control and its duty in the overall
operation of the crane.
DEACTIVATE
DECEL
WARNING
Read and understand all “Operating Safety”
procedures as well as all other operating
instructions in this Operator's Manual before 1 2
attempting to operate the crane. Operation of
the crane by unqualified personnel may result 1. Deactivate Switch 2. Adjustment Switch
in a serious accident and/or cause major
equipment and/or property damage. Figure 1-115
Upper Throttle Lock Switches
Fire Extinguisher
A fire extinguisher is mounted under the left seat con­ Upper Throttle Lock System
sole in the upper operator's cab. Refer Figure 1-116. The upper throttle lock system gives the operator the
Raise the left console to gain access to the fire extin­ ability to set and hold a specific upper engine speed.
guisher. It is an A B C type fire extinguisher, meaning it This provides the operator with more flexibility for cer­
is capable of extinguishing most types of fires. The op­ tain job requirements.
erator should be familiar with its location, the clamp
To lock the upper throttle, press and hold the adjust­
mechanism used to secure it in place, and foremost the
ment switch to the “ACCEL” side until the desired upper
operation of the device. Specific instructions regarding
engine speed is reached and release the switch. Refer
operation are given on the label on the fire extinguisher.
to Figure 1-87 and Figure 1-115. The upper engine
A charge indicator on the fire extinguisher monitors the should continue to run at a constant speed when the
pressure within the tank. Check the indicator daily to adjustment switch is released.
ensure the fire extinguisher is adequately charged and
ready for use. To increase throttle lock setting (increase upper engine
speed), press and hold the adjustment switch to the
Horn Button “ACCEL” side until desired upper engine speed is
reached and release the switch. The throttle lock set­
The horn button is on the right control lever. Refer to ting can also be increased incrementally by pressing
Figure 1-116 or Figure 1-117 if equipped with single and releasing (tap up) the “ACCEL” side.
axis controllers. To sound the horn, press the horn but­
To decrease throttle lock setting (decrease upper en­
ton. Before starting the upper engine, it is recom­
gine speed), press and hold the adjustment switch to
mended to sound the horn twice in succession and
the “DECEL” side until desired upper engine speed is
wait 10-15 seconds while making a visual check to
reached and release the switch. The throttle lock set­
verify that there are no persons under or in close prox­
ting can also be decreased incrementally by pressing
imity to the crane. A horn button is also on the right side
and releasing (tap down) the “DECEL” side.
control console.
To return to idle, press the deactivate switch to the
Upper Engine Throttle Controls “DEACTIVATE” side and release.
An upper engine throttle pedal (foot operated) is moun­ Note: The upper throttle lock system is deactivated
ted on the floor of the upper operator's cab. Refer to anytime the upper ignition switch is turned off.
Figure 1-116. To operate the foot throttle, press the
throttle pedal down to increase upper engine speed;
release the throttle pedal to decrease upper engine
speed.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-189

Operator's Manual
Seat Console Control Switches
Left Right

10 16 17 18 19 20 21
11
12
13
9 14
15
8

22

5
4 23
3
2
1. Fire Extinguisher 1
2. Swing Park Brake Switch*
9. Camera Display 16.Cab Tilt Switch
3. Control Lever
10.Outrigger Controls 17.Counterweight Removal Activation Switch
(Swing, Rear Winch ‐ If Equipped)* 11.Rated Capacity Limiter Display 18.Throttle Lock Switches
4. Swing Brake Pedal 12.Bubble Level 19.Drum Rotation Indicator Switch
5. Boom Telescope Pedal 13.360° Swing Lock (If Equipped) 20.Rear Winch Control Switch
6. Upper Engine Throttle Pedal 14.Control Lever 21.Front Winch Control Switch
7. Crane Rating Manual Holder (Boom Hoist, Front Winch)* 22.Travel Swing Lock
8. Upper Crane Control Display 15.Horn Button* 23.Operator's Manual Holder
* Refer to Figure 1-117 if equipped with single axis controls.
Figure 1-116
Upper Crane Controls

1-190 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


Swing System
Rotation of the upper, over the carrier, is controlled by
the swing system. Use the following controls to operate
the swing function of the crane.
Swing Brake Pedal
The swing brake pedal is used to stop rotation of the
upper over the carrier. To apply the swing brake, push
down on the swing brake pedal. To release the swing
brake, release the swing brake pedal.
Swing Control Lever
The control lever, on the left side of the operator's seat,
is used to operate the swing function of the upper.
Move the control lever to the position to swing left;
move it to the position to swing right.
WARNING
Do not exceed maximum
boom angles listed in the
Crane Rating Manual.
Crane can tip over
backwards when not on fully
extended outriggers.
To Swing The Upper
1. Compare the boom configuration and length to the
capacity chart in the Crane Rating Manual. Posi­
tion the boom safely within the limits specified on
the capacity chart.
2. Fully apply the swing brake pedal and release the
swing park brake and/or swing lock(s).
3. Release the swing brake pedal as you begin to en­
gage the swing control lever.
DANGER
Start and stop swinging the upper slowly and
cautiously. Watch out for centrifugal force.
Out swing of a load increases the load radius
and thus decreases capacity. Sudden starts
and stops will put side loadings on the boom.
Load out swing and side loadings may result
in tipping and/or damaging the crane.
All personnel and equipment must be out of
the path of the rotating upper. Failure to do so
could result in serious personnel injury and/or
major equipment damage.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
To Stop Upper Swing
1. Ease the swing control lever into the neutral posi­
tion.
2. Apply the swing brake to bring the upper to a com­
plete stop.
3. Engage the swing park brake and/or swing lock(s)
as required.
4. Check engagement of the swing park brake by try­
ing to swing right, then left. The upper should not
swing.
Travel Swing Lock
Use the travel swing lock to lock the upper directly over
either the front or rear of the carrier. The travel swing
lock will engage in these two positions only. Use of the
travel swing lock is mandatory when traveling with the
boom directly over the front with the boom in the boom
rest or transporting the crane and during pick and carry
operations.
Note: There is a middle detent position for
the travel swing lock lever. This position is to assist
in counterweight removal and installation.
To Release The Travel Swing Lock
1. Fully apply the swing brake pedal.
2. Pull the travel swing lock lever up.
Note: In order to disengage the travel swing lock,
it may be necessary to swing the upper slightly to
relieve the pressure on the swing lock pin.
3. Move the lever to the right and release. The lever
should remain in the released position.
To Engage The Travel Swing Lock
1. Position the upper directly over either the front or
rear of the carrier. Fully apply swing brake pedal.
2. Pull the travel swing lock lever up and to the left.
Then push the lever down to the locked
position.
Note: In order to engage the travel swing lock, it
may be necessary to swing the upper slightly to
align the swing lock pin and retaining ring on the
carrier deck.
3. Check the engagement of the travel swing lock by
trying to swing the upper right, then left. The upper
must not swing.
1-191
Operator's Manual
Swing Park Brake
The swing park brake is a multiple disc type brake and
is used for holding the upper, in any position, over the
carrier during normal, stationary crane operations. En­
gage the travel swing lock and release the swing park
brake anytime the crane is traveled or transported and
during pick and carry operations. An indicator light on
the upper crane control display will illuminate when the
swing park brake is applied. The controls for the sys­
tem are shown in Figure 1-116 or Figure 1-117 if
equipped with single axis controls.
CAUTION
Do not leave the swing park brake applied
during pick and carry operations or when
traveling or transporting the crane. Use the
travel swing lock. Failure to release the swing
park brake during these operations may result
in major damage to the swing mechanism.
To Release The Swing Park Brake
1. Fully apply the swing brake pedal.
2. Push the swing park brake switch on the left con­
trol lever. The indicator light on the upper crane
control display should go out.
To Apply The Swing Park Brake
1. Rotate the upper to the desired position over the
carrier. Apply the swing brake pedal to bring the
upper to a complete stop.
2. Push the swing park brake switch on the left con­
trol lever. Indicator light on the upper crane control
display should illuminate.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to apply swing park brake with
the upper in motion. This practice may result
in major damage to the swing mechanism.
Use the swing brake pedal to stop rotation of
upper.
3. Check the engagement of the swing park brake by
trying to swing right, then left. The upper should not
swing.
1-192 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
360° Swing Lock
The 360° swing lock, if equipped, is a positive lock
against rotation of the upper over the carrier. The up­
per is mechanically locked by a manually operated
pawl that engages the gear teeth in the turntable bear­
ing. Use this swing lock during normal, stationary
crane operations. Engage the travel swing lock and re­
lease the 360°swing lock anytime the crane is traveled
or transported and during pick and carry operations.
CAUTION
Do not leave the 360° swing lock engaged
during pick and carry operations or when
traveling or transporting the crane. Use the
travel swing lock. Failure to release the 360°
swing lock during these operations may result
in major damage to the swing mechanism.
To Release The 360°Swing Lock:
1. Fully apply the swing brake pedal.
2. Move the 360° swing lock lever to the “Disengage”
position. Refer to Figure 1-116 for lever location.
Note: In order to disengage the 360° swing
lock, it may be necessary to swing the upper
slightly to allow the swing lock pawl to
disengage from the turntable bearing gear
teeth.
To Engage The 360° Swing Lock:
1. Rotate the upper to the desired position over the
carrier. Apply the swing brake pedal to bring the
upper to a complete stop.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to engage 360°swing lock with
the upper in motion. This practice may result
in major damage to the swing mechanism.
Use the swing brake pedal to stop rotation of
the upper.
2. Move the 360°swing lock lever to the “Engage”
position.
Note: In order to engage the 360° swing lock, it
may be necessary to swing the upper slightly to
allow the swing lock pawl to engage in the turn­
table bearing gear teeth.
3. Check the engagement of the 360°swing lock by try­
ing to swing right, then left. The upper must not
swing.
 Operator's Manual

4
5 2 1 10 6
3 5

6 2
1 3 7
4 9

Left Right Left 8 Right

1. Hydraulic Control Lever 4. Hydraulic Control Lever 1. Swing Right 6. Boom Down
(Boom Hoist) (Rear Winch) 2. Horn Button 7. Front Winch Lift
2. Horn Button 5. Swing Park Brake Switch 3. Rear Winch Lift 8. Swing Park Brake Switch
3. Hydraulic Control Lever 6. Hydraulic Control Lever 4. Swing Left 9. Boom Up
(Front Winch) (Swing) 5. Rear Winch Lower 10.Front Winch Lower

Figure 1-117 Figure 1-118

Single Axis Controls (If Equipped) Dual Axis Controls (If Equipped)

Wire Rope Winch System

This system controls raising and lowering the winch
wire rope(s). The system is equipped with a two speed
motor that, when activated, will approximately double
winch line speed. The controls for the system are
shown in Figure 1-116, Figure 1-117, or
Figure 1-118 if equipped with single axis controls.
Refer to the following for control descriptions and brief
summary of operation.
WARNING
Cold weather operation of the winch requires
a warm‐up procedure. Failure to properly
warm‐up the winch may result in brake
slippage. Serious personal injury and/or
major crane damage could result from brake
slippage. Warm‐up the winch before
beginning crane operations.
Warm‐Up Procedure
A warm‐up procedure is recommended at each
start‐up and is essential at ambient temperatures
below 40°F (4°C ). Allow the upper engine to run at idle
speed, with the winch control lever(s) in neutral, for
several minutes. Once the hydraulic oil begins to
warm, operate the winch(es) at low speed, with no
load, lifting and lowering only the hook block or hook
ball until warm oil circulates throughout the winch(es).
WARNING
The weight of the load must be known before
making a lift. Compare the load weight to the
appropriate capacity chart in the Crane Rating
Manual to ensure compliance with capacity
ratings. Compare the load weight to the Wire
Rope Capacity chart in the Crane Rating
Manual to determine the number of parts of
line required to lift the load. Rig and set up the
crane to ensure compliance with both the
appropriate crane capacity chart and Wire
Rope Capacity chart in the Crane Rating
Manual. Properly set the Rated Capacity
Limiter to the correct crane configuration.
Do not lift a load to the point where the hook
block, hook ball, or load contacts the head
machinery. “Two blocking” could damage the
hook block, hook ball, and/or the head
machinery. Always keep load, hook block, and
hook ball a safe distance from the boom.
Front Winch Control Lever
This lever controls the front winch drum. Pull this con­
trol lever back to the position to lift the load. Push
this control lever forward to the position to lower
the load. Refer to “Winch Operation” in this Section of
this Operator's Manual for more specific instructions.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-193

Operator's Manual
Rear Winch Control Lever (If Equipped)
This lever controls the rear winch drum. Pull this con­
trol lever back to the position to lift the load. Push
this control lever forward to the position to lower
the load. Refer to “Winch Operation” in this Section of
this Operator's Manual for more specific instructions.
Winch Operation
The following is a brief description of the basic proce­
dure for operating the wire rope winch(es). Crane op­
erations are to be performed only by a qualified opera­
tor who has read and fully understands the entire con­
tents of this Operator's Manual.
To Lift A Load: Position the head machinery directly
above the load. Attach the hook block or hook ball to the
load. Pull the control lever back, toward the operator.
WARNING
Do not activate the high speed hoist if the line
pull exceeds the available high speed winch
line pull. Crane damage can occur. Always
refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the winch
available line pulls before lifting or lowering
any load.
To Return To Standard Winch Mode: Move the con­
trol lever to the neutral position to bring the load to a
complete stop. Press winch control switch(es) to the
low speed ( ) position. Move the control lever to
the or position. Standard winch mode will
activate after engaging the control lever(s).

Note: When lifting a load, booming up may be re­ Winch Disable

quired to maintain load radius. Press the winch control switch(es) to the disable ( )
Note: When both winch levers are activated simul­ position to disable the winch(es) to prevent inadvertent
taneously, the winch requiring the most line pull operation of the winch(es) while using the control le­
may not function. vers to perform other operations.

To Hold A Load: Return the control lever to the neutral

position. The automatic brake in the winch system will
hold the load in position.
To Lower A Load: Push the control lever forward. Re­
turn the control lever to the neutral position to stop the
load.

Winch Control Switch(es)

A switch for each drum is used to control engaging/dis­
engaging the high/low speed hoist and disabling the
front or rear winch(es).

High Speed Hoist Or Lower

Move the control lever to the neutral position to bring
the load to a complete stop. Press the winch control
switch(es) to the high speed ( ) position. Move
the control lever to the or position. The high
speed hoist will activate after engaging the control
lever(s). Refer to Figure 1-116.
Note: Using the high speed hoist reduces the maxi­
mum line pull by approximately one half. It is re­
commended that the high speed hoist button be ac­
tivated before engaging the winch control lever(s).

1-194 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


Drum Rotation Indicators
This system is used to monitor winch drum speeds
through the use of a mechanical signaling device
mounted inside each of the winch control levers. To acti­
vate the system, push the bottom part of the drum rota­
tion indicator switch , on the right seat console
(Figure 1-116), to the “ON” position (indicator within
switch will illuminate). Place your thumb over the end of
the control lever(s) being used. As the winch drum(s)
rotate(s), a mechanical signal will be felt with your
thumb. The pulse rate of the mechanical signal is a di­
rect indication of the winch drum speed. However,
when the pulse rate reaches 20 per second, the signal
will stop increasing. Push the top part of the drum rota­
tion switch to deactivate the system.
First Layer/Third Wrap Indicator (If Equipped)
The crane may be equipped with a first layer/third wrap
indicator system. This system allows the operator to
monitor the wire rope windings on the drum(s). An au­
dible alarm will sound intermittently, and “First Layer”
will appear in the RCL Display to alert the operator
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
when the wire rope is down to the first layer on the
winch drum(s). An audible alarm will sound continu­
ously, and “Third Wrap” will appear in the RCL Display
to alert the operator when the wire rope is down to the
third wrap. If enabled the winch function will also
cutout with the third wrap alarm.
WARNING
Three (3) full wraps of wire rope must be
maintained on the winch drum(s) at all times
during operation. Wire rope failure may occur
leading to serious personal injury and/or
major equipment damage.
In order for this system to function correctly, it must be
properly calibrated using the controls on the Crane
Control Module. Refer to “First Layer/Third Wrap Calib­
ration” in Section 3 of this Operator's Manual. Calibrate
the system anytime wire rope is installed on the winch
drum(s) or the live end of the wire rope is wound past
the winch drum(s).
1-195
Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Base Section 5. T4 Section
2. T1 Section 6. T5 Section
3. T2 Section 7. T6 Section
4. T3 Section 8. Boom Head Machinery

Figure 1-119
Boom Nomenclature

Boom Hoist System To Raise The Boom (Boom Up): Move the boom hoist
Raising and lowering the boom is controlled by the control lever to the “Boom Up” position.
boom hoist control lever on the right arm rest. Refer to
Figure 1-116 or Figure 1-117 if equipped with single CAUTION
axis controls. When the hoist wire rope(s) is/are tied off to
the crane or any solid object, the winch
system can be overloaded causing major
WARNING winch, wire rope, or crane damage. Do not
extend boom, raise or lower the boom, or
Do not exceed maximum
raise the crane on outriggers unless wire rope
boom angles listed in the
is spooled off the drum(s) to prevent tension
Crane Rating Manual.
on the wire rope(s).
Crane can tip over
backwards when not on fully To Lower The Boom (Boom Down): Move the boom
extended outriggers. hoist control lever to the “Boom Down” position.

WARNING
Avoid sudden starts or stops when booming
up or down. This causes shock loadings
which can damage the boom or create a
tipping condition. Always ease the boom
hoist control into position.
CAUTION
Wire rope must be spooled off the winch
drum(s) as the boom is lowered. Failure to do
so may cause two blocking.
To Stop The Boom: Ease the boom hoist control lever
into the neutral position.

1-196 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


Boom Telescope System
The crane is equipped with a seven section boom. The
seven section boom consists of a Base, T1, T2, T3, T4,
T5, and a T6 section. Refer to Figure 1-119.
One telescope cylinder, one pinning cylinder, and one
latching cylinder are used to sequentially telescope
one section at a time and pin that section to the next
adjacent section from 0% up to 100% extension for
each section. The operation of these cylinders is a
combination of computer control and operator input.
The computer controls which section is being ex­
tended or retracted (based on boom mode selected by
the operator), all pinning and unpinning operations, all
latching and unlatching operations, telescope cylinder
direction, and in some cases the speed of the tele­
scope cylinder. The operator controls whether to ex­
tend or retract the boom and the speed at which to ex­
tend or retract the boom (except when the computer
takes control of speed during the pinning/unpinning
and latching/unlatching operations).
The telescope feature has eight modes of operation
and one travel mode:
 EM1 extends all sections 100% for a max boom
length of 223 ft (68.0m).
 EM2 extends the T1, T2, T3, T4, and T5 sections to
100%, and the T6 to 50% for a max boom length of
209.3 ft (63.8m).
 EM3 extends T1, T5, and T6 sections to 100% and
T2, T3, and T4 sections 50% for a max boom length of
177.5 ft (54.1m).
 EM4 extends the T1 and T6 sections to 100%, and
the T2, T3, T4, and T5 sections to 50% for a max
boom length of 163.3 ft (49.8m).
 EM5 extends all sections to 50%, for a max boom
length of 133.4 ft (40.6m).
 EM6 extends the T1 section to 100%, and the T2, T3,
T4, and T5 sections to 50% and the T6 section re­
mains fully retracted for a max boom length of 135.9
ft (41.4m).
 EM7 extends the T1, T2, T3, and T4, sections to 50%
and the T5 and T6 sections remain fully retracted for
a max boom length of 105.4 ft (32.1m).
 EM8 extends the T1, T2, T3 sections to 50%, T4, T5,
and the T6 section remain fully retracted for a max
boom length of 90.7 ft (27.7m).
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
Note: Ensure the boom sections are pinned to­
gether before lifting the maximum allowable ca­
pacities. Refer to the “Unpinned” capacities when
section are not pinned. Utilize the boom pinning
information in boom telescope animation display
on the RCL main working screen to confirm a
“Pinned” condition.
 Travel Mode extends only the T1 section from
0-100%. The travel mode is not required to travel
the crane on the highway. It is for use only when the
boom needs to be telescoped to transfer axle loading
for travel. (An example would be to extend the boom
to transfer the boom weight on a boom dolly/trailer.)
The anti two‐block system is disabled and no capaci­
ties are available in this mode.
Note: In boom modes where the T1 section can be
extended 100%, the controller will first automatic­
ally pin it at 50%. If 100% extension of the T1 sec­
tion is desired, continue to depress the telescope
extend pedal.
Boom Telescope Mode Selection
The boom modes can be changed only when the
boom is fully retracted. If a boom mode change is
attempted before the boom is fully retracted, the
message “Retract Boom” will be displayed and the boom
mode will not change. When a boom mode is selected
and the boom telescope pedal is pressed and held, the
telescope controller's first command is to move the
telescope cylinder into alignment with the first boom
section that is to be extended for the boom mode
selected. This movement of the telescope cylinder
must be allowed to continue to completion before any
other telescope function can happen. This movement
is most noticeable when Travel Mode is selected
because the cylinder has to travel from either the T3,
T4, T5 or T6 section to the T1 section, therefore taking
more time to complete. Be patient and allow the
system to complete these functions before attempting
other functions.
Note: When changing from Travel Mode to Rigging
mode, an outrigger selection and boom mode se­
lection must be made prior to selecting rigging
mode.
1-197
Operator's Manual
Boom Extend Modes

Base T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6

EM1 - ALL SECTIONS EXTEND 100% EM2 - T6 50%, OTHERS 100%

Boom Length TELESCOPE LENGTH Boom Length TELESCOPE LENGTH
ft m T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 ft m T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1
43.7 13.3 43.7 13.3
71.1 21.7 100% 57.4 17.5 50% 0% 0%
99.6 30.3 100% 100% 0% 85.8 26.2 50% 100% 0% 0%
128.9 39.3 100% 100% 100% 0% 115.2 35.1 50% 100% 100% 0% 0%
159.3 48.5 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 145.5 44.4 50% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0%
190.5 58.1 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 176.8 53.9 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0%
206.8 63.0 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 50% 193.1 58.8 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 50%
223 68.0 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 209.3 63.8 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%

EM3 - T2,T3,T4 50%, OTHERS 100% EM4 - T6,T1 100%, OTHERS 50%
Boom Length TELESCOPE LENGTH Boom Length TELESCOPE LENGTH
ft m T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 ft m T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1
43.7 13.3 43.7 13.3
71.1 21.7 100% 0% 0% 0% 0% 71.1 21.7 100% 0% 0% 0% 0%
99.5 30.3 100% 100% 0% 0% 0% 85.3 26.0 100% 50% 0% 0% 0%
114.2 34.8 100% 100% 50% 0% 0% 100.0 30.5 100% 50% 50% 0% 0%
129.4 39.4 100% 100% 50% 50% 0% 0% 115.2 35.1 100% 50% 50% 50% 0% 0%
145.0 44.2 100% 100% 50% 50% 50% 0% 130.8 39.9 100% 50% 50% 50% 50% 0%
161.3 49.2 100% 100% 50% 50% 50% 50% 147.1 44.8 100% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50%
177.5 54.1 100% 100% 50% 50% 50% 100% 163.3 49.8 100% 50% 50% 50% 50% 100%

EM5 - ALL SECTIONS 50% EM6 - T6, RETRACTED, T1 100%, OTHERS 50%
Boom Length TELESCOPE LENGTH Boom Length TELESCOPE LENGTH
ft m T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 ft m T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1
43.7 13.3 43.7 13.3
57.4 17.5 50% 0% 57.9 17.7 0% 50% 0%
71.6 21.8 50% 50% 0% 72.6 22.1 0% 50% 50% 0%
86.3 26.3 50% 50% 50% 0% 87.8 26.7 0% 50% 50% 50% 0%
101.5 30.9 50% 50% 50% 50% 0% 103.4 31.5 0% 50% 50% 50% 50% 0%
117.1 35.7 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 0% 119.6 36.5 0% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50%
133.4 40.6 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 135.9 41.4 0% 50% 50% 50% 50% 100%

EM7 - T6,T5 RETRACTED, OTHERS 50% EM8 - T6,T5 T4 RETRACTED, OTHERS 50%
Boom Length TELESCOPE LENGTH Boom Length TELESCOPE LENGTH
ft m T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 ft m T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1
43.7 13.3 43.7 13.3
58.4 17.8 0% 0% 50% 0% 0% 0% 58.9 17.9 0% 0% 0% 50% 0% 0%
73.5 22.4 0% 0% 50% 50% 0% 0% 74.5 22.7 0% 0% 0% 50% 50% 0%
89.2 27.2 0% 0% 50% 50% 50% 0% 90.7 27.7 0% 0% 0% 50% 50% 50%
105.4 32.1 0% 0% 50% 50% 50% 50%

1-198 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


Boom Telescope Pedal
The boom telescope pedal is mounted on the floor of
the upper operator's cab as shown in Figure 1-116.
Depress the toe of the boom telescope pedal to extend
the boom. Depress the heel of the boom telescope
pedal to retract the boom.
To Extend The Boom Sections
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, engage the
park brake, and shift the transmission to neutral.
2. Review the appropriate capacity chart in the Crane
Rating Manual to establish boom length, angle,
and load limitations.
3. Set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the desired tele­
scope mode. Refer to “Rated Capacity Limiter” in
this Section of this Operator's Manual.
Note: Mode changes can only be made when
the boom is fully retracted. When a boom mode
change is selected, the computer requires the
telescope pedal to be pressed and held to move
the telescope cylinder to line up with the first
section to be extended. Allow this operation to
finish before continuing. If a boom mode
change is attempted before boom is fully re­
tracted, the message “Retract Boom” will be dis­
played in the Boom Controller Message area on
the RCL main working screen and the boom
mode will not change.
CAUTION
When the hoist wire rope(s) is/are tied off to
the crane or any solid object, the winch
system can be overloaded causing major
winch, wire rope, or crane damage. Do not
extend boom, raise or lower the boom, or
raise the crane on outriggers unless wire rope
is spooled off the drum(s) to prevent tension
on the wire rope(s).
CAUTION
Wire rope must be spooled off the winch
drum(s) as the boom is extended. Failure to
do so may cause two blocking.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
4. If the boom mode was changed, press and hold the
toe of the boom telescope pedal to move the tele­
scope cylinder into alignment with the first section to
be extended. Allow this operation to finish before
continuing.
Note: Boom operation and boom functions can
be monitored on telescope animation display
on the RCL main working screen. Refer to
Rated Capacity Limiter in this Section of the Op­
erator's Manual for normal boom operation and
fault messages.
5. Depress the toe of the boom telescope pedal to ex­
tend the boom. Allow time for the boom telescope
cylinder to latch to the correct section and pull the pin
between sections. The computer will then accelerate
the boom telescope extend cylinder to a speed pro­
portional to the upper engine speed and the amount
the boom telescope pedal is depressed. Removing
your foot from the boom telescope pedal will stop
telescope operation.
Note: The boom telescope pedal is spring
loaded and will return to the neutral position
when released.
Note: In very cold weather, the latch and pin cyl­
inders will not function as fast as normal due to
the change in the viscosity of the hydraulic oil.
Allow extra time for these functions to finish.
6. Depressing the toe of the boom telescope pedal will
begin telescoping. When the section nears the point
where the section will be pinned to the adjacent sec­
tion, the computer automatically slows down the
speed of the boom telescope cylinder. It is not nec­
essary to remove your foot from the boom telescope
pedal or reduce the amount the boom telescope
pedal is depressed, this is done automatically. The
boom section will actually be extended slightly past
the pinning point and then will slowly reverse direc­
tion to gently load up the pin and unload the latches
that attach the boom telescope cylinder to the boom
section being extended.
CAUTION
If a load is suspended while telescoping, the
load will lower slightly during the pinning
operation. This is more noticeable with a
single part of line.
1-199
Operator's Manual
7. Continue to depress the toe of the boom telescope
pedal until the desired boom length is achieved.
When the desired boom length is achieved remove
your foot from the boom telescope pedal. The last
section extended can be telescoped until the cylin­
der is pinned to eliminate boom length changes due
to thermal changes in the hydraulic oil in the cylinder
or leakage in the extend system valves. The cylinder
will remain latched to the boom section.
1-200 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
To Retract The Boom Sections
1. Depress the heel of the boom telescope pedal.
Note: As the boom is retracted, the hook block
and/or hook ball will lower. Winch up as re­
quired to keep the hook block and/or hook ball
in the desired position.
Note: In very cold weather, the latch and pin
cylinders will not function as fast as normal due
to the change in the viscosity of the hydraulic oil.
Allow extra time for these functions to finish.
Boom Operating And Error Messages
The boom controller message area on the RCL main
working screen will display normal boom operating
messages and any active error message. Refer to
“Rated Capacity Limiter” in this Section of the Operat­
or's Manual

Lower Left of Upper Operator's Cab
1. Telescope Extend/Retract Switch 5. Not Pinned Indicator Light
2. Pin/Unpin Switch 6. Front Latch Present Indicator Light
3. Latch/Unlatch Switch 7. Rear Latch Present Indicator Light
4. Not Latched Indicator Light
Figure 1-120
Emergency Telescope Control Switches
Emergency Telescope Operation
WARNING
Manual mode is intended for emergency
operation only. Improper operation of the
boom in manual mode can damage internal
components of the boom. This can lead to
major crane damage, property damage, or
possibly serious personal injury.
The crane has been designed with the ability to tele­
scope the boom manually. This is intended only for
emergency situations. Note the following restrictions:
 Do not telescope the boom in manual mode with a load
on the hook. Set the load down before telescoping.
 When possible, use the holes provided in the side of
each boom section to visually check to ensure that pins
and latches are fully engaged or disengaged before
moving boom sections or the telescope cylinder. This
is important as one or more of the input sensors to the
telescope system may be malfunctioning.
 Clear all unauthorized personnel from the area sur­
rounding the crane. Ensure that all authorized per­
sonnel are well out of the way of all moving parts.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
7 8 9 10
6 5 4 3
8. Pinned Indicator Light
9. Latched Indicator Light
10. Activate Switch
The emergency telescope control switches are on a re­
mote control box (manual boom telescope controller).
It is stored in the manual controller storage box behind
the upper operator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-110. To
use the manual controls, connect the cord on the
manual boom telescope controller box to the electrical
connector on the inside lower left front corner of the up­
per operator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-120. To enable
the telescope extend/retract, pin/unpin, and latch/un­
latch switches, move the activate switch to the “ACTI­
VATE” position.
WARNING
When the manual boom telescope controller
box is connected to the upper, the RCL system
automatically changes to Rigging Mode. The
RCL system is not operational when in the Rig­
ging Mode. Disconnect the manual boom tele­
scope controller box and return the RCL system
to normal operation before operating the crane.
When the manual telescope controller box is con­
nected to the upper, the RCL system automatically
changes to the Rigging Mode. All function limiters ex­
cept anti‐two block are disabled when the RCL system
is in the Rigging Mode.
1-201
Operator's Manual
To Manually Retract A Boom Section 163.3 391.0
147.1 196.0

WARNING EM4
130.8
115.2
203.0
209.0
Manual mode is intended for emergency
100.0 214.0
operation only. Improper operation of the
85.3 221.0
boom in manual mode can damage internal
71.1 391.0
components of the boom. This can lead to
major crane damage, property damage, or 133.3 196.0
possibly serious personal injury. 117.1 203.0
101.5 209.0
EM5
Refer to Figure 1-120. 86.3 214.0
1. If the telescope cylinder is not already latched to the 71.6 221.0
section to be retracted, push the Pin/Unpin switch to 57.4 226.0
the PIN position and visually check to ensure the 135.9 391.0
pin cylinder is all the way up. PINNED indicator light 119.6 196.0
should illuminate. 103.4 203.0
2. Push the Latch/Unlatch switch to the UNLATCH EM6
87.7 209.0
position and visually check to ensure that the tele­ 72.6 214.0
scope cylinder is not latched to a section. NOT 57.9 221.0
LATCHED indicator light should illuminate. 105.4 196.0
3. Push and hold the Telescope Extend/Retract switch
89.2 203.0
to telescope the cylinder until the latches align with EM7
73.5 209.0
the holes in the rear of the section to be retracted.
58.4 214.0
The FRONT LATCH PRESENT and REAR LATCH
90.7 196.0
PRESENT indicator lights will illuminate when the
EM8 74.5 203.0
latches are centered with the latch holes. Refer to the
following chart for approximate boom telescope cyl­ 58.9 209.0
inder positions. 4. Push the Latch/Unlatch switch to the LATCH
position and visually check to ensure that the
Boom Length Telescope Cylinder Length
Extend Mode latches have fully engaged the section. LATCHED
±0.25 ft ±3 in
indicator light should illuminate.
223.0 391.0
5. Push and hold the Telescope Extend/Retract
206.8 196.0
switch to telescope the cylinder in or out slightly as
190.5 391.0 needed to allow the latches to fully engage the sec­
EM1 159.3 391.0 tion.
128.9 391.0 6. When the latches are fully engaged (LATCHED indica­
99.5 391.0 tor light illuminated), push and hold the Telescope Ex­
71.1 391.0 tend/Retract switch to telescope the cylinder out 1-3 in
209.3 391.0 (2.5-7.6cm) to unload the pin.
193.1 196.0 7. Push the Pin/Unpin switch to the UNPIN position
176.8 391.0 and visually check to ensure that the pin has fully dis­
EM2 145.5 391.0 engaged from the adjacent boom section. The pin will
115.2 391.0 pull when it is unloaded. NOT PINNED indicator light
35.8 391.0 should illuminate.
57.4 226.0 8. When the pin is pulled, the section can be re­
177.5 391.0 tracted. Push and hold the Telescope Extend/Re­
161.3 196.0 tract switch to retract the section. Winch up while
145.0 203.0 retracting the section to maintain tension on the
129.4 209.0
winch wire rope(s) so the wire rope will spool cor­
EM3
114.2 214.0
rectly on the winch drum(s).
9. When the section is fully retracted, push the Pin/
99.5 391.0
Unpin switch to the PIN position. PINNED indi­
71.1 391.0
cator light should illuminate.

1-202 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
10. Extend or retract the telescope cylinder using the 43.7 63.0
Telescope Extend/Retract switch until the FRONT 57.4 51.0
LATCH PRESENT and REAR LATCH PRESENT indi­ 85.8 39.0
cator lights illuminate. Push the Latch/Unlatch EM2
115.2 27.0
switch to the UNLATCH position and visually 145.5 16.0
check to ensure that the latches are fully disen­ 176.8 1.0
gaged from the section before retracting another 43.7 63.0
section. NOT LATCHED indicator light should 71.1 51.0
illuminate.
99.5 39.0
11. Repeat this operation until boom is fully retracted. EM3
114.2 27.0
12. Disconnect and store the remote control box and
129.4 16.0
return the RCL System to normal operation before
145.0 1.0
operating the crane.
43.7 63.0
To Manually Extend A Boom Section 71.1 51.0
85.3 39.0
EM4
WARNING 100.0
115.2
27.0
16.0
Manual mode is intended for emergency
130.8 1.0
operation only. Improper operation of the
43.7 51.0
boom in manual mode can damage internal
57.4 39.0
components of the boom. This can lead to
EM5 71.6 27.0
major crane damage, property damage, or
86.3 16.0
possibly serious personal injury.
101.5 1.0

Refer to Figure 1-120. 43.7 51.0

1. If the telescope cylinder is not already latched to the 57.9 39.0
section to be extended, push the Pin/Unpin switch to EM6 72.6 27.0
the PIN position and visually check to ensure the 87.7 16.0
pin cylinder is all the way up. PINNED indicator light 103.4 1.0
should illuminate. 43.7 39.0
2. Push the Latch/Unlatch switch to the UNLATCH 58.4 27.0
EM7
position and visually check to ensure that the tele­ 73.5 16.0
scope cylinder is not latched to a section. NOT 89.2 1.0
LATCHED indicator light should illuminate. 43.7 27.0
3. Push and hold the Telescope Extend/Retract switch EM8 58.9 16.0
to telescope the cylinder until the latches align with 74.5 1.0
the holes in the rear of the section to be extended.
The FRONT LATCH PRESENT and REAR LATCH 4. Push the Latch/Unlatch switch to the LATCH
PRESENT indicator lights will illuminate when the position and visually check to ensure that the
latches are centered with the latch holes. Refer to the latches have fully engaged the section. LATCHED
following chart for approximate boom telescope cyl­ indicator light should illuminate.
inder positions. 5. Push and hold the Telescope Extend/Retract
switch to telescope the cylinder in or out slightly as
Boom Length Telescope Cylinder Length
Extend Mode needed to allow the latches to fully engage the sec­
±0.25 ft ±1 in
tion.
43.7 63.0 6. When the latches are fully engaged (LATCHED indica­
71.1 51.0 tor light illuminated), push and hold the Telescope Ex­
99.5 39.0 tend/Retract switch to retract the cylinder until it bot­
EM1
128.9 28.0 toms out to unload the pin.
159.3 16.0 7. Push the Pin/Unpin switch to the UNPIN position
190.5 1.0 and visually check to ensure that the pin has fully dis­
engaged from the adjacent boom section. The pin will
pull when it is unloaded. NOT PINNED indicator light
should illuminate.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-203

Operator's Manual
133.4 196.0
CAUTION 117.1 203.0
Wire rope must be spooled off the winch 101.5 209.0
EM5
drum(s) as the boom is extended. Failure to 86.3 214.0
do so may cause two blocking. 71.6 221.0
57.4 226.0
8. When the pin is pulled the section can be ex­ 135.9 391.0
tended. Push and hold the Telescope Extend/Re­ 119.6 196.0
tract switch to extend the section. Winch down 103.4 203.0
while extending the section to avoid two blocking EM6
87.8 209.0
the winch wire rope(s).
72.6 214.0
9. At the telescope cylinder length on the chart below,
57.9 221.0
push the Pin/Unpin switch to the PIN position
105.4 196.0
and continue to extend the boom section until the
89.2 203.0
pin engages into the hole. PINNED indicator light EM7
73.5 209.0
should illuminate.
58.4 214.0
Boom Length Telescope Cylinder Length 90.7 196.0
Extend Mode
±0.25 ft ±3 in EM8 74.5 203.0
223.0 391.0 58.9 209.0
206.8 196.0
10. Visually check to verify that the pin has fully engaged
190.5 391.0
the pin hole. If it has not engaged the pin hole, push
EM1 159.3 391.0
and hold the Telescope Extend/Retract switch to ex­
128.9 391.0
tend or retract the telescope cylinder in the direction
99.5 391.0 required to align the pin with the hole.
71.1 391.0 11. Retract the cylinder to load up the pin. If this is
209.3 391.0 done at a high boom angle further retraction of the
193.1 196.0 cylinder will unload the latches and allow them to
176.8 391.0 disengage from the section. If this is done at a low
EM2 145.5 391.0 boom angle, the cylinder must be extended slightly
115.2 391.0 to unload the latches and allow them to disengage
35.8 391.0 from the section.
57.4 226.0 12. Push and hold the Telescope Extend/Retract switch
177.5 391.0 to telescope the cylinder until the latches align with
161.3 196.0 the holes in the rear of the section just extended.
145.0 203.0 The FRONT LATCH PRESENT and REAR LATCH
EM3 129.4 209.0 PRESENT indicator lights will illuminate when the
114.2 214.0 latches are centered with the latch holes.
99.5 391.0 13. Push the Latch/Unlatch switch to the UNLATCH
71.1 391.0 position and visually check to ensure that the tele­
163.3 391.0
scope cylinder is not latched to a section. NOT
LATCHED indicator light should illuminate.
147.1 196.0
14. When the cylinder is disengaged from the section,
130.8 203.0
it can be retracted to align with the next section to
EM4 115.2 209.0
be extended and the process can be repeated to
100.0 214.0
extend other boom sections as required.
85.3 221.0
15. Disconnect and store the remote control box and
71.1 391.0
return the RCL System to normal operation before
operating the crane.

1-204 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

DOWN

UP 20°

0°

Left Seat Console

Figure 1-121
Upper Operator's Cab Tilt Control Switch

Before operating the cab tilt feature, the operator's cab

Cab Tilt door must be secured in the fully closed or open posi­
The upper operator's cab tilts up from 0 to 20 degrees tion.
above horizontal to improve vertical visibility and help Tilting the Upper Operator's Cab
to reduce operator fatigue due to neck strain when at
 Actuate top part of the rocker switch and hold to lower
high boom angles. Use the three position momentary
the cab. Release switch to stop.
switch located on the left seat console to operate the
cab tilt function. Refer to Figure 1-121.  Actuate bottom part of the rocker switch and hold to
raise the cab. Release switch to stop.
Cab must be returned to its horizontal 0 degree posi­
tion before exiting the cab.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-205

Operator's Manual
2
Main Working Screen

1 Fine Metering Selection Screen

1. Fine Metering Level Indicator

2. Fine Metering Indicator Light
3. Up Arrow Button
4. OK Button
5. Down Arrow Button

Figure 1-122
Fine Metering Controls

2. From the fine metering screen, press the function

Fine Metering Control
The hydraulic control system is equipped with a fine
metering mode. Refer to Figure 1-122. Fine metering
allows very slow movements of the wire rope
winch(es), boom hoist, and swing functions enabling
the operator more precise movement of the load when
required for more precision work. Fine metering can
be adjusted on a scale from 10 to 100%. An indicator
light on the main working screen will illuminate to alert
the operator that the fine metering system has been en­
abled and a level indicator alerts the operator to the set
fine metering level. Use the following procedure to ad­
just the fine metering system.
1. From the main working screen, press the Function
Key F3 to bring up the fine metering screen.
key corresponding to the desired metered control
function.
3. Press the OK button to activate the fine metering
for that function. Indicator light will illuminate
4. Press the Up or Down Arrow button to adjust the
fine metering to the desired level.
5. Press the Back button to return to the fine
metering working screen.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 to adjust the fine meter­
ing for another function as desired.
7. Press the Back button to return to the main
working screen.

1-206 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

3 4

Lower Left of Upper Operator's Cab 1

5 6
1. Hydraulic Fly Control Switch 3. Engine Throttle Control Knob 5. Swing Control Switch
2. Boom Hoist Control Switch 4. Front Winch Control Switch 6. Rear Winch Control Switch

Figure 1-123
Emergency Crane Control Switches

Emergency Crane Operation

WARNING
Manual mode is intended for emergency
operation only. Improper operation of the
crane in manual mode can lead to major crane
damage, property damage, or possibly
serious personal injury.
The crane has been designed with the ability to per­
form crane functions manually. This is intended only
for emergency situations. The following functions can
be operated from the emergency crane control box:
 Hydraulic Fly (if equipped)
 Boom Hoist
 Swing
 Winch
WARNING
Clear all unauthorized personnel from the
area surrounding the crane. Ensure that all
authorized personnel are well out of the way
of all moving parts.
Note: To properly activate the remote control
box, shutdown the engine(s) before connecting
the cord to the electrical connector.
Note: The Crane Control Module 1 Bypass Key­
switch must be turned on before using the
manual control box to operate crane functions.
Refer to “Crane Control Module Bypass Key­
switch” in this Operator's Manual.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-207

Operator's Manual
The emergency crane control switches are on a remote To operate, press the desired function (momentary)
control box. It is stored in the under the seat in the up­ switch and hold. If desired, turn the engine throttle
per operator's cab. To use the manual controls, con­ knob to increase crane function speed.
nect the cord on the control box to the electrical con­
nector on the inside lower left front corner of the upper
operator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-123.

1-208 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

7
8 6

1
2 9 3 10 4

1. Tool Box 5. Arm Rest Height Adjustment Knob 8. Seat Back Connecting Capscrews
2. Seat and Console Release Lever 6. Seat Belt 9. Boom Telescope Remote Control Box
3. Seat Release Lever 7. Seat Back Adjustment Lever 10.Manual Control Box
4. Seat Height Adjustment Lever

Figure 1-124
Operator's Seat

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-209

Operator's Manual
Operator's Seat
This 6‐way adjustable seat is controlled by manual
controls. Refer to Figure 1-124.
WARNING
Do not make seat or console adjustments
while operating the crane or while crane is in
motion. Discontinue operations and properly
park crane before making adjustments.
1. Tool Box
A tool box is provided under the operator's seat to
store the manual control box, the manual boom
control box, tools, and other crane accessories.
2. Seat And Console Release Lever
Move the seat and console release lever to the left
and hold. Position the seat as desired and release
the lever to lock the seat in place.
3. Seat Release Lever
Move the seat release lever to the left and hold. Po­
sition the seat as desired and release the lever to
lock the seat in place.
4. Seat Height Adjustment Lever
Move the height adjustment lever to the left and
hold. Position the seat as desired and release the
lever to lock the seat in place.
1-210 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
5. Arm Rest Height Adjustment Knob
Loosen the knob on the inside of the arm rest.
Position the arm rest as desired and tighten knob
to lock the arm rest in place.
6. Seat Belt
A seat belt is provided and must be worn during all
operations. To fasten the seat belt pull the belt out
of the retractor and insert the tongue into the
buckle until you hear a snap and feel the latch en­
gage. Ensure the belt is not twisted and is fitting
snugly around the hips, not around the waist.
WARNING
Always wear the seat belt while operating the
crane. The seat belt must be snug and low
across the hips.
7. Seat Back Adjustment Lever
Raise the lever and adjust the seat back to the de­
sired position. Release the lever to lock the seat
back in place.
8. Seat Back Connecting Capscrews
The seat back can be removed for easy access to
the electrical panel. Remove, seat back connect­
ing capscrews on the back of seat (two on one side
and one on the other side). Slide the seat to the
right towards the cab door and lift the seat back.
 Operator's Manual

Fly Tip

Main Boom 40 ft (12.19m) Fly Base

RCL Display

12 ft (3.66m) Fly Base 2

3
1. Anemometer
2. Transmitter
3. Lock Pin

Figure 1-125
Wind Speed Indicator

RCL Display in the upper operator's cab. Refer to

Crane Monitoring System
A crane monitoring system is included for monitoring
boom length, boom angle, load weight, two block con­
dition, and wind speed.
Wind Speed Indicator
The crane is equipped with a wireless wind speed
indicator integrated into the Rated Capacity Limiter
System. The indicator is used to monitor wind speeds
at the main boom head or fly base/fly tip when erected.
Refer to Figure 1-125. An anemometer mounted on
the boom or fly head transmits wind speed data to the
“Wind Speed Restrictions” in the Crane Rating Manual
and the following for more information on wind speed
restrictions.
Remove the anemometer assembly from the boom or
fly head and store in the storage box located on the
right front of the carrier.
CAUTION
Remove the anemometer assembly from the
boom or fly head during transport to prevent
damage to the unit.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-211

Operator's Manual
Operating In Wind Or Lightning
Avoid working a crane in high winds and when there is DANGER
a likelihood of lightning. Rated lifting capacities do not If there is a likelihood of lightning,
account for the effects of wind on a suspended load or immediately stop lifting operations, ground
boom. If you must work in a wind, reduce capacities to the load, and fully retract and lower the boom.
those listed in “Wind Speed Restrictions” in the Crane
Rating Manual. Wind blowing against the load and the
boom and/or fly produces a side load on the boom
and/or fly and reduces its capacity. When lifting loads
in a wind which have large surface areas, such as
building panels, the movement of the load may pose a
danger to workmen or building structures. Out swing
of a load will increase the load radius, and may over­
load the crane. This could lead to boom and/or fly fail­
ure or the crane tipping. Monitor the wind speed using
a wind speed indicator or the “Wind Scale” chart below.
Stop lifting operations, ground the load, and fully re­
tract and lower the boom to horizontal if wind speed ex­
ceeds the maximum allowed listed in “Wind Speed Re­
strictions” in the Crane Rating Manual. Use the follow­
ing “Wind Scale” chart as a general guide.

Wind Scale
Wind Speed Wind Strength
Inland Wind Effect
mph km/h Beaufort Scale WMO* Description
<0.6 <1 0 Calm Calm, smoke rises vertically.
Smoke drift indicates wind direc­
0.6-3.1 1-5 1 Light Air
tion, wind vanes remain still.
Wind felt on face, leaves rustle,
3.7-6.8 6-11 2 Light Breeze
wind vanes begin to move.
Leaves and small twigs con­
7.4-11.8 12-19 3 Gentle Breeze stantly moving, light flags exten­
ded.
Dust, leaves, and loose paper lif­
12.4-17.4 20-28 4 Moderate Breeze
ted, small tree branches move.
Small trees in leaf begin to sway.
18.0-23.6 29-38 5 Fresh Breeze Crested waves form on inland
waters.
Larger tree branches moving.
24.2-30.4 39-49 6 Strong Breeze Telegraph wires whistle. Umbrel­
las used with difficulty.
Whole trees moving. Resistance
31.1-37.9 50-61 7 Near Gale
felt walking against wind.
Breaks twigs off trees. Resist­
38.5-46.0 62-74 8 Gale
ance felt walking against wind.
Slight structural damage. Slate
46.6-54.1 75-87 9 Strong Gale
blows off roofs.
Trees broken or uprooted. Con­
54.7-62.8 88-101 10 Storm
siderable structural damage.
* World Meteorological Organization

1-212 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
Boom Angle Indicator
A bubble type boom angle indicator is mounted on the
base section of the boom to the right and forward of the
operator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-126. It must be ad­
justed properly and the crane must be level for the unit
to accurately indicate boom angles. Even under these
conditions its readings are only approximate. When
making near capacity lifts, measure the load radius to
determine crane capacity. Check the adjustment of the
boom angle indicator daily to ensure its accuracy. Re­
fer to “Boom Angle Indicator Adjustment” in Section 3
of this Operator's Manual.

Anti‐Two Block Warning System

Integrated into the Rated Capacity Limiter System is an
anti‐two block (ATB) warning system. An anti‐two
block warning system is an electromechanical system
designed to alert the operator before the hook block,
hook ball, or load contacts the head machinery of the
main boom, auxiliary lifting sheave, or fly. When a two
block situation is imminent, an audio/visual alarm is ac­
tivated to alert the operator of the pending danger.
When the alarm activates it is essential that the opera­
tor discontinue operations immediately, and correct
the two‐block situation.
Three basic components are used to make up the anti‐
two block system. The anti‐two block weight, anti‐two
block switch with lockout clip, and the display unit in the
operator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-127 and
Figure 1-128.
An anti‐two block weight is suspended from the head
machinery switch(es) where lifts are to be made and is
used to hold the switch(es) in the “working” position.
When the anti‐two block weight is lifted by the hook
block, hook ball, or load, it allows the switch to activate
the audio/visual alarm on the display unit in the opera­
tor's cab. In addition to the audio/visual alarm, function
limiters will be activated.
CAUTION
Do not allow the load to spin out of control
when hoisting. The anti‐two block weight may
become entangled with the wire rope and
could damage the anti‐two block system, wire
rope, or boom. Use rotation resistant rope
during single part line hoisting applications,
especially when long fall lifts are involved.
Figure 1-126
Boom Angle Indicator
The added feature of hydraulic function limiters, pre­
vents the operator from continuing crane functions
which will cause a two block situation to occur. The
crane functions of winch up, boom down, and boom
extend are disabled when the anti‐two block weight is
lifted. These functions will remain disabled until the two
block situation is corrected or the “Cancel Alarm” but­
ton on the display unit is pressed and held to override
the system.
Note: Push the “Cancel Alarm” button momentarily
once to silence the audible alarm. Press and hold
the “Cancel Alarm” button for 5 seconds or longer
to temporarily override the system.
The main boom head must always have an anti‐two
block switch. Each of the added attachments used on
the crane must employ a similar head machinery
switch as well, in order for that particular attachment to
be monitored by the system. The switch and weight
can be stored when not used in the carrier right front
storage box.
The plug assembly is connected to the jumper assem­
bly on the boom head when operating from the main
boom. It is connected to the jumper assembly on the
attachment when operating from that attachment.
Check that all the harness connections between the at­
tachments are properly connected and test the system
before beginning operations. Test the system by manu­
ally lifting the ATB weight and verifying that the functions
of winch up, boom down, and boom extend are disabled.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-213

Operator's Manual

WARNING
FAILURE TO HAVE FULLY
OPERATIONAL ATB SYSTEM
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH. MAIN BOOM
ATB IS DISABLED WHEN LOCKOUT
IS INSTALLED. MAIN BOOM ATB IS
FUNCTIONAL WHEN LOCKOUT IS
NOT INSTALLED.

Lockout Clip Installed

(ATB Switch Inactive)

1. Lockout Clip 4. Jumper Assembly

2. Anti‐Two Block Weight 5. Plug Assembly
3. Anti‐Two Block Switch

Figure 1-127
Anti‐Two Block Weights And Switches

Lockout Clip
The lockout clip is used to hold the main boom anti‐two
block switch in the “working” position, the same as
having a two block weight suspended from the switch.
When operating from the main boom the lockout clip
must be removed from the anti‐two block weight cable.
When operating from an attachment only, the lockout
clip must be installed on the anti‐two block weight
cable.
When both main boom and any attachment are reeved
for operation, the lockout clip must be removed from
the cable.
Note: When using main boom and any attachment,
an anti‐two block weight must be suspended from
the anti‐two block switch on the main boom and on
each attachment that is to be monitored.

1-214 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

3 4

2 5
6
7
1 8
9

10

15

14

13 12 11
16 17 18 19

20

21
30
22
29
28
23
27

25 24

26
1. Bar‐Graph 11. Brightness Icon 21. Boom Controller Message
2. Pre‐Alarm Indicator 12. Winch Setup Icon 22. Wind Speed Display
3. Overload Indicator 13. Selection Buttons 23. Working Area Display
4. Outrigger Configuration 14. Winch Select Icon 24. Parts of Line Display
5. Counterweight Configuration 15. Main Menu Icon 25. Warning Message Area
6. Boom Extension Mode 16. Crane Representation Image 26. Load Radius Display
7. Attachment Configuration 17. Boom Section Length Display 27. Boom Angle Display
8. Stowed Attachment Configuration 18. Boom Telescope Animation Display 28. Maximum Rated Capacity Display
9. Operator Alarm Indicator 19. Drum Rotation Direction Indicator 29. Actual Load Display
10. Cancel Alarm Icon 20. Boom Length Display 30. Boom Head Height Display

Figure 1-128
Rated Capacity Limiter

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-215

Operator's Manual
3
2 in the computer memory. If an overload is approached,
1 a continuous display of:
1 2 3 Note: The function of the RCL system is an opera­
1. Green Lights - Percent­ 2. Yellow/Amber Lights -
age of Rated Load Approaching Overload
3. Red Lights - Overload
Figure 1-129
Overhead Bar‐Graph And External Light Bar
(If Equipped)
Rated Capacity Limiter
The following describes the function and operation of
the Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL). The system is in­
tended to aid the operator in the efficient operation of
the crane by continually monitoring the load and warn­
ing of an approach to an overload or unsafe condition.
WARNING
Although the system will alert the operator of
an approaching overload or unsafe condition,
it remains the responsibility of the operator to
operate the crane safely at all times.
This system must never be substituted for the
good judgment of the crane operator using safe
operating procedures. The operator is solely
responsible for safe operation of the crane.
!!THIS SYSTEM IS AN OPERATOR'S AID -
NOT A SAFETY DEVICE!!
1-216 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
System Description
The system monitors crane functions by means of high
accuracy sensors and continuously compares the load
with a copy of the crane capacity chart which is stored
the system warns by means of audible and visual
alarms and is configured to cause function limitation.
The Rated Capacity Limiter provides the operator with
 Rated Capacity
 Actual Load
 Radius of the Load
 Angle of the Main Boom
 Crane Configuration
 Length of the Main Boom
 Height of the Main Boom Head Above the Carrier
Deck
tional aid to warn or to indicate to the operator when
the load being lifted approaches, meets, or exceeds
the rated capacity of the crane. The RCL system
does not function as a scale or weighing device.
The actual load displayed by the RCL system is less
accurate when the actual load lifted is a small per­
centage of the allowable load. This typically occurs
when lifting light loads with a short boom length at
high boom angles. Crane configurations of this
type produce low pressures in the boom hoist cylin­
der resulting in less accuracy of the RCL sensors
and calculated load. The RCL load accuracy im­
proves greatly when the actual load lifted ap­
proaches the rated load (higher boom hoist cylin­
der pressures).
An additional feature of the system is the provision of
operator alarms. These alarms, when properly set,
provide a method of obstacle avoidance. This is
achieved by means of maximum boom length, maxi­
mum boom angle, maximum load radius, maximum
boom head height, left and right swing, and defined
area alarms. These alarms can be programmed for
each job site and set rapidly for the prevailing site
conditions thereby aiding the operator in safe opera­
tion of the crane.

Display Unit
The following is a description of the control buttons, in­
dicators, and windows on the display unit. Use them
along with Figure 1-128.
1. Bar‐Graph
The Bar‐Graph is a series of twelve colored lights which
gives a visual indication of how much of the crane's ca­
pacity is being used and the rate at which an overload is
being approached. Each green light represents 10% of
the crane's rated capacity being used. Yellow indicates
90-99.9%, and the red lights indicate an overload.
Note: System may be equipped with an overhead
bar‐graph or an external light bar which operates
similar to the bar‐graph on the display. Refer to
Figure 1-129.
2. Pre‐Alarm Indicator
The Pre‐Alarm Indicator illuminates yellow at a pre‐set
value of 90% of Maximum Rated Capacity and provides
a visual indication of an approach to an overload.
3. Overload Indicator
The Overload Indicator illuminates red at a pre‐set val­
ue of 100% of the Maximum Rated Capacity and pro­
vides a visual indication of Maximum Allowed Load. It
will also illuminate whenever a wire rope limit is exceed­
ed. Function limiters will occur simultaneously for an
Overload, Wire Rope Limit, or a Two‐Block condition,
but function limiters will not occur when exceeding an
operator settable alarm. An audible alarm will sound
and a message will appear in the warning message
area for all 4 conditions.
4. Outrigger Configuration
This area displays the current outrigger configuration.
It will also display rigging and travel modes.
5. Counterweight Configuration
This area displays the current counterweight configur­
ation.
6. Boom Extension Mode
This area displays the current boom extension mode. It
also shows the maximum boom length for the current
boom extension mode.
7. Attachment Configuration
This area displays the current attachment configura­
tion.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
8. Stowed Attachment Configuration
This area displays the current stowed attachment con­
figuration.
9. Operator Alarm Indicator
This indicator will display whether or not an operator
alarm is set.
10. Cancel Alarm Icon
The button located below this icon can be pushed once
to silence the audible alarm when the alarm has oc­
curred as a result of either an Overload, a Two Block, or
an Operator Settable alarm. It is also used to reset the
function limit relay when it is necessary to by‐pass a
function limit which has occurred as a result of either an
Overload or a Two Block alarm. This requires the but­
ton be pressed and held for 2 seconds or longer.
11. Brightness Icon
The button located below this icon is used to adjust the
display brightness.
12. Winch Setup Icon
The button located below this icon is used to enter the
active winch setup screen. The active winch setup
screen allows the user to configure lift point and parts
of line for the active winch.
13. Selection Buttons
The selection buttons are used to activate each of the
icons at the bottom of the screen. The icons will
change depending on the current menu display.
14. Winch Select Icon
The button located below this icon is used to select
which winch will be in use.
15. Main Menu Icon
The button located below this icon navigates to the
main menu. The main menu contains items such as:
Crane Configuration, Operator Alarms, Diagnostics,
Setup, About.
16. Crane Representation Image
This crane representation image is a generic repres­
entation of the boom, active winch configuration, auxili­
ary head configuration (on or off), and fly configuration
(on or off). The attachment image will not change with
installed attachment.
1-217
Operator's Manual
17. Boom Section Length Display
The Boom Section Length Display shows the current
section lengths as a percentage of their absolute max­
imum length (not in the current boom mode). The max­
imum length for each section in the current boom
mode is shown in brackets.
18. Boom Telescope Animation Display
The Boom Telescope Animation Display is a real‐time
visual representation of the location of the boom sec­
tions, location of the telescope cylinder, and the status
of the pins and latches. It also includes a numeric
readout of the telescope cylinder length in inches (cm).
19. Drum Rotation Direction Indicator (DRDI)
This Drum Rotation Direction Indicator is used to monit­
or Winch Up , Winch Down , and Error states .
Note: If the error state indicator appears, contact
your Link‐Belt Distributor or factory for service.
20. Boom Length Display
The Boom Length Display gives a continuous indica­
tion of the boom length in feet (m). It is the distance
from the centerline of the boom foot pin to the center­
line of the boom head machinery.
21. Boom Controller Message
The Boom Controller Message displays the most re­
cent message sent from the boom controller. This
message may contain operation messages or error
messages.
22. Wind Speed Display
The current wind speed is displayed here.
23. Working Area Display
This area displays a graphical representation of the al­
lowable lifting quadrant(s) based on the selected con­
figuration. A quadrant not allowed will be filled red, an
allowable quadrant will be filled green.
24. Parts of Line Display
The Parts of Line Display shows the parts of line cur­
rently selected for the winch in use.
1-218 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
25. Warning Message Area
The Warning Message Area displays text messages of
various alarms which may occur during normal opera­
tion of the system. When an alarm occurs, the rectan­
gular area fills in red. The Warning Message Area will
only be shown when there is an active message.
Otherwise the navigation button icons will be shown.
Refer to Figure 1-131. Press any of the selection but­
tons, except the cancel alarm button, to temporarily re­
place the Warning Message Area with the navigation
icons.
26. Load Radius Display
The Load Radius Display gives a continuous indication
of the radius of the load in feet. It is the horizontal dis­
tance from the centerline of rotation to the centerline of
the hook.
27. Boom Angle Display
The Boom Angle Display gives a continuous indication
of the angle of the main boom relative to horizontal.
28. Maximum Rated Capacity Display
The Maximum Rated Capacity Display is a digital dis­
play of the maximum permitted capacity. It is derived
from a copy of the crane's capacity chart which is
stored in the computer memory and is the reference
capacity for any lifting operation. It is dependent on the
configuration currently selected, which is shown in the
crane configuration screen, and which determines the
section of the capacity chart to be used as the rated ca­
pacity reference.
29. Actual Load Display
The Actual Load Display is a digital display of the total
load suspended below the boom or fly head. It in­
cludes the load, any slings, pins, or tackle used to se­
cure the load and the hook block or ball.
30. Boom Head Height Display
The Boom Head Height Display gives a continuous dis­
play of the height of the boom head or attachment head
above the carrier deck.

RCL System Operation
The following is a list of procedures which are used to
operate the multiple features of the Rated Capacity
Limiter (RCL) System. Use these procedures in con­
junction with the previous RCL Display control descrip­
tions.
RCL System Bypass
In emergency situations, the Rated Capacity Limiter
computer can be bypassed. The computer is mounted
in the upper electronic control box. Refer to
Figure 1-130. There is an RCL By‐Pass Keyswitch on
the power panel behind the ladder on the left side of the
upper behind the upper operator's cab. Move the key
to the “RCL BYPASSED” position to bypass the RCL
System. For emergency use while the RCL System is
bypassed, refer to “System Inoperative or Malfunction­
ing” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
WARNING
The RCL System is not operational when the
computer is bypassed. Bypass the RCL
System in emergency situations only.
System Inoperative Or Malfunctioning
When operational aids are inoperative or malfunction­
ing, the following recommendations for continued use
of the crane should be followed or the crane should be
shutdown.
1. Steps shall be taken to schedule repairs and recal­
ibration immediately. The operational aids shall be
put back into service as soon as replacement
parts, if required, are available and the repairs and
recalibration can be carried out. Every reasonable
effort must be made to expedite the repairs and re­
calibration.
2. When the rated capacity limiter is inoperative or
malfunctioning, the designated person respons­
ible for supervising the lifting operations shall es­
tablish procedures for determining load weights
and shall ascertain that the weight of the load does
not exceed the crane ratings at the radius where
the load is to be handled.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
1
1. RCL Status Keyswitch
Figure 1-130
Rated Capacity Limiter Bypass
3. When a boom angle or radius indicator is inoperat­
ive or malfunctioning, the radius or boom angle
shall be determined by measurement.
4. When the anti‐two block warning device is inoper­
ative or malfunctioning, the designated person re­
sponsible for supervising the lifting operations
shall establish procedures, such as assigning an
additional signal person, to furnish equivalent pro­
tection. This does not apply when lifting personnel
in load line supported baskets. Personnel shall not
be lifted in load line supported baskets when the
anti‐two block devices are not functioning prop­
erly.
5. When a boom length indicator is inoperative or
malfunctioning, the designated person respons­
ible for supervising the lifting operations shall es­
tablish the boom length at which the lift will be
made by actual measurement or markings on the
boom.
6. When a level indicator is inoperative or malfunc­
tioning, other means shall be used to level the
crane.
7. In situations where inconsistency exists, verified
weights, measured radii, boom lengths, and au­
thorized crane capacities must always take pre­
cedence over indicator readings.
1-219
Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5

1. Back Icon 4. Scroll Down Icon

2. Scroll Up Icon 5. Working Screen Icon
3. OK/Enter Icon 6. Selection Buttons

Figure 1-131
Menu Navigation Icons & Selection Buttons

System Navigation 3. OK/Enter Icon

The RCL display has two main display modes; the
working screen and the menu. The working screen
displays all information relevant to the safe operation of
the crane. This includes crane configuration as well as
live data such as boom length and load radius. The
menu is used to navigate to various setup and dia­
gnostic screens needed to properly setup the system.
Although the five navigation icons at the bottom of the
screen will change depending on what the display is
currently showing, the five primary icons for menu nav­
igation are as follows. Refer to Figure 1-131. If a task
associated with a button is not available, that button will
be disabled and greyed out.
The selection button located below the OK/Enter Icon
selects the menu item currently highlighted.
4. Scroll Down Icon
The selection button located below the Scroll Down
Icon scrolls down one menu item each time it is
pressed.
5. Working Screen Icon
The selection button located below the Working
Screen Icon immediately navigates to the working
screen when it is pressed.

1. Back Icon 6. Selection Buttons

The selection button located below the Back Icon nav­ These buttons are used to select the function of the
igates back one menu. icon displayed above them.

2. Scroll Up Icon
The selection button located below the Scroll Up Icon
scrolls up one menu item each time it is pressed.

1-220 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Figure 1-132
Carrier Selection

Configuration Selection Depending on how the crane is equipped or which

In the normal operational mode the system is pro­
grammed to remember the last configuration selected.
Each time the system is powered up it will automatically
default to that last configuration. Only when the crane
is rigged differently must a new configuration be selec­
ted. Use the following procedure to select the crane
configuration.
Note: When selecting configurations allowed on
outriggers, all beams must be equally extended; all
fully retracted, intermediate extended, or fully ex­
tended.
selections have been made, some screens shown
may not appear or may not appear as illustrated.
The system cannot be programmed for configura­
tions not allowed by the capacity charts in the Crane
Rating Manual.
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
Menu button .
2. Scroll to Crane Configuration, and press the OK/
Enter button .
3. Scroll to Outrigger or Tire, and press the OK/Enter
button . Refer to Figure 1-132.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-221

Operator's Manual

Figure 1-133
Counterweight Selection

4. The menu will change and graphically display the
carrier options. Scroll to the desired carrier config­
uration, and press the OK/Enter button . If rig­
ging is desired, refer to “To Select Rigging And
Travel Modes” in this Section of this Operator's
Manual.
WARNING
The RCL System is not operational when in the
Rigging or Travel Modes. Return the RCL
System to normal operation before operating
the crane.
5. After a selection is made, the display will automat­
ically return to the Crane Configuration menu.
6. On the Crane Configuration menu, scroll to Coun­
terweight, and press the OK/Enter button .
7. Scroll to the desired counterweight, and press the
OK/Enter button . Refer to Figure 1-133.
8. After a selection is made, the display will automat­
ically return to the Crane Configuration menu.

1-222 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Figure 1-134
Boom Extend Mode Selection

9. On the Crane Configuration menu, scroll to Boom 11. After a selection is made, the display will automat­
Extend Mode, and press the OK/Enter button . ically return to the Crane Configuration menu.
Refer to Figure 1-134.
10. Scroll to the desired boom extend mode, and
press the OK/Enter button .
Note: Refer to the Crane Rating Manual to de­
termine the best boom mode to maximize lifting
capacity at working radius. Boom mode op­
tions will only be displayed when the boom is
fully retracted and the telescope cylinder un­
latched from all boom sections.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-223

Operator's Manual

Figure 1-135
Auxiliary Head Selection

12. On the Crane Configuration menu, scroll to Auxili­
ary Head, and press the OK/Enter button . Re­
fer to Figure 1-135.
13. Scroll to the desired auxiliary head (off or on), and
press the OK/Enter button . play will change and graphically display the
14. After a selection is made, the display will automat­
ically return to the Crane Configuration menu.
15. On the Crane Configuration menu, scroll to Attach­
ment, and press the OK/Enter button . Refer to
Figure 1-136.
16. Scroll to Erected Attachment, and press the OK/
Enter button to display the fly options. Scroll to
the desired erected fly, if required, and press the
OK/Enter button .
a. If Nothing Erected is selected, the display will
automatically return to the Crane Configura­
tion menu.
b. If an erected attachment is selected, the dis­
available offsets as required.
c. Scroll to the desired offset angle, and press the
OK/Enter button . Refer to Figure 1-136.
d. After a selection is made, the display will auto­
matically return to the Crane Configuration
menu.

1-224 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Figure 1-136
Erected Attachment Selection

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-225

Operator's Manual

Figure 1-137
Erected Attachment Selection - Hydraulic Fly

1-226 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Figure 1-138
Stowed Attachment Selection

17. If the crane is equipped with a fly and was not se­ 18. After a selection is made, the display will automat­
lected as an erected attachment, on the Crane ically return to the Crane Configuration menu.
Configuration menu, navigate to Attachment »
Stowed Attachment to display the stowed fly op­
tions. Scroll to the desired stowed deduct, if re­
quired, and press the OK/Enter button . Refer
to Figure 1-138.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-227

Operator's Manual

Figure 1-139
Winch Configuration

19. On the Crane Configuration menu, scroll to Winch,
and press the OK/Enter button to display the
front and rear winch items. Refer to Figure 1-139.
a. Scroll to the desired winch menu item, and
press the OK/Enter button . This will only
configure the selected winch. The winch se­
lect button on the working screen is used to
change the active winch.

1-228 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Figure 1-140 Figure 1-141

Lifting Point Selection Parts Of Line Selection

b. Scroll through the available lifting points until
the desired lifting point, for the winch selected,
is displayed. Refer to Figure 1-140.
c. Scroll through the available parts of line until
the desired parts of line, for the winch selected,
is displayed. Refer to Figure 1-141.
d. Press the OK/Enter button to confirm the
selections for lifting point and parts of line. If
the back button or working screen button
is pressed before pressing the OK/Enter
button , the changes made to lifting point
and parts of line will not be saved.
e. Repeat Steps a thru d for the other winch, if re­
quired.
20. Press the back button to navigate back to the
Crane Configuration menu.
Note: A change to any selection can be made at
anytime during the configuration routine. When
on the Crane Configuration menu, simply navig­
ate to the desired configuration menu to go dir­
ectly to that subroutine.
21. Press the Working Screen button to return to
the normal working screen and graphically display
the crane configuration as previously selected.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-229

Operator's Manual

7 4

6 9

In this example the crane is setup on fully extended outriggers (1),

115,500 lb of counterweight (2), boom mode EM1 (3), no fly erected at
(4), no stowed attachment (5), the front winch available with no fly and
the rear winch selected (6), with the winch rope reeved over the main
boom head (7), with one part of line (8), and 360 degree capacities with
the boom currently positioned over the rear (9).

Figure 1-142
Normal Working Screen Example

1-230 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Figure 1-143
Rigging And Travel Modes

To Select Rigging And Travel Modes

The Rigging and Travel modes are used to facilitate rig­
ging and travel of the crane by inhibiting function lim­
iters and the audible alarm while selected. Refer to Fig­
ure Figure 1-143. To resume crane operation, select
proper outrigger or tire configuration per the proper
procedure.
WARNING
The RCL System is not operational when in the
Rigging or Travel modes. Return the RCL Sys­
tem to normal operation before operating the
crane.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-231

Operator's Manual
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
Menu button .
2. Navigate to Crane Configuration » Outrigger or
WARNING
Once the function limiters have been
Tire.
by‐passed, the crane is no longer protected
3. Scroll to Rigging or Travel.
against the condition that initially caused the
4. Select Rigging for rigging of the crane. Select
function limiters to occur.
Travel when traveling the crane.
Note: Boom must be fully retracted to enter
Travel Mode. Note: The CANCEL ALARM feature is a temporary
When changing from Travel Mode to Rigging function. The audible alarm or function limit is auto­
Mode, an outrigger selection and boom mode matically reset when the condition which caused
selection must be made prior to selecting Rig­ the alarm is no longer present.
ging mode. The CANCEL ALARM is also used to reset the function
limiters when it is necessary to by‐pass the function lim­
Cancel Audible Alarm And Reset Function Limiters iters which has occurred as a result of either an Over­
The CANCEL ALARM button is used to cancel the load, a Two Block alarm, or a Rope limit. Function lim­
audible alarm when the alarm has occurred as a result iters are reset by first canceling the audible alarm (as
of either an Overload, a Two Block alarm, or an Operat­ described above) and then pressing and holding the
or settable alarm. The audible alarm may be canceled CANCEL ALARM button for about 5 seconds, after
by pressing and releasing the CANCEL ALARM button. which the function limiters will be reset to allow opera­
The audible alarm remains canceled until the condition tion. As long as the button is held, the system will re­
which caused the alarm has been removed. For ex­ main in temporary rigging mode until the button is re­
ample, if the audible alarm was canceled because of an leased.
overload condition, it will remain canceled until the
overload condition is removed. However, if a different
alarm, e.g. two block condition, was to occur when the
audible alarm was still canceled for an earlier overload
condition, the new alarm condition would cause the
audible alarm to be sound.

1-232 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Figure 1-144
Operator Settable Alarms

Operator Settable Alarms

Some alarms occur automatically as a result of limita­
tions imposed by the capacity chart. The operator has
control over additional alarms which can be set to oper­
ate within the normal chart limitations and which are, in
addition to those already set by the chart.
Operator alarms will be stored in the computer
memory, even if the crane is shutdown, until they are
disabled. Refer to Figure 1-144.
The following alarms are available for operator use.
Minimum Angle Maximum Load Radius Left and Right Swing
Maximum Angle Maximum Boom Length
Maximum Height Operator Defined Area
WARNING
The operator settable alarms are a warning
device. All functions remain operational when
entering the operator defined bad area. For
safe operation, adequate distance must be
maintained to allow for operator reaction time
to avoid entering the bad area. It is the
responsibility of the operator to set points
which ensure that the crane's boom,
attachment, load, rigging, etc. maintains a
safe working distance and complies with local
safety regulations.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-233

Operator's Manual

Figure 1-145
Boom Angle Alarm

1-234 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
Setting Angle, Length, Height, Radius, And Swing 8. Use the following examples to understand the use
Operator Settable Alarms of the procedure.
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
Menu button .
2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter
button . Refer to Figure 1-144.
WARNING
If crane or obstacle is moved or if a different
3. Scroll to the desired alarm to be set, and press the
size load is lifted, the alarm(s) must be reset.
OK/Enter button .

WARNING
Avoid positioning the boom, attachment, load,
rigging, etc. into the bad area when setting the
alarm values.
When selecting the alarm values, ensure that
the load will maintain a safe distance from the
obstacle.
4. Place the crane in the desired position depending
upon the alarm to be set. The numerical value for
the value being set will be the current position of
the crane.
Note: If an alarm had been previously set, the
alarm value displayed will be the previously set
alarm value and indicated by the icon. The
previous alarm must first be disabled, then set
the new alarm. Alarms which are disabled are
indicated by the icon.
5. Press the corresponding selection button to set the
alarm value.
6. Press the back button to return to the Operat­
or Alarms menu or press the Working Screen but­
ton again to return to the normal working
screen.
7. Test the alarm, with no load, to ensure the alarm
points have been properly set. When approaching
the alarm set point, the audible alarm will sound in­
termittently and a warning message will appear in
the warning message area. When exceeding the
alarm set point, the audible alarm will sound con­
tinuously and a warning message will appear in the
warning message area.
Note: An alarm icon will appear on the nor­
mal working screen to alert the operator that an
operator alarm has been set. If no operator
alarm is set, the alarm disabled icon will ap­
pear.
WARNING
Check the crane's current configuration,
capacity chart, and Working Areas chart in the
Crane Rating Manual to ensure safe, stable
operation under conditions described in the
following examples.
To Set Minimum Angle Alarm
Example: To have an alarm whenever the boom is
below a 30 degree angle, use the following
procedure:
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
Menu button .
2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter
button . Refer to Figure 1-145.
3. Scroll to Boom Angle , and press the OK/Enter
button .
4. Move the boom to a 30 degree angle.
5. Press the corresponding button for “Min. Angle” to
set the alarm. The displayed value will be the alarm
setting. The will appear to indicate that the
alarm is set.
6. Press the back button to return to the Operat­
or Alarm menu or press the Working Screen button
again to return to the normal working screen.
7. Test the alarm, with no load, to ensure the alarm
points have been properly set. When approaching
30 degree boom angle, the audio will sound inter­
mittently and “Approaching Minimum Angle” will
appear in the warning message area. The audible
alarm will sound continuously and “Minimum
Angle” will appear in warning message area
whenever the boom is lowered below 30 degrees.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-235

Operator's Manual

Figure 1-146
Boom Length Alarm

To Set Maximum Angle Alarm 4. Move the boom to a 60 degree angle.

Example: To have an alarm whenever the boom is 5. Press the corresponding button for “Max. Angle” to
above a 60 degree angle use the following set the alarm. The displayed value will be the alarm
procedure: setting. The will appear to indicate that the
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main alarm is set.
Menu button . 6. Press the back button to return to the Operat­
2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter or Alarms menu or press the Working Screen but­
button . ton again to return to the normal working
3. Scroll to Boom Angle , and press the OK/Enter screen.
button .

1-236 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


7. Test the alarm, with no load, to ensure the alarm
points have been properly set. When approaching
60 degree boom angle, the audio will sound inter­
mittently and “Approaching Maximum Angle” will
appear in the warning message area. The audible
alarm will sound continuously whenever the boom
is raised above 60 degrees and “Maximum Angle”
will appear in warning message area.
To Set Maximum Length Alarm
Example: To have an alarm whenever the boom
length exceeds 75 feet, use the following
procedure:
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
Menu button .
2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter
button .
3. Scroll to Boom Length , and press the OK/Enter
button .
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
4. Extend the boom so that the length is 75 feet.
5. Press the corresponding button for “Max. Length”
to set the alarm. The displayed value will be the
alarm setting. The will appear to indicate that
the alarm is set.
6. Press the back button to return to the Operat­
or Alarms menu or press the Working Screen but­
ton again to return to the normal working
screen.
7. Test the alarm, with no load, to ensure the alarm
points have been properly set. When approaching
75 foot boom length, the audio alarm will sound in­
termittently and “Approaching Maximum Length”
will appear in the warning message area. The aud­
ible alarm will sound continuously whenever the
boom length exceeds 75 feet and “Maximum
Length” will appear in the warning message area.
1-237
Operator's Manual

Figure 1-147
Boom Height Alarm

To Set Maximum Height Alarm 5. Press the corresponding button for “Max. Height”
Note: The height measured here is from the carrier to set the alarm. The displayed value will be the
deck to the tip of the attachment. alarm setting. The will appear to indicate that
the alarm is set.
Example: To have an alarm whenever the boom tip 6. Press the back button to return to the Operat­
height exceeds 75 feet, use the following or Alarms menu or press the Working Screen but­
procedure: ton again to return to the normal working
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main screen.
Menu button . 7. Test the alarm, with no load, to ensure the alarm
2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter points have been properly set. When approaching
button . 75 foot boom tip height, the audio alarm will sound
3. Scroll to Head Height , and press the OK/Enter intermittently and “Approaching Maximum Height”
button . will appear in the warning message area. The aud­
4. Extend the boom and/or adjust the boom angle so ible alarm will sound continuously whenever the
that the head height is 75 feet. boom tip height exceeds 75 feet and “Maximum
Height” will appear in the warning message area.

1-238 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Figure 1-148
Load Radius Alarm

To Set Maximum Radius Alarm 6. Press the back button to return to the Operat­
Example: To have an alarm whenever the boom or Alarms menu or press the Working Screen but­
radius exceeds 95 feet, use the following ton again to return to the normal working
procedure: screen.
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main 7. Test the alarm, with no load, to ensure the alarm
Menu button . points have been properly set. When approaching
2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter 95 foot boom radius, the audio will sound intermit­
button . tently and “Approaching Maximum Radius” will ap­
pear in the warning message area. The audible
3. Scroll to Radius , and press the OK/Enter button
alarm will sound continuously whenever the boom
. radius exceeds 95 feet and “Maximum Radius” will
4. Extend the boom and/or adjust the boom angle so appear in warning message area.
that the radius is 95 feet.
5. Press the corresponding button for “Max. Radius”
to set the alarm. The displayed value will be the
alarm setting. The will appear to indicate that
the alarm is set.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-239

Operator's Manual

Figure 1-149
Swing Alarm

1-240 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


To Set Left And Right Swing Alarms
Example: To have an alarm whenever the LEFT
SWING AND RIGHT SWING exceed
pre‐determined alarm points, use the
following procedure:
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
Menu button . 9. Press the back button
2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter
button . Refer to Figure 1-149.
3. Scroll to Swing Angle , and press the OK/Enter
button . 10. Test the alarm, with no load, to ensure the alarm
4. Swing the boom to the left alarm point.
5. Press the corresponding button for “Left Angle” to
enter the left alarm point. The displayed value will
be the left alarm setting. The will appear to in­
dicate that the angle is set.
6. Swing the boom to the right alarm point.
Operator's Manual
7. Press the corresponding button for “Right Angle”
to enter the right alarm point. The displayed value
will be the right alarm setting. The will appear to
indicate that the angle is set.
8. When both angles are set, the will appear to in­
dicate that the alarm is set.
to return to the Operat­
or Alarms menu or press the Working Screen but­
ton again to return to the normal working
screen.
points have been properly set. When approaching
the set alarm point, the audio alarm will sound in­
termittently and “Approaching Swing Angle Limit”
will appear in the warning message area. The aud­
ible alarm will sound continuously whenever the
swing exceeds the alarm points and “Swing Angle
Limit” will appear in warning message area.
Note: Both the left and right swing alarms must
be set for the system to determine the operator
set working area.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-241

Operator's Manual

Figure 1-150
Operator Defined Area Alarm

1-242 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


Operator Defined Area Alarm
The operator defined area alarm, when set, will define
an imaginary vertical plane between two set points to
optimize the working area. When approaching the
plane, the audio alarm will sound intermittently, and the
message “Approaching Defined Area” will appear in
the warning message area. When passing the plane,
the audio alarm will sound continuously and the mes­
sage “Defined Area” will appear on the warning mes­
sage area. Use the following procedure,
Figure 1-150, and Figure 1-151 to set the operator
defined area alarm.
WARNING
The operator defined area alarm is a warning
device. All functions remain operational when
entering the operator defined bad area. For
safe operation, adequate distance must be
maintained to allow for operator reaction time
to avoid entering the bad area. It is the
responsibility of the operator to set points
which ensure that the crane's boom,
attachment, load, rigging, etc. maintains a
safe working distance and complies with local
safety regulations.
Setting Operator Defined Area Alarm
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
Menu button .
2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter
button . size load is lifted, the area alarm must be
3. Disable any previously set left and right swing
alarms if required. Refer to “To Disable Operator
Settable Alarms” in this Section of this Operator's
Manual.
Note: It is recommended to clear the left and
right swing alarms prior to setting the defined
area alarm.
4. Scroll to Define Area , and press the OK/Enter
button . 4. Press the corresponding button for each alarm.
WARNING
Avoid positioning the boom, attachment, load,
rigging, etc. into the bad area when setting the
left or right alarm points.
When selecting the left and right alarm points,
ensure that the load will maintain a safe
distance from the obstacle. Also ensure that
the two points are set so that the tailswing of
the crane will not enter the bad area.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
5. Position the boom, attachment, load, rigging, etc.
to the desired Point A and press the corresponding
button for “Point A” to set the first point. The dis­
played values for swing angle and radius will be the
set point. The will appear to indicate that Point
A is set.
6. Position the boom, attachment, load, rigging, etc.
to the desired Point B and press the corresponding
button for “Point B” to set the second point. The
displayed values for swing angle and radius will be
the set point. The will appear to indicate that
Point B is set.
Note: For best results, the two points should be
separated by a minimum of 10 ft (3m) or 30 de­
grees.
7. When both angles are set, press the back button
to return to the Operator Alarm menu or press
the Working Screen button again to return to
the normal working screen.
8. Test the alarm, with no load, to ensure the alarm
points have been properly set. When approaching
the plane, the audio alarm will sound intermittently
and the message “Bad Working Area” will appear
on the warning message area. When passing the
plane, the audio alarm will sound continuously and
the message “Bad Working Area” will appear on
the warning message area.
WARNING
If crane or obstacle is moved or if a different
reset.
To Disable Operator Settable Alarms
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
Menu button .
2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter
button .
3. Scroll to the desired alarm to be disabled, and
press the OK/Enter button .
The icon indicates the alarm has been cleared.
5. When all desired alarms are disabled, press the
back button to return to the Operator Alarm
menu or press the Working Screen button
again to return to the normal working screen.
1-243
Operator's Manual

Obstacle Safe
Working
Distance
Imaginary
Vertical
Bad Working Area Plane

Safe Point B
Working Load
Distance

Point A

Working
Area

Figure 1-151
Operator Defined Area Alarm

1-244 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Figure 1-152
Outrigger Position Screen Access

Outrigger Position Screen

The calibrated position of each outrigger beam will be WARNING
graphically displayed on the screen. Also the outrigger The outrigger position screen is used to
beam length will be displayed from the centerline of the display outrigger beam position. Properly
crane. Refer to Figure 1-152 and Figure 1-153. extend the outrigger beams using the
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main outrigger extend position lever/pin to ensure
Menu button . correct outrigger beam position. Failure to do
2. Scroll to Diagnostics, and press the OK/Enter but­ so may cause a loss of stability and possible
ton . serious personal injury and/or major crane
3. Scroll to Outrigger Position and press the OK/Enter damage.
button . !!THIS SCREEN IS AN OPERATOR'S AID -
NOT A SAFETY DEVICE!!

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-245

Operator's Manual

FULLY RETRACTED INTERMEDIATE EXTENDED FULLY EXTENDED

Figure 1-153
Outrigger Position Screen

4. Outrigger position and length of each beam, from 5. Press the Working Screen Button to return to
crane centerline to pontoon centerline, will be dis­ the normal working screen.
played.

1-246 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
3 4 5

2 8

1. Maximum Boom Section Telescope Length Percentage 5. Latch State

2. Actual Boom Section Telescope Length Percentage 6. Boom Length
3. Pin State 7. Boom Controller Message
4. Telescope Cylinder Length 8. Boom Mode Display

Figure 1-154
RCL Working Screen

Boom Telescope Animation Display 1. Maximum Boom Section Telescope

Visual feedback about what is occurring while telescop­ Length Percentage
ing the boom is displayed on the main RCL Working
Maximum Boom Section Telescope Length Per­
Screen. Refer to Figure 1-154. The screen will display a
centage displays the current section length as a
graphic representation of the boom and will display the
percentage of its absolute maximum length not
boom length in feet, the telescope cylinder location in
just in the current boom mode.
inches, the pin and the latch status, and boom extension
mode. Press the Main Menu button on the RCL display to
access CAN BUS information, error messages, and other
diagnostic information. Refer to “Active System Faults”
and “Boom Telescope Diagnostics” found in this Section
of this Operator's Manual.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-247

Operator's Manual
2. Actual Boom Section Telescope Length
Percentage
Actual Boom Section Telescope Length Percent­
age displays the maximum length for each section
in the current boom mode shown in brackets.
3. Pin State
Pin State graphically shows the pin status as
pinned or not pinned.
4. Telescope Cylinder Length
Telescope Cylinder Length shows a numeric
readout of the telescope cylinder length in inches
(cm).
3. Latch State
Latch State graphically shows the latch status as
latched or not latched.
1-248 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
6. Boom Length Display
The Boom Length Display gives a continuous in­
dication of the boom length in feet (m). It is the dis­
tance from the centerline of the boom foot pin to
the centerline of the boom head machinery.
7. Boom Controller Message
The Boom Controller Message displays the most
recent message sent from the boom controller.
This message may contain operation messages or
error messages.
8. Boom Mode Display
This area displays the current boom extension
mode. It also shows the maximum boom length for
the current boom extension mode.
 Operator's Manual
Boom Operating Messages
The following chart lists the operation messages that may appear in the boom controller message area of RCL dis­
play during crane operations.
Normal Operation Messages
Boom has finished extending. No further action
StopExt Boom Stop Extend
is required.
Extend - Pin Latch Bottom
Telescope cylinder is centering the latches in the
E_PLB During boom extend operation, pin/latch state is
next section to extend.
PINNED and NOT LATCHED.
Extend - Boom Extend Section is LATCHED to telescope cylinder and
NOT PINNED. Boom will not enter this condition
E_Ext Extending boom at speed proportional to ex­ unless pin/latch state is NOT PINNED and
tend pedal input. LATCHED.
Pin should be fully engaged in the hole and the
Extend - Pin Latch Top
telescope cylinder is retracting to gently load up
E_PLT During boom extend operation, pin/latch state is
the pin and unload the latches so they disen­
PINNED and LATCHED.
gage from the section.
Extend - Cylinder Retract Boom is PINNED and NOT LATCHED. Tele­
scope cylinder moves at speed proportional to
E_Ret Telescope cylinder is retracting at maximum pedal position within retract range. Boom will
speed to line up with the next section to be ex­ not enter this condition unless pin/latch state is
tended. PINNED and NOT LATCHED.
Boom has finished retracting. No further action
StopRet Boom Stop Retract is required. This is only shown during a boom
mode change.
Pin should be fully engaged in the pin hole in the
Retract - Pin Latch Bottom
adjacent boom section and the telescope cylin­
R_PLB During boom retract operation, pin/latch state is
der is centering the latches to unload them so
PINNED and LATCHED.
they disengage from the section.
Retract - Boom Extend Boom section is LATCHED to telescope cylinder
and NOT PINNED. Boom will not enter this con­
R_Ext Retracting boom at speed proportional to retract dition unless pin/latch state is NOT PINNED and
pedal input. LATCHED.
Retract - Pin Latch Top
Telescope cylinder is centering the latches in the
R_PLT During boom retract operation, pin/latch state is
next section to retract.
PINNED and NOT LATCHED.
Retract - Cylinder Retract Boom is PINNED and NOT LATCHED. Tele­
scope cylinder moves at maximum speed re­
R_Ret Telescope cylinder is extending at maximum gardless of pedal position within retract range.
speed to line up with the next section to be re­ Boom will not enter this condition unless pin/
tracted. latch state is PINNED and NOT LATCHED.
Telescope cylinder has reached the pinning loc­
ation and stopped moving. Cylinder is Latched
Wt4Pin Wait for PINNED signal
and state has changed to PINNED. Computer is
waiting for a PINNED switch signal.
Telescope cylinder is Latched to the boom sec­
tion and has unloaded the pin. Cylinder move­
Wt4PPul Wait for NOT PINNED signal
ment is stopped. Computer is waiting for a NOT
PINNED switch signal.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-249

Operator's Manual
Normal Operation Messages
Telescope cylinder is centered on the latching
location and stopped moving. State has
Wt4Ltch Wait for LATCHED signal
changed to LATCHED . Computer is waiting for
a LATCHED switch signal.
Telescope cylinder is centered on the latching
location and stopped moving. The boom sec­
Wt4LPul Wait for NOT LATCHED signal tion is PINNED to the adjacent section. State
has changed to NOT LATCHED. Computer is
waiting for a NOT LATCHED switch signal.
A switch error has occurred causing the possib­
ility of incorrect boom extension. Manually re­
tract all the boom sections and retract the tele­
Re‐Zero Re‐Zero telescoping boom scope cylinder until it bottoms out while PINNED
and NOT LATCHED. Re‐Zero the length of the
telescope cylinder at this point. This resets the
boom length and cylinder location.
No input from the operator is being sensed by
Neutral Telescope pedal is centered.
the controller.
Telescope cylinder is not lined up with correct
section to be moved. Controller is automatically
Release Pin and unlatch from incorrect section
pinning and unlatching from the incorrect sec­
tion and moving to line up with correct section.
Unpinning a boom section that is incorrectly
ExtSlwL Slow Extend while latching and not pinning pinned to the adjacent boom section upon
startup of the crane.
LkOutSw Function lockout switch is activated Function lockout switch is activated.
The arm rest is up causing functions to be dis­
ArmRest Arm rest switch is activated
abled.
Telescope foot pedal is not centered when ex­ Telescope foot pedal is not centered upon crane
PdlCtr?
pected startup.
During extend mode changes the telescope cyl­
AutoSRB (Automatic) slow retract button inder pins off the section it is currently attached
to and goes to the correct boom section.
During extend mode changes the telescope cyl­
AutoPLB (Automatic) slow pin‐latch button inder pins off the section it is currently attached
to and goes to the correct boom section.
Overload condition is active and extend function Winch down, boom hoist up or retract boom to
ovrLoad
is disabled reduce load.
atbKo ATB is triggered and extend function is disabled Winch down or retract boom.
Fly extend sensor is triggered and extend func­
flyKo Retract boom.
tion is disabled

1-250 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Main Menu >> Diagnostics and Monitoring >> Active System Faults

Main Menu >> Diagnostics and Monitoring >> Active System Faults

Figure 1-155
Active System Faults

Active System Faults

The Active System Faults menu displays current sys­ 4. Scroll to the fault code to be addressed, and press
tem faults. Refer to Figure 1-155 and the Active Sys­ the OK/Enter button .
tem Faults Messages chart. 5. The message selected, meaning of the message,
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main and how to clear the message will be displayed.
Menu button . 6. Press the back button to return to the System
2. Scroll to Diagnostics, and press the OK/Enter but­ Faults menu or press the Working Screen button
ton . to return to the normal working screen.
3. Scroll to Active System Faults, and press the OK/
Enter button .

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-251

Operator's Manual
Active System Faults Messages
Message Meaning How To Clear Message
Verify display is properly connected to the
DispComErr Display communication lost. CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wiring includ­
ing termination resistors.
Verify boom reel is properly connected to
ATBComErr ATB switch communication lost. the CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wiring
including termination resistors.
Verify ATB switch is functioning properly.
ATBShort ATB switch short circuit. Check wiring between ATB switch and
boom reel.
Verify boom reel is properly connected to
LenComErr Boom length sensor communication lost. the CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wiring
including termination resistors.
Verify boom length is properly calibrated.
LenDataErr Boom length sensor data is invalid. Verify boom length value changes when ex­
tending or retracting the boom.
Verify boom length and boom controller are
Boom length sensor and boom controller properly calibrated. Verify sensor boom length
LenReduErr
length don't agree. and boom controller length both change when
extending or retracting the boom.
Verify boom reel is properly connected to
AngleComErr Boom angle sensor communication lost. the CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wiring
including termination resistors.
Verify boom angle is properly calibrated.
AngleDataErr Boom angle sensor data is invalid. Verify boom angle value changes when rais­
ing or lowering the boom.
Verify boom angle is properly calibrated.
Boom angle sensor and head angle sensor
AngleReduErr Verify boom angle and head angle both
don't agree.
change when raising or lowering the boom.
Verify boom reel is properly connected to
HeadComErr Head angle sensor communication lost. the CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wiring
including termination resistors.
Verify head angle is properly calibrated.
Check wiring between head angle sensor
HeadDataErr Head angle sensor data is invalid.
and boom reel. Verify head angle changes
when raising or lowering the boom.
Verify head pressure sensor is properly con­
HPresComErr Head pressure sensor communication lost. nected to the CAN bus. Check all CAN bus
wiring including termination resistors.
Verify rod pressure sensor is properly con­
RPresComErr Rod pressure sensor communication lost. nected to the CAN bus. Check all CAN bus
wiring including termination resistors.
Verify display is properly connected to the
DispIOComErr Display I/O communication lost. CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wiring includ­
ing termination resistors.
Verify boom controller is properly connected
BoomComErr Boom controller communication lost. to the CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wiring
including termination resistors.
Cycle power.
Boom100Err Internal error in boom controller Check power and ground to controller.
Re‐Zero telescope cylinder.

1-252 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
Active System Faults Messages
Message Meaning How To Clear Message
Check power and ground to sensors and sig­
NOT PINNED and NOT LATCHED sensors are nal back from sensors.
Boom101Err
both closed. Check wire harness.
Check mechanical interlock.
Check power and ground to sensors and sig­
NOT PINNED and PINNED sensors are both
Boom102Err nal back from sensors.
closed.
Check wire harness.
Check power and ground to sensors and sig­
LATCHED and NOT LATCHED sensors are
Boom103Err nal back from sensors.
both closed.
Check wire harness.
Check power and ground to sensors and sig­
PINNED switch is closed during Boom Extend
Boom106Err nal back from sensors.
portion of the cycle.
Check wire harness.
Check power and ground to sensors and sig­
LATCHED sensor is closed during Retract
Boom107Err nal back from sensors.
Cylinder portion of the cycle.
Check wire harness.

Check power and ground to encoders.

Telescope cylinder encoder 1 and telescope
Boom108Err Check CAN harness from encoders.
cylinder encoder 2 are both not received.
Check encoders.

Check the wire harness between the controller

Telescope extend, retract, latch, not latch, pin,
Boom109Err and the telescope valve.
or not pin coils are over current limit.
Check the coils in the telescope valve.
Telescope cylinder cycled > 3 times trying to Check power and ground to latch present
Boom110Err obtain both latch present forward and latch sensors and signal back from sensors.
present rear sensors. Check wire harness
Verify display is properly connected to the
Boom111Err Display I/O communication lost. CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wiring includ­
ing termination resistors.
Back off on the amount that you stroke the tele­
scope pedal.
Check telescope pedal and replace as re­
Input goes beyond the usable range defined
Boom201Err quired.
for the foot pedal.
Adjust telescope pedal stops.
Ensure the left console is down and function
enable switch is closed.
Boom hose reel stops turning and gets slack in Repair boom hose reel.
Boom205Err
the hoses and cable. Check power and ground to reel rotation sensor
No LATCH PRESENT sensor signal at some
point when:
 E_PLB and R_PLB, mode and cylinder is
between PIN - REAR LIMIT PIN and PIN + Check power and ground to sensors and sig­
FRONT LIMIT PIN. nal back from sensors.
Boom206Err
 E_PLT and R_PLT mode and cylinder is Check wire harness.
between LATCH - REAR LIMIT LATCH and Check sensor adjustments.
LATCH + FRONT LIMIT LATCH.
 The LATCHED sensor is closed.
 The NOT PINNED sensor is closed.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-253

Operator's Manual
Active System Faults Messages
Message Meaning How To Clear Message
Check power and ground to sensors and sig­
PINNED sensor is closed but not LATCHED,
Boom208Err nal back from sensors.
NOT LATCHED, or LATCH PRESENT sensors.
Check wire harness.
If NOT PINNED sensor signal is lost during Check power and ground to sensors and sig­
Boom209Err E_Ext or R_Ext after sensor timeout period and nal back from sensors.
the state is still NOT PINNED. Check wire harness.
Check reels for correct cable spooling.
Boom lengths don't match within 1 ft between Look for any reason the reel would not show
Boom301Err
the RCL system and the telescope system. the correct boom length.
Recalibrate reels.
Unexpected LATCH PRESENT sensor signal.
There is a LATCH PRESENT sensor input that
is true when the sensor inputs indicate Pinned Check power and ground to sensors and sig­
Boom302Err and Not Latched and the cylinder position is nal back from sensors.
between PIN POSITION + FRONT LIMIT PIN + Check wire harness.
12 in and LATCH POSITION - REAR LIMIT
LATCH - 12 in.
If Encoder2 is below -0.3 inches from the Check power and ground to encoders.
calibrated zero length Home Position and the Check CAN harness from encoders.
Boom307Err
controller is using Encoder1. Operation can Check encoders.
continue until problem is resolved. Re‐Zero telescope cylinder.
If Encoder2 is more than 404 inches from the Check power and ground to encoders.
calibrated zero length Home Position and the Check CAN harness from encoders.
Boom308Err
controller is using Encoder1. Operation can Check encoders.
continue until Encoder2 is repaired. Re‐zero telescope cylinder.
If Encoder2 is not received and the controller is Check power and ground to encoders.
Boom309Err using Encoder1. Operation can continue until Check CAN harness from encoders.
Encoder2 is repaired. Check encoders.
If Encoder1 is below -0.3 inches from the Check power and ground to encoders.
calibrated zero length Home Position and the Check CAN harness from encoders.
Boom310Err
controller is using Encoder2. Operation can Check encoders.
continue until Encoder1 is repaired. Re‐zero telescope cylinder.
If Encoder1 is more than 395 inches from the Check power and ground to encoders.
calibrated zero length Home Position and the Check CAN harness from encoders.
Boom311Err
controller is using Encoder2. Operation can Check encoders.
continue until Encoder1 is repaired. Re‐zero telescope cylinder.
If Encoder1 is not received and the controller is Check power and ground to encoders.
Boom312Err using Encoder2. Operation can continue until Check CAN harness from encoders.
Encoder1 is repaired. Check encoders.
If Encoder1 is not equal to Encoder2 by more Check power and ground to encoders.
than 0.4 inch and the controller is using Check CAN harness from encoders.
Boom313Err
Encoder1. Operation can continue until Check encoders.
problem is resolved. Re‐zero telescope cylinder.
Verify telematics module is properly connec­
Telematics
Telematics module communication lost. ted to the CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wir­
ModComErr
ing including termination resistors.

1-254 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Main Menu >> Diagnostics and Monitoring >> Boom Telescope

Figure 1-156
Boom Telescope

Boom Telescope Diagnostics 2. Scroll to Diagnostics, and press the OK/Enter but­
ton .
The Boom Telescope menu displays current boom dia­
3. Scroll to Boom Telescope, and press the OK/Enter
gnostic data. Refer to Figure 1-156, Figure 1-157,
button .
and the Boom Faults Messages chart.
4. Press the back button to return to the Boom
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
Diagnostic menu or press the Working Screen but­
Menu button .
ton to return to the normal working screen.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-255

Operator's Manual

13
2
Main Menu >> Diagnostics and Monitoring >> Boom Telescope
12

5
11

10
6
9

7
8

4 3
In this example there are no boom fault messages upon starting the crane (1), hydraulic flow in cylinder
at 0 % (2), the primary telescope cylinder is extended 32.032 in (3), the secondary telescope cylinder
is extended 32.032 in and the LTC controller is currently using encoder (4), telescope pedal status (5),
the boom reel is reading a 42.0 ft boom length (6), the boom controller is reading a 42.0 ft boom length
(7), the telescope system is in Auto Mode (8), the boom extend mode is set at EM1 (9), the T4 section
(10) is not pinned (12) and latched (11).
1. Boom Faults Message 6. Boom Length - Reel 11. Latched/Not Latched Status
2. Hydraulic Oil Flow Indicator 7. Boom Length - Boom Controller 12. Pinned/Not Pinned Status
3. Primary Telescope Cylinder Length 8. Telescope System Status 13. Latching Telescope Controller (LTC)
4. Secondary Telescope Cylinder Length 9. Boom Extend Mode Program State
5. Telescope Pedal Status 10. Boom Section

Figure 1-157
Boom Telescope Diagnostics Screen

Boom Telescope Diagnostics Screen 2. Hydraulic Oil Flow Indicator

The following is a description of the images represen­
ted on the RCL display unit when in the Boom Tele­
scope Diagnostics menu. Use them along with
Figure 1-157.
1. Boom Faults Message
Any current boom fault messages will appear in
this area. Refer to Boom Faults and Figure 1-156
in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
This indicator shows the hydraulic oil flow rate in
the telescope cylinder.
3. Primary Telescope Cylinder Length
The Primary Telescope Cylinder Length gives a
continuous indication of the Primary telescope cyl­
inder length in inches. * ­ indicates Latching Tele­
scope Controller (LTC) is currently using encoder.

1-256 Section 1 - Operating Instructions


4. Secondary Telescope Cylinder Length
The Secondary Telescope Cylinder Length gives a
continuous indication of the secondary telescope
cylinder length in inches. * ­ indicates Latching
Telescope Controller (LTC) is currently using en­
coder.
5. Telescope Pedal Status
This displays the status of the telescope pedal.
6. Boom Length - Reel
This area displays a continuous indication of the
boom length in feet as read by the boom reel.
7. Boom Length - Boom Controller
This area displays a continuous indication of the
boom length in feet as read by the boom controller.
8. Telescope System Status
This displays the status of the telescope system,
Auto Mode or Manual Mode.
9. Boom Extend Mode
The current boom extend mode is displayed here.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
10. Boom Section
This area displays the boom section that is cur­
rently being pinned/latched.
11. Latched/Not Latched Status
This is a graphic representation of the current
latched/not latched status. When the section is
latched, the outer boxes will be shaded. When the
section is not latched, the inner boxes will be
shaded.
12. Pinned/Not Pinned Status
This is a graphic representation of the current
pinned/not pinned status. When the section is
pinned, the top box will be shaded. When the sec­
tion is not pinned, the inner box will be shaded.
13. Latching Telescope Controller (LTC)
Program State
This display the current states the latching tele­
scope controller program is in. OM= Operation
Mode, CP=Current Phase, and RP=Resume
Phase.
1-257
Operator's Manual

Main Menu >> Diagnostics and Monitoring >> Sensor Data

Figure 1-158
Sensor Data Screen

Sensor Data 3. Scroll to Sensor Data, and press the OK/Enter but­
ton .
The Sensor Data menu displays data being read by
4. The data being generated by the various sensors
various sensors on the crane. Refer to Figure 1-158.
will be displayed.
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
5. Press the back button to return to the Dia­
Menu button .
gnostics menu or press the Working Screen button
2. Scroll to Diagnostics, and press the OK/Enter but­
to return to the normal working screen.
ton .

1-258 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Figure 1-159
Function Time

Function Time Monitoring ing Screen button to return to the normal

working screen.
The function time monitoring screen enables the oper­
ator to monitor the hours of use for the winch(s), boom Telematics
hoist cylinder, and boom telescope cylinder for service
purposes. The screen also displays the number times TELEMATICS ­ refers to the use of wireless devices and
the winch(s) has been started and stopped along with computer module technologies to transmit data in real
the total cumulative distance the boom has been exten­ time back to an organization.
ded and retracted. This Link­Belt crane is equipped with one or more on­
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main board computers that monitor and/or control the
Menu button . crane’s performance. Crane owners may access elec­
2. Scroll to Diagnostics and Monitoring, and press tronic data by subscribing to the optional telematics
the OK/Enter button . feature offered by our telematics partner.
3. Scroll to Function Time, and press the OK/Enter
Specific electronic data transmitted by the onboard
button . computers may be, but is not limited to, water temper­
4. From this screen, monitoring of the winch(s), boom ature, oil temperature, engine rpm, fuel consumption,
hoist cylinder, and boom telescope cylinder can be crane location, and other data that may be transmitted
done. via satellite to our telematics partner. A crane owner
5. Press the back button to return to the Dia­ may access this data by subscribing to the telematics
gnostics and Monitoring menu or press the Work­

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-259

Operator's Manual
feature through our telematics partner. A crane owner
may then use some or all of the data transmitted from
the crane’s onboard computers to monitor the crane’s
activity, location, maintenance/service schedule, and/
or other areas to assist them in managing this crane.
Note: Link­Belt recognizes that each individual
crane’s data transmitted via telematics is the prop­
erty of the crane owner.
Data sharing is offered by Link­Belt through our
telematics partner in an effort to provide Link­Belt dis­
tributors and our crane owners with overall enhanced
product support through filed troubleshooting, exped­
ited parts procurement, infield repairs and other vari­
ous support outlets. Any data shared by the crane
owner is a “snapshot” of the data from the crane.
Link­Belt may request the crane owner “share data”.
The crane owner should determine who and when spe­
cific data related to their crane is shared. Link­Belt and
its representatives may be in possession of specific
crane data only when the crane owner selects “share
data”.
Shared data received by Link­Belt is not intended to be
“stored” in any permanent data file at our factory.
Shared data may exist at the factory location through
the normal course of business until deleted by auto­
matic expiration.
Link­Belt reserves the right to modify this policy as re­
quired and make every reasonable attempt to notify
telematics subscribers of changes to this policy.
1-260 Section 1 - Operating Instructions
Transmitting Data
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
Menu button .
2. Scroll to Diagnostics and Monitoring, and press
the OK/Enter button .
3. Scroll to Telematics, and press the OK/Enter but­
ton . Refer to Figure 1-160.
4. Scroll to the data that you would like to send, and
press the OK/Enter button .
5. A confirmation screen will pop up. Press to
send the data or press to cancel and return to
the previous screen.
6. A will be shown beside the data selected while
the data is being sent. The Telematics Module will
send data every 10 seconds for 10 minutes or until
ignition is turned off.
7. Press the back button to return to the Dia­
gnostics and Monitoring menu or press the Work­
ing Screen button to return to the normal
working screen.
Computer Return And Stored Data Disclosure
In the event the Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL), Load
Moment Indicator (LMI), or other computer containing
recorded/stored data on this crane is returned to
Link­Belt Construction Equipment Company (LBCE) or
the original equipment manufacturer (OEM) of an
onboard computer, for service or replacement, the
crane owner must submit a written request to have the
recorded/stored data on that computer downloaded to
an electronic device that is to be returned to the crane
owner before any examination and/or work is started
on that specific computer.
Should LBCE direct the crane owner to return an
onboard computer to the OEM of that computer, LBCE
recommends the crane owner submit a written request
to the OEM requesting the OEM download the
recorded/stored data to an electronic device and
return that device to the crane owner prior to any
examination and/or work being started on that specific
computer.
In some instances, in order to read data
recorded/stored in an onboard computer special
equipment is required, and access to the crane and/or
the computer is needed. Link­Belt or the OEM of the
computer has the special equipment necessary to
retrieve the recorded data, or directions on how the
data may be retrieved. Please contact your nearest
Link­Belt distributor for assistance.
It is the position of Link­Belt that the crane owner
owns any data that is recorded and stored in the
onboard computer system(s) installed on our
cranes.
 Operator's Manual

Figure 1-160
Telematics

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-261

Operator's Manual

Figure 1-161
Highlight Data

Highlight Data Menu 3. Scroll to Display Options, and press the OK/Enter
button .
The Highlight Data menu allows the Operator to select
4. Scroll to Highlight, and press the OK/Enter button
specific data to be highlighted on the normal working
.
screen. The data will appear with a purple highlighting.
5. Scroll to the information to be highlighted, and
Refer to Figure 1-161.
press the OK/Enter button .
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
6. Repeat Step 5 for each item to be highlighted.
Menu button .
7. Press the back button to return to the Display
2. Scroll to Crane Configuration, and press the OK/
Options menu or press the Working Screen button
Enter button .
to return to the normal working screen.

1-262 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual

Figure 1-162
About Screen

About Menu 1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
Menu button .
The About menu displays which version of the Display,
2. Scroll to About, and press the OK/Enter button .
ECM, and Boom Controller software is currently in­
3. Press the back button to return to the Main
stalled. Refer to Figure 1-162. The machine serial
menu or press the Working Screen button to
number is also displayed on this screen.
return to the normal working screen.

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-263

Operator's Manual

1 4

7 8

1. 27 Ft Offset Lattice Fly Tip Section

2. 28 Ft Offset Lattice Fly Center Section
3. 12 Ft Offset Lattice Fly Base Section FULL
REFERTOR’S
LUBRICA
CHART
OPERA
MANUAL
GREASE
RECOMMENDED
TO
OR
S2P0054
ADD TION
FOR

4. 25 Ft Fly Extension
5. Auxiliary Lifting Sheave REFER
LUBRICA
CHART
OPERA
MANUAL
GREASETO
OR
TION
RECOMMENDED
ADD TOR’S
S2P0054 FOR

6. Six Section Boom

7. Front Winch
8. Rear Winch

Figure 1-163
Typical Crane Attachment Setup (Provided for correct identification of attachments)

1-264 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

 Operator's Manual
2

1. Cab Walk
2. Release Handle

Figure 1-164
Cab Walk

Entering And Exiting The

Upper Operator's Cab WARNING
Entering or exiting the operator's cab could be hazard­ To prevent personal injury do not attempt
ous if certain aspects are not taken into consideration. to enter the upper operator's cab prior to
The elevation of the carrier deck and operator's cab raising the left side console stand.
alone could cause serious injury if someone was to fall.
For this reason ladders are mounted on each side of the
Figure 1-165
carrier to provide easy access to the carrier deck and the Left Console Warning Label
operator's cab. A cab walk assembly is mounted under
the operator's cab and should be extended when enter­
ing/exiting the operator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-164.
Turn the release handle to extend/retract the cab walk as­
sembly. (Retract the cab walk anytime the crane is
traveled, lifted, or transported.) Numerous hand grips are
also attached to the operator's cab as well as non‐skid
safety strips on the surface of the carrier deck, to provide
safe entry to the operator's cab. Use these features to
make climbing on the crane as safe as possible. Remain
in three point contact with the crane at all times (two
hands and one foot or two feet and one hand). Inside the
operator's cab, two separate features are provided to
prevent accidental operation of the hydraulic controls
while entering or exiting the operator's seat. Refer to
“Function Lockout Switch” and “Movable Left Side
Console” in this Section of this Operator's Manual for
complete operating instructions.

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-265

Operator’s Manual
1
5
1. Left Side Console
Figure 1-166
Movable Left Side Console And Function Lockout Switch
Function Lockout Switch
This switch is used to disable the hydraulic functions
which are operated by the control levers and boom
telescope foot pedal. The switch is on the right side
control console. Refer to Figure 1-166. Press the left
part of the switch to disable hydraulic functions and to
prevent inadvertent operation of these controls. To al­
low normal operation of the control levers and boom
telescope foot pedal, press the right part of the function
lockout switch. The right part of the switch will illumi­
nate to indicate the switch is in the “OPERATION” posi­
tion. This switch must always be in the “DISABLE” po­
sition before entering or exiting the operator's seat.
1ï266
WARNING
To prevent personal injury do not attempt
to enter the operator's cab prior to raising
the left console stand.
2. Function Lockout Switch
Movable Left Side Console
The left side console is hinged at the rear to allow the
operator to lift the console up, out of the way while en­
tering or exiting the operator's cab. A spring assists lift­
ing the console.
Lifting the left side console also performs the same
duty as the function lockout switch, disabling all hy­
draulic functions related to the control levers and boom
telescope foot pedal. Ensure the left side console is
lifted up, out of the way before attempting to enter or
exit the operator's cab.
One more feature which is available to ease entry and
exit of the operator's cab, is the adjustable operator's
seat. Lift the left hand arm rest up out of the way and
move the seat and/or console back as required to allow
safe entry. This feature also provides operator comfort
during crane operation as well. Refer to “Operator's
Seat” in this Section of the Operator's Manual for com­
plete seat operating instructions.

Before Starting Operations
Before starting daily operations, make the following
checks and inspections.
Engine(s)
Check fuel, oil, and cooling systems for proper fluid lev­
els. Check for leaks. Repair or fill as required. Refer to
engine manufacturer's manuals for additional details.
Gear Cases
Visually inspect all gear cases for leaks or damage. If
leaks or damage exist, repair and fill case to proper lu­
brication level.
Hydraulic System
Check all hoses for chafing, bulging, or other damage.
Replace as necessary. Inspect hydraulic system for ex­
ternal leaks. Repair as needed. Check hydraulic reser­
voir oil level. Add oil if necessary. Refer to Section 2 of
this Operator's Manual for additional information.
Lubrication
Lubricate the crane as outlined in Section 2 of this Op­
erator's Manual.
Note: Drivers/operators may have nothing to do
with lubrication or maintenance of the crane, but it
could be advantageous for them to be familiar with
it. Knowledge of preventive maintenance makes
the driver/operator more aware of malfunctions in
the crane so repairs can be made with a minimum of
downtime.
Tires And Wheels
Check tire inflation. Inflate to pressures per the Gross
Axle Weight Rating plate for highway travel, or per the
Crane Rating Manual for pick and carry operations.
Check wheel lug nut torque, each day, for the first five
(5) days of operation, and periodically thereafter. Refer
to Section 3 of this Operator's Manual for additional in­
formation.
Wire Rope And Sheaves
Inspect all wire rope and sheaves for damage or dete­
rioration. Replace as necessary. Refer to Section 5 of
this Operator's Manual for additional information.
General Inspection
Visually inspect the entire crane for loose or missing
cotter pins and bolts, and damaged fly chords or lat­
tices. Check for oil or fluid leaks. Make repairs as
needed.
Section 1 Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
Electrical System
Check the operation of all lights, windshield wipers,
horns, turn signals, etc. Repair as needed.
Brakes
Start the carrier and allow the air system pressure to
reach its normal operating range, 105-115 psi
(724-793kPa). Check park brake and service brake
operations. Adjust or repair as needed.
Controls
Check all controls for proper operation and adjust­
ment. Repair as needed.
WARNING
This Operator's Manual must be thoroughly
read and understood by the driver/operator
before starting the engine(s). Major crane
damage or serious personal injury could
result from improper operating procedures.
Boom Distortion Due To Thermal Effects
Of The Sun
The heat from the sun may have a thermal effect on the
sides of telescopic booms causing the sides of the
boom to expand (lengthen). The sides of the boom
may not expand equally if the boom is extended for
long periods of time with only one side of the boom ex­
posed to the sun. The unequal expansion may cause
boom distortion (the boom may “deflect” to one side).
This is more noticeable with long boom lengths and/or
long booms with long lattice flys attached to the boom.
For example, a 100 ft (30.5m) main boom, with a 50°F
(10°C ) temperature differential between the two sides
of the boom, may cause the centerline of the main
boom head to “deflect” as much as 3 ft (0.9m) off the
centerline of the crane. Attaching a 50 ft (15.2m) lattice
fly to the same boom may cause the centerline of the fly
head to “deflect” as much as 10 ft (3.0m) off the center­
line of the crane. This “deflection” to one side creates a
“side load” on the boom and/or fly. Side load on a
boom or fly, whether induced by the load or thermal ef­
fects, is dangerous and shall be avoided.
Prior to lifting any loads, inspect the boom or boom and
fly combination to ensure they are straight. If the boom
or boom and fly combination is not straight, ensure that
all the boom wear pads are properly adjusted.
If the boom is distorted due to temperature differential
on the sides of the boom, reposition the boom to allow
the thermal effects from the sun to equalize the temper­
atures of the side walls of the boom to eliminate the dis­
tortion before lifting a load.
1-267
Operator’s Manual
Break‐In Period
Operate a new crane at half throttle for the first twenty
(20) hours of operation. A break‐in period under mod­
erate loads will assist in providing long, trouble‐free
performance.
Engine(s) Starting And
Shutdown Procedure
WARNING
Diesel exhaust fumes can be
harmful. Start and operate
engine(s) in a well ventilated
area. If it is necessary to
operate in an enclosed area,
vent the exhaust to the outside.
Properly maintain the exhaust
system to its original design.
Before attempting to start the engine(s), the driver/oper­
ator must carefully read and understand the engine start­
ing instructions in the engine manufacturer's manuals
and this Operator's Manual. Attempting to start or run the
engine(s) before studying these instructions may result in
engine(s) damage. The driver/operator must learn and
obey all applicable “Rules of the Road” and if not already
a competent driver/operator, obtain instructions to attain
these necessary skills. With the crane fully serviced and
the driver/operator familiar with all gauges, switches,
controls, and having read and fully understood this entire
Operator's Manual and the engine manufacturer's
manual, start the engine(s) using one of the following
procedures:
To Start The Carrier Engine From
The Carrier Cab
1. Walk around the crane to verify that there are no
persons under, or in close proximity to the crane.
2. Engage the park brake.
3. Shift the transmission to neutral. (The carrier en­
gine will not start unless the transmission is in neu­
tral.)
4. Sound the horn twice in succession, wait 10-15
seconds while making a visual check to verify that
there are no persons under, or in close proximity to
the crane.
1ï268
5. Turn the carrier ignition switch to the “On” position to
energize the carrier engine electrical system and al­
low the gauges to go through their self‐test routine.
Note: Repair any gauges and indicator lights if
they are not functioning normally.
6. Turn the carrier ignition switch to the “Start” posi­
tion. Release the carrier ignition switch immedi­
ately after the carrier engine starts. If the carrier en­
gine fails to start in 30 seconds, release the carrier
ignition switch and allow the starter motor to cool a
few minutes before trying to start again. If the carri­
er engine fails to start after four attempts, refer to
carrier engine manufacturer's manual for instruc­
tions.
7. Warm Up - Run the carrier engine at low throttle
with no load while carrier engine is warming up.
Observe the following instruments for proper indi­
cations.
a. Carrier Engine Oil Pressure - If there is no car­
rier engine oil pressure after 10-15 seconds of
running time, shutdown the carrier engine im­
mediately and repair the problem to avoid ma­
jor carrier engine damage. Refer to carrier en­
gine manufacturer's manual for proper oil
pressure operating range.
b. Carrier Battery Gauge - Observe indicator to
ensure the carrier battery and electrical system
is working properly. The carrier battery gauge
should indicate 12.5 to 14.0 volts while the car­
rier engine is running. (It should read 12.0
volts when the carrier ignition switch is on,
without the carrier engine running.)
c. Carrier Air Pressure Warning Light - Normal
operating range is 105-115 psi
(724-793kPa). When air pressure is sufficient
for safe carrier operations, the low air pressure
warning light and alarm will turn off. Do not at­
tempt to operate crane until the carrier air pres­
sure warning light and alarm are off.
8. When the carrier engine has thoroughly warmed
up, after all pressures and temperatures are within
operating ranges, and all daily checks have been
made, the crane is ready for operation.
 Operator's Manual
Carrier Engine Shutdown Procedure 8. When the upper engine has thoroughly warmed
up, after all pressures and temperatures are within
From The Carrier Cab operating ranges, and all daily checks have been
1. Throttle the carrier engine back to idle. Engage the made, the crane is ready for operation.
park brake and shift the transmission to neutral.
2. Allow the carrier engine to idle 3 to 5 minutes to al­ Upper Engine Shutdown Procedure
low the carrier engine to cool gradually and uni­
formly. From The Upper Operator's Cab
3. Turn the carrier ignition switch to the “Off” position. 1. Lower any load to the ground and secure it prop­
erly.
Note: If the carrier ignition switch is in the “On” 2. Engage the swing park brake or travel swing lock
position in the upper operator's cab, it must be as required.
moved to the “Off” position before the carrier 3. Throttle the upper engine back to idle.
engine will shutdown. 4. Allow the upper engine to idle 3 to 5 minutes to al­
low the upper engine to cool gradually and uni­
4. Remove the keys from both cabs and lock the formly.
doors if the crane is to be left unattended. 5. Turn the upper ignition switch to the “Off” position.
6. Remove the keys from both cabs and lock the
To Start The Upper Engine From The doors if the crane is to be left unattended.
Upper Operator's Cab
1. Walk around the crane to verify that there are no
persons under, or in close proximity to the crane.
2. Check the carrier cab to ensure that the transmis­
sion is in neutral, the park brake is engaged, and
the carrier ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position.
3. Sound the horn twice in succession, wait 10-15
seconds while making a visual check to verify that
there are no persons under, or in close proximity to
the crane.
4. In the upper operator's cab, turn the upper ignition
switch to the “On” position to energize the upper
engine electrical system and allow the gauges to
go through their self‐test routine.
5. If required, allow the Wait To Start indicator light
to go out.
6. Turn the upper ignition switch to the “Start” posi­
tion. Release the upper ignition switch when the
upper engine starts. If the upper engine fails to
start in 30 seconds, release the upper ignition
switch and allow the starter motor to cool a few
minutes before trying to start the upper engine
again. If the upper engine fails to start after four at­
tempts, refer to the upper engine manufacturer's
manual for instructions.
7. Warm Up - Run the upper engine at low throttle
with no load while the upper engine is warming up.
Observe the upper engine oil pressure gauge for
proper indications. If there is no upper engine oil
pressure after 10-15 seconds of running time,
shutdown the upper engine immediately and re­
pair the problem to avoid major upper engine dam­
age. Refer to the upper engine manufacturer's
manual for proper oil pressure operating range.

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-269

Operator’s Manual
2 4. From the main working screen on the upper crane
1 carrier engine ignition switch to the run position
1. Carrier Engine Ignition Switch
2. Carrier Engine Throttle Button
Figure 1-167
Upper Operator's Cab Carrier
Engine Ignition Switch
To Start The Carrier Engine From
The Upper Operator's Cab
The carrier engine can be started from the upper oper­
ator's cab using the carrier engine ignition switch in the
upper operator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-167. This fea­
ture is provided to allow outrigger control from the up­
per operator's cab.
1. Walk around the crane to verify that there are no
persons under, or in close proximity to the crane.
2. Sound the horn twice in succession, wait 10-15
seconds while making a visual check to verify that
there are no persons under, or in close proximity of
the crane.
3. Turn the carrier ignition switch to the “On” position.
control display, press the function key F2 ( ) to
display the carrier engine data screen.
5. If required, allow the Wait To Start indicator light
to go out.
6. Move the carrier engine ignition switch in the upper
operator's cab to the Start position. Release the
when the carrier engine starts. If the carrier engine
fails to start in 30 seconds, release the carrier igni­
tion switch and allow the starter motor to cool a few
minutes before trying to start the carrier engine
again. If the carrier engine fails to start after four
attempts, refer to the carrier engine manufactur­
er's manual for instructions.
7. Use the throttle control button on the upper operat­
or's cab outrigger control pane. to increase carrier
engine speed during outrigger operation.
Carrier Engine Shutdown Procedure
From The Upper Operator's Cab
1. Throttle the carrier engine back to idle.
2. Allow the carrier engine to idle 3 to 5 minutes to al­
low the carrier engine to cool gradually and uni­
formly.
3. Move the carrier engine ignition switch to the “Off”
position.
4. Turn the carrier ignition switch to the “Off” position.

1ï270

1. Preheater Receptacle
Figure 1-168
Carrier Engine Block Preheater
Cold Weather Starting Aids
The crane is equipped with starting aids to assist in start­
ing engine(s) in cold ambient conditions. Refer to the en­
gine manufacturer's manuals and the following before
starting the engine(s) in cold ambient conditions.
Carrier Engine Block Preheater
The carrier engine block preheater uses electrical pow­
er to heat the coolant and circulate it through the carrier
engine. The carrier engine block preheater electrical
receptacle is on the left side of carrier in the fender be­
hind the battery disconnect switches. Refer to
Figure 1-170.
To Start The Carrier Engine Block Preheater
1. Park the crane in a suitable area for storage, en­
gage the park brake, position the transmission
shifter to neutral, and shutdown the carrier engine.
Section 1 Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
2. Plug an approved extension cord into the preheater re­
ceptacle. Plug the other end into a 110V to 120V elec­
trical source.
WARNING
Areas adjacent to the preheater must be clean
and free of oil and debris to avoid possible fire
hazard.
Note: Unplug the carrier engine block preheater be­
fore starting the carrier engine.
To Stop Carrier Engine Block Heater
1. Unplug extension cord from the electrical source
and the preheater receptacle.
2. Store the extension cord.
1-271
Operator’s Manual
1
1. Ether Fuel Cylinder
2. Cylinder Clamp
3. Valve
4. Metering Orifice
Figure 1-169
Ether Start System
Carrier Engine Ether Start System
(If Equipped)
The ether start system is a fully‐automatic carrier engine
starting fluid system designed to spray a controlled
amount of ether into the carrier engine intake system dur­
ing and immediately after cranking. The carrier engine
control module (ECM) determines when the system
should function. Whenever the carrier engine does not
start within a normal period of cranking the ether fuel cyl­
inder may be empty. Replace the cylinder as required.
Refer to “Changing The Ether Fuel Cylinder” in this Sec­
tion of this Operator's Manual. The ether fuel cylinder is
between the frame rails to the right of the carrier cab. Re­
fer to Figure 1-169.
WARNING
When maintaining or troubleshooting ether
start system, always ensure the area is well
ventilated and away from heat, open flames,
or sparks. Wear goggles to avoid eye injury.
When opening ether fuel line or disconnecting
atomizer, ensure it is pointed away from you.
The ethyl ether fuel used in this system is
extremely flammable, toxic, harmful, and can
be fatal.
Changing The Ether Fuel Cylinder
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, engage the
park brake, shift the transmission to neutral, and
shutdown the carrier engine.
1ï272
2. Clean all dirt from the neck of the ether fuel cylinder
and top of the valve. Refer to Figure 1-169.
3. Loosen the cylinder clamp.
4. Turn the fuel cylinder counterclockwise to remove
the cylinder from the valve. Remove the old gasket
from the valve and properly discard.
5. Install the protective cap to protect the top of the
valve from dirt after removal.
6. Locate the new gasket inside the thread protective
white cap on the new fuel cylinder.
7. Install the new gasket into the valve.
Note: Replace gasket inside valve each time a
cylinder is replaced. Read the entire cylinder la­
bel for additional information on cylinder and
valve gasket installation.
8. Coat the new cylinder's threads with clean engine oil.
9. Install the cylinder by turning the cylinder clock­
wise until the cylinder dirt and moisture seal o‐ring
contacts the valve.
10. Tighten an additional 1 and 1/2 turns. Do not
overtighten.
CAUTION
Do not over‐tighten the cylinder.
Over‐tightening may damage the valve or the
cylinder.
11. Tighten the cylinder clamp.
 Operator's Manual

1. Preheater Receptacle
2. Upper Hydraulic Reservoir

Figure 1-170
Upper Engine Block Preheater

Upper Engine Block Preheater To Stop Upper Engine Block Heater

The upper engine block preheater uses electrical pow­
er to heat the coolant and circulate it through the upper
engine. The upper engine block preheater electrical
receptacle is on the left side of the upper. Refer to
Figure 1-170.
1. Unplug extension cord from the electrical source
and the electrical receptacle on the left side of the
upper.
2. Store the extension cord.

To Start The Upper Engine Block Preheater

1. Park the crane in a suitable area for storage, en­
gage the park brake, position the transmission
shifter to neutral, and shutdown the upper engine.
2. Plug an approved extension cord into the electrical
receptacle on the left side of the upper. Plug the
other end into a 110V to 120V electrical source.

WARNING
Areas adjacent to the preheater must be clean
and free of oil and debris to avoid possible fire
hazard.

Note: Unplug the upper engine block preheater be­

fore starting the upper engine.

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-273

Operator’s Manual
Upper Engine Air Intake Heater

DANGER
Do not manually use starting
DANGER fluids to aid in upper engine
start up. The upper engine is
equipped with an air intake
heater and use of a starting
fluid can cause an explosion
resulting in severe personal
injury or death.

The upper engine air intake heater is a fully‐automatic

Figure 1-171
Upper Engine Air Intake Heater Danger
upper engine cold starting aid designed to heat the air
in the upper engine air intake system. The upper en­
gine control module (ECM) determines when the sys­
tem should activate based on temperature data from
the coolant temperature sensor and the intake mani­
fold air temperature sensor. If temperature conditions
are met the ECM will activate the intake heater and the
Wait To Start indicator light will illuminate to alert
the operator not to crank the upper engine. When tem­
perature conditions are warm enough, the indicator light
will go out and then the upper engine can be started. For
additional information refer to the upper engine
manufacturer's manual.

Note: If the upper engine block heater is used, the

upper engine air intake heater may not activate.

1ï274

Jump Starting The
Engine(s)
The carrier has three (3) 12V batteries and the upper
has two (2) 12V batteries. The carrier batteries are be­
hind the carrier cab (Refer to Figure 1-66) and the up­
per batteries are behind the upper operator's cab
(Refer to Figure 1-110).
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury and/or major
equipment damage, follow these procedures
in the order they are given.
Wear protective clothing and shield your face
and eyes when working around batteries.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns
skin, eyes, and clothing.
Do not jump start a damaged battery. Ensure
vent caps are tight and level. If another
vehicle is used, ensure booster vehicle and
crane are not touching.
The gases around the battery can explode if
exposed to open flames or sparks. An
explosion could result in serious personal
injury and/or major equipment damage.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso­
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
1. Check all battery terminals and remove any corro­
sion before attaching jumper cables.
2. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to the
12V positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
Figure 1-173.
3. Connect the other end of the first cable to the 12V
positive (+) terminal of the 12V power source or
booster battery.
Section 1 Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
Wrong
Figure 1-172
Do not use an open flame near the battery.
4. Connect one end of the second jumper cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the 12V power source or
booster battery.
5. Connect the other end of the second cable to a
good metallic surface on the carrier frame of the
disabled crane to jump start the carrier engine or
on the upper frame to jump start the upper engine.
6. If another vehicle is used to jump start the en­
gine(s), start the booster vehicle. Run the booster
vehicle's engine at a moderate speed.
7. Turn on the appropriate ignition switch to allow dis­
charged batteries to charge for a few minutes prior
to attempting to start the disabled engine.
8. Start the disabled engine. After the engine is
started, remove jumper cables in reverse order as
given in Steps 2 through 5.
9. Let the engine run for a few minutes to charge the
discharged batteries.
10. Check the battery gauge in the appropriate cab.
The gauge reading should be increasing toward
14 volts.
Note: If the batteries are extremely discharged,
voltage may increase slowly.
1-275
Operator’s Manual

Power Source
3

4
Lower Frame Ground

Carrier Batteries

Make connections in numerical order.

Disconnect in reverse order.

Power Source
3

4
Upper Frame Ground

Upper Batteries

Make connections in numerical order.

Disconnect in reverse order.

Figure 1-173
Battery Cable Connections

1ï276
 Operator's Manual

TRAVEL TRAVEL
HOIST LOWER USE MAIN HOIST (One track) (Both tracks)

USE WHIP LINE RAISE BOOM LOWER BOOM SWING STOP

RAISE THE BOOM AND LOWER THE BOOM AND EXTEND BOOM RETRACT BOOM
MOVE SLOWLY LOWER THE LOAD RAISE THE LOAD (Telescoping booms) (Telescoping booms)

EXTEND BOOM RETRACT BOOM

TRAVEL DOG EVERYTHING EMERGENCY STOP (Telescoping booms) (Telescoping booms)
Reprinted from ASME B30.5-2011 by permission of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. All rights.

Figure 1-174
Hand Signals

These signals should be used at all times unless voice

Hand Signals instructions with a radio or telephone are being used.
Hand Signals are important for communications be­ One person should be designated as a signal person
tween the designated signal person and the driver/op­ and their signals obeyed by the driver/operator. Obey
erator. A Hand Signals Chart is shown in a stop signal from anyone.
Figure 1-174. A Hand Signals Chart is also on the
right window of the upper operator's cab. Another one
is on the right rear corner of the rear outrigger box.

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-277

Operator’s Manual
Crane Operation
Cranes are used primarily for making heavy lifts. In or­
der to do this properly, certain procedures must be fol­
lowed. The following is a suggested procedure for
making typical lifts:
Note: Before operating the crane near airports, ra­
dio and microwave towers, power lines, etc., always
review and confirm compliance with all local, state,
and federal laws.
1. Determine weight to be lifted. Always add the
weight of the hook block, hook ball, slings, rigging,
fly, etc. Determine height to which the load must be
lifted.
2. Refer to the proper capacity chart, Wire Rope
Strength chart, Working Areas chart, and Working
Range diagram in the Crane Rating Manual. Find
the shortest boom length and load radius that will
accomplish the job.
3. Do not swing upper while on tires with any counter­
weight installed, use outriggers. Refer to the Crane
Rating Manual for approved specifications. Posi­
tion crane so a minimum swing is necessary.
4. The crane must be supported by a firm, solid level
surface before starting to lift. All capacities in the
Crane Rating Manual are based on the crane being
level in all directions. If the crane is not level, out
swing or side swing of the load will greatly reduce
lifting capacities and could cause major crane
damage or a serious accident. If the ground is soft,
use mats.
5. When making lifts on tires, all tires must be inflated
to pressures as listed in the Crane Rating Manual.
Do not make lifts which exceed Crane Rating
Manual specifications.
6. Ensure the Rated Capacity Limiter is properly set to
match the crane configuration.
7. If outriggers are used, the following points must be
observed:
a. The outrigger beams must all be equally ex­
tended (all fully extended, intermediate ex­
tended or fully retracted) to lift the loads shown
in the Crane Rating Manual. Major reductions
in lifting capacity will result if all beams are not
in the same position and this could lead to ma­
jor crane damage or a serious accident.
b. The bumper outrigger must be properly set.
1ï278
c. Outrigger pontoons must be pinned to the
jacks. The outrigger pontoons must be on a
solid, smooth footing, flush with the ground
(no hills, or valleys under pontoons), otherwise
pontoons may be damaged or destroyed. If
there is any doubt, use mats.
d. All capacities listed for the crane on outriggers
are based on the outrigger jacks being used to
raise the crane so that all tires are clear of the
ground and the crane is level. A bubble level is
provided in the upper operator's cab and at
each ground control outrigger station to assist
the operator in determining when the crane is
level.
8. Raise the boom and swing over the load. Extend
the boom to the desired length.
9. Lower the hook block or hook ball and fasten it
onto the load. The following points must be ob­
served:
a. The boom peak must be directly above the
load. Booms are made to lift, and must never
be used to drag a load sideways.
b. Always use chains, wire ropes, or slings of am­
ple size, and make periodic checks of their
condition.
c. Always use sufficient parts of line. Refer to the
Wire Rope Capacity Chart in the Crane Rating
Manual for the number of parts of line needed
for a given lift.
d. When lifting loads, care should be taken to pre­
vent sudden loading or unloading of the winch
wire rope. Ease into the load. Lift load a few
inches (centimeters) off the ground and hold to
check the winch brakes.
10. As the load is lifted the boom may deflect, increas­
ing the radius, especially with longer boom
lengths. Use the boom hoist to keep the head ma­
chinery directly over the load to prevent the load
from swinging out.
11. Lift the load to the desired height. Boom to the de­
sired angle. Be careful when booming down or
swinging the load, as these increase the load ra­
dius and result in a decrease in capacity. Ensure
the load being lifted remains within the lifting ca­
pacity of the crane at the boom length and radius
being used.
12. Control the load at all times. Use hand lines to
guide the load. Do not guide loads into place with
your hands. Swing slowly and smoothly. Avoid
jerks when starting or stopping swings.
13. If the crane is to travel with a suspended load, refer
to “Pick And Carry Operation” in this Section of this
Operator's Manual for further instructions.

During Operation
The operator must remain alert to possible malfunc­
tioning of the crane while operating. If the crane does
malfunction, lower the load and shutdown the crane
until the problem is found and corrected. During op­
eration, the operator must:
1. Remain alert to any noise or loss of power, or bad
response to control of the crane. Watch the en­
gine(s) oil pressure and coolant temperature
gauges for proper operating ranges.
2. Watch the hydraulic system oil temperature
gauge. If the temperature exceeds maximum tem­
perature, shutdown the crane until the problem is
corrected. (Refer to “Hi Performance Hydraulic
Oil” chart in Section 2 of this Operator's Manual for
the maximum temperature for each viscosity of hy­
draulic oil.)
3. Listen for any unusual noises in the hydraulic sys­
tem, power train, or the speed reducers. If any,
correct problem.
4. Watch for oil leaks or any loss of control. If any de­
velop, correct before continuing operation.
5. Confirm that all controls work freely and easily, with
no sticking or binding. Lubricate or adjust as nec­
essary.
6. If working on outriggers, periodically check the
outriggers to ensure the crane is level and stable. If
working without outriggers, confirm that the tires
are inflated to the proper pressure. When on tires
with zero counterweight, the boom can only be
lowered to zero degrees when directly over the
front. If counterweight is installed and outriggers
are not being used, ensure the boom is positioned
directly over the rear of the carrier with the travel
swing lock engaged and move the travel mode
switch in the carrier cab to the “Job Site” posi­
tion. (Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for proper
tire pressure.)
7. Heed all warning and caution labels. Observe
good safety practices at all times.
Pick And Carry Operation
Travel during pick and carry operations is restricted to
speeds of 1.0 mph (1.6km/h) or less on a firm, level sur­
face. Lifts are to be made off the main boom only, with
the crane prepared as follows:
WARNING
Do not travel above the maximum speeds
listed. Major crane damage, property
damage, and/or serious personal injury may
result.
Section 1 Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
1. Inflate the tires to the pressure listed in the Crane
Rating Manual for 1.0 mph (1.6km/h) speed. Refer
to Section 3 of this Operator's Manual for correct
procedure.
2. Adjust the suspension to ride height using the ride
height suspension switch on the carrier cab dash
panel. Refer to “Changing The Travel Mode Or Set­
ting The Ride Height” in this Section of this Operat­
or's Manual.
3. Move the travel mode switch on the carrier cab
dash panel to the “Job Site” position.
4. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers with
the tires clear of the ground.
5. Properly store the fly.
6. Position the upper over the rear of the carrier and
engage the travel swing lock. Release the swing
park park and/or 360° swing lock, if equipped.
CAUTION
Do not leave swing park brake applied or the
360° swing lock engaged during pick and
carry operations. Failure to release these
devices during this operation may result in
major damage to the swing speed reducer.
Note: When job site travel mode is selected, the
suspension accumulators are blocked out of
the system for improved stability.
Note: If the travel mode switch is in or moved to
the “Highway” position, a message will flash
in the carrier control display and an intermittent
audible alarm will sound to alert the driver/oper­
ator that the travel mode switch is in the incor­
rect position.
7. Retract all outrigger jacks just clear of the ground
but leave the outrigger beams fully extended.
8. Attach as many hand lines as necessary to prevent
the load from swinging during travel.
9. Carefully attach the load to the winch wire rope and
lift it only as high as necessary.
10. Shift the transfer case to the position.
11. Shift the transmission to manual mode. Move the
transmission gear selector to one of the following:
a. Move transmission gear selector to DM (man­
euver mode) for short distances up to 1 mph
(1.6km/h) travel speed in 1st gear maximum.
Note: When using Maneuver mode refer to
“Maneuver Mode” in this section of this Op­
erator's Manual.
1-279
Operator’s Manual
b. Move transmission gear selector to D (Drive)
for long distances up to 1 mph (1.6km/h) travel
speed in 1st gear maximum.
12. Carefully travel at no more than 1.0 mph (1.6km/h).
Take extra care due to the increased overall width
caused by the extended outrigger beams. Use ex­
treme care that the outriggers or pontoons are not
allowed to hit any obstructions. Maintain a safe
distance from all personnel, obstructions, struc­
tures, and power lines. Travel only on a firm, level
surface.
13. Once the desired destination is reached, shift the
transmission to neutral and apply the park brake.
Traveling The Crane
All terrain cranes are designed for highway and job site
travel. Certain conditions must be met for safe travel.
Refer to the following outlined procedures before trav­
eling the crane.
WARNING
Do not travel above the maximum speeds
listed. Major crane damage, property
damage, and/or serious personal injury may
result.
Highway Travel
Highway travel is considered to be any travel of the
crane over 5.0 mph (8.0km/h). The following condi­
tions and precautions must be met for all highway
travel.
Note: If road weight or axle load limitations are a
factor, the crane is equipped with removable coun­
terweights. Use this system as necessary to meet
road weight or axle load limitations. Refer to the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) plate for axle
load limits, tire pressures, and maximum speed.
1. If equipped, the fly must be secured in the stored
position on the boom or removed and transported
separately.
2. Position the upper guard rails to the travel/trans­
port position. Refer to Figure 1-206.
3. Retract the upper cab walk to its stored position.
Refer to Figure 1-164.
1ï280
4. Inflate the tires to pressure listed on the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) plate for speeds over 5.0
mph (8.0km/h). Refer to Section 3 of this Opera­
tor's Manual for correct procedure.
5. The suspension must be adjusted to ride height
using the ride height suspension switch in the car­
rier cab. Refer to “Changing The Travel Mode Or
Setting The Ride Height” in this Section of this
Operator's Manual.
6. Move the travel mode switch in the carrier cab to
the “Highway” position.
Note: If changing from Job Site Travel Mode
to Highway Travel mode mode, it is re­
quired to retract the suspension cylinders be­
fore raising to ride height in Highway Travel
mode .
7. The boom must be fully retracted, over the front of
the crane, and in the boom rest, (unless a boom
dolly/trailer is being used), with the travel swing
lock engaged. Release the swing park brake and/
or 360° swing lock, if equipped.
If the boom Dolly/trailer is used, the boom must be
adjusted to the proper length and pinned into the
boom Dolly/trailer. The travel swing lock, swing
park brake and/or 360° swing lock must be disen­
gaged. Refer to Boom Dolly Trailer section in this
Operator's Manual.
CAUTION
Do not leave swing park brake applied or the
360° swing lock engaged during highway
travel. Failure to release these devices during
highway travel may result in major damage to
the swing speed reducer.
8. All outriggers must be fully retracted (jacks and
beams) with all outrigger position pins in the re­
tracted position. All main outrigger pontoons must
be in the self stored position or removed from jacks
and properly stored on the crane.
9. Secure hook block and/or hook ball to prevent ex­
cessive swinging.
CAUTION
When the hoist wire rope(s) is/are tied off to
the crane or any solid object, the winch
system can be overloaded causing major
winch, wire rope, or crane damage. Do not
extend the boom, raise or lower the boom, or
raise the crane on outriggers unless wire rope
is spooled off the drum(s) to prevent tension
on the wire rope(s).
 Operator's Manual
10. All upper control levers must be in the neutral posi­
tion. The upper ignition switch must be turned off, CAUTION
key removed, and all doors and windows locked. Do not leave swing park brake applied or the
11. Obey all “Rules of the Road” and travel carefully. 360° swing lock engaged while traveling the
crane. Failure to release these devices during
Transmission Gear Travel Speeds
while traveling may result in major damage to
Gradeability the swing speed reducer.
Governed
(@ Peak
Gear Ratio Speed
Torque) 6. Move the travel mode switch in the carrier cab to
mph Km/h % Grade the “Job Site” position.
5th 4.57 4.49 7.23 34.52
7. Retract all outrigger jacks just clear of the ground.
8. Shift the transfer case to the position.
4th 5.78 3.55 5.71 43.84 9. Shift the transmission to manual mode. Move the
1.781
Transfer 3rd 7.41 2.77 4.46 56.38 transmission gear selector to one of the following
Case depending upon the “Job Site Travel” chart used.
2nd 9.59 2.14 3.44 60.61
Also refer to the “Transmission Gear Travel
1st 12.29 1.67 2.69 60.29
Speeds” chart to ensure maximum gear is not ex­
ceeded.
Job Site Travel a. Move transmission gear selector to DM (man­
Job site travel is limited to speeds of 5 mph (8km/h) or euver mode) for short distances up to 1 mph
less on a firm, smooth, and level surface. The crane (1.6km/h) travel speed in 1st gear maximum.
may be traveled on the job site with no load per the fol­
lowing procedure: Note: When using Maneuver mode refer to
1. Inflate the tires to the pressure listed on the Gross “Maneuver Mode” in this section of this Op­
Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) plate or the Tire Infla­ erator's Manual.
tion chart in the Crane Rating Manual for job site
b. Move transmission gear selector to D (Drive)
travel speeds. Refer to Section 3 of this Operator's
for up to 5 mph (8km/h) travel speed and up to
Manual for correct procedure.
5th gear maximum.
2. Set the suspension to ride height using the ride
10. Carefully travel at no more than the specified
height suspension switch in the carrier cab. Refer
speed in accordance with the applicable “Job Site
to “Changing The Travel Mode Or Setting The Ride
Travel” charts on the following page. Take extra
Height” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
care due to the increased overall width caused by
3. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers.
the extended outrigger beams. Use extreme care
4. Position the upper and attachments according to
that the outriggers or pontoons are not allowed to
one of the “Job Site Travel” charts in this Section of
hit any obstructions. Maintain a safe distance from
this Operator's Manual.
all personnel, obstructions, structures, and power
5. Engage the travel swing lock. Release the swing
lines.
park brake and/or 360° swing lock, if equipped.

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-281

Operator’s Manual
Job Site Travel, No Load
Upper Over the Rear, Boom Retracted
5 MPH (8.0km/h) Maximum
Counter­ Maximum Boom Angle (°)
weight (lb) 67 Ft Fly 12 Ft Fly 40 Ft Fly 67 Ft Fly 92 Ft Fly 117 Ft Fly
Installed on Stored or Re­ Erected Erected Erected Erected Erected
Upper moved (2° Offset) (2° Offset) (2° Offset) (2° Offset) (2° Offset)
0-156,500 PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED

Job Site Travel, No Load

Upper Over the Front, Boom Retracted
5 MPH (8.0km/h) Maximum
Counterweight Maximum Boom Angle (°)
(lb) 67 Ft Fly 12 Ft Fly 40 Ft Fly 67 Ft Fly 92 Ft Fly 117 Ft Fly
Installed on Stored or Re­ Erected Erected Erected Erected Erected
Upper moved (2° Offset) (2° Offset) (2° Offset) (2° Offset) (2° Offset)
0 0-25 0-25 0-25 0-25 PROHIBITED PROHIBITED
14,000-156,5
PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED
00

Job Site Travel, No Load

Upper Over the Rear, Boom Retracted
1 MPH (1.6km/h) Maximum
Counter­ Maximum Boom Angle (°)
weight (lb) 67 Ft Fly 12 Ft Fly 40 Ft Fly 67 Ft Fly 92 Ft Fly 117 Ft Fly
Installed on Stored or Re­ Erected Erected Erected Erected Erected
Upper moved (2° Offset) (2° Offset) (2° Offset) (2° Offset) (2° Offset)
0-14,000 PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED
36,000-156,5
25-40 30-40 35-45 40-50 55-65 60-65
00

Job Site Travel, No Load

Upper Over the Front, Boom Retracted
1 MPH (1.6km/h) Maximum
Counter­ Maximum Boom Angle (°)
weight (lb) 67 Ft Fly 12 Ft Fly 40 Ft Fly 67 Ft Fly 92 Ft Fly 117 Ft Fly
Installed on Stored or Re­ Erected Erected Erected Erected Erected
Upper moved (2° Offset) (2° Offset) (2° Offset) (2° Offset) (2° Offset)
0-36,000 0-25 0-25 0-25 0-25 0-25 0-25
58,000 PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED 0-25 0-25
80,000 PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED 0-25
102,000-156,
PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED PROHIBITED
500

1ï282
 Operator's Manual
Boom Dolly/Trailer 2 3
A boom dolly/trailer can be used to reduce the weight
on each of the carrier axles by supporting a portion of
1
the weight of the boom during highway travel, if high­
way codes allow the use of this equipment. The fly will
also be partially supported by the boom dolly/trailer if it
is properly stored on the boom. The crane is equipped
with a boom dolly/trailer kit to provide the necessary
hydraulic plumbing required to allow the boom to float
freely on the boom dolly/trailer. The boom dolly/trailer
is for highway use only. When traveling the crane with
the boom on a boom trailer/dolly, the swing park brake
light on the carrier control display will illuminate to alert
the operator that the swing park brake is applied due to
loss of hydraulic pressure. 1. Air Control Valve
2. Park Brake Control Valve
3. Swing Park Brake Indicator Light

WARNING Figure 1-175

Boom Dolly/Trailer Air Supply Control
When initiating a turn with the boom dolly/trailer,
the tip of the boom and rear of the upper may Note: The trailer rear view camera cable hook up is
swing outside the turning radius of the boom made of plastic and the electrical hook up is made
dolly/trailer axles. In some cases the tip of the
of metal. Ensure the proper connections are made
boom and rear of the upper will move into the
to the hook ups or damage to the hook ups and/or
line of oncoming traffic. The tip of the boom
connectors may occur.
must be properly flagged before roading the
crane. Allow ample time to complete a turn
before oncoming traffic approaches.
WARNING
The boom dolly/trailer must be equipped with an air
The counterweights must be removed from
brake system. Pressurized air for this system is sup­
the upper when traveling the crane with a
plied to the boom dolly/trailer through outlets on the
boom dolly/trailer. Crane may tip over when
rear of the carrier. Push in on the boom dolly/trailer air
initiating a turn if the counterweights are left
control valve knob, on the carrier cab dash, to pressur­
installed on the upper. The counterweights
ize the outlets. Pull it out to shutoff the air supply to the
may be transported on the carrier deck or on
boom dolly/trailer. Refer to Figure 1-175. Electrical
the boom dolly/trailer. If the counterweights
hook‐ups for lights and a cable hook up for the trailer
are transported on the boom dolly/trailer,
rear view camera (if equipped) are also available with
refer to the boom dolly/trailer manufacturer to
the boom dolly/trailer kit. These hook ups provide the
ensure that the counterweights are properly
electric and the camera display capabilities for the
stored and secured.
boom dolly/trailer on the rear of the carrier.

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-283

Operator’s Manual
Boom Dolly/Trailer Installation
1. Remove counterweights from the upper.
2. Properly prepare the crane for highway travel. See
“Traveling the Crane”, in this Section of this Operat­
or's Manual for instructions.
3. If installing a boom trailer:
a. Open the pintle hook latch on the rear of crane.
b. Using a signal person, back up the crane to the
boom dolly/trailer and engage the tongue of
the boom dolly/trailer with the pintle hook.
c. Latch the pintle hook, and lock it closed with
the cotter pin.
d. Hook the safety chain to the safety chain ring
on the rear of the crane. Ensure the latch on
the hook is closed.
4. Hook up the air lines and plug in the electrical cable
and camera cable, if equipped.. Refer to
Figure 1-176.
5. Push the boom dolly/trailer air control valve on the
carrier dash in to supply air to the trailer. Refer to
Figure 1-175.
6. Make necessary preparations on the boom and
boom dolly/trailer to allow the connection.
7. Level the crane on outriggers. With the boom fully
retract and positioned at a 55° angle, swing the
boom over the boom dolly/trailer as required. Care­
fully lower the boom onto the boom dolly/trailer.
WARNING
When swinging over the side on retracted
outriggers, maintain 55° boom angle with
boom fully retracted. Crane may tip over
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
8. Make all necessary boom connections to the
boom dolly/trailer. Contact the boom dolly/trailer
manufacturer for instructions.

1ï284
 Operator's Manual
1 1 2 1
A

A 8 9 B

4
B
3
6

7 10

11
1. Counterweight Storage 3. Boom Dolly/Trailer 6. Electrical Cable 9. Boom Dolly/Trailer Tongue
Locations 4. Control Air Line (Blue) 7. Supply Air Line (Red) 10. Safety Chain
2. Boom 5. Boom Dolly Camera Cable 8. Pintle Hook 11. Safety Chain Ring

Figure 1-176
Typical Boom Dolly/Trailer
9. Secure or remove hook block and/or hook ball. 11. Disengage the travel swing lock, the swing park
10. Set the RCL System to rigging mode. brake, and/or 360 degree swing lock, if equipped.
12. Shutdown the upper engine.
Note: The RCL System can be set to Travel
mode if the boom needs to be telescoped to
transfer more boom weight to the boom dolly/
trailer. Travel mode extends only the T1 section
WARNING
Check that the boom is properly supported by
from 0-100%. Travel mode is not required to
the boom dolly/trailer before opening the float
travel the crane on the highway.
valves. The boom could drop suddenly
causing major damage or serious injury.
All float valves must be fully open before
CAUTION traveling the crane with a boom dolly/trailer.
Do not leave any swing lock device in the Major crane damage could result.
engaged position when traveling the crane
with a boom dolly/trailer. Failure to release
these devices during this operation may result
in major damage to the swing speed reducer.

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-285

Operator’s Manual
1 3 4

3
1. Swing Park Brake Release Valve
2. Swing Unit
3. Float Valves
4. Boom Hoist Cylinder

Figure 1-177
Boom Hoist Float Valves (Standard Boom Float)

13. Adjust float valves to the travel position.
If Equipped With Standard Boom Float System
a. Turn the float valves at the boom hoist cylinder,
to the fully open position to allow the
boom to float freely on the boom dolly/trailer.
Refer to Figure 1-177.
b. Turn the swing park brake release valve, at the
swing unit, to the fully open position to
allow the upper to free swing.
If Equipped With California Boom Float System
a. Turn float valve 5 and 6 to the travel position
(horizontal) Refer to Figure 1-178. Se­
cure with keeper pins.
b. Start the upper engine. Turn float valve 1 to the
open position (horizontal).
c. Monitor pressure on pressure gauge 9. When
pressure gauge reads the desired pressure,
close float valve 1.
d. Shutdown upper engine.
e. Turn the swing park brake release valve, at the
swing unit, to the fully open position to
allow the upper to free swing.
14. Flag the end of the boom before roading the crane.
Note: If the boom dolly/trailer air system is not
already pressurized, allow ample time for the
system to charge before attempting to move the
boom dolly/trailer. The system must have suffi­
cient air pressure before the boom dolly/trail­
er's park brake will release.

1ï286
 Operator's Manual

5 6

2 1 3 4
1. Float Valve 4. Pressure Gauge
2. Float Valve 5. Swing Park Brake Release
3. Float Valve 6. Boom Hoist Cylinder

Figure 1-178
Boom Hoist Float Valves (California Boom Float Option)

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-287

Operator’s Manual
Boom Dolly/Trailer Removal 6. Disconnect the electrical cable and air lines from
1. Park the boom dolly/trailer where desired and ap­ the rear of the carrier. Cap the outlets and the air
ply the park brake. Shutdown the carrier engine. hoses using the storage hardware and brackets
Block the wheels of the boom dolly/trailer so that it provided.
is restrained in both directions. 7. Unhook the safety chain from the rear of the carrier.
2. Adjust float valves to the crane operation position. Remove the cotter pin from the pintle hook and
open the pintle hook.
If Equipped With Standard Boom Float System
8. Carefully pull the crane away from the boom dolly/
a. Turn the float valves, at the boom hoist cylinder,
trailer.
to the fully closed position to allow nor­
mal operation of the boom hoist function. Re­ Boom Dolly/Trailer Park Brake
fer to Figure 1-177.
The boom dolly/trailer is equipped with a spring ap­
b. Turn the swing park brake release valve, at the
plied air released park brake. When the boom dolly/
swing unit, to the fully closed posi­
trailer is installed on the crane, the same control knob
tion the valve and allow normal swing
used to operate the carrier park brake, also controls
operation of the upper.
the boom dolly/trailer park brake simultaneously.
If Equipped With California Boom Float System
When the boom dolly/trailer is not connected to the car­
f. Turn float valve 5 and 6 to the crane operation
rier air system, an air control valve on the front of the
position (vertical) Refer to
boom dolly/trailer is used to control the park brake. The
Figure 1-178. Secure with keeper pins.
blue and red air lines to the carrier must be disconnected
c. Turn the swing park brake release valve, at the
before the boom dolly/trailer park brake control will oper­
swing unit, to the fully closed posi­
ate independently from the carrier park brake control.
tion the valve and allow normal swing
operation of the upper.

WARNING
All of the valves on the boom hoist lines must
be fully closed before operating the boom
hoist system. The boom could fall causing
major damage or serious personal injury.
3. Start the carrier engine. Pull the boom dolly/trailer
air control valve on the carrier cab dash, out to stop
the air supply to the trailer. Refer to Figure 1-175.
4. Disconnect the boom from the boom dolly/trailer.
5. Level the crane on outriggers. Raise the boom off
the boom dolly/trailer and to a 55° angle. Fully re­
tract the boom, swing the upper directly over the
front, and carefully lower it on the boom rest. En­
gage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Block the wheels of the boom dolly/trailer
before releasing the park brake. Boom
dolly/trailer will roll if not restrained by some
means. Use blocking of adequate size and
place it so that boom dolly/trailer is restrained
in both directions.
Push the dolly/trailer park brake control knob in to re­
lease the brake. Pull it out to apply the brake.
Note: The boom dolly/trailer air system must have
sufficient pressure to release the park brake. A fully
charged air tank will allow release of the brake ap­
proximately twelve times.

WARNING
When swinging over the side on retracted
outriggers, maintain 55° boom angle with
boom fully retracted. Crane may tip over
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

1ï288

Counterweight Removal
Access to certain job sites may require the crane to
travel on roads with strict weight restrictions. In order
to meet such weight restrictions the crane is de­
signed so the counterweights can be lowered onto
the carrier deck and then removed and transported
separately. The crane can be configured with several
counterweight options. Removing the counter­
weights can reduce the weight of the crane by as
much as 156,500 lb (70 988kg). Refer to
Figure 1-179.
The left and right joysticks (of single axis control
levers, if equipped) are used as the counterweight re­
moval controls. Actuating a switch on the left seat
console changes the function of the left joystick (or
single axis controller, if equipped) from operating the
rear winch functions to operating the counterweight
raise and lower functions. Pull the control lever back,
toward the operator to raise the counterweight. Push
Operator's Manual
the control lever forward, away from the operator to
lower the counterweight. The right joystick (or single
axis controller, if equipped) changes from operating
boom hoist to counterweight lock and unlock func­
tions. Move the joystick control lever to the left to un­
lock the counterweight or to the right to lock the coun­
terweight. [If equipped with single axis controls, pull
the right (boom hoist) control lever back to unlock the
counterweight, or push it forward to lock the counter­
weight.]
Also the RCL Display changes screens to display the
location of the counterweight lift cylinder rods to alert
the operator of counterweight status and to show the
function and direction of movement of the control
levers. An alarm on the RCL screen will be displayed
if the counterweights are not fully raised (retracted)
against the upper. If no counterweights are installed,
the alarm will also sound if the counterweight cylin­
ders are not fully retracted.

Allowable Counterweight Configurations

36,000 lb (16.3t) - Standard

80,000 lb (36.3t) - Optional

Counterweight
Packages 115,500 lb (52.4t) - Optional

156,500 lb (71t) - Optional

A B B B B C D
Counterweight 14,000 lb 22,000 lb 22,000 lb 22,000 lb 22,000 lb 13,500 lb 20,500 lb
Modules (6.3t) (10t) (10t) (10t) (10t) (6.1t) (9.3t)
Bottom Tray Piece Piece Piece Piece Top Piece 2 Pieces

0 lb
0 (0t)

14,000 lb
A (6.3t) X
36,000 lb
A,B (16.3t) X X
58,000 lb
Counterweight
A,B,B (26.3t) X X X
Usage
Configurations 80,000 lb
A,B,B,B (36.3t) X X X X
102,000 lb
A,B,B,B,B (46.3t) X X X X X
115,500 lb
A,B,B,B,B,C (52.4t) X X X X X X
A,B,B,B,B,C, 156,500 lb
D,D (71t) X X X X X X X

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-289

Operator’s Manual

WARNING WARNING
KEEP CLEAR KEEP CLEAR
OF MOVING OF MOVING
3 4 COUNTERWEIGHT COUNTERWEIGHT
TO PREVENT TO PREVENT
SERIOUS BODILY SERIOUS BODILY
INJURY. INJURY.

1. Counterweight(s) Lug On Carrier Deck 4. Bottom Connecting Pins With Snap Rings - Winch To Upper
2. Counterweight(s) Installed Frame
3. Top Double Tapered Connecting Pins With Lock Pins - Winch 5. Rear Winch Hydraulic Hose Quick Disconnects
To Upper Frame

Figure 1-179
Counterweight Removal System

1ï290
 Operator's Manual
To Remove The Counterweights
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, engage the
park brake, and shift the transmission to neutral.
2. Properly level the crane on full extended outriggers
with the tires clear of the ground.
3. Fully retract all boom sections. If equipped, prop­
erly store the fly on the boom.

6. Slide and hold the locking tab on the counter­

4. Boom up to 30° . Swing the upper directly over the
rear of the carrier. Engage the travel swing lock in
the directly over rear position.
weight removal activation switch, then push the
counterweight switch to activate the left and right
control levers to be used as counterweight con­
trols. (The counterweight removal activation
switch is on the left seat console). RCL Display
screen will change to show operation and status
of counterweight when counterweight removal
activation switch is activated.

WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not stand under
counterweights during lowering or raising of
the counterweights.

5. If removing the rear (auxiliary) winch with the coun­

terweight:
a. Remove hook block/ball from the winch and
spool all wire rope onto the winch.
b. Remove all hydraulic lines at the quick discon­
nect fittings at the bulkhead under the upper
catwalk.
c. Disconnect the rear winch wire harness from
the upper wire harness.
d. Remove the two top double tapered connect­
ing pins which secure the winch to the upper
frame. Refer to Figure 1-179.

Note: The counterweight may have to be 7. Move the right control lever to the “Unlock” position
raised (cylinders retracted) to relieve pres­ to unlock the cylinders from the upper.
sure on the connecting pins to ease removal.

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-291

Operator’s Manual
8. Move the left control lever to the “Lower” position to
extend the counterweight removal cylinders to low­
er the counterweights to the storage lugs on the
carrier deck.
9. Move the travel swing lock lever to the middle det­
ent position. Carefully swing the upper to the left
approximately 3° (177°) to disengage the cylinder
rods from the counterweight tray.
Note: Utilize the middle detent position of the
travel swing lock to limit swing position. The de­
gree of rotation shown on the RCL Display
should be used as an indicator only.
1ï292
10. Move the left control lever to the “Raise” position to
retract (raise) the cylinders until they are fully re­
tracted.
11. Move the right control lever to the “Lock” position
to lock the cylinder rods in the locked position.
12. Push the counterweight switch to reactivate the left
and right control levers for normal crane use.
13. Remove the counterweights from the carrier deck.
The boom may be used to lift the counterweights
onto a transport vehicle. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for “Lifting Capacities, 0 lb CTWT”.
 Operator's Manual

1 1

2 2

36,000 lb (16.3t) 80,000 lb (36.3t)

3 3

4
1
1

1
1

1 1

1 1

2 2

115,500 lb (52.4t) 156,500 lb (71t)

1. Slab Counterweight - 22,000 lb (10t) 3. Top Plate Counterweight - 13,500 lb (6.1t)

2. Bottom Counterweight Tray - 14,000 lb (6.3t) 4. Side Counterweights - 20,500 lb (9.3t) Each

Figure 1-180
Counterweight Packages

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-293

Operator’s Manual
WARNING WARNING
KEEP CLEAR KEEP CLEAR
OF MOVING OF MOVING
COUNTERWEIGHT COUNTERWEIGHT
TO PREVENT TO PREVENT
SERIOUS BODILY SERIOUS BODILY
INJURY. INJURY.

4 5 3
1

2
6

1. Right Side Counterweight - 20,500 lb (9.3t) 4. Pin

2. Left Side Counterweight - 20,500 lb (9.3t) 5. Keeper Pin
3. Lifting Lugs 6. 115,500 lb (52.4t) Counterweight Stack

Figure 1-181
Side Counterweights

To Install The Counterweights

1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, engage the
park brake, and shift the transmission to neutral.
2. Properly level the crane on fully extended outrig­
gers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. If required, install the counterweights onto the carrier
deck. The boom or an auxiliary lifting device of ad­
equate size may be used to lift the counterweights onto
carrier deck. Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for “Lift­
ing Capacities, 0 lb CTWT”. Stack the counterweights
in the desired combination. The bottom counterweight
tray must always be on the bottom and the top plate
counterweight must always be on the top.
4. If required, install the 20,500 lb (9.3t) side counter­
weights. Refer to Figure 1-181.
a. Attach a sling to the lifting lugs on top of the
side counterweight.
b. Remove the pins from the top plate counterweight. 6. Slide and hold the locking tab on the counter­
c. With the crane's boom or an auxiliary lifting de­ weight removal activation switch, then push the
vice of adequate size, lift the side counterweight. counterweight switch to activate the left and right
d. Place the side counterweight on the side of the control levers to be used as counterweight con­
counterweights so the tab engages in the slot trols. (The counterweight removal activation
on the top plate counterweight. switch is on the left seat console.) RCL Display
e. Install both of the pins and keeper pins. screen will change to show operation and status
f. Repeat Steps a through e for the other side of counterweight when counterweight removal
counterweight. activation switch is activated.
5. Install the rear winch on the counterweight tray if 7. Swing the upper directly over the rear. Engage the
required. travel swing lock in the directly over rear position.

1ï294
 Operator's Manual

10. Move the left control lever to the “Lower” position to

extend (lower) the counterweight removal cylin­
ders.

8. Boom up to 30° . Move the travel swing lock lever to

the middle detent position. Carefully swing the up­
per to the left approximately 3° (177°) from
centered over the rear of the carrier.

Note: Utilize the middle detent position of the

travel swing lock to limit swing position. The de­
gree of rotation shown on the RCL Display
should be used as an indicator only.

11. Carefully swing the upper to the right until the cylin­
der rods engage in slots on the top counterweight
tray. Engage the travel swing lock in the directly
9. Move the right control lever to the “Unlock” position over rear position.
to unlock the cylinder rods.

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-295

Operator’s Manual
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not stand under
counterweights during lowering or raising of
the counterweights.
12. Move the left control lever to the “Raise” position to re­
tract (raise) the cylinders and lift the counterweights.
13. Continue to lift the counterweights until the coun­
terweight cylinders are fully retracted.
1ï296
14. Move the right control lever to the “Lock” position
to lock the cylinder rods in the locked position.
15. If the rear (auxiliary) winch was installed with the
counterweight, install the two top double tapered
connecting pins which secure the winch to the up­
per frame. Secure connecting pins with lock pins.
Refer to Figure 1-179. Connect the rear winch
wire harness to the upper wire harness.
16. Push the counterweight switch to reactivate the left
and right control levers for normal crane use.
17. In the RCL System, perform the crane setup
routine and properly select the appropriate coun­
terweight configuration.

1 1
VERTICAL POSITION
1. Locking Pin
Figure 1-182
Counterweight Tray Storage
Counterweight Tray Storage
The counterweight tray can be stored on the carrier
deck. However, adhere to following limitations:
1. A 30 MPH maximum travel speed must not be ex­
ceeded if the tray is being transported on the carri­
er deck. Crane damage can occur. The extra
weight of the tray causes the carrier weight limits to
be exceeded.
2. The folding arms on the back of the counterweight
tray can damage the boom if the arms are left in the
vertical position when the boom is lowered into the
boom rest.
Section 1 Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
HORIZONTAL POSITION
3. The arms must be in the vertical position when in­
stalling the counterweight slabs.
4. The arms must be in the vertical position when us­
ing the tray to install the rear winch.
5. The locking pins must be installed in the arms at all
times when the arms are in the vertical position.
6. The locking pins can be stored in the stationary
part of the tray after the arms have been folded
down to the horizontal position.
7. The fly must be removed from the crane and trans­
ported separately.
1-297
Operator’s Manual
Figure 1-183
Crane Setup
Boom Removal/Installation
Access to certain job sites may require the crane to
travel on roads with strict vehicle load limitations. In
order to meet such limitations the boom can be re­
moved and transported separately if a boom dolly is
not available or not allowed. The crane may be
equipped with the boom launch feature to assist in
boom removal/installation.
Removal
8. Lower, detach, and secure the load, as required.
9. Park the crane, out of the way, on a firm and level
surface.
1ï298
10. Level the crane using the appropriate outrigger
setup chart per the Crane Rating Manual.
11. Remove the fly from the boom. Refer to Section 4
of this Operator's Manual.
12. Remove all counterweight from the crane. Refer to
Counterweight Removal in this Section of this Op­
erator's Manual.
13. Fully retract the boom.
14. Remove the hook block and/or hook ball from the
boom and tie the winch rope back at the winch(es).
15. Swing the upper directly over the rear of the carrier
and engage the travel swing lock. This configura­
tion is the most desirable for weight transfer when
traveling on the highway with the boom removed.

Figure 1-184
Boom Hoist Cylinder Support (With Boom Launch)
Figure 1-185
Boom Hoist Cylinder Blocking (Without Boom Launch)
16. Support the boom hoist cylinder.
Note: Note: The boom hoist cylinder weighs
approximately 4,950 lb (2 245kg).
If Equipped With Boom Launch Option:
g. Install the boom hoist cylinder support at the
rear of the carrier. Refer to Figure 1-184.
Section 1 Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
If Not Equipped With Boom Launch Option:
a. Place wood blocking on the carrier deck under
the boom hoist cylinder of adequate size and
strength to support the cylinder when the
boom is approximately level. Refer to
Figure 1-185.
17. Boom down so that the boom hoist cylinder is rest­
ing in the support or on the wood blocking.
1-299
Operator’s Manual

1. Rear Access Cover

Figure 1-186
Rear Access Cover

18. Remove the rear access cover at the rear of the up­ 20. Label for assembly purposes and disconnect all
per. electrical wires to the boom. Cap all connections to
prevent damage and/or contamination.
Note: Some crane may have an access door
with a latch.

19. Label for assembly purposes and disconnect all

the hydraulic quick disconnect connections. Cap
hydraulic ports and lines to prevent excessive oil
loss and contamination of the system.

1ï300
 Operator's Manual

Two Lift Point Rigging Single Lift Point Rigging

Figure 1-187
Sling Locations

For a single lift point rigging:

DANGER
The auxiliary lifting device and rigging must
have the rated capacity to safely handle the
boom. Thoroughly inspect all rigging
equipment. If a component is worn or
damaged, repair or replace it before using it.
Failure to adhere to this danger may result in
severe personal injury or death and/or major
crane damage.
a. Use the 4 lifting lugs in the top of the boom
base section. Slings and shackles must be
rated for 60,000 lb (27 216kg) or more. The
legs of the slings must be a minimum of 10’
(3.05m) long and of equal length.
22. Attach auxiliary lifting device(s) of adequate size
and strength to the lifting slings.
Note: The boom weighs approximately 45,000 lb
(20 412kg).

21. Attach slings to the boom base section. Refer to 23. Properly support the boom with the auxiliary lifting
Figure 1-187. device(s).

Note: Use the slings and shackles supplied

with the boom launch option if equipped.

For a two lift point rigging:

a. Use 2 holes in the top collar at the tip end of the
boom base section and 2 lugs next to the top
rear access hole of the base section. Slings
and shackles for a two lift point rigging must be
rated for 30,000 lb (13 308kg) or more. The
legs of the slings must be a minimum of 10’
(3.05m) long and of equal length.

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-301

Operator’s Manual

1. Cotter Pin And Washer

2. Retaining Pin
3. Retaining Cap
1 2 3 4
4. Capscrew And Washer

Figure 1-188
Boom Hoist Cylinder Pin (With Boom Launch)

1. Capscrew And Washer

2. Retaining Cap 2 1
Figure 1-189
Boom Hoist Cylinder Pin (Without Boom Launch)

24. Remove the boom hoist cylinder pin.

If Equipped With Boom Launch Option: If Not Equipped With Boom Launch Option:
a. Remove the cotter pin and washer from one a. Remove the capscrews and washers (two on
side of the retaining pin. Refer to each side). Refer to Figure 1-189. Remove
Figure 1-188. the boom hoist cylinder pin retaining caps.
b. Remove the capscrews and washers (two on
each side). Remove the boom hoist cylinder
pin retaining caps.
c.. From the opposite side, pull the retainer cap
and retainer pin from the boom hoist cylinder
pin.

1ï302

1 2
1. Capscrew And Washer
2. Hydraulic Pin Puller Lever
Figure 1-190
Boom Foot Pin (With Boom Launch)
25. Remove the boom foot pins.
If Equipped With Boom Launch Option:
a. Remove the capscrews and washers (one on
each side) that retain the boom foot pins to the
upper frame. Refer to Figure 1-190.
b. Begin lifting up on the boom with the auxiliary
lifting device(s) to unload the pins. Actuate the
hydraulic boom foot pin levers to apply pulling
pressure on the pins. Hold the boom foot pins
levers until the boom foot pins are all the way
out of the boom on both sides of the boom.
Note: The boom foot pin shim packs are
tethered to the upper and will not be lost
26. Once the boom foot pins are removed, fully retract
when the foot pins are removed.
27. Carefully move the boom horizontally out of the up­
Section 1 Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
1. Capscrew And Washer
1 2
2. Boom Foot Pin Collar
Figure 1-191
Boom Foot Pin (Without Boom Launch)
If Not Equipped With Boom Launch Option:
a. Remove the capscrews and washers (one on
each side) that retain the boom foot pins to the
upper frame. Refer to Figure 1-191.
b. Begin lifting up on the boom with the auxiliary
lifting device(s) while applying prying pressure
with a pry bar under both boom foot pin collars.
The boom foot pins will move when they be­
come unloaded. One boom foot pin may move
before the other. Pry the boom foot pins all the
way out of the boom.
the boom hoist cylinder to pull pin away from boom.
per approximately 6 in (15.2cm) to allow it to clear
the upper.
CAUTION
There is minimal clearance between the boom
and the upper. Caution must be used to ensure
removal is done without damage to the boom
and/or the upper. Wear pads will help guide the
boom out of the upper if the crane is equipped
with the boom launch option.
1-303
Operator’s Manual
1

1. Hose Loop Guide

Figure 1-192
Hose Loop Guide

28. Pull all the hydraulic hoses and electrical wires up 29. Slowly lift the boom up and away from the crane
and out of the hose loop guide on the upper. Refer and onto secure support blocking or onto a trans­
to Figure 1-192. port vehicle.

1ï304

With Boom Launch Option
Figure 1-193
Boom Hoist Cylinder Tie Down
30. Fasten the boom hoist cylinder down using a strap
routed over the cylinder and connected to the
shackles on either side of the rear bumper. Refer to
Figure 1-193.
31. Store the boom hoist cylinder pin and mounting
hardware.
If Equipped With Boom Launch Option:
a. Either install the retaining caps and retaining
pin onto the boom hoist cylinder pin and se­
cure them with the cotter pins and washers to
prevent the pin from coming out of the cylinder
during travel/transport.
b. Or remove the pin from the cylinder and store
the pin and mounting hardware in an appropri­
ate location.
Section 1 Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
Without Boom Launch Option
If Not Equipped With Boom Launch Option:
a. Either Install the retaining caps onto the boom
hoist cylinder pin and route a ratchet strap
through the center hole of the retaining caps
and boom hoist cylinder pin. (The capscrews
and washers used to secure the retaining caps
to the boom can be installed into the boom
hoist cylinder mounting lug on the boom.)
b. Or remove the pin from the cylinder and store
the pin and mounting hardware in an appropri­
ate location.
32. If not equipped with boom launch option, install the
boom foot pins into the upper frame and secure with
capscrews and washers for storage or store them in
the crane's tool box, or an appropriate location.
1-305
Operator’s Manual

Two Lift Point Rigging Single Lift Point Rigging

Figure 1-194
Sling Locations

Installation For a two lift point rigging:

1. Park the crane, out of the way, on a firm and level
surface.
2. Level the crane using the appropriate outrigger
setup chart per the Crane Rating Manual.
DANGER
The auxiliary lifting device and rigging must
have the rated capacity to safely handle the
boom. Thoroughly inspect all rigging
equipment. If a component is worn or
damaged, repair or replace it before using it.
Failure to adhere to this danger may result in
severe personal injury or death and/or major
crane damage.
3. Attach sling to the boom base section. Refer to
Figure 1-194.
Note: Use the slings and shackles supplied
with the boom launch option if equipped.
a. Use 2 holes in the top collar at the tip end of the
boom base section and 2 lugs next to the top
rear access hole of the base section. Slings
and shackles for a two lift point rigging must be
rated for 30,000 lb (13 608kg) or more. The
legs of the slings must be a minimum of 10’
(3.05m) long and of equal length.
For a single lift point rigging:
a. Use the 4 lifting lugs in the top of the boom
base section. Slings and shackles must be
rated for 60,000 lb (27 216kg) or more. The
legs of the slings must be a minimum of 10’
(3.05m) long and of equal length.
4. Attach auxiliary lifting device(s) of adequate size
and strength to the lifting slings.
Note: The boom weighs approximately 45,000
lb (20 412kg).
5. Properly support the boom with the auxiliary lifting
device(s).

1ï306

Figure 1-195
Install And/Or Center The Boom Hoist Cylinder Pin
6. If the boom hoist cylinder pin was removed from
the cylinder rod eye, install and center the pin in the
cylinder rod eye.
7. If the boom hoist cylinder pin was stored in the cyl­
inder rod eye, remove the retaining caps and re­
taining pin (if equipped) from the boom hoist cylin­
der pin and center the pin.
8. Remove the retaining strap securing the boom
hoist cylinder to the carrier.
Section 1 Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
9. Remove the boom foot pins if stored in the upper.
10. Place the tethered shim packs on top of the upper
for installation.
11. If the capscrews and washers used to secure the
retaining caps to the boom were installed into the
boom hoist cylinder mounting lug on the boom for
storage, remove them from the lug.
1-307
Operator’s Manual
1

1. Hose Loop Guide

Figure 1-196
Hose Loop Guide

12. Lift the boom up evenly and bring it into position and
lower the base end down into the upper approxim­
ately 6 in (15.2cm) in front of the boom foot pin.
13. Using care and watching clearances between the
sides of the boom and the upper, center and lower
the boom into the upper. Route and feed the hy­
draulic hoses and electrical wires into the hose
loop guide on the upper, as required, while lower­
ing the boom. Refer to Figure 1-196.
14. Once the boom is lowered to the correct height,
slowly move the boom toward the boom foot to
align the boom foot pin mounting holes in the
boom with the holes in the upper. Ensure the boom
hoist cylinder pin also aligns the boom mounting
lugs.

CAUTION
There is minimal clearance between the boom
and the upper. Caution must be used to ensure
installation is done without damage to the boom
and/or the upper. Wear pads will help guide the
boom into the upper if the crane is equipped
with the boom launch option.

1ï308
 Operator's Manual

2 3
1. Hydraulic Pin Puller Lever
2. Boom Foot Shim Packs
3. Capscrew And Washer
2 1 2
2 1
1. Capscrew And Washer
2. Boom Foot Shim Packs

Figure 1-197 Figure 1-198

Boom Foot Pin (With Boom Launch) Boom Foot Pin (Without Boom Launch)

15. With the boom foot pin holes lined up in the boom If Not Equipped With Boom Launch Option:
with the holes in the upper, install the boom foot pins.
a. Coat the boom foot pins with Keystone®
Note: If available use a digital level placed upon No‐Weld, or equivalent.
the top rear of the boom to check the side to side b. While holding the handles on the boom foot
level of the boom and then use the crane's out­ shim packs, add equal shims to both sides so
riggers to match the boom to allow the boom that the clearance does not exceed 0.06 in
foot pins to align properly. (1.5mm) per side.
c. Using care to prevent damaging the grease
If Equipped With Boom Launch Option: line connection, drive the boom foot pins
through the upper frame and boom and align
a. Coat the boom foot pins with Keystone®
the capscrew holes in the boom foot pins with
No‐Weld, or equivalent.
the capscrew holes in the upper frame.
b. While holding the handles on the boom foot
d. Apply a light coat of Loctite 242 to threads of
shim packs, add equal shims to both sides so
capscrews and install the washers and
that the clearance does not exceed 0.06 in
capscrews to secure the boom foot pins in
(1.5mm) per side. Actuate the hydraulic boom
place. Torque the capscrews to 350-385 ft lb
foot pin levers and fully install the boom foot
(475-522Nm).
pins on each side of the boom.
e. Connect the grease lines.
c. Align the capscrew holes in the boom foot pins
with the capscrew holes in the upper frame.
d. Apply a light coat of Loctite 242 to threads of
capscrews and install the washers and
capscrews to secure the boom foot pins in
place. Torque the capscrews to 350-385 ft lb
(475-522Nm).
e. Connect the grease lines.

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-309

Operator’s Manual

Figure 1-199
Align Boom Hoist Cylinder

16. Carefully vertically align and center the boom hoist
cylinder pin between the boom mounting lugs.
Refer to Figure 1-199.
Note: If the boom hoist cylinder pin does not
vertically align with the boom mounting lugs,
the rear outriggers can be adjusted to bring
them into alignment.
17. Extend the boom hoist cylinder to just before the
boom hoist cylinder pin makes contact with the
boom hoist cylinder mounting lugs and the square
hole in the boom hoist cylinder pin is visible
through the boom lug hole.

1ï310
 Operator's Manual

Figure 1-200
Align Boom Hoist Cylinder Pin

18. Install the retaining caps in the end of the pin and 19. Extend the boom hoist cylinder to fully seat it
rotate the pin so that the retaining caps line up to against the boom hoist cylinder mounting lugs on
their slots on the boom lug then remove the retain­ the boom.
ing caps. Refer to Figure 1-200.

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-311

Operator’s Manual

1. Cotter Pin And Washer

2. Retaining Pin
3. Retaining Cap 1 2 3 4
4. Capscrew And Washer

Figure 1-201
Boom Hoist Cylinder Pin (With Boom Launch)

1. Capscrew And Washer

2 1
2. Retaining Cap

Figure 1-202
Boom Hoist Cylinder Pin (Without Boom Launch)

20. Install the boom hoist cylinder pin retaining caps.

If Equipped With Boom Launch Option:
a. Install the the retaining caps onto the boom hoist
cylinder pin. Install the retainer pin into the re­
taining cap, through the boom hoist cylinder pin,
and through the opposite retaining cap. Refer to
Figure 1-201. Install the washer and cotter pin
into both sides of the retaining pin.
b. Apply a light coat of Loctite 242 to threads of
capscrews. Install the capscrews and wash­
ers (two on each side). Torque the capscrews
to 350-385 ft lb (475-522Nm).
If Not Equipped With Boom Launch Option:
a. Install retaining caps onto the boom hoist cyl­
inder pin. Refer to Figure 1-202.
b. Apply a light coat of Loctite 242 to threads of
capscrews. Install the capscrews and wash­
ers (two on each side). Torque the capscrews
to 350-385 ft lb (475-522Nm).
21. Lift the boom up with the boom hoist cylinder to re­
move load from the slings.
22. Disconnect the slings and move the auxiliary lifting
device out of the way.
23. Remove the boom cylinder rest or wood blocking
from the carrier deck.

1ï312

24. Connect all the hydraulic hoses and electrical
wires at the rear of the boom through access cover.
Pay attention to their routing so that the hydraulic
hoses and electrical wires are not twisted.
25. Connect the wire harnesses to all items such as
electronic boom length/angle indicator, anti‐two
block system, boom floodlight, etc. as required.
26. Assemble and rig the crane as required for further
operation.
Transporting The Crane
When transporting the crane, precautions should be
taken in securing the crane to the trailer, barge, or other
means of conveyance. The shackles are the recom­
mended tie down points. If the crane is not equipped
with shackles, chains may be looped around the axle
housings and used to secure the crane down.
CAUTION
If chains are wrapped around the axle
housing, ensure that the chains will not
damage the tie rods, brake lines, steering
cylinders, steering lines, etc.
Always exercise safety and follow all local codes when
loading, unloading, or transporting the crane.
Prepare the crane as follows before transporting it:
1. If equipped, store the fly on the boom or remove it
from the crane and transport it separately.
2. The boom must be fully retracted and over the front
of the crane in the boom rest with the travel swing
lock engaged. Release the swing park brake and/
or 360° swing lock.
CAUTION
Do not leave the swing park brake and/or 360°
swing lock engaged when transporting the
crane. Failure to release the swing park brake
and/or 360° swing lock during this operation
may result in major damage to the swing
mechanism.
3. Secure the hook block and/or hook ball to prevent
excessive swinging.
Section 1 Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
CAUTION
When the hoist wire rope(s) is/are tied off to
the crane or any solid object, the winch
system can be overloaded causing major
winch, wire rope, or crane damage. Do not
extend the boom, raise or lower the boom, or
raise the crane on outriggers unless wire rope
is spooled off the drum(s) to prevent tension
on the wire rope(s).
4. All outriggers must be fully retracted (jacks and
beams) with all outrigger position pins in the re­
tracted position. All main outrigger pontoons must
be in the self stored position or removed from jacks
and properly stored on the crane.
5. Engage the park brake and shift the transmission
to neutral.
6. All control levers in the upper operator's cab must
be in the neutral position.
7. Securely cover the exhaust to prevent air being
forced into the exhaust. Covering the exhaust will
also help prevent any water or other contamination
from entering the exhaust which could also dam­
age the turbocharger.
CAUTION
When a turbocharged engine is not running,
air forced into the exhaust will cause the
turbocharger impeller to spin. Without the
engine running, the turbocharger bearing is
not lubricated. When transporting the crane
and the exhaust is facing in a direction such
that the travel speed continually forces air into
the exhaust, it may cause major damage to, or
total destruction of the turbocharger.
8. Position the upper guard rails to the travel/trans­
port position. Refer to Figure 1-206.
9. Retract the upper cab walk to its stored position.
Refer to Figure 1-164.
10. Remove the keys from the crane. Lock all windows
and doors.
11. Depending on the specific situations, further
preparations may be needed to protect the crane
from the environment or vandalism. See “Crane
Storage” for further suggestions.
1-313
Operator’s Manual

A
1 2 3 4

6
7
19 8
18
17 9
10
16
15 12 11
14

13

1. Outrigger Beam 6. Outrigger Box 10. Washers 15. Nylon Washers

2. C.G. Label 7. Outrigger Sensing Reel 11. Locknuts 16. Step
3. Jack Cylinder Tape 12. Cover 17. Capscrews
4. CALC Pin 8. Step Bracket 13. Capscrews 18. Washers
5. Jam Nuts & Setscrews 9. Nylon Washers 14. Washers 19. Nylon Washers

Figure 1-203
Rear Outriggers

1ï314
 Operator's Manual

24

23 20

22

21

25

20. Hitch Pin 22. Hair Pin 24. Wear Pads 25. Wear Pads
21. Hydraulic Lines 23. Beam Cylinder

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-315

Operator’s Manual
Outrigger Removal System
The crane is equipped with an outrigger removal
system so the outriggers may be removed in order to
reduce the overall weight of the crane. Removing the
four main outriggers will reduce the weight of the crane
by 10,213 lb (4 633kg).
WARNING
Do not exceed crane capacities listed in the
Crane Rating Manual when the outriggers are
removed. Failure to do so may cause a loss of
stability and possible serious personal injury
and/or major crane damage. Always use the
On Tires - Stationary, 0lbs on Upper, 0 lbs on
Carrier, 360° capacity chart in the Crane
Rating Manual when making lifts with the
outriggers removed.
Outrigger Removal & Installation Using
The Boom
Using this procedure the crane's boom may be used to
perform all the lifting required to remove or install the
outriggers.
Outrigger Removal
1. Prepare the crane for job site travel. See “Job Site
Travel” for all the necessary preparations.
2. Remove all counterweights from the upper and
carrier deck. See “Counterweight Removal” in this
Operator's Manual for the proper counterweight
removal procedure.
3. Park the crane on a firm level surface and fully re­
tract all the outrigger beams and jacks. Remove
the outrigger pontoons. Refer to “Main Outrigger
Operation” in this Operator's Manual.
4. Shutdown engine(s). Refer to “Engine(s) Starting
And Shutdown Procedure” in this Operator's
Manual for correct procedure. Allow engine(s) and
hydraulic oil to cool.
1ï316
WARNING
Hydraulic oil is under pressure and may be hot.
A sudden release of hot oil could cause burns
or other serious injury. Shutdown engine and
exhaust all trapped hydraulic pressure from
system before removing any line or component.
5. Relieve carrier hydraulic system pressure as
follows:
a Relieve any residual pressure in carrier
hydraulic reservoir by slowly loosening
filler/breather dipstick, located on top of carrier
hydraulic reservoir, 1/4 turn until pressure is
fully relieved.
b Turn ignition switch to “ON” position, but DO
NOT START ENGINE.
c Work outrigger switches back and forth
several times.
d Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
WARNING
Solvents and cleaning solutions can be
hazardous. Serious personal injury may result
from misuse of these products. Read and
follow all manufacturer's recommendations
concerning solvents and cleaning solutions.
6. Thoroughly clean area to be disassembled with an
approved cleaning solvent to prevent contamina­
tion. Allow area to air dry.
Refer to Figure 1-203.
7. Remove capscrews (13,17), washers (14,18), and
nylon washers (15,19) securing cover (12) to
outrigger box (6). Remove cover (12) from
outrigger box (6).
8. If required, remove locknuts (11), washers (10),
and nylon washers (9) securing step bracket (8) to
outrigger box (6), and remove step bracket (8).
9. Remove hair pin (22) and hitch pin (20) securing
beam cylinder (23) to outrigger box (6).
10. Disconnect outrigger length sensing reel tape (7)
from outrigger beam.
11. After disconnecting tape reel, disconnect the out­
rigger beam cylinder(s) quick disconnect fittings.
Note: When disconnecting a male hydraulic
connector from a female hydraulic connector,
two wrenches should be used to ensure lines do
not twist, one for each connector.
Note: Outrigger beam assembly weighs
approximately 2,462 lb (1 117kg).

12. Loosen jam nuts and setscrews (5) from outrigger
box (6). Loosen jam nuts and screws fro rear pads
(24,25).
13. Lock outrigger beam (1) sections together with
CALC pin (4).
WARNING
Do not exceed crane capacities listed in the
Crane Rating Manual when lifting the
outriggers. Failure to do so may cause a loss
of stability and possible serious personal
injury and/or major crane damage. Always
use the On Tires - Stationary, 0lbs on Upper, 0
lbs on Carrier, 360° capacity chart in the Crane
Rating Manual when lifting with the
outriggers.
14. Refer to the On Tires - Stationary, 0lbs on Upper, 0
lbs on Carrier, 360° capacity chart in the Crane Rat­
ing Manual for lifting parameters while removing/
installing the outrigger breams.
15. Start the engine and position the boom to lift the
outrigger beam so the hoist line is directly over the
outrigger beam.
16. Using a lifting sling with sufficient capacity, pull the
outrigger beam out so that the lifting point label on
the beam assembly is extended 1.5 ft (0.46m) bey­
ond the end of the outrigger box.
Section 1 Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
17. Reposition the sling at the C.G. (center of gravity)
using the lifting point label as a guide for equalizing
the load.
18. Carefully glide the outrigger beam assembly the
rest of the way out of the outrigger box.
19. Repeat the procedure for the other outriggers.
20. Prepare the crane for highway travel. See “High­
way Travel” section for all necessary precautions.
Outrigger Installation
1. Prepare the crane for job site travel. See “Job Site
Travel” for all the necessary preparations.
2. Park the crane on a firm and level surface.
WARNING
Do not exceed crane capacities listed in the
Crane Rating Manual when lifting the
outriggers. Failure to do so may cause a loss
of stability and possible serious personal
injury and/or major crane damage. Always
use the On Tires - Stationary, 0lbs on Upper, 0
lbs on Carrier, 360° capacity chart in the Crane
Rating Manual when lifting with the
outriggers.
3. Refer to the On Tires - Stationary, 0lbs on Upper, 0
lbs on Carrier, 360° capacity chart in the Crane Rat­
ing Manual for lifting parameters while removing/
installing the outrigger breams.
4. Rig a lifting sling to the outrigger beam using the
C.G. Label (2) as a guide for equalizing the load.
The individual outrigger beam assemblies weigh
approximately 2,462 lb (1 117kg).
5. Position the boom to lift the outrigger beam so the
hoist line is directly over the C.G. of the outrigger
beam.
6. Lift the outrigger beam assembly into position at
the outrigger box. Keep it square to the opening in
the box and as level as possible to ease installa­
tion. Use care to prevent damage to any hydraulic
hoses.
7. Ease the outrigger beam into the box until the end
of the beam cylinder approaches the mounting
pin. Use care that the end of the outrigger beam
cylinder slides up the beam cylinder mates to the
connection point on the outrigger to prevent dam­
age to the rest or the cylinder.
1-317
Operator’s Manual
1 2 3 17. Ensure proper adjustment of wear pads (24,25).
4 ers (14,18), and capscrews (13,17).
1. LED (Light Emitting Diode) 3. Jam Nut & Washer
2. Sensor Body 4. Outrigger Box
Figure 1-204
Outrigger Sensor Location
8. Once the beam cylinder slides on the mounting
box plate, install hitch pin (20) and hair pin (22)
securing beam cylinder (23) to outrigger box (6).
Connect outrigger length sensing reel tape (7) to
beam.
9. Connect the hydraulic lines (21) from the beam cyl­
inder to the fittings. Ensure the yellow o‐ring of the
quick disconnect fitting is completely covered
when they are connected.
10. Check hydraulic reservoir oil level. Add oil as
required. Refer to Operator's Manual for correct
type and procedure.
11. Check for correct fluid levels in any related
components such as pump drives, gear reduction
units, engine crankcase, radiator, etc. Refer to
crane or engine Operator's Manual for correct
type/quantity of fluids and proper procedure.
12. Start engine and let idle for five minutes. Inspect
hydraulic connections for leaks. Repair as
required.
13. Engage carrier hydraulic pump.
14. Remove CALC pin (4) from outrigger beam (1).
15. Slowly extend and retract outrigger beam (1) while
observing movement of hydraulic lines (21). En­
sure hydraulic lines (21) do not cross, twist, or rub
during outrigger operation. Make adjustments as
required.
1ï318
16. Fully extend outrigger beam (1).
Refer to Section 3 of this Operator's Manual for
correct procedure.
18. If previously removed, install step bracket (8) on
outrigger box (6), and secure with nylon washers
(9), washers (10), and locknuts (11).
19. Position cover (12) and step (16) to outrigger box
(6), and secure with nylon washers (15,19), wash­
20. Install setscrews (5) tight against outrigger beam
(1), then back them off 1/2 turn. Install jam nuts (5)
tight against outrigger box (6).
21. Bleed any trapped air from beam cylinder (23) by
fully extending and retracting it several times.
22. Adjust outrigger sensors. Refer to “Outrigger
Sensor Adjustment” in this Operator's Manual.
23. Complete installation by testing all related
functions of outrigger beam for proper operation.
Normal operation of hydraulic and electrical
systems should be confirmed. A general
inspection of components and systems in areas
adjacent to repair should also be performed to
ensure related damage or wear is not present.
Outrigger Sensor Adjustment
Refer to Figure 1-204.
1. Start carrier engine, and raise crane on fully
extended outriggers. Leave engine running at idle.
2. Loosen jam nut (3), and remove sensor body (2)
from outrigger box (4). Use care not to lose washer
(3).
3. Apply Bostik® Never-Seez, or equivalent, to
threads of sensor body (2), below jam nut (3). Do
not coat entire sensor body (2).
4. Install washer (3) on sensor body (2).
5. Thread sensor body (2) into outrigger box (4) until
LED (1) on sensor body (2) illuminates.
6. Back off sensor body (2) until LED (1) turns off.
7. Back off sensor body (2) an additional 1/4 turn, and
tighten jam nut (3).
8. Test sensor adjustments as follows:
a Fully retract outrigger jacks. LED (1) should
not be illuminated.
b Fully retract outrigger beams.
c Raise crane on fully extended outrigger jacks.
LED (1) should illuminate.
d Repeat adjustment procedure, as required, to
achieve proper test results.
 Operator's Manual

A B

3 B

B 6
A

4
A A
2

1. Left Side Guard Rail 3. Left Side Walkways 5. Quick Release Pin
2. Right Side Guard Rail 4. Right Side Walkways 6. Keeper Pin

Figure 1-205
Upper Guard Rail And Walkways - Working Position

when servicing the crane. The rails and walkways should

Upper Guard Rails And
Walkways
The crane is equipped with guard rails and walkways on
the upper to make access to upper components safer
remain in the working position at all times except when
traveling or transporting the crane on highway or when
lifting the crane. Position the rails in the travel/transport
position for these operations. Refer to Figure 1-205 and
Figure 1-206.

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-319

Operator’s Manual

C B
B
A
A

B
C
1. Quick Release Pin 2. Keeper Pin 3. Walkway Latch

Figure 1-206
Upper Guard Rail And Walkways - Travel/Transport Position

1ï320

Towing The Crane
Always use good judgment and reliable equipment
when towing the crane. Use extra caution when towing
the crane on the highway and in traffic. When making
connections between the crane and towing vehicle,
ensure none of the connections will cause damage to
either vehicle. Pay particular attention to tie rods, brake
lines, steering cylinders, and steering lines.
Always exercise safety and follow all local codes when
towing the crane. Prepare the crane as follows before
towing it.
1. If equipped, store the fly on the boom.
2. The boom must be over the front of the crane in the
boom rest, or over the rear of the crane in a boom
dolly/trailer.
a. If the boom is over the front:
1. The boom must be fully retracted.
2. Travel swing lock must be engaged. Re­
lease the swing park brake and/or 360°
swing lock.
3. The crane must be towed from the rear.
b. If the boom is over the rear:
1. The boom should stay at the desired
length for axle loadings.
2. Travel swing lock must be disengaged.
Release the swing park brake and/or 360°
swing lock.
3. The crane must be towed from the front.
CAUTION
Do not leave the swing park brake and/or 360°
swing lock engaged when towing the crane.
Failure to release the swing park brake and/or
the 360 degree swing lock during this
operation may result in major damage to the
swing mechanism.
3. Secure the hook block and/or hook ball to prevent
excessive swinging.
Section 1 Operating Instructions
Operator's Manual
CAUTION
When the hoist wire rope(s) is/are tied off to
the crane or any solid object, the winch
system can be overloaded causing major
winch, wire rope, or crane damage. Do not
extend the boom, raise or lower the boom, or
raise the crane on outriggers unless wire rope
is spooled off the drum(s) to prevent tension
on the wire rope(s).
4. All outriggers must be fully retracted (jacks and
beams) with all outrigger position pins in the re­
tracted position. All main outrigger pontoons must
be in the self stored position or removed from jacks
and properly stored on the crane.
5. All control levers in the upper operator's cab must
be in the neutral position.
6. Retract the upper cab walk to its stored position.
7. Store the upper guard rails to their transport posi­
tion.
8. Shift the transmission to neutral.
9. Remove the drive tube:
a. If the boom is over the front, remove the rear
axle shaft at transfer case.
b. If the boom is over the rear, remove the drive
tube between the auxiliary transmission and
axle.
CAUTION
Failure to disconnect the drive tube, or lift the
driving wheels, before pushing or towing the
crane can cause major transmission damage.
10. Turn on the hazard flashers.
11. Release the carrier park brake when the crane is at­
tached to the towing vehicle and ready to be
towed.
1-321
Operator’s Manual

Figure 1-207
Lifting The Crane

1ï322
 Operator's Manual
5. The weights and locations of all centers of gravity
Lifting The Crane include all possible options (heaviest crane) ex­
The entire crane (except the fly base, fly tip, and coun­ cept the fly base, fly tip, and counterweights. Use
terweights) can be lifted or the components may be re­ the centers of gravity as a starting point. Center
moved from the crane and lifted individually. Refer to hoist line on the center of gravity, lift a few inches
Figure 1-207 for the centers of gravity and weights for (centimeters), and adjust the hoist line as required
the crane and the individual components. The follow­ to keep the crane/components level at all times.
ing conditions and precautions must be met before lift­ 6. Removal of any components from the crane will
ing the crane or removing any component. shift the center of gravity of the entire crane. Adjust
the hoist line as required to account for the removal
1. The crane must be parked on a firm level surface,
of any component.
the travel swing lock engaged, the swing park
7. The hook block and/or hook ball are assumed to
brake and/or 360° swing lock released, and the
be tied off to the front of the crane.
boom positioned in the boom rest.
8. When lifting the entire crane, extend outriggers
2. Position the upper guard rails to the travel/trans­
beams to the intermediate position and install
port position. Refer to Figure 1-206.
slings around the beams. Protect slings from any
3. Retract the upper cab walk to its stored position.
sharps edges.
Refer to Figure 1-164.
9. Use only nylon straps to lift fly base, fly tip, or the fly
4. Use lifting equipment, shackles, chains, slings,
extensions to prevent damage to them. Protect the
etc., of suitable size and strength. All lifting equip­
straps from sharp edges. It is recommended that
ment must be inspected before lifting the crane.
the lifting lugs be used as lifting points. However it
The inspection must be recorded and dated in ac­
is permissible to use the connecting lugs, at each
cordance with current OSHA regulations.
end of the sections, or nylon straps around all four
main chords as the lifting points.
10. Do not allow the hoist wire rope(s) to contact boom
WARNING while lifting crane. Major damage to the boom may
Do not use the towing shackles as a means of result.
lifting the crane. These shackles are not
intended to be used to lift the crane and may
break if subjected to the entire weight of the
crane. Serious personal injury or major
equipment damage may result from this
practice.

Section 1 Operating Instructions 1-323

Operator’s Manual
Crane Storage
Anytime the crane is going to be left unattended, it
should be prepared so that it will not be damaged by
the elements, be an attraction to vandals, or a plaything
for children.
Short Term Storage
1. Do not leave the crane where it will be a traffic haz­
ard.
2. Lower all loads to the ground.
3. The travel swing lock must be engaged.
4. Fully retract the boom. Boom down to 0 degrees.
The fly may be erected if the crane is on outriggers.
5. Tie off the hook block and/or hook ball to the tow­
ing shackles. Winch wire rope(s) should be snug.
6. All control levers must be in the neutral position.
7. Shift the transmission to neutral, engage the park
brake, and shutdown the engine(s). Block the
wheels to prevent the crane from rolling if on tires.
8. If the crane is on outriggers, the outriggers must be
properly set and supported so the crane will re­
main level.
9. In cold weather, locate the crane where it will not
freeze to the ground.
10. To preserve battery life, move the carrier and upper
battery disconnect switches to the off position.
11. Remove the keys and lock all windows and doors.
Long Term Storage
1. Store the crane inside a building if possible.
2. Thoroughly clean the crane.
3. Touch up any spots where paint has chipped. This
will help to prevent rusting.
4. Lubricate the entire crane as per the Lubrication
Chart. Check that all gear cases are full of oil.
5. Inflate tires to pressures shown on the Gross Axle
Weight Rating plate. Check tire pressures periodi­
cally during storage to ensure that they do not go
flat. Refer to Section 3 of this Operator's Manual for
correct procedure. If possible block the crane up
so the tires are clear of the ground. Ensure the
blocking is placed so the crane cannot fall off it. If
this is not possible, set the crane on blocking so
the tires will not sink in the ground. Block the tires
to prevent the crane from rolling.
1ï324
6. Fully retract all hydraulic cylinders if possible. Cov­
er all exposed cylinder rods and machined and un­
painted surfaces with a coat of grease. If
equipped, store the fly.
7. Leave all control levers in neutral.
8. Engage the park brake and shift the transmission
to neutral.
9. Cover all open areas around the engines, cabs,
etc. to prevent entry of water. Cover the entire en­
gine areas with tarps if possible.
10. Prepare the engines as per the engine manufactur­
ers manuals. Confirm that antifreeze protection is
sufficient to prevent the engines from freezing. If
antifreeze protection is not adequate, completely
drain the engine blocks.
11. If in a location where vandalism may occur, remove
the keys and lock the doors in both cabs. Cover all
glass in the cabs with plywood or boards to prevent
glass breakage. Provide a means of locking the
access doors to the engines, fuel tanks, and hy­
draulic reservoirs.
12. Drain all moisture from the air reservoirs to prevent
rust and deterioration.
13. To preserve battery life, move the carrier and upper
battery disconnect switches to the off position.
14. Store the crane so it does not provide a plaything
for children. Such a unit can be an “attractive nui­
sance” for children to play on. If they fall off it or get
entangled, serious injury may result.
15. While in storage, the crane should be “exercised”
every 60 days to ensure the working condition of
the crane. Uncover all closed‐up areas and re­
move any tarps/covers from the engines. Start the
engines and operate all switches, control cables,
and hydraulic functions several times to circulate
lubricants and to keep all mechanisms and link­
ages operative.
 Operator's Manual
Table Of Contents
General Lubrication Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Lubrication Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Lubrication Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Hi Performance Hydraulic Oil Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Disposal Of Used Lubricants, Fluids, Etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Auto Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Component Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Pump Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Filling The Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Programming Auto Lube System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Lubricant Injector Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Grease Line Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Recommended Preventative Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Inspection Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Transmission Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Transmission Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Transmission Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Transfer Case Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Transfer Case Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Transfer Case Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Axle Differential Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Axle Differentials Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Axle Differentials Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Axle Planetary Wheel End Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Planetary Wheel End Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Planetary Wheel End Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Carrier Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Fuel Filter Water Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Fuel Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Priming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventative Maintenance i

Operator's Manual
Carrier Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Air Dryer Desiccant Cartridge Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Operation & Leak Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Air Dryer And Reservoir System Troubleshooting Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Carrier And Upper Engine Cooling Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Carrier And Upper Engine Cooling Systems Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Carrier Engine Cooling System Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Carrier Engine Cooling System Coolant Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Upper Engine Cooling System Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Upper Engine Cooling System Coolant Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Drive Tube And U‐Joint Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Telescope Valve In‐Line Filter Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

Carrier Hydraulic Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

Water Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Adding Oil To The Hydraulic Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Hydraulic Reservoir Filters Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Engine Air System Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Carrier Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Changing The Carrier Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Upper Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Servicing The Upper Engine Air Cleaner Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Upper Engine Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Fuel Filter Water Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Fuel Filter/Water Separator Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Secondary Fuel Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Swing Speed Reducer Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Swing Speed Reducer Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Swing Speed Reducer Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Upper Hydraulic Pump Drive Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Pump Drive Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Pump Drive Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

ii Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance

 Operator's Manual
Upper Hydraulic Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Water Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Adding Oil To The Hydraulic Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Hydraulic Charge Flow Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Hydraulic Reservoir Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Winch Drum Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Winch Drum Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Winch Drum Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Boom Inspection And Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Boom Hose And Cable Reel Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Fly Inspection And Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55

Wire Rope Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55

Application Of Wire Rope Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Hook Block, Hook Ball, And Swivel Inspection And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

Turntable Bearing Capscrew Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

Turntable Bearing Capscrew Inspection Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Crane Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58

Hydraulic Hose Assembly Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58

Paint Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

Regular Preventative Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Polishing And Waxing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Cab Dash Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventative Maintenance iii

Operator's Manual

Notes:

iv Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance


General Lubrication
Information
The crane should be regularly and systematically lubri­
cated in accordance with the Lubrication Chart shown
on the following pages. Refer to Figure 2-1 and
Figure 2-2. Another copy of the chart is on the the car­
rier. The time intervals shown on the Lubrication Chart
are intended as a guide only. Under unusual working
conditions, such as working in dry, dusty conditions, in
water or mud, or around a corrosive atmosphere, more
frequent lubrication could be necessary. In these
cases, the oiler must use his best judgment and work
out his own lubrication schedule.
In addition to the points on the Lubrication Chart, all
movable linkages and control cables should be peri­
odically lubricated to resist wear.
There are some very practical reasons for lubricating
and lubricant changes. Lubricants serve more than
one purpose. They not only lubricate, but they trans­
port chemically reactive additives, wash away minute
wear particles, serve as a corrosion inhibitor, and act as
a heat transfer medium. Draining and refilling any gear
unit with a fresh supply of oil also assists in eliminating
wear particles not trapped by magnetic plugs.
WARNING
Shutdown engine(s) before fueling or
lubricating crane. To avoid a fire hazard, do
not smoke or handle fuel around an open
flame. To prevent serious personal injuries,
and to avoid major crane damage, do not
lubricate gears or any assemblies while they
are in motion.
Keep grease, oil containers, and grease guns clean. Wipe all fittings before lubrica­
tion. Raise the crane on outriggers, or block the wheels, and shutdown the engine(s)
before working on the crane. Replace all guards and panels before operating the
crane.
Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
Operator's Manual
The following procedures are important for proper lu­
brication of the crane:
1. Clean the grease gun nozzle and grease fitting be­
fore lubricating. This will help keep dirt and grit
from entering the bushing or bearing.
2. Keep all grease and oil cans and containers clean.
Always replace the lid on containers when finished
to prevent entry of foreign materials. Wipe off oil
can covers before using.
3. Drain oil cases when hot to drain off accumulated
sludge.
4. Watch for signs of incorrect lubrication such as fail­
ure of clean grease to purge the old grease.
5. Bleed off hydraulic and/or air pressure before
opening or removing a line or fitting.
6. Replace all guards and panels before starting
crane.
7. Use a clean funnel equipped with a strainer for
pouring lubricants.
8. Clean the area around check and fill plugs before
removing them to prevent entry of foreign particles.
DANGER
When it is required to operate the crane during
maintenance and/or adjustments, use extreme
caution as service personnel may have to work
near and/or under moving machinery. Serious
personal injury and/or death may result.
Always remain in visual and/or verbal contact to
ensure the safety of service personnel. Use a
signal person if necessary.
Note: See specific instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual for lubrication check
and change procedures on all gear compart­
ments.
2-1
Operator's Manual

32 26 24 7 9 6 10 202 205 8 1 7 203 23

200
4
5
3

45 40 41 5 103 102 103 16 204 37 30 18 201 105 21

14 42 4 19 14 14 19

104 18 20 19 15

44 29 17 33 9 16 10 25 1 33 34 39 38 31

28
11

27 43 22 29 17 29 100 43 13 12 8 3 2 39 101 35 36

Figure 2-1
Lubrication Chart

2-2 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance

 Operator's Manual
KEY CAPACITY
1. SYMBOLS: Lube Lube
Code Code
* Check fluid level and fill as required. Above Below
0 Inspect, lubricate, adjust, repair or replace as required. Location Gallons Liters -10 F -10 F
+ Change fluid (and filter if applicable). Engine Oil - Upper 4.63 17.5 Key 2 Key 2
# Change filter only.
@ Clean filter/strainer as required Engine Oil - Carrier 13.00 49.2 Key 2 Key 2
X Clean fins if needed. Engine Coolant - Upper 8.91 33.7 Key 2 Key 2
$ Drain water. Engine Coolant - Carrier 31.80 120.4 Key 2 Key 2
N/A Not applicable.
A,E,H, etc. are lubrication codes. Refer to the Lubrication Code Identification on this Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank - Upper 10.00 37.9 Key 2 Key 2
chart. Link‐Belt recommends the lubrication codes on this chart, however if Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank - Carrier 5.00 18.9 Key 2 Key 2
an equivalent is to be used refer to this Operator's Manual for detailed spec­ Transmission 6.10 23.1 PP PP
ifications to ensure a correct equivalent is used.
Transfer Case 3.38 12.8 E LL
2. Refer to engine manufacturer's manuals for proper maintenance, lubrication, fuel or
coolant grade, and additional information. Axle 1 & 5 Differential 5.00 18.9 E LL
3. Refer to the Operator's Manual for additional information. Axle 4 Differential 5.40 20.4 E LL
Planetary Wheel Ends (Each Wheel) 0.40 1.5 E LL
Fuel Tank - Upper 58.00 219.5 Key 2 Key 2
LUBRICATION CODE IDENTIFICATION
Fuel Tank - Lower 95.00 359.6 Key 2 Key 2
Lube
Code Recommended Type Hydraulic Reservoir - Upper 168.00 605.7 Key 3 Key 3
A Grease NLGI Grade No 2 Hydraulic Reservoir - Carrier 57.5 217.7 Key 3 Key 3
E E tre e Pressure Gear Lu ricant 80 90 Hydraulic System - Upper 250.00 946.4 Key 3 Key 3
H Grease Su er Grade
Hydraulic System - Carrier 91.50 346.4 Key 3 Key 3
HH Gear Lu ricant SAE 90 API GL2 GL3
Swing Speed Reducers (Each) 1.06 4.0 E LL
Grease NLGI Grade No 1
Winch Drums (Each) 5.50 20.8 HH QQ
LL E tre e Pressure Gear Oil 75 90
PP S nthetic Trans ission Lu ricant CD SAE 50 Upper Pump Drive 0.80 3.0 TT TT
S nthetic Gear Oil Grade 150 Upper Auto Lubrication System 0.80 3.0 A KK
TT S nthetic Gear Oil Grade 220 Carrier Auto Lubrication System 0.80 3.0 A KK

MAINTENANCE LUBRICATION
Lube Lube Lube Lube
Service Code Code Num­ Lube Code Code
Ref Interval Above Below ber of Interval Above Below
(Hours) -10 F -10 F Ref
Location No Operation Key Location No Points (Hours) -10 F -10 F
Engine Cooling System 1 10 *,X 1,2,3 Key 2,3 Key 2,3
Key 2 + 1,2,3 Key 2,3 Key 2,3 Turntable Gear Teeth 30 All 50 H H
Engine Coolant Filter 2 Key 2 # 1,2 Key 2 Key 2 Boom Head Machinery 31 All 50 A KK
Engine Oil 3 10 * 1,2 Key 2 Key 2 Auxiliary Lifting Sheave 32 1 50 A KK
Key 2 0,+ 1,2 Key 2 Key 2
Primary Fuel 4 10 $ 1,2,3 Key 2 Key 2 Fly Head Sheaves (Base & Tip) 33 All 50 A KK
Filter/Water Separator Key 2 # 1,2,3 Key 2 Key 2
Fly Deflector Sheave 34 1 50 A KK
Secondary Fuel Filter 5 Key 2 # 1,2,3 Key 2 Key 2
Dosing Module Filter 6 Key 2 # 1,2,3 N/A N/A Hook Block & Sheaves 35 All Key 3 A KK
Engine Crankcase Filter 7 Key 2 # 1,2,3 N/A N/A Hook Ball 36 1 Key 3 A KK
Engine Air Cleaner 8 10 0 1,2,3 N/A N/A 360 Degree Swing Lock 37 4 50 A KK
Diesel Particulate Filter 9 Key 2 @ 1,2,3 N/A N/A
Hydraulic Offset Fly Cylinders 38 2 250 A KK
Diesel Exhaust Fluid 10 10 * 1,2,3 Key 2 Key 2 (If Equipped)
Upper Pump Drive 11 10 * 1,3 TT TT
2000 + 1,3 TT TT Fly Base Pins (2 Per Side) 39 4 250 A KK
Transmission 12 Key 3 *,+ 1,3 PP PP Steering Column U‐joint 40 1 250 A KK
Transfer Case 13 Key 3 *,+ 1,3 E LL Steering Drive Shafts/U‐joints 41 6 250 A KK
Axle 1, 4 & 5 Differentials 14 Key 3 *,+ 1,3 E LL
Transmission Drive Tubes/U‐joints 42 2 250 A KK
Planetary Wheel Ends 15 Key 3 *,+ 1,3 E LL
(Axles 1, 4,& 5) Axle Drive Tubes/U‐joints 43 9 250 A KK
Fuel Tanks 16 10 * 1,2,3 Key 2 Key 2
Boom Locking Pins 44 6 250 A KK
Hydraulic Reservoirs 17 10 *,$ 1,3 Key 3 Key 3
500 # 1,3 Key 3 Key 3 Miter Gear Box (In Cab) 45 1 250 A KK
2000 + 1,3 Key 3 Key 3
Batteries 18 50 0 1 N/A N/A
CARRIER AUTO LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Air Reservoirs (4) 19 10 $ 1 N/A N/A
Location Reference Number Number of Points
Air Dryer 20 10 0 1,3 N/A N/A
2000 # 1,3 N/A N/A Miter Gear Box 101 1
Tires 21 10 0 1,3 N/A N/A Steering Idler Link 102 2
Swing Speed Reducer 22 50 * 1,3 E LL Steering Drag Links 103 4
1000 + 1,3 E LL
Winch Drum(s) 23 50 * 1,3 HH QQ King Pins (2 Per Wheel) 104 20
1000 + 1,3 HH QQ Suspension Cylinders (2 Per Cylinder) 105 20
Boom 24 10 0 1,3 N/A N/A
Fly 25 10 0 1,3 N/A N/A
Wire Rope 26 10 0 1,3 Key 3 Key 3 UPPER AUTO LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Hydraulic Pilot Filter 27 Key 3 # 1,3 Key 3 Key 3 Location Reference Number Number of Points
Charge Filter Element 28 Key 3 # 1,3 Key 3 Key 3 Travel Swing Lock 201 1
Hydraulic Oil Filters 29 Key 3 # 1,3 Key 3 Key 3 Boom Hoist Cylinder Pins 202 2
Carrier Auto Lube System 100 10 *, 0 1,3 A KK
Boom Foot Pins 203 2
Upper Auto Lube System 200 10 *,0 1,3 A KK
Cab Tilt Cylinder 204 2
Turntable Bearing 205 12

Figure 2-2
Lubrication Chart

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-3

Operator's Manual

Lubrication Specifications
The following specifications are approved for use in Link‐Belt cranes. The specifications are identified by a code
letter. When a code letter appears on the lubrication or maintenance chart, it is referring to one of the lubricants as
described on the following pages. These lubricants are listed by specifications and by one brand name. Most repu­
table oil companies can provide a lubricant to match a particular specification. It may then be used in the crane no
matter what the brand name. When using other brand names, the user assumes all responsibility for product and
patent liability. It is recommended that types and brands of oil not be intermixed because of possible incompatibility.

Type A
Grease, NLGI Grade No. 2
A mineral oil based, multipurpose lithium complex ex­
treme pressure (EP) grease. Composed of a lithium
complex soap, compounded with highly refined par­
affin base oils and formulated with a special additive
package to provide rust and corrosion protection, res­
istance to water washout, oxidation stability, and wear
protection under high loads. It meets the require­
ments of ASTM D4950 GC-LB covering wheel bear­
ing and chassis greases. Recommended for use as a
multipurpose industrial grease, particularly where
temperature operation is of concern.
Typical Characteristics:
Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blue, Tacky
Lithium Complex Soap, wt % . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Penetration, D 217, Worked 60 X . . . . . . . 280
D 217, Worked 10,000 X % Change . . . 10
Dropping Point, Mettler,F (_C) 450+ (232+)
Mineral Oil Viscosity, D 445
cSt at 104F (40_C) . . . . . . . . . . . 150-205
cSt at 212F (100_C) . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5-18
Rust Protection, D 1743 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pass
Copper Corrosion, D 4048 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B
Timken, OK Load, lbs, D 2509 . . . . . . . . . . 40
Four‐Ball EP, D 2596
Load Wear Index, kgf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Weld Point, kgf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Four‐Ball Wear, mm, D 2266 . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.4
1 hr, 167F (75_C), 1200 rpm, 40 kg
Water Washout, wt % loss at
100F (38_C) D 1264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Grease Mobility, U.S. Steel Method g(l)/min
-30F (34_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0 (0)
-20F (29_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5(1.9)
0F (-17_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5(20.8)
20F (7_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30(113.6)
Guide to Usable Temperature
Min., F (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -20 (-29)
Continuous Service, Max, F (_C) 325 (163)
Short Exposure, Max, F (_C) . . 450 (232)
Type E
Extreme Pressure Gear Lubricant, 80W/90
An extreme pressure gear lubricant containing anti‐
foam protection, oxidation stability, anti‐rust, and
anti‐corrosion qualities. Contains sulfur and phos­
phorus additive materials but no zinc in compliance
with Eaton, General Motors, and International Har­
vester truck driving axle requirements.
Must meet or exceed military specification MIL-
PRF-2105E, and is suitable for API service desig­
nations GL3, GL4, MT-1, and GL5, with a rating of
10 as determined in the shock load test
CRC-L-42.
Used in hoist reducer, swing reducer, driving axles,
and drop transmissions.
Physical Properties:
Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Very Dark Red, Dark
Gravity, API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.7-27
Flash, COC, (Min) (F) (_C) . . . . . . 375 (191)
Pour Point, (Max) (F) (_C) . . . . . . -20 (-29)
Viscosity, Max @ 100F (38_C) SUS . . . . 829
Viscosity, Max @ 210F (99_C) SUS . . . . 72.5
Viscosity Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-100
Sulfur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37
Ash (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None
CU Corr 3 Hours 250F (121_C) . . . . . . . . 1 b
Channel Point, Max (F) (_C) . . . . . . . 0 (-17)
Timken Test Lever Load lb (Min) . . . . . . . . . 50
Phosphorus (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Shell 59210 Spirax HD 80W/90 or Equivalent.

Shell Code 70311- ALBIDA LC or Equivalent.

2-4 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance


Type H
Grease (Summer Grade)
For open gear applications. Satisfactory down to
-40F (-40_C) on dry gears. Good adhesiveness
on open gears at 73F (22.7_C) and good reten­
tion. The grease with use will become tacky and will
resist leaking. Used on cast tooth gears and ring
gear teeth. Extremely resistant to water washing.
Physical Properties:
Mineral Oil Component:
Viscosity at 100F (38_C) SUS . . . . . . . . . . 4545
Viscosity at 210F (99_C) SUS . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Load Wear Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Penetration, Worked at 77F (25_C)
(60 Strokes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Dropping Point, Min (F) (_C) . . . . . . . . 222(105)
Soap Base - Calcium (%) with 22% graphite
and 3% Molybdenum Disulfide . . . . . . . 9.0
Water (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5
Recommended Max Temperature
(F) (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 (79)
Consistency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Buttery Grease
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black-Gray
Shell 71228 - Rhodina SDX Grease 2 or Equiva­
lent.
Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
Operator's Manual
Type HH
Gear Lubricant
This gear lubricant is suitable for use in a wide variety
of mobile equipment gear and brake applications.
Has good oxidation and thermal stability, is non‐cor­
rosive to most gear and bearing materials, and is in­
hibited to provide good foam resistance and water
separation characteristics. Has moderate concentra­
tion of EP additives.
Must meet performance requirements of AGMA
Specification 250.04 for extreme pressure lubricants.
Is suitable for API service designations of GL2 and
GL3.
Typical Characteristics:
Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Very Dark Red
Gravity, API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.7-29
Flash, COC, Min F (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 (210)
Pour Point, Max F (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . -10 (-23)
Viscosity cSt @ 104F (40_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Viscosity cSt @ 212F (100_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4
Viscosity SUS @ 100F (38_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
Viscosity SUS @ 210F (99_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Viscosity Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-100
Sulfur, % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.66
Phosphorous, % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.03
Timken OK Load, Lbs (Min) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
AGMA No. EP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Shell 65104, OMALA 150 or Equivalent.
2-5
Operator's Manual
Type KK
Grease, NLGI Grade No. 1
Low temperature, extreme pressure, synthetic all
purpose grease made from a low pour point synthetic
hydrocarbon lubricant, thickened with lithium or clay.
The grease is fortified with an extreme pressure addi­
tive and a rust inhibitor to provide even better equip­
ment protection.
A multi‐purpose grease that can be pumped from
normal grease dispensing equipment at tempera­
tures down to a -55F (-48_C). Good for heavy
duty operation.
Recommended for use in centralized lube systems,
wheel bearings. chassis bearings, universal joints, and
all other applications requiring a grease of this type. Of­
fers full protection regardless of the season. Pumpable
at -55F (-48_C), even in a hand grease gun. Excel­
lent anti‐wear and load carrying ability, stays in place
better than lighter greases, waterproof to resist wash­
out, good shear stability. Assures good high tempera­
ture performances. Compatibility of this grease with or­
dinary greases presents no problems.
Physical Properties:
Thickener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lithium or Clay
Penetration worked @ 77F (25_C) (ASTM D217)
60 strokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315-325
Texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smooth
Dropping Point, (F) (_C)
(ASTM D2265) Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . +500 (260)
Viscosity (ASTM D445) cSt
104F (40_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-32
212F (100_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.08-5.2
Rust Properties (ASTM D1743) . . . . . . . . . . . . Pass
Four‐Ball, EP (ASTM D2596)
Wear, mm, Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7
Weld, kg, Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red or Brown
Exxon Mobil Mobiltemp SHC 32 or Equivalent.
2-6 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
Type LL
Extreme Pressure Gear Oil, 75W/90
A synthetic, extreme pressure gear oil designed for
cold weather operation in hypoid, spiral bevel, and
planetary gear axles. Must meet the requirements of
Military Specification MIL-PRF-2105E. Meets API
GL-5 and MT-1 performance ratings.
Physical Properties:
Gravity, API (ASTM D-1298) . . . . . . 25.2-33.3
Kinematic Viscosity, (ASTM D-443)
Min @ 212F (100_C), cSt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5
Max @ 104F (40_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Apparent Viscosity, (ASTM 2983) (Brookfield)
Max @ -40F (-40_C), ml . . . . . . . . . . . 150,000
Flash Point (ASTM D-92)
Min F (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 (204)
Pour Point (ASTM D-97)
Max F (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -49 (-45)
Viscosity Index (ASTM D-2270) . . . . . . 140-151
Copper Corrosion, (ASTM D-130)
3 hrs. @ 250F (121_C) Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Foaming Characteristics (ASTM D-892)
(Foam readings taken immediately
after 5 minutes aeration)
Max @ 75F (24_C), ml . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Max @ 200F (94_C), ml . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Storage Stability, % Max
(FTMS 791B Method 3440) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.25
Compatibility
(FTMS 791B Method 3430) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Note 1
The latest revision of all referenced specifications and
test methods shall be used.
FTMS= Federal Test Method Standard.
Note 1: Use approved per Eaton PS-163 and Mack
GO-J Plus.
Mobil Oil Molilube SHC 75W/90, Code No.
51100‐6 or Equivalent.
 Operator's Manual

Type PP
Synthetic Transmission Lubricant, CD SAE 50
A specially formulated synthetic lubricant designed
for extended drain and severe service in heavy duty
manual transmissions which require a straight miner­
al oil (non EP) MIL-L-2104D or MIL-L-46152B en­
gine lubricant.
This lubricant is formulated from a synthetic base­
stock having a high viscosity index, low pour point,
and sub‐zero fluid flow. It also contains an anti‐wear
additive as well as rust, oxidation, and corrosion in­
hibitors.
CD SAE 50 synthetic lubricant provides:
 all‐climate, year round performance
 improved component protection
 easier cold weather shifting
 potential for fuel economy
Typical Characteristics:
SAE Grade (J306-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Viscosity, cSt (ASTM D-445)
212F (100_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4
104F (40_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138.2
Viscosity, SUS (ASTM D-2161)
Min @210F (99_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
100F (38_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
Viscosity, cP (ASTM 2983)
32F (0_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
14F (-10_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,850
-4F (-20_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,650
-15F (-26_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,250
-22F (-30_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,250
-40F (-40_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,000
Viscosity Index (ASTM D-2270) . . . . . . 144-154
Pour Point,F (_C) (ASTM D-97)
Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 (-40)
Flash Point,F (_C) (ASTM D-92)
Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 (227)
Foam (ASTM D-892)
Sequence I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pass
Sequence II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pass
Sequence III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pass
Gravity, API, 60/60F (ASTM D-287) . . . . . 23.0
Density, lbs./gal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.63
Copper Strip Corrosion (ASTM D-130)
3 hrs. @ 212F (100_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pass
3 hrs. @ 250F (121_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pass
Type QQ
Synthetic Gear Oil, Grade 140
A specially formulated lubricant for applications
where service conditions are severe because of high
operating and bulk oil temperatures. Typical applica­
tions are spur, helical, herringbone, bevel, and plane­
tary gears. This lubricant is derived from synthetic
based oils that are more resistant to thermal and ox­
idation degradation. It can offer advantages of exten­
sion of lubricant life and reduced risk of damage to
machine elements.
Physical Properties:
AGMA Grade No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 EP
Gravity, API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4-34.4
ISO Viscosity Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Viscosity @ 100F (38_C), Cst . . . . . . . 140.0
Viscosity @ 212F (100_C), Cst . . . . . . . 14.0
Viscosity @ 100F (38_C), SUS . . . . . . . . 737
Viscosity @ 210F (99_C), SUS . . . . 75-100
Viscosity Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96-150
Flash COC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460F (238_C)
Pour Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -10F (-23_C)
Rust Test, Distilled Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pass
Copper Corrosion Test
24 hr. -30 hr. @ 212F (100_C) . . . . . 1 b
Timken Extreme Pressure Test
Pass Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 lb
FZG Test, Stages, Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Phosphorus, Wt. % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .005-.03
Mobil SHC 629 or Equivalent.

Chevron Texaco, Texaco Syn‐Star TL50 or Equiva­

lent.

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-7

Operator's Manual

Type TT
Synthetic Gear Oil, Grade 220
Specially formulated lubricant for severe service ap­
plications because of high operating and bulk oil
temperatures. The high viscosity index allows the
oil to flow at low temperatures and maintain viscos­
ity at high temperatures. Typical applications are
spur, helical, herringbone, bevel, planetary gears,
and gear boxes with multiple disc brakes. Lubricant
is derived from synthetic based oils that are more
resistant to thermal and oxidative degradation. It
can offer advantages of extension of lubricant life
and reduced risk of damage to crane elements.

Physical Properties:

Gravity, API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5-32.4

ISO Viscosity Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Viscosity, cSt (ASTM D-445)
@ 104F (40_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228-210
@ 212F (100_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.8-27.1
Viscosity Index (ASTM D-2270) . . . . . . 163-165
Pour Point (ASTM D-97)
(F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -45-49
(_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40-45
Flash Point, COC (ASTM D-92)
(F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482-520
(_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-271
Rust Test, Distilled Water (ASTM D-665) . . Pass

Shell Oil- Code No. 65137 OMALA RL-

or Equivalent.

2-8 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance

 Operator's Manual

Hi Performance Hydraulic Oil Chart

Important
Use only pre‐filtered hydraulic oil. Warranty is void if incorrect oil is used.
Incorrect oil may result in damage to hydraulic components. Hi Performance
Hydraulic Oil is available through your Link‐Belt Distributor in the following
grades and quantities.
Temperature Range Container Capacity

Maximum Change Link‐Belt

Oil Grades Ambient Interval Part
Hydraulic
Temperature (Hours) Gallons Liters Number
System
Use
Temperature

-45F to 80F 150F 5 18.9 830666001

Grade 22 2000
-43_C to 27_C 65_C 55 208.2 830666002

10F to 100F 200F 5 18.9 830663001

Grade 46 2000
-12_C to 38_C 93_C 55 208.2 830663002

All -40F to 100F 200F 5 18.9 830673001

4000
Temperature -40C to 38C 93C 55 208.2 830673002

Disposal Of Used
Lubricants, Fluids, Etc.
Properly dispose of used lubricants and filters. Every
drop of misplaced oil damages the environment.
Each year literally thousands of gallons of used oil is
dumped into our fields and streams or buried in com­
munity landfills. These methods of disposal perma­
nently damage the world around us. You can see that
the oil you use is properly disposed of by sending it to
a recycling center. Most local automobile service sta­
tions are happy to receive used oil and will see to it
that the oil is recycled. Refer to the latest EPA, state,
and local regulations regarding proper disposal.

Figure 2-3
Please Don't Do It!

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-9

Operator's Manual
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
1. Upper Auto Lube Reservoir
2. Carrier Auto Lube Reservoir
Figure 2-4
Auto Lube Reservoir Locations
Auto Lubrication System
The crane is equipped with two automatic lubrication
reservoirs to provide grease to various components on
the crane. One is on the upper and one is on the carrier.
Refer to Figure 2-4. Due to the importance of provid­
ing grease to these components, check the grease lev­
el in the reservoirs daily or every 10 hours of operation
whichever occurs first.. Refer to the Lubrication Chart
for the correct lubricant.
CAUTION
Do not use heavy, tacky greases or bentone
(clay based) high temperature grease. Use
only the grease specified on the Lubrication
Chart.
2-10 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
2
The auto lubrication system includes the following
components:
• Pump with integral reservoir
• Lubricant injectors
• Tubing to the lubrication points
• Fittings at the lubrication points
The auto lubrication system has a radial manifold with
24 ports on the upper unit and 48 ports on the carrier
unit. Each port can be fitted with a positive displace­
ment lubricant injector. Each lubricant injector is dedic­
ated to a single lubrication point.
The lubricant injector is connected to the lube point
with tubing and a tube connector. Numbered sleeves
are placed on the tubing at both the lubricant injector
and lube point to assure accurate installation and iden­
tification. Refer to Grease Line Identification chart.
Six different lubricant injector output capacities are
available to match the lube point volume requirements.
Lubricant injectors are color coded for easy identifica­
tion. Unused pump manifold ports are plugged.
The auto lubrication system pump is equipped with
one or more cams that operate the lubricant injectors
as the cams(s) are rotated by the motor.

Component Operation
Pump Operation
The auto lubrication system has been designed to
provide reliable and virtually maintenance free service
in the most demanding applications. The system com­
prises an electrically operated 12/24V pump with integ­
ral controller, and a loom of tubing which connects
each chassis bearing directly to its own respective
pumping unit. Each bearing is fed independently,
meaning that points can be individually calibrated, and
also damage to one line does not affect the rest of the
system. The system has a 6.6 lb (3 liter) reservoir and
has the motor and controller housed in the base. The
motor drives the impeller, which draws grease into the
pumping chamber and also gives a visual indication of
cam rotation. It also drives the cam, which operates
the individual pumping units, and feeds grease into the
tubing.
The reservoir paddle is also rotated by the cam as­
sembly. Paddle rotation ensures positive lubricant flow
to the lubricant injectors.
Each lubricant injector is actuated by its cam only once
per 360° revolution.
Filling The Reservoir
CAUTION
Do not overfill the reservoir. Fill only to Max
Level label.
To ensure proper operation of the lubrication
system, fill the reservoir only with fresh clean
lubricant.
Fill the reservoir through the fill grease fitting with clean
grease to minimize any contaminates from entering the
reservoir. Refer to the Lubrication Chart for the correct
lubricant.
Note: Be certain to clean the fill grease fitting before
filling. Place the dirt cap back on the fitting after any
service procedures.
The cam assembly consists of one or more cams in an
offset configuration, with each cam dedicated to a row
of lubricant injectors. As the cam assembly rotates, the
cam lobe actuates the injectors and lubricant is dis­
pensed.
Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
Operator's Manual
CAUTION
Ensure the reservoir breather tube mounted
on the reservoir adjacent to the mounting
bracket is clear at all times. On particularly
dirty applications, it may be advisable to drill a
small hole on the face of the breather about
mid way up the reservoir.
Programming Auto Lube System
The cycle times are programmed at the factory. Cycle
times can be adjusted to meet a particular working en­
vironment using the 10 position rotary switch. Regular
inspections are necessary to determine and calculate if
any adjustments are needed to meet an individual ap­
plication.
Remove sealing plug and change setting on the rotary
switch using a small screwdriver. Refer to Figure 2-5.
Replace plug and tighten.
CAUTION
Lubricant injector capacity and cycle time
setting determines the quantity of lubricant
fed to individual lubricant points. Major
damage to the components can result from
incorrect cycle settings.
Switch
Cycle Time
Position
0 Continuous double speed - 1.8 rpm
1 Continuous normal speed - 0.9 rpm
2 3 minute delay
3 7 minute delay
4 11 minute delay
5 15 minute delay
6 19 minute delay
7 24 minute delay
8 30 minute delay
9 36 minute delay
Manual Override
Press and release the Manual Override Button moun­
ted on the bottom of the base. During manual override
operation, the indicator light should flash slowly. A
faster flashing indicator light indicates a motor failure.
2-11
Operator's Manual

1 18

17
2
4

16

15
3

4 14

5 13

6 19

7
20
8
9 12
10
11
1. Paddle Blade 6. O‐Ring 11. Rotary Switch 16. O‐ring
2. Mounting Bracket 7. Retaining Plate 12. Sealing Plug 17. Reservoir
3. Paddle Blade Retaining Nut 8. Motor Cover 13. Carcass Ring 18. Fill Level Indicator
And Washer 9. Motor 14. Cam 19. Manual Override Button
4. Drive Shaft 10. Fill Grease Fitting 15. Pump Body 20. Indicator Light
5. Motor Housing

Figure 2-5
Auto Lube Reservoir

Lubricant Injector Operation Lubricant enters the lubricant injector through the
priming port and fills the lube chamber. As the cam
Each lubricant injector is a positive displacement lobe is rotated, the lube piston is pushed forward, seal­
device to meter lubricant to a single lubrication point on ing off the priming port. As the lubricant in the chamber
the vehicle. The lubricant injector is calibrated to deliv­ is pressurized, the check valve piston is unseated, al­
er a precise volume of lubricant each time it is actuated. lowing the lubricant to flow through the outlet to the lub­
There is a color‐coded ring on the injector for ease of rication point.
identifying output capacity. As the cam lobe is indexed the lube piston is pushed
Color Stroke Output (cc) back, allowing the lubricant injector to prime. At the
Red 0.010
same time, the check valve spring returns the check
valve piston, preventing any back flow.
Green 0.015
Yellow 0.025
Blue 0.040
Grey 0.060
Black 0.100

2-12 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance

 Operator's Manual
Grease Line Identification Injector Line
Line No. Bearing Description
Color Length (ft)
UPPER
16 Plug - -
Line
Injector 17 #2 Axle L Lower King Pin Blue 21 (6.4)
Line No. Bearing Description Length
Color
ft (m) 18 #2 Axle L Upper King Pin Blue 20 (6.1)
1 Turntable Bearing Black 25 (7.6) #2 Axle L Suspension Cyl
19 Yellow 20 (6.1)
2 Turntable Bearing Black 25 (7.6) Lower

3 Turntable Bearing Black 25 (7.6) #2 Axle L Suspension Cyl

20 Yellow 29 (8.8)
Upper
4 Turntable Bearing Black 25 (7.6)
#1 Axle L Suspension Cyl
5 Turntable Bearing Black 25 (7.6) 21 Yellow 24 (7.3)
Upper
6 Turntable Bearing Black 25 (7.6)
22 #1 Axle L Lower King Pin Blue 25.5 (7.8)
7 Turntable Bearing Black 25 (7.6)
23 #1 Axle L Upper King Pin Blue 24.5 (7.5)
8 Turntable Bearing Black 25 (7.6)
#1 Axle L Suspension Cyl
9 Turntable Bearing Black 25 (7.6) 24 Yellow 24.5 (7.5)
Lower
10 Turntable Bearing Black 25 (7.6) #3 Axle R Suspension Cyl
25 Yellow 16 (4.9)
11 Turntable Bearing Black 25 (7.6) Lower
12 Turntable Bearing Black 25 (7.6) 26 #3 Axle R Lower King Pin Blue 17 (5.2)
13 Boom Foot Pin L Black 8 (2.4) 27 #3 Axle R Upper King Pin Blue 16 (4.9)
14 Boom Foot Pin R Black 13 (3.9) #3 Axle R Suspension Cyl
28 Yellow 23.5 (7.2)
15 Cab Tilt Cyl Rod End Red 28 (8.5) Upper
16 Boom Hoist Cyl Base End Gray 17 (5.2) #4 Axle R Suspension Cyl
29 Yellow 19.5 (5.9)
Upper
17 Two Position Swing Lock Green 14 (4.2)
#5 Axle R Suspension Cyl
18 Cab Tilt Cyl Base End Red 18 (5.5) 30 Yellow 23.5 (7.2)
Upper
19 Boom Hoist Cyl Rod End Gray 47 (14.3)
#4 Axle R Suspension Cyl
20 Plug - - 31 Yellow 20.5 (6.2)
Lower
21 Plug - -
32 #4 Axle R Upper King Pin Blue 20.5 (6.2)
22 Plug - -
33 #4 Axle R Lower King Pin Blue 21.5 (6.5)
23 Plug - -
#5 Axle R Suspension Cyl
24 Plug - - 34 Yellow 25 (7.6)
Lower
CARRIER 35 #5 Axle R Upper King Pin Blue 25 (7.6)
1 Plug - - 36 #5 Axle R Lower King Pin Blue 26 (7.9)
2 Steering Box Red 26 (7.9) #3 Axle L Suspension Cyl
37 Yellow 18 (5.5)
3 Plug - - Lower
4 Plug - - 38 #3 Axle L Upper King Pin Blue 18 (5.5)
5 Plug - - 39 #3 Axle L Lower King Pin Blue 19 (5.8)
6 #1 Axle R Lower King Pin Blue 22.5 (6.8) #3 Axle L Suspension Cyl
40 Yellow 26 (7.9)
7 #1 Axle R Upper King Pin Blue 21.5 (6.5) Upper
#1 Axle R Suspension Cyl #4 Axle L Suspension Cyl
8 Yellow 21.5 (6.5) 41 Yellow 22 (6.7)
Lower Upper
#1 Axle R Suspension Cyl #5 Axle L Suspension Cyl
9 Yellow 18 (5.5) 42 Yellow 26 (7.9)
Upper Upper
#2 Axle R Suspension Cyl #4 Axle L Suspension Cyl
10 Yellow 16 (4.9) 43 Yellow 23 (7.0)
Lower Lower
11 #2 Axle R Upper King Pin Blue 16 (4.9) 44 #4 Axle L Upper King Pin Blue 23 (7.0)
12 #2 Axle R Lower King Ping Blue 17 (5.2) 45 #4 Axle L Lower King Pin Blue 24 (7.3)
#2 Axle R Suspension Cyl #5 Axle L Suspension Cyl
13 Yellow 23 (7.0) 46 Yellow 27.5 (8.4)
Upper Lower
14 Plug - - 47 #5 Axle L Upper King Pin Blue 27.5 (8.4)
15 Plug - - 48 #5 Axle L Lower King Pin Blue 28.5 (8.7)

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-13

Operator's Manual
Recommended Preventative Maintenance
Perform all of the following preventive maintenance
checks every 50 hours of operation or weekly,
whichever occurs first, to verify that the lubrication sys­
tem is operating properly.
Inspection Procedures
The following inspection procedures are recommen­
ded to help ensure proper operation of the auto lubrica­
tion system.
2-14 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
1. Inspect all lubrication points for signs of FRESH
grease.
2. Check the condition of all fittings and connections.
Tighten or replace loose or damaged fittings.
3. Check all lubrication lines; make certain that there
are not any breaks. Check for wear or chaffing that
may be leaking or may lead to leakage.
4. Check pump operation using the Manual Override
and indicator light flashes.
 Operator's Manual
Troubleshooting
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY
A..All lubrication points 1. Empty reservoir. 1. Refill the reservoir, using the correct lubricant.
appear dry. 2. Inoperative pump. 2. Refer to PROBLEM “E.".
3. Time between lube cycle is too long. 3. Adjust pump CYCLE TIME setting.
4. Reservoir has been filled with an unsuitable 4. Remove the lubricant and replace with correct
lubricant. grade of lubricant.
B..One or more lubrica­ 1. Broken or cut lube lines. 1. Determine cause, and if necessary, re‐route, or
tion points appear dry 2. Inoperative injector. protect the lines to avoid a recurrence. Use a
while others receive 3. Injector is undersized. connector to reconnect the line.
sufficient lubrication. 4. Injectors have been switched. 2. Refer to PROBLEM “G.".
3. Replace with a larger capacity injector.
4. Check the lube schematic or installation re­
cord, ensuring the correct injector is supplying
the lube point.
C..All lubrication points
1. Time between lube cycles is too short. 1. Adjust pump CYCLE TIME setting.
are over‐lubricated.
D..One or more lubrica­
1. Replace the injector(s) with a smaller capacity
tion points are 1. Injector(s) is/are oversized.
injector.
over‐lubricated.
E..Inoperative pump. 1. No input power. 1. Check for power to the pump.
2. Fuse is blown. 2. Check in‐line fuse. Replace if necessary.
3. Loose wire connection inside the pump. 3. Check all wires and connections in the pump.
4. Defective PCB. 4. Replace PCB.
5. Camshaft is worn of broken. 5. Inspect the camshaft. Replace if necessary.
6. Inoperative injector. 6. Refer to PROBLEM “G"
F.. Reservoir Paddle is 1. Bolt securing the paddle to the camshaft is
1. Tighten the bolt.
not rotating. loose.
G.. Inoperative 1. Lube piston cannot dispense lubricant. 1. Loosen the line fittings individually from the in­
injector causing the 2. Lube piston is frozen. jectors. Actuate the MANUAL OVERRIDE but­
pump to stall. ton to identify the stalled injector. Trace the line
and check for: A. Clogged bearing. B. Crimped
line. C. Blocked line.
2. Loosen the injectors individually from the
pump body. Actuate the MANUAL OVERRIDE
button to identify which injector frees the sys­
tem. Replace the injector. Check for contamin­
ates in the reservoir. Replace the lubricant if
contaminates are found.
H.. Inoperative 1. Return spring on the injector is not attached. 1. Secure the return spring to the lube piston and
injector but the pump 2. Lube piston is missing. injector body.
is able to operate. 3. Outlet check valve is not seating properly. 2. Replace the injector.
3. Remove and clean the injector. If this does not
remedy the problem, replace the injector.
Check for contaminates in the reservoir. Re­
place the lubricant if contaminates are found.
I.. Lubricant is coming 1. Broken or cut line. Refer to PROBLEM “B.", REMEDY 1.
out of the tape/har­
ness.

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-15

Operator's Manual
1

1. Check/Fill Plug
2. Drain Plug 2
Figure 2-6
Transmission Lubrication

Note: The transmission manufacturer recom­

Transmission Lubrication
The transmission is designed so that internal parts
operate in a bath of oil circulated by the motion of
gears and shafts. Some internal parts are equipped
with built in channels to ensure that the bearings and
shafts are properly lubricated.
On new or rebuilt transmissions, change
transmission oil after the initial 3,000 miles (4
825km). Change the oil every 50,000 miles (80
450km) or two years thereafter. The oil level should
be checked every 10,000 miles (16 090km) or
monthly, whichever occurs first.
Transmission Oil Level Check
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Engage the
park brake, shift the transmission to neutral, and
shutdown the carrier engine.
2. From the underside of the carrier, locate the
check/fill plug on the right side of the transmission
housing. Refer to Figure 2-6.
3. Clean the transmission housing around the
check/fill plug to prevent entry of foreign material
into the transmission.
4. Remove the check/fill plug. The oil must be level
with the bottom of the hole.
5. Add oil as required through the check/fill hole to
bring the oil to the proper level. Install the check/fill
plug. Refer to the Lubrication Chart for the correct
grade of oil.
Note: Do not overfill. Overfilling the transmis­
sion will cause oil to be forced out of the case
through the main shaft opening.
mends that types and brands of oil not be inter­
mixed because of possible incompatibility.
Transmission Oil Change
The best time to change transmission oil is just after
the crane has been road driven. The oil will be warm
and any foreign particles will be suspended in the oil.
This is especially desirable in cold weather conditions.
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Engage the
park brake, shift the transmission to neutral, and
shutdown the carrier engine.
2. From the underside of the carrier, locate the
check/fill plug on the right side of the transmission
housing. Refer to Figure 2-6. Locate the drain
plug on the bottom of the transmission.
3. Clean the transmission housing around the drain
and check/fill plugs. Remove the drain plug and
check/fill plug. Allow the oil to drain into a suitable
container. The drain plug is magnetic and should
be inspected for large quantities of metal particles.
After the initial oil change, these are signs of dam­
age or extreme wear in the transmission and in­
spection of the entire unit may be necessary.
4. After the transmission has thoroughly drained, in­
stall the drain plug and fill the transmission with
light flushing oil or kerosene.
5. Remove drain plug and drain flushing solution into
a suitable container.
6. Clean and install the drain plug. Add oil through
the check/fill hole until it is level with the bottom of
the hole.

2-16 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance

 Operator's Manual
7. Clean and install the check/fill plug. Properly dis­
pose of the used oil and flushing solution.
Transfer Case Lubrication
The transfer case is designed so that internal parts op­
erate in a bath of oil circulated by the motion of gears
and shafts. Some internal parts are equipped with built
in channels to ensure that the bearings and shafts are
properly lubricated.
On new or rebuilt transfer cases, change transfer case
oil after the initial 3,000 miles (4 825km). Change the
oil every 50,000 miles (80 450km) or two years
thereafter. The oil level should be checked every
10,000 miles (16 090km) or monthly, whichever occurs
first.

Transfer Case Oil Level Check

1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Engage the
1
park brake, shift the transmission to neutral, and
shutdown the carrier engine.
2. From the underside of the carrier, locate the check
plug on the left side of the transfer case housing. 2
Refer to Figure 2-7.
3. Clean the transfer case housing around the check
plug to prevent entry of foreign material into the
transfer case.
4. Remove the check plug. The oil must be level with
1. Fill Plug 3
the bottom of the hole. 2. Drain Plug
5. Add oil as required through the check hole to bring 3. Check Plug
the oil to the proper level. Install the check plug.
Refer to the Lubrication Chart for the correct grade Figure 2-7
of oil. Transfer Case Lubrication

Note: Do not overfill. Overfilling the transfer
case will cause oil to be forced out of the case
through the main shaft opening.
Note: The transfer case manufacturer recom­
mends that types and brands of oil not be inter­
mixed because of possible incompatibility.
Transfer Case Oil Change
The best time to change transfer case oil is just after
the crane has been road driven. The oil will be warm
and any foreign particles will be suspended in the oil.
This is especially desirable in cold weather condi­
tions.
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Engage the
park brake, shift the transmission to neutral, and
shutdown the carrier engine.
2. From the underside of the carrier, locate the check
and fill plugs on the left side of the transfer case
housing. Refer to Figure 2-7. Locate the drain
plug on the bottom of the transfer case.
3. Clean the transfer case housing around the drain,
check, and fill plugs. Remove the drain, check,and
fill plugs. Allow the oil to drain into a suitable con­
tainer. The drain plug is magnetic and should be
inspected for large quantities of metal particles. Af­
ter the initial oil change, these are signs of damage
or extreme wear in the transfer case and inspection
of the entire unit may be necessary.
4. After the transfer case has thoroughly drained, in­
stall the drain plug and fill the transfer case with
light flushing oil or kerosene.
5. Remove drain plug and drain flushing solution into
a suitable container.
6. Clean and install the drain plug. Add oil through
the fill hole until it is level with the bottom of the
check hole.
7. Clean and install the check and fill plugs. Properly
dispose of the used oil and flushing solution.

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-17

Operator's Manual

1
2
2

3
3
3
Axle 4 Axles 1 & 5

1. Fill Plug
2. Check/Fill Plugs
3. Drain Plugs

Figure 2-8
Rear Axle Differentials

3. Clean the area around the check/fill plug.

Axle Differential Lubrication
For troublefree operation, over a period of years, the differ­
entials must be properly lubricated. Check the oil level in
axle differentials every 1,000 miles (1 610km). The oil in a
new or rebuilt axle should be changed after the first 1,000
miles (1 610km) but no later than the first 3,000 miles (4
825km). Change the oil every 30,000 miles (48 280km) or
semiannually thereafter, whichever occurs first.
Axle Differentials Oil Level Check
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, engage the
park brake, shift the transmission to neutral, and
shutdown the carrier engine.
2. From the underside of the carrier, locate the
check/fill plug on the differential. Refer to
Figure 2-8.
4. Remove the check/fill plug and check the oil level.
Oil must be level with the bottom of the check/fill
hole.
5. Add oil, as required, until it begins to flow from the
check/fill hole. Refer to Lubrication Chart for cor­
rect grade of oil.
Note: The axle manufacturer recommends that
types and brands of oil not be intermixed be­
cause of possible incompatibility.
Note: When checking oil levels in the axle dif­
ferentials, also check and clean axle housing
breather, on the top of the drive shaft idler on
axle3.
6. Clean and install the check/fill plug.
7. Repeat procedure for each rear axle differential.

CAUTION Axle Differentials Oil Change

Do not tamper with the pinion drive gear
backlash adjusting screw on the opposite
side of the axle from the check/fill plug.
Tampering with this screw may result in
differential damage.
The best time to change oil in the differentials is im­
mediately after the crane has been driven. At this
time, the lubricant will be warm and easily drained.
This procedure is especially desirable in cold
weather conditions.

2-18 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance


1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, engage the
park brake, shift the transmission to neutral, and
shutdown the carrier engine.
2. From the underside of the carrier, locate the drain
plug in the bottom of the differential. Refer to
Figure 2-8.
3. Clean the area around the drain plug, before re­
moving it.
4. Remove the drain plug and allow the oil to drain
into a suitable container. The drain plug is mag­
netic and should be inspected for large quantities
of metal particles. After the initial oil change, this is
a sign of damage or extreme wear within the unit,
and a complete internal inspection may be neces­
sary. Clean the drain plug and install it after the oil
has thoroughly drained.
5. Locate and remove the check/fill plug.
CAUTION
Do not tamper with the pinion drive gear
backlash adjusting screw on the opposite
side of the axle from the check/fill plug.
Tampering with this screw may result in
differential damage.
6. Fill the differential with oil until it is level with the bot­
tom of the check/fill hole. Refer to the Lubrication
Chart for correct quantity and grade of oil.
Note: The axle manufacturer recommends that
types and brands of oil not be intermixed be­
cause of possible incompatibility.
7. Clean and install check/fill plug.
8. Repeat procedure for each rear axle differential.
Properly dispose of the used oil.
Axle Planetary Wheel End Lubrication
Check the oil level in the planetary of axle 1, 4 and 5
every 50 hours of operation or monthly, whichever
occurs first. Change the oil initially after 100 hours of
operation or 600 miles (1 000km), whichever occurs
first. Thereafter, change the oil every 1,000 hours or
6,000 miles (10 000km) or annually, whichever oc­
curs first. Use the following procedures to properly
lubricate the planetary wheel ends:
Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
Operator's Manual
1
2
1. Check/Fill Plug
2. Fluid Level Line
3. Drain Plug 3
Figure 2-9
Wheel End Planetary
Planetary Wheel End Oil Level Check
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Shift the
transmission to neutral.
2. Properly level the crane on outriggers, disengage
the park brake, and shutdown the engine.
3. Rotate the wheel end until the drain plug is posi­
tioned at the bottom of the wheel and the line next
to the check/fill plug is in the horizontal position.
Refer to Figure 2-9.
4. Clean the area around the check/fill plug to prevent
foreign material from entering the wheel end.
5. Remove the check/fill plug and check the oil level.
Oil should be level with the bottom of the hole.
6. Add oil, as required, until it begins to flow from the
hole. Refer to the Lubrication Chart for the correct
quantity and grade of oil. Do not overfill.
Note: It is recommended that types and brands
of oil not be intermixed because of possible in­
compatibility.
7. Clean and install the check/fill plug.
8. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for the other planetary
wheel ends. Always engage the park brake before
lowering the crane from the outriggers.
2-19
Operator's Manual
Planetary Wheel End Oil Change
Perform the following procedure on all of the plane­
tary wheel ends, simultaneously, to minimize the
time spent to change the oil.
1. Drive crane for 5 minutes to agitate and warm the oil.
2. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, apply the
park brake, and shift the transmission to neutral.
3. Properly level the crane on outriggers, disengage
the park brake, and shutdown the engine.
4. Rotate the wheel end until the drain plug is posi­
tioned at the bottom of the wheel and the line next
to the check/fill plug is in the horizontal position.
Refer to Figure 2-9.
5. Clean area around check/fill and drain plugs to
prevent foreign material from entering wheel end.
WARNING
Oil draining from the planetary may be hot and
could cause serious burns. Use care when
removing the plug.
6. Remove the check/fill and drain plugs and allow
the oil to drain into suitable containers.
7. After thoroughly draining the oil, the wheel ends
should be flushed.
a. Clean and install the drain plugs.
b. Fill the wheel ends with a light flushing oil or
kerosene and install the check/fill plugs.
2-20 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
WARNING
When the crane is on outriggers and the
transmission is shifted into gear, the axles may
drop. Stay clear of the axles and tires when
engaging the transmission to avoid injury.
c. Start the engine and operate the wheel end for
a short period of time at a very low speed.
d. Properly shutdown the engine.
e. Rotate the wheel end until the drain plug is posi­
tioned at the bottom of the wheel and the line next
to the check/fill plug is in the horizontal position.
f. Remove the check/fill and drain plugs and al­
low all the flushing solution to drain into suit­
able containers.
8. Clean and install the drain plugs.
9. Fill the wheel ends with oil until it begins to flow
from the check/fill holes. Refer to the Lubrication
Chart for the correct quantity and grade of oil. Do
not overfill.
Note: It is recommended that types and brands
of oil not be intermixed because of possible in­
compatibility.
10. Clean and install the check/fill plugs.
11. Properly dispose of the used oil and flushing solution.
12. Always engage the park brake before lowering the
crane from outriggers.
 Operator's Manual

1. Fuel Filter Access Cover

2. “Change Filter” Mark
3. Water Drain Valve

Figure 2-10
Carrier Fuel Filters

Carrier Fuel Filter

The fuel filter/water separator is mounted inside the left
frame rail and can be accessed by opening the access
cover. Refer to Figure 2-10. The function of the filter is
to remove water and contaminants from the fuel before
they enter the fuel system. Providing clean, dry fuel is
important for troublefree operation and long life of the
carrier engine. Water should be drained daily before
start‐up. Change the fuel filter when the fuel level has
risen to the “change filter” mark on the clear filter cover
or every 500 hours of operation whichever occurs first.

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-21

Operator's Manual
1
2
WARNING
Do not service the fuel filter until the fuel has
3
cooled. When the temperature of diesel fuel is
elevated, as occurs when the fuel is circulated
4 through an operating engine, it may pose the
following hazards which should be guarded
against.

5 Heated liquid fuel may cause scalding if

allowed to come in contact with the skin.
Heated diesel fuel can form combustible
vapor mixtures in the area around the fuel
source.
The following precautions should be taken to
minimize the possibility of injuries from
6 heated diesel fuel:
1. Whenever possible, the engine and fuel
should be given an opportunity to cool
down to ambient temperature before
7 performing service operations that could
1. Filter Vent Cap result in the spillage of fuel from the
2. Vent Cap O‐Ring Seal
engine or fuel system. When this is not
3. Holddown Spring
4. Collar possible, protective clothing (face shield,
5. Clear Cover insulated gloves, apron, etc.) should be
6. Filter Element worn when performing these operations.
7. Cover O‐Ring Seal 2. Keep open flames, sparks, or other
8. Water Drain Valve
8
potential ignition sources away and do not
Figure 2-11 smoke during refueling and service
Primary Filter/Separator operations which could result in the
escape of liquid or vaporized diesel fuel.
3. Fuel system service operations should be
Fuel Filter Water Drain performed in a well ventilated area.
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, shift trans­
mission to neutral, engage park brake, and shut­
down the carrier engine. Fuel Filter Change
2. Open the filter vent. 1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, shift trans­
3. Place a suitable container under the water drain mission to neutral, engage park brake, and shut­
valve. Open the water drain valve. Refer to down the carrier engine.
Figure 2-11. 2. Remove the vent cap from the top of the clear cover
4. Continue draining until clean fuel is visible. by turning the vent cap counterclockwise. Open
5. Close the drain valve. the drain valve and drain the fuel level below the
6. Close the filter vent. collar, then close the drain valve.
7. Start the engine. Raise the RPM for one minute to 3. Remove the clear cover from the fuel filter by re­
purge the air from the system. moving the collar. Remove and properly discard
8. Properly dispose of contaminated fuel. the o‐ring from the base of the cover. (A new o‐ring
seal is supplied with the new filter.) Remove the fil­
ter element from the filter base by pulling upward
and twisting slightly. Ensure the sealing grommet
is removed from the center stud.

2-22 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance

 Operator's Manual
4. Install the new filter element (supplied with a Seal­ Priming The System
ing Grommet already inserted into the element) on
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, shift trans­
the center stud by pushing down and twisting
mission to neutral, engage park brake, and shut­
slightly. After checking to ensure the new o‐ring
down the carrier engine.
seal (supplied with the filter) at the base of the cov­
2. Ensure the drain valve is closed.
er is in place, install the cover and collar. Hand
3. Remove the vent cap from the top of the clear cov­
tighten the collar until seated. Do not use tools to
er. Fill the clear cover full of clean fuel. Reinstall the
tighten.
vent cap and tighten by hand only.
5. Fill the clear cover with enough clean fuel to cover
4. Start the carrier engine. When the lubrication sys­
the bottom half of the filter element. Ensure the
tem reaches its normal operating pressure, in­
new o‐ring (supplied with the filter) is installed on
crease engine speed to high idle for one to two
the vent cap. Reinstall the vent cap and tighten by
minutes. After the air is purged, loosen the vent
hand only.
cap until the fuel level lowers to just above the bot­
6. Start the engine. When the engine lubrication sys­
tom of the collar. Tighten the vent cap by hand only.
tem reaches its normal operating pressure, in­
crease engine RPM for one minute. Note: The clear filter cover will not fill com­
pletely during engine operation. It will gradu­
Note: The clear filter cover will not fill com­
ally fill over time and the fuel level will rise as the
pletely during engine operation. It will gradu­
filter becomes clogged.
ally fill over time as the filter becomes clogged.
The filter element does not need to be changed 5. Hand tighten the collar again while the engine is
until the fuel level has risen to the “change filter” running. To avoid damage, do not use tools to
mark on the clear filter cover. tighten the collar.

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-23

Operator's Manual

10

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1. Desiccant Cartridge 5. Governor Unloader 8. Purge Valve

2. Pressure Protection Valves 6. Governor Exhaust 9. Heater/Thermostat
3. Auxiliary Delivery Ports 7. Governor 10. Safety Valve
4. Purge Reservoir

Figure 2-12
Air Dryer

Note: A small amount of oil in the system is nor­

Carrier Air System
The air system is equipped with an air dryer which re­
moves water, oil, and dirt from the system. The air dryer
provides clean, dry air to the air system components.
Every 500 hours or 3 months, whichever occurs first,
ensure the air dryer is functioning properly. Open the
air reservoir drain valves and check for moisture in the
system. If moisture is present, the desiccant cartridge
may require replacement; however, the following con­
ditions can also cause water accumulation and should
be considered before replacing the desiccant car­
tridge:
1. An outside air source has been used to charge the
system. This air did not pass through the air dryer.
2. In areas where more than a 30 degree range of
temperature occurs in one day, small amounts of
water can accumulate in the system due to con­
densation.
3. Air usage is high. Check the entire system for
leaks. Perform the “Operation And Leak Test” in
this Section of this Operator's Manual.
mal and should not be considered as a reason
to replace the desiccant cartridge. Some oil at
the dryer exhaust is normal.
CAUTION
This air dryer and reservoir system is intended
to remove moisture and other contaminants
normally found in the air brake system. Do not
inject alcohol, antifreeze, or other de‐icing
substances into or upstream of the air dryer
and reservoir system. Alcohol is removed by
the dryer, but reduces the effectiveness of the
device to dry air. Use of these or other
substances can damage the air dryer and
reservoir system and may void the warranty.

2-24 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance


Air Dryer Desiccant Cartridge Change
The air dryer contains a desiccant cartridge which
must be changed every 2,000 hours or annually,
whichever occurs first. Refer to Figure 2-12.
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Engage the travel swing lock and shutdown the en­
gine.
WARNING
Air lines may contain high pressure. Opening
lines and fittings before relieving air pressure
may result in serious injury. Shutdown the
engine and drain the air system reservoirs
before opening any line or fitting.
3. Open the drain valves on the air system reservoirs
to relieve the air system pressure.
4. When pressure is fully relieved, close the drain
valves on the air system reservoirs.
5. Remove the desiccant cartridge using a strap
wrench and properly discard the used cartridge.
6. Lubricate the new cartridge seal with clean engine
oil. Install the new cartridge.
Operation & Leak Test
1. Check all lines and fittings leading to and from the
air dryer and reservoir system for leaks and integ­
rity. Repair any leaks found.
WARNING
Air lines may contain high pressure. Opening
lines and fittings before relieving air pressure
may result in serious injury. Shutdown the
engine and drain the air system reservoirs
before opening any line or fitting.
Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
Operator's Manual
2. Build up system pressure to governor cut‐out and
note that the air dryer and reservoir system purges
with an audible escape of air. Watch the system
pressure gauges and note the pressure fall‐off for a
ten minute period. If pressure drop exceeds 1 psi/
minute from either service reservoir, inspect the
vehicle air systems for sources of leakage and re­
pair them. Refer to the Troubleshooting Chart,
Symptoms 1 and 4 in this Section of this Operator's
Manual.
CAUTION
Always wear safety glasses in case of a purge
blast.
3. Check for excessive leakage around the purge
valve with the compressor in the loaded mode
(compressing air). Apply a soap solution to the
purge valve exhaust port and observe that leakage
does not exceed a 1" bubble in 1 second. If the
leakage exceeds the maximum specified, refer to
the Troubleshooting Chart, Symptom 4.
4. Build up system pressure to governor cut‐out and
note that the air dryer and reservoir system purges
with an audible burst of air, followed immediately
by approximately 30 seconds of air flowing out of
the purge valve. “Fan" the service brakes to re­
duce system air pressure to governor cut‐in. Note
that the system once again builds to full pressure
and is followed by an air dryer and reservoir system
purge. If system does not follow this pattern, refer
to the Troubleshooting Chart, Symptoms 5 and 6.
2-25
Operator's Manual
5. Check the operation of the end cover heater and
thermostat assembly during cold weather opera­
tion as follows:
a. Electric Power to the Dryer
With the carrier engine ignition switch in the RUN
position, check for voltage to the heater and
thermostat assembly using a voltmeter or test­
light. Unplug the electrical connector at the air
dryer and reservoir system and place the test
leads on each of the connections of the female
connector on the vehicle power lead. If there is
no voltage, look for a blown fuse, broken wires,
or corrosion in the wiring harness. Check to see
if a good ground path exists.
b. Thermostat and Heater Operation
Note: These tests are not possible except in
cold weather operation.
Turn off the ignition switch and cool the ther­
mostat and heater assembly to below 40 de­
grees Fahrenheit. Using an ohmmeter, check
the resistance between the electrical pins in
the air dryer and reservoir system connector
half. The resistance should be 1.5 to 3.0 ohms
for the 12 volt heater assembly and 6.0 to 9.0
ohms for the 24 volt heater assembly. Warm
the thermostat and heater assembly to ap­
proximately 90 degrees Fahrenheit and again
check the resistance. The resistance should
exceed 1,000 ohms. If the resistance values
obtained are within the stated limits, the ther­
mostat and heater assembly is operating prop­
erly. If the resistance values obtained are out­
side the stated limits, replace the heater and
thermostat assembly.
2-26 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
6. Pressure Protection Valves. Observe the system
pressure gauges as pressure builds from zero.
The primary or secondary gauge should rise until it
reaches approximately 106 psi ±6 psi (730.9kPa
±41.3), then level off (or a momentary slight fall) as
the next pressure protection valve opens supply­
ing its reservoir. When that pressure gauge passes
through approximately 106 psi ±6 psi (730.9kPa
±41.3) there should be an associated leveling off
(or momentary slight fall) of pressure as the third
and fourth pressure protection valves open. Then
the primary and secondary gauges should in­
crease together until they reach their full pressure
of approximately 130 psi ±5 psi (896.3kPa ±34.4).
If the air dryer and reservoir system does not per­
form within the pressure ranges as described
above, recheck using gauges known to be accur­
ate. If the readings remain outside of the ranges
outlined above, replace the air dryer and reservoir
system.
Note: There are no kits available for the servi­
cing of the pressure protection valves.
WARNING
Do not attempt to adjust or service the
pressure protection valves - incorrect
pressure protection valve settings can result
in automatic application of the vehicle spring
brakes without prior warning in the event one
of the supply circuits experiences rapid
pressure loss.
 Operator's Manual

Air Dryer And Reservoir System Troubleshooting Chart

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY
1. Dryer is constantly A. Excessive system A. Test for excessive system leakage. Allowable leak­
“cycling” or purging. leakage. age observed at dash gauge:
3 psi/minute.
Using soap solution, test vehicle for leakage at fit­
tings, drain valves, and system valves. Repair or re­
place as necessary.
B. Defective delivery B. Build system pressure to governor cut­out. Wait 1
check valve. minute for completion of purge cycle. Using soap
solution at exhaust of purge valve, leakage should
not exceed a 1" (2.54cm) bubble in less than 5
seconds.
If a rapid loss of pressure is found, the following pro­
cedure will determine if the delivery check valve is
malfunctioning:
Build system pressure to governor cut­out and allow
a full minute for the normal dryer purge cycle to
empty the purge reservoir. Shutdown the engine
and “fan” the brakes so that the system pressure
reaches governor cut­in. The purge valve will return
to its closed position. The purge reservoir has a
drain valve which is opened by moving the center
lever away from its closed position. Open the drain
valve and wait 10 seconds to allow any residual
purge pressure to be released. Release the lever,
closing the drain valve. Carefully remove the air dry­
er cartridge using a strap wrench and then test for
air leaking through the center of the threaded boss
by applying a soap solution to the boss. Replace
the delivery check valve if there is excessive leakage
[exceeding a 1" (2.54cm) bubble in 5 seconds].
Grease the seal on the air dryer cartridge before in­
stallation. Ensure the drain valve on the purge reser­
voir is not leaking before restoring crane to service.
C.Defective governor. C.Check governor at both “cut­in” and “cut­out” posi­
tion for (1) proper pressures and (2) leakage at fit­
tings and exhaust.
D. Compressor unloader D.Remove air strainer or fitting from compressor inlet
mechanism leaking cavity. With compressor unloaded, check for
excessively. unloader piston leakage. Slight leakage is permiss­
ible.

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-27

Operator's Manual

Air Dryer And Reservoir System Troubleshooting Chart

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY
2. Water in crane air A. Maximum air dryer inlet A. Check for excessive carbon build up in compressor
reservoirs. temperature is ex­ discharge line. Replace if required. Confirm that
ceeded due to improp­ discharge line length is at least 6 ft (1.8m) long. In­
er discharge line length. crease discharge line length and/or diameter to re­
duce air dryer inlet temperature.
B. Air system charged
from outside air source B. If system must have outside air fill provision, outside
(outside air not passing air should pass through air dryer.
through air dryer).
C.Desiccant cartridge re­
C.Replace desiccant cartridge assembly.
quires replacement.
D. Air bypasses desic­
D. If Holset compressor is used, inspect feedback
cant cartridge as­
check valve for proper installation and operation.
sembly.
E. Air dryer not purging. E. Refer to Symptom 6.
F. Purge (air exhaust) time
insufficient due to ex­ F. Refer to Symptom 1.
cessive system leakage.
3. Safety valve on air dry­ A. Defective air dryer and A. Test to determine if air is passing through check
er “popping off” or ex­ reservoir system deliv­ valve. Repair or replace. Refer to Symptom 1, Rem­
hausting air. ery check valve. edy B.
B. Safety valve setting too B. Replace safety valve.
low [<150 psi (1
034kPa)].
C.System pressure too
C.Test with accurate gauge. Replace governor if ne­
high [>135 psi
cessary.
(931kPa]
D. Excessive pressure D. Increase volume in discharge line. This can be ac­
pulsations from com­ complished by adding a 90 cubic inch (1 475 cubic
pressor. (Typical centimeter, or larger, reservoir between the com­
single cylinder type). pressor and the air dryer and reservoir system.

2-28 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance


Air Dryer And Reservoir System Troubleshooting Chart
SYMPTOM CAUSE
4. Constant exhaust of air A. Air dryer purge valve
at air dryer purge valve leaking excessively.
exhaust or unable to
build system pressure.
B. Purge valve stuck
(Charge mode.)
open ­ faulty heater
and thermostat, wir­
ing, blown fuse.
C.Defective air dryer de­
livery check valve.
D. Leaking Turbo Cut­Off
valve.
E. Defective governor.
F. Leaking purge valve
control piston quad­ring.
5. Cannot build system A. Kinked or blocked
air pressure. (plugged) discharge
line.
B. Excessive bends in
discharge line (water
collects and freezes).
C.Pressure protection
valve(s) in air dryer will
not open.
D. Refer to Symptom 4.
E. Refer to Symptom 7.
6. Air dryer does not A. Faulty air dryer purge
purge or exhaust air. valve.
B. See Causes B, E, and
F for Symptom 4.
7. Desiccant material be­ A. Faulty dryer cartridge.
ing expelled from air
dryer purge valve ex­ B. Excessive air dryer vi­
haust (may look like bration.
whitish liquid, paste, or
small beads.)
8. Unsatisfactory desic­ A. Excessive system
cant life. leakage.
B. Compressor passing
excessive oil.
Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
Operator's Manual
REMEDY
A. With compressor loaded, apply soap solution on
purge valve exhaust, to test for excessive leakage.
Repair or replace purge valve as necessary.
B. Refer to Step 5 of Operation and Leak Test for heater
and thermostat test.
C.Refer to Symptom 1, Remedy B..
D. Repair or replace purge valve assembly.
E. Check governor at both “cut­in” and “cut­out” posi­
tions for (1) proper pressures and (2) excessive
leakage at fittings and exhaust.
F. Repair or replace purge valve assembly.
A. Check to determine if air passes through discharge
line. Check for kinks, bends, excessive carbon de­
posits, or ice blockage.
B. Discharge line should be constantly sloping down­
ward from compressor to air dryer with as few bends
as possible.
C.Replace air dryer (pressure protection valves are
not serviceable).
D. Refer to Symptom 4, Remedy A..
E. Refer to Symptom 7, Remedies A. and B..
A. After determining air reaches purge valve control
port by installing a T­fitting with a pressure gauge in­
to the governor unloader port, repair purge valve if
necessary.
B. Refer to Symptom 4, Remedies B., E., and F.. Also
refer to Symptom 1, Remedy B.
A. Replace air dryer cartridge and/or air dryer.
B. Check the air dryer mounting to ensure it is tight and
not damaged. Repair mounting and replace cart­
ridge.
A. Refer to Symptom 1, Remedy A.
B. Check for proper compressor installation; if symp­
toms persist, replace compressor.
2-29
Operator's Manual

Air Dryer And Reservoir System Troubleshooting Chart

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY
9. “Pinging” noise ex­ A. Single cylinder com­ A. A slight “pinging” sound may be heard during system
cessive during com­ pressor with high build up when a single cylinder compressor is used. If
pressor loaded cycle. pulse cycles. this sound is deemed objectionable, it can be reduced
substantially by increasing the discharge line volume.
This can be accomplished by adding a 90 cubic inch
(1 475 cubic centimeter), or larger, reservoir between
the compressor and the air dryer and reservoir sys­
tem.
10. The air dryer purge A. Compressor fails to “un­ A. Check air hose from governor to compressor for a
piston cycles rapidly in load”. missing, kinked, or restricted line. Install or repair air
the compressor un­ hose. Repair or replace compressor unloader.
loaded (non­com­
pressing) mode.

2-30 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance


Carrier And Upper Engine
Cooling Systems
The coolant in the carrier and upper engine cooling
systems must be maintained at the proper level and
proper concentration levels to adequately keep the en­
gines operating at safe temperatures.
Antifreeze must be used in all climates for both freezing
and boiling protection. It broadens the operating tem­
perature range by lowering the coolant freezing point
and by raising its boiling point. The engine manufac­
turer recommends Cummins ES Compleat™ OAT (Or­
ganic Acid Technology) extended life coolant/anti­
freeze be used in the cooling systems. Refer to engine
manufacturer's manuals for extended life coolant spe­
cifications.
WARNING
Avoid prolonged and repeated skin contact
with antifreeze. Such prolonged, repeated
contact can cause skin disorders or other
bodily injury. Keep out of reach of children.
Coolant is toxic. Keep away from children and
pets. If not reused, dispose of in accordance
with local environmental regulations.
CAUTION
Overconcentration of antifreeze or use of
high‐silicate antifreeze can cause damage to
the engine(s).
Carrier And Upper Engine Cooling
Systems Test
Check the antifreeze concentration and the freezing
point protection as outlined in the engine manufactur­
er's manuals.
Testing the engine(s) coolant is important to ensure that
the engine(s) is/are protected from internal cavitation and
from corrosion. Refer to engine manufacturer's manuals
for additional information on coolant system analysis.
Carrier Engine Cooling System
Level Check
Check the coolant level in surge tank every 10 hours of
operation.
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, apply the park brake, and
shutdown the carrier engine.
Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
Operator's Manual
2. Check that the coolant level in the surge tank is vis­
ible within the sight gauge on the side of the tank.
Refer to Figure 2-13.
WARNING
Carrier engine cooling system is pressurized.
Do not remove fill cap from a hot carrier
engine. Heated coolant spray or steam can
cause personal injury. Wait until the carrier
engine has cooled before slowly removing fill
cap.
3. If coolant must be added, allow the carrier engine
to cool until the the coolant temperature is below
122°F (50°C ).
CAUTION
Do not add cold coolant to a hot carrier
engine. Carrier engine castings can be
damaged. Allow the carrier engine to cool
until the coolant temperature is below 122°F
(50°C ) before adding coolant.
Do not use a sealing additive to stop leaks in
the cooling system. This can result in cooling
system plugging and inadequate coolant
flow, causing the carrier engine to overheat.
If additional coolant must be added, soft
water and ethylene glycol or propylene
glycol‐based antifreeze must be pre‐mixed
before being added to the system. Since the
ability of antifreeze to remove heat from the
carrier engine is not as good as water, pouring
antifreeze into the system first could
contribute to an overheated condition before
the liquids are completely mixed.
4. Slowly remove the fill cap. Add coolant, as required,
until the coolant level in the surge tank is visible within
the sight gauge on the side of the tank. Use a pre‐
mixed solution per the carrier engine manufacturer's
specification. Refer to the carrier engine manufactur­
er's manual for proper coolant selection.
Note: There is also a fill level indicator at the
bottom of the fill tube inside the surge tank to
assist when determining when the proper
coolant level is achieved.
5. Replace the fill cap.
6. Inspect and clean any debris from the radiator fins.
7. Start the carrier engine and let it run until it reaches
normal operating temperature. Shutdown the car­
rier engine and repeat Step 2.
2-31
Operator's Manual
6

5 2

1. Fill Cap 4. Surge Tank

2. Sight Gauge 5. Drain Valve
3. Radiator Assembly 6. Vent Valve

Figure 2-13
Carrier Engine Radiator Assembly

2-32 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance


Carrier Engine Cooling System
Coolant Change
The carrier engine manufacturer recommends Cum­
mins ES Compleat™ OAT (Organic Acid Technology)
extended life coolant/antifreeze be used in the carrier
engine cooling system. Drain, flush, and fill the carrier
engine cooling system per the carrier engine manufac­
turer's maintenance interval and specifications for ex­
tended life coolant.
CAUTION
Protect the environment: Handling and
disposing of used antifreeze is subject to
federal, state, and local regulations. Use
authorized waste disposal facilities, including
civic amenity sites and garages providing
authorized facilities for the receipt of used
antifreeze. If in doubt, contact your local
authorities or the EPA for guidance as to
proper handling of used antifreeze.
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, apply the park brake, and
shutdown the carrier engine.
2. Allow the carrier engine to cool until the coolant
temperature is below 122°F (50°C ).
WARNING
Carrier engine coolant may be hot and could
cause burns. Avoid prolonged and repeated
skin contact with antifreeze. Such prolonged,
repeated contact can cause skin disorders or
other bodily injury. Keep out of reach of
children.
Coolant is toxic. Keep away from children and
pets. If not reused, dispose of in accordance
with local environmental regulations.
3. Drain the cooling system by opening the drain
valve on the lower radiator tube. Refer to
Figure 2-13. Allow the coolant to drain into a suit­
able container. Properly dispose of used anti­
freeze.
Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
Operator's Manual
4. Check for damaged hoses and hose clamps.
Hoses must be firm to the feel. If they are soft and
spongy they must be replaced. Replace as re­
quired. Check the radiator for leaks, damage, and
build up of dirt. Clean and replace as required.
5. Close the drain valve on the lower radiator tube.
6. Inspect and remove any debris from the radiator
fins.
7. Remove the fill cap from the surge tank.
8. Flush the system as outlined in the carrier engine
manufacturer's manual. If the carrier engine is
warm, fill slowly to prevent the rapid cooling and
distortion of the metal castings.
9. Flush the system as many times as required until
the drained water is clean. Close drain valves.
CAUTION
During filling, air must be vented from the
carrier engine cooling system. Air trapped in
the system may cause damage to the carrier
engine.
10. Open the vent valve on the thermostat housing. Fill
the system with extended life coolant/antifreeze
per the carrier engine manufacturer's specifica­
tions until coolant seeps from vent valve. Close the
vent valve. Continue filling until system is full. Do
not fill the system any faster than 5 gallons (19L)
per minute to avoid air locks. Do not install the fill
cap.
11. Start the carrier engine and let it run until it reaches
normal operating temperature to purge trapped air
from the system. Check system for leaks.
WARNING
Carrier engine cooling system is pressurized.
Do not remove fill cap from a hot carrier engine.
Heated coolant spray or steam may cause
personal injury. Wait until the carrier engine has
cooled before slowly removing fill cap.
12. Check the coolant level to confirm that the coolant
level is visible in the sight gauge on the side of the
surge tank. Refer to “Carrier Engine Cooling Sys­
tem Level Check” in this Section of this Operator's
Manual. Add coolant as required.
13. Install the fill cap on the surge tank.
2-33
Operator's Manual
Upper Engine Cooling System Level
Check
Check the coolant level in the surge tank every 10
hours of operation.
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, apply the park brake, and
shutdown the engine(s).
2. Check that the coolant level in the upper surge tank
is visible within the sight gauge on the side of the
tank. Refer to Figure 2-14.
4. Slowly remove the fill cap. Open the vent valve (Re­
fer to Figure 2-14) and add coolant, as required,
until coolant is visible within the sight gauge on the
surge tank. Use a pre‐mixed solution per the upper
engine manufacturer's specification. Refer to up­
per engine manufacturer's manual for proper cool­
ant selection.
Note: There is also a fill level indicator at the
bottom of the fill tube inside the surge tank to
assist when determining when the proper
coolant level is achieved.

5. Replace fill cap and close the vent valve. Inspect

WARNING and clean any debris from the radiator fins.
Upper engine cooling system is pressurized. 6. Start the upper engine and let it run until it reaches
Do not remove fill cap from a hot upper normal operating temperature. Shutdown the up­
engine. Heated coolant spray or steam can per engine and repeat Step 2.
cause personal injury. Wait until the upper
engine has cooled before slowly removing fill
cap.

3. If coolant must be added, allow the upper engine to

cool until the the coolant temperature is below
122°F (50°C ).

CAUTION
Do not add cold coolant to a hot upper engine.
Upper engine castings can be damaged.
Allow the upper engine to cool until the
coolant temperature is below 122°F (50°C )
before adding coolant.
Never use a sealing additive to stop leaks in
the cooling system. This can result in cooling
system plugging and inadequate coolant
flow, causing the upper engine to overheat.
If additional coolant must be added, it must be
pre‐mixed before being added to the system.
Since the ability of antifreeze to remove heat
from the upper engine is not as good as water,
pouring antifreeze into the system first could
contribute to an overheated condition before
the liquids are completely mixed.

2-34 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance

 Operator's Manual

1. Surge Tank
2. Fill Cap
3. Sight Gauge 4
4. Drain Valve

Figure 2-14
Upper Engine Radiator Assembly

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-35

Operator's Manual
Upper Engine Cooling System
Coolant Change
Drain, flush, and fill the upper engine cooling system
per the upper engine manufacturer's maintenance in­
terval schedule. The upper engine manufacturer re­
commends Cummins ES Compleat™ OAT (Organic
Acid Technology) extended life coolant/antifreeze be
used in the cooling system. Refer to upper engine
manufacturer's manual for coolant specifications and
the maintenance interval schedule.
WARNING
Protect the environment: Handling and
disposing of antifreeze is subject to federal,
state, and local regulations. Use authorized
waste disposal facilities, including civic
amenity sites and garages providing
authorized facilities for the receipt of used
antifreeze. If in doubt, contact your local
authorities or the EPA for guidance as to
proper handling of antifreeze.
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, apply the park brake, and
shutdown the engine(s).
2. Allow the upper engine to cool until the coolant
temperature is below 122°F (50°C ).
3. Remove the fill cap from the surge tank. Refer to
Figure 2-14.
WARNING
Upper engine coolant may be hot and could
cause burns. Avoid prolonged and repeated
skin contact with antifreeze. Such prolonged,
repeated contact can cause skin disorders or
other bodily injury. Keep out of reach of
children.
Coolant is toxic. Keep away from children and
pets. If not reused, dispose of in accordance
with local environmental regulations.
4. Drain the cooling system by opening the drain
valve on the radiator and upper engine block. Al­
low the coolant to drain into a suitable container.
Properly dispose of used antifreeze.
5. Check for damaged hoses and hose clamps.
Hoses must be firm to the feel. If they are soft and
spongy they must be replaced. Replace as re­
quired. Check the radiator for leaks, damage, and
build up of dirt. Clean and replace as required.
6. Inspect and clean any debris from the radiator fins.
2-36 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
7. Close the drain valve on the radiator and upper en­
gine block.
CAUTION
During filling, air must be vented from the
upper engine coolant passages. Wait 2 to 3
minutes to allow air to be vented. Air trapped
in the system may cause damage to the upper
engine.
8. Flush the system as outlined in the upper engine
manufacturer's manual. If the upper engine is
warm, fill slowly to prevent the rapid cooling and
distortion of the metal castings.
9. Flush the system as many times as required until
the drained water is clean.
10. Remove the fill cap and add coolant, as required,
until coolant is visible within the sight gauge on the
surge tank. Do not fill the system any faster than 5
gallons (19L) per minute to avoid air locks. Fill the
system with extended life coolant/antifreeze per
the upper engine manufacturer's specifications.
Refer to upper engine manufacturer's manual for
the correct coolant selection. Do not install the fill
cap.
Note: There is also a fill level indicator at the
bottom of the fill tube inside the surge tank to
assist when determining when the proper
coolant level is achieved.
11. Start the upper engine and let it run at low idle. In­
crease upper engine to 1,500 rpm. Run the upper
engine at high idle for approximately 1 minute to
purge trapped air from the system. Shutdown the
upper engine.
12. Check the coolant level to confirm that the coolant
level is visible within the sight gauge on the side of
the surge tank. Refer to “Upper Engine Cooling
System Level Check” in this Section of this Opera­
tor's Manual.
13. Install the fill cap on the surge tank.
WARNING
Upper engine cooling system is pressurized.
Do not remove fill cap from a hot upper
engine. Heated coolant spray or steam can
cause personal injury. Wait until the upper
engine has cooled before slowly removing fill
cap.
14. Start the upper engine. Check system for leaks
and for proper operating temperature.

1 1
1. U‐joint Fitting (Each End)
Figure 2-15
Drive Tube And U‐joint Lubrication
Drive Tube And U‐Joint
Lubrication
Drive tubes and u‐joints are used to transmit torque
from one drive line component to another. They also
help absorb shock loadings. Because they are so criti­
cal to crane operation, thorough lubrication is neces­
sary. Lubricate every 250 hours.
Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
Operator's Manual
Lubrication Procedure For Drive
Tubes/U‐Joints
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Engage the
park brake, shift the transmission to neutral, and
shutdown the carrier engine. Follow Steps 2
through 6 on each drive tube.
2. Check the slip yoke for looseness or side play.
3. Check each u‐joint for looseness.
4. Apply grease through the fitting on each u‐joint un­
til all the old grease is purged. Purging should oc­
cur at all four seals on each u‐joint. Refer to
Figure 2-15 for grease fitting locations.
5. If grease does not purge from each seal, manipu­
late the u‐joint until purging occurs.
6. If the above is not successful, remove the u‐joint
and inspect it. If the grease is rusty, gritty, or burnt,
replace the u‐joint.
2-37
Operator's Manual
4. Clean the area around the telescope valve in‐line
filter to prevent foreign material from entering the
hydraulic system. Refer to Figure 2-16.
5. Remove element from filter body and inspect it for
contamination.
6. Clean element with solvent, back flushing, or ultra­
sonic cleaning. Replace if required.
7. Install element in filter body.
8. Start engine and check for leaks.

1. Telescope Valve In‐Line Filter

Figure 2-16
Telescope Valve In‐Line Filter

Telescope Valve In‐Line

Filter Cleaning
Clean or change telescope valve in‐line filter element
after every 500 hours of operation.
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, engage park
brake, shift the transmission to neutral, and shut­
down the engine.
2. Relieve any trapped hydraulic system pressure by
working the control levers in the operator's cab
back and forth.
3. Release any residual pressure in the hydraulic res­
ervoir by slowly loosening the filler/breather cap
until pressure is fully relieved.

WARNING
All trapped hydraulic pressure must be
exhausted from the system before removing
any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil
could cause burns or other serious injury.

2-38 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance

 Operator's Manual
Carrier Hydraulic Reservoir Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level Check
Check the oil level in the hydraulic reservoir daily before
The carrier hydraulic reservoir is used to store hydrau­
start‐up. Operating the crane with the oil level below
lic oil needed to operate all carrier hydraulic functions
the full mark can lead to hydraulic component failure.
of the crane. Refer to Figure 2-17. The system re­
1. With all hydraulic cylinders fully retracted , park the
quires periodic maintenance to keep the system clean
crane on a firm level surface. Engage the park brake,
and in top operating condition.
shift the transmission to neutral, and shutdown the
Service indicators on the filters signal the condition of carrier engine.
the filters and should be checked every 10 hours of op­ 2. Check that the oil is visible within the middle of the
eration or daily before start‐up. sight gauge. If the oil level is not visible within
Drain any water from the hydraulic reservoir and check middle of the sight gauge, add hydraulic oil as nec­
the oil level daily before start‐up. Operating the crane essary until the oil is visible within the middle of the
with the oil level below the full mark or with the filter ele­ sight gauge. The proper level must be maintained
ment bypassed can lead to hydraulic component fail­ at all times. Use only Hi Performance Hydraulic Oil
ure. Refer to the following procedures when servicing or an approved substitute. Do Not Overfill.
the hydraulic reservoir.
Adding Oil To The Hydraulic Reservoir
Water Drain 1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Engage the
park brake, shift the transmission to neutral, and
Drain the water from the hydraulic reservoir daily before
shutdown the carrier engine.
start‐up. Contaminated oil will damage the system's
2. Relieve any trapped hydraulic system pressure by
hydraulic components.
loosening the breather/filler, on the hydraulic reser­
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Engage the
voir, 1/4 turn until pressure is fully relieved. Refer to
park brake, shift the transmission to neutral, and
Figure 2-17.
shutdown the carrier engine.
2. Relieve any trapped hydraulic system pressure by
loosening the breather/filler dipstick, on the hy­
draulic reservoir, 1/4 turn until pressure is fully re­ WARNING
lieved. All trapped hydraulic pressure must be
exhausted from the system before removing
any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil
WARNING could cause burns or other serious injury.
All trapped hydraulic pressure must be
3. Clean the top of the hydraulic reservoir and the
exhausted from the system before removing
breather filler to prevent foreign material from en­
any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil
tering the hydraulic system.
could cause burns or other serious injury.
4. Remove the breather/filler and add hydraulic oil as
necessary until the oil is visible within the middle of
3. Loosen the water drain plug and allow the water to
the sight gauge. Use only Hi Performance Hydrau­
drain into a suitable container. The water drain
lic Oil or an approved substitute. Do not overfill.
plug is slotted and does not need to be completely
5. Install the breather/filler.
removed to drain the water. Refer to Figure 2-17.
4. When a clean flow of hydraulic oil begins to drain
from the water drain plug, tighten the plug.
5. Check the oil level in the hydraulic reservoir before
beginning operation of the crane. Add oil if neces­
sary. Refer to “Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level
Check” and “Adding Oil To The Hydraulic Reser­
voir” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
Properly dispose of the contaminated oil.

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-39

Operator's Manual
4 5 6 3

2
2

1 1

1. Hydraulic Filters
2. Contamination Indicators
3. Hydraulic Reservoir
4. Cover
5. Breather/Filler Dipstick
6. Sight Gauge
7. Water Drain Plugs
8. System Drain Plug 7 8

Figure 2-17
Carrier Hydraulic Reservoir

Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Change 2. Relieve any trapped hydraulic system pressure by
loosening the breather/filler, on the hydraulic reser­
The hydraulic reservoir oil should be changed every
voir, 1/4 turn until pressure is fully relieved. Refer to
2,000 or 4000 hours of operation depending on the
Figure 2-17.
type of oil used or seasonally, whichever occurs first.
Change the hydraulic reservoir oil at the end of a work­
ing day when any foreign particles will be suspended in
the warm oil. If this is not possible, cycle the crane until
WARNING
the oil is warm and proceed as follows: All trapped hydraulic pressure must be
1. With all hydraulic cylinders fully retracted, park the exhausted from the system before removing
crane on a firm, level surface. Engage the park any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil
brake, shift the transmission to neutral, and shut­ could cause burns or other serious injury.
down the carrier engine.

2-40 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance

 Operator's Manual
3. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the hy­
draulic reservoir to prevent foreign materials from
entering the system, once the access panels and
1
filter housing are opened.
4. Remove the filler/breather and cover. Pump the hy­
draulic oil into suitable containers. Refer to the Lu­
brication Chart to determine the volume of oil to be
removed.
Note: If a pump is not available to remove the oil
from the reservoir, place a suitable container
2
under the system drain plug. Open the plug and
drain one container full at a time, until the oil has
thoroughly drained from the reservoir.
5. Clean the interior of the hydraulic reservoir with
clean diesel fuel or kerosene.
6. Allow the diesel fuel or kerosene to drain into a suit­ 4
able container until the hydraulic reservoir is thor­
oughly drained. Inspect the interior of the hydrau­
lic reservoir for foreign material and wipe clean.
7. Remove, clean, and install the system and water
drain plugs.
3
8. Remove the sponge filter inside the breather/filler
cap. Clean or replace the sponge filter and install it
inside the breather/filler dipstick cap.
9. Install the cover.
10. Using clean, uncontaminated oil, fill the reservoir 1. Filter Head
through the strainer until it is visible within the 2. Filter Element
middle of the sight gauge. 3. Filter Housing
11. Install the breather/filler to the reservoir. 4. Contamination Indicator
12. Start the carrier engine and engage the main
pump. Allow the carrier engine to idle several min­ Figure 2-18
utes to ensure oil is being cycled properly. Check Filter Assembly
for any leaks.
13. Check the oil level in the hydraulic reservoir for
Note: Hydraulic components may not operate proper level. Add oil if necessary. Properly dis­
smoothly after an oil change. To alleviate this, pose of the used oil and cleaning solution.
oil additive Renolin Anti‐Stick‐Slip (LBCE part
No 3P 1139) can be added at approximately 2% Note: In case of hydraulic system component
of the quantity of oil. failure, a more thorough oil change procedure
is required. Contact a Link‐Belt Distributor for
this procedure.

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-41

Operator's Manual
Hydraulic Reservoir Filters Change
Change the elements in the hydraulic reservoir filters
after the initial 50 hours of operation and every 500
hours of operation thereafter. Change the filter ele­
ments immediately if the contamination indicator is in
the “Change” position after the oil has reached operat­
ing temperature.
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Engage
park brake, shift the transmission to neutral, and
shutdown the carrier engine.
2. Relieve any trapped hydraulic system pressure by
loosening the breather/filler, on the hydraulic reser­
voir, 1/4 turn until pressure is fully relieved. Refer to
Figure 2-17.
WARNING
All trapped hydraulic pressure must be
exhausted from the system before removing
any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil
could cause burns or other serious injury.
3. Clean the filter head assembly and adjacent areas
to prevent foreign material from entering the hy­
draulic system.
4. Remove the the filter housing from the filter head.
5. Remove used filter element and inspect it for con­
tamination. Any dirt or foreign particles on the filter
element may indicate excessive system contami­
nation or imminent system component failure.
Once the filter has been thoroughly inspected, dis­
pose of it properly..
6. Lubricate the gasket ring on the new element with
clean hydraulic oil. Install the new filter element on
filter head locator.
7. Install filter housing on filter head and torque to
25-30 ft lb (33.9-40.7Nm)
8. Check the hydraulic reservoir oil level. Add oil if
necessary. Refer to “Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level
Check” and “Adding Oil To The Hydraulic Reser­
voir” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
9. Tighten breather/filler.
10. Start the carrier engine and check the filter housing
for leaks.

2-42 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance

 Operator's Manual

1. Air Cleaner Access Cover

Figure 2-19
Carrier Engine Air Cleaner

Engine Air System Inspection Changing The Carrier Air Cleaner

It is recommended that the engine(s) air system be in­
spected every 250 hours or 6 months. Inspect the air
system pipes, hoses, air compressor, and turbochar­
ger systems, as equipped. (Always inspect all the
pipes and hoses associated with the air compressor,
turbocharger, air cleaner, and air intake.) Check for any
cracks, corrosion, loose clamps, wear points, leaks, or
punctures which can allow contaminants to enter the
system and damage air system components and/or
the engine(s). All hoses should be kept free of oil con­
taminants, both internally and externally. Disassemble
and clean as required. Tighten or replace parts as nec­
essary to ensure that the air system does not leak.
Filter
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, engage the park brake,
and shutdown the carrier engine.
2. Remove the access cover. Unlatch the air cleaner
cover mounting latches and remove cover from the
body.
3. Slide the air cleaner element out of the body and
wipe the inside of the body clean with a damp cloth.
4. Replace the air cleaner element as required.
5. Slide the new element into the air cleaner body and
install and latch the cover. Install the access cover.

Carrier Engine Air Cleaner

Variations in job site conditions prevent establishing a
set interval for air cleaner servicing. For this reason an
indicator light will illuminate on the crane control dis­
play to determine the condition of the air cleaner ele­
ment. Refer to Figure 1-88. Anytime the yellow indi­
cator light illuminates, service the air cleaner immedi­
ately. Service the engine air cleaner as follows.

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-43

Operator's Manual

2
1. Air Cleaner Body
2. End Cover
Figure 2-20
Upper Engine Air Cleaner

Upper Engine Air Cleaner Servicing The Upper Engine Air

Variations in job site conditions prevent establishing a
Cleaner Element
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift trans­
set interval for air cleaner servicing. For this reason an
mission to neutral, engage the park brake, and
indicator light will illuminate on the crane control dis­
shutdown the engine(s).
play to determine the condition of the air cleaner ele­
2. Remove the end cover from the air cleaner body.
ment. Refer to Figure 1-88. Anytime the yellow indi­
3. Remove element from air cleaner body.
cator light illuminates, service the air cleaner immedi­
ately. Clean or replace the air cleaner element as often 4. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner body clean using
a damp cloth.
as required. Replace the air cleaner element after it has
5. Slide the new element into the air cleaner body.
been cleaned six times or annually, whichever occurs
6. Install the end cover to the air cleaner body.
first.

2-44 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance

 Operator's Manual

2
1

1. Secondary Fuel Filter Rear of Upper

2. Fuel Filter/Water Separator

Figure 2-21
Upper Engine Fuel Filter/Water Separator

Upper Engine Fuel Filter 1

Two spin‐on type filters are used, a primary fuel filter/
water separator and a secondary fuel filter. (Refer to
Figure 2-21.) The function of the filters is to remove
water and contaminants from the fuel before they enter
the fuel system. Removal of water and contaminants is
important for troublefree operation and long life of the
fuel system. Water should be drained daily before 2
start‐up. Change the filters every 500 hours of opera­
tion. Use the following procedures along with
Figure 2-22.
Fuel Filter Water Drain
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, engage park
brake, shift transmission to neutral, and shutdown 3
the upper engine. 4

1. Fuel Heater 3. Water Drain Valve

CAUTION 2. Fuel Filter 4. Water In Fuel Sensor

The upper engine must be shutdown when Figure 2-22

draining water from the fuel filter to prevent Upper Engine Primary Fuel Filter/Water Separator
water from being drawn into the fuel system.

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-45

Operator's Manual
1 ECM to operate the fuel lift pump through a
1. Secondary Fuel Filter
Figure 2-23
Secondary Fuel Filter
2. Place a suitable container under the drain valve.
Turn the drain valve counterclockwise approxi­
mately 1 and 1/2 to 2 turns until draining occurs.
3. Continue draining until clean fuel is visible.
CAUTION
Do not over‐tighten the valve. Over‐tightening
the drain valve can damage the threads.
4. Close the water drain valve.
5. Properly dispose of contaminated fuel.
Fuel Filter/Water Separator Change
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, engage park
brake, shift transmission to neutral, and shutdown
the upper engine.
2. Turn the battery disconnect switches to the OFF
position.
3. Clean the area around the filter head.
4. Disconnect the wire harness from the fuel heater
and the fuel in water sensor.
5. Place a suitable container under the water drain
valve. Open the drain valve. Drain all fuel from fil­
ter.
6. Remove the filter from the filter head. Ensure the
seal ring does not stick to the filter head.
7. Lubricate a new seal ring with clean engine oil.
Install the new filter onto the filter head by hand.
CAUTION
To prevent fuel leaks, confirm that the filter is
installed tightly but do not over‐tighten.
Mechanical tightening will damage the filter.
2-46 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
8. Connect the wire harness to the fuel heater and the
fuel in water sensor.
9. Turn the battery disconnect switches to the ON po­
sition.
10. Prime the fuel system as follows:
a. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but
do not start the engine. This will cause the
priming cycle which will last at least 30
seconds.
b. When the lift pump completes its priming
cycle, turn the ignition switch to the OFF posi­
tion for 10 seconds.
c. Perform two or three more 30 second lift pump
cycles.
11. Start the engine and check for leaks. Slowly in­
crease engine speed to allow air to be purged from
the fuel system.
12. Properly dispose of contaminated fuel and filter.
Secondary Fuel Filter Change
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, engage park
brake, shift transmission to neutral, and shutdown
the upper engine.
2. Clean the area around the filter head.
3. Remove the filter from the head.
4. Fill a new filter with clean fuel and thoroughly lubri­
cate the o‐ring with clean engine oil.
5. Install new filter on filter head and tighten by hand.
CAUTION
To prevent fuel leaks, ensure the filter is
installed tightly but do not over‐tighten.
Mechanical tightening will damage the filter.
6. Prime the fuel system as follows:
a. Turn the ignition key switch to the ON position
but do not start the engine. This will cause the
ECM to operate the fuel lift pump through a
priming cycle which will last at least 30
seconds.
b. When the lift pump completes its priming
cycle, turn the key to the OFF position for 10
seconds.
c. Perform two or three more 30 second lift pump
cycles.
7. Start the engine and check for leaks. Slowly in­
crease engine speed to allow air to be purged from
the fuel system.
8. Properly dispose of contaminated fuel and filter.

1. Swing Unit Check/Fill Plug
2. Swing Park Brake Bleeder Plug
3. Swing Service Brake Bleeder Plug
4. Swing Unit Drain Plug
Figure 2-24
Swing Speed Reducers
Swing Speed Reducer
Lubrication
Check the oil level in the swing speed reducer after ev­
ery 50 hours of operation. The oil in a new or rebuilt
swing speed reducer should be changed after the ini­
tial 200 hours of operation. Thereafter, change the oil
with each 1,000 hours of operation or seasonally,
whichever occurs first.
Swing Speed Reducer Oil Level Check
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, engage the park brake,
and shutdown the carrier engine.
2. Engage the travel swing lock and shutdown the
upper engine. Refer to Figure 2-24.
3. Clean the speed reducer around the check/fill plug
to prevent contamination from entering the sys­
tem. Remove the check/fill plug.
4. Oil should be within 0.25 in (6mm) of the bottom of
the threads. Add oil as required to bring the oil to
the proper level. Refer to the Lubrication Chart for
the correct grade of oil.
5. Clean and install the check/fill plug.
Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
Operator's Manual
4
Swing Speed Reducer Oil Change
1. Park crane on a firm, level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers and
swing the upper for several minutes, to agitate and
warm the oil within the swing speed reducer.
3. Engage the travel swing lock, fully lower the boom,
and shutdown the engine(s).
4. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the swing
speed reducer around the check/fill and drain
plugs to prevent contamination from entering the
unit. Refer to Figure 2-24.
5. Remove the check/fill and drain plugs and allow
the oil to drain into a suitable container. The drain
plug is magnetic and should be inspected for large
quantities of metal particles. After the initial oil
change, this is a sign of damage or extreme wear
within the unit, and a complete internal inspection
may be necessary.
6. After the oil has thoroughly drained, clean and
install the drain plug.
7. Fill the unit with oil through the check/fill plug hole,
until the oil is within 0.25 in (6mm) of the bottom of
the threads. For the correct grade and quantity of
oil, refer to the Lubrication Chart.
8. Clean and install the check/fill plug. Properly dis­
pose of the used oil.
9. Repeat for the other swing speed reducer.
2-47
Operator's Manual
2
1. Dipstick
2. Breather
3. Drain Plug 3
Figure 2-25
Upper Hydraulic Pump Drive
Upper Hydraulic Pump
Drive Lubrication
For maximum operating efficiency and service life of
the pump drive, check oil level after every 10 hours of
operation and visually check for leaks. The oil, in a new
or rebuilt pump drive, should be changed after the ini­
tial 200 hours of operation. Thereafter, change oil with
each 2,000 hours of operation or annually, whichever
occurs first. At each oil change, check all seals and
thread joints for leaks and tighten as necessary. Refer
to the Lubrication Chart for the correct lubricant type.
Pump Drive Oil Level Check
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface and level the
crane on fully extended outriggers. Fully retract the
boom and raise the boom to maximum boom
angle. Shutdown the engine(s).
2. Locate the pump drive dipstick on the right side at
the rear of the upper engine. Refer to Figure 2-25.
3. Wipe the dipstick area clean. Rotate the dipstick
counterclockwise and remove the dipstick from
the filler tube.
4. Wipe all the oil from the dipstick and place it back
into the filler tube but do not rotate it in.
5. Remove again and read the oil level on the dipstick.
The oil level should be to the full mark on the dip­
stick.
2-48 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
1
6. Add oil as required through the dipstick filler tube.
Use only the oil type specified on the Lubrication
Chart. Do not overfill.
7. Once the proper oil level is obtained, install the dip­
stick in the filler tube and turn the dipstick clock­
wise until tight.
Pump Drive Oil Change
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface and level the
crane on fully extended outriggers. Fully retract the
boom and raise the boom to maximum boom
angle.
2. Run the engine for several minutes, without a load,
to agitate and warm the oil within the pump drive.
3. Engage the travel swing lock and shutdown the en­
gine(s). Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of
the pump drive around the dipstick and drain plug
to prevent contamination from entering the unit.
Refer to Figure 2-25.
4. Remove drain plug and allow the oil to drain in a
suitable container
5. After the oil has thoroughly drained, remove the
dipstick.
6. Clean and install the drain plug.
7. Fill the unit with oil until oil is to the full mark on the
dipstick. For the correct grade and quantity of oil,
refer to the Lubrication Chart.
8. Clean and install the dipstick. Properly dispose of
the used oil.

Upper Hydraulic Reservoir
The upper hydraulic reservoir is used to store hydraulic
oil needed to operate all upper hydraulic functions of
the crane. The hydraulic reservoir, as shown in
Figure 2-26, is equipped with a sight gauge for check­
ing the oil level.
A filter housing is mounted on the top of the reservoir with
a built‐in pressure gauge. When the pressure gauge
reads 25 psi (172kPa), the filter is being bypassed there­
fore change the filter when pressure gauge reads 20 psi
(138kPa) to prevent filter from being bypassed. Drain
any water from the hydraulic reservoir, check the oil level,
and inspect the contamination indicator daily. Operating
the crane with the oil level too low or with the filter element
being bypassed can lead to hydraulic component failure.
Refer to the following procedures when servicing the hy­
draulic reservoir.
Water Drain
Drain the water from the hydraulic reservoir daily before
start‐up. Contaminated oil will damage the systems
hydraulic components.
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, position the
transmission shifter to neutral, engage the park
brake, and shutdown the engine(s).
2. Relieve any trapped hydraulic system pressure by
loosening the filler breather cap, on the hydraulic
reservoir, 1/4 turn until pressure is fully relieved.
Refer to Figure 2-26.
WARNING
All trapped hydraulic pressure must be
exhausted from the system before removing
any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil
could cause burns or other serious injury.
3. Loosen the water drain plug and allow the water to
drain into a suitable container. The water drain
plug is slotted and need not be completely re­
moved to drain the water.
4. When a clean flow of hydraulic oil begins to drain
from the water drain plug, tighten the plug.
5. Tighten the filler breather cap.
6. Check the oil level in the hydraulic reservoir before
beginning operation of the crane. Add oil if neces­
sary. Properly dispose of the contaminated water.
Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level Check
1. Fully retract all hydraulic cylinders, park the crane
on a firm level surface, position the transmission
shifter to neutral, engage the park brake, and shut­
down the engine(s).
2. With the hydraulic oil cold (approximately 62F
17C), check its level through the sight gauge on
Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
Operator's Manual
the front of the hydraulic reservoir. Refer to
Figure 2-26. The proper level must be maintained
at all times. Add hydraulic oil as necessary to bring
the oil level between the “FULL” and “ADD” marks.
Use only Hi Performance Hydraulic Oil or an ap­
proved substitute. Do Not Overfill.
Adding Oil To The Hydraulic Reservoir
1. With all hydraulic cylinders fully retracted , park the
crane on a firm level surface. Engage the park brake,
shift the transmission to neutral, and shutdown the
engine(s).
2. Relieve any trapped hydraulic system pressure by
loosening the filler breather cap, on the hydraulic
reservoir, 1/4 turn until pressure is fully relieved.
Refer to Figure 2-26.
WARNING
All trapped hydraulic pressure must be
exhausted from the system before removing
any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil
could cause burns or other serious injury.
3. Clean the top of the hydraulic reservoir, the filter
housing, and filler breather cap to prevent foreign
material from entering the hydraulic system.
4. Remove the filler breather cap.
5. Add oil as required. Check the oil level.
6. Install the filler breather cap.
Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Change
The hydraulic reservoir oil should be changed every
2,000 or 4000 hours of operation depending on the
type of oil used or seasonally, whichever occurs first.
Change the hydraulic reservoir oil at the end of a work­
ing day when any foreign particles will be suspended in
the warm oil. If this is not possible, cycle the crane until
the oil is warm and proceed as follows:
1. Fully retract all hydraulic cylinders, park the crane
on a firm level surface, position the transmission
shifter to neutral, engage the park brake, and shut­
down the engine(s).
2. Relieve any trapped hydraulic system pressure by
loosening the filler breather cap, on the hydraulic
reservoir, 1/4 turn until pressure is fully relieved.
Refer to Figure 2-26.
WARNING
All trapped hydraulic pressure must be
exhausted from the system before removing
any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil
could cause burns or other serious injury.
2-49
Operator's Manual

Check level when oil is cold

(approx. 62°F) or (17°C) with
engine off, machine level, and
all cylinders fully retracted. Oil
level must be maintained
between “FULL” and “ADD”
marks at all times. Operation 1 3 2 5 4
of machine with oil level below
“ADD” will contribute to pump
failure. Do not overfill.

7 6 8 8
1. Filter Housing 4. Sight Gauge 7. Water Drain Plug
2. Pressure Gauge 5. 5 PSI Breather 8. Access Panels
3. Filler Breather Cap 6. System Drain Plug 9. Hydraulic Charge Flow Filter

Figure 2-26
Upper Hydraulic Reservoir

2-50 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance


3. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the hy­
draulic reservoir to prevent foreign materials from
entering the system, once the access panels and
filter housing are opened.
4. Remove the top cover and pump the hydraulic oil
into suitable containers. Refer to the Lubrication
Chart to determine the volume of oil to be removed.
Note: If a pump is not available to remove the oil
from the reservoir, place a suitable container
under the system drain plug. Open the plug and
drain one container full at a time, until the oil has
thoroughly drained from the reservoir. Do not
remove bottom access panel to drain reservoir.
WARNING
Do not remove the bottom access panel
before the hydraulic reservoir has completely
drained. A large volume of hot oil may
suddenly be released resulting in personal
injury and/or property damage. Drain the oil
from the hydraulic reservoir before removing
the bottom access panel.
5. Remove the access panels and the filter element.
Refer to Figure 2-27. Properly dispose of the filter
element.
6. Clean any old gasket material off the access pan­
els and hydraulic reservoir.
7. Remove and clean the oil diffuser in the bottom of
the filter housing. Refer to Figure 2-27.
8. Clean the interior of the hydraulic reservoir with
clean diesel fuel or kerosene.
9. Allow the cleaning solution to drain into a suitable
container until the hydraulic reservoir is thoroughly
drained. Inspect the interior of the hydraulic reser­
voir for foreign material and wipe clean.
10. Clean and install the system and water drain plugs.
11. Clean the filter housing. Install oil diffuser in the
bottom of filter housing. Install a new filter element.
12. Install the filter housing cover.
13. Install the access panels, using new gaskets.
14. Install the top cover. Remove filler breather cap.
15. Using clean, uncontaminated oil, fill the reservoir
through the filter breather screen with the desired
grade of hydraulic oil until it reaches the full mark
by the sight gauges.
16. Install the filler breather cap.
17. Start the upper engine. Allow the upper engine to
idle several minutes to ensure oil is being cycled
properly. Check for any leaks.
Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
Operator's Manual
Note: Hydraulic components may not operate
smoothly after an oil change. To alleviate this,
oil additive Renolin Anti‐Stick‐Slip (LBCE part
No 3P 1139) can be added at approximately 2%
of the quantity of oil.
18. Check the oil level in the hydraulic reservoir for
proper level. Add oil if necessary. Properly dis­
pose of the used oil and cleaning solution.
Note: In case of hydraulic system component
failure, a more thorough oil change procedure
is required. Contact a Link‐Belt Distributor for
this procedure.
Hydraulic Charge Flow Filter Change
Change the hydraulic charge flow filter element after
the initial 50 hours of operation and every 500 hours of
operation thereafter. Change the filter element immedi­
ately if the charge filter indicator light on the upper
crane control display illuminates.
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, position the
transmission shifter to neutral, engage the park
brake, and shutdown the engine(s).
2. Relieve any trapped hydraulic system pressure by
loosening the filler breather cap, on the hydraulic
reservoir, 1/4 turn until pressure is fully relieved.
Refer to Figure 2-26.
WARNING
All trapped hydraulic pressure must be
exhausted from the system before removing
any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil
could cause burns or other serious injury.
3. Remove the filter element and inspect it for con­
tamination. Refer to Figure 2-26. Any dirt or for­
eign particles on the filter element may indicate ex­
cessive system contamination or imminent system
component failure. Once the filter has been thor­
oughly inspected, dispose of it properly.
4. Install new filter element.
5. Tighten the filler breather cap.
6. Start the upper engine and check the filter housing
for leaks.
7. Check the hydraulic reservoir oil level. Add oil if
necessary. Refer to “Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level
Check” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
2-51
Operator's Manual
1. Pressure Gauge
2. Filter Element
3. Diffuser
Figure 2-27
Hydraulic Reservoir Filter
Hydraulic Reservoir Filter Change
Change the hydraulic reservoir filter element after the
initial 50 hours of operation and every 500 hours of op­
eration thereafter. Change the filter element immedi­
ately if the pressure gauge reads 20 psi (138kPa).
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, position the
transmission shifter to neutral, engage the park
brake, and shutdown the engine(s).
2. Relieve any trapped hydraulic system pressure by
loosening the filler breather cap, on the hydraulic
reservoir, 1/4 turn until pressure is fully relieved.
Refer to Figure 2-26.
WARNING
All trapped hydraulic pressure must be
exhausted from the system before removing
any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil
could cause burns or other serious injury.
2-52 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
3. Clean the top of the hydraulic reservoir, the filter
housing, and filter housing cover to prevent foreign
material from entering the hydraulic system.
4. Remove the filter housing cover.
5. Remove the filter element and inspect it for con­
tamination. Any dirt or foreign particles on the filter
element may indicate excessive system contami­
nation or imminent system component failure.
Once the filter has been thoroughly inspected, dis­
pose of it properly.
6. Install a new filter element. Install filter housing
cover.
7. Tighten the filler breather cap.
8. Start the upper engine and check the filter housing
for leaks.
9. Check the hydraulic reservoir oil level. Add oil if
necessary. Refer to “Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level
Check” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

5
5
1. Fill Alignment Hole
2. Fill/Drain Plug
3. Vent Plug
4. Sight Gauge
5. Drain Position

Figure 2-28
Winch Drum Lubrication

2. Cycle the winch for several minutes, without a load

Winch Drum Lubrication
For maximum operating efficiency and service life of
the winch drum, check the oil level after every 50 hours
of operation. The oil, in a new or rebuilt winch drum,
should be changed after the initial 100 hours of opera­
tion. Thereafter, change the oil with each 1,000 hours
of operation or seasonally, whichever occurs first. It is
also recommended that every 2,000 hours of opera­
tion, the winch should be disassembled and thor­
oughly inspected for damaged or worn parts. Replace
damaged or worn parts as required.
Winch Drum Oil Level Check
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, position the
transmission shifter to neutral, engage the park
brake, and shutdown the engine(s).
2. Observe the oil level within the sight gauge. Oil
should be visible within the sight gauge. Refer to
Figure 2-28.
Winch Drum Oil Change
1. Park the crane of a firm, level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
to agitate and warm the oil within the winch drum.
3. Rotate winch drum until the fill/drain plug is aligned
with the fill alignment hole in the side support. Re­
fer to Figure 2-28.
4. Engage the travel swing lock and shutdown the
upper engine.
5. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the winch
around the vent and fill/drain plugs to prevent con­
tamination from entering the unit.
6. Remove the fill/drain and vent plugs.
7. Position a suitable container under the winch
drum.
8. Start the upper engine. Rotate the drum until the fill/
drain port is in the drain position. Shutdown the upper
engine. Allow the oil to drain into a suitable container.
9. After the oil has thoroughly drained, start the upper
engine and rotate the drum until the fill/drain port is
aligned with the fill alignment hole in the side sup­
port. Shutdown the upper engine.
10. Fill the unit with oil through the fill/drain port, until oil is
visible within the sight gauge. For the correct grade
and quantity of oil, refer to the Lubrication Chart.
11. Clean and install the vent and fill/drain plugs. Prop­
erly dispose of the used oil.
12. Repeat procedures for the other drum, if equipped.

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-53

Operator's Manual
1. Boom Cable Reel
2. Boom Hose Reel
Figure 2-29
Boom Assembly
Boom Inspection And
Lubrication
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
Before putting hands or tools inside a boom
section, confirm that the upper engine is
shutdown and operator has properly vacated
the cab. Movement of the boom could cause
serious injury.
Do not use a crane that has a damaged boom.
The structural integrity of the boom is lost and
could collapse with any load. Use the crane
only after the boom has passed a thorough
inspection. Contact a Link‐Belt Distributor for
the proper inspection procedures.
To prevent movement of the individual boom sections,
shutdown the upper engine and ensure that the operator
has vacated the operator's cab before putting your
hands or tools inside the boom. Unexpected movement
of the boom section could sever fingers, hands, arms,
etc.
2-54 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
The boom wear shoes are equipped with Teflon inserts
that self‐lubricate the boom. Therefore, the boom sliding
surfaces require no lubrication. However, visually inspect
all boom sections daily for damaged or cracked mem­
bers or welds. If any dents, bends, cracked welds, etc.
are found, do not use the crane. Contact a Link‐Belt Dis­
tributor for repair procedures. Also check for damaged or
leaking hoses, fittings, valves, cylinders, etc. Repair as
necessary. At 250 hour intervals, check all boom wear
shoes for wear and adjust or replace as required. See
“Boom Wear Shoe Adjustment” in Section 3 of this Oper­
ator's Manual for further details. Inspect for wear on the
wire rope deflector bar at the top front of each boom sec­
tion except the T6 (tip) section. Reverse or replace the
deflector bars as required.
Lubricate the head machinery sheaves, and auxiliary
head sheaves if equipped, every 50 hours of operation.
Boom Hose And Cable Reel
Inspection
Inspect the hose and cable reels and associated parts
weekly. Boom up to maximum boom angle and fully
extend the T6 (tip) section. Inspect all hydraulic hose
assemblies per “Hydraulic Hose Assembly Inspection”
in this Section of this Operator's Manual. Inspect the
reels for leaks, loose fittings, or hardware. Observe
clearances around reels to ensure that nothing drags
on the reel or hoses that would prevent proper opera­
tion of the reels.

Fly Inspection And
Lubrication
Inspect all parts of the fly daily. Pay particular attention
to the chords and lattice. If any dents, bends, cracked
welds, etc. are found, do not use the fly. Contact a
Link‐Belt Distributor for repair procedures.
Lubricate the fly head sheaves and deflector sheave(s)
every 50 hours of operation.
WARNING
Do not use a fly which has been damaged.
The structural integrity of the fly is lost and the
attachment could collapse with any load. Use
the fly only after it has passed a thorough
inspection.
Wire Rope Lubrication
Wire rope is like a machine. Each time a wire rope
bends over a sheave or straightens from a slack posi­
tion many wires move against each other. Lubrication
is necessary to help prevent wear caused by this move­
ment. Lubrication also helps prevent deterioration of
wire rope due to rust and corrosion.
WARNING
Rusty wire rope is dangerous since there is no
way to determine its remaining strength.
Operator's Manual
Application Of Wire Rope Lubricant
Wire ropes that have been in service should be cleaned
before lubricating them. Use a wire brush and com­
pressed air to clean the rope. All possible foreign mate­
rial and old lubricant should be removed from the wire
rope before lubricating it. Use one of the following
methods to apply the lubricant.
1. Continuous Bath
Run the wire rope through a container filled with lu­
bricant. A sheave mounted in the center of the con­
tainer will hold the wire rope submerged as it
passes through the container. Use swabbing to re­
move excess lubricant as the wire rope leaves the
container.
2. Dripping
Place a container above a sheave so a spigot can
be opened to drip oil on the wire rope as it passes
through the sheave groove.
3. Swabbing And Painting
Two fast methods are swabbing the lubricant on
with rags or painting it on with a brush.
4. Spraying
Light lubricants may be applied with a spray gun.
Aerosol cans of lubricant are also available.

Most wire ropes are lubricated during manufacture, but

the lubricant does not last the life of the rope. The lubri­
cant is squeezed out of the wire rope as it runs over
sheaves under tension, or washed off by rain.
For the above reasons, wire rope MUST BE periodically
lubricated. Crude or used oils and grease should not
be used as lubricants because they may be grit or acid
laden. Either of these conditions can cause damage to
the wire rope.
No set rule can be given for lubrication frequency. This
will depend on the type of conditions under which the
wire rope is used. A wire rope used in wet conditions
would need to be lubricated more often than one used
in dry conditions, to prevent rust and corrosion.
Lubricants used for wire rope lubrication should have
the following properties:
1. They must have enough adhesive strength to stay
on the rope.
2. They must be able to penetrate between the wires
and strands.
3. They must have high film strength.
4. They must resist oxidation.
5. They must remain soft and pliable.

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-55

Operator's Manual
Hook Block, Hook Ball, And Swivel Inspection And Maintenance
1. All nuts, setscrews, pins, bolts, and retainers
should be checked for tightness every 14 to 30
days, depending on the operating conditions and
the product involved.
2. Inspect the components carefully at least once a
month.
Swivels: Check for excessive gap distance be­
tween the rotating parts. Check threaded parts
that are installed together to see that they are se­
cure and tight. Check all setscrews to see that they
are tight and staked.
Hook Blocks: Check all pins and bolts for tight­
ness, spreading of side plates, weld cracks,
sheave wear, bearing wear, spreading of hook, and
that setscrews are tight and staked. Check that
hook latch is operative.
Hook Balls: Check pin, nut, and washer to ensure
hook ball halves are held securely together. Check
Item
Swivels, Swivel Overhaul Hook Balls, Swivel Hook Balls
Hook Blocks with Bronze Bushed Sheaves
Hook Blocks with Roller Bearing Sheaves
Chart A - Hook Block, Hook Ball, & Swivel Lubrication Frequency
locating pin for excessive wear. Inspect swivel
parts as specified previously. Check that hook
latch is operative.
3. If a swivel is constantly overloaded, it will cause
damage to the unit. The first sign of damage is
often bearing brinelling (dimpling of the bearing
races). This condition is determined by spinning
the swivel by hand. If the motion is rough or has a
ratchet‐like effect, the bearing has been damaged
and should be replaced.
4. The distance between the swivel barrel and shank
or rotating members are pre‐set with a factory
clearance of 0.020-0.050 in (0.5-1.2mm). If this
distance increases more than 0.060 in (1.5mm)
over the above distance, it is a good indication of
bearing fatigue and the unit should be removed
from service.
Under Intermittent Under Continuous
Operating Conditions Operating Conditions
14 days 24 hours
14 days 8 hours
14 days 24 hours

Item Frequency What to Check For Appropriate Action

14 days under continuous operation
Swivels
30 days under intermittent operation
14 days under continuous operation
Sheaves
30 days under intermittent operation
Hook Latch When Used
Hooks Daily or When Used
Chart B - Hook Block, Hook Ball, & Swivel Inspection Frequency
End play or gap of more than 0.06
in (1.5mm) along the axis.
Rough turning.
Elongated eye holes, bent clevis Indicates overload. Remove for re­
pins. pairs.
Misalignment, as evidenced by
wobble or uneven groove flange
wear.
Striations or corrugations in sheave
groove.
Missing, off center, bent, broken
spring, or defective.
Permanent deformation or
stretching.
Crack or other defects.
Remove from service immediately.
Defective bearing. Remove from
service immediately.
Indicates major bearing wear. Re­
move from service.
Check for wear in bronze spacers
where used.
Result of wire rope wear. If major,
replace.
Replace immediately
An indication of overload. If major,
replace.
Any suspicion of fractures calls for
an immediate investigation and, if
necessary, replacement of part.
Hooks should be tested at least
once a year by magnafluxing, x‐ray,
or other qualified method. Intermit­
tent tests can be conducted by a
less accurate oil stain method.

2-56 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance


Turntable Bearing
Capscrew Torque
Maintaining the proper torque on turntable bearing
mounting capscrews is critical. If the bearing has been
replaced, the crane undecked, or a turntable bearing
capscrew is removed for any reason, the capscrew(s)
must be replaced. Reuse of turntable bearing
mounting capscrews is not allowed.
CAUTION
All turntable bearing capscrews use Loctite®
571 Pipe Sealant, or equivalent, with excep­
tion given to capscrews coated with Xylan®.
The sealant or coating is used to protect the
threads of the capscrews from rust and corro­
sion. Unprotected capscrews will not main­
tain the proper torque. Always use sealant or
coating when installing turntable bearing
capscrews.
Operator's Manual
Turntable Bearing Capscrew Inspection
Schedule
Capscrews should be inspected and/or torqued after
the initial 250 hours of operation of any new crane or if
the crane has been undecked for any reason.
Inspect and/or torque capscrews per the “Turntable
Bearing Capscrew Torque Inspection Schedule”,
thereafter.
Use the minimal applicable torque 2,120 ft lb (2
875Nm) when checking the turntable bearing
mounting capscrews. When checking the torque it
is acceptable for the capscrew to turn as long as the
applicable torque is achieved.. If the applicable
torque cannot be achieved, the capscrew must be
replaced. Torque newly installed capscrews to the
midpoint of the torque range: 2,120-2,335 ft lb (2
875-3 166Nm).

Turntable Bearing Capscrew Torque Inspection Schedule

Schedule Interval Requirements
 Perform an initial torque of the capscrews after the first 250 hours of operation of a new
crane, or if the crane has been undecked for any reason, to establish capscrew torque
baseline.
Note: Use the minimum applicable torque value when checking.
 After the next 500 hours of operation, if any of the capscrew torques have degraded,
tighten capscrews to the proper torque.
A 500 Hrs Note: Use the minimum applicable torque value when checking.
 If the crane is utilized for duty cycle work, Schedule A must be continuously maintained
during duty cycle applications.
 Inspection Schedule A must be maintained until such a time that no capscrews require
tightening after 500 hours of operation. Schedule B can then be followed.
 The minimum applicable torque value is acceptable for the turntable bearing capscrew
torque inspection.
 If the capscrew torque has degraded at any annual check, Torque Inspection Schedule
A must be followed until such time that no loss of capscrew torque is observed.
B Annually
 The minimum applicable torque value is acceptable for the turntable bearing capscrew
torque inspection.

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance 2-57

Operator's Manual
Crane Monitoring System
Maintenance of the Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL) Sys­
tem consists of the following daily inspection prior to
the first operation:
1. Check that the system is operating normally as de­
scribed in Section 1 of this Operator's Manual.
2. Check the electrical cables connecting the various
parts of the system.
3. Check insulation on the boom reeling drum cable.
4. Check boom reeling drum cable for proper tension.
5. Check all anti‐two block switches for freedom of
movement.
6. Check that the anti‐two block weights are installed
and working properly with the anti‐two block
switches.
7. Inspect the pressure transducers mounted on the
upper frame behind the cab and in front of the radi­
ator and the connecting hoses for oil leaks.
8. Test that the function limiters activate properly by
two blocking the crane. (Do this by manually lifting
the ATB weight.) The functions of boom down,
boom extend, and winch up should be disabled.
9. Check for erratic readings on the boom angle, the
boom length, and the operating radius displays.
Check the boom angle, boom length, and the op­
erating radius for accuracy every 30 days.
10. If a known test weight is available, check that the
displayed weight agrees with the test load. The
displayed load includes the hook block and/or
hook ball and any lifting equipment such as slings,
pins, shackles, etc.
Note: Displayed load on hook is most accurate
when near the crane's rated capacity.
11. If crane capacities are rated for specific areas e.g.
side, front, rear, check the system by swinging the
boom into the permitted areas and checking that
the rated capacity reading agrees with the crane
capacities as listed in the Crane Rating Manual.
Hydraulic Hose Assembly
Inspection
The frequency of inspection and replacement of hose
assemblies should be determined by the operating en­
vironment, the potential risk from a hose failure, and
past experience of hose failures in the application and
environment.
WARNING
Always wear safety glasses when working
with or inspecting pressurized hose
assemblies. Do not search for leaks by
running your hand or finger along a hydraulic
hose. Hot hydraulic oil, under high pressure
leaking through a small pinhole in a hose, can
puncture gloves, your skin, and penetrate
several inches (centimeters) into soft body
tissue causing serious personal injury.
A daily visual inspection is recommended for all hose
assemblies in service.
1. Check all hose end fittings for cracks, crushing,
corrosion, slippage on the hose, leakage, or any
other damage.
2. Check all hoses for cracks, exposed reinforce­
ment, chafing, bulging, loose covers, or any other
damage.
3. Check the installation of all hose assemblies for
any kinked, crushed, flattened, or twisted hoses.
Replace any damaged hose assemblies, hose end
mating fittings, and seals as required.

WARNING
Any unusual or erratic system operation must
be investigated and corrected immediately. If
any problem is found with any of the above
inspection steps, the problem must be
corrected/repaired as soon as possible. If
necessary to continue crane operations, refer
to “System Inoperative Or Malfunctioning” in
Section 1 of this Operator's Manual.

2-58 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance


Paint Maintenance
Knowledgeable equipment owners realize the value of
periodic preventative maintenance and responsible
care. A regular surface care program should be fol­
lowed to protect the equipment's paint finish and main­
tain a like‐new appearance. There is no one correct/ul­
timate procedure since the uniqueness of every
crane's operating environment and owner/operator
maintenance habits differ. However, it is important to
remove surface contaminants before they have time to
bond or etch into the paint finish.
The crane has non‐skid materials installed in certain
areas to assist operators and service personnel with
safe access/egress to/from the crane. Do not paint or
wax non‐skid materials. Paint or wax will cause the
non‐skid materials to become slick, reducing their ef­
fectiveness for safety while walking on the crane. If any
non‐skid materials become ineffective due to wear,
age, or destroyed in any way, they must be replaced.
WARNING
Do not apply paint or wax over non‐skid materi­
als. Keep all non‐skid materials clean and free
of all contaminants. All walking surfaces on the
crane should be cleaned to eliminate any con­
taminants. Paint, wax, or other contaminants
will reduce the effectiveness of the materials.
Ineffective materials can create unsafe access/
egress to/from the crane leading to serious per­
sonal injury. Mask off and/or cover non‐skid
materials prior to painting or waxing areas
around any non‐skid material(s). Contact a
Link‐Belt Distributor for information regarding
the replacement or repair of any non‐skid mate­
rial(s).
Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance
Operator's Manual
Regular Preventative Maintenance
1. Regular washing is the best way to remove surface
contaminants.
2. Always use mild cleaners and soaps, and rinse
thoroughly after washing. Do not use harsh deter­
gents, such as household laundry detergents, or
cleaners that contain phosphates, as they will
“burn” the paint, strip off protective coating, dimin­
ish the gloss and accelerate the contamination
process.
3. Periodic waxing will enhance the luster and protect
the paint surface.
If environmental damage to the paint finish is detected
(loss of some of its luster due to lack of or inability to
maintain as recommended) the paint finish can be re­
stored to near‐new appearance by following a simple
polishing and waxing procedure.
Polishing And Waxing Procedure
1. Clean surface thoroughly by hand washing or
power washing with a mild detergent. Rinse thor­
oughly with water before buffing.
2. Apply a polishing compound, such as Meguiar's
M8432, or equivalent, to a surface area approxi­
mately two feet by two feet (0.6m by 0.6m) at a time.
Ensure the cleaner is applied liberally to entire area
and work on only that area with the buffing wheel.
3. Buff surface with an electric or air buffer at 1,000 rpm
using a 3M Superbuff polishing pad, or equivalent,
with light to medium pressure until a uniform high
gloss is obtained. Hand wipe with a clean cloth.
4. After surface has been buffed, apply a quality auto­
motive wax such a Meguiar's M-26 Hi-Tech Yel­
low Wax, or equivalent, and hand buff until the
cloth moves freely. The original luster of coating
should be restored.
Cab Dash Cleaning
Care should be taken when cleaning the cab dash, es­
pecially the new polycarbonate dashes. If the incorrect
cleaning agent is used, the finish of the material could
be destroyed. It is recommended by the dash
manufacturer that only the following materials be used
for cleaning:
1. Soap and water
2. Denatured alcohol
3. Joy and Palmolive dishwashing liquids
4. Windex with Ammonia D
5. Formula 409, Fantastik, Mr. Clean
2-59
Operator's Manual

2-60 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance

 Operator's Manual
Table Of Contents
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Tire Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Tire And Rim Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Tire And Rim Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Tire And Rim Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Tire And Rim Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Front Wheel Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Rear Wheel Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Carrier Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Caging Dual Air Brake Chambers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Releasing A Caged Dual Air Brake Chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rear Brake Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Front Brake Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Outrigger Beam Bearing Pad Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Swing Brake Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Travel Swing Lock Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

360° Swing Lock System Inspection And Adjustment (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Bubble Level Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Crane Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Boom Wear Shoe Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Hydraulic System Relief Valve Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Preparing The Crane For Checking Relief Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Relief Valve Pressure Checking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Outrigger Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Bumper Outrigger Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Front Steering Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Rear Steering Axle Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Oil Cooler Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Control Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Winch Charge Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Pilot Pressure Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Swing Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments i

Operator's Manual
Tank Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Counterweight Cylinder Extend Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Counterweight Lock Cylinder Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Boom Hoist/Telescope Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Boom Pinning Cylinder Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Winch Circuit Checking Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Winch Load Holding Valve Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Front & Rear Winch Hot Oil Shuttle Purge Relief Valve Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Winch Supplemental Flow Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Accumulator Check/Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

First Layer/Third Wrap Calibration (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

ii Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments


Wrong
Figure 3-1
Tire Inflation Warning
Tire Inspection
Inspect the tire treads daily and remove any debris that
may be wedged in the tire grooves. Check for nails,
screws, glass, or anything that may penetrate the tire and
permit air to leak from the tires. Check the side walls and
treads for cuts, bulges, and other damage. If internal
damage to any tire is suspected, have it demounted and
checked. Make all necessary repairs or replace as re­
quired.
Replace any tire that shows any wear indicator. Because
tires may wear unevenly, it may be necessary to replace
them before the wear indicator appears across the entire
tread. When replacing tires, all tires should be of the
same manufacturer, size, type, load rating, and construc­
tion. Do not mix bias‐belted and radial tires. Refer to the
tire manufacturer and follow all recommendations re­
garding tire inspection and replacement.
Tire Inflation
Check the tire inflation pressures daily when the tires are
cold. The tire inflation pressures are listed on the Gross
Axle Weight Rating plate and in the Crane Rating Manual.
Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments
Operator's Manual
Right
All tires of the same weight and size are interchange­
able. Inspect the wheel rims, nuts, studs, etc., on a
weekly basis. If any damage is apparent, repair or re­
place before operating the crane.
A rim cage should be used when deflating or inflating
tires to protect against personal injury. Refer to
Figure 3-1.
DANGER
A damaged or improperly assembled tire and
rim assembly may explode while inflating or
deflating tires. Serious personal injury may
result if tire and rim assembly explodes.
Always use a rim cage and stand clear of the
tire while inflating or deflating it.
DANGER
Servicing the tire and rim assemblies can be
extremely dangerous. For your protection,
read and understand all safety instructions
before removing or installing a tire and rim
assembly.
3-1
Operator's Manual
Figure 3-2
Lug Nut Torquing Sequence
Tire And Rim Safety
Instructions
1. Always remove the valve cores, and exhaust all air
pressure from the tire, prior to removing any rim or
wheel components.
2. Use a rim cage and stand clear when deflating and
inflating tires. A damaged rim may burst. The op­
erator should stand well away from the potentially
explosive force. Refer to Figure 3-1.
3. After deflating the tire, check the valve stem by run­
ning a piece of wire through the stem, to ensure it is
not clogged and the tire is completely deflated. Ice
may form as the air leaves the tire, or foreign mate­
rial may clog the stem.
4. Do not inflate a tire that has been run flat or ex­
tremely under inflated. Demount the tire and in­
spect it and the rim and wheel assembly for dam­
age. These components may have been dam­
aged or dislocated during the time the tire was un­
der inflated.
5. Exercise caution when removing the lug nuts.
6. When assembling the tire and rim assembly, use
only parts of the same type, manufacturer and cor­
rect size. Mismatched parts may appear to fit but
when the tire is inflated they may fly apart with ex­
plosive force.
3-2 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments
7. Always double check to ensure rim components
are properly installed before inflating the tire. Im­
properly assembled parts could fly off during infla­
tion.
8. Clean and inspect all parts prior to assembly. Do
not use bent, worn, damaged, or rusted parts.
9. When inflating a tire, use an air hose with a clip‐on
chuck and in‐line pressure gauge. Ensure the air
hose is long enough, to permit the person inflating
the tire, to stand clear of the rim cage.
10. Inflate the tire to 10 psi (68kPa), and check the rim
components for proper fit, before completely inflat­
ing. If the assembly is not correct, completely de­
flate the tire and correct the problem. Do not ham­
mer on an inflated tire and rim assembly. Properly
matched and assembled rim components will seat
without tapping.
11. Always check rims and wheels for damage during
normal tire inspection. Early detection of potential
component failure may prevent serious injury.
12. Do not attempt to rework, weld, heat, or braze any
damaged rim components. Heating may weaken
the part and result in complete failure of the com­
ponent and possible injury.
Tire And Rim Removal And
Installation
Carefully read and understand the safety instructions
in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
Tire And Rim Removal
1. Properly park the crane, shift the transmission to
neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Loosen each of the lug nuts to be removed by one
half turn. Refer to Figure 3-4.
3. Level the crane on outriggers and shutdown the
engine.
4. Adequately support the tire and rim assembly with
an appropriate lifting device.
5. Loosen the lug nuts until the outer surface of each
lug nut is flush with the end of the studs. Do not
completely remove the lug nuts.
6. Unseat the rim.
7. Remove the lug nuts from the studs.
8. Carefully remove the tire and rim assembly from
the wheel.
 Operator's Manual

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
1

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
2
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
2
1 4

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ Ï
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ Ï
3

1. Tire Inflation Service Port 2. Front Outrigger Ï

Figure 3-3 1. Tire And Rim 3. Hub
Tire Inflation Service Port 2. Brake Disc 4. Lug Nut

Tire And Rim Installation
The correct installation and tightening of the tire and
rim assembly is one of the most important operations in
wheel maintenance. When tire, rim, or wheel problems
occur, incorrect installation and tightening procedures
are usually found to be the cause of the problem. The
following procedures must be carefully followed to en­
sure safe and dependable service.
1. Using a wire brush, thoroughly clean the mounting
surfaces of the wheel and tire and rim assembly.
Surfaces should be free of rust, dirt, and excess
paint. Refer to Figure 3-4.
2. Slide the tire and rim assembly over the wheel, and
push it into position against the tapered mounting
surfaces of the wheel.
3. Install the lug nuts on each stud and hand tighten
them.
4. Tighten the lug nuts, one turn at a time, following
the criss‐cross sequence shown in Figure 3-2. Al­
ways rotate the lug nut to be tightened to the top
position. This will ensure even tightening and
proper alignment of the tire and rim assembly.
Tighten the lug nuts in this manner until all lug nuts
are torqued to 450-500 ft lb (610-678Nm).
CAUTION
Improper torque can cause damage to
components, rim slippage, or alignment
problems. Tighten the lug nuts to the
specified torque only.
Figure 3-4
Tire And Rim Assembly
5. Check the tire and rim assembly to ensure the tire
is properly inflated. Correct tire pressures are
listed in the Crane Rating Manual.
Note: The air system of the crane is equipped
with a tire inflation service port which may be
used to supply air pressure to inflate tires.
The ports are mounted on either side of the
carrier on the front lower portion of the front
outrigger boxes and are capable of supplying
130 psi (896kPa) of air pressure. Refer to
Figure 3-3.
6. Start the engine, fully retract the outrigger jacks
and beams, and drive the crane approximately 1
mile (1.6 km). Tighten the lug nuts again using the
proper torquing sequence (Figure 3-2) and recom­
mended torque value (Step 4).
Note: Lug nut torque values should be checked
every 10 hours, for the first 50 hours of opera­
tion, after any tire and rim assembly is installed.
Tighten any lug nuts, as required, to the recom­
mended torque value. Check the lug nut torque
every 50 hours of operation thereafter.

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-3

Operator's Manual
1 1
3 2
2
1. Tire
2. Stationary Object
3. Axle
Figure 3-5
Single Tire And Rim Alignment
Front Wheel Alignment
The wheel alignment should be checked seasonally.
The best way to determine proper alignment is by eval­
uating tire wear. If the tires are wearing correctly, the
alignment should be correct. If the tires are not wearing
correctly, the following procedure can be used to give
an approximately correct alignment. Professional laser
type alignment equipment should be used to achieve
the best accuracy. If assistance is needed in finding
service facilities capable of doing this alignment, con­
tact a Link‐Belt Distributor.
1. Park crane on a firm, level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Raise the crane on outriggers to get the tires off the
ground. Release the park brake.
3. Scribe a line on the approximate center of each tire
by bringing a pointed, stationary object into con­
tact with the tread while rotating the wheel. Refer to
Figure 3-6. The line must begin and end at the
same point on the tread.
4. Apply park brake and retract outriggers to allow
the entire weight of the crane to rest on the tires.
5. Turn the wheels to align the left wheel parallel with
the carrier frame. This can be done by equalizing
the distances at “A”, Figure 3-6.
DANGER
Use extreme caution when operating the
steering with someone under the carrier. The
hydraulic force behind the steering
components is capable of seriously injuring
anyone caught in the steering linkage or
trapped behind a tire. Post a signal person to
watch carefully to ensure the safety of the
person under the carrier.
3-4 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments
A B
2
C
A
3
4
1. Tire 3. Carrier Frame
2. Scribed Lines 4. Tie Rod
Figure 3-6
Front Wheel Alignment
6. Shutdown the carrier engine. Confirm that dis­
tance “A” has not changed after carrier engine was
shutdown.
7. Measure the distances from the scribed line of one
tire to the scribed line of the other, at the front and
rear of the tire, “B” and “C”, Figure 3-6.
Note: Measurement must be made with the
weight of the crane on the tires.
8. Proper toe‐in requires the distance at the rear “C”
be 0.06-0.25 in (1.5-6.4mm) greater than at the
front “B”.
9. If adjustment is required, loosen the clamps on
each end of the tie rod and adjust the length of the
tie rod to obtain the proper “B” and “C” dimen­
sions. Tighten the clamps.
10. Roll the crane forward at least 50 ft (15m) and re­
peat Steps 2 through 9 to check the adjustment.
11. Repeat Steps 2 through 10 for the second axle.
The toe‐in is now properly adjusted on both axles.
12. With the distances at “A” equal on the first axle,
check the the distances at “A” on the second axle.
If the distances at “A” are equal proceed with Step
13. If the distances at “A” are not equal proceed
with the following:
a. Loosen the clamps on each end of the right
drag link on the second axle. Refer to
Figure 3-7.
b. Adjust the length of the drag link to equalize
the distances at “A”. Tighten the clamps.
13. Turn the wheels full left and full right and check all
clearances of the wheels, linkages, and other
crane components.
14. Adjust the axle stop bolts on the steering knuckle
as required to prevent any interference between
the wheels, linkages, and other crane compo­
nents.

5
1. Left Relief Plunger - Max 3. Right Relief Plunger - Max
Left Turn Angle Right Turn Angle
2. Front Steering Gear 4. Rear Steering Gear
Figure 3-7
Steering Linkage
15. With the entire weight of the crane on the tires, turn
the wheels full left and then full right and check that
the steering gears go over relief just before the
wheels contact the axle stop bolts.
Note: The steering gear will make a hissing
sound when it is going over relief.
16. If steering gears go over relief just before the
wheels contact the axle stop bolts, go to Step 17. If
the steering gears do not go over relief just before
the wheels contact the axle stop bolts, proceed
with the following:
WARNING
Do not loosen the relief plungers beyond
flush with the end cap. The relief plunger
could eject from the end cap causing a
sudden release of hot oil which could cause
burns or other serious injury.
a. Turn the wheels full right. On the right side of
the crane adjust the right relief plunger on the
front steering gear until the steering gears go
over relief just before the wheels contact the
axle stop bolts. Refer to Figure 3-7.
Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments
Operator's Manual
3 2 1 7 8
6
5. Right Rear Drag Link 7. Steering Drive Shaft
6. Right Front Drag Link 8. Miter Box
Note: Turn relief plunger clockwise to re­
duce maximum turn angle, turn counter­
clockwise to increase angle.
b. Turn the wheels full left. On the right side of the
crane adjust the left relief plunger on the front
steering gear until the steering gears go over
relief just before the wheels contact the axle
stop bolts.
17. Check that the steering wheel is centered when the
wheels are positioned straight ahead. If the steer­
ing wheel is centered when the wheels are posi­
tioned straight ahead, go to Step 18. If the steering
wheel is not centered when the wheels are posi­
tioned straight ahead, proceed with the following:
a. Position the wheels so they are straight ahead.
b. Loosen the steering drive shaft capscrew, and
disconnect the steering drive shaft from the mi­
ter box and center the steering wheel.
c. Reassemble the steering drive shaft and
torque the drive shaft capscrew.
18. Test all steering functions before placing the crane
in service.
3-5
Operator's Manual
Rear Wheel Alignment
The wheel alignment should be checked seasonally.
The best way to determine proper alignment is by eval­
uating tire wear. If the tires are wearing correctly, the
alignment should be correct. If the tires are not wearing
correctly, follow the procedure in the crane's Shop
Manual to give an approximately correct alignment.
3-6 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments
Professional laser type equipment should be used to
achieve the best alignment. If assistance is needed in
finding service facilities capable of doing this align­
ment, contact a Link‐Belt Distributor.
After completing the mechanical adjustments of the
rear axle steering linkage, the electronic elements of
the system will need calibration. Refer to crane's Shop
Manual for the calibration procedure.

1 Rotate Out
2
3
4*
Note: * Do not remove until power spring is caged.
1. Park Brake Chamber 4. Capscrews*
2. Power Spring 5. Service Brake Chamber
3. Caging Bolt
Figure 3-8
Air Brake Chamber - Power Spring Free
Carrier Brakes
DANGER
Removal of the capscrews holding the dual air
brake chambers together, before caging the
power spring, will result in the chamber and its
internal parts being rapidly and forcefully
ejected. This may result in serious personal
injury. Always cage the power spring before
attempting any brake or air chamber
adjustment or repair. If any doubt exists as to
whether a potential safety hazard exists,
contact your Link‐Belt Distributor before
repairs are attempted.
Caging Dual Air Brake Chambers
A dual air brake chamber is a brake system component
that uses two internal air chambers to control the func­
tions of the service and park brakes. This particular
crane only uses dual air brake chambers on the rear
brakes.
Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments
Operator's Manual
1
0.2 in (5mm)
2
1. Caging Bolt
2. Power Spring
Figure 3-9
Air Brake Chamber - Power Spring Caged
The chamber closest to the wheel end controls the
service brake. The other chamber controls the applica­
tion of the park brake. The park brake chamber con­
tains a large, high force (power) spring that will cause
the unit to literally “explode” if it is not caged prior to dis­
assembly. Refer to Figure 3-8. Caging compresses
and restrains the power spring. Use the following pro­
cedure to cage the power spring.
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, apply the
park brake, and shift the transmission to neutral.
2. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers, (or
block the wheels) release the park brake, and shut­
down the engine.
3. Rotate the caging bolt out of the air brake chamber
until it extends (0.2 in (5mm) from the end of the
chamber. Refer to Figure 3-9.
Note: If the cranes air system is inoperative and
the park brake is applied, tightening the caging
bolt will be more difficult than if the park brake is
released.
4. The power spring has now been caged. Continue
with any necessary repair or adjustments. Repeat
the above procedure for each brake to be serviced.
3-7
Operator's Manual
Releasing A Caged Dual Air Brake 3. Slowly rotate the caging bolt to release the power
spring until the head of the caging bolt is flush with
Chamber the top of the air brake chamber. Refer to
The park brake chamber contains a large, high force Figure 3-8.
(power) spring that will cause the unit to literally “ex­
plode” if it is not caged prior to disassembly. Caging Rear Brake Inspection
compresses and restrains the power spring. After in­ The rear brakes are equipped with automatic adjusters
stalling the air brake chamber on the crane, the power to compensate for brake lining wear. They should be
spring must then be released in order for the park
checked periodically to ensure they are working prop­
brake feature of the brake chamber to function. Use
erly and that the brake linings are not worn out. Re­
the following procedure to release the caged power
move the wheel and check the brake linings, as re­
spring once the unit is installed on the crane or after
quired, to ensure proper brake operation. After inspec­
making a brake adjustment.
tion, test all brake functions before operating.
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, apply the
park brake, and shift the transmission to neutral.
2. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers, (or
Front Brake Inspection
block the wheels) release the park brake, and shut­ The front brakes are equipped with automatic ad­
down the engine. justers to compensate for brake lining wear. They
Note: If the cranes air system is inoperative and should be checked periodically to ensure that they are
the park brake is applied, tightening the caging operating properly.
bolt will be more difficult than if the park brake is
released.

3-8 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments

 Operator's Manual
B

4 2 1

Section A-A
1. Top Outrigger Beam Bearing Pads 4. Bottom Outrigger Beam Bearing Pads
2. Shim(s) 5. Setscrews And Jam Nuts
Section B-B 3
3. Capscrew And Washer

Figure 3-10
Outrigger Beam Bearing Pads

and bottom bearing pads, as required, to main­

Outrigger Beam Bearing tain 0.25 in (6.35mm) clearance. Install cap­
Pad Adjustment screws and washers.

Bearing pads are provided on the outrigger beams as a
means of keeping the outrigger beams working
smoothly. They must be adjusted periodically to pre­
vent excessive deflection of the beams. Refer to
Figure 3-10.
1. Park crane on a firm, level surface. Extend the out­
rigger beams approximately 4 in (10.1cm).
2. Place a 0.25 in (6.35mm) shim on top of the inner
outrigger beam and between the beam and outrig­
ger box. Refer to Figure 3-10. Do this on all four
outrigger beams.
3. Extend the outrigger jacks until the beams contact
the shims. Do not raise the crane off the ground.
4. Remove all outrigger box covers. Remove cap­
screws and washers. Add shim(s) under the top
Note: If clearance cannot be obtained due to
bearing pad wear, replace the bearing pads as
required.
5. Fully retract the outrigger jacks.
6. Remove shims from the top of the beams.
7. Fully extend outrigger beams and check that
there is 0.06 in (1.5mm) maximum clearance
between the top of the inner outrigger beam and
outrigger box.
8. Make the side to side adjustment by loosening jam
nut and tightening setscrew until it makes contact
with beam. Back setscrew off one‐half turn and
tighten jam nut. Do this on all four outrigger
beams.

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-9

Operator's Manual
1. Swing Park Brake Bleeder Plug
2. Swing Service Brake Bleeder Plug
Figure 3-11
Swing Unit
Swing Brake Bleeding
Bleed the swing brake whenever a hydraulic line is re­
moved from the swing unit to remove any air that may
have been trapped in the circuit. Removal of any
trapped air within the brake assembly is essential for
proper operation of the swing and service park brake.
The following procedure requires two people.
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface and engage
the travel swing lock.
2. Check that all control levers are in the neutral posi­
tion and move the function lockout switch to the
“DISABLE” position.
3. Shutdown the engine.
4. Thoroughly clean the bleed plugs and surrounding
area with an approved cleaning solvent to prevent
contamination from entering the oil circuits. Allow
the area to air dry.
5. Attach one end of a rubber hose to each of the
bleeder plugs. Refer to Figure 3-12. Ensure that
each rubber hose fits securely on the bleeder
plugs.
6. Fill a clean, clear container with clean hydraulic oil,
and place the open end of each rubber hose into
the container. For the correct grade, refer to “Hi
Performance Hydraulic Oil” in Section 2 of this Op­
erator's Manual.
7. Start the engine.
3-10 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments
1 2
5 4 3
1. Bleeder Plug - Parking Brake
2. Rubber Hose
3. Container
4. Bleeder Plug - Service Brake
5. Swing Brake
Figure 3-12
Swing Brake Bleeding Procedure
8. Bleed the service brake portion of the swing brake:
a. With the engine running at idle speed and the
swing park brake released, slowly loosen the
bleeder plug.
b. With one person stationed in the operator's
cab and another observing the container, the
person in the cab should slowly apply and re­
lease the swing brake pedal while the other ob­
serves the container for air bubbles after loos­
ening bleeder plug. Repeat the process until
no air bubbles are observed.
c. Securely close the bleeder plug and tighten to
9-12 ft lb (12-16Nm).
9. Bleed the park brake portion of the swing brake:
a. With the engine running at idle speed, apply
the swing park brake and slowly loosen the
bleeder plug.
b. With one person stationed in the operator's
cab and another observing the container, the
person in the cab should apply and release the
swing park brake, utilizing the swing park
break switch, while the other observes the
container for air bubbles after loosening bleed­
er plug. Repeat the process until no air
bubbles are observed.
c. Securely close the bleeder plug and tighten to
9-12 ft lb (12-16Nm).
10. Remove the rubber hoses from the bleeder plugs.
11. Check the hydraulic oil level. Refer to “Hydraulic
Reservoir Oil Level Check” in Section 2 of this Op­
erator's Manual.
12. Test all swing brake functions before operating the
crane.
13. Properly dispose of used oil.
 Operator's Manual

2
3

0.10 to 0.25 in
(2.5 to 6.3mm)
1. Cable Adjusting Nuts Clearance Engaged
2. Swing Lock Pin
3. Retainer Plate

Figure 3-13
Travel Swing Lock Adjustment

3. Check the engagement of the swing lock pin in the

Travel Swing Lock Adjustment
The travel swing lock is a two position, positive lock of
the upper over the carrier to prevent swinging of the up­
per. The travel swing lock must be kept adjusted.
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, shift trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
Level the crane on outriggers.
2. Check that the travel swing lock is engaged and
shutdown engine(s). Refer to Figure 3-13.
retainer ring on the carrier deck. The pin should ex­
tend in the retainer plate to within 0.10 to 0.22 in
(2.5 to 5.6mm) of the carrier deck.
4. Adjust the stroke of the swing lock as required by
using the cable adjusting nuts.
5. Test the swing lock in each working position before
operating the crane.

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-11

Operator's Manual
1 2

4 3

1. Adjusting Nuts 3. Swing Lock Pawl

2. Control Cable 4. Turntable Bearing Gear Teeth

Figure 3-14
360° Swing Lock Adjustment

2. Engage the travel and 360° swing locks. Shut­

360° Swing Lock System
Inspection And Adjustment
(If Equipped)
The 360° swing lock system, if equipped, functions to
prevent rotation of the upper over the carrier. The 360°
swing lock functions by engaging a pawl in the external
turntable bearing gear teeth. The swing lock must be
correctly adjusted in order to operate properly. Use the
following procedures to properly inspect and adjust
the 360°swing lock.
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake. Level the crane on outriggers.
down the engine(s).
3. Visually inspect the 360° swing lock pawl. The
pawl should be fully engaged with the linkage just
over center. Refer to Figure 3-14.
4. If the pawl is not fully engaged and the linkage is
not just over center, use the control cable adjusting
nuts to correctly position it.
5. Tighten the adjusting nuts and test the 360° swing
lock before operating the crane.

3-12 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments

 Operator's Manual
1 2 3 1

5
°
0°

3° 1° 1° 3°
0°
°
5

1. Glass Vial
2. Spring
3. Adjusting Nut
3 4
Figure 3-15
Bubble Level - Upper Cab
2
Bubble Level Adjustment 1. Glass Vial
2. Bottom Nut
A bubble level, for leveling the crane on outriggers, is
3. Adjusting Nut
mounted in the upper cab on the right side wall and at 4. Mirror
each ground controlled outrigger station. They should
be checked periodically to ensure proper adjustment. Figure 3-16
Side View Bubble Level - Ground Controlled
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
Outrigger Station
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers. With
the boom fully retracted and at counterweight and 4. To adjust upper cab bubble level, rotate the adjust­
boom angles listed in the chart below, level the up­ ing nuts as required until the bubble is centered
per frame with the outriggers jacks. within the vial. Refer to Figure 3-15.
Retracted Cg off C/L Rot Note: Do not flatten out the springs under the
Counterweight Boom Angle (in) bubble level. Loosen rather that overtighten the
0 62° ±2.9 adjustment nuts to gain the necessary adjust­
ment.
14,000 48° ±3.0
36,000 10° ±5.7 5. To adjust side view level at the ground control out­
rigger stations, loosen bottom nuts and rotate ad­
Note: Cg off C/L of rotation minus(­) without fly, justing nuts as required until the bubble is centered
plus(+) with fly stored. within the vial. Tighten bottom nuts.
6. Once all bubble levels are correctly adjusted, go to
3. Verify the crane is level by placing a carpenter's the outrigger level screen on the upper crane con­
level across the the turntable bearing just in front of trol display in the upper cab to verify that the elec­
upper frame. Check levelness with the upper at tronic outrigger level is indicating the crane is level.
any swing position (swing the upper 360° to verify Refer to Section 1 of this Operator's Manual to ac­
a level reading at all positions). Adjust the outrig­ cess the O/R (Outrigger) Level screen.
gers as necessary. 7. If the center indicator light is not illuminated green,
the outrigger level sensor must be calibrated.
Refer to the crane's Shop Manual for the calibra­
tion procedure.

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-13

Operator's Manual
The RCL should be calibrated by a qualified technician
Crane Monitoring System only. Contact your Link‐Belt Distributor to arrange for a
A properly calibrated Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL) is qualified technician to perform the calibration proce­
critical for safe crane operation. The boom angle and dures.
length are crucial factors in determining crane capa­
city. The RCL must be checked for accuracy on a daily
basis and calibrated as needed.

3-14 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments


1. Capscrew 1
2. Retaining Plate
3. Rear Bottom Center Wear Shoe
Figure 3-17
Rear Bottom Center Wear Shoes
Boom Wear Shoe Adjustment
Boom wear shoes are provided as a means of keeping
the boom working smoothly. They must be adjusted
periodically to prevent excessive deflection of the
boom sections. Refer to Figure 3-19.
1. Park the crane on firm, level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers.
3. Ensure all crane movements keep the crane within
capacity as listed in the Crane Rating Manual.
4. Engage the travel swing lock with the upper di­
rectly over the rear of the carrier.
5. Lower the boom and extend each boom section as
required to gain access to each wear shoe.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom. Use a ladder or similar
device to reach necessary areas.
To prevent movement of individual boom
sections, shutdown the engine and ensure
that the operator has properly vacated the
operators cab before putting hands or tools
inside the boom. Unexpected movement of
the boom sections could sever fingers,
hands, arms, etc.
6. Check the thickness of the rear bottom center wear
shoes. Refer to Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-19.
Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments
Operator's Manual
2 3
a. The rear bottom center wear shoes are not ad­
justable. For inspection or replacement, access
to the retaining plates for these wear shoes is
gained through holes in the sides of the external
boom section when the boom is extended.
b. To check the thickness of the wear shoe without
removal of the wear shoe, the clearance
between the external shell and the retaining
pocket can be measured. To get an accurate
measurement the internal section must be rest­
ing on the rear bottom center wear shoe. An ap­
propriate lifting device must be used to lift the
front of the internal section to put pressure on the
rear bottom center wear shoe.
Minimum allowable distance is 1/16 in (1.6mm).
The wear shoe must be replaced if the clearance
measured is less than this dimension. This can
be measured with a gauge made of a stack of
shims or other material.
c. If the wear shoe is removed for inspection, min­
imum wear shoe thickness is 13/16 in (2.1cm) for
the center wear shoes. Wear shoes worn to less
than this dimension must be replaced.
d. Removal of the rear bottom center wear shoe for
all sections is easily done through holes in the
sides of the external boom section when the
boom is extended.
e. If wear shoe was replaced, apply Loctiteâ 242
to the capscrews before installing.
3-15
Operator's Manual

1. Bearing Cage
2. Front Bottom Wear Shoe
3. Capscrew And Washer

Figure 3-18
Front Bottom Wear Shoes

7. Check the thickness of the front bottom wear shoes.
There are three bearing cages with four pads in each
cage. Refer to Figure 3-18 and Figure 3-19.
8. The wear shoes are to be replaced when the bottom 10.
most wear pads reach a minimum thickness of 1/2 in
(1.3cm). 11.
9. To replace these shoes, extend the internal section
out 3 ft (0.9m), remove the front top wear shoes, lift 12.
up on the internal section, remove the capscrews
holding the bearing cages, and slide the shoes and 13.
bearing cages out of the boom section. The shoes
come out the back of the bearing cages for replace­
ment.
Apply Loctiteâ 242 to the capscrews and install the
bearing cages with new shoes.
Lower the internal section back down, install front top
wear shoes.
Extend and retract boom to seat front bottom wear
shoes.
Adjust front top wear shoes.

3-16 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments

 Operator's Manual

1 3

1. Front Bottom Wear Shoe - (72 Places)

2. Front Top Wear Shoe - (12 Places)
3. Rear Top Wear Shoe (12 Places)
4. Rear Side Wear Shoes (52 Places) 4 5
5. Rear Bottom Center Wear Shoes (6 Places)

Figure 3-19
Boom Wear Shoe Adjustment And Inspection

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-17

Operator's Manual

3
4
2

1 in
(2.5cm)
Minimum

1/2 in
(1.3cm) 6
Minimum
1. Vertical Adjustment Shims
2. Retaining Screws
3. Retaining Plates
4. Adjustment Shims
5. Wear Shoe
6. Horizontal Adjustment Shims

Figure 3-20
Front Top Wear Shoe

14. Adjust the following wear shoes to ensure the
boom is straight and each boom section is cen­
tered within the next.
a. Front Top Wear Shoes
(Refer Figure 3-19 and Figure 3-20.)
1. The front top wear shoes are adjustable in
both horizontal and vertical directions.
The horizontal adjustment is used to cen­
ter one boom section inside the other.
Measure the clearance between sections
on each side and space them equally. The
wear shoes should contact the inside sec­
tion on both sides. No clearance between
wear shoe and boom section is required.
2. Remove the capscrews and washers
which secure the retaining plates. Re­
move the retaining plates
3. Install shims so that there is no clearance
between wear shoes and boom section.
4. Replace when shoe is worn to 1 in (2.5cm)
minimum thickness on the top or 1/2 in
(1.3cm) minimum thickness on the side, or
when more than seven vertical or horizont­
al adjustment shims are used whichever
comes first.

3-18 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments


1/8 in (3.1mm)
Minimum
2 3 4
6 5
1. Capscrew And Washer
2. Nylon Spacer
3. Horizontal Adjustment Shims
Figure 3-21
Rear Top Wear Shoe
b. Rear Top Wear Shoes
(Refer to Figure 3-19 and Figure 3-21.)
1. There are rear top wear shoes on the side
of each boom section. Adjustment of
these wear shoes is accomplished
through holes in the side of the adjacent
boom section. Extend only the boom sec­
tions required, and just far enough, so that
the rear top wear shoes are accessible
through the holes in the side of the adja­
cent section. Leave the other inner sec­
tions fully retracted at this point.
2. Measure the thickness at both lips on the
wear shoe. Minimum thickness is1/8 in
(3.1mm).
3. If a more thorough measurement is re­
quired, the rear top wear shoes can be re­
Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments
Operator's Manual
6‐15/16 in
(17.6cm)
Minimum
Both Sides
1/8 in (3.1mm)
Minimum
4. Rear Top Wear Shoe
5. Vertical Adjustment Shims
6. Keeper Plate
moved and measured. Access through
the sides of the boom and remove the
capscrews and washers which secure the
rear top wear shoes keeper plates. Re­
move the keeper plates.
4. Remove shims as needed.
5. Replace when shoe is worn to 6-15/16 in
(17.6cm) in minimum thickness. Measure
the thickness on both sides.
Note: These wear shoes can be rotated
and moved to the opposite side to pro­
vide more service life before replace­
ment as they will tend to wear on the top
more than the on the side.
3-19
Operator's Manual
1 2 3
1. Capscrew And Washer
2. Retaining Plate
Figure 3-22
Rear Side Wear Shoe
c. Rear Side Wear Shoes
(Refer to Figure 3-19 and Figure 3-22.)
1. For inspection, access to the retaining
plates for these wear shoes is gained
through holes in the sides of the external
boom section when the boom is extended.
2. The rear side wear shoes are adjustable.
Shims should be added to the wear shoes
until the wear shoes are tight against the
larger outer section.
Note: The wear shoe must be replaced
if the number of shims required to make
the shoe tight against the outer section
will not fit through the hole in the retain­
er plate.
3. For proper inspection, the rear side wear
shoes must be removed. Remove the
capscrews and washers which secure the
retaining plates. Remove the retaining
plates. A shop cloth can be put below the
wear shoes to keep loose parts from falling
down into the boom.
3-20 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments
3. Shims
4. Wear Shoe
4. Remove shims and wear shoes to inspect
the thickness. Minimum wear shoe thick­
ness is 1.375 in (3.5cm) for the wear
shoes. Wear shoes worn to less than this
dimension must be replaced.
5. Install the wear shoes back into their pock­
ets and install shims until the wear shoes
are against the larger outer section.
6. Apply Loctiteâ 242 to the capscrews used
to secure the retaining plates.
7. Install the retaining plates and secure
them with the capscrews and washers.
15. After adjusting the boom wear shoes, boom up to a
60° angle and fully extend the boom. Confirm that
the boom is straight and the sections are centered
within each other.
Note: External effects such as sun and wind on
one side of the boom or having the crane out of
level can make the boom appear to not be
aligned. Negate these effects as much as pos­
sible when checking boom straightness. Refer
to “Boom Distortion Due To Thermal Effects Of
The Sun” in Section 1 of this Operator's Manual.

Hydraulic System Relief
Valve Adjustment
The following instructions pertain to checking and setting
all relief valve pressures in the hydraulic system. All
cranes are tested and properly adjusted before leaving
the factory and should not need checking when first put
into operation. Each 250 hours of operation, the relief
valve pressure settings should be checked. A drop in re­
lief valve pressure setting may be noticed the first time
checked. This is normal and is probably due to lessening
of spring tension or stress relief in relief valve parts.
If a new or rebuilt pump is installed, all relief valve pres­
sures must be backed off and reset, as outlined in this
Section of this Operator's Manual before putting the
crane in operation. The purpose of this is to avoid the
possibility of damaging the new pump from over pres­
surization if relief valves are set incorrectly. Do not op­
erate the crane over relief pressures for extended peri­
ods of time to avoid overheating of hydraulic oil.
DANGER
When it is required to operate the crane during
maintenance and/or adjustments, use extreme
caution as service personnel may have to work
near and/or under moving machinery. Serious
personal injury and/or death may result.
Always remain in visual and/or verbal contact to
ensure the safety of service personnel. Use a
signal person if necessary.
CAUTION
Relief valves are provided to protect the
hydraulic system. Do not increase relief valve
pressures above specifications or hydraulic
system damage may occur.
Preparing The Crane For Checking
Relief Pressures
1. Park the crane on firm, level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on outriggers and operate the hy­
draulic functions, as required, to bring the hydrau­
lic oil temperature to its normal operating range.
Refer to “Hi Performance Hydraulic Oil” chart in
Section 2 of this Operator's Manual for oil operat­
ing temperature ranges.
3. Ensure all crane movements keep the crane within
capacity as listed in the Crane Rating Manual.
Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments
Operator's Manual
4. Engage the travel swing lock with the upper di­
rectly over the rear of the carrier.
5. Fully retract and lower the boom. Shutdown the
engine(s).
Note: Checking relief valve pressures is simpli­
fied by using two persons, one in the operator's
cab to operate the controls and one to check
and adjust the relief valves.
Relief Valve Pressure Checking
Instructions
1. Use a gauge of known accuracy. Have the gauge
calibrated if necessary. Use a snubber or gate
valve to reduce shock loading in the gauge.
2. With the ignition on but engine off, release the hy­
draulic system precharge pressure and work the
control, for the circuit being checked, back and
forth to relieve any trapped hydraulic pressure.
Note: For functions which are operated by a
toggle switch, the ignition switch must be in the
“ON” position but do not start the engine(s).
WARNING
All trapped hydraulic pressure must be
exhausted from the system before installing
or removing a gauge in any quick disconnect.
A sudden release of hot oil could cause burns
or other serious injury.
3. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting.
4. Refer to “Hydraulic Pressure Settings” chart to deter­
mine the correct pressure setting for the circuit being
checked. Also, review the procedure for checking
that particular circuit outlined in the chart.
5. Start the engine(s).
6. If applicable, fully engage the control for the circuit
being checked and hold it in that position.
7. With the engine(s) running at the speed specified in
the “Hydraulic Pressure Settings” chart, check the
gauge for the correct reading, adjust as required.
Note: Obtain each final pressure by bringing
the pressure up to the proper setting, not by
backing down to it.
8. Allow the engine(s) to return to idle before shutting
it (them) down.
9. Release the hydraulic system precharge pressure
and work the control back and forth to relieve any
hydraulic pressure before removing pressure
gauge from the quick disconnect fitting.
3-21
Operator's Manual

Hydraulic Pressure Settings - Carrier

Quick Disconnect & Adjustment
Hydraulic Circuit Relief Valve Setting
Location
3,350 psi
Outrigger Figure 3-24
(23 098kPa)
850+50-0 psi
Bumper Outrigger Figure 3-25
(5 861+345-0kPa)
2,175 psi
Front Steering Figure 3-26
(14 996kPa)
1,800 psi
Rear Steering Axle Figure 3-27
(12 411kPa)
2,425 psi
Oil Cooler Figure 3-28
(16 720kPa)
425 psi±25 psi
Boom Float Reducing Valve Figure 3-29
(2 930±172kPa)
Note: Adjust All Pressures to Within ±50 psi (344 kPa) Except Where Noted.

3-22 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments

 Operator's Manual

1. Outrigger Circuit Relief Valve

2. Bumper Outrigger Relief Valve
3. Front Steering Relief Valve
4. Rear Steering Relief Valve - Axle 3 & 4
5. Rear Steering Relief Valve - Axle 5
6. Oil Cooler Relief Valve
7. Boom Float Reducing Valve

Figure 3-23
Carrier Relief Valves

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-23

Operator's Manual

1. Relief Valve Adjuster

2. Quick Disconnect Fitting

Figure 3-24
Outrigger Circuit Relief Valve

Outrigger Circuit Adjusting Procedure
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
2. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting.
3. Start the engine and gradually increase the engine
speed to full throttle.
4. Fully retract an outrigger beam and hold. Check
pressure.
5. Adjust pressure as required to 3,350 psi (23 098kPa).
6. Return engine to idle speed and shutdown.
7. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
8. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.

3-24 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments

 Operator's Manual

1. Relief Valve Adjuster

2. Quick Disconnect Fitting

Figure 3-25
Bumper Outrigger Relief Valve

Bumper Outrigger Circuit Adjusting 3. Level crane on main outriggers.

Procedure
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to
obtain an accurate reading.
2. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting.
4. Start the engine and maintain idle speed.
5. Fully extend bumper outrigger and hold. Check
pressure.
6. Adjust pressure as required to 875 ±25 psi
(6 033±172kPa).
7. Shutdown the engine.
8. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
9. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-25

Operator's Manual

1. Steer Pressure Hose

2. Relief Valve Adjuster
3. Quick Disconnect Fitting

Figure 3-26
Front Steering Relief Valve

Front Steering Circuit Adjusting
Procedure
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to
obtain an accurate reading.
2. Boom over front, fully retracted, travel swing lock
engaged, crane on tires.
3. Cap off steer pressure at the valve and plug hose.
4. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting.
5. Start the engine and maintain idle speed.
6. Check pressure.
7. Adjust pressure as required to 2,175 psi
(14 996kPa).
8. Shutdown the engine.
9. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
10. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.
11. Install hose back to valve.

3-26 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments

 Operator's Manual

2
2

1
Axle 3 & 4 Axle 5

1. Relief Valve Adjuster

2. Quick Disconnect Fitting

Figure 3-27
Rear Steering Relief Valves

Rear Steering Axle Circuit Adjusting
Procedure
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to
obtain an accurate reading.
2. Boom over front, fully retracted, travel swing lock
engaged, crane on tires.
3. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting.
4. Start the engine and maintain idle speed.
5. Steering Selection Switch in the OFFROAD posi­
tion.
6. Using the manual steer switch , turn steering
wheel full right or left and hold. Check pressure.
7. Adjust pressure as required to 1,800 psi
(12 411kPa).
8. Shutdown the engine.
9. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
10. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-27

Operator's Manual

1. Relief Valve Adjuster

2. Quick Disconnect Fitting
3. Pump Solenoid

Figure 3-28
Oil Cooler Relief Valve

Oil Cooler Circuit Adjusting Procedure
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
2. Unplug pump solenoid electrical wires.
3. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting.
4. Start the engine and gradually increase the engine
speed to full throttle.
5. Check pressure.
6. Adjust pressure as required to 2,425 psi (16 720kPa).
7. Return engine to idle speed and shutdown.
8. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
9. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.
10. Reconnect pump solenoid electrical wires.

3-28 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments

 Operator's Manual
1

1. Swing Park Brake Release Valve

2. Relief Valve Adjuster
3. Quick Disconnect Fitting

Figure 3-29
Boom Float Reducing Valve

1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to
obtain an accurate reading.
2. Boom over front, fully retracted, travel swing lock
engaged, crane on tires.
3. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting.
4. Start the engine and maintain idle speed.
5. Turn the swing park brake release valve, at the
swing unit, to the fully open position .
6. Turn steering wheel full right or left. Check pres­
sure.
7. If pressure setting is to high, open and close swing
park brake release valve to relieve trapped pres­
sure.
8. If pressure is low, adjust as required to 425 psi±25
psi (2 930±172kPa).
9. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
10. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-29

Operator's Manual

Hydraulic Pressure Settings - Upper

Quick Disconnect And Adjust­
Hydraulic Circuit Relief Valve Setting
ment Location
Controls
3,700 psi
Counterweight Retract Figure 3-31
(25 511kPa)
Hydraulic Offset Fly
380 psi±10 psi
Winch Charge Pressure Figure 3-32
(2 620±69kPa)
725±25 psi
Pilot Control Figure 3-33
(4 999±172kPa)
2,900 psi
Swing Figure 3-34
(19 995kPa)
1,500 psi
Counterweight Cylinder Extend Figure 3-36
(10 342kPa)
500 psi ±25 psi
Counterweight Lock Cylinder Figure 3-37
(3 447±172kPa)

Boom Hoist /Telescope

6,200 psi
Main Relief
(42 749kPa)
6,025±25 psi
Load Sense Relief
(41 542±172kPa)
2,150 psi
Boom Hoist Retract Port Relief Figure 3-38 (14 824kPa)
3,500 psi
Telescope Extend Port Relief
(24 132kPa)
5,000 psi
Telescope Retract Port Relief
(34 475kPa)
100
±10 psi
Boom Pinning Cylinder Extend Figure 3-39
(689kPa)
(69kPa)
5,460-5,680 psi
Front and Rear Winch Figure 3-40
(37 645-39 162kPa)
250 psi
Winch Load Holding Valve Figure 3-41
(1 724kPa)
Front & Rear Winch Hot Oil Shuttle 230 psi ±5 psi
Figure 3-42
Purge Relief (1 585 kPa ±69kPa)
400 psi ±10 psi
Winch Supplemental Flow Relief
(2 758 ±69kPa)
Winch Supplemental Flow 325 psi ±10 psi
Pressure (2 241 ±69kPa)
Note: Adjust all pressures to within ±50 psi (344kPa) except where noted.

3-30 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments

 Operator's Manual

8 9

6 4

14
12
10

2 13

11

1. Control Circuit Relief Valve 8. Rear Boom Hoist/Telescope Pump

2. Control Pressure Pump 9. Boom Hoist/Telescope Control Valve
3. Winch Charge Circuit Relief Valve 10. Counterweight Lock Cylinder Relief Valve
4. Pilot Pressure Relief Valve 11. Boom Pinning Cylinder Relief Valve
5. Swing Relief Valve 12. Pressure Check Port Bank
6. Front Boom Hoist/Telescope Pump 13. Winch Hot Oil Shuttle Relief Valve
7. Counterweight Cylinder Extend Relief Valve 14. Winch Supplemental Flow Valves

Figure 3-30
Upper Relief Valves

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-31

Operator's Manual

2 3

1. Control Relief Valve Adjuster

2. Control Pressure Pump Relief
3. Quick Disconnect Fitting

Figure 3-31
Control Circuit Relief Valve

Control Circuit Adjusting Procedure
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to
obtain an accurate reading.
2. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting.
3. Start the engine and maintain idle speed.
4. Set control pressure pump relief higher than 3,700
psi (25 511kPa).
5. Retract counterweight cylinders and hold.
6. Check pressure.
7. Adjust pressure as required to 3,700 psi
(25 511kPa).
8. Reset control pressure pump to 3,500 psi
(24 132kPa).
9. Shutdown engine.
10. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
11. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.

3-32 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments

 Operator's Manual

1. Winch Charge Relief Valve Adjuster

2. Quick Disconnect Fitting

Figure 3-32
Winch Charge Circuit Relief Valve

Winch Charge Circuit Adjusting
Procedure
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to
obtain an accurate reading.
2. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting.
3. Start the engine and maintain idle or additional
speed.
4. Retract boom hoist cylinder over relief. Check
pressure.
5. Adjust pressure as required to 380±10 psi
(2 620±69kPa).
6. Return engine to idle speed and shutdown.
7. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
8. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-33

Operator's Manual

1. Pilot Pressure Relief Valve Adjuster

2. Quick Disconnect Fitting

Figure 3-33
Pilot Pressure Relief Valve

Pilot Pressure Circuit Adjusting
Procedure
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to
obtain an accurate reading.
2. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting.
3. Start the engine and maintain idle speed.
4. Adjust pressure as required to 725±25 psi
(4 999±172kPa).
5. Shutdown the engine.
6. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
7. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.

3-34 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments

 Operator's Manual

1. Quick Disconnect Fitting

2. Charge Relief Adjuster

Figure 3-34
Swing Pressure Relief Valve

Swing Circuit Adjusting Procedure 4. Engage travel swing lock.

1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of 5. Swing left and hold. Check pressure.
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane 6. Swing right and hold. Check pressure.
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve Note: Swing relief is not adjustable.
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
7. Pressure should be 2,900 psi (19 995kPa).
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to 8. Shutdown the engine.
obtain an accurate reading. 9. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
2. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect 10. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
fitting. connect fitting.
3. Start the engine and gradually increase to full
throttle.

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-35

Operator's Manual
1 2

3 4

1. Rear Load Sense Margin Adjusting Screw

2. Front Load Sense Margin Adjusting Screw
3. Rear Boom Hoist/telescope Pump
4. Front Boom Hoist/telescope Pump
5. Quick Disconnect Fitting

Figure 3-35
Boom Hoist/Telescope Pumps Load Sense Margin

Tank Adjusting Procedure 2. Cap work ports.

(Boom Hoist/Telescope Pumps Load Sense Margin)
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to
obtain an accurate reading.
3. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting.
4. Start the engine and gradually increase to full
throttle.
5. While extending boom hoist cylinder, measure the
rear pump cutout pressure at the check port teed
into the input of the charge circuit reducing valve.
Set to 3500 psi (24 132kPa) by adjusting the pres­
sure compensator screw on the rear pump.

3-36 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments


6. Check load sense margin pressure setting: Actu­
ate boom hoist retract. Measure both the main
boom hoist/telescope valve pressure and the load
sense line pressure. The difference between these
two values is the load sense margin pressure. This
measurement is best taken using a differential
pressure gauge or a digital pressure gauge with a
differential pressure option. This value should be
between 290-305 psi (2 000-2 103kPa). To ad­
just, follow the Steps below:
a. On both front and rear boom hoist/telescope
pumps, turn the load sense pressure margin
screws out one full turn.
b. Actuate boom hoist retract and check the dif­
ferential setting. Slowly adjust the load
sense pressure margin screw on the rear
pump only until a differential pressure of
290-300 psi (2 000-2 069kPa) is met. Take
note of the final pressure for the next Step.
c. Actuate boom hoist retract and check the dif­
ferential setting. Slowly adjust the load sense
pressure margin screw on the front pump only
until the differential pressure is slightly higher
[5-10 psi (34-69kPa)] than the value from the
previous Step.
7. Check the boom hoist/telescope valve main relief
settings:
a. On the boom hoist telescope valve, tighten
both the main relief and load sense relief valves
until bottomed out.
Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments
Operator's Manual
b. Actuate boom hoist extend and adjust the
pressure compensator screw on the front
pump only until the main valve pressure raises
to 6500 psi (44 817kPa).
c. Actuate boom hoist extend and adjust the
main relief valve to set the main valve pressure
to 6100-6175 psi (42 060-42 577kPa).
d. Actuate boom hoist extend and adjust the
pressure compensator screw on the front
pump only until the main valve pressure is set
to 6000-6075 psi (41 370-41 887kPa).
e. Actuate boom hoist extend and adjust the load
sense relief valve to obtain a load sense line pres­
sure of 5600-5675 psi (38 612-39 129kPa).
8. Set boom hoist/telescope valve work port relief
valves:
a. Retract boom hoist and set work port relief to
1500 psi (10 342kPa).
b. Extend telescope and set work port relief to
3500psi (24 132kPa).
c. Retract telescope and set work port relief to
5000 psi (34 475kPa).
9. Shutdown the engine.
10. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
11. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.
3-37
Operator's Manual

1. Counterweight Cylinder Extend Relief Valve Adjuster

2. Quick Disconnect Fitting
3. Counterbalance Valve Quick Disconnect Fitting - 3,200 psi (22 064kPa)

Figure 3-36
Counterweight Cylinder Extend Relief Valve

Counterweight Cylinder Extend
Circuit Adjusting Procedure
1. Remove the counterweights from the upper. Refer
to Section 1 of this Operator's Manual for correct
procedures.
2. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to
obtain an accurate reading.
3. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fittings.
4. Start the engine and maintain idle speed.
5. Extend counterweight cylinders and hold. Check
pressure.
6. Adjust pressure as required to 1,500 psi
(10 342kPa).
7. Shutdown the engine.
8. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
9. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.

3-38 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments

 Operator's Manual

1. Counterweight Lock Cylinder Relief Valve Adjuster

2. Quick Disconnect Fitting

Figure 3-37
Counterweight Lock Cylinder Relief Valve

Counterweight Lock Cylinder Circuit
Adjusting Procedure
1. Remove the counterweights from the upper. Refer
to Section 1 of this Operator's Manual for correct
procedures.
2. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to
obtain an accurate reading.
3. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting.
4. Start the upper engine and maintain idle speed.
5. Retract locking plate cylinder and hold. Check
pressure. Adjust pressure as required to 500 psi
±25 psi (3 447±172kPa).
6. Shutdown the engine.
7. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
8. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-39

Operator's Manual
1 2

3 4

12
7

9 10

11

5
12
1. Rear Cutoff Pressure Adjuster 7. Load Sense Adjuster
2. Front Cutoff Pressure Adjuster 8. Main Pressure Relief Adjuster
3. Rear Boom Hoist/telescope Pump 9. Telescope Extend Port Relief Adjuster
4. Front Boom Hoist/telescope Pump 10. Telescope Retract Port Relief Adjuster
5. Rear Boom Hoist/Telescope Pump Cutoff Pressure Quick Disconnect Fitting 11. Boom Hoist Port Relief Adjuster
6. Boom Hoist/Telescope Quick Disconnect Fitting 12. Work Ports Blocked

Figure 3-38
Boom Hoist/Telescope Relief

3-40 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments


Boom Hoist/Telescope Circuit
Adjusting Procedure
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
2. Install the pressure gauge on the rear boom hoist/
telescope pump cutoff pressure quick disconnect
fitting.
3. Remove the hoses from work ports on the boom
hoist/telescope control valve. Cap the hoses and
block the ports.
4. Start the upper engine and gradually increase to
full throttle.
5. Check cutoff pressure for the rear boom hoist/tele­
scope pump. Adjust cutoff pressure as required to
3,500 psi (24 132kPa).
6. Tighten load sense and main relief adjusters on the
boom hoist/telescope valve until they bottom out.
7. Return engine to idle. Remove pressure gauge
from the rear boom hoist/telescope pump cutoff
pressure quick disconnect fitting.
8. Install pressure gauge on boom hoist/telescope
quick disconnect fitting.
9. Set cutoff pressure for the front boom hoist/tele­
scope pump to 6,325±25 psi (43 611±172kPa).
Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments
Operator's Manual
10. Fully extend boom hoist cylinder and hold. Check
main relief pressure. Adjust main relief pressure as
required to 6,200 psi (42 749kPa).
11. Fully extend boom hoist cylinder and hold.
Check load sense relief pressure. Adjust load
sense relief pressure as required to obtain
6,025±25 psi(41 542±172kPa).
12. Set the cutoff pressure for the front boom hoist/
telescope pump to 5,950 psi (41 025kPa).
13. Fully retract boom hoist cylinder and hold.
Check boom hoist retract port relief pressure.
Adjust port relief pressure as required to 2,150
psi (14 824kPa).
14. Using the manual telescope control box, engage
boom extend and hold. Check telescope extend
port relief pressure. Adjust port relief pressure as
required to 3,500 psi (24 132kPa).
15. Using the manual telescope control box, engage
boom retract and hold. Check telescope retract
port relief pressure. Adjust port relief pressure as
required to 5,000 psi (34 475kPa).
16. Shutdown the engine.
17. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
18. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.
3-41
Operator's Manual

1
2

1. Boom Pinning Cylinder Relief Valve Adjuster

2. Quick Disconnect Fitting

Figure 3-39
Boom Pinning Cylinder Relief Valve

Boom Pinning Cylinder Circuit
Adjusting Procedure
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
2. Remove the hoses from work ports on the pinning
cylinder control valve. Cap the hoses and block
the ports.
3. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting.
4. Start the upper engine and fully retract the boom.
5. Gradually increase engine to full throttle.
6. Using the manual telescope control box, extend
pinning cylinder and hold. Check pressure. Adjust
pressure as required to 11010 psi (758±69kPa)
7. Shutdown the engine.
8. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
9. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.

3-42 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments

 Operator's Manual

1 2

1. Winch Motor
2. Winch Brake Line
3. Quick Disconnect Fittings

Figure 3-40
Winch Circuit Check

Winch Circuit Checking Procedure
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
2. Remove winch brake line on applicable winch mo­
tor. Cap the hose and block the port.
3. Install the pressure gauge on the applicable quick
disconnect fitting.
4. Start the upper engine and fully retract boom.
5. Gradually increase engine to full throttle.
6. Engage applicable winch function and hold.
Note: Front and Rear Winch circuits are non‐ad­
justable.
7. Check pressure for each winch and each winch
function. Pressure should be 5,460-5,680 psi
(37 645-39 162kPa).

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-43

Operator's Manual

1. Load Holding Valve Pilot Pressure Adjustment

2. Quick Disconnect Fitting

Figure 3-41
Winch Load Holding Valve

Winch Load Holding Valve Adjusting
Procedure
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to
obtain an accurate reading.
2. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting.
3. Start the engine and maintain idle speed.
4. Adjust pressure as required to 250 psi (1 724kPa).
5. Return engine to idle speed and shutdown.
6. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
7. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.

3-44 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments

 Operator's Manual

1. Front Winch Shuttle Valve Adjuster

2. Front Winch Quick Disconnect Fitting
3. Rear Winch Shuttle Valve Adjuster
4. Rear Winch Quick Disconnect Fitting

Figure 3-42
Front & Rear Winch Hot Oil Shuttle Purge Relief

Front & Rear Winch Hot Oil Shuttle
Purge Relief Valve Adjusting
Procedure
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to
obtain an accurate reading.
2. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting.
3. Start the engine and maintain idle speed.
4. Adjust pressure as required to 230 psi ±5
psi (1 585kPa ±34kPa).
5. Return engine to idle speed.
6. Repeat steps 2-5 for the other winch.
7. Shutdown engine.
8. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
9. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-45

Operator's Manual

4
1. Winch Supplemental Pressure Adjustment
2. Winch Supplemental Relief Adjustment
3. Winch Supplemental Pressure Quick Disconnect Fitting 3
4. Winch Supplemental Relief Quick Disconnect Fitting

Figure 3-43
Winch Supplemental Flow Relief

Winch Supplemental Flow Circuit
Adjusting Procedure
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
Pressure Checking Instructions”.
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to
obtain an accurate reading.
2. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting for winch supplemental relief.
3. Start the engine and maintain idle speed.
4. Adjust pressure as required to 400 psi ±10 psi
(2 758kPa ±69kPa).
5. Return engine to idle speed and shutdown.
6. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
7. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.
8. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting for winch supplemental pressure
9. Start the engine and maintain idle speed.
10. Adjust pressure as required to 325 psi ±10 psi
(2 241kPa ±69kPa).
11. Return engine to idle speed and shutdown.
12. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
13. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis­
connect fitting.

3-46 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments

 Operator's Manual

3 4
5
2
6

Ä 10

1. Accumulator 5. Regulator Assy 8. Chuck

2. Regulator Valve 6. Dry Nitrogen Tank 9. Adaptor *
3. Regulator Gauge 7. Cap 10. Charging Valve
4. Supply Gauge
* An Adaptor May Be Required To Connect Chuck To Valve.

Figure 3-44
Typical Accumulator Charging Regulator Arrangement

The accumulators may be checked and/or charged

Accumulator Check/Charging
The crane may be equipped with up to five accumula­
tors. These accumulators are pressurized with dry ni­
trogen. The accumulator pressure should be checked
at 250 hour intervals to ensure the accumulators is
properly pressurized.
There are three bladder type accumulators mounted
on the upper. Two are mounted in the carrier service
brake hydraulic circuit and one is mounted in the pilot
control circuit. If the crane is equipped with the hydro‐
gas suspension, a piston type accumulator is mounted
on the carrier within that hydraulic circuit. If the crane is
equipped with emergency steering, an accumulator is
mounted on the right side of the upper frame.
with the unit installed or removed from the crane. If unit
must be removed from the crane, refer to the crane
Shop Manual for the correct procedure. Use the
following procedure to check and/or charge the
accumulators.
1. Lower, detach, and secure load, as required.
2. Stabilize the crane for service as follows:
a. Park the crane out of the way on a firm and level
surface.
b. Engage the travel park brake and/or properly
block the tires.
c. Engage the swing park brake and/or travel
swing lock, as required.
d. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers.
e. Fully retract and lower the boom, as required.

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-47

Operator's Manual
1 2
1 2
1. Front Accumulator (2) - 600 psi (4 137kPa)
Figure 3-45
Accumulator Locations
3. Shutdown the engine and disengage the main
hydraulic pump.
WARNING
Solvents and cleaning solutions can be
hazardous. Serious personal injury may
result from misuse of these products. Read
and follow all the manufacturer's
recommendations concerning solvents and
cleaning solutions.
4. Thoroughly clean area to be disassembled with an
approved cleaning solvent to prevent
contamination from entering the hydraulic oil
circuits. Allow the area to air dry.
WARNING
Hydraulic oil is under pressure and may be
hot. A sudden release of hot oil could cause
burns or other serious injury. Shutdown the
engine and exhaust all trapped hydraulic
pressure from the system before removing
any line or component.
5. To relieve hydraulic system pressure:
a Turn the ignition switch to “ON”, but DO NOT
START THE ENGINE. Move the function lock­
out switch to the “OPERATE” position.
b Work the crane control levers and outrigger
switches back and forth several times.
c Rotate the steering wheel back and forth
repeatedly until steering becomes hard. (On
3-48 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments
2
2
2. Rear Accumulator (4) - 525 psi (3 620kPa)
cranes equipped with emergency steering
system, it will take several rotations of steering
wheel before steering becomes hard.)
d Loosen the filler/breather cap on the hydraulic
reservoir 1/4 turn until all pressure is fully
relieved.
e Turn ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
6. Check that all control levers are in the neutral
position and move the function lockout switch to
the “DISABLE” position.
7. Remove cap (7) from the accumulator. Refer to
Figure 3-44.
8. Close the regulator valve (2) and the valve on the
dry nitrogen tank (6).
9. Connect the regulator assembly (5) to the dry
nitrogen tank (6).
10. Open the valve on the dry nitrogen tank (6). The
regulator gauge (3) should read 0 psi (0kPa). If
required, close the regulator valve (2) to achieve
the zero pressure at the regulator gauge (3).
11. Note the reading on the supply gauge (4). The dry
nitrogen tank must contain sufficient volume and
pressure to charge the accumulator.
12. Connect chuck (8) to the charging valve (10) and
turn the t‐handle clockwise to open the charging
valve (10).
13. When charging a new accumulator (1), open the
regulator valve (2) slowly until the regulator gauge
(3) reads 5 psi (34kPa).
14. Slowly open the regulator valve (2) until the
regulator gauge (3) reaches the correct pressure.
Refer to Figure 3-45 for the correct pressure.

15. Close the valve on the dry nitrogen tank (6) and
turn the t‐handle of the chuck (8) counterclockwise
to close the charging valve (10).
16. Remove the chuck (8) from the charging valve (10)
and inspect the charging valve (10) for leaks.
There will be a slight discharge of nitrogen when
the chuck (8) is removed.
Note: Allow accumulator to rest 10-15 minutes
after charging. This will allow gas temperature
to adjust and equalize. Recheck gas pressure
and adjust as necessary.
Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments
Operator's Manual
17. Check the charging valve (10) for leaks with soapy
water. If leaks are present, repair as required.
18. If no leaks are present, install the cap (7) on the
accumulator (1).
19. Check hydraulic reservoir oil level. Add oil as
required. Refer to Section 2 of this Operator's
Manual for correct type and procedure.
20. Start the engine and let idle for five minutes.
Inspect the connections on the hydraulic lines for
leaks. Repair if needed.
21. Test all hydraulic functions of the crane for proper
operation before placing the crane into service.
3-49
Operator's Manual
First Layer/Third Wrap
Calibration (If Equipped)
The crane may be equipped with a first layer/third wrap
warning system. This system allows the operator to
monitor the wire rope windings on the drum(s). In or­
der for this system to function correctly, it must be prop­
erly calibrated using the controls on the Upper Crane
Control Display. Refer to Figure 3-46. Calibrate the
system anytime wire rope is installed on the winch
drum(s) or the live end of the wire rope is wound past
the winch drum(s).
Note: When the first layer/third wrap is enabled,
first layer and third wrap warning indicators on the
calibration screen will illuminate when either of
these conditions are met. Warning indicators will
also be displayed on the RCL Screen.
WARNING
The first layer/third wrap system will not
function properly if the live end of the hoist
wire rope is wound past the winch drum(s).
Wire rope failure may occur. Recalibrate the
first layer/third wrap system so that three (3)
full wraps of wire rope are maintained on the
winch drum(s) at all times during operation.
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface.
2. Set the RCL System to Rigging Mode.
WARNING
The RCL System is not operational when in the
Rigging Mode. Return the RCL to normal
operation before operating the crane.
3. Wind wire rope off the rear drum until only four full
wraps are left on the drum. Or if installing wire rope
on the drum, properly install the drum wedge to an­
chor the wire rope to the drum. Refer to “Anchoring
Wire Rope To Drum” and “Winding Wire Rope On
Drum” in Section 5 of this Operator's Manual for in­
structions. Properly wind four full wraps on the
drum.
4. Visually verify that four full wraps are on the rear
drum before proceeding.
5. From the Main Working Screen, press the Function
Key F4 to bring up the First Layer/Third Wrap Calib­
ration Screen. Refer to Figure 3-46.
3-50 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments
6. Press and hold the Function Key F1 to calibrate
third wrap for the rear drum until a confirmation
pop‐up window appears.
7. Press Function Key F2 (Yes) to confirm or Function
Key F3 (No) to cancel. Blue indicator light illumin­
ates to confirm third wrap for the rear drum is calib­
rated.
8. Wind wire rope onto the rear drum until the first lay­
er is wound fully onto the drum. Visually verify that
one full layer is spooled correctly on the drum be­
fore proceeding.
9. Press and hold the Function Key F2 to calibrate first
layer for the rear drum until a confirmation pop‐up
window appears.
10. Press Function Key F2 (Yes) to confirm or Function
Key F3 (No) to cancel. Blue indicator light illumin­
ates to confirm first layer for the rear drum is calib­
rated.
11. Properly wind the remaining wire rope on the rear
drum. Refer to “Winding Wire Rope On Drum” in
Section 5 of this Operator's Manual.
12. Wind wire rope off the front drum (if equipped) until
only four full wraps are left on the drum. Or if in­
stalling wire rope on the drum, properly install the
drum wedge to anchor the wire rope to the drum.
Refer to “Anchoring Wire Rope To Drum” and
“Winding Wire Rope On Drum” in Section 5 of this
Operator's Manual. Properly wind four full wraps
on the drum.
13. Visually verify that four full wraps are on the front
drum before proceeding.
14. Press and hold the Function Key F3 to calibrate
third wrap for the front drum until a confirmation
pop‐up window appears. Refer to Figure 3-46.
15. Press Function Key F2 (Yes) to confirm or Function
Key F3 (No) to cancel. Blue indicator light illumin­
ates to confirm third wrap for the front drum is calib­
rated.
16. Wind wire rope onto the front drum until the first lay­
er is wound fully onto the drum. Visually verify that
one full layer is spooled correctly on the drum be­
fore proceeding.
17. Press and hold the Function Key F4 to calibrate first
layer for the front drum until a confirmation pop‐up
window appears.
18. Press Function Key F2 (Yes) to confirm or Function
Key F3 (No) to cancel. Blue indicator light illumin­
ates to confirm first layer for the front drum is calib­
rated.
19. Properly wind the remaining wire rope on the front
drum. Refer to “Winding Wire Rope On Drum” in
Section 5 of this Operator's Manual.
20. Return RCL System to the normal operating mode.
 Operator's Manual

Main Working Screen

First Layer/Third Wrap Calibration Screen

2 3

4
1
5

9 8 7 6

Confirmation Pop‐up Window

1. Rear Winch First Layer Warning Indicator 6. Function Key F4 - Front Winch First Layer Calibration Switch
2. Rear Winch Third Wrap Warning Indicator 7. Function Key F3 - Front Winch Third Wrap Calibration
3. Front Winch First Layer Warning Indicator Switch
4. Front Winch Third Wrap Warning Indicator 8. Function Key F2 - Rear Winch First Layer Calibration Switch
5. Indicator Lights 9. Function Key F1 - Rear Winch Third Wrap Calibration Switch

Figure 3-46
First Layer/Third Wrap Calibration Controls

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-51

 Operator's Manual
Table Of Contents
Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Adjustable Boom Head Deflector Sheave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Offset Lattice Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Fly Setup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Offset Lattice Fly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Offset Lattice Fly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Changing The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Erection Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Storage Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Offset Lattice Fly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Offset Lattice Fly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Changing The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Erection Of The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Storage Of The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
12 ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Offset Lattice Fly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Offset Lattice Fly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Changing The 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Erection Of The 12 ft (3.65m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Storage Of The 12 ft (3.65m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Offset Lattice Fly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Offset Lattice Fly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Changing The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m)Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Erection Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Storage Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Erection Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Storage Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

Section 4 - Attachments i
Operator's Manual
12‐40‐67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Offset Lattice Fly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Offset Lattice Fly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
Changing The 12‐40‐67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
Erection Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
Storage Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Erection Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171
Storage Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-184
Erection Of The 12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-196
Storage Of The 12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-209
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-223
Offset Lattice Fly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-223
Offset Lattice Fly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-227
Changing The 40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Fly Offset Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-228
Erection Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-231
Storage Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-244
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-257
Offset Lattice Fly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-257
Offset Lattice Fly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-261
Changing The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Fly Offset Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-263
Erection Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-267
Storage Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-281
Erection Of The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-295
Storage Of The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-311
12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-327
Offset Lattice Fly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-327
Offset Lattice Fly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-331
Changing The 12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Fly Offset Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-332
Erection Of The 12 ft (3.65m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-335
Storage Of The 12 ft (3.65m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-347

ii Section 4 - Attachments
 Operator's Manual
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-358
Offset Lattice Fly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-358
Offset Lattice Fly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-362
Changing The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Fly Offset Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-363
Erection Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-365
Storage Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-378
Erection Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-390
Storage Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-403
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-416
Offset Lattice Fly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-416
Offset Lattice Fly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-420
Changing The 12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Fly Offset Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-422
Erection Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-425
Storage Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-438
Erection Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-450
Storage Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-464
Erection Of The 12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-478
Storage Of The 12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-494
Two Load Line Lifting (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-510
Two Load Line Lifting Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-510
Two Load Line Lifting Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-510
12 Ft (3.65m) Manual Or Hydraulic Offset Fly Base Panel Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-512
Panel Lifting Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-512
Fly Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-513
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-513
25 Ft (7.62m) Fly Extension(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-515
Adding Fly Extension(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-517
Removing Fly Extension(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-518

Section 4 - Attachments iii

Operator's Manual

iv Section 4 - Attachments
 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1. Base Section 5. T4 Section

2. T1 Section 6. T5 Section
3. T2 Section 7. T6 Section
4. T3 Section 8. Boom Head Machinery

Figure 4-1
Boom Nomenclature

Boom Adjustable Boom Head

The boom is a seven section full power latching boom. It
consists of seven basic parts: a base, T1, T2, T3, T4 ,T5,
and a T6 section. Refer to Figure 4-1. The base section
is connected to the upper frame. It is raised and lowered
by the boom hoist cylinder. Refer to Section 1 of this Op­
erator's Manual for boom operating instructions.
Deflector Sheave
The position of the right deflector sheave on the boom
head machinery is adjustable. Refer to Figure 4-2.
The purpose is to keep the wire rope(s) as near the
center of the boom as possible to reduce side loading
on the boom.
In general the sheave should be kept in the position
nearest the center of the boom. If more than 6 parts of
line are reeved on the main boom head, the top right
sheave can be moved to the right side of the boom
head. Remove the capscrew and locknut from the split
spacer on the top head shaft, slide the sheave to the
right, and then install the split spacer between the
sheaves. Secure the split spacer with the capscrew
and locknut.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-1

Operator's Manual

1 1

2 2

3 3

Center Position Far Right Position

Dual ATB Position

(If Equipped)

1. Adjustable Right Deflector Sheave

2. Split Spacer
3. Capscrew And Locknut

Figure 4-2
Adjustable Boom Head Deflector Sheave

4-2 Section 4 - Attachments


Auxiliary Lifting Sheave
The auxiliary lifting sheave connects to the boom head.
Refer to Figure 4-3. It is used for reeving wire rope for
the second winch drum. Once installed, the unit may
be left in place without interfering with the installation,
erection, or storage of other boom attachments.
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave Installation
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Fully retract the boom and position the upper over
the rear of the carrier. Engage the travel swing lock.
3. Boom down and/or extend the boom, as required,
to ease access to the boom head.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom. Use a ladder or similar
device as required to reach necessary areas.
4. Adequately support the auxiliary lifting sheave with
an appropriate lifting device. It weighs approxi­
mately 112 lb (51kg). Position and align the lug
holes in the auxiliary lifting sheave frame with the
lugs on the main boom and install hitch pins. Se­
cure hitch pins with cotter pins Refer to
Figure 4-3.
5. Remove the wire rope guard from the auxiliary lift­
ing sheave. Reeve the wire rope on the boom de­
flector sheave, then over the sheave on the auxil­
iary lifting sheave. Install the wire rope guard.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
6. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head and connect it
to the auxiliary lifting sheave anti‐two block
connector. Refer to Figure 4-3.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight to the auxiliary
lifting sheave anti‐two block switch.
c. Properly install lockout clip on the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and auxiliary lifting
sheave are reeved for operation, the lock­
out clip must be removed and an anti‐two
block weight must be suspended from each
anti‐two block switch.
7. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
8. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary de­
ductions with the auxiliary lifting sheave installed
before continuing operations.
4-3
Operator's Manual
WARNING
When making lifts from the 12 ft (3.65m) fly at
2° offset and 70 degree boom angle or higher,
2 parts of line is the maximum with the
auxiliary sheave erected. Wire rope may
contact auxiliary lifting sheave. Auxiliary
lifting sheave may be removed or stored on
the boom head to eliminate the possible
interference. A warning will be shown on the
RCL display if the configuration can result in
wire rope contacting the auxiliary lifting
sheave.
WARNING
The auxiliary lifting sheave adds weight to the
boom which must be considered in lifting
capacities. When making lifts from the main
boom or fly with the auxiliary lifting sheave
installed, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities.
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave Removal
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
4-4 Section 4 - Attachments
2. Fully retract the boom and position the upper over
the rear of the carrier. Engage the travel swing lock.
3. Boom down and/or extend the boom, as required,
to ease access to the boom head.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom. Use a ladder or similar
device to reach necessary areas.
4. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the auxilia­
ry lifting sheave and connect it to the jumper
assembly on the main boom head. Refer to
Figure 4-3.
b. Remove the lockout clip from the main boom
head anti‐two block switch weight cable.
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the
auxiliary lifting sheave and install it on the main
boom anti‐two block switch.
5. Remove the wire rope guard from the auxiliary lift­
ing sheave. Remove the wire rope and install the
wire rope guard for storage.
 Operator's Manual

2 13

3 12

11

10
4

WARNING
FAILURE TO HAVE FULLY OPERATIONAL
ATB SYSTEM COULD RESULT IN
5 SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH. MAIN
BOOM ATB IS DISABLED WHEN
LOCKOUT IS INSTALLED. MAIN BOOM
ATB IS FUNCTIONAL WHEN LOCKOUT IS
NOT INSTALLED.

1. Right Side Hitch Pin And Cotter Pin 8. Auxiliary Lifting Sheave Anti‐Two Block Connector
2. Storage Latch 9. Left Side Hitch Pin And Cotter Pin
3. Auxiliary Lifting Sheave 10. Lockout Clip (Installed - ATB Switch Inactive)
4. Auxiliary Lifting Sheave Wire Rope Guard 11. Main Boom Anti‐Two Block Switch
5. Anti‐Two Block Weight 12. Main Boom Head
6. Auxiliary Lifting Sheave Anti‐Two Block Switch 13. Jumper Assembly
7. Plug Assembly

Figure 4-3
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave With Anti‐Two Block System

Section 4 - Attachments 4-5

Operator's Manual

1. Storage Latch
2. Right Side Hitch Pin And Cotter Pin
3. Left Side Hitch Pin And Cotter Pin

Figure 4-4
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave Storage

6. Adequately support the auxiliary lifting sheave. It
weighs approximately 112 lb (51kg). Remove the
cotter pins and hitch pins. Remove the auxiliary lift­
ing sheave.
7. Properly store the auxiliary lifting sheave, cotter
pins and hitch pins, and the wire rope which was
used on the auxiliary lifting sheave.
8. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave Storage
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Fully retract the boom and position the upper over
the rear of the carrier. Engage the travel swing lock.
3. Boom down and/or extend the boom, as required,
to ease access to the boom head.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom. Use a ladder or similar
device to reach necessary areas.

4-6 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
4. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­ Fly Setup Mode
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the auxilia­ The Fly Setup Mode must be used when erecting and
ry lifting sheave and connect it to the jumper storing the fly. This mode extends only the T1 section
assembly on the main boom head. Refer to to 30 in (762mm) maximum to minimize boom head roll
Figure 4-3. during erection and storage of the fly. It is toggled on/
b. Remove the lockout clip from the main boom off through the RCL system. A sensor detects if the fly
head anti‐two block switch weight cable. is moved from the stored position. If the sensor is
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the triggered and the RCL system is not in fly setup mode,
auxiliary lifting sheave and install it on the main a warning banner will display “Fly Setup Mismatch” in
boom anti‐two block switch. the warning message area on the RCL display. If this
5. Remove the wire rope guard from the auxiliary lift­ message appears, fully retract the boom and select Fly
ing sheave. Remove the wire rope and install the Setup Mode ON to continue. On the Crane Configura­
wire rope guard for storage. tion Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/Select
6. Remove the left side hitch pin. Refer to ON.
Figure 4-3. 40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice
7. Rotate auxiliary sheave around to the right side of
boom head until latch engages with the striker
Fly
plate. Refer to Figure 4-4. The crane may be equipped with a two piece 40 ft
8. Install left side storage pin in its original location for (12.19m) manual offset lattice fly. It is made up of a 12 ft
(3.65m) and a 28 ft (8.53m) section. The manual offset
storage.
lattice fly, as shown in Figure 4-6, connects to the
Offset Lattice Fly main boom head. It can be used in one of four offset
positions: 2, 15, 30, or 45. Once installed, the off­
The crane may be equipped with one of the following set lattice fly can be stored on the right side of the boom
offset fly arrangements: base section.
 40 ft (12.19m) two piece lattice fly, stowable, manu­
ally offsettable to 2°, 15°, 30°, and 45°.
 40–67 ft (12.19 – 20.42m) three piece bi­fold lattice fly,
stowable, manually offsettable to 2° , 15° , 30° , and 45° .
 12 ft (3.65m) single piece lattice fly, stowable, manu­
ally offsettable to 2°, 15°, 30°, and 45°.
 12­40 ft (3.65­12.19m) two piece lattice fly, stowable,
manually offsettable to 2°, 15°, 30°, and 45°.
 12­40­67 ft (3.65­12.19­20.42m) three piece bi­fold
lattice fly, stowable, manually offsettable to 2° , 15° ,
30° , and 45° .
 40 ft (12.19m) two piece lattice fly, stowable, hydraul­
ically offsettable to 2° through 45°.
 40–67 ft (12.19 – 20.42m) three piece bi­fold lattice fly,
stowable, hydraulically offsettable to 2° through 45°.
 12 ft (3.65m) single piece lattice fly, stowable, hy­
draulically offsettable to 2° through 45°.
 12­40 ft (3.65­12.19m) two piece lattice fly, stowable,
hydraulically offsettable to 2° through 45°.
 12­40­67 ft (3.65­12.19­20.42m) three piece bi­fold
lattice fly, stowable, hydraulically offsettable to 2°
through 45°.
Refer to the appropriate arrangement in this Section of
this Operator's Manual for instructions on all of these
arrangements.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-7

Operator's Manual
Offset Lattice Fly Installation
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Install the offset fly with the crane level on
fully or intermediate extended outriggers, all
tires clear of the ground, the upper directly
over the rear of the carrier, and the travel
swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install,
remove, erect, or store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the 12 ft (3.65m) and 28 ft (8.53m) sec­
tions are properly pinned together with the con­
necting pins. Refer to Figure 4-6.
6. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-7.
4-8 Section 4 - Attachments
7. Position the fly assembly on secure blocking. Re­
fer to Figure 4-5. The fly assembly weighs
approximately 3,590 lb (1 628kg).
8. Remove the wire rope from the main boom head
machinery or the auxiliary lifting sheave, whichever
is to be used on the fly, and lay it aside to prevent
damage to it during installation of the fly.
9. Lower the boom and check that the swing lug is
pinned in the working position with the swing lug
pivot pin and swing lug connecting pin. Extend the
boom to the fly. Slowly raise or lower the boom to
engage the fly lugs with the fly swing lug and the
head machinery cross shafts.
10. Remove the four fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the right rear of the fly section. Refer to
Figure 4-6. Install all four pins to connect the fly
lugs to the head machinery cross shaft and swing
lug on the right side of the boom. (Install the pins
with the head on top and keeper on the bottom.)
Install the pin keepers.
11. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the left rear of the fly section. Refer to
Figure 4-6. Install the top pin to connect the fly lug
to the head machinery cross shaft on the left side of
the boom head. Turn the t‐handle as required to
push and align the bottom left fly lug and the bot­
tom boom head cross shaft. Install the bottom left
fly connecting pin. (Install the pins with the head
on top and keeper on the bottom.) Install the pin
keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at least a 1/2 in
(1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is obtained.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
major damage to the fly could occur if all
connecting pins are not properly installed.

ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
 Â
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
1. Blocking
1 1
Figure 4-5
Installation And Removal Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly
12. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly deflector
sheave and boom head deflector sheaves. Reeve
the wire rope over the boom deflector sheave, then
over the fly deflector sheaves.
13. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly head
sheaves. Reeve the wire rope over the head
sheave and install the wire rope guard(s).
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
14. Properly connect the anti‐two block system as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head and connect it
to the offset lattice fly section connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the appro­
priate offset lattice fly section anti‐two block
switch cable. Confirm that all anti‐two block
harness connections are made to the appro­
priate fly section(s).
c. Properly install lockout clip on the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.
15. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
16. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca­
pacity deductions with the fly installed before con­
tinuing operations.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
4-9
Operator's Manual

8
1
10
15
9 2

14 4
8

7
6

13
18

17

16

19
11

12

11
1. Right Side Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown) 11. Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
2. Swing Lug 12. Left Side Fly Connecting Pin Storage Rings
3. Swing Lug Pivot Pin 13. Fly Deflector Sheave
4. Right Side Offset Connecting Pin Storage Ring 14. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Section
5. Right Side Fly Connecting Pin Storage Rings 15. Fly Head Deflector Sheave
6. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin (Pivot Pin) 16. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
7. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins 17. Connecting Pins
8. Boom Head Machinery Cross Shaft 18. Fly Adaptor Lug
9. Fly ATB Jumper Assembly 19. Left Side Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown)
10. Swing Lug Connecting Pin

Figure 4-6
40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly

4-10 Section 4 - Attachments


Offset Lattice Fly Removal
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Remove the offset fly with the crane level on
fully or intermediate extended outriggers, all
tires clear of the ground, the upper directly
over the rear of the carrier, and the travel
swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install,
remove, erect, or store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. If the fly is not in the erected position, erect it per “Erec­
tion Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly From The Stored Po­
sition” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
5. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-7. If necessary, change the fly offset to
the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The 40 Ft
(12.19m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset)” in this
Section of this Operator's Manual for detailed in­
structions.
6. Boom down fully.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
7. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Remove the lockout clip from the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable. Refer to
Figure 4-3.
b. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the off­
set lattice fly and install it on the main boom
head anti‐two block switch.
c. Remove the plug assembly from the offset lat­
tice fly and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head. Confirm that all ne­
cessary anti‐two block harness connections
are disconnected.
8. Remove all fly head wire rope guards. Remove
boom head and fly deflector sheave wire rope
guards and lay the wire rope aside.
9. Install all fly wire rope guards for storage.
10. Extend the boom until the fly head sheave rests on
the ground.
11. Securely block up the fly sections to support them.
Refer to Figure 4-5. The fly assembly weighs
approximately 3,590 lb (1 628kg).
WARNING
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.
12. Remove the four fly connecting pins on the right
side and store the pins and keepers in the storage
rings at the right rear of the fly. Do not remove the
top right side swing lug pivot pin or the swing lug
connecting pin from the head machinery cross
shaft. Refer to Figure 4-6. Remove the two fly
connecting pins on the left side and store the pins
and keepers in the storage rings at the left rear of
the fly.
13. Retract the boom away from the fly.
14. Properly reeve or secure the wire rope which was
used on the fly. Install the boom head and deflector
sheave wire rope guards as required.
15. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
16. Properly store fly to prevent damage to it.
4-11
Operator's Manual
Changing The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly Offset
Angle (Manual Offset)
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Change the fly offset angle with the crane
level on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground,
the upper directly over the rear of the carrier,
and the travel swing lock engaged.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4. If the offset lattice fly is not in the erected position,
erect it per “Erection Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly
From The Stored Position” in this Section of this
Operator's Manual.
CAUTION
Do not extend the boom or boom down to the
point of over stressing the offset lattice fly.
Structural damage to the fly could occur if
care is not taken. Use a signal person to aid
the operator in lowering the fly head sheave to
the ground.
5. Carefully extend and/or lower the boom until the fly
head sheave is resting on the ground. Use a signal
person to alert the operator when the sheave is
resting on the ground.
4-12 Section 4 - Attachments
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
6. Remove the offset connecting pins from the fly
adaptor lugs as required.
7. Install the offset connecting pins in the correct lo­
cation for the desired offset angle. Use the infor­
mation label, on the offset lattice fly, to determine
the correct offset connecting pin locations for the
desired offset angle of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-7.
8. Confirm that the offset connecting pins are prop­
erly installed on both sides of the fly and that the
keeper pins are securely installed.
9. Slowly boom up to allow the fly section to adjust it­
self to the desired offset angle.
10. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration before continuing opera­
tions. Refer to Section 1 of this Operator's Manual.
11. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca­
pacity deductions with the fly installed before con­
tinuing operations.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
 Operator's Manual

WARNING
Pins must be installed on both sides of fly.
Rest fly sheave on ground before changing offsets.

Î
Install pins per 25 offset to store or erect fly.

2° OFFSET FLY PIN PLACEMENT

15° Î
Î 2
30°
Î 1

Î
Î
45°

1. Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown) 3. Offset Lattice Fly Section
2. Fly Adaptor Lugs 4. Fly Head Sheave

Figure 4-7
Changing The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset)

Section 4 - Attachments 4-13

Operator's Manual
2
1. Rear Storage Bracket
2. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Section
3. Retaining Pin
4. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
6. Swing Lug
7. Front Fly Storage Bracket
Figure 4-8
40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly (Stored)
Erection Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly From
The Stored Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect the fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, the upper directly over the
rear of the carrier, and the travel swing lock
engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install or
remove the offset fly or while swinging during
erection or storage of the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4-14
3
4
5
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins (1) are installed in the 2° offset position.
Refer to Figure 4-7.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly, and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL system in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL system in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.
Section 4 - Attachments
 Operator's Manual

3
5
2
6

1 7

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 5. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored Position) 6. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position) 7. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
4. Swing Lug Pivot Pin

Figure 4-9
40 Ft (12.09m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-9.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (6) and
install the connecting pins (5) into the swing lug
and through the fly lug. Secure with pin keepers.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
ers on the bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin from the storage rings
(1) on the rear of the fly section. Install it into the
other swing lug hole and secure with pin keeper.
(Install the pin with the head on top and the keeper
on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin from the stor­
age rings (1) on the rear of the fly section. Install
the pin (7) through the fly pivot lug on the bottom
right side of the boom and secure with pin keeper.
(Install the pin with the head on top and the keeper
on the bottom.)

Section 4 - Attachments 4-15

Operator's Manual
1 2
1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
Figure 4-10
40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Retaining Pin
13. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or
the auxiliary lifting sheave, whichever is to be used
on the fly, and lay it aside to prevent damage to it
during erection of the fly.
WARNING
Check that the fly connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
14. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
(1). Refer to Figure 4-10. Position the retaining
pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
pin keeper (4).
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
4-16 Section 4 - Attachments
3 4
3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)
4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)
15. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
16. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
17. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
18. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
19. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
20. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
21. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
 Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-11
40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

22. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly around the boom head until the fly lugs en­
gage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
23. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before operating the crane
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-11. Install the bot­ major damage to the fly could occur if all
tom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the connecting pins are not properly installed.
bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (Install
the pin with the head on top and the keeper on the
bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐handle
until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly
lug is obtained.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-17

Operator's Manual

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins Cross Shaft Location

Figure 4-12
40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

24. Carefully lower the boom until the fly head sheave
is resting on secure blocking. Use a signal person
to alert the operator when the sheave is resting on
the blocking.
25. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
location (1) on the rear of the fly base section and
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-12. Install the in­
side bottom right pin first. Carefully boom down as
required to get the pin to drop in the hole. Install
the inside top right pin. Carefully boom down as
required to get the pin to drop in the hole. (Install
the pins with the head on top and the keeper on the
bottom.) Install the pin keepers.

4-18 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-13
40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

26. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location

(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-13. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Carefully boom
down as required to get the pin to drop in the hole.
(Install the pin with the head on top and the keeper
on the bottom.) Install the pin keeper.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before lifting loads with the
fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
pins are not properly installed.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-19

Operator's Manual

1
3

4
1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 3. Deflector Sheave - Working Position
2. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position 4. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position

Figure 4-14
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Head And Deflector Sheaves Stored/Working Positions (Style 1)

Style 1:
27. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base deflector sheave to a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
the stored position if required. Refer to deflector sheave (2). Rotate sheave assembly
Figure 4-14. to the working position (3) and install deflector
sheave pin (4) in the working position.

4-20 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 3. Deflector Sheave Pin - 4. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard -
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position Working Position
Stored Position

Figure 4-15
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Head And Deflector Sheaves Stored/Working Positions (Style 2)

Style 2:
28. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
sheaves to the working position. Refer to deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
Figure 4-15. deflector sheave rope guard (4) to the working
position and install deflector sheave pin (3) in
the working position.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-21

Operator's Manual
1 1 1

6
2 3
7

8
4
1
9

5 10

1. Rope Guards 5. Fly Head ATB Weight 8. Fly Connector

2. Fly Head Connector 6. Boom Head Pug Assembly 9. Boom Head ATB Switch
3. Fly Head ATB Switch Plug Assembly 7. Jumper Assembly 10. Lockout Clip
4. Fly Head ATB Switch
Figure 4-16
40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Connection

29. Remove the wire rope guard from the fly head and
deflector sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-16. Reeve
the wire rope on the boom deflector sheave then
over the fly deflector and head sheaves. Install all
wire rope guards.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
30. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections. Refer to Figure 4-16.
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper
assembly on main boom head and connect it
to the fly connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the fly head
anti‐two block switch. Connect the fly head ATB
switch plug assembly to the fly head connector.
c. Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
nections are made.
d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.
31. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL System will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
32. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
33. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
with the fly installed before continuing operations.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must be
considered in lifting capacities when the fly is
erected. When making lifts from the main boom
or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly erected,
refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
appropriate deductions from lifting capacities.
Use the offset lattice fly only when the crane is
level on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.

4-22 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

2 2
1

4
4

5 5

1. Boom Head Pug Assembly 4. Boom Head ATB Switch 6

2. Jumper Assembly 5. Lockout Clip
3. Fly Connector 6. Boom Head ATB Weight

Figure 4-17
40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Disconnection

Storage Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly From

The Erected Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store the fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, the upper directly over the
rear of the carrier, and the travel swing lock
engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install or
remove the offset fly or while swinging during
erection or storage of the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. Confirm that the fly adaptor lug and offset connecting
pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer to
Figure 4-7. If necessary change the fly offset to the
2° position. Refer to “Changing The 40 Ft (12.19m)
Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset)” in this Section of
this Operator's Manual for detailed instructions.
5. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
6. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
7. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
8. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections. Refer to Figure 4-17.
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly connector
and connect it to the jumper assembly on the
main boom head.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly and
install it on the main boom anti‐two block switch.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-23

Operator's Manual

1 3

2
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 3. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 4. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position

Figure 4-18
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base deflector sheave to a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the
the stored position if required. Refer to deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
Figure 4-18. stored position (4) and install pin (3) through
one of the holes in the sheave.

4-24 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - 2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - 3. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
Working Position Working Position 4. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard -
Stored Position

Figure 4-19
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
10. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base deflector sheave to a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
the stored position if required. Refer to deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
Figure 4-19. deflector sheave rope guard (4) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (3) in
the stored position.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-25

Operator's Manual

1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location

Figure 4-20
40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

11. Remove wire rope guards from fly head sheaves, fly 12. Carefully lower the boom until the fly head sheave
deflector sheave, and the boom deflector sheaves. is resting on secure blocking. Use a signal person
Refer to Figure 4-16. Remove the wire rope and lay to alert the operator when the sheave is resting on
it aside. Install wire rope guards at all fly sheaves for the blocking.
storage. 13. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-20. To reduce loading and ease pin re­
moval, carefully boom down as required. Store
WARNING connecting pin in the storage location on the rear of
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on the fly base section.
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.

4-26 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-21
40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

14. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-21. To
reduce loading and ease pin removal, carefully
boom down as required. Store the two pins and
keepers in the storage location on the rear picture
frame of the fly base section.
15. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, carefully boom down as re­
quired. Store the two pins and keepers in the stor­
age location on the rear picture frame of the fly base
section.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-27

Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-22
40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

16. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly.
17. Ensure the boom is fully retracted. Boom up to 2°
boom angle.
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause crane damage.
18. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
Refer to Figure 4-22. Install the connecting pin in
the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
keeper.

4-28 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 6 7 8 9

3 4 5

1. Rear Storage Bracket 6. Fly Storage Lug (Engaged In Storage Bracket)

2. Fly Storage Lug (Against Storage Bracket) 7. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
3. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Section 8. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
4. Top Bullet Lug 9. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Storage Bracket
5. Front Storage Bracket

Figure 4-23
40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Storage Brackets

21. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°

WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.
19. Slowly swing the fly around to the right side of the
boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
20. Extend the boom until the fly storage lug can swing
completely against the rear storage bracket. Refer
to Figure 4-23.
boom angle to slide the storage lug on the rear of
the 28 ft (8.53m) fly base section into the slot on the
rear storage bracket. At the same time, the top bul­
let lug on the front fly storage bracket should en­
gage through the hole on the rear of the 28 ft
(8.53m) fly base section and the bullet lug on the 12
ft (3.65m) fly base section should engage through
the hole on the end of the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base sec­
tion storage bracket.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-29

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)

Figure 4-24
40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Retaining Pin

22. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin.

Refer to Figure 4-24. Remove the pin keeper (2)
from the retaining pin (3). Position the retaining pin
in the engaged position (3) and secure with pin
keeper (4).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-30 Section 4 - Attachments


WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
3 4
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-25
40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins Storage
23. Remove the two top fly connecting pins and the
bottom fly connecting pivot pin from the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-25. Store two of
pins and keepers in storage rings on the rear pic­
ture frame of the fly section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
24. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with with the other fly connecting pin.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored Position)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position)
25. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
26. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL System in
the Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configura­
tion Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/
Select OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward
the retract direction. The RCL system will then
enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
27. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
28. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci­
ties with the fly in the stored position before con­
tinuing operations.
4-31
Operator's Manual
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual
Offset Lattice Fly
The crane may be equipped with a three piece 40-67 ft
(12.19-20.42m) manual offset lattice fly. It is made up
of a base section consisting of a 12 ft (3.65m) and a 28 ft
(8.53m) section and a 27 ft (8.23m) tip section. The
manual offset lattice fly, as shown in Figure 4-27 and
Figure 4-28, connects to the main boom head. It can
be used in one of four offset positions: 2, 15, 30, or
45. Once installed, the offset lattice fly can be stored
on the right side of the boom base section.
Offset Lattice Fly Installation
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Install the offset fly with the crane level on
fully or intermediate extended outriggers, all
tires clear of the ground, the upper directly
over the rear of the carrier, and the travel
swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install,
remove, erect, or store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4-32 Section 4 - Attachments
5. Pin the fly base and tip sections together on secure
blocking. Refer to Figure 4-26. The fly base as­
sembly weighs approximately 3,590 lb (1 628kg).
The fly tip section weighs approximately 1,162 lb
(527kg).
6. Confirm that the 12 ft (3.65m) and 28 ft (8.53m) sec­
tions are properly pinned together with the con­
necting pins. Refer to Figure 4-27.
7. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-29.
8. Remove the wire rope from the main boom head
machinery or the auxiliary lifting sheave, whichever
is to be used on the fly, and lay it aside to prevent
damage to it during installation of the fly.
9. Lower the boom and check that the swing lug is
pinned in the working position with the swing lug
pivot pin and swing lug connecting pin. Extend the
boom to the fly. Slowly raise or lower the boom to
engage the fly lugs with the fly swing lug and the
head machinery cross shafts.
10. Remove the four fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the right rear of the fly base section.
Refer to Figure 4-27. Install all four pins to con­
nect the fly lugs to the head machinery cross shaft
and swing lug on the right side of the boom. (Install
the pins with the head on top and keeper on the
bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
11. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the left rear of the fly base section. Re­
fer to Figure 4-27. Install the top pin to connect
the fly lug to the head machinery cross shaft on the
left side of the boom head. Turn the t‐handle as re­
quired to push and align the bottom left fly lug and
the bottom boom head cross shaft. Install the bot­
tom left fly connecting pin. (Install the pins with the
head on top and keeper on the bottom.) Install the
pin keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at least a
1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is ob­
tained.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
major damage to the fly could occur if all
connecting pins are not properly installed.

ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
  ÂÂ
 ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ ÂÂ
 ÂÂ
1. Blocking
1 1
Figure 4-26
Installation And Removal Of The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly
12. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base de­
flector sheave and boom head deflector sheaves.
Reeve the wire rope over the boom deflector
sheave, then over the fly base deflector sheave.
13. Remove the wire rope guards from either the fly
base or fly tip head sheaves, whichever is to be
used. Reeve the wire rope over the appropriate
head sheave and install the wire rope guard(s).
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
14. Properly connect the anti‐two block system as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head and connect it
to the offset lattice fly base section connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the appro­
priate offset lattice fly section anti‐two block
switch cable. Confirm that all anti‐two block
harness connections are made to the appro­
priate fly section(s).
c. Properly install lockout clip on the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
Â
ÂÂ
1
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.
15. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
16. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca­
pacity deductions with the fly installed before con­
tinuing operations.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
4-33
Operator's Manual

8
1
10
16
9 2

14 4
8

7
6

13
17

15

18
11

12

11

1. Right Side Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown) 10. Swing Lug Connecting Pin
2. Swing Lug 11. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin
3. Swing Lug Pivot Pin 12. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Storage Rings
4. Right Side Offset Connecting Pin Storage Ring 13. Fly Base Deflector Sheave
5. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Storage Rings 14. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Section
6. Bottom Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin (Pivot Pin) 15. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
7. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin 16. Fly Base Head Deflector Sheave
8. Boom Head Machinery Cross Shaft 17. Fly Adaptor Lug
9. Fly Base ATB Connector 18. Left Side Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown)

Figure 4-27
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly

4-34 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

8
1 7
2
3

4
4

5
3
6

3
1. Fly Tip Pivot Pin Storage Holes 4. Fly Tip Pivot Pins 7. Fly Tip Section
2. Fly Tip Connecting Pin Storage Holes 5. Fly Base Head Connector 8. Fly Tip Rope Guards
3. Fly Tip Connecting Pins 6. Fly Tip ATB Plug Assembly

Figure 4-28
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section

Offset Lattice Fly Removal

1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Remove the offset fly with the crane level on
fully or intermediate extended outriggers, all
tires clear of the ground, the upper directly
over the rear of the carrier, and the travel
swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install,
remove, erect, or store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-35

Operator's Manual
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. If the fly is not in the erected position, erect it per
“Erection Of The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Fly
From The Stored Position” in this Section of this
Operator's Manual.
5. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-29. If necessary, change the fly offset
to the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The 40-67
Ft (12.19-20.42m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Off­
set)” in this Section of this Operator's Manual for
detailed instructions.
6. Boom down fully.
7. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Remove the lockout clip from the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.
b. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the off­
set lattice fly and install it on the main boom
head anti‐two block switch.
c. Remove the plug assembly from the offset lat­
tice fly base and connect it to the jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head. Confirm that
all necessary anti‐two block harness connec­
tions are disconnected.
8. Remove all fly base and tip wire rope guards. Re­
move boom head and fly deflector sheave wire
rope guards and lay the wire rope aside.
9. Install all fly base and tip wire rope guards for stor­
age.
4-36 Section 4 - Attachments
10. Extend the boom until the fly tip sheave rests on the
ground.
11. Securely block up the fly sections to support them.
Refer to Figure 4-26. The fly base section weighs
approximately 3,590 lb (1 628kg) and the fly tip
section weighs approximately 1,162 lb (527kg).
WARNING
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.
12. If only the fly tip section is to be removed, remove
the connecting pins and pivot pins from the fly tip
lugs only. Store the pins in the storage holes in the
tip section. Refer to Figure 4-28.
13. If removing the fly base, remove the four fly con­
necting pins on the right side and store the pins
and keepers in the storage rings at the right rear of
the fly. Do not remove the swing lug connecting pin
from the head machinery cross shaft. Refer to
Figure 4-27. Remove the two fly connecting pins
on the left side and store the pins and keepers in
the storage rings at the left rear of the fly.
14. Retract the boom away from the fly or the fly base
away from the fly tip if only the fly tip is being re­
moved.
15. Properly reeve or secure the wire rope which was
used on the fly. Install the boom head and deflector
sheave wire rope guards as required.
16. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
17. Properly store fly to prevent damage to it.

Changing The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m)
Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset)
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Change the fly offset angle with the crane
level on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground,
the upper directly over the rear of the carrier,
and the travel swing lock engaged.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4. If the offset lattice fly is not in the erected position,
erect it per “Erection Of The 40-67 Ft
(12.19-20.42m) Fly From The Stored Position” in
this Section of this Operator's Manual.
CAUTION
Do not extend the boom or boom down to the
point of over stressing the offset lattice fly.
Structural damage to the fly could occur if
care is not taken. Use a signal person to aid
the operator in lowering the fly head sheave to
the ground.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
5. Carefully extend and/or lower the boom until the fly
head sheave is resting on the ground. Use a signal
person to alert the operator when the sheave is
resting on the ground.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
6. Remove the offset connecting pins from the fly
adaptor lugs as required.
7. Install the offset connecting pins in the correct loca­
tion for the desired offset angle. Use the information
label, on the offset lattice fly, to determine the correct
offset connecting pin locations for the desired offset
angle of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-29.
8. Confirm that the offset connecting pins are prop­
erly installed on both sides of the fly and that the
keeper pins are securely installed.
9. Slowly boom up to allow the fly section to adjust it­
self to the desired offset angle.
10. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration before continuing opera­
tions. Refer to Section 1 of this Operator's Manual.
11. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca­
pacity deductions with the fly installed before con­
tinuing operations.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
4-37
Operator's Manual

WARNING
Pins must be installed on both sides of fly.

Î
Rest fly sheave on ground before changing offsets.
Install pins per 25 offset to store or erect fly.

Î
2° OFFSET FLY PIN PLACEMENT

15° Î 2

Î
1
30°

Î
Î
45°

1. Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown) 3. Offset Lattice Fly Base Section
2. Fly Adaptor Lugs 4. Fly Head Sheave

Figure 4-29
Changing The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset)

4-38 Section 4 - Attachments


10
1. Rear Storage Bracket
2. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Section
3. Fly Tip Retaining Pin 7.
4. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Retaining Pin 8.
5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section 9.
6. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Bullet Lug 10.
Figure 4-30
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly (Stored)
Erection Of The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m)
Fly From The Stored Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect the fly with the crane level on
outriggers with all tires clear of
the ground, the upper directly over the rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install or
remove the offset fly or while swinging during
erection or storage of the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
Operator's Manual
3
Swing Lug
Front Fly Storage Bracket 4
Fly Tip Storage Bracket 5
27 Ft (8.53m) Fly Tip Section 6
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-29.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL System in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL Display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.
Section 4 - Attachments 4-39
Operator's Manual
4

3
5
2
6

1 7

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 5. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored Position) 6. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position) 7. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
4. Swing Lug Pivot Pin

Figure 4-31
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-31.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (6) and
install the connecting pins (5) into the swing lug
and through the fly lug. Secure with pin keepers.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
ers on the bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin from the storage rings
(1) on the rear of the fly base section. Install it into
the other swing lug hole and secure with pin keep­
er. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin from the stor­
age rings (1) on the rear of the fly base section. In­
stall the pin (7) through the fly pivot lug on the bot­
tom right side of the boom and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)

4-40 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-32
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Retaining Pin

13. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or 14. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used (1). Refer to Figure 4-32. Position the retaining
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
during erection of the fly. pin keeper (4).

WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-41

Operator's Manual

2
1

1. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Erected)

2. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Retaining Pin
3. Pin Keeper

Figure 4-33
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins And Retaining Pin - Fly Tip Erected

15. If the fly tip section is to be erected: b. Remove the pin keeper from the retaining pin.
a. Install two fly tip connecting (pivot) pins in the Position the retaining pin in the disengaged
pivot lugs on the rear of the fly tip section. position and secure with pin keeper.
Refer to Figure 4-33.

4-42 Section 4 - Attachments


1. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Stored)
2. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Retaining Pin
3. Pin Keeper
Figure 4-34
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins And Retaining Pin - Fly Tip Stored
16. If the fly tip section is to remain stored on the side of
the boom:
a. Ensure the fly tip connecting (pivot) pins are in
their storage holes in the rear of the fly tip sec­
tion. Refer to Figure 4-34.
b. Ensure the retaining pin is in the engaged posi­
tion and secured with pin keeper.
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
17. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
18. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
19. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
20. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
21. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
22. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
23. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
4-43
Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-35
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

24. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly around the boom head until the fly lugs en­
gage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
25. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before operating the crane
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-35. Install the bot­ major damage to the fly could occur if all
tom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the connecting pins are not properly installed.
bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (Install
the pin with the head on top and the keeper on the
bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐handle
until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly
lug is obtained.

4-44 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins

Figure 4-36
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

26. Carefully lower the boom until the fly head sheave
is resting on secure blocking. Use a signal person
to alert the operator when the sheave is resting on
the blocking.
27. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
location (1) on the rear of the fly base section and
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-36. Install the in­
side bottom right pin first. Carefully boom down as
required to get the pin to drop in the hole. Install
the inside top right pin. Carefully boom down as
required to get the pin to drop in the hole. (Install
the pins with the head on top and the keeper on the
bottom.) Install the pin keepers.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-45

Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-37
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pins

28. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location

(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-37. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Carefully boom
down as required to get the pin to drop in the hole.
(Install the pin with the head on top and the keeper
on the bottom.) Install the pin keeper.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
major damage to the fly could occur if all
connecting pins are not properly installed.

4-46 Section 4 - Attachments


1. Hitch Pin
2. Fly Tip Head Sheave
Figure 4-38
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Hitch Pin
29. If the fly tip section remained stored on the side of
the boom, proceed to Step 31.
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
30. If the fly tip section is being erected, continue with
the following:
a. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly tip section.
b. Boom up to 5° boom angle.
c. Remove the hitch pin which connects the fly tip
section to the fly base section. Refer to
Figure 4-38. Store the hitch pin back in the
lug on the fly tip section once it is erected.
d. Slowly boom down to allow the fly tip to swing
out from the fly base section.
4-47
Operator's Manual
1
2

1. Fly Tip Connecting Pins Stored

2. Top Right Side Connecting Pin 5
3. Bottom Right Side Connecting Pin
4. Top Left Side Connecting Pin
5. Bottom Left Side Connecting Pin

Figure 4-39
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Connecting Pin Installation

e. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to

swing the fly tip section around the fly base
section until the fly tip lugs engage with the fly
WARNING
All fly tip connecting pins and pivot pins must
base lugs on the left side of the fly.
be properly installed before operating the
f. Remove the fly tip connecting pins from the
crane with the fly tip erected. Serious
storage holes on the rear of the fly tip section.
personal injury or major damage to the fly
Refer to Figure 4-39. Install them through the
could occur if all connecting pins are not
fly tip connecting lugs on both sides of the fly.
properly installed.
Install the top right pin first. Swing the fly tip to
the left to get the pin to drop in the hole. Install
the bottom right pin. Swing the fly tip to the
right to get the pin to drop in the hole. Install the
top left pin and then the bottom left. (Install the
pins with the head on top and the keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.

4-48 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1
3

4
1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 3. Deflector Sheave - Working Position
2. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position 4. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position

Figure 4-40
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Head And Deflector Sheaves Stored/Working Positions (Style 1)

Style 1:
31. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base deflector sheave to a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
the stored position if required. Refer to deflector sheave (2). Rotate sheave assembly
Figure 4-40. to the working position (3) and install deflector
sheave pin (4) in the working position.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-49

Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 3. Deflector Sheave Pin - 4. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard -
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position Working Position
Stored Position

Figure 4-41
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Head And Deflector Sheaves Stored/Working Positions (Style 2)

Style 2:
32. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
sheaves to the working position. Refer to deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
Figure 4-41. deflector sheave rope guard (4) to the working
position and install deflector sheave pin (3) in
the working position.

4-50 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
1

1 8
1
2
9

10
1

3
11

5
4 6
7
12
1. Rope Guards 5. Fly Tip ATB Storage Receptacle 9. Jumper Assembly
2. Fly Tip Head ATB Switch Plug Assembly 6. Fly Tip ATB Plug Assembly 10. Fly Base Connector
3. Fly Tip Head ATB Switch 7. Fly Base Head Connector 11. Boom Head ATB Switch
4. Fly Head ATB Weight 8. Boom Head Plug Assembly 12. Lockout Clip

Figure 4-42
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Connection
33. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base head
and deflector and fly tip head sheaves. Refer to
Figure 4-42. Reeve the wire rope on the boom de­
flector sheave then over the fly base deflector head
and fly tip head sheaves. Install all wire rope guards.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
34. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections. Refer to Figure 4-42.
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper
assembly on main boom head and connect it
to the fly base section connector.
b. Remove the fly tip plug assembly from its stor­
age receptacle and connect it to the fly base
head connector.
c. Install the anti‐two block weight on the offset
lattice fly tip section anti‐two block switch.
Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
nections are made.
d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.
35. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL System will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
36. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
37. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
with the fly installed before continuing operations.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-51

Operator's Manual
2
1
4
5
1. Boom Head Pug Assembly
2. Jumper Assembly
3. Fly Base Connector
Figure 4-43
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Disconnection
Storage Of The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m)
Fly From The Erected Position
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install or
remove the fly or while swinging during erection
or storage of the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4-52 Section 4 - Attachments
2
4
5
6
4. Boom Head ATB Switch
5. Lockout Clip
6. Boom Head ATB Weight
4. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-29. If necessary change the fly offset
to the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The 40-67
Ft (12.19-20.42m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Off­
set)” in this Section of this Operator's Manual for
detailed instructions.
5. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
6. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
7. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
8. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base con­
nector and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the fly tip ATB plug assembly from the
fly base head connector. Connect the plug as­
sembly into the fly tip ATB storage receptacle.
d. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
tip section and install it on the main boom anti‐
two block switch.
 Operator's Manual

1 3

2
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 3. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 4. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position

Figure 4-44
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base deflector sheave to a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the
the stored position if required. Refer to deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
Figure 4-45. stored position (4) and install pin (3) through
one of the holes in the sheave.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-53

Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - 2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - 3. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
Working Position Working Position 4. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard -
Stored Position

Figure 4-45
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
10. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base deflector sheave to a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
the stored position if required. Refer to deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
Figure 4-44 or Figure 4-45. deflector sheave rope guard (4) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (3) in
the stored position.

4-54 Section 4 - Attachments


1
1. Bottom Left Side Connecting Pin
2. Top Left Side Connecting Pin
3. Bottom Right Side Connecting Pin
4. Top Right Side Connecting Pin
5. Fly Tip Connecting Pins Stored
Figure 4-46
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Connecting Pin Removal
11. Remove wire rope guards from fly head sheaves, fly
deflector sheave, and the boom deflector sheaves.
Remove the wire rope and lay it aside. Install wire
rope guards at all fly sheaves for storage.
12. If the fly tip section is erected, continue as follows:
a. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly tip section.
b. Ensure the boom is fully retraced. Boom up to
2° boom angle.
WARNING
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
3
c. Remove the bottom and then the top fly tip con­
necting pins on the left side of the fly tip section.
Refer to Figure 4-46. To ease pin removal, relieve
the loading on the pins by pushing the fly tip from
side to side. Store pins and keepers in the storage
location on the rear of the fly tip section.
d. Remove the inside bottom right fly tip connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly tip section. To
reduce loading and ease pin removal, push
the fly tip slightly right or left. Remove the in­
side top right fly tip connecting pin on the right
side of the fly tip section. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, push the fly tip slightly
left or right. Store pins and keepers in the stor­
age location on the rear of the fly tip section.
4-55
Operator's Manual

2
3

1. Hitch Pin
2. Fly Tip Head Sheave
3. Fly Base Section

Figure 4-47
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Hitch Pin

f. Align the storage bracket on the fly tip section

WARNING with the storage bracket on the fly base sec­
tion. Refer to Figure 4-47. Install the hitch pin
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly tip
through the storage brackets and secure the
could swing around fly base rapidly. Keep all
cotter pin.
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.

e. Using the hand line attached to the fly tip sec­

tion, slowly swing the fly tip section around to
the right side of the fly base section. Slowly
boom up if necessary to ease fly tip swing.

4-56 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location

Figure 4-48
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

13. Carefully lower the boom until the fly head sheave
is resting on secure blocking. Use a signal person
to alert the operator when the sheave is resting on
the blocking.
14. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-48. To reduce loading and ease pin re­
moval, carefully boom down as required. Store
connecting pin in the storage location on the rear of
the fly base section.

WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-57

Operator's Manual

1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-49
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

15. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-49. To
reduce loading and ease pin removal, carefully
boom down as required. Store the two pins and
keepers in the storage location on the rear picture
frame of the fly base section.
16. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, carefully boom down as re­
quired. Store the two pins and keepers in the stor­
age location on the rear picture frame of the fly base
section.

4-58 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-50
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

17. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly.
18. Ensure the boom is fully retracted. Boom up to 2°
boom angle.
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause crane damage.
19. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
Refer to Figure 4-50. Install the connecting pin in
the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
keeper.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-59

Operator's Manual

1 2 6 7 8 9

3 4 5

1. Rear Storage Bracket 6. Fly Storage Lug (Engaged In Storage Bracket)

2. Fly Storage Lug (Against Storage Bracket) 7. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
3. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Section 8. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
4. Top Bullet Lug 9. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Storage Bracket
5. Front Storage Bracket

Figure 4-51
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Storage Brackets

22. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°

WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.
20. Slowly swing the fly base section around to the
right side of the boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
21. Extend the boom until the fly storage lug can swing
completely against the rear storage bracket. Refer
to Figure 4-51.
boom angle to slide the storage lug on the rear of
the 28 ft (8.53m) fly base section into the slot on the
rear storage bracket. At the same time, the top bul­
let lug on the front fly storage bracket should en­
gage through the hole on the rear of the 28 ft
(8.53m) fly base section and the bullet lug on the 12
ft (3.65m) fly base section should engage through
the hole on the end of the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base sec­
tion storage bracket.

4-60 Section 4 - Attachments


1 2
1. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)
2. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)
Figure 4-52
28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Retaining Pin
23. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin.
Refer to Figure 4-52. Remove the pin keeper (2)
from the retaining pin (3). Position the retaining pin in
the engaged position (3) and secure with pin keeper
(4).
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
3 4
3. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
4. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
4-61
Operator's Manual

1 3

2
4

1. Fly Tip Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 3. Fly Tip Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)

Figure 4-53
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Retaining Pin

24. If the fly tip section was erected: a. Remove the pin keeper from the retaining pin.
Position the retaining pin in the engaged posi­
tion and secure with pin keeper.

4-62 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

2
3

4
1

1. Hitch Pin
2. Fly Tip Head Sheave
3. Fly Base Section
4. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins

Figure 4-54
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Storage

25. If the fly tip section remained stored on the boom: b. Install two fly tip connecting (pivot) pins in the
a. Align the storage bracket on the fly tip section pivot lugs on the rear of the fly tip section.
with the storage bracket on the fly base sec­ Refer to Figure 4-54.
tion. Refer to Figure 4-54. Install the hitch pin
through the storage brackets and secure the
hitch pin.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-63

Operator's Manual
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
3
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-55
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins
26. Remove the two top fly base connecting pins and
the bottom fly base connecting pivot pin from the
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-55.
Store two of pins and keepers in storage rings on
the rear picture frame of the fly base section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
27. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with the other fly connecting pin.
4-64 Section 4 - Attachments
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored Position)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position)
28. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
29. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL System in
the Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configura­
tion Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/
Select OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward
the retract direction. The RCL system will then
enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
30. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
31. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci­
ties with the fly in the stored position before con­
tinuing operations.

12 ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice
Fly
The crane may be equipped with a one piece 12 ft
(3.65m) manual offset lattice fly. It is made up of a 12 ft
(3.65m) base section. The manual offset lattice fly, as
shown in Figure 4-6, connects to the main boom
head. It can be used in one of four offset positions: 2,
15, 30, or 45. Once installed, the offset lattice fly
can be stored on the right side of the boom base sec­
tion.
Offset Lattice Fly Installation
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers with all
tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Install the offset fly with the crane level on
fully extended outriggers, all tires clear of the
ground, the upper directly over the rear of the
carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install,
remove, erect, or store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
5. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-58.
6. Position the fly base on secure blocking. Refer to
Figure 4-56. The fly base section weighs approxi­
mately 2,305 lb (1 045kg).
7. Remove the wire rope from the main boom head
machinery or the auxiliary lifting sheave, whichever
is to be used on the fly, and lay it aside to prevent
damage to it during installation of the fly.
8. Lower the boom and check that the swing lug is
pinned in the working position with the swing lug
pivot pin and swing lug connecting pin. Extend the
boom to the fly. Slowly raise or lower the boom to
engage the fly lugs with the fly swing lug and the
head machinery cross shafts.
9. Remove the four fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the right rear of the fly base section.
Refer to Figure 4-57. Install all four pins to con­
nect the fly lugs to the head machinery cross shaft
and the swing lug on the right side of the boom.
(Install the pins with the head on top and keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
10. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the left rear of the fly base section. Re­
fer to Figure 4-57. Install the top pin to connect
the fly lug to the head machinery cross shaft on the
left side of the boom head. Turn the t‐handle as re­
quired to push and align the bottom left fly lug and
the bottom boom head cross shaft. Install the bot­
tom left fly connecting pin. (Install the pins with the
head on top and keeper on the bottom.) Install the
pin keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at least a
1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is ob­
tained.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
major damage to the fly could occur if all
connecting pins are not properly installed.
4-65
Operator's Manual

ÂÂÂ ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
  ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
 Â
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
1. Blocking 1
ÂÂÂÂ 1
Figure 4-56
Installation And Removal Of The 12ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly

11. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base de­
flector sheave and boom head deflector sheaves.
Reeve the wire rope over the boom deflector
sheave, then over the fly base deflector sheaves.
12. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly head
sheaves. Reeve the wire rope over the fly head
sheaves and install the wire rope guard(s).
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the appro­
priate offset lattice fly section anti‐two block
switch cable. Confirm that all anti‐two block
harness connections are made to the appro­
priate fly section(s).
c. Properly install lockout clip on the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.

Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the

CAUTION anti‐two block switch is inactive.
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
tion during operation.
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
13. Properly connect the anti‐two block system as follows:
pended from each anti‐two block switch.
a. Disconnect plug assembly from jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head and connect it
to the offset lattice fly base section connector.

4-66 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
14. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
WARNING
15. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca­ The fly adds weight to the boom which must
pacity deductions with the fly installed before con­ be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
tinuing operations. is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
WARNING the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
When making lifts from the 12 ft (3.65m) fly at the crane is level on fully or intermediate
2° offset and 70 degree boom angle or higher, extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
2 parts of line is the maximum with the ground.
auxiliary sheave erected. Wire rope may
contact auxiliary lifting sheave. Auxiliary
lifting sheave may be removed or stored on
the boom head to eliminate the possible
interference. A warning will be shown on the
RCL display if the configuration can result in
wire rope contacting the auxiliary lifting
sheave.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-67

Operator's Manual

1
8
10 2
9
3

4
8

7 6

13

15

14

16

11
17
12
11
1. Right Side Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown) 10. Swing Lug Connecting Pin
2. Swing Lug 11. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin
3. Swing Lug Pivot Pin 12. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Storage Rings
4. Right Side Offset Locking Pin Storage Ring 13. Fly Base Deflector Sheave
5. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Storage Rings 14. 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
6. Bottom Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin (Pivot Pin) 15. Fly Adaptor Lug
7. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin 16. Left Side Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown)
8. Boom Head Machinery Cross Shaft 17. Left Side Offset Locking Pin Storage Ring
9. Fly Base ATB Jumper Assembly

Figure 4-57
12ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly

4-68 Section 4 - Attachments


Offset Lattice Fly Removal
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers with all
tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Remove the offset fly with the crane level on
fully extended outriggers, all tires clear of the
ground, the upper directly over the rear of the
carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install,
remove, erect, or store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. If the fly is not in the erected position, erect it per
“Erection Of The 12 ft (3.65m) Fly From The Stored
Position”, as applicable, in this Section of this Opera­
tor's Manual.
5. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-58. If necessary, change the fly offset
to the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The 12ft
(3.65m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset)” in this
Section of this Operator's Manual for detailed in­
structions.
6. Boom down fully.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
7. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Remove the lockout clip from the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable. Refer to
Figure 4-91.
b. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the off­
set lattice fly and install it on the main boom
head anti‐two block switch.
c. Remove the plug assembly from the offset lat­
tice fly base and connect it to the jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head. Confirm that
all necessary anti‐two block harness connec­
tions are disconnected.
8. Remove all fly base wire rope guards. Remove
boom head and fly deflector sheave wire rope
guards and lay the wire rope aside.
9. Install all fly base wire rope guards for storage.
10. Extend the boom until the fly base sheave rests on
the ground.
11. Securely block up the fly to support it. Refer to
Figure 4-56. The fly base section weighs approxi­
mately 2,305 lb (1 045kg).
WARNING
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.
12. Remove the four fly connecting pins on the right
side and store the pins and keepers in the storage
rings at the right rear of the fly. Do not remove the
swing lug connecting pin from the head machinery
cross shaft. Refer to Figure 4-57. Remove the
two fly connecting pins on the left side and store
the pins and keepers in the storage rings at the left
rear of the fly.
13. Retract the boom away from the fly base.
14. Properly reeve or secure the wire rope which was
used on the fly. Install the boom head and deflector
sheave wire rope guards as required.
15. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
16. Properly store fly to prevent damage to it.
4-69
Operator's Manual
Changing The 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Offset
Angle (Manual Offset)
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers with all
tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Change the fly offset angle with the crane
level on fully extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, the upper directly over the
rear of the carrier, and the travel swing lock
engaged.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4. If the offset lattice fly is not in the erected position,
erect it per “Erection Of The 12 ft (3.65m) Fly From
The Stored Position”, as applicable, in this Section of
this Operator's Manual.
CAUTION
Do not extend the boom or boom down to the
point of over stressing the offset lattice fly.
Structural damage to the fly could occur if
care is not taken. Use a signal person to aid
the operator in lowering the fly head sheave to
the ground.
4-70 Section 4 - Attachments
5. Carefully extend and/or lower the boom until the fly
head sheave is resting on the ground. Use a signal
person to alert the operator when the sheave is
resting on the ground.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
6. Remove the offset connecting pins from the fly
adaptor lugs as required.
7. Install the offset connecting pins in the correct lo­
cation for the desired offset angle. Use the infor­
mation label, on the offset lattice fly, to determine
the correct offset connecting pin locations for the
desired offset angle of the fly. Refer to
Figure 4-58.
8. Slowly boom up to allow the fly section to adjust it­
self to the desired offset angle.
9. Also install the offset locking pins in the correct lo­
cation for the desired offset angle. Use the infor­
mation label, on the offset lattice fly, to determine
the correct offset locking pin locations for the de­
sired offset angle of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-58.
Note: This locking pin prevents the 12 ft (3.65m)
fly base section from bouncing up and is re­
quired only when using the 12 ft (3.65m) fly
base section.
10. Confirm that the offset connecting pins (and offset
locking pins, if applicable) are properly installed on
both sides of the fly and that the keeper pins are se­
curely installed.
 Operator's Manual
11. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration before continuing opera­
tions. Refer to Section 1 of this Operator's Manual.
WARNING
12. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca­ The fly adds weight to the boom which must
pacity deductions with the fly installed before con­ be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
tinuing operations. is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
WARNING the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
When making lifts from the 12 ft (3.65m) fly at the crane is level on fully or intermediate
2° offset and 70 degree boom angle or higher, extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
2 parts of line is the maximum with the ground.
auxiliary sheave erected. Wire rope may
contact auxiliary lifting sheave. Auxiliary
lifting sheave may be removed or stored on
the boom head to eliminate the possible
interference. A warning will be shown on the
RCL display if the configuration can result in
wire rope contacting the auxiliary lifting
sheave.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-71

Operator's Manual

WARNING
Pins must be installed on both sides of fly.

Î
Rest fly sheave on ground before changing offsets.
Install pins per 25 offset to store or erect fly.

2° OFFSET FLY PIN PLACEMENT

15° Î 5
7
8
30°
Î 2

Î
Î
45°

1. Offset Locking Pin Storage Ring (2° Position Shown-Each Side) 5. Fly Head Sheave
2. Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown) 6. 45° Offset Lock Pin Location
3. Fly Adaptor Lugs 7. 30° Offset Lock Pin Location
4. 12 ft (3.65m) Offset Lattice Fly Base Section 8. 15° Offset Lock Pin Location

Figure 4-58
Changing The 12ft (3.65m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset)

4-72 Section 4 - Attachments


1. Retaining Pin
2. 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
3. 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
4. Swing Lug
Figure 4-59
12ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly (Stored)
Erection Of The 12 ft (3.65m) Fly From
The Stored Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers with all
tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect the fly with the crane level on fully
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground, the upper directly over the rear of the
carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install or
remove the offset fly or while swinging during
erection or storage of the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
2
3
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-58.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL System in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL Display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.
4-73
Operator's Manual

3
5
2

1 7
1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 5. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored Position) 6. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position) 7. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
4. Swing Lug Pivot Pin

Figure 4-60
12 ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-60.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (6) and
install the connecting pins (5) into the swing lug
and through the fly lug. Secure with pin keepers.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
ers on the bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin from the storage rings
(1) on the rear of the fly base section. Install it into
the other swing lug hole and secure with pin keep­
er. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin from the stor­
age rings (1) on the rear of the fly base section. In­
stall the pin (7) through the fly pivot lug on the bot­
tom right side of the boom and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)

4-74 Section 4 - Attachments


1 2
1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
Figure 4-61
12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Retaining Pin
13. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it
during erection of the fly.
WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
14. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
(1). Refer to Figure 4-61. Position the retaining
pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
pin keeper (4).
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
3 4
3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)
4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)
15. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
16. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
17. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
18. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
19. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
20. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
21. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
4-75
Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-62
12 ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

22. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly around the boom head until the fly lugs en­
gage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
23. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before operating the crane
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-62. Install the bot­ major damage to the fly could occur if all
tom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the connecting pins are not properly installed.
bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (Install
the pin with the head on top and the keeper on the
bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐handle
until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly
lug is obtained.

4-76 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins

Figure 4-63
12 ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

24. Carefully lower the boom until the fly head sheave
is resting on approximately 6 ft (1.8m) secure
blocking. Use a signal person to alert the operator
when the sheave is resting on the blocking.
25. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
location (1) on the rear of the fly base section and
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-63. Install the in­
side bottom right pin first. Carefully boom down as
required to get the pin to drop in the hole. Install
the inside top right pin. Carefully boom down as
required to get the pin to drop in the hole. (Install
the pins with the head on top and the keeper on the
bottom.) Install the pin keepers.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-77

Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-64
12 ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pins

26. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location

(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-64. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Carefully boom
down as required to get the pin to drop in the hole.
(Install the pin with the head on top and the keeper
on the bottom.) Install the pin keeper.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
major damage to the fly could occur if all
connecting pins are not properly installed.

4-78 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1
5

4
7
4 3

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave - Working Position

2. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-65
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Working Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
27. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector up to the working position (5) and install de­
sheaves to the working position. Refer to flector sheave pin (6) in the working position.
Figure 4-65. b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
deflector sheave (2). Rotate sheave assembly the working position (7) and install pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-79

Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

7 4

3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-66
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Working Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
28. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the working position. Refer to
Figure 4-66.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the working
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the working position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
the working position (7) and install pin (4).

4-80 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1
1

1
6

8
2
3
4 10

5
10
1. Rope Guards 5. Fly Head ATB Weight 8. Fly Base Connector
2. Fly Base Head Connector 6. Boom Head Pug Assembly 9. Boom Head ATB Switch
3. Fly Base Head ATB Switch Plug Assembly 7. Jumper Assembly 10. Lockout Clip
4. Fly Base Head ATB Switch

Figure 4-67
12 ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Connection
29. Remove the wire rope guard from the fly base head
and deflector sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-67.
Reeve the wire rope on the boom deflector sheave
then over the fly deflector and head sheaves. In­
stall all wire rope guards.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
30. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections. Refer to Figure 4-67.
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper
assembly on main boom head and connect it
to the fly base connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the fly base
head anti‐two block switch. Connect the fly
base head ATB switch plug assembly to the fly
base head connector.
c. Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
nections are made.
d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-81

Operator's Manual
31. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL System will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
32. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
33. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
with the fly installed before continuing operations.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.

WARNING
When making lifts from the 12 ft (3.65m) fly at
2° offset and 70 degree boom angle or higher,
2 parts of line is the maximum with the
auxiliary sheave erected. Wire rope may
contact auxiliary lifting sheave. Auxiliary
lifting sheave may be removed or stored on
the boom head to eliminate the possible
interference. A warning will be shown on the
RCL display if the configuration can result in
wire rope contacting the auxiliary lifting
sheave.

4-82 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
2 2
1

4
4

5 5

1. Boom Head Pug Assembly 4. Boom Head ATB Switch

6
2. Jumper Assembly 5. Lockout Clip
3. Fly Base Connector 6. Boom Head ATB Weight

Figure 4-68
12 ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Disconnection

Storage Of The 12 ft (3.65m) Fly From The
Erected Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers with all
tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store the fly with the crane level on fully
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground, the upper directly over the rear of the
carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install or
remove the offset fly or while swinging during
erection or storage of the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-58. If necessary change the fly offset
to the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The 12 ft
(3.65m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset)” in this
Section of this Operator's Manual for detailed in­
structions.
5. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
6. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
7. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract ot line
up with the T1 section.
8. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base con­
nector and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
base section and install it on the main boom
anti‐two block switch.

WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-83

Operator's Manual

5
1

4
3
4 7
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-69
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
Figure 4-69. sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the sheave down on the pin (4).
deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
stored position (6) and install pin (5) through
the one of the holes in the sheave.

4-84 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

3 4

7 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-70
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
10. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to
Figure 4-70.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the stored position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
sheave down on the pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-85

Operator's Manual

1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location

Figure 4-71
12 ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

11. Remove wire rope guards from fly head sheaves, 12. Carefully lower the boom until the fly head sheave
fly base deflector sheave, and boom deflector is resting on approximately 6 ft (1.8m) secure
sheave. Refer to Figure 4-67. Remove the wire blocking. Use a signal person to alert the operator
rope and lay it aside. Install wire rope guards at all when the sheave is resting on the blocking.
fly sheaves for storage. 13. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-71. To reduce loading and ease pin re­
moval, carefully boom down as required. Store
WARNING connecting pin in the storage location on the rear of
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on the fly base section.
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.

4-86 Section 4 - Attachments


1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin
Figure 4-72
12 ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Right Side Connecting Pins
14. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-72. To
reduce loading and ease pin removal, adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
15. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, carefully boom down as re­
quired. Store the two pins and keepers in the stor­
age location on the rear picture frame of the fly base
section.
4-87
Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-73
12 ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

16. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly.
17. Ensure the boom is fully retracted. Boom up to 2°
boom angle.
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause crane damage.
18. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
Refer to Figure 4-73. Install the connecting pin in
the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
keeper.

4-88 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
3 3 2

1. Storage Lug 1
2. Storage Pin
3. 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section

Figure 4-74
12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Storage Lug

WARNING 1 2 3
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.

19. Slowly swing the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base around to

the right side of the boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
20. Extend the boom until the 12 ft (3.65m) fly storage
lug clears the storage pin. Refer to Figure 4-74.
21. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°
boom angle to engage the storage lug with the
storage pin. Refer to Figure 4-97. At the same
time, the bullet lug on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base
should engage through the hole on the end of the
12 ft (3.65m) fly base storage bracket
(Figure 4-75) and the bullet lug on the retaining 1. 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base 3. 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base
pin bracket on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base should en­ 2. 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Storage Bracket
gage through the hole on the retaining pin bracket Bullet Lug
on the boom (Refer to Figure 4-76). Figure 4-75
12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Bullet Lug

Note: If the 28 ft (8.53m) tip section is stored on

the boom, observe that the 12 ft (3.65m) base
lugs engage with the 28 ft (8.53m) tip section.
Refer to Figure 4-100.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-89

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)

Figure 4-76
12 ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Fly Base Retaining Pin

22. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin.

Refer to Figure 4-76. Remove the pin keeper (2)
from the retaining pin (1). Position the retaining pin in
the engaged position (3) and secure with pin keeper
(4).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-90 Section 4 - Attachments


WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
3 4
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-77
12 ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Right Side Connecting Pins
23. Remove the two top fly base connecting pins and
the bottom fly base connecting pivot pin from the
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-77.
Store two of pins and keepers in storage rings on
the rear picture frame of the fly base section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
24. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with with the other fly connecting pin.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored Position)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position)
25. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
26. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL system in the
Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configuration
Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/Select
OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward the re­
tract direction. The RCL system will then enter pre­
vious boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
27. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
28. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci­
ties with the fly in the stored position before con­
tinuing operations.
4-91
Operator's Manual
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual
Offset Lattice Fly
The crane may be equipped with a two piece 12-40 ft
(3.65-12.19m) manual offset lattice fly. It is made up of
a 12 ft (3.65m) base and a 28 ft (8.53m) tip section. The
manual offset lattice fly, as shown in Figure 4-6, con­
nects to the main boom head. It can be used in one of
four offset positions: 2, 15, 30, or 45. Once in­
stalled, the offset lattice fly can be stored on the right
side of the boom base section.
Offset Lattice Fly Installation
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Install the offset fly with the crane level on
fully or intermediate extended outriggers, all
tires clear of the ground, the upper directly
over the rear of the carrier, and the travel
swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install,
remove, erect, or store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4-92 Section 4 - Attachments
5. Confirm that the 12 ft (3.65m) base and 28 ft
(8.53m) tip sections are pinned together with the
connecting pins. Refer to Figure 4-79.
6. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-80.
7. Position the fly assembly on secure blocking. Re­
fer to Figure 4-78. The fly base section weighs
approximately 2,305 lb (1 045kg) and the fly tip
section weighs approximately 1,537 lb (697kg).
The full fly assembly weighs approximately 3,845
lb (1 744kg).
8. Remove the wire rope from the main boom head
machinery or the auxiliary lifting sheave, whichever
is to be used on the fly, and lay it aside to prevent
damage to it during installation of the fly.
9. Lower the boom and check that the swing lug is
pinned in the working position with the swing lug
pivot pin and swing lug connecting pin. Extend the
boom to the fly. Slowly raise or lower the boom to
engage the fly lugs with the fly swing lug and the
head machinery cross shafts.
10. Remove the four fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the right rear of the fly base section.
Refer to Figure 4-79. Install all four pins to con­
nect the fly lugs to the head machinery cross shaft
and the swing lug on the right side of the boom.
(Install the pins with the head on top and keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
11. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the left rear of the fly base section. Re­
fer to Figure 4-79. Install the top pin to connect
the fly lug to the head machinery cross shaft on the
left side of the boom head. Turn the t‐handle as re­
quired to push and align the bottom left fly lug and
the bottom boom head cross shaft. Install the bot­
tom left fly connecting pin. (Install the pins with the
head on top and keeper on the bottom.) Install the
pin keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at least a
1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is ob­
tained.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
major damage to the fly could occur if all
connecting pins are not properly installed.
 Operator's Manual

ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
1. Blocking 1
ÂÂÂÂ 1
Figure 4-78
Installation And Removal Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly

12. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base de­
flector sheave and boom head deflector sheaves.
Reeve the wire rope over the boom deflector
sheave, then over the fly base deflector sheaves.
13. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly head
sheaves. Reeve the wire rope over the fly head
sheaves and install the wire rope guard(s).
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the appro­
priate offset lattice fly section anti‐two block
switch cable. Confirm that all anti‐two block
harness connections are made to the appro­
priate fly section(s).
c. Properly install lockout clip on the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.

Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the

CAUTION anti‐two block switch is inactive.
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
tion during operation.
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
14. Properly connect the anti‐two block system as follows:
pended from each anti‐two block switch.
a. Disconnect plug assembly from jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head and connect it
to the offset lattice fly base section connector.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-93

Operator's Manual
15. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
16. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca­
pacity deductions with the fly installed before con­
tinuing operations.
4-94 Section 4 - Attachments
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
 Operator's Manual

1
8
16
10 2
9
3

14 4
8

7 6

13

17

15

18

11
19
12
11
1. Right Side Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown) 11. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin
2. Swing Lug 12. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Storage Rings
3. Swing Lug Pivot Pin 13. Fly Base Deflector Sheave
4. Right Side Offset Locking Pin Storage Ring 14. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Tip Section
5. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Storage Rings 15. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
6. Bottom Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin (Pivot Pin) 16. Fly Base Head Deflector Sheave
7. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin 17. Fly Adaptor Lug
8. Boom Head Machinery Cross Shaft 18. Left Side Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown)
9. Fly Base ATB Jumper Assembly 19. Left Side Offset Locking Pin Storage Ring
10. Swing Lug Connecting Pin

Figure 4-79
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly

Section 4 - Attachments 4-95

Operator's Manual
Offset Lattice Fly Removal
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Remove the offset fly with the crane level on
fully or intermediate extended outriggers, all
tires clear of the ground, the upper directly
over the rear of the carrier, and the travel
swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install,
remove, erect, or store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. If the fly is not in the erected position, erect it per
“Erection Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From The Stored
Position” or “Erection Of The 12-40 Ft
(3.65-12.19m) Fly From The Stored Position”, as ap­
plicable, in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
5. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-80. If necessary, change the fly offset
to the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The 12-40
Ft (3.65-12.19m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset)”
in this Section of this Operator's Manual for de­
tailed instructions.
6. Boom down fully.
7. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Remove the lockout clip from the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable. Refer to
Figure 4-91.
4-96 Section 4 - Attachments
b. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the off­
set lattice fly and install it on the main boom
head anti‐two block switch.
c. Remove the plug assembly from the offset lat­
tice fly base and connect it to the jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head. Confirm that
all necessary anti‐two block harness connec­
tions are disconnected.
8. Remove all fly base and tip wire rope guards. Re­
move boom head and fly deflector sheave wire
rope guards and lay the wire rope aside.
9. Install all fly base and tip wire rope guards for stor­
age.
10. Extend the boom until the fly tip sheave rests on the
ground.
11. Securely block up the fly to support it. Refer to
Figure 4-78. The fly base section weighs approxi­
mately 2,305 lb (1 045kg) and the fly tip section
weighs approximately 1,537 lb (697kg). The full as­
sembly weighs approximately 3,845 lb (1 744kg).
WARNING
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.
12. If only the fly tip section is to be removed, remove
the connecting pins and pivot pins from the fly tip
lugs only. Store the pins in the storage holes in the
tip section. Refer to Figure 4-79.
13. If removing the fly base, remove the four fly con­
necting pins on the right side and store the pins
and keepers in the storage rings at the right rear of
the fly. Do not remove the swing lug connecting pin
from the head machinery cross shaft. Refer to
Figure 4-79. Remove the two fly connecting pins
on the left side and store the pins and keepers in
the storage rings at the left rear of the fly.
14. Retract the boom away from the fly or the fly base
away from the fly tip if only the fly tip is being re­
moved.
15. Properly reeve or secure the wire rope which was
used on the fly. Install the boom head and deflector
sheave wire rope guards as required.
16. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
17. Properly store fly to prevent damage to it.

Changing The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m)Fly
Offset Angle (Manual Offset)
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Change the fly offset angle with the crane
level on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground,
the upper directly over the rear of the carrier,
and the travel swing lock engaged.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4. If the offset lattice fly is not in the erected position,
erect it per “Erection Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From
The Stored Position” or “Erection Of The 12-40 Ft
(3.65-12.19m) Fly From The Stored Position”, as ap­
plicable, in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
CAUTION
Do not extend the boom or boom down to the
point of over stressing the offset lattice fly.
Structural damage to the fly could occur if
care is not taken. Use a signal person to aid
the operator in lowering the fly head sheave to
the ground.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
5. Carefully extend and/or lower the boom until the fly
head sheave is resting on the ground. Use a signal
person to alert the operator when the sheave is
resting on the ground.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
6. Remove the offset connecting pins from the fly
adaptor lugs as required.
7. Install the offset connecting pins in the correct lo­
cation for the desired offset angle. Use the infor­
mation label, on the offset lattice fly, to determine
the correct offset connecting pin locations for the
desired offset angle of the fly. Refer to
Figure 4-80.
8. Slowly boom up to allow the fly section to adjust it­
self to the desired offset angle.
9. If using the 12 ft (3.65m) base section only, also in­
stall the offset locking pins in the correct location
for the desired offset angle. Use the information la­
bel, on the offset lattice fly, to determine the correct
offset locking pin locations for the desired offset
angle of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-80.
Note: This locking pin prevents the 12 ft fly base
section from bouncing up and is required only
when using the 12 ft fly base section.
10. Confirm that the offset connecting pins (and offset
locking pins, if applicable) are properly installed on
both sides of the fly and that the keeper pins are se­
curely installed.
4-97
Operator's Manual
11. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration before continuing opera­
tions. Refer to Section 1 of this Operator's Manual.
12. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca­
pacity deductions with the fly installed before con­
tinuing operations.
4-98 Section 4 - Attachments
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
 Operator's Manual

WARNING
Pins must be installed on both sides of fly.

Î
Rest fly sheave on ground before changing offsets.
Install pins per 25 offset to store or erect fly.

Î
2° OFFSET FLY PIN PLACEMENT

15° Î 7
8
30°
Î 2

Î
Î
45°

WARNING
Pins must be installed on both sides of fly.
Rest fly sheave on ground before changing offsets.
Install pins per 25 offset to store or erect fly.
OFFSET LOCKING PIN PLACEMENT
FOR 12' FLY USE ONLY
PIN LOCATION
2° OFFSET
3

15° OFFSET
PIN LOCATION 2

PIN LOCATION 4
30° OFFSET

1
PIN LOCATION
45 ° OFFSET

1. Offset Locking Pin Storage Ring (2° Position Shown-Each Side) 5. Fly Head Sheave
2. Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown) 6. 45° Offset Lock Pin Location
3. Fly Adaptor Lugs 7. 30° Offset Lock Pin Location
4. 12 Ft (3.65m) Offset Lattice Fly Base Section 8. 15° Offset Lock Pin Location

Figure 4-80
Changing The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset)

Section 4 - Attachments 4-99

Operator's Manual
1. Rear Storage Bracket
2. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Tip Section
3. Retaining Pin
4. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
6. Swing Lug
7. Front Fly Storage Bracket
Figure 4-81
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly (Stored)
Erection Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From
The Stored Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install or
remove the offset fly or while swinging during
erection or storage of the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4-100 Section 4 - Attachments
3
4 5
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-80.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL System in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL Display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.
 Operator's Manual

3
5
2
6

1 7
1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 5. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored Position) 6. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position) 7. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
4. Swing Lug Pivot Pin

Figure 4-82
12 Ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-82.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (6) and
install the connecting pins (5) into the swing lug
and through the fly lug. Secure with pin keepers.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
ers on the bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin from the storage rings
(1) on the rear of the fly base section. Install it into
the other swing lug hole and secure with pin keep­
er. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin from the stor­
age rings (1) on the rear of the fly base section. In­
stall the pin (7) through the fly pivot lug on the bot­
tom right side of the boom and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)

Section 4 - Attachments 4-101

Operator's Manual
6

1. 28 Ft (8.53m) Tip Section

2. Lower Connecting Pin Storage Locations (Both Sides)
3. Lower Connecting Pins
4. Upper Connecting Pins
5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section
6. Upper Connecting Pin Storage Locations

Figure 4-83
28 Ft (8.53m) Center Section Connecting Pins

13. If the 28 ft (8.53m) tip section is stored on the 14. Install all connecting pins in their proper storage
boom, remove the connecting pins connecting the location.
12 ft (3.65m) base section to the 28 ft (8.53m) tip
section. Refer to Figure 4-83.

4-102 Section 4 - Attachments


1 2
1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
Figure 4-84
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Retaining Pin
15. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it
during erection of the fly.
WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
16. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
(1). Refer to Figure 4-84. Position the retaining
pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
pin keeper (4).
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
3 4
3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)
4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)
17. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
18. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
19. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
20. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
21. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
22. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
23. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
4-103
Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-85
12 Ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

24. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly around the boom head until the fly lugs en­
gage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
25. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before operating the crane
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-85. Install the bot­ major damage to the fly could occur if all
tom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the connecting pins are not properly installed.
bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (Install
the pin with the head on top and the keeper on the
bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐handle
until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly
lug is obtained.

4-104 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins

Figure 4-86
12 Ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

26. Carefully lower the boom until the fly head sheave
is resting on approximately 6 ft (1.8m) secure
blocking. Use a signal person to alert the operator
when the sheave is resting on the blocking.
27. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
location (1) on the rear of the fly base section and
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-86. Install the in­
side bottom right pin first. Carefully boom down as
required to get the pin to drop in the hole. Install
the inside top right pin. Carefully boom down as
required to get the pin to drop in the hole. (Install
the pins with the head on top and the keeper on the
bottom.) Install the pin keepers.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-105

Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-87
12 Ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pins

28. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location

(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-87. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Carefully boom
down as required to get the pin to drop in the hole.
(Install the pin with the head on top and the keeper
on the bottom.) Install the pin keeper.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
major damage to the fly could occur if all
connecting pins are not properly installed.

4-106 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1
5

4
7
4 3

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave - Working Position

2. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-88
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Working Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
29. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector up to the working position (5) and install de­
sheaves to the working position. Refer to flector sheave pin (6) in the working position.
Figure 4-88. b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
deflector sheave (2). Rotate sheave assembly the working position (7) and install pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-107

Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

7 4

3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-89
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Working Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
30. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the working position. Refer to
Figure 4-89.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the working
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the working position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
the working position (7) and install pin (4).

4-108 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1
1

1
6

8
2
3
4 9

5
10
1. Rope Guards 5. Fly Head ATB Weight 8. Fly Base Connector
2. Fly Base Head Connector 6. Boom Head Pug Assembly 9. Boom Head ATB Switch
3. Fly Base Head ATB Switch Plug Assembly 7. Jumper Assembly 10. Lockout Clip
4. Fly Base Head ATB Switch

Figure 4-90
12 Ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Connection
31. Remove the wire rope guard from the fly base head
and deflector sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-90.
Reeve the wire rope on the boom deflector sheave
then over the fly deflector and head sheaves. In­
stall all wire rope guards.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
32. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections. Refer to Figure 4-90.
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper
assembly on main boom head and connect it
to the fly base connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the fly base
head anti‐two block switch. Connect the fly
base head ATB switch plug assembly to the fly
base head connector.
c. Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
nections are made.
d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-109

Operator's Manual
33. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL System will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
34. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
35. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
with the fly installed before continuing operations.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.

WARNING
When making lifts from the 12 ft (3.65m) fly at
2° offset and 70 degree boom angle or higher,
2 parts of line is the maximum with the
auxiliary sheave erected. Wire rope may
contact auxiliary lifting sheave. Auxiliary
lifting sheave may be removed or stored on
the boom head to eliminate the possible
interference. A warning will be shown on the
RCL display if the configuration can result in
wire rope contacting the auxiliary lifting
sheave.

4-110 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
2 2
1

4
4

5 5

1. Boom Head Pug Assembly 4. Boom Head ATB Switch

6
2. Jumper Assembly 5. Lockout Clip
3. Fly Base Connector 6. Boom Head ATB Weight

Figure 4-91
12 Ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Disconnection

Storage Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From
The Erected Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install or
remove the offset fly or while swinging during
erection or storage of the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-80. If necessary change the fly offset
to the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The 12-40
Ft (3.65-12.19m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset)”
in this Section of this Operator's Manual for de­
tailed instructions.
5. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
6. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
7. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
8. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base con­
nector and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
base section and install it on the main boom
anti‐two block switch.

WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-111

Operator's Manual

5
1

4
3
4 7
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-92
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
Figure 4-92. sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the sheave down on the pin (4).
deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
stored position (6) and install pin (5) through
the one of the holes in the sheave.

4-112 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

3 4

7 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-93
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
10. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to
Figure 4-93.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the stored position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
sheave down on the pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-113

Operator's Manual

1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location

Figure 4-94
12 Ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

11. Remove wire rope guards from fly head sheaves, 12. Carefully lower the boom until the fly head sheave
fly base deflector sheave, and boom deflector is resting on approximately 6 ft (1.8m) secure
sheave. Refer to Figure 4-90. Remove the wire blocking. Use a signal person to alert the operator
rope and lay it aside. Install wire rope guards at all when the sheave is resting on the blocking.
fly sheaves for storage. 13. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-94. To reduce loading and ease pin re­
moval, carefully boom down as required. Store
WARNING connecting pin in the storage location on the rear of
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on the fly base section.
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.

4-114 Section 4 - Attachments


1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin
Figure 4-95
12 Ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Right Side Connecting Pins
14. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-95. To
reduce loading and ease pin removal, carefully
boom down as required. Store the two pins and
keepers in the storage location on the rear picture
frame of the fly base section.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
15. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, carefully boom down as re­
quired. Store the two pins and keepers in the stor­
age location on the rear picture frame of the fly base
section.
4-115
Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-96
12 Ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

16. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly.
17. Ensure the boom is fully retracted. Boom up to 2°
boom angle.
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause crane damage.
18. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
Refer to Figure 4-96. Install the connecting pin in
the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
keeper.

4-116 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
3 3 2

1. Storage Lug 1
2. Storage Pin
3. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section

Figure 4-97
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Storage Lug

WARNING 1 2 3
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.

19. Slowly swing the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base around to

the right side of the boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
20. Extend the boom until the 12 ft (3.65m) fly storage
lug clears the storage pin. Refer to Figure 4-97.
21. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°
boom angle to engage the storage lug with the
storage pin. Refer to Figure 4-97. At the same
time, the bullet lug on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base
should engage through the hole on the end of the
12 ft (3.65m) fly base storage bracket
(Figure 4-98) and the bullet lug on the retaining 1. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base 3. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base
pin bracket on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base should en­ 2. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Storage Bracket
gage through the hole on the retaining pin bracket Bullet Lug
on the boom (Refer to Figure 4-99). Figure 4-98
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Bullet Lug

Note: If the 28 ft (8.53m) tip section is stored on

the boom, observe that the 12 ft (3.65m) base
lugs engage with the 28 ft (8.53m) tip section.
Refer to Figure 4-100.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-117

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)

Figure 4-99
12 Ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Fly Base Retaining Pin

22. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin.

Refer to Figure 4-99. Remove the pin keeper (2)
from the retaining pin (1). Position the retaining pin in
the engaged position (3) and secure with pin keeper
(4).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-118 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
6

1. 28 Ft (8.53m) Tip Section

2. Lower Connecting Pin Storage Locations (Both Sides)
3. Lower Connecting Pins
4. Upper Connecting Pins
5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section
6. Upper Connecting Pin Storage Locations

Figure 4-100
28 Ft (8.53m) Tip Section Connecting Pins

23. If the 28 ft (8.53m) tip section is stored on the 12 ft (3.65m) base section to the 28 ft (8.53m) tip
boom, install the connecting pins connecting the section. Refer to Figure 4-100.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-119

Operator's Manual
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
3 4
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-101
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Right Side Connecting Pins
24. Remove the two top fly base connecting pins and
the bottom fly base connecting pivot pin from the
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-101.
Store two of pins and keepers in storage rings on
the rear picture frame of the fly base section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
25. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with with the other fly connecting pin.
4-120 Section 4 - Attachments
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored Position)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position)
26. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
27. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL system in the
Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configuration
Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/Select
OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward the re­
tract direction. The RCL system will then enter pre­
vious boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
28. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
29. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci­
ties with the fly in the stored position before con­
tinuing operations.
 Operator's Manual

3
1. Rear Storage Bracket 5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
2. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Tip Section 6. Fly Base Section Bullet Lug 4
3. Fly Tip Retaining Pin 7. Swing Lug 5
4. Fly Base Retaining Pin 8. Front Fly Storage Bracket 6
Figure 4-102
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly (Stored)

Erection Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m)

Fly From The Stored Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect the fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, the upper directly over the
rear of the carrier, and the travel swing lock
engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install or
remove the offset fly or while swinging during
erection or storage of the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-80.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL System in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL Display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-121

Operator's Manual

3
5
2
6

1 7
1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 5. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored Position) 6. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position) 7. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
4. Swing Lug Pivot Pin

Figure 4-103
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-103.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (6) and
install the connecting pins (5) into the swing lug
and through the fly lug. Secure with pin keepers.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
ers on the bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin from the storage rings
(1) on the rear of the fly base section. Install it into
the other swing lug hole and secure with pin keep­
er. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin from the stor­
age rings (1) on the rear of the fly base section. In­
stall the pin (7) through the fly pivot lug on the bot­
tom right side of the boom and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)

4-122 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-104
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Retaining Pin

13. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or 14. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used (1). Refer to Figure 4-104. Position the retaining
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
during erection of the fly. pin keeper (4).

WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-123

Operator's Manual
1 2
1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
Figure 4-105
28 Ft (8.53m) Tip Section Retaining Pin
15. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
(1). Refer to Figure 4-105. Position the retaining
pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
pin keeper (4).
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
16. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
17. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
18. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
4-124 Section 4 - Attachments
3 4
3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)
4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)
19. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
20. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
21. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
22. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
 Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-106
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

23. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly around the boom head until the fly lugs en­
gage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
24. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before operating the crane
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-106. Install the major damage to the fly could occur if all
bottom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through connecting pins are not properly installed.
the bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (In­
stall the pin with the head on top and the keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐
handle until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from
the fly lug is obtained.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-125

Operator's Manual

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins

Figure 4-107
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

25. Carefully lower the boom until the fly head sheave
is resting on secure blocking. Use a signal person
to alert the operator when the sheave is resting on
the blocking.
26. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
rings (1) on the rear of the fly base section and
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-107. Install the in­
side top right pin first. Swing the fly base to the left
to get the pin to drop in the hole. Install the inside
bottom right pin. Swing the fly base to the right to
get the pin to drop in the hole. (Install the pins with
the head on top and the keeper on the bottom.)
Install the pin keepers.

4-126 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-108
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pins

27. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location

(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-108. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Carefully boom
down as required to get the pin to drop in the hole.
(Install the pin with the head on top and the keeper
on the bottom.) Install the pin keeper.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
major damage to the fly could occur if all
connecting pins are not properly installed.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-127

Operator's Manual

1
5

4
7
4 3

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave - Working Position

2. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-109
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Working Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
28. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector up to the working position (5) and install de­
sheaves to the working position. Refer to flector sheave pin (6) in the working position.
Figure 4-109. b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
deflector sheave (2). Rotate sheave assembly the working position (7) and install pin (4).

4-128 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

7 4

3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-110
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Working Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
29. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the working position. Refer to
Figure 4-110.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the working
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the working position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
the working position (7) and install pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-129

Operator's Manual
1 1 1

6
2 3
7

8
4
1
9

5 10
1. Rope Guards 5. Fly Tip Head ATB Weight 8. Fly Base Connector
2. Fly Tip Head Connector 6. Boom Head Pug Assembly 9. Boom Head ATB Switch
3. Fly Tip Head ATB Switch Plug Assembly 7. Jumper Assembly 10. Lockout Clip
4. Fly Tip Head ATB Switch

Figure 4-111
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Connection

30. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly head and
deflector sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-111. Reeve
the wire rope on the boom deflector sheave then
over the fly deflector and head sheaves. Install all
wire rope guards.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
31. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections. Refer to Figure 4-111.
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper
assembly on main boom head and connect it
to the fly base connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the fly base
head anti‐two block switch. Connect the fly
base head ATB switch plug assembly to the fly
base head connector.
c. Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
nections are made.
d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.

4-130 Section 4 - Attachments


32. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL system will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
33. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
34. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
with the fly installed before continuing operations.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
4-131
Operator's Manual
1 2
4
5
1. Boom Head Pug Assembly
2. Jumper Assembly
3. Fly Base Connector
Figure 4-112
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Disconnection
Storage Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m)
Fly From The Erected Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store the fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, the upper directly over the
rear of the carrier, and the travel swing lock
engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install or
remove the offset fly or while swinging during
erection or storage of the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4-132 Section 4 - Attachments
2
4
5
6
4. Boom Head ATB Switch
5. Lockout Clip
6. Boom Head ATB Weight
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-80. If necessary change the fly offset
to the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The 12-40
Ft (3.65-12.19m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset)”
in this Section of this Operator's Manual for de­
tailed instructions.
5. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
6. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
7. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
8. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base con­
nector and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
base section and install it on the main boom
anti‐two block switch.
 Operator's Manual

5
1

4
3
4 7
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-113
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
Figure 4-113. sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the sheave down on the pin (4).
deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
stored position (6) and install pin (5) through
the one of the holes in the sheave.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-133

Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

3 4

7 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-114
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
10. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to
Figure 4-114.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the stored position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
sheave down on the pin (4).

4-134 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location

Figure 4-115
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pins

11. Remove wire rope guards from fly base head 12. Carefully lower the boom until the fly head sheave
sheave, fly base deflector sheave, and boom de­ is resting on secure blocking. Use a signal person
flector sheave. Refer to Figure 4-111. Remove to alert the operator when the sheave is resting on
the wire rope and lay it aside. Install wire rope the blocking.
guards at all fly sheaves for storage. 13. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-115. To reduce loading and ease pin
removal, carefully boom down as required. Store
WARNING connecting pin in the storage location on the rear of
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on the fly base section.
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-135

Operator's Manual

1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-116
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

14. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-116.
To reduce loading and ease pin removal, carefully
boom down as required. Store the two pins and
keepers in the storage location on the rear picture
frame of the fly base section.
15. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, carefully boom down as re­
quired. Store the two pins and keepers in the stor­
age location on the rear picture frame of the fly base
section.

4-136 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-117
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

16. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly.
17. Ensure the boom is fully retracted. Boom up to 2°
boom angle.
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause crane damage.
18. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
Refer to Figure 4-117. Install the connecting pin
in the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
keeper.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-137

Operator's Manual

1 2 6 7 8 9

3 4 5

1. Rear Storage Bracket 6. Fly Storage Lug (Engaged In Storage Bracket)

2. Fly Storage Lug (Against Storage Bracket) 7. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
3. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Tip Section 8. Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
4. Top Bullet Lug 9. Fly Base Section Storage Bracket
5. Front Storage Bracket

Figure 4-118
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Storage Brackets

21. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°

WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.
19. Slowly swing the fly around to the right side of the
boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
20. Extend the boom until the fly storage lug (2) can
swing completely against the rear storage bracket
(1). Refer to Figure 4-118.
boom angle. Observe that the following occurs
while retracting the boom:
a. The storage lug (6) on the rear of the 28 ft
(8.53m) fly tip section slides into the slot on the
rear storage bracket. Refer to Figure 4-118.
b. The top bullet lug (4) on the front fly storage
bracket (5) engages through the hole on the
rear of the 28 ft (8.53m) fly tip section (3).
c. The bullet lug (8) on the 12 fly base section (7)
engages through the hole on the end of the 12
fly base section storage bracket (9).

4-138 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
3 3 2

1
1. Storage Lug
2. Storage Pin
3. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section

Figure 4-119
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Storage Lug

d. The storage lug (1) on the 12 ft (3.65m) base f. The bullet lug on the 28 ft (8.53m) fly tip retain­
section (3) engages with the storage pin (2). ing pin bracket engages through the hole on
Refer to Figure 4-119. the retaining pin bracket on the boom. Refer to
e. The bullet lug on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base re­ Figure 4-121.
taining pin bracket engages through the hole
on the retaining pin bracket on the boom.
Refer to Figure 4-120.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-139

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5
1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-120
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Retaining Pin Bracket

22. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin.

Refer to Figure 4-120. Remove the pin keeper (3)
from the retaining pin (2). Position the retaining pin
in the engaged position (4) and secure with pin
keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-140 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5

1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)

2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-121
28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Tip Retaining Pin Bracket

23. Remove the pin keeper (3) from the retaining pin (2).
Refer to Figure 4-121.
24. Position the retaining pin in the engaged position (4)
and secure with pin keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-141

Operator's Manual
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
3 4
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-122
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins Storage
25. Remove the two top fly base connecting pins and
the bottom fly base connecting pivot pin from the
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-122.
Store two of pins and keepers in storage rings on
the rear picture frame of the fly base section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
26. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with with the other fly connecting pin.
4-142 Section 4 - Attachments
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored Position)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position)
27. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
28. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL System in
the Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configura­
tion Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/
Select OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward
the retract direction. The RCL System will then
enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
29. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
30. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci­
ties with the fly in the stored position before con­
tinuing operations.

12‐40‐67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m)
Manual Offset Lattice Fly
The crane may be equipped with a three piece 12-40-67
ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) manual offset lattice fly. It is made
up of a 12 ft (3.65m) base, a 28 ft 8.53m) center, and a 27 ft
(8.23m) tip section. The manual offset lattice fly, as shown
in Figure 4-124 and Figure 4-125, connects to the main
boom head. It can be used in one of four offset positions:
2, 15, 30, or 45. Once installed, the offset lattice fly can
be stored on the right side of the boom base section.
Offset Lattice Fly Installation
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Install the offset fly with the crane level on
fully or intermediate extended outriggers, all
tires clear of the ground, the upper directly
over the rear of the carrier, and the travel
swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install,
remove, erect, or store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Pin the fly base, center, and tip sections together
on secure blocking. Refer to Figure 4-123. Con­
firm that the 12 ft (3.65m) and 28 ft (8.53m) sections
are properly pinned together with the connecting
pins. Refer to Figure 4-124. The fly base weighs
approximately 2,305 lb (1 045kg), the fly center ap­
proximately 1,537 lb (697kg),and the fly tip approx­
imately 1,162 lb (527kg). The complete fly as­
sembly weighs approximately 5,000 lb (2 268kg).
6. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-126.
7. Remove the wire rope from the main boom head
machinery or the auxiliary lifting sheave, whichever
is to be used on the fly, and lay it aside to prevent
damage to it during installation of the fly.
8. Lower the boom and check that the swing lug is
pinned in the working position with the swing lug
pivot pin and swing lug connecting pin. Extend the
boom to the fly. Slowly raise or lower the boom to
engage the fly lugs with the fly swing lug and the
head machinery cross shafts.
9. Remove the four fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the right rear of the fly base section.
Refer to Figure 4-124. Install all four pins to con­
nect the fly lugs to the head machinery cross shaft
and swing lug on the right side of the boom. (Install
the pins with the head on top and keeper on the
bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
10. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the left rear of the fly base section. Re­
fer to Figure 4-124. Install the top pin to connect
the fly lug to the head machinery cross shaft on the
left side of the boom head. Turn the t‐handle as re­
quired to push and align the bottom left fly lug and
the bottom boom head cross shaft. Install the bot­
tom left fly connecting pin. (Install the pins with the
head on top and keeper on the bottom.) Install the
pin keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at least a
1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is ob­
tained.
4-143
Operator's Manual
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
 Â
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
1. Blocking
1 1
Figure 4-123
Installation And Removal Of The 12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly erected. Major damage to the fly or
serious personal injury could occur if all
connecting pins are not properly installed.
11. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base de­
flector sheave and boom head deflector sheaves.
Reeve the wire rope over the boom deflector
sheave, then over the fly base deflector sheave.
12. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base,
center, and/or fly tip head sheaves, whichever is to
be used. Reeve the wire rope over the appropriate
head sheaves and install the wire rope guard(s).
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
13. Properly connect the anti‐two block system as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head and connect it
to the offset lattice fly base section connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the appro­
priate offset lattice fly section anti‐two block
switch cable. Confirm that all anti‐two block
harness connections are made to the appro­
priate fly section(s).
4-144 Section 4 - Attachments
ÂÂ
 ÂÂ
Â
ÂÂ
ÂÂ ÂÂ
Â
1
c. Properly install lockout clip on the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.
14. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
15. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca­
pacity deductions with the fly installed before con­
tinuing operations.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
 Operator's Manual

1
8
16 10
2
9
3

4
14 8

7 6

13

17

15

18

11

19
12
11

1. Right Side Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown) 11. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin
2. Swing Lug 12. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Storage Rings
3. Swing Lug Pivot Pin 13. Fly Base Deflector Sheave
4. Right Side Offset Locking Pin Storage Ring 14. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Section
5. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Storage Rings 15. 12 Ft (3.65) Fly Base Section
6. Bottom Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin (Pivot Pin) 16. Fly Base Head Deflector Sheave
7. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin 17. Fly Adaptor Lug
8. Boom Head Machinery Cross Shaft 18. Left Side Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown)
9. Fly Base ATB Connector 19. Left Side Offset Locking Pin Storage Ring
10. Swing Lug Connecting Pin

Figure 4-124
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly

Section 4 - Attachments 4-145

Operator's Manual

8
1 7
2
3

4
4

5
3
6

3
1. Fly Tip Pivot Pin Storage Holes 4. Fly Tip Pivot Pins 7. Fly Tip Section
2. Fly Tip Connecting Pin Storage Holes 5. Fly Base Head Connector 8. Fly Tip Rope Guards
3. Fly Tip Connecting Pins 6. Fly Tip ATB Plug Assembly

Figure 4-125
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section

Offset Lattice Fly Removal

1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Remove offset fly with the crane level on fully
or intermediate extended outriggers, all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install,
remove, erect, or store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.

4-146 Section 4 - Attachments


WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. If the fly is not in the erected position, erect it per
“Erection Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From The Stored
Position”, or “Erection Of The 12-40 Ft
(3.36-12.19m) Fly From The Stored Position”, or
“Erection Of The 12-40-67 Ft
(3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly From The Stored Posi­
tion”, as applicable, in this Section of this Opera­
tor's Manual.
5. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-126. If necessary, change the fly off­
set to the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The
12-40 -67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly Offset
Angle (Manual Offset)” in this Section of this Oper­
ator's Manual for detailed instructions.
6. Boom down fully.
7. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Remove the lockout clip from the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.
b. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the off­
set lattice fly and install it on the main boom
head anti‐two block switch.
c. Remove the plug assembly from the offset lat­
tice fly base and connect it to the jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head. Confirm that
all necessary anti‐two block harness connec­
tions are disconnected.
8. Remove all fly wire rope guards. Remove boom
head and fly deflector sheave wire rope guards
and lay the wire rope aside.
9. Install all fly wire rope guards for storage.
10. Extend the boom until the fly tip sheave rests on the
ground.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
11. Securely block up the fly sections to support them.
Refer to Figure 4-123. The fly base weighs ap­
proximately 2305 lb (1 045kg), the fly center ap­
proximately 1,537 lb (697kg),and the fly tip approx­
imately 1 162 lb (527kg). The complete assembly
weighs approximately 5,000 lb (2 268kg).
WARNING
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.
12. If only the fly tip section is to be removed, remove
the connecting pins and pivot pins from the fly tip
lugs only. Store the pins in the storage holes in the
tip section. Refer to Figure 4-125.
13. If only the fly tip and center sections are to be re­
moved, remove the connecting pins that connect
the fly base to the fly center section only. Store the
pins. Install the offset locking pins in the base sec­
tion fly adaptor lugs as required. Refer to
Figure 4-124.
14. If removing the base section, remove the four fly
connecting pins on the right side and store the pins
and keepers in the storage rings at the right rear of
the fly. Do not remove the swing lug connecting pin
from the head machinery cross shaft. Refer to
Figure 4-124. Remove the two fly connecting
pins on the left side and store the pins and keepers
in the storage rings at the left rear of the fly.
15. Retract the boom away from the fly or the fly base
away from the fly center or fly tip, as applicable, if all
the fly is not being removed.
16. Properly reeve or secure the wire rope which was
used on the fly. Install the boom head and deflector
sheave wire rope guards as required.
17. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
18. Properly store fly to prevent damage to it.
4-147
Operator's Manual
Changing The 12‐40‐67 Ft
(3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly Offset Angle
(Manual Offset)
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Change the fly offset angle with the crane
level on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground,
the upper directly over the rear of the carrier,
and the travel swing lock engaged.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4. If the offset lattice fly is not in the erected position,
erect it per “Erection Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From
The Stored Position”, “Erection Of The 12-40 Ft
(3.36-12.19m) Fly From The Stored Position”, or
“Erection Of The 12-40-67 Ft
(3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly From The Stored Posi­
tion”, as applicable, in this Section of this Opera­
tor's Manual.
CAUTION
Do not extend the boom or boom down to the
point of over stressing the offset lattice fly.
Structural damage to the fly could occur if
care is not taken. Use a signal person to aid
the operator in lowering the fly head sheave to
the ground.
5. Carefully extend and/or lower the boom until the fly
head sheave is resting on the ground. Use a signal
person to alert the operator when the sheave is
resting on the ground.
4-148 Section 4 - Attachments
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
6. Remove the offset connecting pins from the fly
adaptor lugs as required.
7. Install the offset connecting pins in the correct lo­
cation for the desired offset angle. Use the infor­
mation label, on the offset lattice fly, to determine
the correct offset connecting pin locations for the
desired offset angle of the fly. Refer to
Figure 4-126.
8. Slowly boom up to allow the fly section to adjust it­
self to the desired offset angle.
9. If using the 12 ft (3.65m) base section only, also in­
stall the offset locking pins in the correct location
for the desired offset angle. Use the information la­
bel, on the offset lattice fly, to determine the correct
offset locking pin locations for the desired offset
angle of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-126.
Note: This locking pin prevents the 12 ft fly base
section from bouncing up and is required only
when using the 12 ft fly base section.
10. Confirm that the offset connecting pins (and offset
locking pins, if applicable) are properly installed on
both sides of the fly and that the keeper pins are se­
curely installed.
11. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration before continuing opera­
tions. Refer to Section 1 of this Operator's Manual.
12. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca­
pacity deductions with the fly installed before con­
tinuing operations.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
 Operator's Manual

WARNING
Pins must be installed on both sides of fly.
Rest fly sheave on ground before changing offsets.

Î
Install pins per 25 offset to store or erect fly.

2° OFFSET FLY PIN PLACEMENT

6

Î
15°
Î 7

Î
8

Î
30° 2

45°
Î
WARNING
Pins must be installed on both sides of fly.
Rest fly sheave on ground before changing offsets.
Install pins per 25 offset to store or erect fly.
OFFSET LOCKING PIN PLACEMENT
FOR 12' FLY USE ONLY
PIN LOCATION
2° OFFSET
3

PIN LOCATION 2
15° OFFSET

PIN LOCATION 4
30° OFFSET
1
PIN LOCATION
45 ° OFFSET

1. Offset Locking Pin Storage Ring (2° Position Shown-Each Side) 5. Fly Head Sheave
2. Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown) 6. 45° Offset Lock Pin Location
3. Fly Adaptor Lugs 7. 30° Offset Lock Pin Location
4. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section 8. 15° Offset Lock Pin Location

Figure 4-126
Changing The 12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual Offset)

Section 4 - Attachments 4-149

Operator's Manual
9
8
2
1. Rear Storage Bracket
2. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Center Section
3. Retaining Pin
4. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
6. Swing Lug
7. Front Fly Storage Bracket
8. Fly Tip Storage Bracket
9. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section
Figure 4-127
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly (Stored)
Erection Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From
The Stored Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install,
erect, store, or remove the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4-150
3
4
5
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-126.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL System in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL Display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.
Section 4 - Attachments
 Operator's Manual

3
5
2
6

1 7

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 5. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored Position) 6. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position) 7. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
4. Swing Lug Pivot Pin

Figure 4-128
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-128.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (6) and
install the connecting pins (5) into the swing lug
and through the fly lug. Secure with pin keepers.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
ers on the bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin from the storage rings
(1) on the rear of the fly base section. Install it into
the other swing lug hole and secure with pin keep­
er. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin from the stor­
age rings (1) on the rear of the fly base section. In­
stall the pin (7) through the fly pivot lug on the bot­
tom right side of the boom and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)

Section 4 - Attachments 4-151

Operator's Manual
6

1. 28 Ft (8.53m) Center Section

2. Lower Connecting Pin Storage Locations (Both Sides)
3. Lower Connecting Pins
4. Upper Connecting Pins
5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section
6. Upper Connecting Pin Storage Locations

Figure 4-129
28 Ft (8.53m) Center Section Connecting Pins

13. If the 28 ft (8.53m) center section is stored on the 14. Install all connecting pins in their proper storage
boom, remove the connecting pins connecting the location.
12 ft (3.65m) base section to the 28 ft (8.53m) cen­
ter section. Refer to Figure 4-129.

4-152 Section 4 - Attachments


1 2
1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
Figure 4-130
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Retaining Pin
15. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it
during erection of the fly.
WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
16. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
(1). Refer to Figure 4-130. Position the retaining
pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
pin keeper (4).
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
3 4
3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)
4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)
17. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
18. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
19. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
20. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
21. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
22. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
23. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
4-153
Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-131
12 Ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

24. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly around the boom head until the fly lugs en­
gage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
25. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before operating the crane
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-131. Install the major damage to the fly could occur if all
bottom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through connecting pins are not properly installed.
the bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (In­
stall the pin with the head on top and the keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐
handle until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from
the fly lug is obtained.

4-154 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins

Figure 4-132
12 Ft 3.65m) Base Section Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

26. Carefully lower the boom until the fly head sheave
is resting on approximately 6 ft (1.8m) secure
blocking. Use a signal person to alert the operator
when the sheave is resting on the blocking.
27. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
location (1) on the rear of the fly base section and
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-132. Install the in­
side bottom right pin first. Carefully boom down as
required to get the pin to drop in the hole. Install
the inside top right pin. Carefully boom down as
required to get the pin to drop in the hole. (Install
the pins with the head on top and the keeper on the
bottom.) Install the pin keepers.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-155

Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-133
12 Ft 3.65m) Base Section Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pins

28. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location

(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-133. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Carefully boom
down as required to get the pin to drop in the hole.
(Install the pin with the head on top and the keeper
on the bottom.) Install the pin keeper.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
major damage to the fly could occur if all
connecting pins are not properly installed.

4-156 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1
5

4
7
4 3

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave - Working Position

2. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-134
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Working Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
29. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector up to the working position (5) and install de­
sheaves to the working position. Refer to flector sheave pin (6) in the working position.
Figure 4-134. b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
deflector sheave (2). Rotate sheave assembly the working position (7) and install pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-157

Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

7 4

3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-135
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Working Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
30. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the working position. Refer to
Figure 4-135.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the working
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the working position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
the working position (7) and install pin (4).

4-158 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1
1

1
6

8
2
3
4 9

5
10
1. Rope Guards 5. Fly Head ATB Weight 8. Fly Base Connector
2. Fly Base Head Connector 6. Boom Head Pug Assembly 9. Boom Head ATB Switch
3. Fly Base Head ATB Switch Plug Assembly 7. Jumper Assembly 10. Lockout Clip
4. Fly Base Head ATB Switch

Figure 4-136
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Manual Offset Anti‐Two Block Connection

31. Remove the wire rope guard from the fly base head
and deflector sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-136.
Reeve the wire rope on the boom deflector sheave
then over the fly deflector and head sheaves. In­
stall all wire rope guards.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
32. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections. Refer to Figure 4-136.
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper
assembly on main boom head and connect it
to the fly base connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the fly base
head anti‐two block switch. Connect the fly
base head ATB switch plug assembly to the fly
base head connector.
c. Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
nections are made.
d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.
33. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL System will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-159

Operator's Manual
34. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
WARNING
35. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities The fly adds weight to the boom which must
with the fly installed before continuing operations. be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
WARNING erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
When making lifts from the 12 ft (3.65m) fly at capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
2° offset and 70 degree boom angle or higher, the crane is level on fully or intermediate
2 parts of line is the maximum with the extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
auxiliary sheave erected. Wire rope may ground.
contact auxiliary lifting sheave. Auxiliary
lifting sheave may be removed or stored on
the boom head to eliminate the possible
interference. A warning will be shown on the
RCL display if the configuration can result in
wire rope contacting the auxiliary lifting
sheave.

4-160 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

2 2
1

4
4

5 5

6
1. Boom Head Pug Assembly 4. Boom Head ATB Switch
2. Jumper Assembly 5. Lockout Clip
3. Fly Base Connector 6. Boom Head ATB Weight

Figure 4-137
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Manual Offset Anti‐Two Block Disconnection

Storage Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From
The Erected Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install or
remove the offset fly or while swinging during
erection or storage of the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-126. If necessary change the fly offset
to the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The Fly Off­
set Angle (Manual Offset)” in this Section of this
Operator's Manual for detailed instructions.
5. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
6. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
7. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
8. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base con­
nector and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
base section and install it on the main boom
anti‐two block switch.

WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-161

Operator's Manual

5
1

4
3
4 7
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-138
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
Figure 4-138. sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the sheave down on the pin (4).
deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
stored position (6) and install pin (5) through
the one of the holes in the sheave.

4-162 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

3 4

7 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-139
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
10. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to
Figure 4-139.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the stored position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
sheave down on the pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-163

Operator's Manual

1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location

Figure 4-140
12 Ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pins

11. Remove wire rope guards from fly base head sheaves, 12. Carefully lower the boom until the fly head sheave
fly base deflector sheave, and boom deflector sheave. is resting on approximately 6 ft (1.8m) secure
Refer to Figure 4-140. Remove the wire rope and lay blocking. Use a signal person to alert the operator
it aside. Install wire rope guards at all fly sheaves for when the sheave is resting on the blocking.
storage. 13. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-140. To reduce loading and ease pin
removal, carefully boom down as required. Store
WARNING connecting pin in the storage location on the rear of
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on the fly base section.
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.

4-164 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-141
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Manual Offset Right Side Connecting Pins

14. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-141.
To reduce loading and ease pin removal, carefully
boom down as required. Store the two pins and
keepers in the storage location on the rear picture
frame of the fly base section.
15. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, carefully boom down as re­
quired. Store the two pins and keepers in the stor­
age location on the rear picture frame of the fly base
section.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-165

Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-142
12 Ft (3.65m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

16. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly.
17. Ensure the boom is fully retracted. Boom up to 2°
boom angle.
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause crane damage.
18. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
Refer to Figure 4-142. Install the connecting pin
in the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
keeper.

4-166 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
3 3 2

1. Storage Lug 1
2. Storage Pin
3. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section

Figure 4-143
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Storage Lug

1 2 3
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.

19. Slowly swing the 12ft (3.65m) fly base around to

the right side of the boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
20. Extend the boom until the 12 ft (3.65m) fly storage
lug clears the storage pin. Refer to Figure 4-143.
21. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°
boom angle to engage the storage lug with the
storage pin. Refer to Figure 4-143. At the same
time, the bullet lug on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base sec­
tion should engage through the hole on the end of
the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base section storage bracket
(Figure 4-144) and the bullet lug on the retaining 1. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base 3. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base
pin bracket on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base section 2. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Storage Bracket
should engage through the hole on the retaining Bullet Lug
pin bracket on the boom (Refer to Figure 4-145). Figure 4-144
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Bullet Lug

Note: If the 28 ft (8.53m) center section is stored

on the boom, confirm that the 12 ft (3.65m) base
section lugs engage with the 28 ft (8.53m) base
section. Refer to Figure 4-146.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-167

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)

Figure 4-145
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Manual Offset Base Retaining Pin

22. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin

(1). Refer to Figure 4-145. Remove the pin keeper
(2) from the retaining pin (1). Position the retaining
pin in the engaged position (3) and secure with pin
keeper (4).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-168 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
6

1. 28 Ft (8.53m) Center Section

2. Lower Connecting Pin Storage Locations (Both Sides)
3. Lower Connecting Pins
4. Upper Connecting Pins
5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section
6. Upper Connecting Pin Storage Locations

Figure 4-146
28 Ft (8.53m) Center Section Connecting Pins

23. If the 28 ft (8.53m) center section is stored on the 12 ft (3.65m) base section to the 28 ft (8.53m) cen­
boom, install the connecting pins connecting the ter section. Refer to Figure 4-146.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-169

Operator's Manual
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
3 4
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-147
Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins
24. Remove the two top fly base connecting pins and
the bottom fly base connecting pivot pin from the
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-147.
Store two of pins and keepers in storage rings on
the rear picture frame of the fly base section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
25. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with with the other fly connecting pin.
4-170 Section 4 - Attachments
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored)
26. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
27. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL System in
the Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configura­
tion Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/
Select OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward
the retract direction. The RCL system will then
enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
28. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
29. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci­
ties with the fly in the stored position before con­
tinuing operations.

10
9
1
1. Rear Storage Bracket
2. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Center Section 2
3. Fly Tip Retaining Pin
4. Fly Center Retaining Pin
5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
6. Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
7. Swing Lug
8. Front Fly Storage Bracket
9. Fly Tip Storage Bracket
10. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section
Figure 4-148
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly (Stored)
Erection Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m)
Fly From The Stored Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install or
remove the offset fly or while swinging during
erection or storage of the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
3
4
5
6
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-126.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL System in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL Display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.
4-171
Operator's Manual

3
5
2
6

1
7
1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 5. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored) 6. Swing Lug (Working)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored) 7. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
4. Swing Lug Pivot Pin

Figure 4-149
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-149.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (6) and
install the connecting pins (5) into the swing lug
and through the fly lug. Secure with pin keepers.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
ers on the bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin from the storage rings
(1) on the rear of the fly base section. Install it into
the other swing lug hole and secure with pin keep­
er. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin from the stor­
age rings (1) on the rear of the fly base section. In­
stall the pin (7) through the fly pivot lug on the bot­
tom right side of the boom and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)

4-172 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-150
12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section Retaining Pin

13. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or 14. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used (1). Refer to Figure 4-150. Position the retaining
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
during erection of the fly. pin keeper (4).

WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-173

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-151
28 Ft (8.53m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Retaining Pin

15. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or 16. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used (1). Refer to Figure 4-151. Position the retaining
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
during erection of the fly. pin keeper (4).

WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-174 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Stored) 2. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Installed)

Figure 4-152
27 Ft Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins

17. If the fly tip section is stored on the boom: b. Install the two fly tip connecting (pivot) pins (2)
a. Remove the two fly tip connecting (pivot) pins (1) in the pivot lugs on the rear of the fly tip section.
from their storage location. Refer to Refer to Figure 4-170.
Figure 4-170.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-175

Operator's Manual
1. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Stored)
2. 27 Ft Fly Tip Section Retaining Pin
3. Pin Keeper
Figure 4-153
27 Ft Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins And Retaining Pin - Fly Tip Stored
18. If the fly tip section is stored on the side of the
boom:
a. Ensure the fly tip connecting (pivot) pins are in
their storage holes in the rear of the fly tip sec­
tion. Refer to Figure 4-153.
b. Ensure the retaining pin is in the engaged posi­
tion and secured with pin keeper.
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
19. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
20. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
4-176 Section 4 - Attachments
21. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
22. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
23. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
24. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
25. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
 Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-154
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

26. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly around the boom head until the fly lugs en­
gage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
27. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before operating the crane
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-154. Install the major damage to the fly could occur if all
bottom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through connecting pins are not properly installed.
the bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (In­
stall the pin with the head on top and the keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐
handle until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from
the fly lug is obtained.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-177

Operator's Manual

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins

Figure 4-155
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

28. Carefully lower the boom until the fly head sheave
is resting on secure blocking. Use a signal person
to alert the operator when the sheave is resting on
the blocking.
29. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
rings (1) on the rear of the fly base section and
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-155. Install the in­
side top right pin first. Swing the fly base to the left
to get the pin to drop in the hole. Install the inside
bottom right pin. Swing the fly base to the right to
get the pin to drop in the hole. (Install the pins with
the head on top and the keeper on the bottom.)
Install the pin keepers.

4-178 Section 4 - Attachments


1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
Figure 4-156
Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pins
30. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-156. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Carefully boom
down as required to get the pin to drop in the hole.
(Install the pin with the head on top and the keeper
on the bottom.) Install the pin keeper.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
WARNING
All fly base connecting pins and pivot pins
must be properly installed before operating
the crane with the fly base erected. Serious
personal injury or major damage to the fly
could occur if all connecting pins are not
properly installed.
4-179
Operator's Manual

1
5

4
7
4 3

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave - Working Position

2. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-157
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Working Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
31. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector up to the working position (5) and install de­
sheaves to the working position. Refer to flector sheave pin (6) in the working position.
Figure 4-157. b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
deflector sheave (2). Rotate sheave assembly the working position (7) and install pin (4).

4-180 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

7 4

3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-158
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Working Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
32. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the working position. Refer to
Figure 4-158.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the working
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the working position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
the working position (7) and install pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-181

Operator's Manual
1 1 1

6
2 3
7

8
4
1
9

5 10
1. Rope Guards 5. Fly Tip Head ATB Weight 8. Fly Base Connector
2. Fly Tip Head Connector 6. Boom Head Pug Assembly 9. Boom Head ATB Switch
3. Fly Tip Head ATB Switch Plug Assembly 7. Jumper Assembly 10. Lockout Clip
4. Fly Tip Head ATB Switch

Figure 4-159
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Connection

33. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly head and
deflector sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-159. Reeve
the wire rope on the boom deflector sheave then
over the fly deflector and head sheaves. Install all
wire rope guards.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
34. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections. Refer to Figure 4-159.
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper
assembly on main boom head and connect it
to the fly base connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the fly base
head anti‐two block switch. Connect the fly
base head ATB switch plug assembly to the fly
base head connector.
c. Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
nections are made.
d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.

4-182 Section 4 - Attachments


35. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL System will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
36. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
37. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
with the fly installed before continuing operations.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
4-183
Operator's Manual
1 2
4
5
1. Boom Head Pug Assembly
2. Jumper Assembly
3. Fly Base Connector
Figure 4-160
12-40 (3.65-12.19m) Ft Manual Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Disconnection
Storage Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m)
Fly From The Erected Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install or
remove the offset fly or while swinging during
erection or storage of the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4-184 Section 4 - Attachments
2
4
5
4. Boom Head ATB Switch 6
5. Lockout Clip
6. Boom Head ATB Weight
4. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-126. If necessary change the fly offset
to the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The12‐40‐67
Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly Offset Angle (Manual
Offset)” in this Section of this Operator's Manual for
detailed instructions.
5. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
6. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
7. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
8. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base con­
nector and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the fly tip ATB plug assembly from the
fly base head connector. Connect the plug as­
sembly into the fly tip ATB storage receptacle.
d. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
tip section and install it on the main boom anti‐
two block switch.
 Operator's Manual

5
1

4
3
4 7
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-161
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
Figure 4-161. sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the sheave down on the pin (4).
deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
stored position (6) and install pin (5) through
the one of the holes in the sheave.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-185

Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

3 4

7 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-162
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
10. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to
Figure 4-162.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the stored position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
sheave down on the pin (4).

4-186 Section 4 - Attachments


1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
Figure 4-163
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pins
11. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly head and
deflector sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-159. Re­
move the wire rope and lay it aside. Install all wire
rope guards at all fly sheaves for storage.
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
12. Carefully lower the boom until the fly head sheave
is resting on secure blocking. Use a signal person
to alert the operator when the sheave is resting on
the blocking.
13. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-163. To reduce loading and ease pin
removal, carefully boom down as required. Store
connecting pin in the storage location on the rear of
the fly base section.
4-187
Operator's Manual

1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-164
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

14. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-164.
To reduce loading and ease pin removal, carefully
boom down as required. Store the two pins and
keepers in the storage location on the rear picture
frame of the fly base section.
15. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, carefully boom down as re­
quired. Store the two pins and keepers in the stor­
age location on the rear picture frame of the fly base
section.

4-188 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-165
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

16. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly.
17. Ensure the boom is fully retracted. Boom up to 2°
boom angle.
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause crane damage.
18. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
Refer to Figure 4-165. Install the connecting pin
in the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
keeper.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-189

Operator's Manual

1 2 6 7 8 9

3 4 5

1. Rear Storage Bracket 6. Fly Storage Lug (Engaged In Storage Bracket)

2. Fly Storage Lug (Against Storage Bracket) 7. 12 Ft Fly Base Section
3. 28 Ft Fly Base Section 8. 12 Ft Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
4. Top Bullet Lug 9. 12 Ft Fly Base Section Storage Bracket
5. Front Storage Bracket

Figure 4-166
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Storage Brackets

21. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°

WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.
19. Slowly swing the fly around to the right side of the
boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
20. Extend the boom until the fly storage lug (2) can
swing completely against the rear storage bracket
(1). Refer to Figure 4-166.
boom angle. Observe that the following occurs
while retracting the boom:
a. The storage lug (6) on the rear of the 28 ft
(8.53m) fly tip section slides into the slot on the
rear storage bracket. Refer to Figure 4-166.
b. The top bullet lug (4) on the front fly storage
bracket (5) engages through the hole on the
rear of the 28 ft fly base section (3).
c. The bullet lug (8) on the 12 fly base section (7)
engages through the hole on the end of the 12
fly base section storage bracket (9).

4-190 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
3 3 2

1
1. Storage Lug
2. Storage Pin
3. 12 Ft Fly Base Section

Figure 4-167
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Storage Lug

d. The the storage lug (1) on the 12 ft base sec­ f. The bullet lug (1) on the 28 ft fly base retaining
tion (3) engages with the storage pin (2). Refer pin bracket engages through the hole on the
to Figure 4-167. retaining pin bracket on the boom. Refer to
e. The bullet lug (1) on the 12 ft fly base retaining Figure 4-169.
pin bracket engages through the hole on the
retaining pin bracket on the boom. Refer to
Figure 4-168.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-191

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5
1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-168
12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section Retaining Pin Bracket

22. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin.

Refer to Figure 4-168. Remove the pin keeper (3)
from the retaining pin (2). Position the retaining pin in
the engaged position (4) and secure with pin keeper
(5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-192 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5

1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)

2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-169
28 Ft Fly Section Retaining Pin Bracket

23. Remove the pin keeper (3) from the retaining pin (2).
Refer to Figure 4-169.
24. Position the retaining pin in the engaged position (4)
and secure with pin keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-193

Operator's Manual

1. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Stored) 2. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Installed)

Figure 4-170
27 Ft Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins

25. If the fly tip section is stored on the boom: b. Install the two fly tip connecting (pivot) pins (2)
a. Remove the two fly tip connecting (pivot) pins (1) in the pivot lugs on the rear of the fly tip section.
from their storage location. Refer to Refer to Figure 4-170.
Figure 4-170.

4-194 Section 4 - Attachments


WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
3 4
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-171
Manual Offset Lattice Fly Storage Right Side Connecting Pins
26. Remove the two top fly base connecting pins and
the bottom fly base connecting pivot pin from the
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-171.
Store two of pins and keepers in storage rings on
the rear picture frame of the fly base section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
27. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with with the other fly connecting pin.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored)
28. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
29. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL System in
the Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configura­
tion Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/
Select OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward
the retract direction. The RCL System will then
enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
30. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
31. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci­
ties with the fly in the stored position before con­
tinuing operations.
4-195
Operator's Manual
10
9
1. Rear Storage Bracket
2. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Center Section
3. Fly Tip Retaining Pin
4. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Retaining Pin
5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
6. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
7. Swing Lug
8. Front Fly Storage Bracket
9. Fly Tip Storage Bracket
10. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section
Figure 4-172
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m ) Manual Offset Lattice Fly (Stored)
Erection Of The 12-40-67 Ft
(3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly From The Stored
Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install or
remove the offset fly or while swinging during
erection or storage of the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4-196
2
3
4
5
6
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-126.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL System in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL Display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.
Section 4 - Attachments
 Operator's Manual

3
5
2
6

1
7
1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 5. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored Position) 6. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position) 7. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
4. Swing Lug Pivot Pin

Figure 4-173
Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-173.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (6) and
install the connecting pins (5) into the swing lug
and through the fly lug. Secure with pin keepers.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
ers on the bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin from the storage rings
(1) on the rear of the fly base section. Install it into
the other swing lug hole and secure with pin keep­
er. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin from the stor­
age rings (1) on the rear of the fly base section. In­
stall the pin (7) through the fly pivot lug on the bot­
tom right side of the boom and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)

Section 4 - Attachments 4-197

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-174
12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section Retaining Pin

13. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or 14. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used (1). Refer to Figure 4-174. Position the retaining
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
during erection of the fly. pin keeper (4).

WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-198 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-175
28 Ft (8.53m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Retaining Pin

15. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or 16. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used (1). Refer to Figure 4-175. Position the retaining
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
during erection of the fly. pin keeper (4).

WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-199

Operator's Manual

1. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Stored) 2. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Installed)

Figure 4-176
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins

17. If the fly tip section is stored on the boom: b. Install the two fly tip connecting (pivot) pins (2)
a. Remove the two fly tip connecting (pivot) pins (1) in the pivot lugs on the rear of the fly tip section.
from their storage location. Refer to Refer to Figure 4-170.
Figure 4-170.

4-200 Section 4 - Attachments


1
1. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Erected)
2. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Retaining Pin
3. Pin Keeper
Figure 4-177
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins And Retaining Pin - Fly Tip Erected
18. Install two fly tip connecting (pivot) pins in the pivot
lugs on the rear of the fly tip section. Refer to
Figure 4-177.
19. Remove the pin keeper from the retaining pin. Pos­
ition the retaining pin in the disengaged position
and secure with pin keeper.
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
20. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
21. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
2
22. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
23. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
24. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
25. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
26. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
4-201
Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-178
Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

27. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly around the boom head until the fly lugs en­
gage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
28. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before operating the crane
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-178. Install the major damage to the fly could occur if all
bottom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through connecting pins are not properly installed.
the bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (In­
stall the pin with the head on top and the keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐
handle until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from
the fly lug is obtained.

4-202 Section 4 - Attachments


1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
Figure 4-179
Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins
29. Carefully lower the boom until the fly head sheave
is resting on secure blocking. Use a signal person
to alert the operator when the sheave is resting on
the blocking.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
30. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
location (1) on the rear of the fly base section and
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-179. Install the in­
side bottom right pin first. Carefully boom down as
required to get the pin to drop in the hole. Install
the inside top right pin. Carefully boom down as
required to get the pin to drop in the hole. (Install
the pins with the head on top and the keeper on the
bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
4-203
Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-180
Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pins

31. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location

(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-180. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Carefully boom
down as required to get the pin to drop in the hole.
(Install the pin with the head on top and the keeper
on the bottom.) Install the pin keeper.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly base erected. Serious personal
injury or major damage to the fly could occur if
all connecting pins are not properly installed.

4-204 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Hitch Pin
2. Fly Tip Head Sheave

Figure 4-181
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Hitch Pin

32. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly tip section.
33. Boom up to 5° boom angle.
34. Remove the hitch pin which connects the fly tip
section to the fly base section. Refer to
Figure 4-181. Store the hitch pin back in the lug
on the fly tip section once it is erected.
35. Slowly boom down to allow the fly tip to swing out
from the fly base section.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-205

Operator's Manual
1
2

1. Fly Tip Connecting Pins Stored

2. Top Right Side Connecting Pin 5
3. Bottom Right Side Connecting Pin
4. Top Left Side Connecting Pin
5. Bottom Left Side Connecting Pin

Figure 4-182
Fly Tip Section Connecting Pin Installation

36. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly tip section around the fly base section until
the fly tip lugs engage with the fly base lugs on the
WARNING
All fly tip connecting pins and pivot pins must
left side of the fly.
be properly installed before operating the
37. Remove the fly tip connecting pins from the stor­
crane with the fly tip erected. Serious
age holes on the rear of the fly tip section. Refer to
personal injury or major damage to the fly
Figure 4-182 Install them through the fly tip con­
could occur if all connecting pins are not
necting lugs on both sides of the fly. Install the in­
properly installed.
side top right pin first. Swing the fly tip to the left to
get the pin to drop in the hole. Install the inside bot­
tom right pin. Swing the fly tip to the right to get the
pin to drop in the hole. Install the top left pin and
then the bottom left. (Install the pins with the head
on top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install the
pin keepers.

4-206 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
1

8
1
1
2
9

10
1
7
3
11

5
4 6
1. Rope Guards 5. Fly Tip ATB Storage Receptacle 9. Jumper Assembly 12
2. Fly Tip Head ATB Switch Plug Assembly 6. Fly Tip ATB Plug Assembly 10. Fly Base Connector
3. Fly Tip Head ATB Switch 7. Fly Base Head Connector 11. Boom Head ATB Switch
4. Fly Head ATB Weight 8. Boom Head Plug Assembly 12. Lockout Clip
Figure 4-183
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m ) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Connection
38. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base head b. Remove the fly tip plug assembly from its stor­
and deflector and fly tip head sheaves. Refer to age receptacle and connect it to the fly base
Figure 4-183. Reeve the wire rope on the boom de­ head connector.
flector sheave then over the fly base deflector head c. Install the anti‐two block weight on the offset
and fly tip head sheaves. Install all wire rope guards. lattice fly tip section anti‐two block switch.
Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
CAUTION nections are made.
d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
head anti‐two block switch cable.
tion during operation.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
39. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­ anti‐two block switch is inactive.
nections. Refer to Figure 4-183. When both main boom and fly are reeved for
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper operation, the lockout clip must be removed
assembly on main boom head and connect it and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
to the fly base section connector. pended from each anti‐two block switch.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-207

Operator's Manual
40. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL System will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
41. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
42. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
with the fly installed before continuing operations.
4-208 Section 4 - Attachments
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
 Operator's Manual

1 2 2

4
4

5 5

1. Boom Head Pug Assembly 4. Boom Head ATB Switch 6

2. Jumper Assembly 5. Lockout Clip
3. Fly Base Connector 6. Boom Head ATB Weight

Figure 4-184
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m ) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Disconnection
Storage Of The 12-40-67 Ft
(3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly From The
Erected Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install or
remove the fly or while swinging during erection
or storage of the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect­
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
to Figure 4-126. If necessary change the fly offset
to the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The Fly Off­
set Angle (Manual Offset)” in this Section of this
Operator's Manual for detailed instructions.
5. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
6. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
7. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
8. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base con­
nector and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the fly tip ATB plug assembly from the
fly base head connector. Connect the plug as­
sembly into the fly tip ATB storage receptacle.
d. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
tip section and install it on the main boom anti‐
two block switch.

WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-209

Operator's Manual

5
1

4
3
4 7
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-185
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
Figure 4-185. sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the sheave down on the pin (4).
deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
stored position (6) and install pin (5) through
the one of the holes in the sheave.

4-210 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

3 4

7 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-186
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
10. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to
Figure 4-186.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the stored position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
sheave down on the pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-211

Operator's Manual

1
3

1. Bottom Left Side Connecting Pin

2. Top Left Side Connecting Pin
3. Bottom Right Side Connecting Pin
4. Top Right Side Connecting Pin
5. Fly Tip Connecting Pins Stored

Figure 4-187
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Connecting Pin Removal

11. Remove wire rope guards from fly head sheaves, fly
deflector sheave, and the boom deflector sheaves.
Remove the wire rope and lay it aside. Install wire
rope guards at all fly sheaves for storage.
12. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly tip section.
13. Ensure the boom is fully retraced. Boom up to 2°
boom angle.
WARNING
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.
14. Remove the bottom and then the top fly tip con­
necting pins on the left side of the fly tip section.
Refer to Figure 4-187. To ease pin removal, re­
lieve the loading on the pins by pushing the fly tip
from side to side. Store pins and keepers in the
storage location on the rear of the fly tip section.
15. Remove the inside bottom right fly tip connecting
pin on the right side of the fly tip section. To reduce
loading and ease pin removal, push the fly tip
slightly right or left. Remove the inside top right fly
tip connecting pin on the right side of the fly tip sec­
tion. To reduce loading and ease pin removal push
the fly tip slightly left or right. Store pins and keep­
ers in the storage location on the rear of the fly tip
section.

4-212 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

2
3

1. Hitch Pin
2. Fly Tip Head Sheave
3. Fly Base Section

Figure 4-188
Fly Tip Section Hitch Pin

17. Align the storage bracket on the fly tip section with
WARNING the storage bracket on the fly base section. Refer
to Figure 4-188. Install the hitch pin through the
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly tip
storage brackets and secure with the cotter pin.
could swing around fly base rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.

16. Using the hand line attached to the fly tip section,
slowly swing the fly tip section around to the right
side of the fly base section. Slowly boom up if nec­
essary to ease fly tip swing.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-213

Operator's Manual

1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location

Figure 4-189
Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pins

18. Carefully lower the boom until the fly head sheave
is resting on secure blocking. Use a signal person
to alert the operator when the sheave is resting on
the blocking.
19. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-189. To reduce loading and ease pin
removal, carefully boom down as required. Store
connecting pin in the storage location on the rear of
the fly base section.

WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.

4-214 Section 4 - Attachments


1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin
Figure 4-190
Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins
20. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-190.
To reduce loading and ease pin removal, carefully
boom down as required. Store the two pins and
keepers in the storage location on the rear picture
frame of the fly base section.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
21. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, carefully boom down as re­
quired. Store the two pins and keepers in the stor­
age location on the rear picture frame of the fly base
section.
4-215
Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-191
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

22. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly.
23. Ensure the boom is fully retracted. Boom up to 2°
boom angle.
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause crane damage.
24. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
Refer to Figure 4-191. Install the connecting pin
in the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
keeper.

4-216 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 6 7 8 9

3 4 5

1. Rear Storage Bracket 6. Fly Storage Lug (Engaged In Storage Bracket)

2. Fly Storage Lug (Against Storage Bracket) 7. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
3. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Center Section 8. Fly Base Bullet Lug
4. Top Bullet Lug 9. Fly Base Storage Bracket
5. Front Storage Bracket

Figure 4-192
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m ) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Storage Brackets

b. The top bullet lug (4) on the front fly storage

bracket (5) engages through the hole on the
WARNING rear of the 28 ft (8.53m) fly center section (3).
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could c. The bullet lug (8) on the fly base section (7) en­
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all gages through the hole on the end of the fly
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury. base storage bracket (9).
25. Slowly swing the fly around to the right side of the
boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
26. Extend the boom until the fly storage lug (2) can
swing completely against the rear storage bracket
(1). Refer to Figure 4-192.
27. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°
boom angle. Observe that the following occurs
while retracting the boom:
a. The storage lug (6) on the rear of the 28 ft
(8.53m) fly center section slides into the slot on
the rear storage bracket. Refer to Figure 4-192.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-217

Operator's Manual
3 3 2

1
1. Storage Lug
2. Storage Pin
3. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section

Figure 4-193
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Storage Lug

d. The the storage lug (1) on the fly base section
(3) engages with the storage pin (2). Refer to
Figure 4-193.
e. The bullet lug (1) on the fly base retaining pin
bracket engages through the hole on the re­
taining pin bracket on the boom. Refer to
Figure 4-194.
f. The bullet lug (1) on the fly center retaining pin
bracket engages through the hole on the re­
taining pin bracket on the boom. Refer to
Figure 4-195.
g. The fly tip storage bracket lug (1) on the boom
engages through the fly tip storage bracket
slot on the fly tip. Refer to Figure 4-196.

4-218 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5
1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-194
12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section Retaining Pin Bracket

28. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin.

Refer to Figure 4-194. Remove the pin keeper (3)
from the retaining pin (2). Position the retaining pin
in the engaged position (4) and secure with pin
keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-219

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5

1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)

2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-195
28 Ft Fly Center Retaining Pin Bracket

29. Remove the pin keeper (3) from the retaining pin (2).
Refer to Figure 4-195.
30. Position the retaining pin in the engaged position (4)
and secure with pin keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-220 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

2 4

3
5

1. Fly Tip Storage Bracket Lug 4. Fly Tip Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Fly Tip Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-196
27 FT (8.23m) Fly Tip Retaining Pin

31. Remove the pin keeper (3) from the retaining pin 32. Position the retaining pin in the engaged position
(2). Refer to Figure 4-196. (4) and secure with pin keeper (5).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-221

Operator's Manual
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
3
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-197
Manual Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins
33. Remove the two top fly base connecting pins and
the bottom fly base connecting pivot pin from the
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-197.
Store two of pins and keepers in storage rings on
the rear picture frame of the fly base section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
34. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with with the other fly connecting pin.
4-222 Section 4 - Attachments
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored Position)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position)
35. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
36. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL System in
the Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configura­
tion Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/
Select OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward
the retract direction. The RCL System will then
enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
37. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
38. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci­
ties with the fly in the stored position before con­
tinuing operations.

ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ 1
1. Blocking
Figure 4-198
Installation And Removal Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset
Lattice Fly
The crane may be equipped with a two piece 40 ft
(12.19m) hydraulic offset lattice fly. It is made up of a 12 ft
(3.65m) and a 28 ft (8.53m) section. The hydraulic offset
lattice fly, as shown in Figure 4-201, connects to the
main boom head. The fly can be changed from 2 to 45
offsets through the use of hydraulic cylinders. Once in­
stalled, the offset lattice fly can be stored on the right side
of the boom base section.
Offset Lattice Fly Installation
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Install offset fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers, all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully
retracted and the offset connecting pins must
be in the locked position to install, remove,
erect, or store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
ÂÂÂÂ
1
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the 12 ft (3.65m) and 28 ft (8.53m) sec­
tions are pinned together with the connecting pins.
Refer to Figure 4-201.
6. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are in the locked
position. Refer Figure 4-203.
7. Position the fly assembly on secure blocking. Refer to
Figure 4-198. The fly assembly weighs approximately
3,845 lb (1 744kg).
8. Remove the wire rope from the main boom head
machinery or the auxiliary lifting sheave, whichever
is to be used on the fly, and lay it aside to prevent
damage to it during installation of the fly.
9. Lower the boom and check that the swing lug is in the
working position. Extend the boom to the fly. Slowly
raise or lower the boom to engage the fly lugs with the
fly swing lug and the head machinery cross shafts.
10. Remove the four fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the right rear of the fly base section.
Refer to Figure 4-201. Install all four pins to con­
nect the fly lugs to the head machinery cross shaft
and the swing lug on the right side of the boom.
(Install the pins with the head on top and keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
11. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the left rear of the fly base section. Re­
fer to Figure 4-201. Install the top pin to connect
the fly lug to the head machinery cross shaft on the
left side of the boom head. Turn the t‐handle as re­
quired to push and align the bottom left fly lug and
the bottom boom head cross shaft. Install the bot­
tom left fly connecting pin. (Install the pins with the
4-223
Operator's Manual

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket 2

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses 3
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket
4

Figure 4-199
Hydraulic Hose Connection
12. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base de­
flector sheave and boom head deflector sheaves.
Reeve the wire rope over the boom deflector
sheave, then over the fly base deflector sheaves.
13. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly head
sheaves. Reeve the wire rope over the head
sheaves and install the wire rope guard(s).

CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
1 tion during operation.

14. Properly connect the anti‐two block system as follows:

1. Handle
Figure 4-200
Accumulator Valve Handle Working Position
head on top and keeper on the bottom.) Install the
pin keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at least a
1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is ob­
tained.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
major damage to the fly could occur if all
connecting pins are not properly installed.
a. Disconnect plug assembly from jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head and connect it
to the offset lattice fly base section connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the appro­
priate offset lattice fly section anti‐two block
switch cable. Confirm that all anti‐two block
harness connections are made to the appro­
priate fly section(s).
c. Properly install lockout clip on the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.

4-224 Section 4 - Attachments


15. Remove hydraulic hoses from the storage bracket.
Route the hoses through the rollers on the boom.
Connect the hydraulic lines to the quick discon­
nects on the fly. Ensure disconnects are properly
connected. Secure hoses to the bracket on the
boom head. Refer to Figure 4-199.
16. After hydraulic hoses have been connected ensure
the accumulator ball valve handle is in the vertical
position for working operation.
Figure 4-200.
Refer to
WARNING
If accumulator ball valve handle is not in the
proper position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
fittings hard to connect/disconnect.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
17. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
18. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca­
pacity deductions with the fly installed before con­
tinuing operations.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
4-225
Operator's Manual

1
8

9 2

15
3
8

13 4

6
7

12
17

16

14

18

10
19
11
10
1. Right Side Offset Connecting Pin (Locked Position) 11. Left Side Fly Connecting Pin Storage Rings
2. Swing Lug 12. Fly Deflector Sheave
3. Swing Lug Pivot Pin 13. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Section
4. Right Side Offset Connecting Pin Ring (Working Position) 14. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
5. Right Side Fly Connecting Pin Storage Rings 15. Fly Head Deflector Sheave
6. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin (Pivot Pin) 16. Connecting Pins
7. Right Side Fly Connecting Pin 17. Fly Offset Cylinders
8. Boom Head Machinery Cross Shaft 18. Left Side Offset Connecting Pin (Locked Position)
9. Fly ATB Jumper Assembly 19. Left Side Offset Connecting Pin Ring (Working Position)
10. Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
Figure 4-201
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly

4-226 Section 4 - Attachments


Offset Lattice Fly Removal
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Remove the offset fly with the crane level on
fully or intermediate extended outriggers, all
tires clear of the ground, the upper directly
over the rear of the carrier, and the travel
swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully
retracted and the offset connecting pins must
be in the locked position to install, remove,
erect, or store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. If the fly is not in the erected position, erect it per
“Erection Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly From The
Stored Position” in this Section of this Operator's
Manual.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are in the locked
position. Refer to “Changing The 40 Ft (12.19m)
Hydraulic Fly Offset Angle” and Figure 4-203.
6. Boom down fully.
7. Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the hydraulic
offset cylinders and store on boom base section.
Secure hoses to the storage bracket on the boom.
Refer to Figure 4-199.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
8. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Remove the lockout clip from the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.
b. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the off­
set lattice fly and install it on the main boom
head anti‐two block switch.
c. Remove the plug assembly from the offset lat­
tice fly base and connect it to the jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head. Confirm that
all necessary anti‐two block harness connec­
tions are disconnected.
9. Remove all fly base and tip wire rope guards. Re­
move boom head and fly deflector sheave wire
rope guards and lay the wire rope aside.
10. Install all fly base and tip wire rope guards for stor­
age.
11. Extend the boom until the fly tip sheave rests on the
ground.
12. Securely block up the fly to support it. Refer to
Figure 4-198. The fly assembly weighs approxim­
ately 3,845 lb (1 744kg).
WARNING
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly and cause personal injury.
13. Remove the four fly connecting pins on the right
side and store the pins and keepers in the storage
rings at the right rear of the fly. Do not remove the
top right side swing lug pivot pin or the swing lug
connecting pin from the head machinery cross
shaft. Refer to Figure 4-201. Remove the two fly
connecting pins on the left side and store the pins
and keepers in the storage rings at the left rear of
the fly.
14. Retract the boom away from the fly.
15. Properly reeve or secure the wire rope which was
used on the fly. Install the boom head and deflector
sheave wire rope guards as required.
16. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
17. Properly store fly to prevent damage to it.
4-227
Operator's Manual
3

RAISE LOWER
(Decrease Fly (Increase Fly
Offset Angle) Offset Angle)
1
Right Seat
Joystick Control
LOWER
(Increase Fly
2 Offset Angle)

RAISE
(Decrease Fly
Upper Cab Right Side Offset Angle)
Console Control Switches Right Seat
1. Locking Tab
2. Hydraulic Fly Offset Activation Switch Single Axis Control
3. Control Lever (If Equipped)
Figure 4-202
Hydraulic Offset Fly Controls

Changing The 40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic

Fly Offset Angle
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Change the fly offset angle with the crane
level on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground,
the upper directly over the rear of the carrier,
and the travel swing lock engaged.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4. If the offset lattice fly section is not in the erected
position, erect it per “Erection Of The 40 Ft
(12.19m) Fly From The Stored Position” in this Op­
erator's Manual.
CAUTION
Do not extend the boom or boom down to the
point of over stressing the offset lattice fly
section. Structural damage to the fly could oc­
cur if care is not taken. Use a signal person to
aid the operator in lowering the fly head
sheave to the ground.
5. Carefully extend and/or lower the boom until the fly
head sheave is resting on the ground. Use a signal
person to alert the operator when the sheave is
resting on the ground.
6. Place the offset fly in the working position by re­
moving the offset connecting pins from the locked
position and installing them in the storage rings on
the fly base section. Refer to Figure 4-203. Do
this on both sides of the fly. Secure offset connect­
ing pins to the storage rings with keeper pins.
7. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration before continuing opera­
tions. Refer to Section 1 of this Operator's Manual.
8. Check the Crane Rating Manual for deductions
from the lifting capacities with the fly installed be­
fore continuing operations.

4-228 Section 4 - Attachments


2
2 1
Locked Position
1. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Ring (Both Sides)
2. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position)
3. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides)
Figure 4-203
Changing The Hydraulic Offset Fly Angle
9. Slowly boom up to an offset fly working range be­
fore adjusting the offset angle of the fly.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent
personal injury or crane damage.
Pins must be properly installed on both
sides of fly.
Install pins in locked position to store or
erect the fly.
Fully retract cylinders before changing pins
to the working position.
Working Position
10. Slide and hold the locking tab on the hydraulic fly off­
set activation switch, then push the switch to activate
the right (boom hoist) control lever to be used as the
hydraulic fly offset controls. Refer to Figure 4-202.
Move the control lever left to raise the hydraulic fly
(decrease the fly offset angle) or right to lower the hy­
draulic fly (increase the offset angle). (If equipped
with single axis controls, pull the lever back to raise,
or push it forward to lower the fly.)
4-229
Operator's Manual
11. Using the control lever, position the hydraulic offset
fly to the desired offset working angle.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must be
considered in lifting capacities when the fly is
erected. When making lifts from the main boom
or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly erected,
refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
appropriate deductions from lifting capacities.
Use the offset lattice fly only when the crane is
level on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.

4-230 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

2
3
4

1. Rear Storage Bracket

2. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Tip Section
5
3. Fly Base Retaining Pin
4. Fly Base Retaining Pin
5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
6. Fly Base Section Bullet Lug 6
7. Swing Lug
8. Front Fly Storage Bracket

Figure 4-204
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly (Stored)

Erection Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly From

The Stored Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
locked position to install or remove the offset fly
or while swinging during erection or storage of
the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are in the locked
position. Refer to Figure 4-203.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL System in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL Display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-231

Operator's Manual

3
4
2
5

1 6
1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 4. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored) 5. Swing Lug (Working)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored) 6. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin

Figure 4-205
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-205.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (5) and
install the connecting pins (4) into the swing lug
and through the fly lug. Secure with pin keepers.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
ers on the bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin from the storage loca­
tion (1) on the rear of the fly base section. Install it
into the other swing lug hole and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin from the stor­
age location (1) on the rear of the fly base section.
Install the pin (6) through the fly pivot lug on the
bottom right side of the boom and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)

4-232 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-206
12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section Retaining Pin

13. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or 14. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used (1). Refer to Figure 4-206. Position the retaining
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
during erection of the fly. pin keeper (4).

WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-233

Operator's Manual
1 2
1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
Figure 4-207
28 Ft (8.53m) Base Section Retaining Pin
15. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
(1). Refer to Figure 4-207. Position the retaining
pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
pin keeper (4).
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
16. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
17. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
18. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
4-234 Section 4 - Attachments
3 4
3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)
4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)
19. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
20. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
21. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
22. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
 Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-208
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

23. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly base around the boom head until the fly lugs
engage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
24. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before lifting loads with the
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-208. Install the damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
bottom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through pins are not properly installed.
the bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (In­
stall the pin with the head on top and the keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐
handle until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from
the fly lug is obtained.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-235

Operator's Manual

3
4

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-209
Hydraulic Hose Connection
25. Remove hydraulic hoses from the storage bracket.
Route the hoses through the rollers on the boom.
Connect the hydraulic hoses to the quick discon­
nects on the fly. Ensure disconnects are properly
connected.
26. After hydraulic hoses have been connected ensure
the accumulator ball valve handle is in the vertical
position for working operation. Refer to
Figure 4-210.

1 WARNING
If accumulator ball valve handle is not in the
proper position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
fittings hard to connect/disconnect.

27. Secure hydraulic hoses to the working bracket on

the boom head. Refer to Figure 4-209.
1. Handle

Figure 4-210
Accumulator Valve Handle Working Position

4-236 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

4 2 4

2 1 3

Locked Position Working Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides)
2. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position) 4. Fly Offset Cylinders

Figure 4-211
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Working Position

28. Place the offset fly in the working position by re­ 29. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
moving the offset connecting pins from the locked until the fly head sheave is resting on secure block­
position to the working position, in the storage ing. Use a signal person to alert the operator when
rings on the fly base section. Refer to the sheave is resting on the blocking.
Figure 4-211. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins to the storage rings
with keeper pins.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-237

Operator's Manual

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins

Figure 4-212
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

30. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
location (1) on the rear of the fly base section and
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-212.
31. Install the inside bottom right pin first. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. Install the inside top
right pin. Adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cyl­
inders as required to get the pin to drop in the hole.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
er on the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.

4-238 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-213
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

32. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location

(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-213. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. (Install the pin with the
head on top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install
the pin keeper.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before lifting loads with the
fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
pins are not properly installed.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-239

Operator's Manual

1
3

4
1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 3. Deflector Sheave - Working Position
2. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position 4. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position

Figure 4-214
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Head And Deflector Sheaves Stored/Working Positions (Style 1)

Style 1:
33. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base deflector sheave to a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
the stored position if required. Refer to deflector sheave (2). Rotate sheave assembly
Figure 4-214. to the working position (3) and install deflector
sheave pin (4) in the working position.

4-240 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 3. Deflector Sheave Pin - 4. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard -
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position Working Position
Stored Position

Figure 4-215
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Head And Deflector Sheaves Stored/Working Positions (Style 2)

Style 2:
34. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
sheaves to the working position. Refer to deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
Figure 4-215. deflector sheave rope guard (4) to the working
position and install deflector sheave pin (3) in
the working position.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-241

Operator's Manual
1 1

6
2 3
7

8
4
1
9

5
10

1. Rope Guards 5. Fly Tip Head ATB Weight 8. Fly Base Connector
2. Fly Tip Head Connector 6. Boom Head Pug Assembly 9. Boom Head ATB Switch
3. Fly Tip Head ATB Switch Plug Assembly 7. Jumper Assembly 10. Lockout Clip
4. Fly Tip Head ATB Switch

Figure 4-216
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Connection

35. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly head and
deflector sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-216. Reeve
the wire rope on the boom deflector sheave then
over the fly deflector and head sheaves. Install all
wire rope guards.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
36. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections. Refer to Figure 4-216.
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper
assembly on main boom head and connect it
to the fly base connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the fly base
head anti‐two block switch. Connect the fly
base head ATB switch plug assembly to the fly
base head connector.
c. Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
nections are made.
d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.

4-242 Section 4 - Attachments


37. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL System will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
38. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
39. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
with the fly installed before continuing operations.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
4-243
Operator's Manual

2 2
1

4
5

6
1. Boom Head Plug Assembly 4. Boom Head ATB Switch
2. Jumper Assembly 5. Lockout Clip
3. Fly Base Connector 6. Boom Head ATB Weight

Figure 4-217
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Disconnection

Storage Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly From

The Erected Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store the fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, the upper directly over the
rear of the carrier, and the travel swing lock
engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
locked position to install or remove the fly or
while swinging during erection or storage of the
offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
5. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
6. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
7. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base con­
nector and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
base section and install it on the main boom
anti‐two block switch.

4-244 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 3

2
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 3. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 4. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position

Figure 4-218
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
8. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base deflector sheave to a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the
the stored position if required. Refer to deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
Figure 4-218. stored position (4) and install pin (3) through
one of the holes in the sheave.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-245

Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - 2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - 3. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
Working Position Working Position 4. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard -
Stored Position

Figure 4-219
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base deflector sheave to a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
the stored position if required. Refer to deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
Figure 4-219. deflector sheave rope guard (4) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (3) in
the stored position.

4-246 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location

Figure 4-220
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

10. Remove wire rope guards from fly head sheave, fly 11. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
base deflector sheave, and boom deflector sheave. until the fly head sheave is resting on secure block­
Refer to Figure 4-216. Remove the wire rope and lay ing. Use a signal person to alert the operator when
it aside. Install wire rope guards at all fly sheaves for the sheave is resting on the blocking.
storage. 12. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-220. To reduce loading and ease pin
removal, adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cylin­
WARNING ders as required. Store connecting pin in the stor­
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on age location on the rear of the fly base section.
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing personal injury.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-247

Operator's Manual

1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-221
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

13. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-221.
To reduce loading and ease pin removal, adjust the
fly angle with the fly offset cylinders as required.
14. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, adjust the fly angle with the
fly offset cylinders as required. Store the two pins
and keepers in the storage location on the rear pic­
ture frame of the fly base section.

4-248 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

2 4 2
4

1 3

Working Position Locked Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides)
2. Fly Offset Cylinders 4. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position)

Figure 4-222
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Locked Position

15. Fully retract fly offset cylinders to raise the fly to the
2° offset position.
16. Place the offset fly in the locked position by remov­
ing the offset connecting pins from the working po­
sition to the locked position. Refer to
Figure 4-222. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins with keeper pins.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-249

Operator's Manual

3
4

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-223
Hydraulic Hose Connection
17. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the quick dis­
connects. Remove hydraulic hoses from the hy­
draulic hose working bracket. Remove the hy­
draulic hoses from the rollers and secure hoses to
the hydraulic hose storage bracket on the boom
head. Refer to Figure 4-223.
18. After hydraulic hoses have been disconnected en­
sure the accumulator ball valve handle is in the ho­
rizontal position for storage. Refer to
Figure 4-224.

WARNING
If accumulator ball valve is not in the proper
position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
1 fittings hard to connect/disconnect.

1. Handle

Figure 4-224
Accumulator Valve Handle Stored Position

4-250 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-225
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

19. Attach a hand line to the tip of the 28 ft (8.53m) fly 20. Ensure the boom is fully retraced. Boom up to 2°
tip section. boom angle.
21. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
Refer to Figure 4-225. Install the connecting pin
CAUTION in the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly. section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly keeper.
damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-251

Operator's Manual

1 2 6 7 8 9

3 4 5

1. Rear Storage Bracket 6. Fly Storage Lug (Engaged In Storage Bracket)

2. Fly Storage Lug (Against Storage Bracket) 7. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
3. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Tip Section 8. Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
4. Top Bullet Lug 9. Fly Base Section Storage Bracket
5. Front Storage Bracket

Figure 4-226
40 Ft (12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Storage Brackets

24. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°

WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.
22. Slowly swing the fly around to the right side of the
boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
23. Extend the boom until the fly storage lug (2) can
swing completely against the rear storage bracket
(1). Refer to Figure 4-226.
boom angle. Observe that the following occurs
while retracting the boom:
a. The storage lug (6) on the rear of the 28 ft
(8.53m) fly tip section slides into the slot on the
rear storage bracket. Refer to Figure 4-226.
b. The top bullet lug (4) on the front fly storage
bracket (5) engages through the hole on the
rear of the 28 ft (8.53m) fly tip section (3).
c. The bullet lug (8) on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base
section (7) engages through the hole on the
end of the fly base section storage bracket (9).

4-252 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
3 3 2

1
1. Storage Lug
2. Storage Pin
3. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section

Figure 4-227
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Storage Lug

d. The storage lug (1) on the 12 ft (3.65m) base f. The bullet lug (1) on the 28 ft (8.53m) fly tip re­
section (3) engages with the storage pin (2). taining pin bracket engages through the hole
Refer to Figure 4-227. on the retaining pin bracket on the boom.
e. The bullet lug (1) on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base Refer to Figure 4-229.
retaining pin bracket engages through the
hole on the retaining pin bracket on the boom.
Refer to Figure 4-228.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-253

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5
1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-228
12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section Retaining Pin Bracket

25. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin.

Refer to Figure 4-228. Remove the pin keeper (3)
from the retaining pin (2). Position the retaining pin
in the engaged position (4) and secure with pin
keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-254 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5

1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)

2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-229
28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Tip Section Retaining Pin Bracket

26. Remove the pin keeper (3) from the retaining pin (2).
Refer to Figure 4-229.
27. Position the retaining pin in the engaged position (4)
and secure with pin keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-255

Operator's Manual
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
3 4
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-230
Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Storage Right Side Connecting Pins
28. Remove the two top fly base connecting pins and
the bottom fly base connecting pivot pin from the
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-230.
Store two of pins and keepers in storage rings on
the rear picture frame of the fly base section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
29. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with with the other fly connecting pin.
4-256 Section 4 - Attachments
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored)
30. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
31. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL System in
the Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configura­
tion Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/
Select OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward
the retract direction. The RCL System will then
enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
32. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
33. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci­
ties with the fly in the stored position before con­
tinuing operations.

ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
 Â
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ 1
1. Blocking
Figure 4-231
Installation And Removal Of The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic
Offset Lattice Fly
The crane may be equipped with a three piece 40-67 ft
(12.19-20.42m) hydraulic offset lattice fly. It is made up
of a base section consisting of a 12 ft (3.65m) and a 28 ft
(8.53m) section and a 27 ft (8.23m) tip section. The hy­
draulic offset lattice fly, as shown in Figure 4-233 and
Figure 4-234, connects to the main boom head. The fly
can be changed from 2 to 45 offsets through the use of
hydraulic cylinders. Once installed, the offset lattice fly
can be stored on the right side of the boom base section.
Offset Lattice Fly Installation
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Install offset fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers, all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and offset connecting pins must be in locked
position to install, remove, erect, or store the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
ÂÂ
Â
Â
ÂÂ ÂÂ
Â
Â
ÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂ
1 1
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are in the locked
position. Refer Figure 4-236.
6. Pin the fly base and tip sections together on secure
blocking. Refer to Figure 4-231. The fly base as­
sembly weighs approximately 3,842 lb (1 743kg). The
fly tip section weighs approximately 1,162 lb (527kg).
The complete fly assembly weighs approximately
5,000 lb (2 268kg).
7. Remove the wire rope from the main boom head
machinery or the auxiliary lifting sheave, whichever
is to be used on the fly, and lay it aside to prevent
damage to it during installation of the fly.
8. Lower the boom and check that the swing lug is
pinned in the working position with the swing lug
pivot pin and swing lug connecting pin. Extend the
boom to the fly. Slowly raise or lower the boom to
engage the fly lugs with the fly swing lug and the
head machinery cross shafts.
9. Remove the four fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the right rear of the fly base section.
Refer to Figure 4-233. Install all four pins to con­
nect the fly lugs to the head machinery cross shaft
and swing lug on the right side of the boom. (Install
the pins with the head on top and keeper on the
bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
4-257
Operator's Manual

2
1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket
2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses 3
4
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-232
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Hose Connection
10. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the storage 11. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base de­
rings at the left rear of the fly base section. Refer to flector sheave and boom head deflector sheaves.
Figure 4-233. Install the top pin to connect the fly Reeve the wire rope over the boom deflector
lug to the head machinery cross shaft on the left side sheave, then over the fly base deflector sheave.
of the boom head. Turn the t‐handle as required to 12. Remove the wire rope guards from either the fly
push and align the bottom left fly lug and the bot­ base or fly tip head sheaves, whichever is to be
tom boom head cross shaft. Install the bottom left used. Reeve the wire rope over the appropriate
fly connecting pin. (Install the pins with the head head sheave and install the wire rope guard(s).
on top and keeper on the bottom.) Install the pin
keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at least a 1/2 in
(1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is obtained.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
major damage to the fly could occur if all
connecting pins are not properly installed.

4-258 Section 4 - Attachments


13. Properly connect the anti‐two block system as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head and connect it
to the offset lattice fly base section connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the appro­
priate offset lattice fly section anti‐two block
switch cable. Confirm that all anti‐two block
harness connections are made to the appro­
priate fly section(s).
c. Properly install lockout clip on the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
14. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
15. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca­
pacity deductions with the fly installed before con­
tinuing operations.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
4-259
Operator's Manual

8 1

10

9 2
17

3
8

14
4

6
7

18 13

16

15
19

11
20
12
11
1. Right Side Offset Connecting Pin (Locked Position) 11. Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
2. Swing Lug 12. Left Side Fly Connecting Pin Storage Rings
3. Swing Lug Pivot Pin 13. Fly Deflector Sheave
4. Right Side Offset Connecting Pin Ring (Working Position) 14. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Section
5. Right Side Fly Connecting Pin Storage Rings 15. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
6. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin (Pivot Pin) 16. Connecting Pins
7. Right Side Fly Connecting Pin 17. Fly Base Head Deflector Sheave
8. Boom Head Machinery Cross Shaft 18. Fly Offset Cylinders
9. Fly ATB Jumper Assembly 19. Left Side Offset Connecting Pin (Locked Position)
10. Swing Lug Connecting Pin 20. Left Side Offset Connecting Pin Storage Ring (Working Position)

Figure 4-233
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly

4-260 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

8
1 7
2
3

4
4

5
3
6

3
1. Fly Tip Pivot Pin Storage Holes 4. Fly Tip Pivot Pins 7. 27 ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section
2. Fly Tip Connecting Pin Storage Holes 5. Fly Base Head Connector 8. Fly Tip Rope Guards
3. Fly Tip Connecting Pins 6. Fly Tip ATB Plug Assembly

Figure 4-234
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section

Offset Lattice Fly Removal

1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the carri­
er and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Remove the offset fly with the crane level on
fully or intermediate extended outriggers, all
tires clear of the ground, the upper directly
over the rear of the carrier, and the travel
swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and offset connecting pins must be in locked
position to install, remove, erect, or store the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-261

Operator's Manual
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. If the fly is not in the erected position, erect it per
“Erection Of The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Fly
From the Stored Position” in this Section of this Op­
erator's Manual.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are in the locked
position. Refer to “Changing The 40-67 Ft
(12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Fly Offset Angle” and
Figure 4-236.
6. Boom down fully.
7. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Remove the lockout clip from the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.
b. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the off­
set lattice fly and install it on the main boom
head anti‐two block switch.
c. Remove the plug assembly from the offset lat­
tice fly base and connect it to the jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head. Confirm that
all necessary anti‐two block harness connec­
tions are disconnected.
8. Remove all fly wire rope guards. Remove boom
head and fly deflector sheave wire rope guards
and lay the wire rope aside.
9. Install all fly wire rope guards for storage.
10. Extend the boom until the fly tip sheave rests on the
ground.
4-262 Section 4 - Attachments
11. Securely block up the fly to support it. Refer to
Figure 4-390. The fly base section weighs ap­
proximately 3,842 lb (1 743kg),and the fly tip sec­
tion weighs approximately 1,162 lb (527kg). The
complete fly assembly weighs approximately
5,000 lb (2 268kg).
WARNING
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.
12. If only the fly tip section is to be removed, remove
the connecting pins and pivot pins from the fly tip
lugs only. Store the pins in the storage holes in the
tip section. Refer to Figure 4-234.
13. If removing the base section, remove the four fly
connecting pins on the right side and store the pins
and keepers in the storage rings at the right rear of
the fly. Do not remove the swing lug connecting pin
from the head machinery cross shaft. Refer to
Figure 4-233. Remove the two fly connecting
pins on the left side and store the pins and keepers
in the storage rings at the left rear of the fly.
14. Retract the boom away from the fly or the fly base
away from the fly tip, as applicable if all the fly is not
being removed.
15. Properly reeve or secure the wire rope which was
used on the fly. Install the boom head and deflector
sheave wire rope guards as required.
16. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
17. Properly store fly to prevent damage to it.
 Operator's Manual
3

RAISE LOWER
(Decrease Fly (Increase Fly
Offset Angle) Offset Angle)
1
Right Seat
Joystick Control
LOWER
(Increase Fly
2 Offset Angle)

RAISE
(Decrease Fly
Upper Cab Right Side Offset Angle)
Console Control Switches Right Seat
1. Locking Tab
2. Hydraulic Fly Offset Activation Switch Single Axis Control
3. Control Lever (If Equipped)
Figure 4-235
Hydraulic Offset Fly Controls

Changing The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m)

Hydraulic Fly Offset Angle
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the carri­
er and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Change the fly offset angle with the crane
level on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground,
the upper directly over the rear of the carrier,
and the travel swing lock engaged.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-263

Operator's Manual
4. If the fly is not in the erected position, erect it per
“Erection Of The 40-67 Ft (12.09-20.42m) Fly
From the Stored Position” in this Section of this Op­
erator's Manual.
CAUTION
Do not extend the boom or boom down to the
point of over stressing the offset lattice fly
section. Structural damage to the fly could oc­
cur if care is not taken. Use a signal person to
aid the operator in lowering the fly head
sheave to the ground.
4-264 Section 4 - Attachments
5. Carefully extend and/or lower the boom until the fly
tip head sheave is resting on the ground. Use a
signal person to alert the operator when the
sheave is resting on the ground.
6. Place the offset fly in the working position by re­
moving the offset connecting pins from the locked
position and installing them in the storage rings on
the fly base section. Refer to Figure 4-236. Do
this on both sides of the fly. Secure offset connect­
ing pins to the storage rings with keeper pins.
7. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration before continuing opera­
tions. Refer to Section 1 of this Operator's Manual.
8. Check the Crane Rating Manual for deductions
from the lifting capacities with the fly installed be­
fore continuing operations.

2
2 1
Locked Position
1. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Ring (Both Sides)
2. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position)
3. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides)
Figure 4-236
Changing The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Fly Angle
9. Slowly boom up to an offset fly working range be­
fore adjusting the offset angle of the fly.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent
personal injury or crane damage.
Pins must be properly installed on both
sides of fly.
Install pins in locked position to store or
erect the fly.
Fully retract cylinders before changing pins
to the working position.
Working Position
10. Slide and hold the locking tab on the hydraulic fly off­
set activation switch, then push the switch to activate
the right (boom hoist) control lever to be used as the
hydraulic fly offset controls. Refer to Figure 4-235.
Move the control lever left to raise the hydraulic fly
(decrease the fly offset angle) or right to lower the hy­
draulic fly (increase the offset angle). (If equipped
with single axis controls, pull the lever back to raise,
or push it forward to lower the fly.)
4-265
Operator's Manual
11. Using the control lever, position the hydraulic offset
fly to the desired offset working angle.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must be
considered in lifting capacities when the fly is
erected. When making lifts from the main boom
or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly erected,
refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
appropriate deductions from lifting capacities.
Use the offset lattice fly only when the crane is
level on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.

4-266 Section 4 - Attachments


11
10
1 8
2
3
1. Rear Storage Bracket
2. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Section
3. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Retaining Pin
4. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Retaining Pin
5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Retaining Pin
6. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
7. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
8. Swing Lug
9. Front Fly Storage Bracket
10. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Storage Bracket
11. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section
Figure 4-237
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly (Stored)
Erection Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly From
The Stored Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the carri­
er and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
locked position to install or remove the fly or
while swinging during erection or storage of the
offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
9
4
5
6
7
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are properly loc­
ated in the locked position on both sides fo the fly.
Refer to Figure 4-236.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly, and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL System in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL Display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.
4-267
Operator's Manual

3
4
2
5

1 6
1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 4. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored Position) 5. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position) 6. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin

Figure 4-238
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-238.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (5) and
install the connecting pins (4) into the swing lug
and through the fly lug. Secure with pin keepers.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
ers on the bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin from the storage rings
(1) on the rear of the fly base section. Install it into
the other swing lug hole and secure with pin keep­
er. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin from the stor­
age rings (1) on the rear of the fly base section. In­
stall the pin (6) through the fly pivot lug on the bot­
tom right side of the boom and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)

4-268 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-239
12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section Retaining Pin

13. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or 14. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used (1). Refer to Figure 4-239. Position the retaining
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
during erection of the fly. pin keeper (4).

WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-269

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-240
28 Ft (8.53m) Tip Section Retaining Pin

15. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
(1). Refer to Figure 4-240. Position the retaining
pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
pin keeper (4).

4-270 Section 4 - Attachments


1. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Stored)
2. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Retaining Pin
3. Pin Keeper
Figure 4-241
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins And Retaining Pin - Fly Tip Stored
16. If the fly tip section is stored on the side of the
boom:
a. Ensure the fly tip connecting (pivot) pins are in
their storage holes in the rear of the fly tip sec­
tion. Refer to Figure 4-241.
b. Ensure the retaining pin is in the engaged posi­
tion and secured with pin keeper.
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
17. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
18. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
19. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
20. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
21. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
22. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
23. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
4-271
Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-242
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

24. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly base around the boom head until the fly lugs
engage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
25. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before lifting loads with the
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-242. Install the damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
bottom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through pins are not properly installed.
the bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (In­
stall the pin with the head on top and the keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐
handle until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from
the fly lug is obtained.

4-272 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

3
4

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-243
Hydraulic Hose Connection
26. Remove hydraulic hoses from the storage bracket.
Route the hoses through the rollers on the boom.
Connect the hydraulic hoses to the quick discon­
nects on the fly. Ensure disconnects are properly
connected.
27. After hydraulic hoses have been connected ensure
the accumulator ball valve handle is in the vertical
position for working operation. Refer to
Figure 4-244.

WARNING 1
If accumulator ball valve handle is not in the
proper position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
fittings hard to connect/disconnect.

28. Secure hydraulic hoses to the working bracket on

the boom head. Refer to Figure 4-243.
1. Handle

Figure 4-244
Accumulator Valve Handle Working Position

Section 4 - Attachments 4-273

Operator's Manual

4 2 4

2 1 3

Locked Position Working Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides)
2. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position) 4. Fly Offset Cylinders

Figure 4-245
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Working Position

29. Place the offset fly in the working position by re­ 30. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
moving the offset connecting pins from the locked until the fly head sheave is resting on secure block­
position to the working position, in the storage ing. Use a signal person to alert the operator when
rings on the fly base section. Refer to the sheave is resting on the blocking.
Figure 4-245. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins to the storage rings
with keeper pins.

4-274 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins

Figure 4-246
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

31. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
location (1) on the rear of the fly base section and
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-246.
32. Install the inside bottom right pin first. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. Install the inside top
right pin. Adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cyl­
inders as required to get the pin to drop in the hole.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
er on the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-275

Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-247
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

33. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location

(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-247. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. (Install the pin with the
head on top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install
the pin keeper.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before lifting loads with the
fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
pins are not properly installed.

4-276 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1
3

4
1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 3. Deflector Sheave - Working Position
2. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position 4. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position

Figure 4-248
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Head And Deflector Sheaves Stored/Working Positions (Style 1)

Style 1:
34. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base deflector sheave to a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
the stored position if required. Refer to deflector sheave (2). Rotate sheave assembly
Figure 4-248. to the working position (3) and install deflector
sheave pin (4) in the working position.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-277

Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 3. Deflector Sheave Pin - 4. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard -
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position Working Position
Stored Position

Figure 4-249
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Head And Deflector Sheaves Stored/Working Positions (Style 2)

Style 2:
35. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
sheaves to the working position. Refer to deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
Figure 4-249. deflector sheave rope guard (4) to the working
position and install deflector sheave pin (3) in
the working position.

4-278 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
1 1
1

6
2 3
7

8
4
1
9

5
10

1. Rope Guards 5. Fly Base Head ATB Weight 8. Fly Base Connector
2. Fly Base Head Connector 6. Boom Head Pug Assembly 9. Boom Head ATB Switch
3. Fly Base Head ATB Switch Plug Assembly 7. Jumper Assembly 10. Lockout Clip
4. Fly Base Head ATB Switch

Figure 4-250
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Connection

36. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly head and
deflector sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-250. Reeve
the wire rope on the boom deflector sheave then
over the fly deflector and head sheaves. Install all
wire rope guards.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
37. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections. Refer to Figure 4-250.
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper
assembly on main boom head and connect it
to the fly base connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the fly base
head anti‐two block switch. Connect the fly
base head ATB switch plug assembly to the fly
base head connector.
c. Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
nections are made.
d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-279

Operator's Manual
38. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL System will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
39. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
40. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
with the fly installed before continuing operations.
4-280 Section 4 - Attachments
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
 Operator's Manual

2 2
1

4
5

6
1. Boom Head Plug Assembly 4. Boom Head ATB Switch
2. Jumper Assembly 5. Lockout Clip
3. Fly Base Connector 6. Boom Head ATB Weight

Figure 4-251
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Disconnection

Storage Of The 40 Ft (12.19m) Fly From

The Erected Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the carri­
er and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store the fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, the upper directly over the
rear of the carrier, and the travel swing lock
engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
locked position to install or remove the fly or
while swinging during erection or storage of the
offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
5. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
6. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract ot line
up with the T1 section.
7. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base con­
nector and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head. Refer to
Figure 4-251.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
base section and install it on the main boom
anti‐two block switch.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-281

Operator's Manual

1 3

2
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 3. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 4. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position

Figure 4-252
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
8. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base deflector sheave to a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the
the stored position if required. Refer to deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
Figure 4-252. stored position (4) and install pin (3) through
one of the holes in the sheave.

4-282 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - 2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - 3. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
Working Position Working Position 4. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard -
Stored Position

Figure 4-253
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base deflector sheave to a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
the stored position if required. Refer to deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
Figure 4-253. deflector sheave rope guard (4) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (3) in
the stored position.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-283

Operator's Manual

1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location

Figure 4-254
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

10. Remove wire rope guards from fly head sheave, fly 11. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
base deflector sheave, and boom deflector sheave. until the fly head sheave is resting on secure block­
Refer to Figure 4-250. Remove the wire rope and lay ing. Use a signal person to alert the operator when
it aside. Install wire rope guards at all fly sheaves for the sheave is resting on the blocking.
storage. 12. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-254. To reduce loading and ease pin
removal, adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cylin­
WARNING ders as required. Store connecting pin in the stor­
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on age location on the rear of the fly base section.
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing personal injury.

4-284 Section 4 - Attachments


1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin
Figure 4-255
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Right Side Connecting Pins
13. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-255.
To reduce loading and ease pin removal, adjust the
fly angle with the fly offset cylinders as required.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
14. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, adjust the fly angle with the
fly offset cylinders as required. Store the two pins
and keepers in the storage location on the rear pic­
ture frame of the fly base section.
4-285
Operator's Manual

2 4 2
4

1 3

Working Position Locked Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides)
2. Fly Offset Cylinders 4. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position)

Figure 4-256
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Locked Position

15. Fully retract fly offset cylinders to raise the fly to the
2° offset position.
16. Place the offset fly in the locked position by remov­
ing the offset connecting pins from the working po­
sition to the locked position. Refer to
Figure 4-256. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins with keeper pins.

4-286 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

3
4

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-257
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Hose Disconnection
17. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the quick dis­
connects. Remove hydraulic hoses from the hy­
draulic hose working bracket. Remove the hoses
from the rollers and secure hoses to the hydraulic
hose storage bracket on the boom head. Refer to
Figure 4-257.
18. After hydraulic hoses have been disconnected en­
sure the accumulator ball valve handle is in the ho­
rizontal position for storage. Refer to
Figure 4-258.

WARNING
If accumulator ball valve is not in the proper
position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
fittings hard to connect/disconnect. 1

1. Handle

Figure 4-258
Accumulator Valve Handle Stored Position

Section 4 - Attachments 4-287

Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-259
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

20. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
CAUTION Refer to Figure 4-259. Install the connecting pin
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly. in the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
damage. keeper.

19. Ensure the boom is fully retraced. Boom up to 2°

boom angle.

4-288 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 6 7 8 9

3 4 5

1. Rear Storage Bracket 6. Fly Storage Lug (Engaged In Storage Bracket)

2. Fly Storage Lug (Against Storage Bracket) 7. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
3. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Section 8. Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
4. Top Bullet Lug 9. Fly Base Section Storage Bracket
5. Front Storage Bracket

Figure 4-260
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Storage Brackets

21. Attach a hand line to the tip of the 28 ft (8.53m) fly
tip section.
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.
22. Slowly swing the fly around to the right side of the
boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
23. Extend the boom until the fly storage lug (2) can
swing completely against the rear storage bracket
(1). Refer to Figure 4-260.
24. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°
boom angle. Observe that the following occurs
while retracting the boom:
a. The storage lug (6) on the rear of the 28 ft
(8.53m) fly base section slides into the slot on
the rear storage bracket. Refer to
Figure 4-260.
b. The top bullet lug (4) on the front fly storage
bracket (5) engages through the hole on the
rear of the 28 ft (8.53m) fly base section (3).
c. The bullet lug (8) on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base
section (7) engages through the hole on the
end of the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base section storage
bracket (9).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-289

Operator's Manual
3 3 2

1
1. Storage Lug
2. Storage Pin
3. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section

Figure 4-261
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Storage Lug

d. The storage lug (1) on the 12 ft (3.65m) base f. The bullet lug (1) on the 28 ft (8.53m) fly base
section (3) engages with the storage pin (2). retaining pin bracket engages through the
Refer to Figure 4-261. hole on the retaining pin bracket on the boom.
e. The bullet lug (1) on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base Refer to Figure 4-263.
retaining pin bracket engages through the
hole on the retaining pin bracket on the boom.
Refer to Figure 4-262.

4-290 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5
1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-262
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Retaining Pin Bracket

25. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin.

Refer to Figure 4-262. Remove the pin keeper (3)
from the retaining pin (2). Position the retaining pin
in the engaged position (4) and secure with pin
keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-291

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5

1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)

2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-263
28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Retaining Pin Bracket

26. Remove the pin keeper (3) from the retaining pin (2).
Refer to Figure 4-263.
27. Position the retaining pin in the engaged position (4)
and secure with pin keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-292 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Stored) 2. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Installed)

Figure 4-264
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins

28. If the fly tip section is stored on the boom: b. Install the two fly tip connecting (pivot) pins (2)
a. Remove the two fly tip connecting (pivot) pins (1) in the pivot lugs on the rear of the fly tip section.
from their storage location. Refer to Refer to Figure 4-264.
Figure 4-264.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-293

Operator's Manual
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
3 4
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-265
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins Storage
29. Remove the two top fly base connecting pins and
the bottom fly base connecting pivot pin from the
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-265.
Store two of pins and keepers in storage rings on
the rear picture frame of the fly base section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
30. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with with the other fly connecting pin.
4-294 Section 4 - Attachments
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored Position)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position)
31. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
32. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL system in the
Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configuration
Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/Select
OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward the re­
tract direction. The RCL system will then enter pre­
vious boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
33. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
34. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacit­
ies with the fly in the stored position before continu­
ing operations.
 Operator's Manual
11
10
9

1 8

2
3
1. Rear Storage Bracket
2. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Section
3. Fly Tip Retaining Pin 4
4. Fly Base Retaining Pin
5. Fly Base Retaining Pin
5
6. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
7. Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
8. Swing Lug 6
9. Front Fly Storage Bracket
10. Fly Tip Storage Bracket 7
11. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section

Figure 4-266
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly (Stored)

Erection Of The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m)

Fly From The Stored Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the carri­
er and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
locked position to install or remove the fly or
while swinging during erection or storage of the
offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are in the locked
position. Refer to Figure 4-236.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly, and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL System in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL Display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-295

Operator's Manual

3
4
2
5

1 6
1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 4. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored Position) 5. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position) 6. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin

Figure 4-267
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-267.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (5) and
install the connecting pin (4) into the swing lug and
through the fly lug. Secure with pin keeper. (Install
the pin with the head on top and the keeper on the
bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin (1) from the storage
rings on the rear of the fly base section. Install it in­
to the other swing lug hole and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin (1) from the
storage rings on the rear of the fly base section. In­
stall the pin (6) through the fly pivot lug on the bot­
tom right side of the boom and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
13. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it
during erection of the fly.

4-296 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

2
1

1. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Erected)

2. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Retaining Pin
3. Pin Keeper

Figure 4-268
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins And Retaining Pin - Fly Tip Erected

14. Install two fly tip connecting (pivot) pins in the pivot 15. Remove the pin keeper from the retaining pin. Pos­
lugs on the rear of the fly tip section. Refer to ition the retaining pin in the disengaged position
Figure 4-268. and secure with pin keeper.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-297

Operator's Manual
1 2
1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
Figure 4-269
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Retaining Pin
WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
16. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
(1). Refer to Figure 4-269. Position the retaining
pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
pin keeper (4).
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
17. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
4-298 Section 4 - Attachments
3 4
3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)
4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)
18. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
19. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
20. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
21. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
22. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
23. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-270
28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Retaining Pin Bracket

24. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
(1). Refer to Figure 4-270. Position the retaining
WARNING pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
Check that the fly base connecting pins are pin keeper (4).
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-299

Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-271
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

25. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly base around the boom head until the fly lugs
engage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
26. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before lifting loads with the
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-271. Install the damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
bottom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through pins are not properly installed.
the bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (In­
stall the pin with the head on top and the keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐
handle until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from
the fly lug is obtained.

4-300 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

3
4

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-272
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Hose Connection
27. Remove hydraulic hoses from the storage bracket.
Route the hoses through the rollers on the boom.
Connect the hydraulic lines to the quick discon­
nects on the fly. Ensure disconnects are properly
connected.
28. After hydraulic hoses have been connected ensure
the accumulator ball valve handle is in the vertical
position for working operation. Refer to
Figure 4-273.

WARNING 1
If accumulator ball valve handle is not in the
proper position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
fittings hard to connect/disconnect.

29. Secure hoses to the bracket on the boom head.

Refer to Figure 4-272.
1. Handle

Figure 4-273
Accumulator Valve Handle Working Position

Section 4 - Attachments 4-301

Operator's Manual

4 2 4

2 1 3

Locked Position Working Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides)
2. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position) 4. Fly Offset Cylinders

Figure 4-274
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Working Position

30. Place the offset fly in the working position by re­ 31. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
moving the offset connecting pins from the locked until the fly head sheave is resting on secure block­
position to the working position, in the storage ing. Use a signal person to alert the operator when
rings on the fly base section. Refer to the sheave is resting on the blocking.
Figure 4-274. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins to the storage rings
with keeper pins.

4-302 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins

Figure 4-275
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

32. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
location (1) on the rear of the fly base section and
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-275.
33. Install the inside bottom right pin first. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. Install the inside top
right pin. Adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cyl­
inders as required to get the pin to drop in the hole.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
er on the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-303

Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-276
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

34. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location

(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-276. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. (Install the pin with the
head on top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install
the pin keeper.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before lifting loads with the
fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
pins are not properly installed.

4-304 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Hitch Pin
2. Fly Tip Head Sheave

Figure 4-277
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Hitch Pin

35. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly tip section. 38. Remove the hitch pin which connects the fly tip
36. Fully retract the fly offset cylinders to raise the fly to section to the fly base section. Refer to
the 2° offset angle. Figure 4-277. Store the hitch pin back in the lug
37. Boom up to 5° boom angle. on the fly tip section once it is erected.
39. Slowly boom down to allow the fly tip to swing out
from the fly base section.
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-305

Operator's Manual
1
2

1. Fly Tip Connecting Pins Stored

2. Top Right Side Connecting Pin 5
3. Bottom Right Side Connecting Pin
4. Top Left Side Connecting Pin
5. Bottom Left Side Connecting Pin

Figure 4-278
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Connecting Pins Installation

40. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly tip section around the fly base section until
the fly tip lugs engage with the fly base lugs on the
WARNING
All fly tip connecting pins and pivot pins must
left side of the fly.
be properly installed before operating the
41. Remove the fly tip connecting pins from the stor­
crane with the fly tip erected. Serious
age holes on the rear of the fly tip section. Refer to
personal injury or major damage to the fly
Figure 4-278 Install them through the fly tip con­
could occur if all connecting pins are not
necting lugs on both sides of the fly. Install the in­
properly installed.
side top right pin first. Swing the fly tip to the left to
get the pin to drop in the hole. Install the inside bot­
tom right pin. Swing the fly tip to the right to get the
pin to drop in the hole. Install the top left pin and
then the bottom left. (Install the pins with the head
on top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install the
pin keepers.

4-306 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1
3

4
1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 3. Deflector Sheave - Working Position
2. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position 4. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position

Figure 4-279
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Head And Deflector Sheaves Stored/Working Positions (Style 1)

Style 1:
42. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base deflector sheave to a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
the stored position if required. Refer to deflector sheave (2). Rotate sheave assembly
Figure 4-279. to the working position (3) and install deflector
sheave pin (4) in the working position.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-307

Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 3. Deflector Sheave Pin - 4. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard -
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position Working Position
Stored Position

Figure 4-280
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Head And Deflector Sheaves Stored/Working Positions (Style 2)

Style 2:
43. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
sheaves to the working position. Refer to deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
Figure 4-280. deflector sheave rope guard (4) to the working
position and install deflector sheave pin (3) in
the working position.

4-308 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
1

1 8
1
2

10

3
11

5
6
4 7 12

1. Rope Guards 5. Fly Tip ATB Storage Receptacle 9. Jumper Assembly

2. Fly Tip Head ATB Switch Plug Assembly 6. Fly Tip ATB Plug Assembly 10. Fly Base Connector
3. Fly Tip Head ATB Switch 7. Fly Base Head Connector 11. Boom Head ATB Switch
4. Fly Head ATB Weight 8. Boom Head Plug Assembly 12. Lockout Clip
Figure 4-281
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Connection
44. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base de­ b. Remove the fly tip plug assembly from its stor­
flector and fly tip head sheaves. Refer to age receptacle and connect it to the fly base
Figure 4-281. Reeve the wire rope on the boom head connector.
deflector sheave then over the fly base deflector c. Install the anti‐two block weight on the offset
head and fly tip head sheaves. Install all wire rope lattice fly tip section anti‐two block switch.
guards. Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
nections are made.
CAUTION d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation. Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
45. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­ When both main boom and fly are reeved for
nections. Refer to Figure 4-281. operation, the lockout clip must be removed
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
assembly on main boom head and connect it pended from each anti‐two block switch.
to the fly base section connector.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-309

Operator's Manual
46. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL System will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
47. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
48. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
with the fly installed before continuing operations.
4-310 Section 4 - Attachments
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
 Operator's Manual

2 2
1

4
5

6
1. Boom Head Pug Assembly 4. Boom Head ATB Switch
2. Jumper Assembly 5. Lockout Clip
3. Fly Base Connector 6. Boom Head ATB Weight

Figure 4-282
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Disconnection

Storage Of The 40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m)

Fly From The Erected Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the carri­
er and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store the fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, the upper directly over the
rear of the carrier, and the travel swing lock
engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
locked position to install or remove the fly or
while swinging during erection or storage of the
offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted (2° offset position)
5. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
6. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
7. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract ot line
up with the T1 section.
8. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base con­
nector and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the fly tip ATB plug assembly from the
fly base head connector. Connect the plug as­
sembly into the fly tip ATB storage receptacle.
d. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
tip section and install it on the main boom anti‐
two block switch.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-311

Operator's Manual

1 3

2
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 3. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 4. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position

Figure 4-283
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base deflector sheave to a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the
the stored position if required. Refer to deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
Figure 4-283. stored position (4) and install pin (3) through
one of the holes in the sheave.

4-312 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - 2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - 3. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
Working Position Working Position 4. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard -
Stored Position

Figure 4-284
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
10. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base deflector sheave to a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
the stored position if required. Refer to deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
Figure 4-284. deflector sheave rope guard (4) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (3) in
the stored position.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-313

Operator's Manual

1
3

1. Bottom Left Side Connecting Pin

2. Top Left Side Connecting Pin
3. Bottom Right Side Connecting Pin
4. Top Right Side Connecting Pin
5. Fly Tip Connecting Pins Stored

Figure 4-285
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Connecting Pins Removal

11. Remove wire rope guards from fly head sheave, fly
base deflector sheave, and boom deflector sheave.
Refer to Figure 4-281. Remove the wire rope and lay
it aside. Install wire rope guards at all fly sheaves for
storage.
12. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly tip section.
13. Ensure the boom is fully retraced. Boom up to 2°
boom angle.
WARNING
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.
14. Remove the bottom and then the top fly tip con­
necting pins on the left side of the fly tip section.
Refer to Figure 4-285. To ease pin removal, re­
lieve the loading on the pins by pushing the fly tip
from side to side. Store pins and keepers in the
storage location on the rear of the fly tip section.
15. Remove the inside bottom right fly tip connecting
pin on the right side of the fly tip section. To reduce
loading and ease pin removal, push the fly tip
slightly right or left. Remove the inside top right fly
tip connecting pin on the right side of the fly tip sec­
tion. To reduce loading and ease pin removal push
the fly tip slightly left or right. Store pins and keep­
ers in the storage location on the rear of the fly tip
section.

4-314 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

2
3

1. Hitch Pin
2. Fly Tip Head Sheave
3. Fly Base Section

Figure 4-286
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Hitch Pin

17. Align the storage bracket on the fly tip section with
WARNING the storage bracket on the fly base section. Refer
to Figure 4-286. Install the hitch pin through the
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly tip
storage brackets and secure with the cotter pin.
could swing around fly base rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.

16. Using the hand line attached to the fly tip section,
slowly swing the fly tip section around to the right
side of the fly base section. Slowly boom up if ne­
cessary to ease fly tip swing.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-315

Operator's Manual

1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location

Figure 4-287
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

18. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.
19. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
until the fly head sheave is resting on secure block­
ing. Use a signal person to alert the operator when
the sheave is resting on the blocking.
20. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-287. To reduce loading and ease pin
removal, adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cylin­
ders as required. Store connecting pin in the stor­
age location on the rear of the fly base section.

4-316 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-288
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

21. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-288.
To reduce loading and ease pin removal, adjust the
fly angle with the fly offset cylinders as required.
22. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, adjust the fly angle with the
fly offset cylinders as required. Store the two pins
and keepers in the storage location on the rear pic­
ture frame of the fly base section.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-317

Operator's Manual

2 4 2
4

1 3

Working Position Locked Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides)
2. Fly Offset Cylinders 4. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position)

Figure 4-289
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Locked Position

23. Fully retract fly offset cylinders to raise the fly to the
2° offset position.
24. Place the offset fly in the locked position by remov­
ing the offset connecting pins from the working po­
sition to the locked position. Refer to
Figure 4-289. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins with keeper pins.

4-318 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

3
4

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-290
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Hose Connections
25. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the quick dis­
connects. Remove hydraulic hoses from the hy­
draulic hose working bracket. Remove the hoses
from the rollers and secure hoses to the hydraulic
hose storage bracket on the boom head. Refer to
Figure 4-290.
26. After hydraulic hoses have been disconnected en­
sure the accumulator ball valve handle is in the ho­
rizontal position for storage. Refer to
Figure 4-291.

WARNING
If accumulator ball valve is not in the proper
position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
fittings hard to connect/disconnect. 1

1. Handle

Figure 4-291
Accumulator Valve Handle Stored Position

Section 4 - Attachments 4-319

Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-292
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

28. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
CAUTION Refer to Figure 4-292. Install the connecting pin
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly. in the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
damage. keeper.

27. Ensure the boom is fully retracted. Boom up to 2°

boom angle.

4-320 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 6 7 8 9

3 4 5

1. Rear Storage Bracket 6. Fly Storage Lug (Engaged In Storage Bracket)

2. Fly Storage Lug (Against Storage Bracket) 7. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
3. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Section 8. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
4. Top Bullet Lug 9. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Storage Bracket
5. Front Storage Bracket

Figure 4-293
40 Ft (12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Storage Brackets

29. Attach a hand line to the tip of the 28 ft (8.53m) fly
tip section.
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.
30. Slowly swing the fly around to the right side of the
boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
31. Extend the boom until the fly storage lug (2) can
swing completely against the rear storage bracket
(1). Refer to Figure 4-293.
32. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°
boom angle. Observe that the following occurs
while retracting the boom:
a. The storage lug (6) on the rear of the 28 ft
(8.53m) fly base section slides into the slot on
the rear storage bracket. Refer to
Figure 4-293.
b. The top bullet lug (4) on the front fly storage
bracket (5) engages through the hole on the
rear of the 28 ft (8.53m) fly base section (3).
c. The bullet lug (8) on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base
section (7) engages through the hole on the
end of the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base section storage
bracket (9).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-321

Operator's Manual
3 3 2

1
1. Storage Lug
2. Storage Pin
3. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section

Figure 4-294
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Storage Lug

d. The the storage lug (1) on the 12 ft (3.65m)
base section (3) engages with the storage pin
(2). Refer to Figure 4-294.
e. The bullet lug (1) on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base
retaining pin bracket engages through the
hole on the retaining pin bracket on the boom.
Refer to Figure 4-295.
f. The fly tip storage bracket lug (1) on the boom
engages through the fly tip storage bracket
slot on the fly tip. Refer to Figure 4-297.
g. The bullet lug (1) on the 28 ft (8.53m) fly base
retaining pin bracket engages through the
hole on the retaining pin bracket on the boom.
Refer to Figure 4-296.

4-322 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5
1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-295
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Retaining Pin Bracket

33. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin.

Refer to Figure 4-295. Remove the pin keeper (3)
from the retaining pin (2). Position the retaining pin
in the engaged position (4) and secure with pin
keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-323

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5

1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)

2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-296
28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Retaining Pin Bracket

34. Remove the pin keeper (3) from the retaining pin (2).
Refer to Figure 4-296.
35. Position the retaining pin in the engaged position (4)
and secure with pin keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-324 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

2 4

3
5

1. Fly Tip Storage Bracket Lug 4. Fly Tip Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Fly Tip Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-297
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Retaining Pin

36. Remove the pin keeper (3) from the retaining pin 37. Position the retaining pin in the engaged position
(2). Refer to Figure 4-297. (4) and secure with pin keeper (5).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-325

Operator's Manual
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
3 4
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-298
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins Storage
38. Remove the two top fly base connecting pins and
the bottom fly base connecting pivot pin from the
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-298.
Store two of pins and keepers in storage rings on
the rear picture frame of the fly base section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
39. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with with the other fly connecting pin.
4-326 Section 4 - Attachments
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored Position)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position)
40. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
41. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL System in
the Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configura­
tion Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/
Select OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward
the retract direction. The RCL System will then
enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
42. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
43. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacit­
ies with the fly in the stored position before continu­
ing operations.

ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
Â
1. Blocking
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
1 1
Figure 4-299
Installation And Removal Of The 12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly
12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset
Lattice Fly
The crane may be equipped with a two piece 12 ft
(3.65m) hydraulic offset lattice fly. It is made up of a 12 ft
(3.65m) base. The hydraulic offset lattice fly, as shown in
Figure 4-302, connects to the main boom head. The fly
can be changed from 2 to 45 offsets through the use of
hydraulic cylinders. Once installed, the offset lattice fly
can be stored on the right side of the boom base section.
Offset Lattice Fly Installation
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers with all
tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Install the offset fly with the crane level on
fully extended outriggers, all tires clear of the
ground, the upper directly over the rear of the
carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully
retracted and the offset connecting pins must
be in the locked position to install, remove,
erect, or store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are in the locked
position. Refer Figure 4-304.
6. Position the fly assembly on secure blocking. Refer to
Figure 4-299. The fly base section weighs approxi­
mately 2,305 lb (1 045kg).
7. Remove the wire rope from the main boom head
machinery or the auxiliary lifting sheave, whichever
is to be used on the fly, and lay it aside to prevent
damage to it during installation of the fly.
8. Lower the boom and check that the swing lug is in the
working position. Extend the boom to the fly. Slowly
raise or lower the boom to engage the fly lugs with the
fly swing lug and the head machinery cross shafts.
9. Remove the four fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the right rear of the fly base section.
Refer to Figure 4-201. Install all four pins to con­
nect the fly lugs to the head machinery cross shaft
and the swing lug on the right side of the boom.
(Install the pins with the head on top and keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
10. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the left rear of the fly base section. Re­
fer to Figure 4-302. Install the top pin to connect
the fly lug to the head machinery cross shaft on the
left side of the boom head. Turn the t‐handle as re­
quired to push and align the bottom left fly lug and
the bottom boom head cross shaft. Install the bot­
tom left fly connecting pin. (Install the pins with the
head on top and keeper on the bottom.) Install the
pin keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at least a
1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is ob­
tained.
4-327
Operator's Manual
1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket 2
2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket
Figure 4-300
Hydraulic Hose Connection
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
major damage to the fly could occur if all
connecting pins are not properly installed.
11. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base de­
flector sheave and boom head deflector sheaves.
Reeve the wire rope over the boom deflector
sheave, then over the fly base deflector sheaves.
12. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly head
sheaves. Reeve the wire rope over the head
sheaves and install the wire rope guard(s).
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
4-328 Section 4 - Attachments
3
4
13. Properly connect the anti‐two block system as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head and connect it
to the offset lattice fly base section connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the appro­
priate offset lattice fly section anti‐two block
switch cable. Confirm that all anti‐two block
harness connections are made to the appro­
priate fly section(s).
c. Properly install lockout clip on the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.
14. Remove hydraulic hoses from the storage bracket.
Route the hoses through the rollers on the boom.
Connect the hydraulic lines to the quick discon­
nects on the fly. Ensure the yellow o‐ring of each
quick disconnect fitting is completely covered
when they are connected. Secure hoses to the
bracket on the boom head. Refer to Figure 4-300.
15. After hydraulic hoses have been connected ensure
the accumulator ball valve handle is in the vertical
position for working operation. Refer to
Figure 4-301.
 Operator's Manual

WARNING
If accumulator ball valve handle is not in the
proper position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
fittings hard to connect/disconnect.

16. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­

rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
17. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca­ 1
pacity deductions with the fly installed before con­
tinuing operations.

WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
1. Handle
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly Figure 4-301
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for Accumulator Valve Handle Working Position
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully extended outriggers
with all tires clear of the ground.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-329

Operator's Manual

1
8

9 2

3
8

6
7
12

14

13

16

10
15
11
10

1. Right Side Offset Connecting Pin (Locked Position) 9. Fly Base ATB Jumper Assembly
2. Swing Lug 10. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin
3. Swing Lug Pivot Pin 11. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Storage Rings
4. Right Side Offset Connecting Pin Ring (Working Position) 12. Fly Base Deflector Sheave
5. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Storage Rings 13. 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
6. Bottom Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin (Pivot Pin) 14. Fly Offset Cylinders
7. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin 15. Left Side Offset Connecting Pin Storage Ring (Working Position)
8. Boom Head Machinery Cross Shaft 16. Left Side Offset Connecting Pin (Locked Position)

Figure 4-302
12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly

4-330 Section 4 - Attachments


Offset Lattice Fly Removal
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers with all
tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Remove the offset fly with the crane level on
fully extended outriggers, all tires clear of the
ground, the upper directly over the rear of the
carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully
retracted and the offset connecting pins must
be in the locked position to install, remove,
erect, or store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. If the fly is not in the erected position, erect it per
“Erection Of The 12 ft (3.65m) Fly From The Stored
Position” or “Erection Of The 12 ft (3.65m) Fly From
The Stored Position” in this Section of this Opera­
tor's Manual.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are in the locked
position. Refer to “Changing The 12 ft (3.65m) Hy­
draulic Fly Offset Angle” and Figure 4-304.
6. Boom down fully.
7. Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the hydraulic
offset cylinders and store on boom base section.
Secure hoses to the storage bracket on the boom.
Refer to Figure 4-300.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
8. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Remove the lockout clip from the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.
b. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the off­
set lattice fly and install it on the main boom
head anti‐two block switch.
c. Remove the plug assembly from the offset lat­
tice fly base and connect it to the jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head. Confirm that
all necessary anti‐two block harness connec­
tions are disconnected.
9. Remove all fly base wire rope guards. Remove
boom head and fly deflector sheave wire rope
guards and lay the wire rope aside.
10. Install all fly base wire rope guards for storage.
11. Extend the boom until the fly base sheave rests on
the ground.
12. Securely block up the fly to support it. Refer to
Figure 4-299. The fly base section weighs
approximately 2,305 lb (1 045kg).
WARNING
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly and cause personal injury.
13. If removing the fly base, remove the four fly con­
necting pins on the right side and store the pins
and keepers in the storage rings at the right rear of
the fly. Do not remove the swing lug connecting pin
from the head machinery cross shaft. Refer to
Figure 4-302. Remove the two fly connecting
pins on the left side and store the pins and keepers
in the storage rings at the left rear of the fly.
14. Retract the boom away from the fly base.
15. Properly reeve or secure the wire rope which was
used on the fly. Install the boom head and deflector
sheave wire rope guards as required.
16. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
17. Properly store fly to prevent damage to it.
4-331
Operator's Manual
3

RAISE LOWER
(Decrease Fly (Increase Fly
Offset Angle) Offset Angle)
1
Right Seat
Joystick Control
LOWER
(Increase Fly
2 Offset Angle)

RAISE
(Decrease Fly
Upper Cab Right Side Offset Angle)
Console Control Switches Right Seat
1. Locking Tab
2. Hydraulic Fly Offset Activation Switch Single Axis Control
3. Control Lever (If Equipped)
Figure 4-303
Hydraulic Offset Fly Controls

Changing The 12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Fly

Offset Angle
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers with all
tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Change the fly offset angle with the crane
level on fully extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, the upper directly over the
rear of the carrier, and the travel swing lock
engaged.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4. If the offset lattice fly section is not in the erected
position, erect it per “Erection Of The 12 ft (3.65m)
Fly From The Stored Position” or “Erection Of The
12 ft (3.65m) Fly From The Stored Position” in this
Operator's Manual.
CAUTION
Do not extend the boom or boom down to the
point of over stressing the offset lattice fly
section. Structural damage to the fly could oc­
cur if care is not taken. Use a signal person to
aid the operator in lowering the fly head
sheave to the ground.
5. Carefully extend and/or lower the boom until the fly
base head sheave is resting on the ground. Use a
signal person to alert the operator when the
sheave is resting on the ground.
6. Place the offset fly in the working position by re­
moving the offset connecting pins from the locked
position and installing them in the storage rings on
the fly base section. Refer to Figure 4-304. Do
this on both sides of the fly. Secure offset connect­
ing pins to the storage rings with keeper pins.
7. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration before continuing opera­
tions. Refer to Section 1 of this Operator's Manual.
8. Check the Crane Rating Manual for deductions
from the lifting capacities with the fly installed be­
fore continuing operations.

4-332 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

2
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent
personal injury or crane damage.
Pins must be properly installed on both
sides of fly.
Install pins in locked position to store or
erect the fly.
Fully retract cylinders before changing pins
to the working position.

2 1

Locked Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Ring (Both Sides)

2. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position)
3. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides) Working Position

Figure 4-304
Changing The Hydraulic Offset Fly Angle
9. Slowly boom up to an offset fly working range be­ 11. Using the control lever, position the hydraulic offset
fore adjusting the offset angle of the fly. fly to the desired offset working angle.
10. Slide and hold the locking tab on the hydraulic fly off­
set activation switch, then push the switch to activate
the right (boom hoist) control lever to be used as the
hydraulic fly offset controls. Refer to Figure 4-303.
Move the control lever left to raise the hydraulic fly
(decrease the fly offset angle) or right to lower the hy­
draulic fly (increase the offset angle). (If equipped
with single axis controls, pull the lever back to raise,
or push it forward to lower the fly.)

Section 4 - Attachments 4-333

Operator's Manual
WARNING
When making lifts from the 12 ft (3.65m) fly at
2° offset and 70 degree boom angle or higher,
2 parts of line is the maximum with the
auxiliary sheave erected. Wire rope may
contact auxiliary lifting sheave. Auxiliary
lifting sheave may be removed or stored on
the boom head to eliminate the possible
interference. A warning will be shown on the
RCL display if the configuration can result in
wire rope contacting the auxiliary lifting
sheave.
4-334 Section 4 - Attachments
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must be
considered in lifting capacities when the fly is
erected. When making lifts from the main boom
or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly erected,
refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
appropriate deductions from lifting capacities.
Use the offset lattice fly only when the crane is
level on fully extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground.

1. 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Retaining Pin
2. 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
3. 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
4. Swing Lug
Figure 4-305
12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice (Stored)
Erection Of The 12 ft (3.65m) Fly From
The Stored Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers with all
tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the carri­
er and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect the fly with the crane level on fully
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground, the upper directly over the rear of the
carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
locked position to install or remove the offset fly
or while swinging during erection or storage of
the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
3
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are in the locked
position. Refer Figure 4-304.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL System in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL Display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.
4-335
Operator's Manual

3
4
2
5

1 6
1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 4. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored Position) 5. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position) 6. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin

Figure 4-306
12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-306.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (5) and
install the connecting pins (4) into the swing lug
and through the fly lug. Secure with pin keepers.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
ers on the bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin from the storage loca­
tion (1) on the rear of the fly base section. Install it
into the other swing lug hole and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin from the stor­
age location (1) on the rear of the fly base section.
Install the pin (6) through the fly pivot lug on the
bottom right side of the boom and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)

4-336 Section 4 - Attachments


1 2
1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
Figure 4-307
12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Retaining Pin
13. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it
during erection of the fly.
WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
14. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
(1). Refer to Figure 4-307. Position the retaining
pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
pin keeper (4).
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
3 4
3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)
4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)
15. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
16. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
17. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
18. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
19. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
20. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
21. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
4-337
Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-308
12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

22. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly base around the boom head until the fly lugs
engage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
23. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before lifting loads with the
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-308. Install the damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
bottom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through pins are not properly installed.
the bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (In­
stall the pin with the head on top and the keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐
handle until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from
the fly lug is obtained.

4-338 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

3
4

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-309
Hydraulic Hose Connection
24. Remove hydraulic hoses from the storage bracket.
Route the hoses through the rollers on the boom.
Connect the hydraulic hoses to the quick discon­
nects on the fly.
25. After hydraulic hoses have been connected ensure
the accumulator ball valve handle is in the vertical
position for working operation. Refer to
Figure 4-310.

WARNING
If accumulator ball valve handle is not in the 1
proper position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
fittings hard to connect/disconnect.

26. Ensure the yellow o‐ring of each quick disconnect

fitting is completely covered when they are con­
nected. Secure hydraulic hoses to the working
1. Handle
bracket on the boom head. Refer to Figure 4-309.
Figure 4-310
Accumulator Valve Handle Working Position

Section 4 - Attachments 4-339

Operator's Manual

4 2 4

2 1 3

Locked Position Working Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides)
2. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position) 4. Fly Offset Cylinders

Figure 4-311
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Working Position

27. Place the offset fly in the working position by re­
moving the offset connecting pins from the locked
position to the working position, in the storage
rings on the fly base section. Refer to
Figure 4-311. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins to the storage rings
with keeper pins.
28. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
until the fly head sheave is resting on approxim­
ately 3 ft (0.9m) of secure blocking. Use a signal
person to alert the operator when the sheave is
resting on the blocking.

4-340 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins

Figure 4-312
12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

29. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage 30. Adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cylinders as
location (1) on the rear of the fly base section and required to get the pin to drop in the hole. (Install
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side the pins with the head on top and the keeper on the
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-312. Install the in­ bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
side bottom right pin first. Adjust the fly angle with
the fly offset cylinders as required to get the pin to
drop in the hole. Install the inside top right pin.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-341

Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-313
12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

31. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location

(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-313. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. (Install the pin with the
head on top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install
the pin keeper.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before lifting loads with the
fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
pins are not properly installed.

4-342 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1
5

4
7
4 3

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave - Working Position

2. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-314
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Working Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
32. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector up to the working position (5) and install de­
sheaves to the working position. Refer to flector sheave pin (6) in the working position.
Figure 4-314. b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
deflector sheave (2). Rotate sheave assembly the working position (7) and install pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-343

Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

7 4

3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-315
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Working Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
33. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the working position. Refer to
Figure 4-315.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the working
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the working position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
the working position (7) and install pin (4).

4-344 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1
1

2
3
4 9

5
10
1. Rope Guards 5. Fly Head ATB Weight 8. Fly Base Connector
2. Fly Base Head Connector 6. Boom Head Pug Assembly 9. Boom Head ATB Switch
3. Fly Base Head ATB Switch Plug Assembly 7. Jumper Assembly 10. Lockout Clip
4. Fly Base Head ATB Switch

Figure 4-316
12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Connection

34. Remove the wire rope guard from the fly base head
and deflector sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-316.
Reeve the wire rope on the boom deflector sheave
then over the fly deflector and head sheaves. In­
stall all wire rope guards.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
35. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections. Refer to Figure 4-316.
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper
assembly on main boom head and connect it
to the fly base connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the fly base
head anti‐two block switch. Connect the fly
base head ATB switch plug assembly to the fly
base head connector.
c. Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
nections are made.
d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-345

Operator's Manual
36. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL System will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
37. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
38. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
with the fly installed before continuing operations.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully extended outriggers
with all tires clear of the ground.

WARNING
When making lifts from the 12 ft (3.65m) fly at
2° offset and 70 degree boom angle or higher,
2 parts of line is the maximum with the
auxiliary sheave erected. Wire rope may
contact auxiliary lifting sheave. Auxiliary
lifting sheave may be removed or stored on
the boom head to eliminate the possible
interference. A warning will be shown on the
RCL display if the configuration can result in
wire rope contacting the auxiliary lifting
sheave.

4-346 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

2 2
1

4
4

5 5

1. Boom Head Pug Assembly 4. Boom Head ATB Switch 6

2. Jumper Assembly 5. Lockout Clip
3. Fly Base Connector 6. Boom Head ATB Weight

Figure 4-317
12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Disconnection

Storage Of The 12 ft (3.65m) Fly From The

Erected Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers with all
tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store the fly with the crane level on fully
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground, the upper directly over the rear of the
carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully
retracted and the offset connecting pins must
be in the locked position to install or remove
the fly or while swinging during erection or
storage of the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
5. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
6. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
7. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base con­
nector and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
base section and install it on the main boom
anti‐two block switch.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-347

Operator's Manual

5
1

4
3
4 7
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-318
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
8. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
Figure 4-318. sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the sheave down on the pin (4).
deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
stored position (6) and install pin (5) through
the one of the holes in the sheave.

4-348 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

3 4

7 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-319
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to
Figure 4-319.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the stored position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
sheave down on the pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-349

Operator's Manual

1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location

Figure 4-320
12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

10. Remove wire rope guards from fly base head sheave,
fly base deflector sheave, and boom deflector sheave.
Refer to Figure 4-316. Remove the wire rope and lay
it aside. Install wire rope guards at all fly sheaves for
storage.
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing personal injury.
11. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
until the fly head sheave is resting on approxim­
ately 3 ft (0.9m) of secure blocking. Use a signal
person to alert the operator when the sheave is
resting on the blocking.
12. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-320. To reduce loading and ease pin
removal, adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cylin­
ders as required. Store connecting pin in the stor­
age location on the rear of the fly base section.

4-350 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-321
12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

13. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-321.
To reduce loading and ease pin removal, adjust the
fly angle with the fly offset cylinders as required.
14. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, adjust the fly angle with the
fly offset cylinders as required. Store the two pins
and keepers in the storage location on the rear pic­
ture frame of the fly base section.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-351

Operator's Manual
2 4 2
4

1 3

Working Position Locked Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides)
2. Fly Offset Cylinders 4. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position)

Figure 4-322
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Locked Position

15. Fully retract fly offset cylinders to raise the fly to the
2° offset position.
16. Place the offset fly in the locked position by remov­
ing the offset connecting pins from the working po­
sition to the locked position. Refer to
Figure 4-322. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins with keeper pins.

4-352 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket 2

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses 3 4
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-323
Hydraulic Hose Connection
17. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the quick dis­
connects. Remove hydraulic hoses from the hy­
draulic hose working bracket.
18. Remove the hoses from the rollers and secure
hoses to the hydraulic hose storage bracket on the
boom head. Refer to Figure 4-323.
19. After hydraulic hoses have been disconnected en­
sure the accumulator ball valve handle is in the ho­
rizontal position for storage. Refer to
Figure 4-324.

WARNING
If accumulator ball valve is not in the proper
position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
fittings hard to connect/disconnect. 1

1. Handle

Figure 4-324
Accumulator Valve Handle Stored Position

Section 4 - Attachments 4-353

Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-325
12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

20. Attach a hand line to the tip of the 12 ft (3.65m) fly
base.
21. Ensure the boom is fully retracted. Boom up to 2°
boom angle.
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause crane damage.
22. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
Refer to Figure 4-325. Install the connecting pin
in the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
keeper.

4-354 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
3 3 2

1
1. Storage Lug
2. Storage Pin
3. 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section

Figure 4-326
12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Storage Lug

1 2 3
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.

23. Slowly swing the 12ft fly base section around to the
right side of the boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
24. Extend the boom until the 12 ft (3.65m) fly storage
lug clears the storage pin. Refer to Figure 4-326.
25. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°
boom angle to engage the storage lug with the
storage pin. Refer to Figure 4-326. At the same
time, the bullet lug on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base sec­
tion should engage through the hole on the end of
the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base section storage bracket
(Figure 4-327) and the bullet lug on the retaining 1. 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base 3. 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base
2. 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Storage Bracket
pin bracket on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base section
Bullet Lug
should engage through the hole on the retaining
pin bracket on the boom (Refer to Figure 4-328).
Figure 4-327
Note: If the 28 ft (8.53m) tip section is stored on 12 ft (3.65m) Fly Base Bullet Lug
the boom, observe that the 12 ft (3.65m) base
lugs engage with the 28 ft (8.53m) tip section.
Refer to Figure 4-361.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-355

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)

Figure 4-328
12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Base Retaining Pin

26. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin.

Refer to Figure 4-328. Remove the pin keeper (2)
from the retaining pin (1). Position the retaining pin
in the engaged position (3) and secure with pin
keeper (4).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-356 Section 4 - Attachments


WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
3 4
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-329
12 ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins
27. Remove the two top fly base connecting pins and
the bottom fly base connecting pivot pin from the
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-329.
Store two of the pins and keepers in storage rings
on the rear picture frame of the fly base section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
28. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with the other fly connecting pin.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored Position)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position)
29. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
30. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL System in
the Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configura­
tion Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/
Select OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward
the retract direction. The RCL System will then
enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
31. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
32. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci­
ties with the fly in the stored position before con­
tinuing operations.
4-357
Operator's Manual
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ 1
1. Blocking
Figure 4-330
Installation And Removal Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic
Offset Lattice Fly
The crane may be equipped with a two piece 12-40 ft
(3.65-12.19m) hydraulic offset lattice fly. It is made up of
a 12 ft (3.65m) base and a 28 ft (8.53m) tip section. The
hydraulic offset lattice fly, as shown in Figure 4-333, con­
nects to the main boom head. The fly can be changed
from 2 to 45 offsets through the use of hydraulic cylin­
ders. Once installed, the offset lattice fly can be stored on
the right side of the boom base section.
Offset Lattice Fly Installation
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Install offset fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers, all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully
retracted and the offset connecting pins must
be in the locked position to install, remove,
erect, or store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4-358 Section 4 - Attachments
ÂÂÂ
1
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the 12 ft (3.65m) base and 28 ft
(8.53m) tip sections are pinned together with the
connecting pins. Refer to Figure 4-333.
6. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are in the locked
position. Refer Figure 4-335.
7. Position the fly assembly on secure blocking. Refer to
Figure 4-330. The fly base section weighs approxi­
mately 2,305 lb (1 045kg) and the fly tip section weighs
approximately 1,537 lb (697kg). The full fly assembly
weighs approximately 3,845 lb (1 744kg).
8. Remove the wire rope from the main boom head
machinery or the auxiliary lifting sheave, whichever
is to be used on the fly, and lay it aside to prevent
damage to it during installation of the fly.
9. Lower the boom and check that the swing lug is in the
working position. Extend the boom to the fly. Slowly
raise or lower the boom to engage the fly lugs with the
fly swing lug and the head machinery cross shafts.
10. Remove the four fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the right rear of the fly base section.
Refer to Figure 4-333. Install all four pins to con­
nect the fly lugs to the head machinery cross shaft
and the swing lug on the right side of the boom.
(Install the pins with the head on top and keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
11. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the left rear of the fly base section. Re­
fer to Figure 4-333. Install the top pin to connect
the fly lug to the head machinery cross shaft on the
left side of the boom head. Turn the t‐handle as re­
quired to push and align the bottom left fly lug and
the bottom boom head cross shaft. Install the bot­
tom left fly connecting pin. (Install the pins with the
 Operator's Manual

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket 2

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses 3
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket
4

Figure 4-331
Hydraulic Hose Connection
head on top and keeper on the bottom.) Install the
pin keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at least a
1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is ob­
tained.

WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
major damage to the fly could occur if all
connecting pins are not properly installed. 1

12. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base de­
flector sheave and boom head deflector sheaves.
Reeve the wire rope over the boom deflector
sheave, then over the fly base deflector sheaves.
13. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly head
sheaves. Reeve the wire rope over the head
sheaves and install the wire rope guard(s).
1. Handle

Figure 4-332
CAUTION Accumulator Valve Handle Working Position
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
14. Properly connect the anti‐two block system as follows: anti‐two block switch is inactive.
a. Disconnect plug assembly from jumper as­
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
sembly on the main boom head and connect it
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
to the offset lattice fly base section connector.
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the appro­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.
priate offset lattice fly section anti‐two block
switch cable. Confirm that all anti‐two block
harness connections are made to the appro­
priate fly section(s).
c. Properly install lockout clip on the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-359

Operator's Manual
15. Remove hydraulic hoses from the storage bracket.
Route the hoses through the rollers on the boom.
Connect the hydraulic lines to the quick discon­
nects on the fly. Ensure disconnects are properly
connected. Secure hoses to the bracket on the
boom head. Refer to Figure 4-331.
16. After hydraulic hoses have been connected ensure
the accumulator ball valve handle is in the vertical
position for working operation.
Figure 4-332.
Refer to
WARNING
If accumulator ball valve handle is not in the
proper position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
fittings hard to connect/disconnect.
4-360 Section 4 - Attachments
17. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
18. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca­
pacity deductions with the fly installed before con­
tinuing operations.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
 Operator's Manual

1
8

9 2

15
3
8

13 4

6
7

12
17

16

14

18

10
19
11
10
1. Right Side Offset Connecting Pin (Locked Position) 11. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Storage Rings
2. Swing Lug 12. Fly Base Deflector Sheave
3. Swing Lug Pivot Pin 13. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Tip Section
4. Right Side Offset Connecting Pin Ring (Working Position) 14. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
5. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Storage Rings 15. Fly Tip Head Deflector Sheave
6. Bottom Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin (Pivot Pin) 16. Connecting Pins
7. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin 17. Fly Offset Cylinders
8. Boom Head Machinery Cross Shaft 18. Left Side Offset Connecting Pin (Locked Position)
9. Fly Base ATB Jumper Assembly 19. Left Side Offset Connecting Pin Ring (Working Position)
10. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin
Figure 4-333
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly

Section 4 - Attachments 4-361

Operator's Manual
Offset Lattice Fly Removal
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Remove the offset fly with the crane level on
fully or intermediate extended outriggers, all
tires clear of the ground, the upper directly
over the rear of the carrier, and the travel
swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully
retracted and the offset connecting pins must
be in the locked position to install, remove,
erect, or store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. If the fly is not in the erected position, erect it per
“Erection Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From The Stored
Position” or “Erection Of The 12-40 Ft
(3.65-12.19m) Fly From The Stored Position” in
this Section of this Operator's Manual.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are in the locked
position. Refer to “Changing The 12-40 Ft
(3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Fly Offset Angle” and
Figure 4-335.
6. Boom down fully.
7. Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the hydraulic
offset cylinders and store on boom base section.
Secure hoses to the storage bracket on the boom.
Refer to Figure 4-331.
8. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
4-362 Section 4 - Attachments
a. Remove the lockout clip from the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.
b. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the off­
set lattice fly and install it on the main boom
head anti‐two block switch.
c. Remove the plug assembly from the offset lat­
tice fly base and connect it to the jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head. Confirm that
all necessary anti‐two block harness connec­
9.
tions are disconnected.
Remove all fly base and tip wire rope guards. Re­
move boom head and fly deflector sheave wire
rope guards and lay the wire rope aside.
10. Install all fly base and tip wire rope guards for stor­
age.
11. Extend the boom until the fly tip sheave rests on the
ground.
12. Securely block up the fly to support it. Refer to
Figure 4-330. The fly base section weighs
approximately 2,305 lb (1 045kg) and the fly tip
section weighs approximately 1,537 lb (697kg).
The full fly assembly weighs approximately 3,845
lb (1 744kg).
WARNING
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly and cause personal injury.
13. If only the fly tip section is to be removed, remove
the connecting pins and pivot pins from the fly tip
lugs only. Store the pins in the storage holes in the
tip section. Refer to Figure 4-333.
14. If removing the fly base, remove the four fly con­
necting pins on the right side and store the pins
and keepers in the storage rings at the right rear of
the fly. Do not remove the swing lug connecting pin
from the head machinery cross shaft. Refer to
Figure 4-333. Remove the two fly connecting
pins on the left side and store the pins and keepers
in the storage rings at the left rear of the fly.
15. Retract the boom away from the fly or the fly base
away from the fly tip if only the fly tip is being re­
moved.
16. Properly reeve or secure the wire rope which was
used on the fly. Install the boom head and deflector
sheave wire rope guards as required.
17. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
18. Properly store fly to prevent damage to it.
 Operator's Manual
3

RAISE LOWER
(Decrease Fly (Increase Fly
Offset Angle) Offset Angle)
1
Right Seat
Joystick Control
LOWER
(Increase Fly
2 Offset Angle)

RAISE
(Decrease Fly
Upper Cab Right Side Offset Angle)
Console Control Switches Right Seat
1. Locking Tab
2. Hydraulic Fly Offset Activation Switch Single Axis Control
3. Control Lever (If Equipped)
Figure 4-334
Hydraulic Offset Fly Controls

Changing The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m)

Hydraulic Fly Offset Angle
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Change the fly offset angle with the crane
level on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground,
the upper directly over the rear of the carrier,
and the travel swing lock engaged.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4. If the offset lattice fly section is not in the erected
position, erect it per “Erection Of The 12 Ft (3.65m)
Fly From The Stored Position” or “Erection Of The
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Fly From The Stored Po­
sition” in this Operator's Manual.
CAUTION
Do not extend the boom or boom down to the
point of over stressing the offset lattice fly
section. Structural damage to the fly could oc­
cur if care is not taken. Use a signal person to
aid the operator in lowering the fly head
sheave to the ground.
5. Carefully extend and/or lower the boom until the fly
tip head sheave is resting on the ground. Use a
signal person to alert the operator when the
sheave is resting on the ground.
6. Place the offset fly in the working position by re­
moving the offset connecting pins from the locked
position and installing them in the storage rings on
the fly base section. Refer to Figure 4-335. Do
this on both sides of the fly. Secure offset connect­
ing pins to the storage rings with keeper pins.
7. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration before continuing opera­
tions. Refer to Section 1 of this Operator's Manual.
8. Check the Crane Rating Manual for deductions
from the lifting capacities with the fly installed be­
fore continuing operations.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-363

Operator's Manual
2
2 1
Locked Position
1. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Ring (Both Sides)
2. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position)
3. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides)
Figure 4-335
Changing The Hydraulic Offset Fly Angle
9. Slowly boom up to an offset fly working range be­
fore adjusting the offset angle of the fly.
10. Slide and hold the locking tab on the hydraulic fly off­
set activation switch, then push the switch to activate
the right (boom hoist) control lever to be used as the
hydraulic fly offset controls. Refer to Figure 4-334.
Move the control lever left to raise the hydraulic fly
(decrease the fly offset angle) or right to lower the hy­
draulic fly (increase the offset angle). (If equipped
with single axis controls, pull the lever back to raise,
or push it forward to lower the fly.)
11. Using the control lever, position the hydraulic offset
fly to the desired offset working angle.
4-364 Section 4 - Attachments
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent
personal injury or crane damage.
Pins must be properly installed on both
sides of fly.
Install pins in locked position to store or
erect the fly.
Fully retract cylinders before changing pins
to the working position.
Working Position
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must be
considered in lifting capacities when the fly is
erected. When making lifts from the main boom
or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly erected,
refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
appropriate deductions from lifting capacities.
Use the offset lattice fly only when the crane is
level on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.

2
1. Rear Storage Bracket
2. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Tip Section
3. Retaining Pin
4. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Retaining Pin
5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
6. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
7. Swing Lug
8. Front Fly Storage Bracket
Figure 4-336
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice (Stored)
Erection Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From
The Stored Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the carri­
er and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
locked position to install or remove the offset fly
or while swinging during erection or storage of
the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
3
4
5
6
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are in the locked
position. Refer Figure 4-335.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL System in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL Display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.
4-365
Operator's Manual

3
4
2
5

1 6
1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 4. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored Position) 5. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position) 6. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin

Figure 4-337
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-337.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (5) and
install the connecting pins (4) into the swing lug
and through the fly lug. Secure with pin keepers.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
ers on the bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin from the storage loca­
tion (1) on the rear of the fly base section. Install it
into the other swing lug hole and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin from the stor­
age location (1) on the rear of the fly base section.
Install the pin (6) through the fly pivot lug on the
bottom right side of the boom and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)

4-366 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3

5
6
1. 28 Ft (8.53m) Tip Section
2. Upper Connecting Pin Storage Locations
3. Upper Connecting Pins
4. Lower Connecting Pin Storage Locations
5. Lower Connecting Pins
6. 12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section

Figure 4-338
28 Ft (8.53m) Tip Section Connecting Pins

13. If the 28 ft (8.53m) tip section is stored on the 14. Install all connecting pins in their proper storage
boom, remove the connecting pins connecting the location.
12 ft (3.65m) base section to the 28 ft (8.53m) tip
section. Refer to Figure 4-338.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-367

Operator's Manual
1 2
1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
Figure 4-339
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Retaining Pin
15. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it
during erection of the fly.
WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
16. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
(1). Refer to Figure 4-339. Position the retaining
pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
pin keeper (4).
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
4-368 Section 4 - Attachments
3 4
3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)
4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)
17. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
18. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
19. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
20. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
21. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
22. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
23. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
 Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-340
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

24. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly base around the boom head until the fly lugs
engage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
25. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before lifting loads with the
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-340. Install the damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
bottom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through pins are not properly installed.
the bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (In­
stall the pin with the head on top and the keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐
handle until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from
the fly lug is obtained.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-369

Operator's Manual

3
4

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-341
Hydraulic Hose Connection
26. Remove hydraulic hoses from the storage bracket.
Route the hoses through the rollers on the boom.
Connect the hydraulic hoses to the quick discon­
nects on the fly. Ensure disconnects are properly
connected.
27. After hydraulic hoses have been connected ensure
the accumulator ball valve handle is in the vertical
position for working operation. Refer to
Figure 4-342.

1 WARNING
If accumulator ball valve handle is not in the
proper position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
fittings hard to connect/disconnect.

28. Secure hydraulic hoses to the working bracket on

the boom head. Refer to Figure 4-341.
1. Handle

Figure 4-342
Accumulator Valve Handle Working Position

4-370 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

4 2 4

2 1 3

Locked Position Working Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides)
2. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position) 4. Fly Offset Cylinders

Figure 4-343
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Working Position

29. Place the offset fly in the working position by re­
moving the offset connecting pins from the locked
position to the working position, in the storage
rings on the fly base section. Refer to
Figure 4-343. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins to the storage rings
with keeper pins.
30. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
until the fly head sheave is resting on approxim­
ately 3 ft (0.9m) of secure blocking. Use a signal
person to alert the operator when the sheave is
resting on the blocking.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-371

Operator's Manual

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins

Figure 4-344
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

31. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
location (1) on the rear of the fly base section and
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-344.
32. Install the inside bottom right pin first. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. Install the inside top
right pin. Adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cyl­
inders as required to get the pin to drop in the hole.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
er on the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.

4-372 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-345
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

33. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location

(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-345. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. (Install the pin with the
head on top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install
the pin keeper.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before lifting loads with the
fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
pins are not properly installed.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-373

Operator's Manual

1
5

4
7
4 3

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave - Working Position

2. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-346
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Working Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
34. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector up to the working position (5) and install de­
sheaves to the working position. Refer to flector sheave pin (6) in the working position.
Figure 4-346. b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
deflector sheave (2). Rotate sheave assembly the working position (7) and install pin (4).

4-374 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

7 4

3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-347
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Working Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
35. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the working position. Refer to
Figure 4-347.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the working
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the working position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
the working position (7) and install pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-375

Operator's Manual

1
1

2
3
4 9

5
10
1. Rope Guards 5. Fly Head ATB Weight 8. Fly Base Connector
2. Fly Base Head Connector 6. Boom Head Pug Assembly 9. Boom Head ATB Switch
3. Fly Base Head ATB Switch Plug Assembly 7. Jumper Assembly 10. Lockout Clip
4. Fly Base Head ATB Switch

Figure 4-348
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Connection

36. Remove the wire rope guard from the fly base head
and deflector sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-348.
Reeve the wire rope on the boom deflector sheave
then over the fly deflector and head sheaves. In­
stall all wire rope guards.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
37. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections. Refer to Figure 4-348.
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper
assembly on main boom head and connect it
to the fly base connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the fly base
head anti‐two block switch. Connect the fly
base head ATB switch plug assembly to the fly
base head connector.
c. Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
nections are made.
d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.

4-376 Section 4 - Attachments


38. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL System will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
39. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
40. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
with the fly installed before continuing operations.
Operator's Manual
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.

WARNING
When making lifts from the 12 ft (3.65m) fly at
2° offset and 70 degree boom angle or higher,
2 parts of line is the maximum with the
auxiliary sheave erected. Wire rope may
contact auxiliary lifting sheave. Auxiliary
lifting sheave may be removed or stored on
the boom head to eliminate the possible
interference. A warning will be shown on the
RCL display if the configuration can result in
wire rope contacting the auxiliary lifting
sheave.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-377

Operator's Manual

2 2
1

4
4

5 5

1. Boom Head Pug Assembly 4. Boom Head ATB Switch 6

2. Jumper Assembly 5. Lockout Clip
3. Fly Base Connector 6. Boom Head ATB Weight

Figure 4-349
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Disconnection

Storage Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From

The Erected Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store the fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, the upper directly over the
rear of the carrier, and the travel swing lock
engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully
retracted and the offset connecting pins must
be in the locked position to install or remove
the fly or while swinging during erection or
storage of the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
5. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
6. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
7. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base con­
nector and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
base section and install it on the main boom
anti‐two block switch.

4-378 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

5
1

4
3
4 7
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-350
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
8. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
Figure 4-350. sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the sheave down on the pin (4).
deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
stored position (6) and install pin (5) through
the one of the holes in the sheave.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-379

Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

3 4

7 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-351
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to
Figure 4-351.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the stored position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
sheave down on the pin (4).

4-380 Section 4 - Attachments


1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
Figure 4-352
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin
10. Remove wire rope guards from fly base head sheave,
fly base deflector sheave, and boom deflector sheave.
Refer to Figure 4-348. Remove the wire rope and lay
it aside. Install wire rope guards at all fly sheaves for
storage.
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing personal injury.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
11. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
until the fly head sheave is resting on approxim­
ately 3 ft (0.9m) of secure blocking. Use a signal
person to alert the operator when the sheave is
resting on the blocking.
12. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-352. To reduce loading and ease pin
removal, adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cylin­
ders as required. Store connecting pin in the stor­
age location on the rear of the fly base section.
4-381
Operator's Manual

1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-353
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

13. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-353.
To reduce loading and ease pin removal, adjust the
fly angle with the fly offset cylinders as required.
14. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, adjust the fly angle with the
fly offset cylinders as required. Store the two pins
and keepers in the storage location on the rear pic­
ture frame of the fly base section.

4-382 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
2 4 2
4

1 3

Working Position Locked Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides)
2. Fly Offset Cylinders 4. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position)

Figure 4-354
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Locked Position

15. Fully retract fly offset cylinders to raise the fly to the
2° offset position.
16. Place the offset fly in the locked position by remov­
ing the offset connecting pins from the working po­
sition to the locked position. Refer to
Figure 4-354. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins with keeper pins.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-383

Operator's Manual

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket 2

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses 3 4
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-355
Hydraulic Hose Connection
17. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the quick dis­
connects. Remove hydraulic hoses from the hy­
draulic hose working bracket.
18. Remove the hoses from the rollers and secure
hoses to the hydraulic hose storage bracket on the
boom head. Refer to Figure 4-355.
19. After hydraulic hoses have been disconnected en­
sure the accumulator ball valve handle is in the ho­
rizontal position for storage. Refer to
Figure 4-356.

WARNING
If accumulator ball valve is not in the proper
position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
1 fittings hard to connect/disconnect.

1. Handle

Figure 4-356
Accumulator Valve Handle Stored Position

4-384 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-357
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

20. Attach a hand line to the tip of the 12 ft (3.65m) fly
base.
21. Ensure the boom is fully retracted. Boom up to 2°
boom angle.
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause crane damage.
22. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
Refer to Figure 4-357. Install the connecting pin
in the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
keeper.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-385

Operator's Manual
3 3 2

1
1. Storage Lug
2. Storage Pin
3. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section

Figure 4-358
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Storage Lug

1 2 3
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.

1. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base
2. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base
Bullet Lug
Figure 4-359
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Bullet Lug
23. Slowly swing the 12ft fly base section around to the
right side of the boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
24. Extend the boom until the 12 ft (3.65m) fly storage
lug clears the storage pin. Refer to Figure 4-358.
25. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°
boom angle to engage the storage lug with the
storage pin. Refer to Figure 4-358. At the same
time, the bullet lug on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base sec­
tion should engage through the hole on the end of
the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base section storage bracket
3. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base (Figure 4-359) and the bullet lug on the retaining
Storage Bracket
pin bracket on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base section
should engage through the hole on the retaining
pin bracket on the boom (Refer to Figure 4-360).
Note: If the 28 ft (8.53m) tip section is stored on
the boom, observe that the 12 ft (3.65m) base
lugs engage with the 28 ft (8.53m tip section.
Refer to Figure 4-361.

4-386 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)

Figure 4-360
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Base Retaining Pin

26. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin.

Refer to Figure 4-360. Remove the pin keeper (2)
from the retaining pin (1). Position the retaining pin
in the engaged position (3) and secure with pin
keeper (4).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-387

Operator's Manual

1 2 3

5
6
1. 28 Ft (8.53m) Tip Section
2. Upper Connecting Pins Storage Location
3. Upper Connecting Pins
4. Lower Connecting Pins Storage Location
5. Lower Connecting Pins
6. 12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section

Figure 4-361
12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section Connecting Pins

27. If the 28 ft (8.53m) tip section is stored on the 12 ft (3.65m) base section to the 28 ft (8.53m) tip
boom, install the connecting pins connecting the section. Refer to Figure 4-361.

4-388 Section 4 - Attachments


WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
3 4
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-362
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins
28. Remove the two top fly base connecting pins and
the bottom fly base connecting pivot pin from the
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-362.
Store two of the pins and keepers in storage rings
on the rear picture frame of the fly base section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
29. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with the other fly connecting pin.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored Position)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position)
30. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
31. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL System in
the Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configura­
tion Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/
Select OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward
the retract direction. The RCL System will then
enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
32. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
33. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci­
ties with the fly in the stored position before con­
tinuing operations.
4-389
Operator's Manual

2
1. Rear Storage Bracket
2. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Tip Section
3. Fly Tip Retaining Pin 3
4. Fly Base Retaining Pin
5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section 4
6. Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
7. Swing Lug 5
8. Front Fly Storage Bracket 6
Figure 4-363
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly (Stored)

Erection Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m)

Fly From The Stored Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
locked position to install or remove the offset fly
or while swinging during erection or storage of
the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are in the locked
position. Refer to Figure 4-335.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL System in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL Display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.

4-390 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

3
4
2
5

1 6
1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 4. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored) 5. Swing Lug (Working)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored) 6. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin

Figure 4-364
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-364.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (5) and
install the connecting pins (4) into the swing lug
and through the fly lug. Secure with pin keepers.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
ers on the bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin from the storage loca­
tion (1) on the rear of the fly base section. Install it
into the other swing lug hole and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin from the stor­
age location (1) on the rear of the fly base section.
Install the pin (6) through the fly pivot lug on the
bottom right side of the boom and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)

Section 4 - Attachments 4-391

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-365
12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section Retaining Pin

13. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or 14. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used (1). Refer to Figure 4-365. Position the retaining
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
during erection of the fly. pin keeper (4).

WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-392 Section 4 - Attachments


1 2
1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
Figure 4-366
28 Ft (8.53m) Tip Section Retaining Pin
15. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
(1). Refer to Figure 4-366. Position the retaining
pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
pin keeper (4).
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
16. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
17. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
18. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
3 4
3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)
4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)
19. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
20. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
21. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
22. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
4-393
Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-367
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

23. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly base around the boom head until the fly lugs
engage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
24. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before lifting loads with the
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-367. Install the damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
bottom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through pins are not properly installed.
the bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (In­
stall the pin with the head on top and the keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐
handle until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from
the fly lug is obtained.

4-394 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

3
4

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-368
Hydraulic Hose Connection
25. Remove hydraulic hoses from the storage bracket.
Route the hoses through the rollers on the boom.
Connect the hydraulic hoses to the quick discon­
nects on the fly. Ensure disconnects are properly
connected.
26. After hydraulic hoses have been connected ensure
the accumulator ball valve handle is in the vertical
position for working operation. Refer to
Figure 4-369.

WARNING 1
If accumulator ball valve handle is not in the
proper position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
fittings hard to connect/disconnect.

27. Secure hydraulic hoses to the working bracket on

the boom head. Refer to Figure 4-368.
1. Handle

Figure 4-369
Accumulator Valve Handle Working Position

Section 4 - Attachments 4-395

Operator's Manual

4 2 4

2 1 3

Locked Position Working Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides)
2. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position) 4. Fly Offset Cylinders

Figure 4-370
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Working Position

28. Place the offset fly in the working position by re­ 29. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
moving the offset connecting pins from the locked until the fly head sheave is resting on secure block­
position to the working position, in the storage ing. Use a signal person to alert the operator when
rings on the fly base section. Refer to the sheave is resting on the blocking.
Figure 4-370. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins to the storage rings
with keeper pins.

4-396 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins

Figure 4-371
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

30. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
location (1) on the rear of the fly base section and
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-371.
31. Install the inside bottom right pin first. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. Install the inside top
right pin. Adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cyl­
inders as required to get the pin to drop in the hole.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
er on the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-397

Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-372
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

32. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location

(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-372. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. (Install the pin with the
head on top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install
the pin keeper.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before lifting loads with the
fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
pins are not properly installed.

4-398 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1
5

4
7
4 3

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave - Working Position

2. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-373
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Working Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
33. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector up to the working position (5) and install de­
sheaves to the working position. Refer to flector sheave pin (6) in the working position.
Figure 4-373. b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
deflector sheave (2). Rotate sheave assembly the working position (7) and install pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-399

Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

7 4

3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-374
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Working Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
34. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the working position. Refer to
Figure 4-374.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the working
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the working position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
the working position (7) and install pin (4).

4-400 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
1 1

6
2 3
7

8
4
1
9

5
10

1. Rope Guards 5. Fly Tip Head ATB Weight 8. Fly Base Connector
2. Fly Tip Head Connector 6. Boom Head Pug Assembly 9. Boom Head ATB Switch
3. Fly Tip Head ATB Switch Plug Assembly 7. Jumper Assembly 10. Lockout Clip
4. Fly Tip Head ATB Switch

Figure 4-375
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Connection

35. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly head and
deflector sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-375. Reeve
the wire rope on the boom deflector sheave then
over the fly deflector and head sheaves. Install all
wire rope guards.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
36. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections. Refer to Figure 4-375.
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper
assembly on main boom head and connect it
to the fly base connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the fly base
head anti‐two block switch. Connect the fly
base head ATB switch plug assembly to the fly
base head connector.
c. Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
nections are made.
d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-401

Operator's Manual
37. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL System will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
38. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
39. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
with the fly installed before continuing operations.
4-402 Section 4 - Attachments
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
 Operator's Manual

2 2
1

4
5

6
1. Boom Head Plug Assembly 4. Boom Head ATB Switch
2. Jumper Assembly 5. Lockout Clip
3. Fly Base Connector 6. Boom Head ATB Weight

Figure 4-376
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Disconnection

Storage Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m)

Fly From The Erected Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store the fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, the upper directly over the
rear of the carrier, and the travel swing lock
engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
locked position to install or remove the fly or
while swinging during erection or storage of the
offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
5. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
6. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
7. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base con­
nector and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
base section and install it on the main boom
anti‐two block switch.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-403

Operator's Manual

5
1

4
3
4 7
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-377
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
8. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
Figure 4-377. sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the sheave down on the pin (4).
deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
stored position (6) and install pin (5) through
the one of the holes in the sheave.

4-404 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

3 4

7 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-378
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to
Figure 4-378.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the stored position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
sheave down on the pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-405

Operator's Manual

1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location

Figure 4-379
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

10. Remove wire rope guards from fly head sheave, fly 11. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
base deflector sheave, and boom deflector sheave. until the fly head sheave is resting on secure block­
Refer to Figure 4-375. Remove the wire rope and lay ing. Use a signal person to alert the operator when
it aside. Install wire rope guards at all fly sheaves for the sheave is resting on the blocking.
storage. 12. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-379. To reduce loading and ease pin
removal, adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cylin­
WARNING ders as required. Store connecting pin in the stor­
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on age location on the rear of the fly base section.
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing personal injury.

4-406 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-380
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

13. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-380.
To reduce loading and ease pin removal, adjust the
fly angle with the fly offset cylinders as required.
14. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, adjust the fly angle with the
fly offset cylinders as required. Store the two pins
and keepers in the storage location on the rear pic­
ture frame of the fly base section.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-407

Operator's Manual

2 4 2
4

1 3

Working Position Locked Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides)
2. Fly Offset Cylinders 4. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position)

Figure 4-381
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Locked Position

15. Fully retract fly offset cylinders to raise the fly to the
2° offset position.
16. Place the offset fly in the locked position by remov­
ing the offset connecting pins from the working po­
sition to the locked position. Refer to
Figure 4-381. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins with keeper pins.

4-408 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

3
4

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-382
Hydraulic Hose Connection
17. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the quick dis­
connects. Remove hydraulic hoses from the hy­
draulic hose working bracket. Remove the hy­
draulic hoses from the rollers and secure hoses to
the hydraulic hose storage bracket on the boom
head. Refer to Figure 4-382.
18. After hydraulic hoses have been disconnected en­
sure the accumulator ball valve handle is in the ho­
rizontal position for storage. Refer to
Figure 4-383.

WARNING
If accumulator ball valve is not in the proper
position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
fittings hard to connect/disconnect. 1

1. Handle

Figure 4-383
Accumulator Valve Handle Stored Position

Section 4 - Attachments 4-409

Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-384
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

19. Attach a hand line to the tip of the 28 ft (8.53m) fly 20. Ensure the boom is fully retraced. Boom up to 2°
tip section. boom angle.
21. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
Refer to Figure 4-384. Install the connecting pin
CAUTION in the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly. section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly keeper.
damage.

4-410 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 6 7 8 9

3 4 5

1. Rear Storage Bracket 6. Fly Storage Lug (Engaged In Storage Bracket)

2. Fly Storage Lug (Against Storage Bracket) 7. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
3. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Tip Section 8. Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
4. Top Bullet Lug 9. Fly Base Section Storage Bracket
5. Front Storage Bracket

Figure 4-385
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Manual Offset Lattice Fly Storage Brackets

24. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°

WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.
22. Slowly swing the fly around to the right side of the
boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
23. Extend the boom until the fly storage lug (2) can
swing completely against the rear storage bracket
(1). Refer to Figure 4-385.
boom angle. Observe that the following occurs
while retracting the boom:
a. The storage lug (6) on the rear of the 28 ft
(8.53m) fly tip section slides into the slot on the
rear storage bracket. Refer to Figure 4-385.
b. The top bullet lug (4) on the front fly storage
bracket (5) engages through the hole on the
rear of the 28 ft (8.53m) fly tip section (3).
c. The bullet lug (8) on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base
section (7) engages through the hole on the
end of the fly base section storage bracket (9).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-411

Operator's Manual
3 3 2

1
1. Storage Lug
2. Storage Pin
3. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section

Figure 4-386
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Storage Lug

d. The storage lug (1) on the 12 ft (3.65m) base f. The bullet lug (1) on the 28 ft (8.53m) fly tip re­
section (3) engages with the storage pin (2). taining pin bracket engages through the hole
Refer to Figure 4-386. on the retaining pin bracket on the boom.
e. The bullet lug (1) on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base Refer to Figure 4-388.
retaining pin bracket engages through the
hole on the retaining pin bracket on the boom.
Refer to Figure 4-387.

4-412 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5
1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-387
12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section Retaining Pin Bracket

25. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin.

Refer to Figure 4-387. Remove the pin keeper (3)
from the retaining pin (2). Position the retaining pin
in the engaged position (4) and secure with pin
keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-413

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5

1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)

2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-388
28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Tip Section Retaining Pin Bracket

26. Remove the pin keeper (3) from the retaining pin (2).
Refer to Figure 4-388.
27. Position the retaining pin in the engaged position (4)
and secure with pin keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-414 Section 4 - Attachments


WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
3 4
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-389
Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Storage Right Side Connecting Pins
28. Remove the two top fly base connecting pins and
the bottom fly base connecting pivot pin from the
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-389.
Store two of pins and keepers in storage rings on
the rear picture frame of the fly base section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
29. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with with the other fly connecting pin.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored)
30. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
31. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL System in
the Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configura­
tion Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/
Select OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward
the retract direction. The RCL System will then
enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
32. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
33. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci­
ties with the fly in the stored position before con­
tinuing operations.
4-415
Operator's Manual

ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
  ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂ
 Â
ÂÂ 1
ÂÂ
ÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂ
1. Blocking 1 1

Figure 4-390
Installation And Removal Of The 12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly

12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m)
Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly
The crane may be equipped with a three piece
12-40-67 ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) hydraulic offset lat­
tice fly. It is made up of a 12 ft (3.65M) base section, a 28
ft (8.53m) center section, and a 27 ft (8.23m) tip section.
The hydraulic offset lattice fly, as shown in Figure 4-392
and Figure 4-393, connects to the main boom head.
The fly can be changed from 2 to 45 offsets through the
use of hydraulic cylinders. Once installed, the offset lat­
tice fly can be stored on the right side of the boom base
section.
Offset Lattice Fly Installation
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the car­
rier and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Install offset fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers, all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and offset connecting pins must be in locked
position to install, remove, erect, or store the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are in the locked
position. Refer Figure 4-395.
6. Pin the fly base, center, and tip sections together on se­
cure blocking. Refer to Figure 4-390. The fly base as­
sembly weighs approximately 2,305 lb (1 045kg). The
fly center section weighs approximately 1,537 lb
(697kg). The fly tip section weighs approximately
1,162 lb (527kg). The complete fly assembly weighs
approximately 5,000 lb (2 268kg).
7. Remove the wire rope from the main boom head
machinery or the auxiliary lifting sheave, whichever
is to be used on the fly, and lay it aside to prevent
damage to it during installation of the fly.
8. Lower the boom and check that the swing lug is
pinned in the working position with the swing lug
pivot pin and swing lug connecting pin. Extend the
boom to the fly. Slowly raise or lower the boom to
engage the fly lugs with the fly swing lug and the
head machinery cross shafts.
9. Remove the four fly connecting pins from the stor­
age rings at the right rear of the fly base section.
Refer to Figure 4-392. Install all four pins to con­
nect the fly lugs to the head machinery cross shaft
and swing lug on the right side of the boom. (Install
the pins with the head on top and keeper on the
bottom.) Install the pin keepers.

4-416 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

2
1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket
2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses 3
4
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-391
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Hose Connection
10. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the storage
rings at the left rear of the fly base section. Refer to
Figure 4-392. Install the top pin to connect the fly
lug to the head machinery cross shaft on the left side
of the boom head. Turn the t‐handle as required to
push and align the bottom left fly lug and the bot­
tom boom head cross shaft. Install the bottom left
fly connecting pin. (Install the pins with the head
on top and keeper on the bottom.) Install the pin
keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at least a 1/2 in
(1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is obtained.
11. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base,
center, and tip head sheaves, whichever is to be
used. Reeve the wire rope over the boom deflector
sheave, then over the fly base deflector sheave.
Reeve the wire rope over the appropriate head
sheave and install the wire rope guard(s).
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.

WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
major damage to the fly could occur if all
connecting pins are not properly installed.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-417

Operator's Manual
12. Properly connect the anti‐two block system as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head and connect it
to the offset lattice fly base section connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the appro­
priate offset lattice fly section anti‐two block
switch cable. Confirm that all anti‐two block
harness connections are made to the appro­
priate fly section(s).
c. Properly install lockout clip on the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.
4-418 Section 4 - Attachments
13. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
14. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca­
pacity deductions with the fly installed before con­
tinuing operations.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
 Operator's Manual

8 1

10

9 2
17

3
8

14
4

6
7

13
18

16

15
19

11
20
12
11
1. Right Side Offset Connecting Pin (Locked Position) 11. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin
2. Swing Lug 12. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Storage Rings
3. Swing Lug Pivot Pin 13. Fly Base Deflector Sheave
4. Right Side Offset Connecting Pin Ring (Working Position) 14. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Center Section
5. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Storage Rings 15. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
6. Bottom Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin (Pivot Pin) 16. Connecting Pins
7. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin 17. Fly Base Head Deflector Sheave
8. Boom Head Machinery Cross Shaft 18. Fly Offset Cylinders
9. Fly Base ATB Jumper Assembly 19. Left Side Offset Connecting Pin (Locked Position)
10. Swing Lug Connecting Pin 20. Left Side Offset Connecting Pin Storage Ring (Working Position)

Figure 4-392
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly

Section 4 - Attachments 4-419

Operator's Manual

8
1 7
2
3

4
4

5
3
6

3
1. Fly Tip Pivot Pin Storage Holes 4. Fly Tip Pivot Pins 7. 27 ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section
2. Fly Tip Connecting Pin Storage Holes 5. Fly Base Head Connector 8. Fly Tip Rope Guards
3. Fly Tip Connecting Pins 6. Fly Tip ATB Plug Assembly

Figure 4-393
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section

Offset Lattice Fly Removal

1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the carri­
er and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Remove the offset fly with the crane level on
fully or intermediate extended outriggers, all
tires clear of the ground, the upper directly
over the rear of the carrier, and the travel
swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and offset connecting pins must be in locked
position to install, remove, erect, or store the fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.

4-420 Section 4 - Attachments


WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. If the fly is not in the erected position, erect it per
“Erection Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From the Stored
Position”, “Erection Of The 12-40 Ft
(3.65-12.19m) Fly From the Stored Position”, or
“Erection Of The 12-40-67 Ft
(3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly From the Stored Posi­
tion”, as applicable, in this Section of this Operat­
or's Manual.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are in the locked
position. Refer to “Changing The 12-40-67 Ft
(3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Fly Offset Angle”
and Figure 4-395.
6. Boom down fully.
7. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Remove the lockout clip from the main boom
anti‐two block switch weight cable.
b. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the off­
set lattice fly and install it on the main boom
head anti‐two block switch.
c. Remove the plug assembly from the offset lat­
tice fly base and connect it to the jumper as­
sembly on the main boom head. Confirm that
all necessary anti‐two block harness connec­
tions are disconnected.
8. Remove all fly wire rope guards. Remove boom
head and fly deflector sheave wire rope guards
and lay the wire rope aside.
9. Install all fly wire rope guards for storage.
10. Extend the boom until the fly tip sheave rests on the
ground.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
11. Securely block up the fly to support it. Refer to
Figure 4-390. The fly base section weighs ap­
proximately 2,305 lb (1 045kg), the fly center sec­
tion weights approximately 1 537 lb (697kg) and
the fly tip section weighs approximately 1,162 lb
(527kg). The complete fly assembly weighs ap­
proximately 5,000 lb (2 268kg).
WARNING
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.
12. If only the fly tip section is to be removed, remove
the connecting pins and pivot pins from the fly tip
lugs only. Store the pins in the storage holes in the
tip section. Refer to Figure 4-393.
13. If only the fly tip and center sections are to be re­
moved, remove the connecting pins that connect
the fly base to the fly center section only. Store the
pins. Refer to Figure 4-392.
14. If removing the base section, remove the four fly
connecting pins on the right side and store the pins
and keepers in the storage rings at the right rear of
the fly. Do not remove the swing lug connecting pin
from the head machinery cross shaft. Refer to
Figure 4-392. Remove the two fly connecting
pins on the left side and store the pins and keepers
in the storage rings at the left rear of the fly.
15. Retract the boom away from the fly or the fly base
away from the fly center or fly tip, as applicable if all
the fly is not being removed.
16. Properly reeve or secure the wire rope which was
used on the fly. Install the boom head and deflector
sheave wire rope guards as required.
17. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
18. Properly store fly to prevent damage to it.
4-421
Operator's Manual
3

RAISE LOWER
(Decrease Fly (Increase Fly
Offset Angle) Offset Angle)
1
Right Seat
Joystick Control
LOWER
(Increase Fly
2 Offset Angle)

RAISE
(Decrease Fly
Upper Cab Right Side Offset Angle)
Console Control Switches Right Seat
1. Locking Tab
2. Hydraulic Fly Offset Activation Switch Single Axis Control
3. Control Lever (If Equipped)
Figure 4-394
Hydraulic Offset Fly Controls

Changing The 12-40-67 Ft

(3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Fly Offset
Angle
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the carri­
er and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Change the fly offset angle with the crane
level on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground,
the upper directly over the rear of the carrier,
and the travel swing lock engaged.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.

4-422 Section 4 - Attachments


4. If the fly is not in the erected position, erect it per
“Erection Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From the Stored
Position”, “Erection Of The 12-40 Ft
(3.65-12.19m) Fly From the Stored Position”, or
“Erection Of The 12-40-67 Ft
(3.65-12.09-20.42m) Fly From the Stored Posi­
tion”, as applicable, in this Section of this Operat­
or's Manual.
CAUTION
Do not extend the boom or boom down to the
point of over stressing the offset lattice fly
section. Structural damage to the fly could oc­
cur if care is not taken. Use a signal person to
aid the operator in lowering the fly head
sheave to the ground.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
5. Carefully extend and/or lower the boom until the fly
tip head sheave is resting on the ground. Use a
signal person to alert the operator when the
sheave is resting on the ground.
6. Place the offset fly in the working position by re­
moving the offset connecting pins from the locked
position and installing them in the storage rings on
the fly base section. Refer to Figure 4-395. Do
this on both sides of the fly. Secure offset connect­
ing pins to the storage rings with keeper pins.
7. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration before continuing opera­
tions. Refer to Section 1 of this Operator's Manual.
8. Check the Crane Rating Manual for deductions
from the lifting capacities with the fly installed be­
fore continuing operations.
4-423
Operator's Manual
2
2 1
Locked Position
1. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Ring (Both Sides)
2. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position)
3. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides)
Figure 4-395
Changing The12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Fly Angle
9. Slowly boom up to an offset fly working range be­
fore adjusting the offset angle of the fly.
10. Slide and hold the locking tab on the hydraulic fly off­
set activation switch, then push the switch to activate
the right (boom hoist) control lever to be used as the
hydraulic fly offset controls. Refer to Figure 4-394.
Move the control lever left to raise the hydraulic fly
(decrease the fly offset angle) or right to lower the hy­
draulic fly (increase the offset angle). (If equipped
with single axis controls, pull the lever back to raise,
or push it forward to lower the fly.)
11. Using the control lever, position the hydraulic offset
fly to the desired offset working angle.
4-424 Section 4 - Attachments
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent
personal injury or crane damage.
Pins must be properly installed on both
sides of fly.
Install pins in locked position to store or
erect the fly.
Fully retract cylinders before changing pins
to the working position.
Working Position
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must be
considered in lifting capacities when the fly is
erected. When making lifts from the main boom
or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly erected,
refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
appropriate deductions from lifting capacities.
Use the offset lattice fly only when the crane is
level on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.

11
10
1
1. Rear Storage Bracket
2. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Center Section
3. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Retaining Pin
4. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Center Retaining Pin
5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Retaining Pin
6. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
7. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
8. Swing Lug
9. Front Fly Storage Bracket
10. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Storage Bracket
11. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section
Figure 4-396
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly (Stored)
Erection Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From
The Stored Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the carri­
er and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
locked position to install or remove the fly or
while swinging during erection or storage of the
offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
Operator's Manual
2
3
4
5
6 7
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are properly loc­
ated in the locked position on both sides fo the fly.
Refer to Figure 4-395.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly, and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL System in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL Display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.
Section 4 - Attachments 4-425
Operator's Manual

3
4
2
5

1 6

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 4. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored Position) 5. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position) 6. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin

Figure 4-397
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Fly Base Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-397.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (5) and
install the connecting pins (4) into the swing lug
and through the fly lug. Secure with pin keepers.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
ers on the bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin from the storage rings
(1) on the rear of the fly base section. Install it into
the other swing lug hole and secure with pin keep­
er. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin from the stor­
age rings (1) on the rear of the fly base section. In­
stall the pin (6) through the fly pivot lug on the bot­
tom right side of the boom and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)

4-426 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
1 2 3

5
6
1. 28 Ft (8.53m) Center Section
2. Upper Connecting Pin Storage Locations
3. Upper Connecting Pins
4. Lower Connecting Pin Storage Locations
5. Lower Connecting Pins
6. 12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section

Figure 4-398
28 Ft (3.65m) Fly Center Connecting Pins

13. If the 28 ft (8.53m) center section is stored on the 14. Install all connecting pins in their proper storage
boom, remove the connecting pins connecting the location.
12 ft (3.65m) base section to the 28 ft (8.53m) cen­
ter section. Refer to Figure 4-398.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-427

Operator's Manual
1 2
1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
Figure 4-399
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Retaining Pin
15. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it
during erection of the fly.
WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
16. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
(1). Refer to Figure 4-399. Position the retaining
pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
pin keeper (4).
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
4-428 Section 4 - Attachments
3 4
3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)
4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)
17. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
18. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
19. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
20. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
21. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
22. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
23. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
 Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-400
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

24. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly base around the boom head until the fly lugs
engage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
25. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before lifting loads with the
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-400. Install the damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
bottom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through pins are not properly installed.
the bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (In­
stall the pin with the head on top and the keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐
handle until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from
the fly lug is obtained.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-429

Operator's Manual

3
4

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-401
Hydraulic Hose Connection
26. Remove hydraulic hoses from the storage bracket.
Route the hoses through the rollers on the boom.
Connect the hydraulic hoses to the quick discon­
nects on the fly. Ensure disconnects are properly
connected.
27. After hydraulic hoses have been connected ensure
the accumulator ball valve handle is in the vertical
position for working operation. Refer to
Figure 4-402.

1 WARNING
If accumulator ball valve handle is not in the
proper position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
fittings hard to connect/disconnect.

28. Secure hydraulic hoses to the working bracket on

the boom head. Refer to Figure 4-401.
1. Handle

Figure 4-402
Accumulator Valve Handle Working Position

4-430 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
4 2 4

2 1 3

Locked Position Working Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides)
2. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position) 4. Fly Offset Cylinders

Figure 4-403
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Working Position

29. Place the offset fly in the working position by re­
moving the offset connecting pins from the locked
position to the working position, in the storage
rings on the fly base section. Refer to
Figure 4-403. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins to the storage rings
with keeper pins.
30. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
until the fly head sheave is resting on approxim­
ately 3 ft (0.9m) of secure blocking. Use a signal
person to alert the operator when the sheave is
resting on the blocking.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-431

Operator's Manual

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins

Figure 4-404
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

31. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
location (1) on the rear of the fly base section and
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-404.
32. Install the inside bottom right pin first. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. Install the inside top
right pin. Adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cyl­
inders as required to get the pin to drop in the hole.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
er on the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.

4-432 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-405
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

33. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location

(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-405. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. (Install the pin with the
head on top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install
the pin keeper.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before lifting loads with the
fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
pins are not properly installed.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-433

Operator's Manual

1
5

4
7
4 3

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave - Working Position

2. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-406
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Working Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
34. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector up to the working position (5) and install de­
sheaves to the working position. Refer to flector sheave pin (6) in the working position.
Figure 4-406. b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
deflector sheave (2). Rotate sheave assembly the working position (7) and install pin (4).

4-434 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

7 4

3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-407
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Working Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
35. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the working position. Refer to
Figure 4-407.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the working
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the working position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
the working position (7) and install pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-435

Operator's Manual
1
1

2
3
4 9

5
10
1. Rope Guards 5. Fly Head ATB Weight 8. Fly Base Connector
2. Fly Base Head Connector 6. Boom Head Pug Assembly 9. Boom Head ATB Switch
3. Fly Base Head ATB Switch Plug Assembly 7. Jumper Assembly 10. Lockout Clip
4. Fly Base Head ATB Switch

Figure 4-408
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Connection

36. Remove the wire rope guard from the fly base head
and deflector sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-408.
Reeve the wire rope on the boom deflector sheave
then over the fly deflector and head sheaves. In­
stall all wire rope guards.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
37. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections. Refer to Figure 4-408.
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper
assembly on main boom head and connect it
to the fly base connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the fly base
head anti‐two block switch. Connect the fly
base head ATB switch plug assembly to the fly
base head connector.
c. Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
nections are made.
d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.

4-436 Section 4 - Attachments


38. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL System will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
39. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
40. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
with the fly installed before continuing operations.
Operator's Manual
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.

WARNING
When making lifts from the 12 ft (3.65m) fly at
2° offset and 70 degree boom angle or higher,
2 parts of line is the maximum with the
auxiliary sheave erected. Wire rope may
contact auxiliary lifting sheave. Auxiliary
lifting sheave may be removed or stored on
the boom head to eliminate the possible
interference. A warning will be shown on the
RCL display if the configuration can result in
wire rope contacting the auxiliary lifting
sheave.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-437

Operator's Manual

2 2
1

4
5

6
1. Boom Head Pug Assembly 4. Boom Head ATB Switch
2. Jumper Assembly 5. Lockout Clip
3. Fly Base Connector 6. Boom Head ATB Weight

Figure 4-409
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Disconnection
Storage Of The 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly From
The Erected Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the carri­
er and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store the fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, the upper directly over the
rear of the carrier, and the travel swing lock
engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully
retracted and the offset connecting pins must
be in the locked position to install or remove
the fly or while swinging during erection or
storage of the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
5. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
6. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract ot line
up with the T1 section.
7. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base con­
nector and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head. Refer to
Figure 4-409.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
base section and install it on the main boom
anti‐two block switch.

4-438 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

5
1

4
3
4 7
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-410
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
8. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
Figure 4-410. sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the sheave down on the pin (4).
deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
stored position (6) and install pin (5) through
the one of the holes in the sheave.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-439

Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

3 4

7 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-411
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to
Figure 4-411.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the stored position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
sheave down on the pin (4).

4-440 Section 4 - Attachments


1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
Figure 4-412
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin
10. Remove wire rope guards from fly base head sheave,
fly base deflector sheave, and boom deflector sheave.
Refer to Figure 4-408. Remove the wire rope and lay
it aside. Install wire rope guards at all fly sheaves for
storage.
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing personal injury.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
11. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
until the fly head sheave is resting on approxim­
ately 3 ft (0.9m) of secure blocking. Use a signal
person to alert the operator when the sheave is
resting on the blocking.
12. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-412. To reduce loading and ease pin
removal, adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cylin­
ders as required. Store connecting pin in the stor­
age location on the rear of the fly base section.
4-441
Operator's Manual

1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-413
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

13. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-413.
To reduce loading and ease pin removal, adjust the
fly angle with the fly offset cylinders as required.
14. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, adjust the fly angle with the
fly offset cylinders as required. Store the two pins
and keepers in the storage location on the rear pic­
ture frame of the fly base section.

4-442 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

2 4 2
4

1 3

Working Position Locked Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides)
2. Fly Offset Cylinders 4. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position)

Figure 4-414
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Locked Position

15. Fully retract fly offset cylinders to raise the fly to the
2° offset position.
16. Place the offset fly in the locked position by remov­
ing the offset connecting pins from the working po­
sition to the locked position. Refer to
Figure 4-414. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins with keeper pins.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-443

Operator's Manual

3
4

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-415
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Hydraulic Hose Disconnection
17. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the quick dis­
connects. Remove hydraulic hoses from the hy­
draulic hose working bracket.
18. Remove the hoses from the rollers and secure
hoses to the hydraulic hose storage bracket on the
boom head. Refer to Figure 4-415.
19. After hydraulic hoses have been disconnected en­
sure the accumulator ball valve handle is in the ho­
rizontal position for storage. Refer to
Figure 4-416.

WARNING
If accumulator ball valve is not in the proper
position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
1 fittings hard to connect/disconnect.

1. Handle

Figure 4-416
Accumulator Valve Handle Stored Position

4-444 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-417
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

20. Attach a hand line to the tip of the 12 ft (3.65m) fly
base.
21. Ensure the boom is fully retracted. Boom up to 2°
boom angle.
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause crane damage.
22. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
Refer to Figure 4-417. Install the connecting pin
in the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
keeper.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-445

Operator's Manual
3 3 2

1. Storage Lug 1
2. Storage Pin
3. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section

Figure 4-418
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Storage Lug

1 2 3
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.

23. Slowly swing the 12ft (3.65m) fly base around to

1. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base
2. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base
Bullet Lug
Figure 4-419
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Bullet Lug
the right side of the boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
24. Extend the boom until the 12 ft (3.65m) fly storage
lug clears the storage pin. Refer to Figure 4-418.
25. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°
boom angle to engage the storage lug with the
storage pin. Refer to Figure 4-418. At the same
time, the bullet lug on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base sec­
tion should engage through the hole on the end of
the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base section storage bracket
(Figure 4-419) and the bullet lug on the retaining
3. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base
Storage Bracket
pin bracket on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base section
should engage through the hole on the retaining
pin bracket on the boom (Refer to Figure 4-420).
Note: If the 28 ft (8.53m) center section is stored
on the boom, observe that the 12 ft (3.65m) base
lugs engage with the 28 ft (8.53m) center sec­
tion. Refer to Figure 4-421.

4-446 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)

Figure 4-420
12 Ft (3.65m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Base Retaining Pin

26. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin.

Refer to Figure 4-420. Remove the pin keeper (2)
from the retaining pin (1). Position the retaining pin
in the engaged position (3) and secure with pin
keeper (4).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-447

Operator's Manual
1 2 3

5 6
1. 28 Ft (8.53m) Center Section
2. Upper Connecting Pins Storage Location
3. Upper Connecting Pins
4. Lower Connecting Pins Storage Location
5. Lower Connecting Pins
6. 12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section

Figure 4-421
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Center Connecting Pins

27. If the 28 ft (8.53m) center section is stored on the 12 ft (3.65m) base section to the 28 ft (8.53m) cen­
boom, install the connecting pins connecting the ter section. Refer to Figure 4-421.

4-448 Section 4 - Attachments


WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
2 4
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-422
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Hydraulic Offset Right Side Connecting Pins
28. Remove the two top fly base connecting pins and
the bottom fly base connecting pivot pin from the
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-422.
Store two of pins and keepers in storage rings on
the rear picture frame of the fly base section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
29. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with with the other fly connecting pin.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored Position)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position)
30. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
31. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL System in the
Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configuration
Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/Select
OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward the retract
direction. The RCL System will then enter previous
boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
32. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
33. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacit­
ies with the fly in the stored position before continu­
ing operations.
4-449
Operator's Manual
11
10
1
1. Rear Storage Bracket
2. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Center Section
3. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Retaining Pin
4. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Center Retaining Pin
5. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Retaining Pin
6. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
7. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
8. Swing Lug
9. Front Fly Storage Bracket
10. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Storage Bracket
11. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section
Figure 4-423
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly (Stored)
Erection Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m)
Fly From The Stored Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the carri­
er and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
locked position to install or remove the fly or
while swinging during erection or storage of the
offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
4-450
2
3
4
5
6 7
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are properly loc­
ated in the locked position on both sides fo the fly.
Refer to Figure 4-395.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly, and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL System in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL Display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.
Section 4 - Attachments
 Operator's Manual

3
4
2
5

1 6
1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 4. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored Position) 5. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position) 6. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin

Figure 4-424
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-424.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (5) and
install the connecting pins (4) into the swing lug
and through the fly lug. Secure with pin keepers.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
ers on the bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin from the storage rings
(1) on the rear of the fly base section. Install it into
the other swing lug hole and secure with pin keep­
er. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin from the stor­
age rings (1) on the rear of the fly base section. In­
stall the pin (6) through the fly pivot lug on the bot­
tom right side of the boom and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)

Section 4 - Attachments 4-451

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-425
12 Ft (3.65m) Base Section Retaining Pin

13. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or 14. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used (1). Refer to Figure 4-425. Position the retaining
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
during erection of the fly. pin keeper (4).

WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-452 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-426
28 Ft (8.53m) Tip Section Retaining Pin

15. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
(1). Refer to Figure 4-426. Position the retaining pin keeper (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-453

Operator's Manual
1. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Stored)
2. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Retaining Pin
3. Pin Keeper
Figure 4-427
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins And Retaining Pin - Fly Tip Stored
16. If the fly tip section is stored on the side of the
boom:
a. Ensure the fly tip connecting (pivot) pins are in
their storage holes in the rear of the fly tip sec­
tion. Refer to Figure 4-427.
b. Ensure the retaining pin is in the engaged posi­
tion and secured with pin keeper.
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
17. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
18. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
4-454 Section 4 - Attachments
19. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
20. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
21. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
22. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
23. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
 Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-428
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

24. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly base around the boom head until the fly lugs
engage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
25. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before lifting loads with the
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-428. Install the damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
bottom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through pins are not properly installed.
the bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (In­
stall the pin with the head on top and the keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐
handle until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from
the fly lug is obtained.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-455

Operator's Manual

3
4

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-429
Hydraulic Hose Connection
26. Remove hydraulic hoses from the storage bracket.
Route the hoses through the rollers on the boom.
Connect the hydraulic hoses to the quick discon­
nects on the fly. Ensure disconnects are properly
connected.
27. After hydraulic hoses have been connected ensure
the accumulator ball valve handle is in the vertical
position for working operation. Refer to
Figure 4-430.

1 WARNING
If accumulator ball valve handle is not in the
proper position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
fittings hard to connect/disconnect.

28. Secure hydraulic hoses to the working bracket on

the boom head. Refer to Figure 4-429.
1. Handle

Figure 4-430
Accumulator Valve Handle Working Position

4-456 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

4 2 4

2 1 3

Locked Position Working Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides)
2. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position) 4. Fly Offset Cylinders

Figure 4-431
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Working Position

29. Place the offset fly in the working position by re­ 30. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
moving the offset connecting pins from the locked until the fly head sheave is resting on secure block­
position to the working position, in the storage ing. Use a signal person to alert the operator when
rings on the fly base section. Refer to the sheave is resting on the blocking.
Figure 4-431. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins to the storage rings
with keeper pins.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-457

Operator's Manual

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins

Figure 4-432
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

31. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
location (1) on the rear of the fly base section and
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-432.
32. Install the inside bottom right pin first. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. Install the inside top
right pin. Adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cyl­
inders as required to get the pin to drop in the hole.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
er on the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.

4-458 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-433
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

33. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location

(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-433. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. (Install the pin with the
head on top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install
the pin keeper.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before lifting loads with the
fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
pins are not properly installed.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-459

Operator's Manual

1
5

4
7
4 3

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave - Working Position

2. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-434
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Working Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
34. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector up to the working position (5) and install de­
sheaves to the working position. Refer to flector sheave pin (6) in the working position.
Figure 4-434. b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
deflector sheave (2). Rotate sheave assembly the working position (7) and install pin (4).

4-460 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

7 4

3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-435
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Working Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
35. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the working position. Refer to
Figure 4-435.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the working
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the working position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
the working position (7) and install pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-461

Operator's Manual
1 1
1

6
2 3
7

8
4
1
9

5
10

1. Rope Guards 4. Fly Center Head ATB Switch 8. Fly Base Connector
2. Fly Center Head Connector 5. Fly Center Head ATB Weight 9. Boom Head ATB Switch
3. Fly Center Head ATB Switch Plug As­ 6. Boom Head Pug Assembly 10. Lockout Clip
sembly 7. Jumper Assembly

Figure 4-436
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Connection

36. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly head and
deflector sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-436. Reeve
the wire rope on the boom deflector sheave then
over the fly deflector and head sheaves. Install all
wire rope guards.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation.
37. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections. Refer to Figure 4-436.
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper
assembly on main boom head and connect it
to the fly base connector.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the fly base
head anti‐two block switch. Connect the fly
base head ATB switch plug assembly to the fly
base head connector.
c. Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
nections are made.
d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for
operation, the lockout clip must be removed
and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
pended from each anti‐two block switch.

4-462 Section 4 - Attachments


38. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL System will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
39. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
40. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
with the fly installed before continuing operations.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
4-463
Operator's Manual

2 2
1

4
5

6
1. Boom Head Plug Assembly 4. Boom Head ATB Switch
2. Jumper Assembly 5. Lockout Clip
3. Fly Base Connector 6. Boom Head ATB Weight

Figure 4-437
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Disconnection

Storage Of The 12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m)

Fly From The Erected Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the carri­
er and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store the fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, the upper directly over the
rear of the carrier, and the travel swing lock
engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
locked position to install or remove the fly or
while swinging during erection or storage of the
offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
5. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
6. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract ot line
up with the T1 section.
7. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base con­
nector and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head. Refer to
Figure 4-409.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
base section and install it on the main boom
anti‐two block switch.

4-464 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

5
1

4
3
4 7
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-438
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
8. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
Figure 4-438. sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the sheave down on the pin (4).
deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
stored position (6) and install pin (5) through
the one of the holes in the sheave.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-465

Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

3 4

7 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-439
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to
Figure 4-439.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the stored position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
sheave down on the pin (4).

4-466 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location

Figure 4-440
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

10. Remove wire rope guards from fly head sheave, fly 11. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
base deflector sheave, and boom deflector sheave. until the fly head sheave is resting on secure block­
Refer to Figure 4-436. Remove the wire rope and lay ing. Use a signal person to alert the operator when
it aside. Install wire rope guards at all fly sheaves for the sheave is resting on the blocking.
storage. 12. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-440. To reduce loading and ease pin
removal, adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cylin­
WARNING ders as required. Store connecting pin in the stor­
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on age location on the rear of the fly base section.
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing personal injury.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-467

Operator's Manual

1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-441
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Right Side Connecting Pins

13. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-441.
To reduce loading and ease pin removal, adjust the
fly angle with the fly offset cylinders as required.
14. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, adjust the fly angle with the
fly offset cylinders as required. Store the two pins
and keepers in the storage location on the rear pic­
ture frame of the fly base section.

4-468 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

2 4 2
4

1 3

Working Position Locked Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides)
2. Fly Offset Cylinders 4. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position)

Figure 4-442
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Locked Position

15. Fully retract fly offset cylinders to raise the fly to the
2° offset position.
16. Place the offset fly in the locked position by remov­
ing the offset connecting pins from the working po­
sition to the locked position. Refer to
Figure 4-442. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins with keeper pins.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-469

Operator's Manual

3
4

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-443
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Hose Disconnection
17. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the quick dis­
connects. Remove hydraulic hoses from the hy­
draulic hose working bracket. Remove the hoses
from the rollers and secure hoses to the hydraulic
hose storage bracket on the boom head. Refer to
Figure 4-443.
18. After hydraulic hoses have been disconnected en­
sure the accumulator ball valve handle is in the ho­
rizontal position for storage. Refer to
Figure 4-444.

WARNING
If accumulator ball valve is not in the proper
position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
1 fittings hard to connect/disconnect.

1. Handle

Figure 4-444
Accumulator Valve Handle Stored Position

4-470 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-445
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

20. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
CAUTION Refer to Figure 4-445. Install the connecting pin
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly. in the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
damage. keeper.

19. Ensure the boom is fully retraced. Boom up to 2°

boom angle.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-471

Operator's Manual

1 2 6 7 8 9

3 4 5

1. Rear Storage Bracket 6. Fly Storage Lug (Engaged In Storage Bracket)

2. Fly Storage Lug (Against Storage Bracket) 7. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
3. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Center Section 8. Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
4. Top Bullet Lug 9. Fly Base Section Storage Bracket
5. Front Storage Bracket

Figure 4-446
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Storage Brackets

21. Attach a hand line to the tip of the 28 ft (8.53m) fly
tip section.
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.
22. Slowly swing the fly around to the right side of the
boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
23. Extend the boom until the fly storage lug (2) can
swing completely against the rear storage bracket
(1). Refer to Figure 4-446.
24. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°
boom angle. Observe that the following occurs
while retracting the boom:
a. The storage lug (6) on the rear of the 28 ft
(8.53m) fly center section slides into the slot on
the rear storage bracket. Refer to
Figure 4-446.
b. The top bullet lug (4) on the front fly storage
bracket (5) engages through the hole on the
rear of the 28 ft (8.53m) fly center section (3).
c. The bullet lug (8) on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base
section (7) engages through the hole on the
end of the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base section storage
bracket (9).

4-472 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
3 3 2

1
1. Storage Lug
2. Storage Pin
3. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section

Figure 4-447
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Storage Lug

d. The storage lug (1) on the 12 ft (3.65m) base f. The bullet lug (1) on the 28 ft (8.53m) fly center
section (3) engages with the storage pin (2). retaining pin bracket engages through the
Refer to Figure 4-447. hole on the retaining pin bracket on the boom.
e. The bullet lug (1) on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base Refer to Figure 4-449.
retaining pin bracket engages through the
hole on the retaining pin bracket on the boom.
Refer to Figure 4-448.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-473

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5
1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-448
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Retaining Pin Bracket

25. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin.

Refer to Figure 4-448. Remove the pin keeper (3)
from the retaining pin (2). Position the retaining pin
in the engaged position (4) and secure with pin
keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-474 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5

1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)

2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-449
28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Center Retaining Pin Bracket

26. Remove the pin keeper (3) from the retaining pin (2).
Refer to Figure 4-449.
27. Position the retaining pin in the engaged position (4)
and secure with pin keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-475

Operator's Manual

1. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Stored) 2. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Installed)

Figure 4-450
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins

28. If the fly tip section is stored on the boom: b. Install the two fly tip connecting (pivot) pins (2)
a. Remove the two fly tip connecting (pivot) pins (1) in the pivot lugs on the rear of the fly tip section.
from their storage location. Refer to Refer to Figure 4-450.
Figure 4-450.

4-476 Section 4 - Attachments


WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
3 4
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-451
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins Storage
29. Remove the two top fly base connecting pins and
the bottom fly base connecting pivot pin from the
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-451.
Store two of pins and keepers in storage rings on
the rear picture frame of the fly base section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
30. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with with the other fly connecting pin.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored Position)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position)
31. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
32. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL system in the
Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configuration
Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/Select
OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward the re­
tract direction. The RCL system will then enter pre­
vious boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
33. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
34. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacit­
ies with the fly in the stored position before continu­
ing operations.
4-477
Operator's Manual
11

10

1. Rear Storage Bracket 1

2. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Center Section
3. Fly Tip Retaining Pin
4. Fly Center Retaining Pin 2
5. Fly Base Retaining Pin
6. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section 3
7. Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
8. Swing Lug
4
9. Front Fly Storage Bracket
10. Fly Tip Storage Bracket 5
11. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section 6 7
Figure 4-452
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly (Stored)

Erection Of The 12-40-67 Ft

(3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly From The Stored
Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Ensure the correct amount of counterweight is in­
stalled on the upper. Refer to the Crane Rating
Manual for the correct counterweight configuration
per the current fly arrangement.
4. Position the upper directly over the rear of the carri­
er and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Erect fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, upper directly over rear of
the carrier, and the travel swing lock engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
locked position to install or remove the fly or
while swinging during erection or storage of the
offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
5. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted and the offset connecting pins are in the locked
position. Refer to Figure 4-395.
6. Extend the boom to allow enough wire rope length
to ease reeving of the fly, and lower the hook ball
(be used on the fly) to the ground.
7. Fully retract and lower the boom.
8. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract to line
up with the T1 section.
Note: If the fly is moved from the storage brack­
et and the RCL System in not in Fly Setup Mode,
the warning message “Fly Setup Mismatch” will
be displayed in the warning message on the
RCL Display. If this message appears, fully re­
tract the boom and select Fly Setup Mode ON to
continue.

4-478 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

3
4
2
5

1 6
1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 4. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Stored Position) 5. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position) 6. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin

Figure 4-453
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

9. Remove the swing lug connecting pin (3) securing
the swing lug (2) in the stored position. Refer to
Figure 4-453.
10. Rotate the swing lug to the working position (5) and
install the connecting pin (4) into the swing lug and
through the fly lug. Secure with pin keeper. (Install
the pin with the head on top and the keeper on the
bottom.)
11. Remove a fly connecting pin (1) from the storage
rings on the rear of the fly base section. Install it in­
to the other swing lug hole and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
12. Remove another fly connecting pin (1) from the
storage rings on the rear of the fly base section. In­
stall the pin (6) through the fly pivot lug on the bot­
tom right side of the boom and secure with pin
keeper. (Install the pin with the head on top and the
keeper on the bottom.)
13. Remove the wire rope from the head machinery or
the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever is to be used
on the fly and lay it aside to prevent damage to it
during erection of the fly.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-479

Operator's Manual

2
1

1. Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins (Erected)

2. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Retaining Pin
3. Pin Keeper

Figure 4-454
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Connecting (Pivot) Pins And Retaining Pin - Fly Tip Erected

14. Install two fly tip connecting (pivot) pins in the pivot 15. Remove the pin keeper from the retaining pin. Pos­
lugs on the rear of the fly tip section. Refer to ition the retaining pin in the disengaged position
Figure 4-454. and secure with pin keeper.

4-480 Section 4 - Attachments


1 2
1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
Figure 4-455
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Retaining Pin
WARNING
Check that the fly base connecting pins are
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
16. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
(1). Refer to Figure 4-455. Position the retaining
pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
pin keeper (4).
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
17. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly and boom up
to 30° (high enough so the fly does not swing out
on its own).
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
3 4
3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)
4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)
18. Extend the boom to get the fly off the storage ramp
(fly setup mode will automatically stop extension at
30 in (76.2cm)).
19. Boom down to 25° (as high as possible while still
allowing one person to pull the fly away from the
boom ramp with the hand line).
20. Hold the fly out away from the side of the storage
ramp and retract the boom until the telescope cyl­
inder reads 7.5 in (19.1cm). Ensure the fly brack­
ets can clear the bullet lug.
21. Boom down to 15° (as high as possible, while still
allowing one person to pull the fly farther away from
the boom, in order to swing out past the bullet lug).
CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
damage.
22. Hold the fly out away from the bullet lug and fully
retract the boom.
23. Boom down and swing the fly around to the erec­
ted position.
4-481
Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4

1. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position) 3. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position)

2. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position) 4. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-456
28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Center Retaining Pin Bracket

24. Remove the pin keeper (2) from the retaining pin
(1). Refer to Figure 4-456. Position the retaining
WARNING pin in the disengaged position (3) and secure with
Check that the fly base connecting pins are pin keeper (4).
installed on the right side of the boom in the
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-482 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin
3. T‐Handle

Figure 4-457
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

25. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly base around the boom head until the fly lugs
engage with the cross shafts on the left side of the
WARNING
boom. All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
26. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location properly installed before lifting loads with the
(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-457. Install the damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
bottom left side fly base connecting pin (2) through pins are not properly installed.
the bottom fly lug on the left side of the boom. (In­
stall the pin with the head on top and the keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keeper. Adjust the t‐
handle until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from
the fly lug is obtained.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-483

Operator's Manual

3
4

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-458
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Hose Connection
27. Remove hydraulic hoses from the storage bracket.
Route the hoses through the rollers on the boom.
Connect the hydraulic lines to the quick discon­
nects on the fly. Ensure disconnects are properly
connected.
28. After hydraulic hoses have been connected ensure
the accumulator ball valve handle is in the vertical
position for working operation. Refer to
Figure 4-459.

1 WARNING
If accumulator ball valve handle is not in the
proper position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
fittings hard to connect/disconnect.

29. Secure hoses to the bracket on the boom head.

Refer to Figure 4-458.
1. Handle

Figure 4-459
Accumulator Valve Handle Working Position

4-484 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

4 2 4

2 1 3

Locked Position Working Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides)
2. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position) 4. Fly Offset Cylinders

Figure 4-460
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Working Position

30. Place the offset fly in the working position by re­ 31. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
moving the offset connecting pins from the locked until the fly head sheave is resting on secure block­
position to the working position, in the storage ing. Use a signal person to alert the operator when
rings on the fly base section. Refer to the sheave is resting on the blocking.
Figure 4-460. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins to the storage rings
with keeper pins.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-485

Operator's Manual

1. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Right Side Fly Connecting Pins

Figure 4-461
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

32. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
location (1) on the rear of the fly base section and
install them in the cross shafts (2) on the right side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-461.
33. Install the inside bottom right pin first. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. Install the inside top
right pin. Adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cyl­
inders as required to get the pin to drop in the hole.
(Install the pins with the head on top and the keep­
er on the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.

4-486 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location 2. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-462
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

34. Remove a connecting pin from the storage location

(1) on the rear of the fly base section on the left side
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-462. Install the top
left side fly base connecting pin (2) through the top
fly lug on the left side of the boom. Adjust the fly
angle with the fly offset cylinders as required to get
the pin to drop in the hole. (Install the pin with the
head on top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install
the pin keeper.
WARNING
All fly connecting pins and pivot pins must be
properly installed before lifting loads with the
fly erected. Serious personal injury or major
damage to the fly could occur if all connecting
pins are not properly installed.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-487

Operator's Manual

1. Hitch Pin
2. Fly Tip Head Sheave

Figure 4-463
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Hitch Pin

35. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly tip section. 38. Remove the hitch pin which connects the fly tip
36. Fully retract the fly offset cylinders to raise the fly to section to the fly base section. Refer to
the 2° offset angle. Figure 4-463. Store the hitch pin back in the lug
37. Boom up to 5° boom angle. on the fly tip section once it is erected.
39. Slowly boom down to allow the fly tip to swing out
from the fly base section.
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.

4-488 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
1
2

1. Fly Tip Connecting Pins Stored

2. Top Right Side Connecting Pin 5
3. Bottom Right Side Connecting Pin
4. Top Left Side Connecting Pin
5. Bottom Left Side Connecting Pin

Figure 4-464
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section Connecting Pins Installation

40. Continue to lower the boom to 2° angle to swing

the fly tip section around the fly base section until
the fly tip lugs engage with the fly base lugs on the
WARNING
All fly tip connecting pins and pivot pins must
left side of the fly.
be properly installed before operating the
41. Remove the fly tip connecting pins from the stor­
crane with the fly tip erected. Serious
age holes on the rear of the fly tip section. Refer to
personal injury or major damage to the fly
Figure 4-464 Install them through the fly tip con­
could occur if all connecting pins are not
necting lugs on both sides of the fly. Install the in­
properly installed.
side top right pin first. Swing the fly tip to the left to
get the pin to drop in the hole. Install the inside bot­
tom right pin. Swing the fly tip to the right to get the
pin to drop in the hole. Install the top left pin and
then the bottom left. (Install the pins with the head
on top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install the
pin keepers.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-489

Operator's Manual

1
5

4
7
4 3

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave - Working Position

2. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-465
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Working Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
42. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector up to the working position (5) and install de­
sheaves to the working position. Refer to flector sheave pin (6) in the working position.
Figure 4-465. b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
deflector sheave (2). Rotate sheave assembly the working position (7) and install pin (4).

4-490 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

7 4

3 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position
3. Head Sheave - Stored Position 7. Head Sheave - Working Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-466
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Working Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
43. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the working position. Refer to
Figure 4-466.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the working
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the working position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave assembly down to
the working position (7) and install pin (4).

Section 4 - Attachments 4-491

Operator's Manual
1

1 8
1
2

10

3
11

5
6
4 7 12

1. Rope Guards 5. Fly Tip ATB Storage Receptacle 9. Jumper Assembly

2. Fly Tip Head ATB Switch Plug Assembly 6. Fly Tip ATB Plug Assembly 10. Fly Base Connector
3. Fly Tip Head ATB Switch 7. Fly Base Head Connector 11. Boom Head ATB Switch
4. Fly Head ATB Weight 8. Boom Head Plug Assembly 12. Lockout Clip
Figure 4-467
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Connection
44. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base b. Remove the fly tip plug assembly from its stor­
head and deflector and fly tip head sheaves. Refer age receptacle and connect it to the fly base
to Figure 4-467. Reeve the wire rope on the boom head connector.
deflector sheave then over the fly base deflector c. Install the anti‐two block weight on the offset
head and fly tip head sheaves. Install all wire rope lattice fly tip section anti‐two block switch.
guards. Confirm that all anti‐two block harness con­
nections are made.
CAUTION d. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi­
tion during operation. Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
anti‐two block switch is inactive.
45. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­ When both main boom and fly are reeved for
nections. Refer to Figure 4-467. operation, the lockout clip must be removed
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper and an anti‐two block weight must be sus­
assembly on main boom head and connect it pended from each anti‐two block switch.
to the fly base section connector.

4-492 Section 4 - Attachments


46. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode OFF.
On the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select OFF. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
RCL System will then enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
47. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
48. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
with the fly installed before continuing operations.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
the crane is level on fully or intermediate
extended outriggers with all tires clear of the
ground.
4-493
Operator's Manual

2 2
1

4
5

6
1. Boom Head Pug Assembly 4. Boom Head ATB Switch
2. Jumper Assembly 5. Lockout Clip
3. Fly Base Connector 6. Boom Head ATB Weight

Figure 4-468
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Anti‐Two Block Disconnection

Storage Of The 12-40-67 Ft

(3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly From The
Erected Position
1. Park crane on a firm level surface, shift the trans­
mission to neutral, and engage the park brake.
2. Level the crane on fully or intermediate extended
outriggers with all tires clear of the ground.
3. Position the upper directly over the rear of the carri­
er and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
Store the fly with the crane level on fully or
intermediate extended outriggers with all tires
clear of the ground, the upper directly over the
rear of the carrier, and the travel swing lock
engaged.
The hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
locked position to install or remove the fly or
while swinging during erection or storage of the
offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
4. Confirm that the hydraulic cylinders are fully retrac­
ted (2° offset position)
5. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
retract the boom.
6. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
7. Place the RCL System in the Fly Setup Mode. On
the Crane Configuration Menu, scroll to Attach­
ment/Fly Setup Mode/Select ON. Depress the
telescope pedal toward the retract direction. The
telescope cylinder will automatically retract ot line
up with the T1 section.
8. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base con­
nector and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head.
b. Remove lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the fly tip ATB plug assembly from the
fly base head connector. Connect the plug as­
sembly into the fly tip ATB storage receptacle.
d. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
tip section and install it on the main boom anti‐
two block switch.

4-494 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

5
1

4
3
4 7
1. Deflector Sheave - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-469
12 Ft (3.65m) Head And Deflector Sheave Storage Position (Style 1)

Style 1:
9. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
Figure 4-469. sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (2) from the sheave down on the pin (4).
deflector sheave (1). Rotate sheave to the
stored position (6) and install pin (5) through
the one of the holes in the sheave.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-495

Operator's Manual

1 2 5 6

3 4

7 4

1. Deflector Sheave Pin - Working Position 5. Deflector Sheave Pin - Stored Position
2. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Working Position 6. Deflector Sheave Rope Guard - Stored Position
3. Head Sheave - Working Position 7. Head Sheave - Stored Position
4. Head Sheave Pin

Figure 4-470
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Head And Deflector Sheaves Storage Position (Style 2)

Style 2:
10. Move the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base head and deflector
sheaves to the stored position if required. Refer to
Figure 4-470.
a. Remove the deflector sheave pin (1) from the
deflector sheave rope guard (2). Rotate the
deflector sheave rope guard (6) to the stored
position and install deflector sheave pin (5) in
the stored position.
b. Remove the head sheave pin (4) from the head
sheave (3). Rotate sheave up to the stored po­
sition (7) and install pin (4). Set the head
sheave down on the pin (4).

4-496 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1
3

1. Bottom Left Side Connecting Pin

2. Top Left Side Connecting Pin
3. Bottom Right Side Connecting Pin
4. Top Right Side Connecting Pin
5. Fly Tip Connecting Pins Stored

Figure 4-471
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Connecting Pins Removal

11. Remove wire rope guards from fly head sheave, fly
base deflector sheave, and boom deflector sheave.
Refer to Figure 4-467. Remove the wire rope and lay
it aside. Install wire rope guards at all fly sheaves for
storage.
12. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly tip section.
13. Ensure the boom is fully retraced. Boom up to 2°
boom angle.
WARNING
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.
14. Remove the bottom and then the top fly tip con­
necting pins on the left side of the fly tip section.
Refer to Figure 4-471. To ease pin removal, re­
lieve the loading on the pins by pushing the fly tip
from side to side. Store pins and keepers in the
storage location on the rear of the fly tip section.
15. Remove the inside bottom right fly tip connecting
pin on the right side of the fly tip section. To reduce
loading and ease pin removal, push the fly tip
slightly right or left. Remove the inside top right fly
tip connecting pin on the right side of the fly tip sec­
tion. To reduce loading and ease pin removal push
the fly tip slightly left or right. Store pins and keep­
ers in the storage location on the rear of the fly tip
section.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-497

Operator's Manual

2
3

1. Hitch Pin
2. Fly Tip Head Sheave
3. Fly Base Section

Figure 4-472
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Hitch Pin

17. Align the storage bracket on the fly tip section with
WARNING the storage bracket on the fly base section. Refer
to Figure 4-472. Install the hitch pin through the
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly tip
storage brackets and secure with the cotter pin.
could swing around fly base rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.

16. Using the hand line attached to the fly tip section,
slowly swing the fly tip section around to the right
side of the fly base section. Slowly boom up if ne­
cessary to ease fly tip swing.

4-498 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Top Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 2. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location

Figure 4-473
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

18. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.
19. Carefully extend fly offset cylinders to lower the fly
until the fly head sheave is resting on secure block­
ing. Use a signal person to alert the operator when
the sheave is resting on the blocking.
20. Remove the top left fly base connecting pin. Refer
to Figure 4-473. To reduce loading and ease pin
removal, adjust the fly angle with the fly offset cylin­
ders as required. Store connecting pin in the stor­
age location on the rear of the fly base section.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-499

Operator's Manual

1. Inside Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. Inside Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pin

Figure 4-474
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins

21. Remove the inside top right fly base connecting pin
on the right side of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-474.
To reduce loading and ease pin removal, adjust the
fly angle with the fly offset cylinders as required.
22. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect­
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
and ease pin removal, adjust the fly angle with the
fly offset cylinders as required. Store the two pins
and keepers in the storage location on the rear pic­
ture frame of the fly base section.

4-500 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

2 4 2
4

1 3

Working Position Locked Position

1. Offset Connecting Pin (Working Position) (Both Sides) 3. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Rings (Both Sides)
2. Fly Offset Cylinders 4. Offset Connecting Pins (Locked Position)

Figure 4-475
Placing The Hydraulic Offset Fly In The Locked Position

23. Fully retract fly offset cylinders to raise the fly to the
2° offset position.
24. Place the offset fly in the locked position by remov­
ing the offset connecting pins from the working po­
sition to the locked position. Refer to
Figure 4-475. Do this on both sides of the fly. Se­
cure offset connecting pins with keeper pins.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-501

Operator's Manual

3
4

1. Hydraulic Hose Working Bracket

2. Rollers
3. Hydraulic Hoses
4. Hydraulic Hose Storage Bracket

Figure 4-476
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Hose Connections
25. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the quick dis­
connects. Remove hydraulic hoses from the hy­
draulic hose working bracket. Remove the hoses
from the rollers and secure hoses to the hydraulic
hose storage bracket on the boom head. Refer to
Figure 4-476.
26. After hydraulic hoses have been disconnected en­
sure the accumulator ball valve handle is in the ho­
rizontal position for storage. Refer to
Figure 4-477.

WARNING
If accumulator ball valve is not in the proper
position relative to the operation being
performed, the system will have unnecessary
pressure buildup making quick disconnect
1 fittings hard to connect/disconnect.

1. Handle

Figure 4-477
Accumulator Valve Handle Stored Position

4-502 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1. Bottom Left Side Fly Connecting Pin 3. Left Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
2. T‐Handle

Figure 4-478
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Left Side Connecting Pin

28. Remove the bottom left side fly connecting pin (1).
CAUTION Refer to Figure 4-478. Install the connecting pin
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly. in the storage location (3) on the rear of the fly base
Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly section on the left side of the boom. Install the pin
damage. keeper.

27. Ensure the boom is fully retracted. Boom up to 2°

boom angle.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-503

Operator's Manual

1 2 6 7 8 9

3 4 5

1. Rear Storage Bracket 6. Fly Storage Lug (Engaged In Storage Bracket)

2. Fly Storage Lug (Against Storage Bracket) 7. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section
3. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Center Section 8. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Bullet Lug
4. Top Bullet Lug 9. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section Storage Bracket
5. Front Storage Bracket

Figure 4-479
12-40 Ft (3.65-12.19m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Storage Brackets

29. Attach a hand line to the tip of the 28 ft (8.53m) fly
tip section.
WARNING
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.
30. Slowly swing the fly around to the right side of the
boom. Slowly boom up to 50.
31. Extend the boom until the fly storage lug (2) can
swing completely against the rear storage bracket
(1). Refer to Figure 4-479.
32. Slowly retract the boom while maintaining 50°
boom angle. Observe that the following occurs
while retracting the boom:
a. The storage lug (6) on the rear of the 28 ft
(8.53m) fly center section slides into the slot on
the rear storage bracket. Refer to
Figure 4-479.
b. The top bullet lug (4) on the front fly storage
bracket (5) engages through the hole on the
rear of the 28 ft (8.53m) fly center section (3).
c. The bullet lug (8) on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base
section (7) engages through the hole on the
end of the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base section storage
bracket (9).

4-504 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
3 3 2

1
1. Storage Lug
2. Storage Pin
3. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Section

Figure 4-480
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Storage Lug

d. The the storage lug (1) on the 12 ft (3.65m)
base section (3) engages with the storage pin
(2). Refer to Figure 4-480.
e. The bullet lug (1) on the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base
retaining pin bracket engages through the
hole on the retaining pin bracket on the boom.
Refer to Figure 4-481.
f. The fly tip storage bracket lug (1) on the boom
engages through the fly tip storage bracket
slot on the fly tip. Refer to Figure 4-483.
g. The bullet lug (1) on the 28 ft (8.53m) fly center
retaining pin bracket engages through the
hole on the retaining pin bracket on the boom.
Refer to Figure 4-482.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-505

Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5
1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-481
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base Retaining Pin Bracket

33. Boom down low enough to reach the retaining pin.

Refer to Figure 4-481. Remove the pin keeper (3)
from the retaining pin (2). Position the retaining pin
in the engaged position (4) and secure with pin
keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

4-506 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

1 2 3 4 5

1. Bullet Lug 4. Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)

2. Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-482
28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Center Retaining Pin Bracket

34. Remove the pin keeper (3) from the retaining pin (2).
Refer to Figure 4-482.
35. Position the retaining pin in the engaged position (4)
and secure with pin keeper (5).
WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or major
crane damage.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-507

Operator's Manual

2 4

3
5

1. Fly Tip Storage Bracket Lug 4. Fly Tip Retaining Pin (Engaged Position)
2. Fly Tip Retaining Pin (Disengaged Position) 5. Pin Keeper (Engaged Position)
3. Pin Keeper (Disengaged Position)

Figure 4-483
27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Retaining Pin

36. Remove the pin keeper (3) from the retaining pin 37. Position the retaining pin in the engaged position
(2). Refer to Figure 4-483. (4) and secure with pin keeper (5).

4-508 Section 4 - Attachments


WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or
machine damage.
Stored Swing Lug:
Fly Stored On
Boom
Connecting
Pins (2)
1
2
3 4
1. Top Right Side Fly Connecting Pins
2. Swing Lug (Working Position)
3. Bottom Right Side Fly Connecting Pivot Pin
Figure 4-484
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Hydraulic Offset Lattice Fly Right Side Connecting Pins Storage
38. Remove the two top fly base connecting pins and
the bottom fly base connecting pivot pin from the
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-484.
Store two of pins and keepers in storage rings on
the rear picture frame of the fly base section.
CAUTION
Before operating or traveling the crane
confirm that the right and left side fly
connecting pins are properly stored in their
storage rings, and the swing lug is properly
secured in the stored position. Damage could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
pins and swing lug are not properly stored.
39. Rotate the swing lug to stored position and secure
with with the other fly connecting pin.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
Always Store Swing
Lug On The Boom
As Shown
Connecting
Pins (4)
6
5
4. Right Side Connecting Pin Storage Location
5. Swing Lug (Stored Position)
6. Swing Lug Connecting Pin (Stored Position)
40. Properly store or reeve the wire rope used on the
fly, and install the wire rope guards as required.
41. Fully retract the boom. Place the RCL System in
the Fly Setup Mode OFF. On the Crane Configura­
tion Menu, scroll to Attachment/Fly Setup Mode/
Select OFF. Depress the telescope pedal toward
the retract direction. The RCL System will then
enter previous boom mode.
Note: After selecting Fly Setup Mode OFF, The
telescope pedal must be depressed toward the
retract direction to completely deactivate the
Fly Setup Mode.
42. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor­
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
43. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacit­
ies with the fly in the stored position before continu­
ing operations.
4-509
Operator's Manual
Two Load Line Lifting
(If Equipped)
If equipped with dual anti‐two block switches and
weights, two load lines can be used off of the main boom
to make a single lift. During the two load line lifting applic­
ation, a single load is allowed on both of the wire ropes at
the same time provided all lifting guidelines given here
are followed. Refer to Figure 1-208.
Before making any two load line lifts, refer to the Crane
Rating Manual to confirm that the load is within the rated
capacity.
WARNING
Do not simultaneously lift separate loads with
the two load lines over the main boom. Lifting
two loads at the same time may cause boom
failure leading to serious personal injury
and/or major equipment damage.
In two load line lifting applications, if both
hooks are attached to a single load, this is
considered one load.
Two Load Line Lifting Installation
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface, shift the
transmission to neutral, and engage the park
brake.
2. Fully retract the boom and position the upper over
the rear of the carrier. Engage the travel swing lock.
3. Boom down and/or extend the boom, as required,
to ease access to the boom head.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom. Use a ladder or similar
device as required to reach necessary areas.
4. Properly change the anti‐two block system con­
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect plug assembly from standard
jumper assembly on the main boom head and
connect it to the two load line jumper as­
sembly. Refer to Figure 1-208.
b. Install the auxiliary anti‐two block switch and
weight on the right side of boom head.
c. Connect the auxiliary anti‐two block switch to
the two load line jumper assembly on right side
of boom head.
5. Shift the center sheave to the left hand side.
4-510 Section 4 - Attachments
Two Load Line Lifting Guidelines
Certain guidelines must be followed when making a two
load line lift. The following are the guidelines that must be
followed unless otherwise stated in the Crane Rating
Manual:
1. A single object with two hooks attached is con­
sidered one load for this application.
2. The Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL) and anti‐two
block (ATB) systems shall remain fully functional at
all times. The RCL will display approximately the
total load lifted (the sum of the two lines).
3. The total load on both hooks (the sum of the two
lines), including hook blocks, hook balls, slings,
and rigging, etc. must not exceed the allowable lift­
ing capacity of the main boom.
4. Lifting and placement of a load with two hooks is
more complex than typical lift crane service. The
crane operator and rigging personnel shall be ex­
perienced with and qualified for two hook load lift­
ing and placement applications.
5. Load shift while lifting with two hooks may be more
unpredictable than typical single hook lift work. Ex­
tra precautions must be taken to avoid accidents.
A qualified person on the ground shall be desig­
nated as the primary signal person.
6. When rigging two hooks on an object, each hook
or rigging device shall be capable of handling the
entire weight of the load being lifted.
7. Both load lines must remain in the vertical plane of
the crane boom (no side load). The load being lif­
ted must also be in the same vertical plane as the
crane boom.
8. The off‐lead angle of the wire rope from true vertical
must be minimized when initially lifting a load with
two hooks. The head height of the boom shall be a
minimum of three times the horizontal distance
between the two hook points on the load being lif­
ted.
 Operator's Manual

10

7 3

6
4

WARNING
FAILURE TO HAVE FULLY
OPERATIONAL ATB SYSTEM
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH. MAIN BOOM
ATB IS DISABLED WHEN LOCKOUT
IS INSTALLED. MAIN BOOM ATB IS
FUNCTIONAL WHEN LOCKOUT IS
NOT INSTALLED.
5

Lockout Clip Installed

(Dual ATB Switch Inactive)
1. Two Load Line Jumper Assembly (Right Side) 6. Anti‐Two Block Weight
2. Plug Assembly (Right Side) 7. Anti‐Two Block Switch
3. Dual Anti‐Two Block Switch 8. Standard Jumper Assembly (Left Side)
4. Dual Anti‐Two Block Weight 9. Plug Assembly (Left Side)
5. Lockout Clip 10. Two Load Line Jumper Assembly (Left Side)

Figure 1-208
Dual Anti‐Two Block Weights And Switches (If Equipped)

Section 4 - Attachments 4-511

Operator's Manual
12 Ft (3.65m) Manual Or
Hydraulic Offset Fly Base
Panel Lifting
The 12 ft (3.65m) manual or hydraulic offset fly base can
be used for pre‐cast panel lifting applications, as well as
general lifting applications. During the panel lifting applic­
ations, a single load is allowed on both the main boom
and 12 ft (3.65m) offset fly base wire ropes at the same
time provided all panel lifting guidelines given here are
followed.
Before making any lifts with the 12 ft (3.65m) manual or
hydraulic offset fly base, refer to the Crane Rating Manual
to confirm that the load is within the rated capacity for the
appropriate 12 ft (3.65m) offset fly base (manual or hy­
draulic offset, as applicable).
The 12 ft (3.65m) offset fly base adds weight to the
boom which must be considered in lifting capacities.
When making lifts from the main boom wire rope with
the 12 ft (3.65m) offset fly base installed, refer to the
Crane Rating Manual for the appropriate deductions
from lifting capacities.
WARNING
Do not simultaneously lift separate loads with
the 12 ft (3.65m) offset fly base and the main
boom. Lifting two loads at the same time may
cause boom failure leading to serious
personal injury and/or major equipment
damage.
In panel lifting applications, if both the main
boom and 12 ft (3.65m) offset fly base hooks
are attached to a single panel, this is
considered one load.
4-512 Section 4 - Attachments
Panel Lifting Guidelines
Certain guidelines must be followed when using 12 ft
(3.65m) offset fly base in panel lifting applications. The
following are the guidelines that must be followed unless
otherwise stated in the Crane Rating Manual:
1. A single panel with two hooks (main boom and 12 ft
(3.65m) offset fly base hooks) attached is con­
sidered one load for this application.
2. Follow all 12 ft (3.65m) offset fly base notes for Gen­
eral Operation listed in the Crane Rating Manual.
3. The Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL) and anti‐two
block (ATB) systems shall remain fully functional at
all times. Select the 12 ft (3.65m) offset fly base as
the hook being used. The RCL will display approx­
imately the total load lifted (the sum of the two lines)
and will also display the 12 ft (3.65m) offset fly base
load radius and rated capacity.
4. The total load on both hooks (the sum of the two
lines), including hook blocks, hook balls, slings,
and rigging, etc. must not exceed the allowable lift­
ing capacity of the main boom or the 12 ft (3.65m)
offset fly base, whichever is less. [The main boom
capacity in this condition will be the main boom
rated load less the deduct for “12 ft (3.65m) offset
fly base erected but not used” to account for the 12
ft (3.65m) offset fly base and its load handling
equipment.]
5. Lifting and placement of panels with two hooks is
more complex than typical lift crane service. The
crane operator and rigging personnel shall be ex­
perienced with and qualified for two hook panel lift­
ing and placement applications.
6. Load shift while lifting with two hooks may be more
unpredictable than typical single hook lift work. Ex­
tra precautions must be taken to avoid accidents.
A qualified person on the ground shall be desig­
nated as the primary signal person.
7. When rigging two hooks on a panel, each hook or
rigging device shall be capable of handling the en­
tire weight of the panel being lifted.
8. Both load lines must remain in the vertical plane of
the crane boom (no side load). The panel being lif­
ted must also be in the same vertical plane as the
crane boom.
9. The off‐lead angle of the wire rope from true vertical
must be minimized when initially lifting a panel with
two hooks. The head height of the boom shall be a
minimum of three times the horizontal distance
between the two hook points on the panel being lif­
ted.

1
2
1. Deflector Sheave
2. 25 Ft (7.62m) Fly Extension
3. Lifting Lugs
4. Connecting Pins Storage Locations
Figure 4-485
Fly Extensions
Fly Extensions
If the crane is equipped with an offset lattice fly, up to
two 25 ft (7.62m) extensions are available to extend the
overall fly length from 67 ft (20.42m) to 92 ft (28.04m),
with one extension, or 117 ft (35.66m) with 2 exten­
sions. The extension(s) pin between the boom head
and 12 ft (3.65m) fly base section. The fly base section
must be removed from the boom before adding or re­
moving the fly extension(s). Refer to Figure 4-485.
CAUTION
Do not erect the fly extension(s) with any off­
set fly in the stored position on the boom.
Boom and/or fly damage may occur.
DANGER
To avoid serious injury, carefully read and
understand all safety instructions in this
Operator's Manual. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in serious personal
injury or death.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
Safety Instructions
The following points must be observed while
performing any fly assembly or disassembly:
1. Read and understand the instructions in this Oper­
ator's Manual before attempting to assemble or
disassemble the fly.
2. Do not stand inside, on top, or under the fly at any
time while assembling or disassembling the fly.
3. To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand, or
walk on the fly. Use a ladder or similar device to
reach necessary areas.
4. Use care handling the fly or fly extension(s) when
loading, transporting, and unloading. Damage
that occurs during these operations can go unde­
tected and could result in failure of the attachment,
once subjected to loading. Do not attach slings to
the lattices, when lifting the fly or fly extensions, as
they will bend. It is recommended that the con­
necting lugs and/or head machinery cross shaft be
used as the lifting points. However, it is permissible
to attach nylon straps around all four main chords.
5. Each individual fly section must be adequately
supported before attempting to disassemble the
fly. Removing the connecting pins from the fly be­
fore it is supported, may allow the fly to fall.
6. Stay clear of pinch points when aligning fly section
connecting points. Never place your fingers in
connecting pin holes.
7. Fully assemble the fly before installing it on the
boom.
4-513
Operator's Manual

Right

Wrong

4
2
3

3
2

1. Use The Lifting Lugs As Lifting Points. 4. Do Not Attach Slings To Lattices, They Will Bend.
2. Use The Connecting Lugs And/Or Head Machinery Cross Shafts As
Lifting Points.
3. Use The Main Chords As Lifting Points With Nylon Straps Only.

Figure 4-486
Handling The Fly Sections.

4-514 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

3 2 1 1

4 4 4 4 4 4 4
1. Fly Extension 3. Fly Tip Section
2. Fly Base Section 4. Blocking

Figure 4-487
Fly Assembly On Blocking

25 Ft (7.62m) Fly Extension(s) The fly extension weighs approximately 1600 lb

(726kg). Refer to Figure 4-485 and Figure 4-489.
The 25 ft (7.62m) fly extension(s) must be pinned be­
tween the boom head and offset fly base section. A de­
flector sheave is mounted on top of each fly extension.

Section 4 - Attachments 4-515

Operator's Manual
FLY ARRANGEMENTS
Components Required

40' Fly Base Assembly

12' Fly 12' Fly
Fly Base With Figure # Detail
28' Fly Base 27' Fly 25' Fly 25' Fly
Lift Center 28' Fly Tip Ext Ext
Without
Sheaves Base
Lift
Sheaves
40' Fly

40'   Figure 4-489 A

40'   Figure 4-489 A

40-67' Fly

67'    Figure 4-489 B

92'     Figure 4-489 C

117'      Figure 4-489 D

12'  Figure 4-490 A

12-40' Fly

40'   Figure 4-490 B

12'  Figure 4-490 A

12-40-67' Fly

40'   Figure 4-490 B

67'    Figure 4-490 C

92'     Figure 4-490 D

117'      Figure 4-490 E

4-516 Section 4 - Attachments


Adding Fly Extension(s)
The 12 ft (3.65m) fly base section must be removed
from the crane before adding or removing any fly exten­
sion(s). Remove the fly base, center, and tip sections
as applicable, and place adequate blocking under
each end of the section(s) before removing any con­
necting pin. Refer to the instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual for proper removal and installa­
tion procedures.
WARNING
Install the offset fly [and fly extension(s)] with
the crane level on fully extended outriggers,
all tires clear of the ground, the upper directly
over the rear of the carrier, and the travel
swing lock engaged.
For all manual offset fly arrangements, the fly
adaptor lug and offset connecting pins must
be in the 2° offset position to install, remove,
erect, or store the offset fly.
For all hydraulic offset fly arrangements, the
hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
stored position to install, remove, erect, or
store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom, fly, or fly extension(s).
Use a ladder or similar device to reach
necessary areas.
Note: Before installing the 25 ft (7.62m) fly exten­
sion(s), change the boom mode to EM1, EM2, or EM3.
CAUTION
Do not erect the fly extension(s) with the offset
fly in the stored position on the boom. Boom
and/or fly damage may occur.
Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
1 2 3
1. Fly Base Section
2. Extension Adaptor
3. Fly Extension
Figure 4-488
Fly Extension Adaptor Installation
WARNING
Properly remove the fly sections and
extension(s) from the boom before
attempting to modify the length. Do not place
any part of your body under any part of the fly
when it is being assembled or disassembled.
Removing any connecting pins from the fly or
extension(s) before they are properly
supported may allow the fly or extension(s) to
jackknife and injure someone. Adequately
support each end of each section before
attempting to change the length of the fly.
1. Extend the boom to a length that is greater than the
length of extension(s) to be added.
2. Set the fly on secure blocking. Remove the fly con­
necting pins from the boom head.
3. Retract the boom away from fly.
4. Position the swing lug on the top right side boom
head shaft to the stored position.
5. Position blocking and assemble the fly exten­
sion(s) to the fly base section. Install the adaptor
lug at the top right side connection of the extension
to the fly base. Install all the connecting pins.
Install the pins with the head on top and the keeper
on the bottom. Install the pin keepers.
Note: If crane is equipped with two fly exten­
sions, one adaptor is supplied with each exten­
sion. However only one adaptor is required to
install extension(s).
4-517
Operator's Manual
6. Extend the boom and align the boom head shafts
with the extension lugs. Install all four connecting
pins through the lugs to attach the extension to the
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
boom head shafts. Install the pins with the head on
or walk on the boom, fly, or fly extension(s).
top and the keeper on the bottom. Install the pin
Use a ladder or similar device to reach
keepers.
necessary areas.
Note: If equipped with hydraulic offset fly, con­
nect the hydraulic hoses to the hydraulic offset 1. Extend the boom and lower the fly and exten­
fly cylinders as required. sion(s) onto secure blocking.

Note: If equipped with hydraulic offset fly, dis­

Removing Fly Extension(s) connect the hydraulic hoses to the hydraulic
offset fly cylinders as required.

WARNING 2. Remove the extension(s) connecting pins and dis­

Remove the offset fly [and fly extension(s)]
with the crane level on fully extended
outriggers, all tires clear of the ground, the
upper directly over the rear of the carrier, and
the travel swing lock engaged.
For all manual offset fly arrangements, the fly
adaptor lug and offset connecting pins must
be in the 2° offset position to install, remove,
erect, or store the offset fly.
For all hydraulic offset fly arrangements, the
hydraulic cylinders must be fully retracted
and the offset connecting pins must be in the
stored position to install, remove, erect, or
store the offset fly.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
maximum boom length the fly can be
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
Failure to do the above could result in serious
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
assemble the fly sections as required. [Remove
the adaptor lug from the top right connection of the
25 ft (7.62m) extension to the 12 ft (3.65m) fly base.
3. If installing a different fly arrangement, pin the de­
sired fly sections together on secure blocking.
Install the pins with the head on top and the keeper
on the bottom. Install the pin keepers.
CAUTION
Do not erect the fly extension(s) with the offset
fly in the stored position on the boom. Boom
and/or fly damage may occur.
4. Slowly raise or lower and extend the boom to en­
gage the fly lugs.
5. Install all connecting pins through the boom head
cross shafts (and the swing lug on the top right
connection if applicable). Install the pins with the
head on top and the keeper on the bottom. Install
the pin keepers.

Note: If equipped with hydraulic offset fly, con­

WARNING nect the hydraulic hoses to the hydraulic offset
Properly remove the fly sections and fly cylinders as required.
extension(s) from the boom before
attempting to modify the length. Do not place
any part of your body under any part of the fly
when it is being assembled or disassembled.
Removing any connecting pins from the fly or
extension(s) before they are properly
supported may allow the fly or extension(s) to
jackknife and injure someone. Adequately
support each end of each section before
attempting to change the length of the fly.

4-518 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual

A B
40 Ft (12.19m) 67 Ft (20.42m)
Offset Fly Offset Fly

3
3

C D
92 Ft (28.04m) Fly 117 Ft (35.66m) Fly
25 Ft (7.62m) Fly Extension + 2-25 Ft (7.62m) Fly Extensions +
67 Ft (20.42m) Offset Fly 67 Ft (20.42m) Offset Fly

1. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Base Section 3. 25 Ft (7.62m) Fly Extension(s)

2. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section

Figure 4-489
40-67 Ft (12.19-20.42m) Fly And Extension(s) Arrangements-Manual Or Hydraulic Offset

Section 4 - Attachments 4-519

Operator's Manual

1
1

A B C
12 Ft (3.65m) 40 Ft (12.19m) 67 Ft (20.42m)
Offset Fly Offset Fly Offset Fly

2
1

1
4

D E
92 Ft (28.04m) Fly 117 Ft (35.66m) Fly
25 Ft (7.62m) Fly Extension + 2-25 Ft (7.62m) Fly Extensions +
67 Ft (20.42m) Offset Fly 67 Ft (20.42m) Offset Fly
1. 12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Base With Lift Sheaves 3. 27 Ft (8.23m) Fly Tip Section
2. 28 Ft (8.53m) Fly Tip Section 4. 25 Ft (7.62m) Fly Extension(s)

Figure 4-490
12-40-67 Ft (3.65-12.19-20.42m) Fly And Extension(s) Arrangements-Manual Or Hydraulic Offset

4-520 Section 4 - Attachments

 Operator's Manual
Table Of Contents
Crane Rating Manual And Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Wire Rope Capacity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Wire Rope Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Wire Rope Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Wire Rope Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Wire Rope Inspection And Replacement Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Wire Rope Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Wire Rope Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Wire Rope Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Winch Roller Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Uncoiling Wire Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Anchoring Wire Rope To Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Winding Wire Rope On Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Wire Rope Reeving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
SocketsAnd Wedges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Socket And Wedge - Without Extended Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Socket And Wedge Assembly - With Extended Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Wire Rope Break‐In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Wire Rope Sockets With Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Wire Rope Clip Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Cutting Wire Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Single Part Line Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Rotation Resistant Wire Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Rotation Resistant Wire Rope Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Hook Ball Usage With Rotation Resistant Wire Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Non‐Swivel Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Swivel Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Wire Rope Reeving Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Event Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Data And Recording Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Crane Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Section 5 - General Information i

Operator's Manual
Boom, Attachments, and Upper Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Boom Wear Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Boom Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Boom Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave - Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Heavy Duty Lifting Sheave Package - Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Hook Blocks and Balls - Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Fly - Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Fly Extensions - Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Upper Operator's Cab and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Central Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Pump Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Load Hoist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Load Hoist Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
2M Main (Front) and Optional Auxiliary (Rear) Winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Steering and Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Ground Control Outrigger/Suspension Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Tires and Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Central Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

ii Section 5 - General Information

 Operator's Manual
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Pump Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Carrier Speeds and Gradeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Lower Cab and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Additional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Axle Loads - English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Axle Loads - Metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Axle Loads with 2-Axle or 3-Axle Boom Dolly (3rd Axle Down) - English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Axle Loads with 2-Axle or 3-Axle Boom Dolly (3rd Axle Down) - Metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

General Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Section 5 - General Information iii

Operator's Manual

iv Section 5 - General Information


Crane Rating Manual And
Serial Number
The Crane Rating Manual is in the lower right interior of
the upper operator's cab. The Crane Rating Manual
has the crane serial number on it. The serial number
and a Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is also
stamped on a plate on the front center of the carrier cab
dash. The serial number must be used with any corre­
spondence with the Link‐Belt Distributor of Factory
concerning parts or warranty. The Crane Rating Manu­
al also lists the maximum allowable lifting capacities for
the crane. The Crane Rating Manual should be
checked for the proper lifting capacities before making
any lifts.
If the Crane Rating Manual becomes lost, dam­
aged, or unreadable, it must be replaced before op­
erating the crane. Information contained in the Crane
Rating Manual is important and failure to follow the in­
formation it contains could result in an accident. A re­
placement manual can be ordered through your
Link‐Belt Distributor.
WARNING
The Crane Rating Manual in the crane is the
only authorized listing of lifting capacities for
the crane. It supercedes any other printed lit­
erature which lists lifting capacities. It alone is
to be used for determining crane capacities.
Wire Rope Capacity Chart
The Wire Rope Capacity Chart gives the maximum lift­
ing capacities based on wire rope strength. A typical
example is shown in Figure 5-1. The actual chart is in
the Crane Rating Manual. It lists the maximum load
that should be lifted with different sizes and types of
wire rope. The weights shown are based on wire rope
strength alone. Exceeding these load weights may re­
sult in wire rope damage or failure.
Section 5 - General Information
Operator's Manual
Before making a lift, compare the weight being lifted
(remember to add the weight of the hook block, hook
ball, slings, and riggings to the actual load weight) with
the Wire Rope Capacity Chart in the Crane Rating
Manual. Check the chart for the number of parts of line
required to make the lift. Use at least that number of
parts of line to make the lift. When making a lift with
more parts of line than is needed to make the lift, re­
member to add the weight of the extra wire rope re­
quired to reeve the extra parts of line, to the actual load
weight. The extra parts of line act as additional load
weight. Refer to the Wire Rope Capacity Chart in the
Crane Rating Manual for the weight of the wire rope.
WARNING
Do not exceed the capacities listed for wire
rope strength or crane capacity, whichever is
less, when making a lift. Serious personal in­
jury or crane damage may result.
Wire Rope Specifications
The specifications for the wire rope used on this crane
are on the Wire Rope Capacity Chart in the Crane Rat­
ing Manual. Refer to Figure 5-1 for a typical example.
Always refer to the Wire Rope Capacity Chart in the
Crane Rating Manual when ordering replacement wire
rope.
Wire Rope Diameter
In standard practice, the nominal diameter of wire rope
is the minimum acceptable diameter. It is always made
larger, not smaller, than the nominal diameter accord­
ing to the allowable tolerances shown in the following
chart:
Allowable
Nominal Wire Rope Diameter
Limits
Thru 1/8” (3.2mm) -0 +8%
Over 1/8” (3.2mm) thru 3/16” (4.8mm) -0 +7%
Over 3/16” (4.8mm) thru 5/16” (8.0mm) -0 +6%
Over 5/16” (8.0mm) -0 +5%
Wear and stress tend to reduce the diameter. It should
be measured periodically and replaced if the size is be­
low the nominal size of the wire rope being used as
shown in the chart on page 5-4. It should always be
measured across the largest diameter that will fit inside
a true circle. Refer to Figure 5-2.
5-1
Operator's Manual

Wire Rope Capacity

Maximum Lifting Capacities Based On Wire Rope Strength
Parts 7/8” 7/8”
of Notes
Line Type RB Type ZB
1 30 1 0 0 0
0 0 3 0 0 1 0
3 01 0 0
1 11 0 00 0 3 0
1 1 00 10 00
1 1 10 10 1 0 1 0
11 1 0 1 0
0 1 01 0 1 3 0
0 1 0 1 0
10 30 0 1 00 0 00
11 1 0 30 1 0
1 10 0 10 0
LBCE
TYPE DESCRIPTION

GC 4 Strand, Low Torque, Compacted Strand, Right Regular Lay

RB 19 Strand, Compacted Strand, Rotation Resistant -High Strength - Preformed Right Regular Lay
ZB 34 X 7 Non‐Rotating - Extra Improved Plow Steel - Right Regular Lay Or Right Lang Lay

Note: The Wire Rope Capacity Chart depicted above is shown as an example only. Use the official Wire
Rope Capacity Chart in the Crane Rating Manual. Use it to determine the correct parts of line re­
quired for the given wire rope type and diameter.

Note: Always refer to the crane's Parts Manual when ordering wire rope.

Figure 5-1
Typical Wire Rope Capacity Chart (Example Only)

Right
Wrong

Figure 5-2
Measuring Wire Rope Diameter

5-2 Section 5 - General Information


Figure 5-3
Typical Wire Rope Inspection Report
Wire Rope Inspection And
Replacement
Recommendations
The three basic reasons for deterioration of wire rope
are abrasion, corrosion, and damage caused by fa­
tigue bending, crushing, kinking, and forces or abuse
acting against the wire rope during normal usage.
When wire rope is replaced, use the type specified on
the Wire Rope Capacity Chart in the Crane Rating
Manual. Cranes are designed to use a specific type
and size of wire rope. Using wire ropes other than
those recommended, may result in short life or even
failure of the wire rope.
Section 5 - General Information
Operator's Manual
According to ASME standards, all wire ropes in active
service MUST BE visually inspected daily. A qualified,
trained person should be appointed to conduct the in­
spection. Also on a monthly basis, that person is re­
quired to inspect all wire ropes and keep a dated, written
record noting any damage and recording when wire
ropes are replaced.
These inspections should be done to determine the de­
gree of deterioration of the wire rope at any given section
(refer to the following on wire rope replacement). This will
determine the suitability of the wire rope for continued
service. A sample inspection report is shown in
Figure 5-3. (It can be reproduced and used if desired.)
5-3
Operator's Manual
Wire Rope Inspection
Any of the following are reasons to question wire rope
safety:
1. More than one broken wire in any one strand
should be cause for caution. Breaks that occur on
the worn crowns of the outside wires usually indi­
cate normal deterioration. Breaks that occur in the
valleys between strands can indicate an abnormal
condition, possibly fatigue and breakage of other
wires that are not readily visible. One or more val­
ley breaks should be cause for replacement.
2. Wire breaks generally occur in those portions of
wire rope which pass over sheaves, wind onto
drums, or receive mechanical abuse. Breaks that
occur near attached fittings are likely to result from
fatiguing stresses concentrated in these localized
sections. Breaks of the latter type should be cause
for replacement of the wire rope or renewal of the
attachment to eliminate the locally fatigued area.
When running wire ropes over nylon sheaves, in­
spect the wire rope where it travels over the
sheaves. Inspect for a loss of diameter and then
bend the wire rope to inspect the internal wires for
breaks and wear.
3. Heavy wear, or broken wires, may occur in sections
under equalizer sheaves or other sheaves where
wire rope travel is limited, or in contact with sad­
dles. Particular care should be taken to inspect
wire rope at these points. If wire rope wear is de­
tected at these locations, these wear points can be
shifted by removing the wire rope from the drum
and cutting a 20 ft (6.1m) section off at the drum
end. This may assist in extending the wire rope life.
4. Wire rope stretch is generally greatest during initial
stages of operation when the strands are becom­
ing adjusted and seated. This is accompanied by
some reduction in wire rope diameter.
5. Time for wire rope replacement is indicated by the ex­
tent of abrasion, scrubbing, and peening on the out­
side wires, broken wires, evidence of pitting or major
corrosion, kink damage, or other mechanical abuse
resulting in distortion of the wire rope structure.
6. Sheaves, guards, guides, drums, flanges, and
other surfaces contacted by wire rope during op­
eration should be examined at the time of inspec­
tions. Any condition harmful to the wire rope in use
at the time should be corrected. The same equip­
ment and particularly sheave and drum grooves
should be inspected and placed in proper condi­
tion before a new wire rope is installed.
5-4 Section 5 - General Information
Wire Rope Replacement
Any of the following are reasons for wire rope replace­
ment:
1. In running wire ropes, six randomly distributed bro­
ken wires in one wire rope lay, or three broken
wires in one strand in one wire rope lay.
For rotation resistant wire ropes, two randomly dis­
tributed broken wires in six wire rope diameters, or
four randomly distributed broken wires in thirty
wire rope diameters.
2. In pendants or standing wire ropes, evidence of
more than two broken wires in one lay in sections
beyond end connections or more than one broken
wire in one wire rope lay at end connection.
3. One outer wire broken at the contact point with the
core of the wire rope which has worked its way out
of the wire rope structure and protrudes or loops
out from the wire rope structure.
4. Abrasion, scrubbing, or peening causing loss of
more than 1/3 the original diameter of individual
wires.
5. Evidence of wire rope deterioration from corrosion.
6. Kinking, crushing, “bird caging”, or other damage
resulting in distortion of the wire rope structure.
7. Evidence of any heat damage.
8. Marked reduction in diameter indicates deteriora­
tion of the core resulting in lack of proper support
for the load carrying strands. Excessive wire rope
stretch or elongation may also be an indication of
internal deterioration. Reduction from nominal di­
ameter or more than:
Reduction of Nominal Wire Rope Diameters
1/64” (0.4mm) up to and including 5/16” (8mm)
1/32” (0.79mm) over 5/16” (8mm) to 1/2” (13mm)
3/64” (1.2mm) over 1/2” (13 mm) to 3/4” (19mm)
1/16” (1.6mm) over 3/4” (19mm) to 1‐1/8” (29mm)
3/32” (2.4mm) over 1‐1/8” (29mm)
9. Noticeable rusting or development of broken wires
in the area of connections.
Wire Rope Installation
When installing wire rope, the primary concern is get­
ting the wire rope onto the drum without trapping any
twist that may have been induced during handling.
Use the following procedures to install the wire rope on
the crane.
 Operator's Manual
5 8 7

6 3 2 1 4 6
1. Torsion Spring 4. Setscrew 7. Roller Arm
2. Bolt 5. Capscrew 8. Roller
3. Torque Shaft 6. Setscrew

Figure 5-4
Winch Roller Adjustment

Winch Roller Adjustment
Before installing wire rope on the drum, adjust the
drum roller. Refer to Figure 5-4.
1. Check that the roller is centered between the drum
flanges. If not, loosen setscrews, center roller, and
tighten setscrews.
WARNING
Do not attempt to service winch roller before
properly relieving torsion spring tension. If
proper directions are not followed, the torsion
spring could rapidly and forcefully uncoil.
This may result in serious personal injury and
major component damage. Always release
tension on torsion spring before attempting
any winch roller repair.
2. Properly release torsion spring tension as follows.
This procedure is greatly simplified by using two
service technicians. (One to hold the breaker
bar/wrench, the other to loosen and tighten
setscrews.)
a. Ensure capscrew is tightened securely in
torque shaft.
b. Using a breaker bar or long handle wrench,
hold tension on torsion spring while loosening
the setscrews on both ends of torque shaft.
c. Allow torque shaft to rotate counterclockwise,
as far as possible while maintaining control of
the torque shaft, then securely tighten set­
screws.
d. Reposition breaker bar or wrench on
capscrew.
e. Repeat Steps b thru d until tension is fully
relieved from torsion spring.
3. Turn the capscrew, which will rotate the torque
shaft, until the bolt through the torque shaft con­
tacts the torsion spring.
CAUTION
Do not overtighten the spring. Damage to the
wire rope may occur.
4. With the roller arms resting against the stops and
the bolt through the torque shaft just contacting the
torsion spring, rotate the torque shaft one com­
plete turn (360) to preload the torsion spring. The
torque required to turn the shaft 360 is approxi­
mately 105 ft lb (142Nm).
5. Tighten setscrews. The roller should roll freely
when the drum rotates.

Section 5 - General Information 5-5

Operator's Manual
Right
Figure 5-5
Uncoiling Wire Rope
Uncoiling Wire Rope
1. To avoid twists, unreel the entire wire rope on the
ground in line with the boom deflector sheave and
drum. Set the reel up horizontally so it can rotate as
the wire rope is reeled off. Refer to Figure 5-5.
Reel the wire rope off slowly, so the reel won't tend
to “throw” the wire rope off. If the new wire rope
cannot be laid out on the ground, further steps are
necessary:
a. Mount the reel on a shaft through flange holes
and on jack stands, making sure the reel is set
to be unreeled over the top. Do not allow the
reel to “free‐wheel”. Brake the reel by applying
pressure to a flange. Do not apply braking
pressure to the wire rope on the reel or pass
wire rope between blocks of wood or other ma­
terial.
2. Reeve the wire rope over the boom deflector
sheave and anchor it to the drum.
Note: When replacing wire rope, the sheaves
and grooves in drums should be checked for
wear or damage and replaced if necessary.
Damaged, worn, or undersized sheaves will
damage the wire rope. On older equipment, re­
member that new wire rope is usually larger in
diameter than the worn wire rope it replaces.
The sheave grooves may be worn to the smaller
diameter of the old wire rope.
A new wire rope should be broken in by running
it slowly through its working cycle for a short
period under a light load. Refer to “Wire Rope
Break‐In” in this Section of this Operator's
Manual.
5-6 Section 5 - General Information
3
2
4
1. Winch Drum
2. Wire Rope
3. Wedge
4. Seizings For Type ZB Wire Rope Only (Remove After Installation)
Figure 5-6
Anchoring Wire Rope To Drum
Anchoring Wire Rope To Drum
CAUTION
The ends of type ZB wire rope must be fuse
welded. Failure to do so may cause the core
to slip and/or the strands to loosen causing
major wire rope damage.
If crane is equipped with type ZB wire rope, attach
two seizings (hose clamps are an effective and effi­
cient alternative if traditional seizings are not avail­
able) about 24 inches (60.9cm) from the end with a
3 inch (7.6cm) space between them. Refer to
Figure 5-6. The seizings will prevent any looseness
of the outer strands from traveling up the wire rope
during installation. Insert the free end of the wire
rope into the small opening of the anchor pocket.
Loop the wire rope and push the free end about ¾
of the way back through the pocket. Install the
wedge, then pull the slack out of the wire rope. If
using type ZB wire rope, remove the seizings after
the wire rope is secured in the drum. Keep tension
on the wire rope to prevent the wire rope from be­
coming slack and forming loops or kinks and also to
allow uniform winding on the drum. It is important
that original wire rope lay is maintained at all times.
 Operator's Manual
Winding Wire Rope On Drum Right
Proper winding of the first layer of wire rope on a Wrong
multiple wrap drum is important. If the first layer is
properly wound, succeeding layers will be easier to
control.
This is especially important on ungrooved drums.
When starting new wire rope on such drums, drive
each wrap of the first layer lightly with a wooden mallet
so each wrap barely contacts the preceding one. Keep
tension on the wire rope to prevent the wire rope from
becoming slack and forming loops or kinks and also to
allow uniform winding on the drum. It is important that
original wire rope lay is maintained at all times.
It's important to apply a tensioning load while spooling
the wire rope on the drum. (If not, the lower layers may
be loose enough that the upper layers become
wedged into the lower layers under load, which can
cause major damage to the wire rope.) The tensioning
load should range from 1 to 2% of the wire rope's nomi­ Figure 5-7
nal strength. Hook Block Reeving

Wire Rope Reeving
Hook blocks should be reeved correctly so they hang
straight and do not cause excessive wear on the wire
rope and sheaves. Refer to Figure 5-7.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas when
reeving the crane.
Only if certain criteria are met may a swivel
hook ball be used with rotation resistant wire
rope. Refer to “Hook Ball Usage With Rotation
Resistant Wire Rope” in this Section of this
Operator's Manual.
The crane can use multiple parts of line when reeving
the main winch, depending on the lift being made and
the number of sheaves available. When reeving the
main winch, odd parts of line dead end at the hook
block and even parts dead end at the boom head. The
auxiliary lifting sheave may be reeved with either one or
two parts of line.
The fly section may be reeved with two parts of line for
better line control. Figure 5-21 gives the proper reev­
ing for various parts of line. The reeving patterns illus­
trated must be used at all times. To determine how
many parts of line to use for a particular lift, check the
Wire Rope Capacity Chart and the Winch Performance
Chart in the Crane Rating Manual.
Note: Do not use a swivel at the dead end of
multi‐part reeving.

Note: Wire rope guards must always be used dur­

ing operations. They must be pinned in place to
prevent wire rope from jumping off the sheaves.

Section 5 - General Information 5-7

Operator's Manual

Socket And Wedge Socket And Wedge

Without Extended Wedge With Extended Wedge
Refer to page 5-10 Refer to page 5-11

Figure 5-8
Sockets And Wedges

SocketsAnd Wedges
This crane may be equipped with either of two styles of
sockets and wedges. One style socket uses a “termi­
nator” extended wedge and the other does not. The
wedges for each style are installed differently. Refer to
Figure 5-8 to determine which style your crane has
and where to find the appropriate information for use
and installation.

Type YB Type ZB WARNING

Do not interchange sockets and wedges.
Loads may slip or fall if socket and wedge are
not properly matched. Use a “terminator”
wedge with a socket for a “terminator” wedge
and a non‐“terminator” wedge with a
non‐“terminator” socket.

Type GC
Figure 5-9
Wire Rope Identification

5-8 Section 5 - General Information

 Operator's Manual
Wire Rope, Wedge and Socket Compatibility
Socket
J7Y0002
Wedge S‐421 S‐421‐T US‐422 US‐422‐T
US‐8 422
S‐412‐W YES NO NO NO NO
S‐421‐TW NO YES NO NO NO
US‐422 NO NO YES NO NO
US‐422‐TW NO NO NO YES NO
J7Y0002
NO NO NO NO YES
S‐422‐T
NOTE: Check socket and wedge assemblies to ensure they comply to this chart and that the wire rope size
marked on them matches the wire rope size installed on the crane.
Figure 5-10
Wire Rope, Wedge and Socket Compatibility

Socket And Wedge - Without Extended For This Wire Rope Use This Socket
Wedge Diameter and Wedge
Sockets and wedges shipped from the factory are
identified with size and type or pair identification. Refer 5/8 in or 0.62 in 5/8 in or 0.62 in
to Figure 5-18. Use the proper wedge for the proper 3/4 in or 0.75 in 3/4 in or 0.75 in
wire rope socket. Refer to Figure 5-10. A socket or
7/8 in or 0.88 in 7/8 in or 0.88 in
wedge may be identified for two or more sizes of wire
rope. The size on the socket and wedge must corre­ 16 mm 5/8 in or 0.62 in
spond with the size of wire rope being used. Refer to 19 mm 3/4 in or 0.75 in
Figure 5-11.
20 mm 3/4 in or 0.75 in
CAUTION 22 mm 7/8 in or 0.88 in
Use the proper size wedge with a wire rope 26 mm 1 in or 1.00 in
socket or lagging. The use of an off‐size
28 mm 1 1/8 in or 1.12 in
wedge in a socket or lagging is dangerous as
it may not hold. Wedges and sockets shipped Figure 5-11
from the factory are identified with size and Socket and Wedge Per Wire Rope Diameter
type identification. A lagging or socket may
be identified for two or more sizes of wire rope
and a wedge for one or two. The size on the
lagging, socket, and wedge must correspond
with the size of wire rope being used.

The correct and incorrect methods of attaching a sock­

et and wedge to wire rope are shown in Figure 5-12.
The dead end of the wire rope must always be on the
sloped portion of the socket. The load line must be in a
straight line pull with the eye of the socket. If the wire
rope is installed wrong as shown in Figure 5-12, a per­
manent set will develop at the point where the wire rope
enters the socket. This permanent set will weaken the
wire rope and accelerate wear at this point.

Section 5 - General Information 5-9

Operator's Manual
Right
Wrong
1
4
2 5
6
3
1. Seizing (Type ZB Only) (Remove after installation)
2. Wire Rope Live End
3. Socket
4. Dead End Seizing
5. Tail Length - 20 Wire Rope Diameters Minimum for Rota­
tion Resistant Wire Ropes, 6 Wire Rope Diameters Minimum
for 6 to 8 Strand Wire Rope
6. Wedge
Figure 5-12
Socket And Wedge Connections
Before installing type ZB wire rope into a socket or
wedge attach two seizings (hose clamps are an effec­
tive and efficient alternative if traditional seizings are
not available) approximately 3-4 ft (0.9-1.2 m) from
the end with a 3 in (76.2 mm) space between them. Re­
fer to Figure 5-12.
The dead end must also be seized and a minimum tail
length of 20 wire rope diameters [15” (.38m) for 3/4”
(19mm) wire rope] for rotation resistant wire ropes and
6 wire rope diameters minimum for 6 to 8 strand wire
rope is required. Refer to Figure 5-12. The seizings
will help prevent core slippage and any looseness of
the outer strands from traveling up the wire rope during
installation while still allowing the wire rope strands to
be free to adjust. If using type ZB wire rope, remove
seizings from the live end after wire rope is securely
installed into the socket.
5-10 Section 5 - General Information
Right
Wrong
Figure 5-13
Socket And Wedge Installation
Note: Refer to Figure 5-9 to identify which type of
wire rope is installed on the crane.
CAUTION
The ends of type ZB wire rope must be fuse
welded and the tail length of the dead end
must be a minimum of 20 wire rope diameters
[15” (.38m) for 3/4” (19mm) wire rope].
Failure to do so may cause the core to slip
and/or the strands to loosen causing major
wire rope damage.
When anchoring the socket to the boom head, make
sure the flat face is facing out as shown in Figure 5-13.
If socket is not installed correctly structural damage to
the boom head may occur.
It is recommended that the wire rope socket and
wedge connection be reestablished on an annual ba­
sis. This can be accomplished by cutting the wire rope
6 in (0.15m) above the socket and wedge connection.
See “Cutting Wire Rope” in this Section of this Opera­
tor's Manual. Install the socket and wedge connection
as shown in Figure 5-12.

“No‐Go”
“Go”
1. Seizing (Type ZB Only) (Remove after installation)
2. Wire Rope Live End
3. Socket
4. Dead End Seizing
Figure 5-14
Socket & Wedge Assembly - With Extended Wedge
Socket And Wedge Assembly - With
Extended Wedge
WARNING
Use the proper size wedge with a wire rope
socket or drum. The use of an incorrect size,
type, or brand of wedge in a socket or drum is
dangerous as it may not hold. Wedges and
sockets shipped from the factory are
identified with size and type identification. A
drum or socket may be identified for two or
more sizes of wire rope and a wedge for one or
two. The size on the drum, socket, and wedge
must correspond with the size of wire rope
being used.
WARNING
Do not interchange sockets and wedges.
Loads may slip or fall if socket and wedge are
not properly matched. Use a “terminator”
wedge with a socket for a “terminator” wedge
and a non‐“terminator” wedge with a
non‐“terminator” socket.
Section 5 - General Information
Operator's Manual
2 5
3
6
5. Tail Length - 20 Wire Rope Diameters Minimum for Type GC
(4‐Strand) or Rotation Resistant Wire Ropes, 6 Wire Rope Diame­
ters Minimum for 6 to 8 Strand Wire Rope
6. Extended Wedge
The correct and incorrect methods of attaching a sock­
et and wedge to wire rope are shown in Figure 5-14
and Figure 5-15. The dead end of the wire rope must
always be on the sloped portion of the socket. The load
line must be in a straight line pull with the eye of the
socket. If the wire rope is installed wrong as shown in
Figure 5-15, a permanent set will develop at the point
where the wire rope enters the socket. This permanent
set will weaken the wire rope and accelerate wear at
this point.
Sockets and wedges shipped from the factory are
identified with size and type or pair identification. Refer
to Figure 5-18. Use the proper wedge for the proper
wire rope socket. Refer to Figure 5-10. A socket or
wedge may be identified for two or more sizes of wire
rope. The size on the socket and wedge must corre­
spond with the size of wire rope being used. Refer to
Figure 5-11. The wedge also has a “go”/“no‐go” fea­
ture cast into the wedge to assist in determining the
proper size wire rope that can be used with that particu­
lar socket and wedge. Refer to Figure 5-14. The
proper size wire rope is determined when: 1) the wire
rope passes through the “go” hole in the wedge, and 2)
the wire rope does not pass through the “no‐go” hole in
the wedge. The part number may also be identified on
the socket and wedge. Consult the Parts Manual for
confirmation. If there is any doubt as to the mating of
the socket and wedge, consult your Link‐Belt Distribut­
or.
5-11
Operator's Manual
Right Wrong
Figure 5-15
Socket & Wedge Connections
Before installing type ZB wire rope into a socket or
wedge attach two seizings (hose clamps are an effec­
tive and efficient alternative if traditional seizings are
not available) approximately 3-4 ft (0.9-1.2 m) from
the end with a 3 in (76.2 mm) space between them. Re­
fer to Figure 5-14.
The dead end must also be seized and a minimum tail
length of 20 wire rope diameters [15” (.38m) for 3/4”
(19mm) wire rope] for rotation resistant wire ropes and
6 wire rope diameters minimum for 6 to 8 strand wire
rope is required. Refer to Figure 5-14. The seizings
will help prevent core slippage and any looseness of
the outer strands from traveling up the wire rope during
installation while still allowing the wire rope strands to
be free to adjust. If using type ZB wire rope, remove
seizings from the live end after wire rope is securely
installed into the socket.
Note: Refer to Figure 5-9 to identify which type of
wire rope is installed on the crane.
Use a hammer to seat the wedge and wire rope into the
socket before applying first load. Lift the first load a few
inches (centimeters) from the ground to fully seat the
wedge and wire rope in the socket. This load should be
of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use.
Secure the dead end section of the wire rope by instal­
ling the clip through the wedge as shown in
Figure 5-14. Tighten the nuts on the clip to the recom­
mended torque as shown on the table in Figure 5-19.
5-12 Section 5 - General Information
Right
Wrong
Figure 5-16
Socket & Wedge Installation
When anchoring the socket to the boom head, make
sure the flat face is facing out as shown in Figure 5-16.
If socket is not installed correctly structural damage to
the boom head may occur.
It is recommended that the wire rope socket and
wedge connection be reestablished on an annual ba­
sis. This can be accomplished by cutting the wire rope
6 in (0.15m) above the socket and wedge connection.
See “Cutting Wire Rope” in this Section of this Opera­
tor's Manual. Install the socket and wedge connection
as shown in Figure 5-15.
Wire Rope Break‐In
After the wire rope has been installed and the ends se­
cured in the correct manner, the new wire rope must be
run through a break‐in period. This allows the compo­
nent parts of the new wire rope to gradually adjust itself
to actual operating conditions.
1. Level the crane on fully extended outriggers with all
tires clear of the ground. Swing the upper over the
front of the carrier and engage the travel swing lock.
2. Fully raise and fully extend the boom. Attach a light
load at the hook and raise it a few inches (centi­
meters) off the ground. Allow to stand for several
minutes.
3. Run the wire rope through a cycle of operation at
very slow speeds. During this trial operation, a very
close watch should be kept on all working parts-
sheaves, drums, rollers, etc. to make certain that the
wire rope runs freely, and without any possible ob­
structions as it makes its way through the system.
 Operator's Manual

The Double‐Saddle‐Clip Method The Loop Back Method

Figure 5-17
Wire Rope Socket With Clip

Note: Run these loads with reeving that places

the loads on the hook block with all wire rope off
the drum except the last three wraps. If this is not

GO
LIVE

NO GO
LINE
CLIP
possible, alternate methods must be used to as­ BASE x

sure proper tensioning of wire rope on the drum.

4. If no problems appear in running the wire rope, re­ 1

peat procedure with an increased load.

Wire Rope Sockets With Clips

x
x
Some codes require the use of a wire rope clip in con­
junction with a socket and wedge connection. Extended Wedge
Figure 5-17 illustrates some typical methods of clip
installation with sockets. In some cases, particularly in
wrecking ball work, there is a chance that the wedge
can loosen, releasing the socket from the wire rope.
This could be caused by the banging action and alter­
nate loading and unloading of the wire rope that occurs
during this type work.
2 1

WARNING
Regularly inspect the integrity of the wire rope Non‐Extended Wedge
at the point of exit at the dead end side. High
velocity spin of wire rope when loading and 1. Wire Rope Sizes (fractional inches)
unloading can cause the wire rope to flip‐flop, 2. Pairing Designator
fatigue, and finally break off. Figure 5-18
Examples Of Typical Socket & Wedge
The use of wire rope clips with a socket and wedge Identifiers
connection can weaken the connection if done improp­
erly. Do not attach the dead end of the wire rope to the
live side with the clip as this will seriously weaken the
connection. The clip may ultimately take the load and
may deform or break the wire rope.

Section 5 - General Information 5-13

Operator's Manual
Minimum No. Amount Of Wire Rope
Clip Size Torque
of Clips To Turn Back*
Inches mm Quantity Inches mm ft lb Nm
1/4 3.2 2 3‐1/4 82.5 --- ---
3/16 4.7 2 3‐3/4 95.2 --- ---
1/4 6.3 2 4‐3/4 120.6 15 20.0
5/16 7.9 2 5‐1/4 133.3 30 40.7
3/8 9.5 2 6‐1/2 165.1 45 60.1
7/16 11.1 2 7 177.8 65 86.8
1/2 12.7 3 11‐1/2 292.1 65 86.8
9/16 14.3 3 12 304.8 95 126.9
5/8 15.9 3 12 304.8 95 126.9
3/4 19.0 4 18 457.2 130 173.6
7/8 22.0 4 18 457.2 130 173.6
* If a greater number of clips are used than shown in this table, the amount of wire rope turnback should be increased proportionally.

Figure 5-19
Wire Rope Clip Application Recommendation

If using the loop back method, the loop formed must

Right not be allowed to enter the wedge, or the connection
will be weakened. The tail length of the dead end must
be a minimum of 20 wire rope diameters [15” (.38m) for
3/4” (19mm) wire rope].

CAUTION
The ends of type ZB wire rope must be fuse
welded and the tail length of the dead end
must be a minimum of 20 wire rope diameters
[15” (0.38m) for 3/4” (19mm) wire rope]. Fail­
ure to do the above may cause the core to slip
and/or the strands to loosen causing major
wire rope damage.

Wrong

Figure 5-20
Wire Rope Clip Installation

5-14 Section 5 - General Information


Wire Rope Clip Installation
The correct method of installing wire rope clips is
shown in Figure 5-20. The u‐bolt must always be over
the short end of the wire rope and the base must al­
ways contact the long end.
Clips should NOT be staggered, that is u‐bolt of one
clip over short end and u‐bolt of next clip over long end.
This practice will not only distort the wire rope exces­
sively, but will prevent maximum strength of this type
fastening. Placing all clips with the u‐bolt over the long
end of the wire rope will damage strands and result in
an unsafe condition.
The distance between clips should be not less than six
times the wire rope diameter. In relation to size of wire
rope, the minimum number of clips recommended for
safe connections is given in Figure 5-19.
CAUTION
Apply the initial load and retighten nuts to the
recommended torque. Wire rope can stretch
and reduce in diameter when loads are ap­
plied. Inspect periodically and retighten as
required.
Cutting Wire Rope
CAUTION
The ends of type ZB wire rope must be fuse
welded. Failure to do so may cause the core
to slip and/or the strands to loosen causing
major wire rope damage.
When wire rope is to be cut, seizings should be placed on
each side of the point where the wire rope is to be cut, to
keep the strands in place. On preformed wire rope such
as type RB, one seizing on each side of the cut is enough.
On non‐preformed wire rope less than 7/8 inch (23mm)
diameter such as type ZB, two seizings are recom­
mended. On non‐preformed wire rope over 7/8 inch
(23mm) diameter, three seizings are recommended.
Original wire rope lay must be maintained at all times.
Three Basic methods of cutting wire rope are recom­
mended:
1. Abrasive cutting tools.
2. Shearing tools. (Wire cutters on small wire rope, a
wire rope cutter and hammer for larger wire ropes.)
3. Oxy/acetylene fuel torch. This is the only sug­
gested method for cutting type ZB wire rope.
Section 5 - General Information
Operator's Manual
Single Part Line Hoisting
Non‐rotating, rotation‐resistant, or spin‐resistant wire
ropes are recommended for single part of line applica­
tions. This is of utmost importance for long fall hoist line
applications. Link‐Belt type “P”, “RB”, and “ZB” are ex­
amples of wire ropes recommended for single part
hoisting. See the Wire Rope Capacity Chart in the
Crane Rating Manual for the specific types of rotation
resistant wire rope recommended for your crane.
The use of non‐rotation resistant wire rope is not rec­
ommended for long falls of single part of line hoisting
since the wire rope and load may spin. If the crane op­
erator allows either the load or the wire rope to rotate,
the crane or wire rope can be damaged. The anti‐two
block weight may also become entangled with the wire
rope and could damage the anti‐two block system,
wire rope, and/or head machinery.
Rotation Resistant Wire Rope
The rotation resistant characteristic is achieved by laying
the outer strands around an independent wire rope that
is wound in the opposite direction. When the wire rope
has tension on it, opposing rotational forces are created
between the core and outer strands. If a swivel hook ball
is utilized with rotation resistant wire rope, the wire rope is
allowed to twist. The outer strands unwind and get lon­
ger while the inner core is forced to rotate in the same di­
rection and shortens in length. As a result of this treat­
ment, the inner core sees a disproportionately greater
load, and core damage may occur due to shock loading
or overloading. A rotating load on an unrestrained, non‐
swivel hook ball without a tagline, affects the internal
loading of the wire rope in this manner. This practice, or
any other which allows the wire rope to rotate while in ser­
vice, leads to unbalanced loading between the inner and
outer layer of strands, which may result in core failure.
Wire rope manufacturer's testing has shown that rotation
resistant wire rope utilized with a swivel hook ball has re­
duced the breaking strength by as much as 50% if exces­
sive rotation occurs.
5-15
Operator's Manual
Rotation Resistant Wire Rope
Inspection
For rotation resistant wire rope, refer to “Wire Rope In­
spection” and “Wire Rope Replacement” in this Section
of this Operator's Manual and the following information.
Marked reduction in diameter indicates deterioration of
the core resulting in lack of proper support for the load
carrying strands. Excessive wire rope stretch or
elongation may also be an indication of internal deterio­
ration. Major concerns and replacement recommen­
dations include:
1. Loss of wire rope diameter (in excess of those
listed in the table in “Wire Rope Replacement” in
this Section of this Operator's Manual), abnormal
lengthening of wire rope lay, or protrusion of wires
between the outer strands.
2. Two randomly distributed broken wires in 6 wire
rope diameters, or 4 randomly distributed broken
wires in 30 wire rope diameters.
5-16 Section 5 - General Information
Hook Ball Usage With Rotation
Resistant Wire Rope
Non‐Swivel Usage
A non‐swivel hook ball in conjunction with a tagline or
other device to control load spin should be used when
the crane is equipped with rotation resistant wire rope.
This is to avoid unrestrained rotation of the wire rope.
Swivel Usage
A swivel hook ball can be used with rotation resistant wire
rope if:
1. The wire rope is not shock loaded or overloaded.
2. Wire rope working strength is reduced to maintain
original design factors.
3. The wire rope is inspected frequently as outlined
above and as per “Wire Rope Inspection And Re­
placement Recommendations” in this Section of
this Operator's Manual.
 Operator's Manual

1 Part 2 Parts 3 Parts 4 Parts

5 Parts 6 Parts 7 Parts 8 Parts

9 Parts 10 Parts 11 Parts

12 Parts 13 Parts 14 Parts

Notes: Some of the diagrams shown may not apply to this particular crane.
Do not use a swivel at the dead end of a multi‐part reeving.
Refer to Section 4 of this Operator's Manual for positioning of adjustable sheave.
Figure 5-21
Wire Rope Reeving Diagrams

Section 5 - General Information 5-17

Operator's Manual

Auxiliary Auxiliary
Sheave Sheave

15 Parts 16 Parts

Note: Some of the diagrams shown may not apply to this particular crane. Do not use a swivel at the dead
end of a multi‐part reeving. Reeving shown is typical. Either drum may be reeved over head sheaves or
auxiliary sheave.
Figure 5-22
Wire Rope Reeving Diagrams

Fly Base
Boom Head Deflector Sheave Fly Tip Head
Deflector Sheaves Sheave

Auxiliary Sheave
2 Parts Fly Base
Head Sheave

Boom Head
Sheaves

Hook Ball

Rear Drum

Front Drum Hook Block

Note: Reeving shown is typical. Either drum may be reeved over boom sheaves or fly sheave.

Figure 5-23
Wire Rope Reeving Diagrams

5-18 Section 5 - General Information

 Operator's Manual

Boom Head
Deflector Sheaves

Boom Head
Sheaves

Hook Block

Boom Head
Sheaves

Rear Drum

Front Drum
Hook Block

Note: Some of the diagrams shown may not apply to this particular crane. Do not use a swivel at the dead
end of a multi‐part reeving. Reeving shown is typical. When reeving wire rope for a two load line lift, if more
than two parts of line are to be used, ensure that one of the lines ends on the hook block.
Figure 5-24
Two Load Line Lifting Wire Rope Reeving Diagram

Section 5 - General Information 5-19

Operator's Manual

Boom Head
Deflector Sheaves

Auxiliary
Head Sheave Boom Head
Sheaves

Boom Head
Rear Drum Sheaves Heavy Lift
Sheaves
Front Drum

Heavy Lift
Sheaves

CAUTION
These reevings are only applicable for maximum rated capacity lifts that require additional parts of line
to maintain the required wire rope safety factor.
Note: Some of the diagrams shown may not apply to this particular crane. Do not use a swivel at the dead
end of a multi‐part reeving. Reeving shown is typical. Either drum may be reeved over head sheaves or
auxiliary sheave.
Figure 5-25
28 Part Wire Rope Reeving Diagrams

5-20 Section 5 - General Information

 Operator's Manual

Over Lattice
Cross Member

Fly Head
Sheaves

Over Rope Guard

Hook Block

Figure 5-26
12 Ft (3.65m) Fly Section Wire Rope Reeving

Section 5 - General Information 5-21

Operator's Manual
Event Data Recording
This Link­Belt crane is equipped with one or more com­
puters that monitor and/or control the crane’s perform­
ance. This crane uses computer modules to monitor
and retain crane operation, crane configuration, and as
well as crane functions. These modules may aid the
operator in the operation of the crane. The modules
may also store data to help the Link­Belt dealer/distrib­
utor technician service the crane.
Event Data Recorder
This Link­Belt crane has an Event Data Recorder (EDR)
system. The main purpose of the EDR is to record data
relating to the crane operation and configuration that
will assist in understanding how the crane’s operating
systems perform. The EDR is designed to record data
related to crane dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time. The EDR in this crane is designed
to record such data as:
• How various systems in the crane were operating
• How the crane was configured (counterweight,
boom length, operational mode, etc.)
• What control functions were being used
This data will help provide valuable information as to
how the crane was functioning and/or being operated.
5-22 Section 5 - General Information
Data And Recording Privacy
Important: EDR data is recorded in the crane only if a
non­trivial situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
EDR under normal operating conditions and no per­
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, or crane location)
is recorded. However, other parties, such as law en­
forcement, or similar government offices, could com­
bine the EDR data with the type of personal identifying
data routinely acquired during a crane accident invest­
igation.
To read data recorded by this EDR system, special
equipment is required, and access to the crane and/or
the EDR is needed. Link­Belt has the special equip­
ment necessary to retrieve the recorded data.
It is the position of Link­Belt that the crane owner owns
any data that is recorded and stored in the EDR or other
onboard computer system(s). Link­Belt will not access
this data, interpret data, or share the data with others,
except by written request from the crane owner(s). The
request by the crane owner may be due to an official
request of police or similar government offices; as part
of Link­Belt’s defense of litigation through the discov­
ery process; or as required by law. Data that Link­Belt
retrieves may also be used for Link­Belt or component
manufacturers for research purposes, where a need is
shown and data is not tied to a specific crane or crane
owner.
Link‐Belt will retrieve crane data only by written request
from the crane owner. The Electronic Data Recorder
Request Form found at the end of this Operator's
Manual can be used for this purpose.
Crane Specifications
The following information is general in nature and is used for reference purposes only. Depending upon the vintage
of the crane, some features may no longer be available. Standard and optional features may vary from crane to
crane. Contact the Link‐Belt Distributor or the factory to verify the specific information if required.
Boom, Attachments, and Upper Structure
J Boom
Design - Seven section, formed construction of extra
high tensile steel consisting of one base section and six
telescoping sections. The two plate design of each
section has multiple longitudinal bends for superior
strength. Each telescoping section extends independ­
ently by means of one double – action, single stage
hydraulic cylinder with integral holding valves.
Boom
 43.7 – 223 ft (13.3 – 68m) seven section boom
 Integral boom dolly connection
 Boom removal quick disconnects
 Three pinned positions of 0%, 50%, and 100% on
each boom section
 Mechanical boom angle indicator
 Wind speed indicator
 Eight boom extend modes (EM1 – EM8), controlled
from the operator’s cab, provide superior capacities
by varying the extension of the telescoping sections:
 EM1 extends to 223 ft (68m)
 EM2 extends to 209.3 ft (63.8m)
 EM3 extends to 177.5 ft (54.1m)
 EM4 extends to 163.3 ft (49.8m)
 EM5 extends to 133.4 ft (40.6m)
 EM6 extends to 135.9 ft (41.4m)
 EM7 extends to 105.4 ft (32.1m)
 EM8 extends to 90.7 ft (27.6m)
 Maximum tip height for each extend mode is:
 EM1 is 234.1 ft (71.3m)
 EM2 is 220.5 ft (67.2m)
 EM3 is 188.9 ft (57.6m)
 EM4 is 174.8 ft (53.3m)
 EM5 is 145.1 ft (44.2m)
 EM6 is 147.6 ft (45.0m)
 EM7 is 117.4 ft (35.8m)
 EM8 is 102.8 ft (31.3m)
Boom Wear Pads
 Wear pads with Teflon inserts that self – lubricate the
boom sections, inserts are universal for the boom.
 Bottom rear wear pads are universal for all boom sec­
tions.
 Top front wear pads are universal for all boom sec­
tions
 Top rear wear pads are common for T3, T4, T5, and
T6 boom sections
 Top rear wear pads are common for T1 and T2 boom
sections
Boom Head
 Seven 16.53 in (41.99cm) root diameter nylon
sheaves to handle up to 16 parts of line with auxiliary
lifting sheave
 Easily removable wire rope guards
 Rope dead end lugs on either side of the boom head
 Boom head is designed for quick-reeve of the hook
block
Boom Elevation
 One double acting hydraulic cylinder with integral
holding valve
 Boom elevation: -1.5° to 83°
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave - Optional
 Single 16.53 in (41.99cm) root diameter nylon sheave
 Easily removable wire rope guards
 Does not affect erection of the fly or use of the main
head sheaves
 Can be stored on right side of the boom without re­
moval
Heavy Duty Lifting Sheave Package -
Optional
 Six 16.53 in (41.99cm) root diameter nylon sheaves
 Easily removable wire rope guards
 Necessary to achieve greater than 16 parts of line
Hook Blocks and Balls - Optional
 40 ton (36.3mt) 1 sheave quick-reeve hook block
with safety latch
 66 ton (60mt) 3 sheave quick-reeve hook block with
safety latch
 100 ton (91mt) 5 sheave quick-reeve hook block with
safety latch
 140 ton (127mt) 7 sheave quick-reeve hook block
with safety latch
 200 ton (181mt) 10 sheave quick-reeve hook block
with safety latch
 275 ton (250mt) base rating hook block - two 140
ton (127mt) 7 sheave quick-reeve hook blocks with
safety latch and 275 ton (250mt) hook block equalizer
 12 ton (10.9mt) swivel hook ball with safety latch
Fly - Optional
 40 – 67 ft (12.19 – 20.42m) two piece bi­fold lattice
fly, stowable, offsettable to 2° , 15° , 30° , and 45° .
ï 3
 Maximum tip height is 301 ft (91.7m). Minimum of  Drum rotation indicator activation switch
36,000 lb (16 329kg) of counterweight required.  Winch high/low speed disable switch(es)
 12­40­67 ft (3.65­12.19­20.42m) three piece bi­fold  Cab heater and A/C controls
lattice fly, stowable, offsettable to 2° , 15° , 30° , and  Throttle lock switch
45° . Maximum tip height is 301 ft (91.7m). Minim­  Throttle set/resume switch
um of 36,000 lb (16 329kg) of counterweight re­  Cab tilt switch
quired.  Counterweight handling switch
 Warning horn button
 12­40­67 ft (3.65­12.19­20.42m) three piece bi­fold
 Swing park brake
lattice fly, stowable hydraulically offsettable to 2°  Remote controlled boom flood light - optional
through 45° . Maximum tip height is 301 ft (91.7m).
Foot Controls
Minimum of 36,000 lb (16 329kg) of counterweight  Boom Telescope
required.  Swing brake
 Engine throttle
Fly Extensions - Optional Right Front Console - Controls and indicators for:
 One 25 ft (7.62m) lattice extension, equipped with  Warning horn button
one 16.38 in (41.6cm) root diameter nylon deflector  Function disable switch
sheave to be mounted between the boom head and  Cab floodlights switch
fly options. Maximum tip height of 325.3 ft (99.2m).  Console dimmer switch
Minimum of 58,000 lb (26 308kg) of counterweight  2-12 volt accessory outlets (Switched & Unswitched)
required.  Emergency engine shutdown
 Two 25 ft (7.62m) lattice extensions, equipped with  Windshield wiper/washer switch
one 16.38 in (41.6cm) root diameter nylon deflector  Outrigger keypad
sheave to be mounted between the boom head and  Upper ignition switch
fly options. Maximum tip height of 350 ft (106.7m).  Lower ignition switch
Minimum of 58,000 lb (26 308kg) of counterweight  DPF regeneration inhibit switch(1)
required.  DPF regeneration initiate switch(1)
 Single and dual boom floodlight switches - optional
J Upper Operator's Cab and  Rotating beacon/strobe light switch - optional
Controls  Hydraulic offset fly switch - optional
Environmental Cab - Fully enclosed, one person cab Camera Display - Located on dash console
of galvaneal steel structure with acoustical insulation.  Displays right side of upper
Equipped with:  Displays main and auxiliary winches
 Tilting cab up to 20° Cab Instrumentation - Ergonomically positioned LCD
 Tinted and tempered glass windows display, CANBUS instrumentation for crane operation in­
 Five way adjustable, cushioned seat with headrests, cluding:
and seat belt  Tachometer
 Extra-large fixed front window with windshield wiper  Change Hydraulic filter indication
and washer  Engine water temperature
 Swing up roof window with windshield wiper  Fuel level
 Sliding left side door with large fixed window  Hydraulic oil temperature
 Sliding right side window for ventilation  Stop engine
 Engine dependent warm - water heater with air  Check engine
ducts for front windshield defroster and cab floor  Wait to start
 Defroster fan for the front window  High exhaust temperature light(1)
 Bubble level  Exhaust system cleaning light(1)
 Circulating fan  Exhaust system cleaning Disabled light(1)
 Sun screen  Swing park brake light
 LED Dome light  Fine metering function set & %
 Cup holder  Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) Low Light(1)
 Fire extinguisher  Engine air filter high restriction Light
 Left side viewing mirror  Engine Running Hours
 Two position travel swing lock  Hydraulic Oil Life Indicator
 AM/FM Radio  Engine Oil Life Indicator
Air Conditioning - Integral with cab heating system  General Service Indicator
utilizing the same ventilation outlets  Carrier engine indicator lights and gauges
 Engine oil pressure
Armrest Controls - Two dual axis electronic joystick
 Battery voltage
controllers or optional single axis electronic controllers
 Engine hours
for:
 Fuel rate (gal/hr)
 Swing  Engine load
 Boom hoist  Third wrap indicator activation & setup
 Main front winch  Engine Diagnostics
 Auxiliary rear winch - optional  Electronic Control Diagnostics
 Drum rotation indication

ï
 Outrigger level indicator
 Exhaust system cleaning inhibit switch(1)
 Exhaust system cleaning initiate switch(1)
 Service interval indicator
 Hydraulic oil
 Engine oil
 Miscellaneous - user defined
(1) (Tier 4f / Stage IV engine only)
Diagnostic Center - Located on the left side of the
front panel below the windshield
 Engine diagnostic
 RCL CANBUS diagnostic
 Boom CANBUS diagnostic
 Crane Controller USB diagnostic
 RCL controller USB diagnostic
 Manual boom control connection
 Manual crane control connection
Link­Belt Pulse – The Link­Belt in­house designed,
total crane operating system that utilizes the display as
a readout and operator interface for the following sys­
tems:
 Rated capacity limiter – LCD graphic audio – visual
warning system integrated into the dash with anti –
two block and function limiter. Operating data in­
cludes:
 Crane configuration
 Boom length
 Boom head height
 Allowed load and % of allowed load
 RCL light bar
 Boom angle
 Radius of load
 Actual load
 Wind speed
 Highlighted unit of measurement on working
screen
 Active pin/latch status
 Telescope operation displayed in real time
 Counterweight installation/removal
 Third wrap indicator
 Diagnostics
 Outrigger position sensing
 Drum rotation direction indicator
 Operator settable alarms (include):
 Maximum and minimum boom angles
 Maximum tip height
 Maximum boom length
 Swing left/right positions
 Operator defined area (imaginary plane)
 Telematics – Cellular-based data logging and
monitoring system that provides:
 Location and operational settings
 Routine maintenance
 Crane and engine monitoring
 Diagnostic and fault codes
 Extend control module (ECM)
 Controls the extend modes
 Diagnostics
 Electronic controllers
 Controls all load lifting functions
 Diagnostics
 Fine metering
 Controls the reaction speeds of the main and auxili­
ary winches, boom hoist, and swing functions
 Diagnostics
Integrated Third Wrap Indicator - Optional -
Link‐Belt Pulse color display visually and audibly warns
the operator when the wire rope is on the first/bottom
layer and when the wire rope is down to the last three
wraps.
Integrated Third Wrap Function Kickout - Optional
- Link-Belt Pulse color display visually and audibly
warns the operator when the wire rope is on the first/
bottom layer and provides a function kickout when the
wire rope is down to the last three wraps.
External RCL Light Bar - Optional - Visually informs
the ground crew when crane is approaching maximum
load capacity with a series of green, yellow, and red
lights.
Internal RCL Light Bar - Visually informs the operator
when crane is approaching maximum load capacity
with a series of green, yellow, and red lights.
J Swing
Motor/Planetary - Two bi­directional hydraulic swing
motors mounted to planetary reduction units for 360°
continuous smooth swing at 1.5 rpm.
Swing Park Brake - 360°, electric over hydraulic,
(spring applied/hydraulic released) multi-disc brake
mounted between the speed reducer and the motor.
Operated by a switch in the operator’s cab.
Swing Brake - 360°, foot operated, hydraulic applied
disc brake mounted to the reduction unit.
Swing Lock - Two – position swing lock (boom over
the front or rear) operated from the operator’s cab.
360° Positive Swing Lock - Optional - Meets New
York City requirement.
J Central Lubrication System
Automated lubrication unit that injects grease into the
turntable bearing, boom hoist cylinder pins, boom foot
pins, house lock (2-position), and cab tilt cylinder.
Activated by a timer on the ignition switch.
J Electrical
Two batteries provide 12 – volt operation and starting.
CANBUS wiring and components.
Swing Alarm - Audio/Visual warning device signals
when the upper is swinging.
Lights
 Two LED working lights on the front of the cab
 One LED working light on top of the cab - optional
 Five LED working lights on superstructure - optional
 One amber strobe beacon on top of the cab - op­
tional
 Boom floodlight - Optional
 Boom floodlight - Dual- optional
 Boom floodlight - High intensity remote controlled-
optional
Power Panel - Sealed power panel containing:
 Battery disconnects
ï
 Hour meter J Engine
 Fuses, circuit breakers, relays, diodes, resistors
 Control modules Specification Cummins QSB-6.7
Emissions Compli­
J Hydraulic System ance Level
Tier 4f/Stage IV(1) Tier 3/Stage IIIA(2)

Main Pumps Maximum allowable

 Two piston pumps for boom hoist and telescope sulfur content of fuel 15 5,000
(PPM):
 Two piston pumps for main and auxiliary winches
 One piston pump for swing Numbers of cylin­
6 6
 One piston pump for counterweight removal and hy­ ders
draulic fly option Cycle 4 4
 One gear pump for engine fan Bore and Stroke: 4.21 x 4.88 (106.9 x 4.21 x 4.88 (106.9 x
inch (mm) 124) 124)
 One gear pump for upper oil cooler fan
 The upper engine powers the pumps. Combined Piston Displace­
408 (6 702) 408 (6 702)
ment: in3 (cm3)
pump capacity of 218 gpm (825.2Lpm).
Max. Brake Horse­ 215 (160) @ 1,800 205 (152) @ 1,800
Hydraulic Reservoir - 168 gal (635.9L) capacity power: hp (kW) rpm rpm
equipped with sight level gauge. Diffusers built in for Peak Torque: ft lb 700 (949) @ 1,500 685 (928) @ 1,500
deaeration, and magnetic drain plug. (Nm) rpm rpm
Filtration Alternator: volts -
12 - 160 12 - 160
 One, 7 – micron filter inside hydraulic reservoir, ac­ amps
cessible for easy replacement Crankcase Capac­
19 (18) 19 (18)
 One, 7 – micron charge filter next to the reservoir with ity: qt (L)
an in – cab indicator light  Water/fuel separator w/ heater and water in fuel (WIF) sensor
 One suction strainer inside the hydraulic reservoir  120-volt block heater - Tier 4f / Stage IV
“Fine inching” Mode - Special fine metering settings,  220-volt block heater - Tier 3 / Stage IIIA
selectable from the LCD, allows very slow movements  Grid heater - 200 amp
to the main and auxiliary winches, boom hoist, and  Mechanically driven, variable speed, engine controlled, viscous
fan clutch
swing for precision work.  (1) Can only be sold and/or operated where Tier 4f/Stage IV
Counterbalance Valves - Boom extend cylinder and off-highway emission standards are accepted.
boom hoist cylinder are equipped with counterbalance  (2) Can only be sold and/or operated where Tier 3/Stage IIIA
valves to provide load lowering and prevents accidental off-highway emission standards are accepted.
load drop when hydraulic power is suddenly reduced.
Hydraulic Oil Cooler - Mounted on right side above
telescoping valve. Removes heat from the hydraulic oil.

Boom Hoist Float Valves - For transporting the boom

over the rear of the crane with a boom dolly. Allows
hydraulic oil within the boom hoist cylinder to flow
between piston side and case side.
Swing Brake Release Valve - For transporting the
boom over the rear of the crane with a boom dolly.
Holds the 360° swing park brake in the released posi­
tion allowing free rotation of the upper structure.

J Pump Drive
All pumps are mechanically driven by the diesel engine.

J Fuel Tank
One 58 gal (219.5L) capacity aluminum diesel tank.
One 5 gal (18.9L) capacity diesel exhaust fluid (DEF)
plastic tank.

ï
J Load Hoist System
Load Hoist Performance
Main (Front) and Auxiliary (Rear) Winches - 22mm (7/8 in) Rope
Maximum Line Normal Line
Pull Speed High Line Speed Layer Total
Layer lb kN ft/min m/min ft/min m/min ft m ft m
1 22,510 100.13 131 39.9 262 79.9 125 38.1 125 38.1
2 20,309 90.34 145 44.2 291 88.7 138 42.0 263 80.1
3 18,501 82.30 160 48.8 319 97.2 152 46.3 414 126.1
4 16,989 75.57 174 53.0 348 106.0 165 50.3 579 176.5
5 15,705 69.86 188 57.3 376 114.6 179 54.6 758 231.0
6 14,601 64.95 202 61.5 405 123.4 192 58.5 950 289.5
Maximum
Wire Rope Diameter
Type Permissible Load
Application
in mm lb kN
Main Standard 7/8 22 34x7 rotation resistant - right regular lay (Type ZB) 20,920 93.05
(Front) Winch Optional 7/8 22 4 strand, low torque - right regular lay (Type GC) 29,700 132.11
Optional 7/8 22 34x7 rotation resistant - right regular lay (Type YB) 21,680 96.43
Auxiliary Standard 7/8 22 34x7 rotation resistant - right regular lay (Type ZB) 20,920 93.05
(Rear) Winch Optional 7/8 22 4 strand, low torque - right regular lay (Type GC) 29,700 132.11
Optional 7/8 22 34x7 rotation resistant - right regular lay (Type YB) 21,680 96.43

2M Main (Front) and Optional Auxiliary
(Rear) Winches
 Axial piston, full and half displacement (2­speed) mo­
tors driven through planetary reduction unit for posit­
ive control under all load conditions
 Grooved lagging
 Power up/down mode of operation
 Hoist drum cable followers - optional
 Drum rotation indicators
 Drum diameter: 15 in (38.1cm)
 Rope diameter: 22mm (0.875 in)
 Rope length:
 Main (Front) 950 ft (289.5m)
 Auxiliary (Rear) 725 ft (221m) or 950 ft (289.5m)
 Maximum rope storage: 951 ft (289.9m)
 Terminator style socket and wedge
J Counterweight
Standard - Total of 36,000 lbs (16.3t) of total counter­
weight consisting of two hydraulically removable coun­
terweights. Assembled and disassembled by hydraulic
cylinders controlled from the operator’s cab with capa­
cities for:
 0 lb (0t) counterweight
 14,000 lb (6.4t) counterweight
 36,000 lb (16.3t) counterweight
Optional - 44,000 lb (20.0t) in addition to standard
counterweight for a total of 80,000 lb (36.3t) counter­
weight for additional capacities for:
 58,000 lb (26.3t) counterweight
 80,000 lb (36.3t) counterweight
Optional - 79,500 lb (36.1t) in addition to standard
counterweight for a total of 115,500 lbs (52.4t) counter­
weight for additional capacities for:
 58,000 lb (26.3t) counterweight
 80,000 lb (36.3t) counterweight
 102,000 lb (46.3t) counterweight
 115,500 lbs (52.4t) counterweight
Optional - 120,500 lb (54.7t) in addition to standard
counterweight for a total of 156,500 lbs (71.t) counter­
weight for additional capacities for:
 58,000 lb (26.3t) counterweight
 80,000 lb (36.3t) counterweight
 102,000 lb (46.3t) counterweight
 115,500 lbs (52.4t) counterweight
 156,500 lbs (71.0t) counterweight*
Low speed jobsite travel is offered for all counterweight
configurations and a boom dolly or boom trailer may be
required for on­highway travel.
*Overall width of the crane increases to 15 ft 2 in
(4.6m).

ï
 13,500 lb
(6.1t)
Top Tray

20,500 lb
(9.3t)
2 Pieces

22,000 lb
(10.0t)
4 Pieces

14,000 lb
(6.4t)
Bottom Tray

36,000 lb (16.3t) -
Standard

Counterweight 80,000 lb (36.3t) - Optional

Packages
115,500 lb (52.4t) - Optional
156,500 lb (71.0t) - Optional

Counterweight 14,000 lb 22,000 lb 22,000 lb 22,000 lb (22,000 lb 13,500 lb 20,500lb

(6.4t) (10t) (10t) (10t) (10t) (6.1t) (9.3t)
Modules Bottom Tray piece piece piece Piece Top Tray 2-Piece
0 lb
(0t)
14,000 lb
(6.4t) X
36,000 lb
(16.3t) X X
58,000 lb
Counterweight (26.3t) X X X
Usage
Configurations 80,000 lb
(36.3t) X X X X
102,000 lb
(46.3t) X X X X X
115,500 lb
(52.4t) X X X X X X
156,500 lb
(71.0t) X X X X X X X

ï
Carrier
J General Off Road (Auxiliary) Steering Modes - Four inde­
 9 ft 10 in (3.0m) wide pendent modes consisting of:
 28 ft 9 in (8.76m) wheel base (centerline of first axle to  All Wheel: Axles 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5
centerline of fifth axle)  Diagonal (Crab): Axles 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5
 Frame - Box – type, torsion resistant, welded con­  Independent Rear: Axles 3, 4, and 5
struction made of high tensile steel. Equipped with  Drive Away From Walls: Temporary crab
front and rear tie – down lugs and access ladders. The front, all wheel, and diagonal (crab) steering
modes are controlled from the steering wheel and are
J Outriggers selected by controls in the driver’s cab. Switches in the
driver’s cab control the rear steering mode through the
Boxes - Two double box, front and rear welded to the steering module display.
carrier frame
 Emergency Steering - A pump is flange­mounted to
Beams and Jacks - Four dual stage beams with Con­
fined Area Lifting Capacities (CALC) provide selectable the transmission and provides hydraulic pressure to
outrigger extensions of full, intermediate, and retracted the steering circuit as long as the crane is in motion
positions. Jacks with integral check valves, hydraulic­  Drive - 10 x 6 for on/off-highway travel
ally controlled from the operator’s cab and on both  Axle 1 - Steered, driven
sides of the carrier. A fifth front bumper outrigger, 16 in  Axle 2 - Steered
(40.64cm) with integral check valves hydraulically con­  Axle 3 - Steered
trolled from the operator’s cab, both sides of carrier,  Axle 4 - Steered, driven
and at the front bumper of carrier.  Axle 5 - Steered, driven
Pontoons  Inter-Axle Differential Lock - Traction aiding
 Main - Four stow'n go, 22.25” (56.52cm) square steel device that locks axles 1, 4, and 5. Operated by a
pontoons with a contact area of 385 in2 (2 483.8cm2)
switch in the carrier cab.
can be stored for road travel under the outrigger boxes
 Front Bumper - One, lightweight, self-storing, 16”  Transverse (Cross-Axle) Differential Locks - Trac­
(40.6cm) diameter steel pontoon with a contact area tion aiding device that locks differentials within axles
of 201 in2 (1 296cm2) 1, 4, and 5. Operated by a momentary switch in the
Outrigger Work Station Floodlights - LED Flood carrier cab.
lights are mounted at each outrigger beam and 5th
outrigger.
J Suspension
Jack Reaction Hydro – pneumatic, lockable with level adjustment and
 Main - 203,000 lb (903.0kN) force and 527 psi automatic ride height leveling. All axles have longitud­
inal and transverse trailing arms with leveling adjust­
(3 633.5kPa) ground bearing pressure. Consult
ment and lockable cylinders. The carrier can be raised
factory for base rating ground bearing pressure
and lowered by controls in the carrier cab that adjust
information. the suspension cylinders.
 Front Bumper - 76,000 lb (338.1kN) force and 378  Cylinder stroke: -4.5 in (-11.43cm)/+3.5 in
psi (2 606kPa) ground bearing pressure (8.89cm) at ride height
J Steering and Axles J Ground Control
 Sheppard full integral master gear/slave gear steering
system provides hydraulic assisted steering with Outrigger/Suspension Controls
mechanical link between steering wheel and wheels Environmentally sealed and ergonomically positioned,
On Highway (Primary) Steering Mode - Axles 3, 4, control stations located on both sides of the carrier with
and 5 will automatically steer in combination with axles controls for crane operations including:
1 and 2 based on travel speed:  Start and stop carrier engine
 Throttle carrier engine up and down
On-Highway (Primary)  Raise suspension on outriggers
Less than Greater than  Outrigger operation including:
18.6-31 mph
Speed 18.6 mph
(30-50km/h)
31 mph  Extends and retracts two beams together
(30km/h) (50km/h)  Extends and retracts all main jacks together
Axle 1 Steered Steered Steered  Extend and retract fifth (bumper) outrigger
Axle 2 Steered Steered Steered  Automatic leveling on outriggers
 Outrigger lighting
Axle 3 Steered Locked Locked
 Bubble level
Axle 4 Steered Locked Locked
Axle 5 Steered Steered Locked J Tires and Wheels
Standard - Ten (single) 525/80R25 tires on aluminum
disc wheels

ï
Optional - Ten (single) 445/95R25 tires on aluminum Main Pumps
disc wheels  Two section fixed displacement gear pump for 1st and
 Tire inflation kit - optional 2nd axle steering circuits, suspension, outriggers, and
 Spare tires and wheels - optional 3rd and 4th axle steering circuits
 One fixed displacement gear pump for 5th axle steer­
J Brakes ing circuit
Service - Air anti-lock (ABS) braking system. Disc  One fixed displacement piston pump for cooling fan
brakes on all wheel ends. Dual circuit compressed air circuit
system with air dryer.  Combined pump capacity of 66 gpm (249.8Lpm)
Parking/Emergency - Spring loaded type, acting on Hydraulic Reservoir - 57 gal (215.7L) capacity
3rd, 4th, and 5th axles automatically apply when air equipped with sight level gauge. Diffusers built in for
pressure drops below 40 psi (275kPa) in both circuits. deaeration.
Intarder - Hydrodynamic driveline brake that is integ­ Filtration - Two 10 micron, full flow return line filters.
ral to the transmission. Activated by a switch in the car­ All oil is filtered prior to return to reservoir. Accessible
rier cab and controlled by a lever on the steering for easy filter replacement.
column. J Engine
Traction Control - ABS activated traction control to
limit wheel slip of axles 2, 4, and 5. Specification Cummins ISX 15 Cummins QSX15
Emission
EPA2013(1) Tier 3/Stage IIIA(2)
J Central Lubrication System compliance level:
Maximum allowable
Automated lubrication unit that injects grease into the sulfur content of fuel 15 5,000
steering gear arms, steering knuckles, axle king pins, (PPM):
and suspension cylinders. Activated by a timer on the
ignition switch. Numbers of cylin­
6 6
ders
J Electrical Cycle 4 4
Battery - Three batteries provide 12 volt starting and Bore and Stroke: 5.39 x 6.65 5.39 x 6.65
inch (mm) (136.9x169) (136.9x169)
operation, easily accessible battery disconnects, and
Piston Displace­
battery jumping posts ment: in3 (cm3)
912 (14 945) 912 (14 945)
Lights 550 (410) @ 2,000 555 (413) @ 1,800
 Front lighting includes two main daytime running/ Max. Brake Horse­ rpm rpm
headlights, two high beam lights, two LED parking/ power: hp (kW) 564 (421) @ 1,700 520 (387) @ 2,100
directional indicators, and three LED cab marker rpm rpm
lights Peak Torque: ft lb 1,850 (2 508) @ 1,744 (2 364) @
 Side lighting includes four parking/directional indicat­ (Nm) 1,200 rpm 1,400 rpm
ors per side Alternator: volts -
12 - 160 12 - 160
 LED Rear lighting includes two parking/directional amps
indicators, two parking/brake lights, two reverse Crankcase Capac­
48 (45.4) 48 (45.4)
ity: qt (L)
lights, three marker lights, and a license plate light
 Other equipment includes hazard/warning system,  Cruise control
cab LED light, instrument panel light, signal horn, two  Cummins ISX Three stage engine compression brake
outrigger LED lights on each side, and 5th outrigger  Thermostatically controlled, hydraulically driven radiator fan
 120 volt engine block heater - ISX
light
 Ether injection system - optional on ISX
 One amber strobe beacon on top of the cab  Grid heater starting aid standard on QSX

J Transmission 
220 volt engine block heater - QSX
Cummins QSX Two stage compression brake
Main Transmission - Automated - ZF AS-Tronic (no (1) Can only be sold and/or operated where EPA2013 on-
clutch pedal) manual transmission with 12 forward highway
gears and 2 reverse gears. emission standards are accepted.
(2) Can only be sold and/or operated where Tier 3/Stage IIIA
Auxiliary Transmission - Air actuated manual trans­ off-
mission with high/low range highway emission standards are accepted.

J Fuel Tank J Pump Drive

 One 95 gal (359.6L) capacity aluminum fuel tank
 One 10 gal (37.8L) capacity diesel exhaust fluid (DEF)
plastic fuel tank
J Hydraulic System
All functions are hydraulically powered allowing posit­
ive, precise control with independent or simultaneous
operation of all functions.
 Engine fan, outriggers, steering, and suspension
pumps mounted to the back of engine
 Rear steering pump mounted to back of air com­
pressor
 Ground driven pump mounted to back of transmis­
sion

ï30
J Carrier Speeds and Gradeability
Gradeability
ZF AS-Tronic Transmission Speed (@ peak torque Except
Creep @ Idle)

High Range Low Range

% Grade
Gear Ratio (0.804) (1.781)
mph km/h mph km/h Min. Max.
12th 0.78 62.00 99.78 26.33 42.37 1.51 5.20
11th 1.00 45.50 73.23 20.54 33.06 2.46 6.95
10th 1.27 35.83 57.66 16.17 26.02 3.51 9.06
9th 1.62 28.09 45.21 12.68 20.41 4.81 11.78
8th 2.10 21.67 34.87 9.78 15.74 6.54 15.49
7th 2.69 16.91 27.21 7.64 12.30 8.63 20.04
6th 3.56 12.78 20.57 5.77 9.29 11.68 26.75
5th 4.57 9.96 16.03 4.49 7.23 15.20 34.52
4th 5.78 7.87 12.67 3.55 5.71 19.42 43.84
3rd 7.41 6.14 9.88 2.77 4.46 25.09 56.38
2nd 9.59 4.74 7.63 2.14 3.44 27.01 60.61
1st 12.29 3.70 5.95 1.67 2.69 26.87 60.29
Reverse (1) 11.38 4.00 6.44 1.80 6.13 26.90 60.36
Reverse (2) 8.88 5.12 8.24 2.31 7.85 27.03 60.66
1st @ 700 rpm 12.29 1.30 2.09 0.58 0.93
Reverse (1) @ 11.38 1.40 2.25 0.63 1.01
700 rpm
Reverse (2) @ 8.88 1.79 2.88 0.81 1.30
700 rpm
Based on a gross vehicle weight of 136,000 lb (61 688.5kg) using 525/80R25 tires

ï31
J Lower Cab and Controls Indicator Lights
 Regeneration inhibit(1)
Environmental Cab - Fully enclosed, one person cab  Check engine
of composite structure with acoustical insulation.  Stop engine
Equipped with:  Exhaust regeneration(1)
 Tinted and tempered glass windows  High exhaust temperature(1)
 Roll down left side window for ventilation  Wait to start
 Intermittent windshield wiper and washer  Malfunction indicator lamp(1)
 Six way adjustable and air suspended driver's seat  Engine air filter high restriction light
with seat belt  Cruise
 Two heated and electrically adjustable side view mir­  Park brake
rors  ABS
 Engine dependent warm-water heater with air ducts  Trailer ABS
for windshield defroster and cab floor  Steer computer
 Adjustable sun visor  Steer pump
 LED dome light  Steer hydraulic oil level
 Fire extinguisher  Transaxle (cross-axle) differential lock
Air Conditioning - Integral with cab heating system  Inter-axle differential lock
utilizing the same ventilation outlets  Transfer case
Overhead Console - Located above the sun visor  Travel mode
 Document storage unit  Ride height
 AM/FM Radio  Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) level(1)
 Strobe beacon switch  Seat belt
Camera Display - Located on dash console:  Traction control
 Displays right side of machine Diagnostic Screens
 Displays rear view  Engine
Power Panel - Sealed power panel behind carrier cab  After treatment
containing:  Suspension/Outriggers
 Main circuit breakers & relays  Intarder
 Rear steer modules Right Side Console - Controls and indicators for:
 ABS modules  Transmission gear shifting
 12/24 volt convertor  Transmission digital readout
Cab Instrumentation - Ergonomically positioned in­  Cruise controls
strumentation for driving including:  Engine compression brake controls
 Speedometer with odometer, hour meter, trip meter,  Steering electronic control panel
and clock  Console dimmer switch
 Tachometer  Auxiliary transmission range selector switch
 Front and rear system air pressure with warning indic­  Intarder on/off switch
ator  Diesel particulate filter switch(1)
 Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) level with warning indicat­  Regeneration inhibit switch(1)
or(1)  Fan override switch
Dash Mounted Controls For:  ABS Traction control switch
 Carrier lights  Transaxle (cross-axle) differential lock switch with
indicator light
 Console dimmer switch
 Remote mirror control switches  Inter-axle differential lock switch with indicator light
 Travel mode switch
 Mirror heating switch
 Front axles (axles 1 & 2) suspension height switch
 Cab heater/air conditioning switch
 Fresh/Recirculation air switch  Rear axles (axles 3-5) suspension height switch
 Ride height switch
 Park brake air valve
 Trailer brake air valve  2/12 volt accessory outlet (switched & unswitched)
 Carrier engine ignition switch Steering Column Controls For:
 Turn signal switch
Dash Mounted Indicators For:  High beam switch
 Turn signal indication  Steering wheel adjustments
 High beam headlights  Warning horn
Right Side Diagonal LCD Display - Ergonomically  Hazard light switch
positioned on the right of driver's dash panel, digital  Intarder brake control lever
instrumentation and indicators for crane operations in­  Intermittent windshield wiper and washer
cluding: Foot Controls For:
Gauges  Carrier service brakes
 Engine water temperature  Engine throttle
 Engine oil pressure
 Fuel level (1) (EPA 2013 engine only)
 Voltmeter

ï3
Fuse & Diagnostic Center - Located inside cab be­ J Additional Equipment
hind seat contains:
Standard:
 Fuses, Relays
 Aluminum full deck fenders with mud flaps
 Control Modules
 One right side aluminum storage box with ladder
 Diagnostic ports
 Air hose connection ports
 Suspension diagnostic
 Clearance flags
 Engine diagnostic
 ABS Diagnostic  Front and rear anchor shackles
 Cab display diagnostic  Pneumatic and electrical quick disconnect connec­
 Intrader Diagnostic tions mounted to the rear for trailer or boom dolly
 Transmission Diagnostic brakes and lights
 Steering Diagnostic Optional:
 Rear mounted pintle hook
 Boom removal kit

ï33
Axle Loads - English
Gross
Vehicle
Axle 1 Axle 2 Axle 3 Axle 4 Axle 5
Weight
Base crane with full tanks of fuel and no counterweight (1)
lb lb lb lb lb lb
134,077 27,175 26,724 26,331 27,015 26,831
Driver in carrier cab 250 177 177 ­34 ­34 ­34
Remove pontoons ­431 ­15 ­15 ­134 ­134 ­134
Ether injector 5 4 4 ­1 ­1 ­1
Rear pintle hook 44 ­13 ­13 23 23 23
16.00R25 (445/95R25) tires (instead of standard) ­1,008 ­202 ­202 ­202 ­202 ­202
Carrier cab strobe light 5 4 4 ­1 ­1 ­1
Hoist drum follower ­ main 96 ­25 ­25 49 49 49
Auxiliary winch with 725 ft (221m) of 7/8" (22mm) wire rope 3,205 ­988 ­988 1,727 1,727 1,727
Remove auxiliary winch with 725 ft (221m) of 7/8" (22mm) wire rope ­2,923 925 925 ­1,591 ­1,591 ­1,591
Hoist drum follower ­ auxiliary 96 ­36 ­36 56 56 56
Remove 950 ft (289.5m) of wire rope from front (main) winch ­1,454 334 334 ­707 ­707 ­707
Remove 725 ft (221mm) of wire rope from rear (auxiliary) winch ­1,109 303 303 ­572 ­572 ­572
Substitute 725 ft (221mm) of rope with 950 ft (289.5m) of rope ­ rear
344 ­94 ­94 177 177 177
(auxiliary)
Substitute 950 ft (289.5m) of rope with 725 ft (221m) of rope ­ front
­344 79 79 ­167 ­167 ­167
(main)
360° mechanical swing lock 151 ­52 ­52 85 85 85
Boom launching option 77 ­10 ­10 32 32 32
Floodlight to the front of the boom base section 7 5 5 ­1 ­1 ­1
Fy mounting brackets to boom base section for fly options 309 145 145 6 6 6
12 ft (3.65m) manual and hydraulically offsettable, lattice fly ­
2,340 1,755 1,755 ‐390 ‐390 ‐390
stowed
12­40 ft (3.65­12.2m) manual and hydraulically offsettable,
3,879 2,177 2,177 ­158 ­158 ­158
two­piece (bi­fold) lattice fly ­ stowed
12­40­67 ft (3.65­12.2­20.4m) manual and hydraulically offsettable,
5,062 2,425 2,425 71 71 71
three­piece (bi­fold) lattice fly ­ stowed
Additional components for hydraulically offsettable fly 422 211 211 0 0 0
Auxiliary lifting sheave 112 102 102 ­31 ­31 ­31
40 ton (36.3mt) 1 sheave hook block at front bumper 1,450 1,138 1,138 ­275 ­275 ­275
66 ton (60mt) 3 sheave hook block at front bumper 1,900 1,491 1,491 ­360 ­360 ­360
100 ton (91mt) 5 sheave hook block at front bumper 2,250 1,765 1,765 ­427 ­427 ­427
140 ton (127mt) 7 sheave hook block at front bumper 2,850 2,236 2,236 ­541 ­541 ­541
200 ton (181mt) 10 sheave hook block at front bumper 3,200 2,511 2,511 ­607 ­607 ­607
12 ton (10.9mt) hookball at front bumper 722 566 566 ­137 ­137 ­137

(1) Adjust gross vehicle weight and axle loading according to component weight. All weights are ±3%.

Tire Maximum Axle Load @ 50 mph Average Speed

20.5R25 (525/80R25) on aluminum disc wheels 28,004 lb
16.00R25 (445/95R25) on aluminum disc wheels 29,224 lb

ï3
Axle Loads - Metric
Gross
Vehicle Axle 1 Axle 2 Axle 3 Axle 4 Axle 5
Base crane with full tanks of fuel and no counterweight Weight(1)
kg kg kg kg kg kg
60 816 12 327 12 122 11 944 12 254 12 170
Driver in carrier cab 113 80 80 ­16 ­16 ­16
Remove pontoons ­195 ­7 ­7 ­61 ­61 ­61
Ether injector 2 2 2 0 0 0
Rear pintle hook 20 ­6 ­6 11 11 11
16.00R25 (445/95R25) tires (instead of standard) ­457 ­91 ­91 ­91 ­91 ­91
Carrier cab strobe light 2 2 2 0 0 0
Hoist drum follower ­ main 44 ­11 ­11 22 22 22
Auxiliary winch with 725 ft (221m) of 7/8" (22mm) wire rope 1 454 ­448 ­448 783 783 783
Remove auxiliary winch with 725 ft (221m) of 7/8" (22mm) wire rope ­1 326 419 419 ­722 ­722 ­722
Hoist drum follower ­ auxiliary 44 ­16 ­16 25 25 25
Remove 950 ft (289.5m) of wire rope from front (main) winch ­659 151 151 ­321 ­321 ­321
Remove 725 ft (221m) of wire rope from rear (auxiliary) winch ­503 137 137 ­259 ­259 ­259
Substitute 725 ft (221m) of rope with 950 ft (289.5m) of rope ­ rear
156 ­43 ­43 80 80 80
(auxiliary)
Substitute 950 ft (289.5m) of rope with 725 ft (221m) of rope ­ front
­156 36 36 ­76 ­76 ­76
(main)
360° mechanical swing lock 69 ­23 ­23 39 39 39
Boom launching option 35 ­5 ­5 15 15 15
Floodlight to the front of the boom base section 3 2 2 ­1 ­1 ­1
Fy mounting brackets to boom base section for fly options 140 66 66 3 3 3
12 ft (3.65m) manual and hydraulically offsettable, lattice fly ­
1 061 796 796 ­177 ­177 ­177
stowed
12­40 ft (3.65­12.2m) manual and hydraulically offsettable,
1 759 987 987 ‐72 ­72 ­72
two­piece (bi­fold) lattice fly ­ stowed
12­40­67 ft (3.65­12.2­20.4m) manual and hydraulically offsettable,
2 296 1 100 1 100 32 32 32
three­piece (bi­fold) lattice fly ­ stowed
Additional components for hydraulically offsettable fly 192 96 96 0 0 0
Auxiliary lifting sheave 51 46 46 ­14 ­14 ­14
40 ton (36.3mt) 1 sheave hook block at front bumper 658 516 516 -125 -125 ­125
66 ton (60mt) 3 sheave hook block at front bumper 862 676 676 ­164 ­164 ­164
100 ton (91mt) 5 sheave hook block at front bumper 1 021 801 801 ­194 ­194 ­194
140 ton (127mt) 7 sheave hook block at front bumper 1 293 1 014 1 014 ­245 ­245 ­245
200 ton (181mt) 10 sheave hook block at front bumper 1 451 1 139 1 139 ­275 ­275 ­275
12 ton (10.9mt) hookball at front bumper 327 257 257 ­62 ­62 ­62

(1) Adjust gross vehicle weight and axle loading according to component weight. All weights are ±3%.

Tire Maximum Axle Load @ 80.5kph Average Speed

20.5R25 (525/80R25) on aluminum disc wheels 12 702.4kg
16.00R25 (445/95R25) on aluminum disc wheels 13 255.8kg

ï3
Axle Loads with 2-Axle or 3-Axle Boom Dolly
(3rd Axle Down) - English
Gross
Vehicle Axle 1 Axle 2 Axle 3 Axle 4 Axle 5 Dolly
Base crane with full tanks of fuel and no Weight(1)
counterweight
lb lb lb lb lb lb lb
134,077 20,628 20,176 21,692 22,376 22,191 27,015
Nelson 2 ­ axle boom dolly (2) 6,600 0 0 0 0 0 6,600
Nelson 3 ­ axle boom dolly (2) 9,400 0 0 0 0 0 9,400
Driver in carrier cab 250 177 177 ­34 ­34 ­34 0
Remove pontoons ­431 ­15 ­15 ­134 ­134 ­134 0
Ether injector 5 4 4 ­1 ­1 ­1 0
Rear pintle hook 44 ­13 ­13 23 23 23 0
16.00R25 (445/95R25) tires (instead of standard) ­1,008 ­202 ­202 ­202 ­202 ­202 0
Carrier cab strobe light 5 4 4 ­1 ­1 ­1 0
Hoist drum follower ­ main 96 30 30 12 12 12 0
Auxiliary winch with 725 ft (221m) of 7/8" (22mm) wire
3,205 1,168 1,168 290 290 290 0
rope
Remove auxiliary winch with 725 ft (221m) of 7/8"
­2,923 ­1,089 ­1,089 ­248 ­248 ­248 0
(22mm) wire rope
Hoist drum follower ­ auxiliary 96 41 41 4 4 4 0
Remove 950 ft (289.5m) of wire rope from front (main)
­1,454 ­416 ­416 ­207 ­207 ­207 0
winch
Remove 725 ft (221m) of wire rope from rear (auxiliary)
­1,109 ­365 ­365 ­126 ­126 ­126 0
winch
Substitute 725 ft (221m) of rope with 950 ft (289.5m) of
344 113 113 39 39 39 0
rope ­ rear (auxiliary)
Substitute 950 ft (289.5m) of rope with 725 ft (221m) of
­344 ­98 ­98 ­49 ­49 ­49 0
rope ­ front (main)
360° mechanical swing lock 151 60 60 10 10 10 0
Boom launching option 77 ­10 ­10 32 32 32 0
Floodlight to the front of the boom base section 7 0 0 0 0 0 7
Fy mounting brackets to boom base section for fly op­
298 21 21 16 16 16 210
tions
12 ft (3.65m) manual and hydraulically offsettable, lat­
2,340 ­30 ­30 ­23 ­23 ­23 2,469
tice fly ­ stowed
12­40 ft (3.65­12.2m) manual and hydraulically offset­
3,879 145 145 110 110 110 3,260
table, two­piece (bi­fold) lattice fly ­ stowed
12­40­67 ft (3.65­12.2­20.4m) manual and hydraulically
5,062 300 300 227 227 227 3,782
offsettable, three­piece (bi­fold) lattice fly ­ stowed
Additional components for hydraulically offsettable fly 422 23 23 17 17 17 326
Auxiliary lifting sheave 112 ­6 ­6 ­5 ­5 ­5 139
40 ton (36.3mt) 1 sheave hook block at boom head 1,450 ­67 ­67 ­51 ­51 ­51 1,735
66 ton (60mt) 3 sheave hook block at boom head 1,900 ­88 ­88 ­66 ­66 ­66 2,274
100 ton (91mt) 5 sheave hook block at boom head 2,250 ­104 ­104 ­78 ­78 ­78 2,693
140 ton (127mt) 7 sheave hook block at boom head 2,850 ­131 ­131 ­99 ­99 ­99 3,411
12 ton (10.9mt) hookball at boom head 722 ­33 ­33 ­25 ­25 ­25 864

(1) Adjust gross vehicle weight and axle loading according to component weight. All weights are ±3%.
(2) Weights may vary.

Tire Maximum Axle Load @ 50 mph Average Speed

20.5R25 (525/80R25) on aluminum disc wheels 28,004 lb
16.00R25 (445/95R25) on aluminum disc wheels 29,224 lb

ï3
Axle Loads with 2-Axle or 3-Axle Boom Dolly
(3rd Axle Down) - Metric
Gross
Vehicle Axle 1 Axle 2 Axle 3 Axle 4 Axle 5 Dolly
Base crane with full tanks of fuel and no Weight(1)
counterweight
kg kg kg kg kg kg kg
60 816 9 357 9 152 9 839 10 149 10 065 12 254
Nelson 2 ­ axle boom dolly (2) 994 0 0 0 0 0 2 994
Nelson 2 ­ axle boom dolly (2) 4 264 0 0 0 0 0 4 264
Driver in carrier cab 113 80 80 ­15 ­15 ­15 0
Remove pontoons ­195 ­7 ­7 ­61 ­61 ­61 0
Ether injector 2 2 2 0 0 0 0
Rear pintle hook 20 ­6 ­6 10 10 10 0
16.00R25 (445/95R25) tires (instead of standard) ­457 ­92 ­92 ­92 ­92 ­92 0
Carrier cab strobe light 2 2 2 0 0 0 0
Hoist drum follower ­ main 44 14 14 5 5 5 0
Auxiliary winch with 725 ft (221m) of 7/8" (22mm) wire
1 454 530 530 131 131 131 0
rope
Remove auxiliary winch with 725 ft (221m) of 7/8"
­1 326 ­494 ­494 ­112 ­112 ­112 0
(22mm) wire rope
Hoist drum follower ­ auxiliary 44 19 19 2 2 2 0
Remove 950 ft (289.5m) of wire rope from front (main)
­660 ­189 ­189 ­94 ­94 ­94 0
winch
Remove 725 ft (221m) of wire rope from rear (auxiliary)
­503 ­166 ­166 ­57 ­57 ­57 0
winch
Substitute 725 ft (221m) of rope with 950 ft (289.5m) of
156 51 51 18 18 18 0
rope ­ rear (auxiliary)
Substitute 950 ft (289.5m) of rope with 725 ft (221m) of
­156 ­44 ­44 ­22 ­22 ­22 0
rope ­ front (main)
360° mechanical swing lock 68 27 27 5 5 5 0
Boom launching option 35 ­5 ­5 15 15 15 0
Floodlight to the front of the boom base section 3 0 0 0 0 0 3
Fy mounting brackets to boom base section for fly op­
135 10 10 7 7 7 95
tions
12 ft (3.65m) manual and hydraulically offsettable, lat­
1 061 ­14 ­14 ­10 ­10 ­10 1 120
tice fly ­ stowed
12­40 ft (3.65­12.2m) manual and hydraulically offset­
1 759 66 66 50 50 50 1 479
table, two­piece (bi­fold) lattice fly ­ stowed
12­40­67 ft (3.65­12.2­20.4m) manual and hydraulically
2 296 136 136 103 103 103 1 715
offsettable, three­piece (bi­fold) lattice fly ­ stowed
Additional components for hydraulically offsettable fly 192 10 10 8 8 8 148
Auxiliary lifting sheave 51 ­3 ­3 ­2 ­2 ­2 63
40 ton (36.3mt) 1 sheave hook block at boom head 658 30 30 23 23 23 787
66 ton (60mt) 3 sheave hook block at boom head 862 ­40 ­40 ­30 ­30 ­30 1 031
100 ton (91mt) 5 sheave hook block at boom head 1 021 ­47 ­47 ­35 ­35 ­35 1 222
140 ton (127mt) 7 sheave hook block at boom head 1 293 ­59 ­59 ­45 ­45 ­45 1 547
12 ton (10.9mt) hookball at boom head 327 ­15 ­15 ­11 ­11 ­11 392

(1) Adjust gross vehicle weight and axle loading according to component weight. All weights are ±3%.
(2) Weights may vary.
Tire Maximum Axle Load @ 80.5kph Average Speed
20.5R25 (525/80R25) on aluminum disc wheels 12 702.4kg
16.00R25 (445/95R25) on aluminum disc wheels 13 255.8kg

ï3
General Dimensions
53' 1.06” (16.18m)
Overall Length With Counterweight
52' 9.2” (16.08m)
Overall Length With Rear Winch
50' 7.82” (15.44m)
Overall Length With Front Winch 15' 5.81”
(4.72m)
10' 8.44”
(3.26m)
CL Of Rotation 8' 6.63” (2.61m)

5°

12' 11.32”
(3.94m)
6' 7.77” 6' 2.05”
(2.03m) (1.88m)

20°
21°

1' 3.67” 1' 2.” 2' 2.7”

1' 4.3” (0.40m) 12' (0.36m) (0.68m)
(0.41m) 11' 6”
(3.66m) (3.51m)
9' 1.73” 5' 4” 12' 9.01” 5' 4” 5' 4” 6' 8”
(2.91m) (1.62m) (3.89m) (1.62m) (1.62m) (2.03m)
44' 6.73”
(13.58m)

20.5R25 16.00R25
Turning Radius
English Metric English Metric
Wall to wall over carrier 42' 0” 12.8m 41”.6” 12.6m
Wall to wall over boom 42' 6” 12.9m 42' 2” 12.8m
Wall to wall over boom attachment 44' 11” 13.7m 44' 6” 13.5m
1' 10.5” Curb to curb 37' 1” 11.3m 36' 3” 11.04m
(0.57m)
Centerline of tire 36' 2” 11.0m 35' 6” 10.8m

Tail Swing English Metric

With auxiliary winch 16' 11” 5.1m
Without auxiliary winch 14' 8” 4.7m
8' 9.5” With Counterweight 17' 1” 5.21m
(2.68m)
Fully Retracted Overall Width English Metric

18' 6.5” 1' 0.39” With 14,000 lb (6 350kg) counterweight 9' 10” 3.0m
(5.65m) (0.31m) With 36,000-115,000 lb (16 329-52 390kg) counterweight 10' 3” 3.1m
Intermediate Extended With 156,500 lb (70 987kg) counterweight 15' 2” 4.6m
26' 6”
(8.08m)
Fully Extended

67' 5.68”
(20.56m) 1' 9.6”
(0.55m)
39' 6.12” (12.04m)
Front Dolly Connection
33' 5.75” (10.20m)
Rear Dolly Connection

7' 0.43” 13' 3.69”

(2.15m) (4.06m)

Not To Scale

ï3
 Operator's Manual
Table Of Contents
Fundamental Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Section 6 - Fundamental Terms i

Operator's Manual

ii Section 6 - Fundamental Terms


Fundamental Terms
Many terms are used which refer to crane function, as­
sembly, operation, and maintenance. The following list
gives a brief definition as to how the terms are used in
this Operator's Manual and how they fit this particular
crane.
Accumulator: A container in which fluid is stored un­
der pressure as a source of hydraulic energy.
Aeration: The condition when air is present in the hy­
draulic fluid. This causes the fluid to appear milky and
components to operate erratically because of the com­
pressibility of air trapped in the fluid.
Anemometer: An instrument for measuring the direc­
tion and force, or velocity, of the wind; a wind gauge.
Annually: Once a year.
Anti‐Two Block System: A system of electromechani­
cal devices used to alert or prevent the crane operator
from two blocking the crane. See “Two Block”.
ATC: All terrain crane. Used on and off highway.
Attachment: The boom assembly, offset fly section(s),
auxiliary lifting sheave, or a combination of these.
Audio/Visual Warning System: 1. Alarm device that
signals the operator of low engine oil pressure, high en­
gine coolant temperature, and high hydraulic oil and
transmission oil temperature. 2. Device utilizing buzzer
and/or lights as a signal of approaching two block and/
or overload condition. See “Rated Capacity Limiter”.
Automatic Brake: Drum brake system that is applied
automatically any time the drum control lever is in neu­
tral.
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave: A unit which connects to the
boom head machinery and is used for reeving winch
wire rope for a second (auxiliary) winch drum.
Backward Stability: Resistance to overturning of the
crane in rearward direction.
Base Section: The segment of the boom which at­
taches to the upper frame by the boom foot pin.
Boom: The assembly of the base, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5,
and T6 sections used as the telescoping extension.
Boom Angle: The angle above or below horizontal of
the longitudinal axis of the boom.
Boom Angle Indicator: An accessory which meas­
ures the angle of the boom relative to horizontal.
Boom Foot: Base of boom where it attaches to the up­
per revolving frame.
Boom Hoist: The hydraulic method of raising and low­
ering the boom to different boom angles.
Section 6 - Fundamental Terms
Operator's Manual
Boom Length: The straight line through the centerline
of the boom foot pin to the centerline of the boom head
sheave shaft, measured along the longitudinal axis of
the boom.
Boom Section: The base, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, and T6
segments which are used as the telescoping exten­
sion.
Bumper (5th) Outrigger: An outrigger mounted on
the front of the carrier that provides additional stability
for all “On Outrigger” capacities.
Bypass: A secondary passage of fluid flow, in addition
to the main flow path.
Capacity Chart: The chart(s) in the Crane Rating
Manual in the crane which gives rated lifting capacities
for the crane under different load conditions.
Carrier: The portion of the crane below the turntable
bearing.
Carrier Cab: A housing which covers the driver's sta­
tion on the carrier of the crane.
Carrier Frame: The main structure of the carrier sec­
tion of the crane.
Cavitation: A condition where air is induced into a cav­
ity, line, or chamber normally filled with oil. This condi­
tion can cause damage to pumps, cylinder walls, etc.
Check Valve: A valve which permits flow in one direc­
tion only.
Circuit: A complete or partial path over which current
or fluid may flow.
Closed Center Circuit: The condition where the fluid
only flows through the main control valves when a con­
trol valve spool is actuated. This can be done two dif­
ferent ways: (1) using a pressure compensated pump,
or (2) using a fixed displacement pump, unloading
valve, and an accumulator.
Collector Ring (Slip Ring): A device used to transmit
the electrical power from the carrier to the upper utiliz­
ing a rotating disk to allow rotation of the upper and
maintain connectivity.
Compressibility: The change in volume of fluid when
it is subjected to a unit change in pressure.
Counterbalance Valve (Holding Valve): A valve
which regulated fluid flow by maintaining resistance in
one direction, but allows free flow in the other direction.
Counterweight: Weight used to supplement the
weight of the crane in providing stability for lifting loads.
Cracking Pressure: The pressure at which a pressure
actuated valve begins to open to allow flow.
6-1
Operator's Manual
Crane Configuration: The relative position and ar­
rangement of the parts or elements of the crane e.g.
amount of counterweight, attachment position, outrig­
ger position, etc.
Crane Rated Capacity: The maximum weight allowed
to be lifted with the crane setup in a particular crane
configuration.
Crane Rating Manual: A compilation of the necessary
information needed to plan lifts with the crane. It in­
cludes instructions such as the allowable lifting capac­
ity charts, Working Range Diagrams, Working Areas
Diagram, etc.
Crane Set Up: The act or instance of preparing the
crane for operation which entails the positioning of the
crane and its elements. It concerns such details or
items such as finding a suitable location to perform the
lift, setting the outrigger position, leveling, cribbing, or
blocking of the crane, etc.
Cylinder: A device which converts fluid power into me­
chanical force and motion. It usually consists of a
moveable element such as a piston and piston rod,
which operates within a cylindrical bore.
Delivery: The volume of fluid discharge by a pump in a
given time, usually expressed in gallons per minute
(gpm) or liters per minute (L/min).
Displacement: The quantity of fluid which can pass
through a pump, motor, or cylinder in a single revolu­
tion or stroke.
Double Acting Cylinder: A cylinder in which fluid
force can be applied in either direction.
Drum Lagging: See “Winch Drum”.
Drum Rotation Indicator: A device that is used to indi­
cate winch drum motion and can also be used to moni­
tor speed.
Filter: A device which functions to remove insoluble
contaminants from a fluid by a porous media.
Flow Divider: A valve which divides a flow of oil into
two streams.
Fly Base Section: Boom tip extension supported only
at its base.
Fly Center Section: The middle section of a three
piece fly.
Fly Extension: A fly section, other than the base, cen­
ter, or tip section, used to increase the overall length of
the fly.
Fly Tip Section: The outermost section of a two or
three piece fly.
Force: Any cause which tends to produce or modify
motion. In hydraulics, total force is expressed by the
6-2 Section 6 - Fundamental Terms
product of pressure (P) and the area of the surface (A)
on which the pressure acts. (Formula - F = P X A)
Frame: Structure on which either upper or carrier ma­
chinery is attached.
Freely Suspended Load: Load hanging free with no
direct external force applied except by the hoist line.
Friction: The property which tends to resist the relative
motion of one surface in contact with another surface.
It always exerts a “Drag” in the direction opposite of the
motion, thus consumes power.
Full Flow: In a filter, the condition where all the fluid
must pass through the filter element.
Full Load Speed: The speed at which an engine runs
when it is delivering its full rated horsepower.
Function Limiter (Function Lockout, Hydraulic Cut­
outs, Hydraulic Kickouts): Devices incorporated into
the anti‐two block system or rated capacity limiter sys­
tem which will disable the crane function of winch up,
telescope out, and/or boom down (as applicable) as
two block or overload situations approach.
Gradablity: The slope which a crane can climb ex­
pressed as a percentage (45° equals 100% slope).
Ground Pressure: Weight of crane divided by the area
of the surface directly supporting the crane.
Head Machinery: An arrangement of sheaves on the
end of an attachment used to reeve wire rope.
High Idle: Governed engine speed at full throttle and
no load.
Hoist: Function of lifting and lowering loads.
Hoist Drum: See “Winch Drum”.
Hoist Rope: The wire rope used to reeve the winch
and the attachments for lifting loads.
Holding Valve (Counterbalance Valve): A valve
which regulates fluid flow by maintaining resistance in
one direction, but allows free flow in the other direction.
Hook Ball: Ball with hook attached used in lifting serv­
ice. It is used with one part of line only.
Hook Block: Block with hook attached used in lifting
service. It may have a single sheave for two or three
part line, or multiple sheaves for four or more parts of
line.
Hydraulic Reservoir: The storage tank for hydraulic
fluid.
Instability: A “tipping condition” in which the mo­
ments acting to overturn a crane exceed the moments
acting to resist overturning.
LBCE: Link‐Belt Construction Equipment.

Lifting Capacity: The rated load for any given load ra­
dius and boom angle under specified operating condi­
tions.
Line Pull: The wire rope pull generated off a wire rope
drum or lagging at a specified pitch diameter.
Line Speed: The wire rope velocity at a wire rope drum
or lagging at a specified pitch diameter.
Load Factor: Load applied at the boom tip which gives
the same moment effect as the boom mass.
Load Indicator: A device for measuring and display­
ing the net load being lifted.
Load Line: Another term for “Hoist Rope”. In lifting
crane service it refers to the main hoist. The secondary
hoist is referred to as a “Whip Line”.
Load Radius: The horizontal distance from the center­
line of rotation of the upper to the center of gravity of a
suspended load.
Loaded Boom Angle: The angle between the boom
base section and horizontal with a freely suspended
load at the rated radius.
Mat: Support, usually of timber or wire construction,
for supporting the pontoons on soft surfaces where the
pontoon areas are not large enough to support the
load without settling.
Motor (Hydraulic): A rotary motion device which
changes hydraulic energy into mechanical energy, a
rotary actuator.
No Load Stability Limit: The radius or boom angle be­
yond which it is not permitted to position the boom be­
cause the crane can overturn without any load on the
hook.
Offset Fly: A hydraulic crane fly section that is capable
of being offset at different angles. The angles can be
changed manually or by use of hydraulic cylinders.
Oil Cooler: A heat exchanger used to remove heat
from the hydraulic or transmission fluid.
Open Center Circuit: A circuit where the pump con­
tinuously circulates fluid through the control valves
when they are in a neutral position.
Operational Aid: An accessory that provides informa­
tion to facilitate operation of a crane or that takes con­
trol of particular crane functions without action of the
operator when a limiting condition is sensed.
Operator's Cab (Upper Cab): A housing which cov­
ers the upper operator's station.
Outrigger: An extendable supporting device used to
level the crane and increase stability.
Section 6 - Fundamental Terms
Operator's Manual
Outrigger Beam: The part of the outrigger which ex­
tends horizontally and acts as the support for the out­
rigger jack.
Outrigger Jack: The hydraulic cylinder on the outrig­
ger beam that telescopes vertically to raise and lower
the crane.
Pick And Carry: The crane operation of lifting a load
and traveling with it suspended.
Pilot Pressure: Auxiliary pressure used to actuate or
control hydraulic components.
Pinion: The small gear in a gear train which drives the
other gears.
Pitch Diameter: Root diameter of a drum, lagging, or
sheave, plus the diameter of the wire rope.
Planetary: A set of gears used to either speed up or
slow down the input vs the output to gain speed or
power, whichever is applicable.
Platform: A device (basket, work platform, bucket,
cage, etc.) designed and fabricated with its intended
use being to position personnel.
Pontoon: The support which attaches to the outrigger
jack to increase the supporting area.
Poppet: A disc, ball, or cone shaped part of certain
valves, which when closed against a seat prevents
flow.
Port: The open end of a passage. May be within or at
the surface of a hydraulic component housing or body.
Pressure: Force per unit of area usually expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi) or Kilopascals (kPa).
Pressure Drop: The reduction in pressure between
two points in a line or passage due to the energy lost in
maintaining flow.
Pressure Reducing Valve: A valve which limits the
maximum pressure at its outlet regardless of the inlet
pressure.
Pump (Hydraulic): A device which converts mechani­
cal force and motion into hydraulic fluid power.
Radius: The horizontal distance from the centerline of
rotation of the crane, with no load, to the center of grav­
ity of the hook or suspended load.
Radius Of Load: The horizontal distance from the cen­
terline of rotation of the crane to the center of gravity of
the suspended load.
Rated Capacity Indicator (RCI): A device that auto­
matically monitors radius, load weight, and load rating
and warns the crane operator of an overload condition.
6-3
Operator's Manual
Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL): A device that automat­
ically monitors radius, load weight, and load rating and
prevents movements of the crane that would result in
an overload condition.
Reeving: Passing of wire ropes over pulleys or
sheaves.
Relief Valve: A pressure operated valve which by­
passes pump delivery to the reservoir, limiting system
pressure to a predetermined maximum valve.
Reservoir: A container for storage of fluid in a fluid
power system.
Restriction: A reduced cross‐sectional area in a line
which produces a pressure drop.
Rigging Switch (System Override Switch): A switch
which can be used to override any or all of the function
limiters (cutouts) which have been activated on the
crane during crane rigging/set up.
Rope: Refers to wire rope unless otherwise specified.
See “Wire Rope”.
Rotating Joint: Component which transfers fluid be­
tween a stationary and a rotating member.
Schematic: A diagram or representation of a system
showing everything in a simple way. No attempt is
made to show the various devices in their actual rela­
tive positions. A schematic points out the operation of
a circuit for troubleshooting purposes.
Seasonally: Four times per year.
Semiannually: Twice per year.
Service Brake: A foot operated brake which regulates
the amount of air or fluid delivered to the brake cham­
ber, which determines the braking force.
Shall: The word shall is to be understood as mandato­
ry.
Should: The word should is to be understood as advi­
sory.
Side Loading: A load applied at an angle to the vertical
plane of the boom.
Single Acting Cylinder: A cylinder in which fluid
power can only be used in one direction. Another force
must be used to return the cylinder.
Spool: Term applied to almost any moving cylindrically
shaped part of a hydraulic component which moves to
direct flow through the component.
Strainer: A filtering device for the removal of coarse
solids from a fluid.
6-4 Section 6 - Fundamental Terms
Stroke: The length of travel of a piston or spool.
Suction Line: The hydraulic line connecting the pump
inlet port to the hydraulic reservoir.
Sump Tank: See “Hydraulic Reservoir”.
Surge: A very sudden rise in hydraulic pressure in a
circuit.
Swing: The rotation of the upper with the carrier re­
maining stationary.
Swing Brake: A brake which is used to resist the rota­
tion of the upper during normal, stationary crane op­
erations.
Swing Lock: A mechanical lock that engages with the
upper frame in any position over the lower frame.
Swing Motor: Hydraulic device which uses a plane­
tary to rotate the upper on the carrier.
Swing Park Brake: A self contained brake used for
holding the upper, in any position, during normal, sta­
tionary crane operations.
System Override Switch: See “Rigging Switch”.
T1 Section: The segment of the boom that is attached
between the base and T2 sections.
T2 Section: The segment of the boom that attaches to
the T1 and T3 sections.
T3 Section: The segment of the boom which is at­
tached between the T2 and T4 sections.
T4 Section: The segment of the boom which is at­
tached between the T3 and T5 sections.
T5 Section: The segment of the boom which is at­
tached between the T4 and T6 sections.
T6 Section: The outer most segment of the telescopic
boom. It is attached to the T5 section and contains the
head machinery of the attachment.
Tailswing: The swing radius from the centerline of ro­
tation of the upper frame to the extreme rear edge of
the counterweight or most reward part of the upper.
Tip Section (Boom Tip Section): See “T6 Section”.
Torque: Turning or twisting force usually measured in
foot pounds (ft lb) or Newton meters (Nm).
Travel Swing Lock (2 Position Swing Lock): A me­
chanical lock that engages with the upper directly over
either the front or the rear of the carrier only. Use of the
travel swing lock is mandatory when traveling or trans­
porting the crane and during pick and carry operations.

Turntable Bearing: A large bearing which attaches
the upper to the carrier allowing the upper to rotate on
the carrier.
Two Block: The condition when the crane's hook
block, hook ball, any other load attachment means, or
the load itself, comes into contact with any of the at­
tachment's load sheaves or other physical entity on the
attachment.
Two Block Warning System: A system of electrome­
chanical devices used to warn the crane operator of an
impending two block condition.
Unloading Valve: A valve which by‐passes flow to
tank when a set pressure is maintained on its pilot port.
Upper: The portion of the crane above the turntable
bearing.
Upper Operator's Cab: See “Operator's Cab”.
Upper Revolving Frame: The main structure of the
upper section of the crane which serves as mounts for
other components in the upper section.
Valve: A device for controlling flow rate, flow direction,
or pressure of a fluid.
Viscosity: The resistance to flow. High viscosity indi­
cates a high resistance, low viscosity, a low resistance.
Section 6 - Fundamental Terms
Operator's Manual
Whip Line: Secondary hoist line. Also see “Load
Line”.
Winch: Function of lifting and lowering loads.
Winch Drum: A rotating cylindrical spool with side
flanges used to wrap the winch wire rope during the
raising and lowering with the winch.
Winch Rope: The wire rope used to reeve the winch
and the attachments for lifting loads.
Wire Rope: A flexible, multiwired member usually con­
sisting of a core member around which a number of
multiwired strands are helically wrapped.
Wiring Diagram: A diagram that includes all the de­
vices in an electrical system and shows their functional
relationships to each other. Such a diagram gives the
necessary information for actual wiring or physically
tracing circuits when troubleshooting is necessary.
Working Area: Area measured in a circular arc about
the centerline of rotation as shown on the Working
Areas Diagram.
Working Weight: Weight of crane with full radiator, half
full fuel tank, and attachments installed.
360° Swing Lock: A positive mechanical lock against
rotation of the upper over the carrier during normal, sta­
tionary crane operations.
6-5
Operator's Manual

6-6 Section 6 - Fundamental Terms

 ï
1
13 00
0 3ï3 00
0 ï 3ï 00

ELECTRONIC DATA RECORDER

REQUEST FORM

We, , hereby request

(Company Name)
Link­Belt Construction Equipment Company (LBCE) retrieve, interpret, and

provide a summary of the electronic data recovered from the computer system

installed by LBCE on model ___________________, with assigned serial

number __________________.

We request the following data be retrieved:

(Place check mark in box for information requested)
Engine Performance Data (engine temperature, engine speeds, fluid temperature,
etc.)
Operational Mode (computer set­up)
Boom Length
Boom Angle
Load Radius
Counterweight Configuration
Lifted Load(s)
Number of Lifts
Anti –Two Block (ATB) Status
Status
Other

Date(s) and Time Range(s) of data requested:

The time to reply to this inquiry will be three (3) weeks from the time the data is received by
the LBCE Technical Product Support Department in Lexington Kentucky. The reply time
may increase due to the amount of Data, and/or the Date and Time Range requested.

LBCE may assess a charge to provide the service of retrieve and interpretation of the data
requested, plus travel time that may be involved by an LBCE representative to retrieve the
data.

__________________________________ ___________
Requesting Company Representative Date

 ï